GFK-2314T RX3i SystemManual

User Manual
GFK-2314T
Sept. 2019
PACSystems* RX3i System Manual

Warnings and Caution Notes as Used in this Publication
WARNING
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be
associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning
notice is used.
CAUTION
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note: Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the
equipment.
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. The information is
supplied for informational purposes only, and Emerson Automation Solutions makes no warranty as to
the accuracy of the information included herein. Changes, modifications, and/or improvements to
equipment and specifications are made periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected
herein. It is understood that Emerson Automation Solutions may make changes, modifications, or
improvements to the equipment referenced herein or to the document itself at any time. This document
is intended for trained personnel familiar with the Emerson Automation Solutions products referenced
herein.
Emerson Automation Solutions may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject
matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not provide any license whatsoever to
any of these patents.
Emerson Automation Solutions provides the following document and the information included therein
as-is and without warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, including but not limited to any implied
statutory warranty of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose.
* Indicates a trademark of Emerson Automation Solutions and/or its subsidiaries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
©Copyright 2019 Emerson Automation Solutions Company

All Rights Reserved.
Technical Support
If you experience technical problems that cannot be resolved with the information in this manual,
please contact us by telephone, email, or on the web at www.geautomation.com/support.
AMERICAS
Phone: 1-800-433-2682;
1-780-420-2010 (if toll-free option is unavailable)
Email: [email protected]
Language: English
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST & AFRICA

Phone: +800-1-433-2682;
+420-296-183-331 (if toll-free option is unavailable)
Language: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish
ASIA
Phone: +86-400-820-8208
+86-21-3877-7006 (India, Indonesia, & Pakistan)
Language: Chinese, English
Table of Contents
Technical Support ............................................................................................................................. ii
Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................................... i
Table of Figures xx
Section 1: Introduction .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Revisions of this Manual .................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4

▪ Features .................................................................................................................................... 4
▪ High-speed processor and patented technology for faster throughput ...................................... 4
1.2.1 Programming and Configuration ............................................................................................... 5
1.2.2 PACSystems Documentation..................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Modules for RX3i Systems ............................................................................................... 6

1.3.1 RX3i Modules (IC695 and IC694) ............................................................................................... 7
1.4 Backplanes and Power Supplies ..................................................................................... 12

1.4.1 RX3i Universal Backplane......................................................................................................... 12
1.4.2 Expansion (12-slot and 16-slot Universal Backplanes Only) ...................................................... 13
1.4.3 Backplanes Available for the RX3i System ................................................................................ 14
1.4.4 Power Supplies for RX3i Systems ............................................................................................. 15
1.5 Expansion Systems ....................................................................................................... 16

1.5.1 Expansion System with One Expansion or Remote Backplane .................................................. 17
1.5.2 Using Multiple Expansion and Remote Backplanes ................................................................... 17
Section 2: Installation .................................................................................................................. 19
2.1 Pre-Installation Check ................................................................................................... 19
2.2 System Layout Guidelines ............................................................................................. 20
2.3 Enclosures ................................................................................................................... 21

2.3.1 RX3i Universal Backplane Dimensions and Spacing .................................................................. 22
2.3.2 RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane Dimensions and Spacing ....................................................... 23
2.4 System Wiring.............................................................................................................. 24

2.4.1 Color Coding Wires ................................................................................................................. 25
2.4.2 Wire Routing ........................................................................................................................... 25
Contents i
PACSystems* RX3i System Manual Section 1
GFK-2314T Sept. 2019
2.5 System Grounding........................................................................................................ 26

2.5.1 Ground Conductors ................................................................................................................. 27
2.5.2 Backplane Safety and EMC Reference Grounding ..................................................................... 28
2.5.3 Power Supply Grounding ......................................................................................................... 28
2.5.4 Programmer Grounding .......................................................................................................... 28
2.5.5 Shield Grounding .................................................................................................................... 28
2.6 System Installation ....................................................................................................... 29

2.6.1 Universal Backplanes ............................................................................................................... 29
2.6.2 Expansion Backplanes ............................................................................................................. 31
2.6.3 Mounting a Backplane in a 19-Inch Rack .................................................................................. 34
2.6.4 Modules .................................................................................................................................. 36
2.6.5 CPU Installation ....................................................................................................................... 63
2.6.6 Power Supplies ........................................................................................................................ 64
2.6.7 Serial Bus Transmitter Module ................................................................................................. 68
Section 3: Backplanes .................................................................................................................. 71
3.1 RX3i Universal Backplanes: IC695CHS007, IC695CHS012, IC695CHS016 ......................... 71

3.1.1 RX3i Universal Backplane Features .......................................................................................... 72
3.1.2 Module Locations in a 12- or 16-Slot Universal Backplane ........................................................ 77
3.1.3 Module Locations in a 7-Slot Universal Backplane .................................................................... 79
3.2 Serial Expansion Backplanes: IC694CHS392, IC694CHS398 ............................................. 80
Section 4: Power Supplies ............................................................................................................ 83
4.1 Power Supply Overview ................................................................................................ 83

4.1.1 Power Supply Field Wiring ....................................................................................................... 84
4.1.2 24Vdc Isolated Power .............................................................................................................. 84
4.1.3 RX3i IC695 Power Supply Outputs ........................................................................................... 84
4.1.4 RX3i IC694 Power Supply Outputs ........................................................................................... 85
4.2 Module Load Requirements .......................................................................................... 86

4.2.1 Power Supply Loading Example ............................................................................................... 93
4.2.2 Load Sharing / Redundancy ..................................................................................................... 94
4.3 AC Power Supply Connections for Floating Neutral (IT) Systems ...................................... 97
4.3.1 Special Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems ..................................................................... 97
4.3.2 Non-Floating Neutral System .................................................................................................. 98
4.4 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSA040 ........................................... 99

4.4.2 Specifications: PSA040 .......................................................................................................... 101
Contents ii
4.4.3 Field Wiring: PSA040 ............................................................................................................. 103
4.5 Multi-purpose Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSA140 ................... 105
4.5.2 Specifications: PSA140 .......................................................................................................... 106
4.5.3 Field Wiring: PSA140 ............................................................................................................. 109
4.6 Power Supply, 24Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSD040 .................................................................. 111

4.6.2 Specifications: PSD040 .......................................................................................................... 113
4.6.3 Field Wiring: PSD040 ............................................................................................................. 115
4.7 Multi-Purpose Power Supply, 24Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSD140 ............................................ 117

4.7.2 Specifications: PSD140 .......................................................................................................... 119
4.7.3 Field Wiring: PSD140 ............................................................................................................. 121
4.8 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc: IC694PWR321 ................................................. 123

4.8.2 Specifications: PWR321 ......................................................................................................... 123
4.8.3 Field Wiring: PWR321 ............................................................................................................ 124
4.9 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc High Capacity: IC694PWR330 ........................... 127
4.9.3 Field Wiring: PWR330 ............................................................................................................ 128
4.10 Power Supply, 24Vdc High-Capacity: IC694PWR331 ..................................................... 130

4.10.3 Field Wiring: PWR331 ............................................................................................................ 132
Section 5: Serial Bus Transmitter & Expansion Cables ................................................................... 135
5.1 Serial Bus Transmitter Module: IC695LRE001 ............................................................... 136

5.1.1 Specifications: LRE001........................................................................................................... 136
5.1.2 Expansion Module Installation ............................................................................................... 137
5.1.3 Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote Backplanes ................................................. 137
5.2 I/O Bus Expansion Cables: IC693CBL300, 301, 302 ,312, 313......................................... 138
5.2.1 Cable with Two Connectors: IC693CBL302 ............................................................................ 138
5.2.2 Cables with Three Connectors: IC693CBL300, 301, 312, 313 ................................................. 139
5.3 Specifications: IC693CBL300, 301, 302, 312, 313 ......................................................... 140

5.3.1 Expansion Port Pin Assignments ............................................................................................ 141
5.3.2 Building Custom Cables ......................................................................................................... 142
5.3.3 Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote System .................................................. 144
Contents iii
Section 6: Discrete Input Modules............................................................................................... 145
6.1 Input Module, 120 Vac, 8-Point Isolated: IC694MDL230 ............................................... 146
6.1.1 Specifications: MDL230 ......................................................................................................... 147
6.1.2 Field Wiring: MDL230 ............................................................................................................ 147
6.2 Input Module, 240 Vac, 8-Point Isolated: IC694MDL231 ............................................... 149
6.2.2 Field Wiring: MDL231 ............................................................................................................ 150
6.3 Input Module, 120 Vac, 16-Point: IC694MDL240 .......................................................... 151

6.3.2 Thermal Derating: MDL240 ................................................................................................... 153
6.3.3 Field Wiring: MDL240 ............................................................................................................ 153
6.4 Input Module, 24Vac/Vdc 16-Point Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL241 .................................. 155
6.4.2 Field Wiring: MDL241 ............................................................................................................ 157
6.5 Input Module, 120 Vac 16-Point Isolated: IC694MDL250 .............................................. 158
6.5.2 Input Filter Setup: MDL250 .................................................................................................... 160
6.5.3 Module Status Data: MDL250 ................................................................................................ 160
6.5.4 Field Wiring: MDL250 ............................................................................................................ 161
6.6 Input Module, 120 Vac, 32-Point: IC694MDL260 .......................................................... 162

6.6.5 Field Wiring: MDL260 ............................................................................................................ 165
6.7 Input Module, 125Vdc Pos/Neg, 8-Point IC694MDL632 ................................................ 167

6.7.3 Field Wiring: MDL632 ............................................................................................................ 169
6.8 Input Module, 24Vdc Pos/Neg, 8-Point IC694MDL634 .................................................. 171

6.8.2 Field Wiring: MDL634 ............................................................................................................ 173
Contents iv
6.9 Input Module, 125Vdc Pos/Neg, 16-Point IC694MDL635 .............................................. 174

6.9.1 174
6.9.3 Field Wiring: MDL635 ............................................................................................................ 176
6.10 Input Module, 24Vdc Pos/Neg, 16-Point IC694MDL645 ................................................ 178

6.10.2 Field Wiring: MDL645 ............................................................................................................ 180
6.11 Input Module: 24Vdc 16-Point Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL646 ........................................ 181
6.11.2 Field Wiring: MDL646 ............................................................................................................ 183
6.12 Input Module: 48 Vdc 16-Point Isolated Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL648 ........................... 184
6.12.4 Field Wiring: MDL648 ............................................................................................................ 186
6.13 Input Modules, 5/12Vdc (TTL) 32-Point Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL654, IC694MDL655,
IC694MDL658 ............................................................................................................ 188
6.13.1 Specifications: MDL654, MDL655, MDL658 ........................................................................... 188
6.13.2 Thermal Derating: MDL654 & MDL655 .................................................................................. 190
6.13.3 Field Wiring: MDL654, MDL655, MDL658 .............................................................................. 190
6.14 Input Module, 24Vdc 32-Point Grouped IC694MDL660 ................................................ 192

6.14.3 Field Wiring: MDL660 ............................................................................................................ 194
6.15 Input Module, 24 Vdc 16-Point Grouped IC695MDL664 ................................................ 196

6.15.1 LED Operation: MDL664 ........................................................................................................ 196
6.15.4 Field Wiring: MDL664 ............................................................................................................ 198
6.15.5 Circuit Operation: MDL664 .................................................................................................... 199
6.15.6 Input and Output Data Formats: MDL664 .............................................................................. 202
6.15.7 Diagnostics: MDL664 ............................................................................................................ 204
6.15.8 Configuration: MDL664 ......................................................................................................... 205
Contents v
6.16 Input Simulator, 8-/16-Point IC694ACC300 .................................................................. 208

6.16.1 Specifications: ACC300 ......................................................................................................... 208
Section 7: Discrete Output Modules............................................................................................ 209
7.1 Output Module, 120 Vac, 0.5 Amp, 12-Point: IC694MDL310 ......................................... 210
7.1.3 Field Wiring: MDL310 ............................................................................................................ 212
7.2 Output Module, 120/240 Vac, 2 Amp, 8-Point: IC694MDL330....................................... 214

7.2.1 214
7.2.4 Field Wiring: MDL330 ............................................................................................................ 216
7.3 Output Module, 120 Vac, 0.5 Amp, 16-Point: IC694MDL340 ......................................... 218
7.3.3 Field Wiring: MDL340 ............................................................................................................ 220
7.4 Output Module, 120/240 Vac 16-Point Isolated: IC694MDL350..................................... 222

7.4.2 Field Wiring: MDL350 ............................................................................................................ 224
7.5 Output Module, 120/240 Vac Isolated, 2 Amp, 5-Point: IC694MDL390 .......................... 226
7.5.2 Thermal Derating MDL390 .................................................................................................... 228
7.5.3 Field Wiring: MDL390 ............................................................................................................ 228
7.6 Output Module, 12/24Vdc 2A Positive Logic 8-Point: IC694MDL730 .............................. 229
7.6.1 LEDs ...................................................................................................................................... 230
7.6.3 Thermal Derating MDL730 .................................................................................................... 231
7.6.4 Field Wiring: MDL730 ............................................................................................................ 231
7.7 Output Module, 12/24Vdc 0.5A Positive Logic 8-Point: IC694MDL732 ........................... 233
7.7.2 Field Wiring: MDL732 ............................................................................................................ 234
Contents vi
7.8 Output Module 125Vdc, 1 Amp, 6-Point Isolated Positive/Negative: IC694MDL734........ 236
7.8.1 236
7.8.3 Field Wiring: MDL734 ............................................................................................................ 237
7.9 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5 Amp, Positive Logic, 16-Point: IC694MDL740 ................ 239
7.9.1 239
7.9.3 Field Wiring: MDL740 ............................................................................................................ 240
7.10 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5 Amp, Negative Logic 16-Point: IC694MDL741 ............... 242
7.10.2 Field Wiring: MDL741 ............................................................................................................ 243
7.11 Output Module, 12/24Vdc 1A Positive Logic, 16-Point with ESCP per Group: IC694MDL742
................................................................................................................................. 245
7.11.1 245
7.11.2 Electronic Short-Circuit Protection (ESCP) ............................................................................. 246
7.11.5 Field Wiring: MDL742 ............................................................................................................ 247
7.12 Output Module, 5/24Vdc (TTL) Negative Logic, 32-Point: IC694MDL752 ....................... 249
7.12.2 Field Wiring: MDL752 ............................................................................................................ 251
7.12.3 Typical Connections: MDL752 ............................................................................................... 252
7.13 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5A Positive Logic, 32-Point: IC694MDL753 ....................... 253
7.13.1 253
7.13.3 Field Wiring: MDL753 ............................................................................................................ 254
7.14 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.75A Positive Logic, 32-Point with ESCP per Group:
IC694MDL754 ............................................................................................................ 256
7.14.1 256
7.14.3 LEDs: MDL754 ....................................................................................................................... 257
7.14.6 Output Defaults: MDL754 ..................................................................................................... 258
7.14.7 Field Wiring: MDL754 ............................................................................................................ 259
Contents vii
7.14.9 ESCP Status Data: MDL754 .................................................................................................... 260
7.15 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5A Positive Logic, 32-Point with ESCP per Group:
IC694MDL758 ............................................................................................................ 261
7.15.2 LEDs: MDL758 ....................................................................................................................... 262
7.15.4 Module Data: MDL758 .......................................................................................................... 263
7.15.5 Field Wiring: MDL758 ............................................................................................................ 264
7.16 Output Module, 24/125Vdc, 2A Positive Logic, 16-Point with ESCP & Diagnostics:
IC695MDL765 ............................................................................................................ 266
7.16.2 LED Operation: MDL765 ........................................................................................................ 267
7.16.4 Field Wiring: MDL765 ............................................................................................................ 271
7.16.5 Circuit Operation: MDL765 .................................................................................................... 272
7.16.6 Input and Output Data Formats: MDL765 .............................................................................. 273
7.16.7 Diagnostics: MDL765 ............................................................................................................ 274
7.16.8 Configuration: MDL765 ......................................................................................................... 276
7.17 Output Module, Isolated Relay, N.O., 4 Amp, 16-Point: IC694MDL916 ........................... 280
7.17.2 Field Wiring: MDL916 ............................................................................................................ 284
7.18 Output Module, Isolated Relay, N.O., 4 Amp, 8-Point: IC694MDL930............................. 286
7.18.2 Field Wiring: MDL930 ............................................................................................................ 289
7.19 Output Module, Isolated Relay, N.C. and Form C, 8A, 8-Point: IC694MDL931 ................. 290
7.19.2 Field Wiring: MDL931 ............................................................................................................ 294
7.20 Output Module, Relay Output, N.O., 2 Amp, 16-Point: IC694MDL940 ............................ 296
7.20.2 Field Wiring: MDL940 ............................................................................................................ 299
Section 8: Discrete Mixed I/O Modules ........................................................................................ 301
8.1 High-Speed Counter Module: IC694APU300 ................................................................ 302

8.1.1 Counter Types: APU300 ........................................................................................................ 303
8.1.2 Status LEDs: APU300 ............................................................................................................. 304
8.1.3 Specifications: APU300 ......................................................................................................... 305
Contents viii
8.1.4 Field Wiring: APU300............................................................................................................. 307

8.1.5 ESCP Outputs with 1.5 Amps per Point Minimum .................................................................. 311
8.2 Serial I/O Processor Module: IC694APU305 .................................................................. 312

8.2.1 Specifications: APU305 ......................................................................................................... 313
8.2.2 Field Wiring: APU305............................................................................................................. 314
8.2.3 Configuration: APU305 ......................................................................................................... 315
8.2.4 Module Data: APU305 ........................................................................................................... 317
8.3 High-Speed Counter Modules: IC695HSC304, IC695HSC308 ........................................ 327

8.3.1 LEDs: HSC304 & HSC308 ....................................................................................................... 328
8.3.2 Specifications: HSC304 & HSC308 ......................................................................................... 329
8.3.3 Field Wiring: HSC304 & HSC308 ............................................................................................ 332
8.4 Mixed I/O Module: IC694MDR390 ............................................................................... 335

8.4.1 LEDs: MDR390....................................................................................................................... 335
8.4.2 Specifications: MDR390 ........................................................................................................ 336
8.4.3 Field Wiring: MDR390 ........................................................................................................... 337
Section 9: Analog Input Modules ................................................................................................ 339
9.1 Analog Input Modules Isolated Current/Voltage: IC695ALG106 and IC695ALG112 ......... 340
9.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 340
9.1.2 Specifications: ALG106 & ALG112.......................................................................................... 341
9.1.3 Field Wiring: ALG106 ............................................................................................................. 343
9.1.4 Field Wiring: ALG112 ............................................................................................................. 344
9.1.5 Configuration: ALG106 & ALG112 ......................................................................................... 345
Example 1 347
Example 2 348
9.2 Note on Using Interrupts............................................................................................. 353

9.2.1 Module Data: ALG106 & ALG112 ........................................................................................... 353
9.3 Analog Input Module 4-Channel Differential Voltage: IC694ALG220 .............................. 358
9.3.1 Isolated +24Vdc Power .......................................................................................................... 358
9.3.2 LEDs: ALG220 ........................................................................................................................ 358
9.3.3 Specifications: ALG220 .......................................................................................................... 358
9.3.4 Data Format: ALG220 ............................................................................................................ 359
9.3.5 Field Wiring: ALG220 ............................................................................................................. 360
Contents ix
9.4 Analog Input Module 4-Channel Differential Current: IC694ALG221 .............................. 362
9.4.1 LEDs: ALG221 ........................................................................................................................ 362
9.4.3 Data Format: ALG221 ............................................................................................................ 363
9.4.4 Field Wiring: ALG221 ............................................................................................................. 365
9.5 Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel Voltage: IC694ALG222 ......................................... 367

9.5.2 LEDs: ALG222 ........................................................................................................................ 367
9.5.4 Configuration: ALG222 .......................................................................................................... 369
9.5.5 Data Format: ALG222 ............................................................................................................ 371
9.5.6 Field Wiring: ALG222 ............................................................................................................. 373
9.6 Analog Input Module 16-Channel Current: IC694ALG223.............................................. 375

9.6.1 Module Power ....................................................................................................................... 375
9.6.2 LEDs: ALG223 ........................................................................................................................ 375
9.6.3 375
9.6.6 Data Format: ALG223 ............................................................................................................ 378
9.6.7 Field Wiring: ALG223 ............................................................................................................. 380
9.7 Analog Input Module Advanced Diagnostics 16-Channel Voltage: IC694ALG232 ............ 383
9.7.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 384
9.7.3 LEDs: ALG232 ........................................................................................................................ 384
9.8 Example: .................................................................................................................... 391

9.8.2 Channel Input Data: ALG232 ................................................................................................. 393
9.8.3 Field Wiring: ALG232 ............................................................................................................. 394
9.9 Analog Input Module Advanced Diagnostics 16-Channel Current: IC694ALG233 ............ 396
9.9.1 Module Power ....................................................................................................................... 396
9.9.2 Features ................................................................................................................................ 396
9.9.3 LEDs: ALG233 ........................................................................................................................ 396
9.9.6 Field Wiring: ALG233 ............................................................................................................. 406
Contents x
9.10 Analog Input Module 8-/4-Channel Current/Voltage: IC695ALG608 Analog Input Module
16-/8-Channel Current/Voltage: IC695ALG616 ............................................................ 409
9.10.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 409
9.10.2 LEDs: ALG608 & ALG616 ........................................................................................................ 410
9.10.4 Configuration: ALG608 & ALG616 ......................................................................................... 413
Example 1 415
9.11 Example 2 .................................................................................................................. 416

9.11.2 Module Data: ALG608 & ALG616 ........................................................................................... 419
9.11.3 Field Wiring: ALG608 & ALG616, Single-Ended Mode ............................................................. 424
9.11.4 Field Wiring: ALG608 & ALG616, Differential Mode ................................................................ 425
Section 10: Analog Output Modules ............................................................................................. 429
10.1 Analog Output Module Voltage 2-Channel: IC694ALG390 ............................................ 430

10.1.2 LED ....................................................................................................................................... 430
10.1.4 Module Data: ALG390 ........................................................................................................... 431
10.1.5 Field Wiring: ALG390 ............................................................................................................. 432
10.2 Analog Output Module Current 2-Channel: IC694ALG391 ............................................. 434

10.2.2 LED ....................................................................................................................................... 434
10.2.4 Module Data: ALG391 ........................................................................................................... 436
10.2.5 Field Wiring: ALG391 ............................................................................................................. 437
10.3 Analog Output Module Current/Voltage 8-Channel: IC694ALG392 ................................ 440

10.3.2 LEDs: ALG392 ........................................................................................................................ 440
10.3.4 Current and Voltage Ranges and Resolution: ALG392 ............................................................ 444
10.3.5 Module Data: ALG392 ........................................................................................................... 445
10.3.6 Field Wiring: ALG392 ............................................................................................................. 446
10.3.8 Analog Output Module 4-Channel Current/Voltage: IC695ALG704 Analog Output Module 8-
Channel Current/Voltage: IC695ALG708 ................................................................................................... 448
10.3.10 Features: ALG704 & ALG708 .................................................................................................. 449
Contents xi
10.3.11 LEDs: ALG704 and ALG708 .................................................................................................... 450

10.3.12 Specifications: ALG704 and ALG708 ...................................................................................... 450
10.3.13 Configuration: ALG704 and ALG708 ...................................................................................... 452
10.3.14 Module Data: ALG704 and ALG708........................................................................................ 463
10.3.15 Field Wiring: ALG704 and ALG708 ......................................................................................... 467
10.4 Analog Output Module 8-Channel Current/Voltage Isolated: IC695ALG808 ................... 469
10.4.2 Features ................................................................................................................................ 470
10.4.3 LEDs: IC695ALG808 ............................................................................................................... 471
10.4.4 Specifications: IC695ALG808................................................................................................. 471
10.4.5 Configuration: IC695ALG808 ................................................................................................ 472
10.4.6 Module Data: IC695ALG808 .................................................................................................. 483
10.4.7 Field Wiring: IC695ALG808.................................................................................................... 487
Section 11: Analog Modules with HART Communications .............................................................. 491
11.1 Overview of HART Communications for PACSystems RX3i ............................................ 491

11.1.1 RX3i HART Module Operation................................................................................................ 492
11.1.2 Using DO I/O with HART Modules .......................................................................................... 493
11.1.3 Using a Hand-held Calibrator with RX3i Analog HART Modules .............................................. 493
11.1.4 HART Pass-Through Functionality .......................................................................................... 494
11.2 Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel Current/Voltage with HART: IC695ALG626 Analog
Input Module 8-/4-Channel Current/Voltage with HART: IC695ALG628 ......................... 495
11.2.1 Features ................................................................................................................................. 496
11.2.2 Specifications: ALG626 and ALG628 ...................................................................................... 497
11.2.3 Configuration: ALG626 and ALG628 ...................................................................................... 500
11.2.4 Input Module Data Formats: ALG626 and ALG628 ................................................................. 507
11.2.5 Field Wiring: IC695ALG626 and ALG628, Single-Ended Mode ................................................ 512
11.2.6 Field Wiring: IC695ALG626 and ALG628, Differential Mode ................................................... 513
11.2.7 HART Device Connections ..................................................................................................... 514
11.3 Analog Output Module 8-Channel Current/Voltage with HART: IC695ALG728 ............... 516
11.3.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 516
11.3.3 LEDs: ALG728 ........................................................................................................................ 517
Contents xii
11.4 Example..................................................................................................................... 526
Example: 531
11.4.2 Output Module Data Formats: ALG728 .................................................................................. 532
11.4.3 Field Wiring: ALG728 ............................................................................................................. 535
11.4.4 HART Device Connections ..................................................................................................... 537
11.5 HART Reference Data ................................................................................................. 537

11.5.1 HART Status Data .................................................................................................................. 538
11.5.2 HART Data Format ................................................................................................................ 538
11.6 COMMREQs for HART Modules .................................................................................... 540

11.6.1 Get HART Device Information, COMMREQ 1 Command Block ............................................... 540
11.6.2 Remote Get HART Device Information, Command Block ....................................................... 541
11.6.3 COMMREQ Status Word ........................................................................................................ 544
11.6.4 Remote and Local Get HART Device Information, Reply Data Format ..................................... 545
11.6.5 Sending a HART Pass-Through Command to a HART Device .................................................. 547
11.6.6 HART Pass-Through Commands and Command Codes for RX3i Modules............................... 551
11.6.7 HART Communications Status............................................................................................... 563
11.7 Function Blocks to Read HART Data ............................................................................. 567

11.7.1 DYN_HART_STRUCT ............................................................................................................. 567
11.7.2 ALL_HART_STRUCT ............................................................................................................... 568
11.8 Converting HART Data to / from RX3i Format ............................................................... 571

11.8.1 Converting Floating-Point Data (Endian Flip) ......................................................................... 571
11.8.2 ASCII_PACK ........................................................................................................................... 572
11.8.3 ASCII_UNPACK ...................................................................................................................... 574
11.8.4 Example Function Block 3: ASCII_UNPACK: ............................................................................ 575
Section 12: Analog Mixed I/O Modules .......................................................................................... 577
12.1 Analog Module 4-Input/2-Output Current/Voltage: IC694ALG442 ................................ 578

12.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 578
12.1.3 LEDs: ALG442 ........................................................................................................................ 578
12.1.5 Field Wiring: ALG44 ............................................................................................................... 582
12.1.6 Input Scaling: ALG442 ........................................................................................................... 583
12.1.7 Output Scaling: ALG442 ........................................................................................................ 584
12.1.8 I/O Data: ALG442 .................................................................................................................. 585
12.1.9 Status Data: ALG442 ............................................................................................................. 586
Contents xiii

12.1.11 Ramp Mode Operation: ALG442 ............................................................................................ 589
12.1.12 Changing Module Operation on Command: ALG442 ............................................................. 590
12.2 Analog Module 4-Input/2-Output Current/Voltage with Advanced Diagnostics:

IC694ALG542............................................................................................................. 597
12.2.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 597
12.2.3 LEDs: ALG542 ........................................................................................................................ 598
12.2.5 Field Wiring: ALG542 ............................................................................................................. 601
12.2.6 Input Scaling: ALG542 ........................................................................................................... 602
12.2.7 Output Scaling: ALG542 ........................................................................................................ 603
12.2.8 I/O Data: ALG542 .................................................................................................................. 604
12.2.9 Status Data: ALG542 ............................................................................................................. 604
12.2.11 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG542 ............................................................................................ 615
12.2.12 Ramp Mode Operation: ALG542 ............................................................................................ 616
12.2.13 Clamp Mode Operation: ALG542 ........................................................................................... 617
12.2.14 Changing Module Operation on Command: ALG542 ............................................................. 618
Section 13: Universal Analog Input Module ................................................................................... 625
13.1 Universal Analog Input: Voltage, Current, Resistance, RTD, Thermocouple, 8-Channel + 2
CJC: IC695ALG600 ...................................................................................................... 626
13.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 627
13.1.2 LEDs: ALG600 ........................................................................................................................ 628
13.1.4 Field Wiring: ALG600 ............................................................................................................. 633
13.1.6 Module Data: ALG600 ........................................................................................................... 647
Section 14: Thermocouple Input Modules ..................................................................................... 653
14.1 Thermocouple Input 6-/12-Channel Isolated Modules IC695ALG306 & IC695ALG312 ..... 654
14.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 655
14.2 Thermocouple Input 12-Channel Isolated Module IC695ALG412 ................................... 660

14.2.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 661
Contents xiv
14.3 Thermocouple Module Operation: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412 ..................................... 666
14.3.1 LEDs: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412.......................................................................................... 666
14.3.2 Field Wiring: ALG306, ALG312, & ALG412 ............................................................................. 667
14.3.3 Configuration: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412 ........................................................................... 669
14.3.4 Module Data: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412 ............................................................................. 680
Section 15: RTD Input Module ...................................................................................................... 685
15.1 RTD Input 8-Channel Isolated Module IC695ALG508 .................................................... 686

15.1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 686
15.1.2 LEDs: ALG508 ........................................................................................................................ 687
15.1.4 Field Wiring: ALG508 ............................................................................................................. 694
15.1.6 Module Input Data: ALG508 .................................................................................................. 702
Section 16: Special Purpose Modules ............................................................................................ 707
16.1 RX3i I/O Link Interface Module: IC694BEM320 ............................................................. 708

16.1.1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 708
16.1.2 I/O Size Selection: BEM320 .................................................................................................... 709
16.1.3 LEDs: BEM320 ....................................................................................................................... 710
16.1.4 Serial Ports: BEM320 ............................................................................................................. 710
16.2 RX3i I/O Link Master Module: IC694BEM321................................................................. 711

16.2.1 Specifications: BEM321 ......................................................................................................... 711
16.2.2 LEDs: BEM321 ....................................................................................................................... 711
16.2.3 Restart Pushbutton: BEM321 ................................................................................................. 712
16.2.4 Serial Port: BEM321 ............................................................................................................... 712
16.3 RX3i Genius Bus Controller: IC694BEM331 ................................................................... 713

16.3.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 713
16.3.2 LEDs: BEM331 ....................................................................................................................... 713
16.3.3 Specifications: BEM331 ......................................................................................................... 713
16.3.4 Field Wiring: BEM331 ............................................................................................................ 715
16.4 RX3i Serial Communications Modules: IC695CMM002, IC695CMM004 ......................... 718

16.4.1 Features: ............................................................................................................................... 719
16.4.2 LEDs: CMM002 & CMM004 .................................................................................................... 720
16.4.3 Specifications: CMM002 and CMM004 .................................................................................. 720
16.4.4 Serial Ports: CMM002 & CMM004 .......................................................................................... 722
Contents xv
16.5 RX3i Control Memory Xchange Module: IC695CMX128 ................................................ 725

16.5.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 726
16.5.2 LEDs: CMX128 ....................................................................................................................... 727
16.5.3 Specifications: CMX128 ......................................................................................................... 727
16.5.4 Optical Transceiver: CMX128 ................................................................................................ 727
16.6 RX3i Redundancy Memory Xchange Modules: IC695RMX128, IC695RMX228 ................ 728
16.6.1 Features: RMX128 & RMX228 ................................................................................................ 729
16.6.2 Specifications: RMX128 & RMX228........................................................................................ 729
16.7 RX3i DeviceNet Master Module: IC694DNM200 ........................................................... 731

16.7.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 731
16.7.2 LEDs and Connectors: DNM200 ............................................................................................. 731
16.7.3 Specifications: DNM200 ........................................................................................................ 732
16.7.4 The DeviceNet Bus ................................................................................................................ 733
16.8 Motion Mate Module: IC694DSM314 ........................................................................... 737

16.8.1 Overview: DSM314................................................................................................................ 737
16.8.2 Specifications: DSM314 ......................................................................................................... 738
16.8.3 Features: DSM314 ................................................................................................................. 738
16.9 Motion Controller Module: IC694DSM324 ................................................................... 740

16.9.1 Overview: DSM324................................................................................................................ 740
16.9.2 Features: DSM324 ................................................................................................................. 741
16.9.3 Specifications: DSM324 ......................................................................................................... 742
16.10 PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion Controller: IC695PMM335 .............................................. 743

16.10.1 Servo Types Supported.......................................................................................................... 744
16.10.2 Features: PMM335 ................................................................................................................ 744
16.10.3 Fiber I/O Terminal Block ........................................................................................................ 745
16.10.4 Features ................................................................................................................................ 745
16.11 IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module: IC695ECM850 ......................................... 746

16.11.1 Specifications: ECM850 ......................................................................................................... 747
16.12 Ethernet Interface Module: IC695ETM001.................................................................... 751

16.12.1 Ethernet Interface Specifications: .......................................................................................... 752
16.12.2 Ethernet Interface Ports ........................................................................................................ 752
16.12.3 Station Manager .................................................................................................................... 753
16.12.4 Ethernet Global Data (EGD) ................................................................................................... 753
16.12.5 ETM001-Jx Interface Controls and Indicators ......................................................................... 754
16.12.6 ETM001-Kxxx Interface Controls and Indicators ..................................................................... 755
Contents xvi
16.13 RX3i DNP3 Outstation Module: IC695EDS001 .............................................................. 756

16.13.1 Module features: ................................................................................................................... 757
16.14 RX3i IEC 104 Server Module: IC695EIS001 .................................................................... 759

16.14.1 Module Features ................................................................................................................... 760
16.15 Ethernet Network Interface Unit: IC695NIU001 ............................................................ 761

16.15.1 Ethernet NIU Features ........................................................................................................... 762
16.15.2 Compatibility ........................................................................................................................ 763
16.15.3 Specifications: NIU001 .......................................................................................................... 763
16.15.4 Ethernet Global Data Features ............................................................................................... 763
16.15.5 Ports ..................................................................................................................................... 764
16.16 Ethernet Network Interface Unit: IC695NIU001 PLUS .................................................... 765

16.16.1 Compatibility ........................................................................................................................ 765
16.16.2 Features: Ethernet NIU001 PLUS ............................................................................................ 766
16.16.3 Ethernet Global Data Features ............................................................................................... 766
16.16.4 Ethernet NIU COMMREQ Support .......................................................................................... 766
16.16.5 Specifications: NIU001 PLUS .................................................................................................. 767
16.16.6 NIU001 PLUS vs. NIU001 Classic Comparison ......................................................................... 768
16.16.7 Ports ..................................................................................................................................... 768
16.17 PROFIBUS Master Module: IC695PBM300 .................................................................... 769

16.17.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 770
16.17.2 PROFIBUS Master Module Controls and Indicators ................................................................. 770
16.17.3 Specifications: PBM300 ......................................................................................................... 771
16.18 PROFIBUS Slave Module: IC695PBS301 ........................................................................ 772

16.18.1 PROFIBUS Slave Module Controls and Indicators .................................................................... 772
16.18.2 Specifications: PBS301 .......................................................................................................... 773
16.19 PROFINET Controller Module: IC695PNC001 ................................................................ 774

16.19.1 Features: ............................................................................................................................... 775
16.19.2 Specifications: PNC001 ......................................................................................................... 776
16.20 PROFINET Scanner Module: IC695PNS001/IC695PNS101.............................................. 779

16.20.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 779
16.20.2 Front Panel Port..................................................................................................................... 779
16.20.3 LED Indications: PNS001 ........................................................................................................ 780
16.20.4 Specifications: PNS001 .......................................................................................................... 783
16.20.5 Compatibility: PNS001 .......................................................................................................... 784
16.20.6 Compatibility: PNS101 .......................................................................................................... 786
Contents xvii
16.21 RX3i CEP Carrier: IC695CEP001 RX3i CEP Expansion Carrier: IC694CEE001 .................... 788
16.21.1 Features ................................................................................................................................ 789
16.21.2 Normal Operation of Individual LEDs: CEP001 & CEE001 ........................................................ 789
16.21.3 Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ 790
16.21.4 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 790
16.21.5 Quick Start: CEP001 & CEE001 ............................................................................................... 791
16.21.6 Supported I/O Modules ......................................................................................................... 801
16.22 Genius Communications Gateway Module IC695GCG001 ............................................. 804

16.22.1 LED Indications: GCG001 ....................................................................................................... 805
16.22.2 Specifications: GCG001 ......................................................................................................... 806
16.23 IC695PRS015 Pressure Transducer Module .................................................................. 808

16.23.1 LEDs: PRS015 ........................................................................................................................ 808
16.23.2 Specifications: PRS015 .......................................................................................................... 809
16.23.3 PRS015 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 810
16.23.4 Module Status Data: PRS015 ................................................................................................. 814
16.23.5 Input Channel Scaling: PRS015 .............................................................................................. 815
16.23.6 Channel Diagnostic Reporting: PRS015 ................................................................................. 815
16.23.7 Command Data: PRS015 ....................................................................................................... 816
16.23.8 Wiring: PRS015 ..................................................................................................................... 817
Section 17: Terminal Blocks and Interconnect Cables ..................................................................... 821
17.1 High-Density Module-Mounted Terminal Blocks ........................................................... 821

17.1.1 Terminal Blocks for High-Density RX3i Modules ..................................................................... 822
17.1.2 Installing and Removing High-Density Terminal Blocks .......................................................... 825
17.2 Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) System ............................................................. 827

17.2.1 Low-Density TBQC System Overview ..................................................................................... 828
17.2.2 Low-Density TBQC System Variant for 32-Point I/O Modules with Dual D-Connectors ............ 840
17.2.3 High-Density TBQC System Overview .................................................................................... 844
Product Certifications and Installation Guidelines for Conformance............................... 851
RX3i Agency Approvals ............................................................................................... 851
UL Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous Areas Requirements .................................................... 852
ATEX Zone 2 Hazardous Areas Requirements ............................................................... 852
Standards .................................................................................................................. 852

PACSystems RX3i Environmental Specifications .................................................................... 852
Contents xviii
Additional RX3i Specifications ............................................................................................... 854
Government Regulations ............................................................................................ 858
Installation Guidelines for Conformance to Standards ................................................... 858
Shielded Cable Alternative to Conduit.......................................................................... 861
Safety-Related Guidelines for Installation in the European Union ...................................................... 864
Calculating Heat Dissipation ....................................................................................... 867
B-1 Module Heat Dissipation ............................................................................................. 867
B-2 Power Supply Heat Dissipation .................................................................................... 867
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly ................................................................................. 872
C-1 Installing the Cable Clamp Assembly ........................................................................... 873
Contents xix
Table of Figures
Figure 1: 12-Slot Universal Backplane IC695CHS012 ................................................................................... 12
Figure 2: LRE001 ......................................................................................................................................... 13
Figure 3: 5-Slot RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane IC694CHS398 ................................................................... 13
Figure 4: Typical Single-Wide RX3i Power Supply Module ............................................................................ 15
Figure 5: RX3i System using One Universal Backplane and One Expansion Backplane .................................. 17
Figure 6: RX3i System using Multiple Expansion Backplanes ........................................................................ 18
Figure 7: Rx3i System using Expansion and Remote Backplanes .................................................................. 18
Figure 8: System Layout Guidelines ............................................................................................................. 20
Figure 9: RX3i Universal Backplane Dimensions and Spacing ....................................................................... 22
Figure 10: Vertical Mounting Not Recommended ....................................................................................... 23
Figure 11: RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane Dimensions and Spacing........................................................... 24
Figure 12: System Grounding ...................................................................................................................... 27
Figure 13: Ground Strap Installation ............................................................................................................ 28
Figure 14: Grounding Bar on RX3i Universal Backplane ................................................................................ 29
Figure 15: Location of Mounting Screws for Universal Backplane ................................................................. 30
Figure 16: Universal Backplane Terminal TB1 .............................................................................................. 30
Figure 17: Expansion Backplane .................................................................................................................. 32
Figure 18: Example of Backplane DIP Switch Setting for Rack Number ......................................................... 32
Figure 19: Effect on Load Rating, Vertical Mounting .................................................................................... 33
Figure 20: Effect on Load Rating, Horizontal Mounting ................................................................................ 33
Figure 21: IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket ............................................................................... 34
Figure 22: Dimensions for Backplane with IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket .............................. 34
Figure 23: IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket ......................................................................... 35
Figure 24: Installing Module in Backplane .................................................................................................... 45
Figure 25: Removing Module from Backplane ............................................................................................. 46
Contents xx
Figure 26 Module Door Label Front View ..................................................................................................... 47
Figure 27: Wiring Diagram on Reverse Side of Door..................................................................................... 47
Figure 28: Insertion of Door Label following Mark-up for Application ........................................................... 47
Figure 29: 20-Connector removable terminal block with Tie Wrap Landing Location noted ......................... 48
Figure 30: Installing Terminal Block into I/O Module .................................................................................... 49
Figure 31: Release Lever Usage prior to Removal from I/O Module .............................................................. 50
Figure 32: Extraction or Insertion of Terminal Block into its Cover................................................................ 51
Figure 33: Positive Logic Input Circuit.......................................................................................................... 52
Figure 34: Positive Logic Output Circuit....................................................................................................... 52
Figure 35: Negative Logic Input Circuit ........................................................................................................ 53
Figure 36: Negative Logic Output Circuit ..................................................................................................... 53
Figure 37: Analog Input Shield Grounding with a Terminal Strip .................................................................. 55
Figure 38: Analog Input Shield Grounding to Common Connections ........................................................... 56
Figure 39: Analog Input Shields Connected to Module Terminal Board ........................................................ 57
Figure 40: 4-Wire Transducer, Externally Powered by AC or DC Supply ........................................................ 58
Figure 41: 2-Wire Transducer, Externally Powered by DC Supply ................................................................. 58
Figure 42: 3-Wire Transducer, Externally Powered by DC Supply ................................................................. 58
Figure 43: 2-Wire Transducer, Self-Powered ................................................................................................ 58
Figure 44: 2-Wire Transducer Connected to Two Measuring Devices ........................................................... 59
Figure 45: Shield Connections for Analog Output Module ........................................................................... 60
Figure 46: Analog Output Shield Grounding with a Terminal Strip ............................................................... 61
Figure 47: CPE330 (example of 2-Slot CPU) ................................................................................................. 63
Figure 48: Typical RX3i Power Supply Module.............................................................................................. 64
Figure 49: Correct Wiring Practice for Power Supply Input Terminals ........................................................... 65
Figure 50: IC695 Power Supply Terminals .................................................................................................... 65
Figure 51: IC694 Power Supply Terminals .................................................................................................... 65
Figure 52: External Overvoltage Protection ................................................................................................. 67
Contents xxi
Figure 53: Floating Neutral .......................................................................................................................... 67
Figure 54: Neutral Not Floating (Tied to Ground)......................................................................................... 68
Figure 55: LRE001 Front View ...................................................................................................................... 69
Figure 56: LRE001 Attachment Using Captive Screws .................................................................................. 69
Figure 57: 12-Slot RX3i Universal Backplane IC695CHS012 ......................................................................... 72
Figure 58: Features of RX3i Universal Backplanes ........................................................................................ 72
Figure 59: TB1 Terminal Detail .................................................................................................................... 74
Figure 60: RX3i Universal Backplane Dual Connector Slot for PCI Bus & Serial Bus ........................................ 75
Figure 61: Expansion Slot Connector shown at Slot 12 ................................................................................. 76
Figure 62: Slot 6 of IC695CHS007 ............................................................................................................... 77
Figure 63: Configured as CPU in slot 0, Power Supply in Slot 2 ..................................................................... 77
Figure 64: Invalid: AC Power Supply cannot be in Slot 11 ............................................................................. 77
Figure 66: Invalid: CPU cannot be configured in Slot 11 ............................................................................... 78
Figure 67: Configured as Power Supply in slot 0, CPU in Slot 1 ..................................................................... 78
Figure 68: Invalid: Only a Power Supply can be installed in Slot 0 ................................................................. 78
Figure 70: CPU cannot be configured in Slot 6 ............................................................................................. 80
Figure 72: I/O or Option Module cannot be installed in Slot 0 ...................................................................... 80
Figure 73: Configured as Power Supply in slot 0, CPU in Slot 1 ..................................................................... 80
Figure 74: AC Power Supply cannot be configured in Slot 6 ......................................................................... 80
Figure 75: Serial Expansion Backplane ......................................................................................................... 81
Figure 76: Example RX3i System with Expansion Backplane Racks ............................................................... 81
Figure 77: Outputs of Power Supply IC695PSA040 ...................................................................................... 85
Figure 78: Outputs of Power Supply IC695PSD040 & IC695PSD140 ............................................................. 85
Figure 79: Outputs of Power Supplies IC694PWR321, IC694PWR330, and IC694PWR331 ........................... 86
Contents xxii
Figure 80: Power Supply Connections for Load Sharing ............................................................................... 95
Figure 81: Redundant Power Supply Connections ....................................................................................... 96
Figure 82: Connections for Power Source Redundancy ................................................................................ 97
Figure 83: Floating Neutral .......................................................................................................................... 97
Figure 84: Non-Floating Neutral Wiring ....................................................................................................... 98
Figure 85: IC695PSA040 ............................................................................................................................. 99
Figure 86: PSA040 Showing Terminals & On/Off Switch............................................................................. 100
Figure 87: Thermal Derating Curves for PSA040 ........................................................................................ 102
Figure 88: Field Wiring PSA040 ................................................................................................................. 103
Figure 89: Over-Voltage Protection for PSA040 ......................................................................................... 104
Figure 90: IC695PSA140 ........................................................................................................................... 105
Figure 91: PSA140 Showing Terminals & On/Off Switch............................................................................. 106
Figure 92: Thermal Derating Curves for PSA140 ........................................................................................ 108
Figure 93: Jumper Location PSA140 .......................................................................................................... 109
Figure 94: Field Wiring for PSA140 ............................................................................................................ 109
Figure 95: Over-Voltage Protection for PSA140 ......................................................................................... 110
Figure 96: IC695PSD040 ........................................................................................................................... 111
Figure 97: PSD040 Terminals and Switch Locations ................................................................................... 112
Figure 98: Thermal Derating Curves for PSD040 ........................................................................................ 114
Figure 99: Field Wiring for PSD040 ............................................................................................................ 115
Figure 100: Over-Voltage Protection for PSD040....................................................................................... 116
Figure 101: IC695PSD140 ......................................................................................................................... 117
Figure 102 PSD140 Terminals and On/Off Switch ...................................................................................... 118
Figure 103: Thermal Derating Curves for PSD140 ...................................................................................... 120
Figure 104: Jumper Location PSD140 ........................................................................................................ 121
Figure 105: Field Wiring for PSD140 .......................................................................................................... 121
Figure 106: Over-Voltage Protection for PSD140....................................................................................... 122
Contents xxiii
Figure 107: IC694PWR321 ........................................................................................................................ 123
Figure 108: Field Wiring for PWR321 ......................................................................................................... 125
Figure 109: Over-Voltage Protection for PWR321 ..................................................................................... 126
Figure 110: IC694PWR330 ........................................................................................................................ 127
Figure 113: IC694PWR331 ........................................................................................................................ 130
Figure 114: Thermal Derating Curve for 5Vdc Output PWR331 ................................................................. 132
Figure 117: IC695LRE001 .......................................................................................................................... 136
Figure 118: Install LRE001 in Rightmost Connector & Secure with Captive Screws ..................................... 137
Figure 119: Cable IC693CBL302 ................................................................................................................ 138
Figure 120: Cable IC693CBL302 Usage ...................................................................................................... 139
Figure 121: Cables IC693CBL300, IC693CBL301, IC693CBL312, or IC693CBL313 ...................................... 139
Figure 122: Usage of Wye Cables with Terminating Plug ........................................................................... 140
Figure 123: Construction of a Custom Shielded Cable ............................................................................... 142
Figure 124: Wiring Diagram – Cable with Continuous Shielding ................................................................ 143
Figure 125: Wiring Diagram – Cable without Continuous Shielding ........................................................... 143
Figure 126: IC694MDL230 ........................................................................................................................ 146
Figure 127: Field Wiring MDL230 .............................................................................................................. 148
Figure 128: IC694MDL231 ........................................................................................................................ 149
Figure 130: IC694MDL240 ........................................................................................................................ 152
Figure 131: Thermal Derating MDL240 ..................................................................................................... 153
Figure 133: IC694MDL241 ........................................................................................................................ 155
Contents xxiv
Figure 135: IC694MDL250 ........................................................................................................................ 158
Figure 137: IC694MDL260 ........................................................................................................................ 162
Figure 138: Thermal Derating Curve MDL260 ............................................................................................ 164
Figure 140: IC694MDL632 ........................................................................................................................ 167
Figure 143: IC694MDL634 ........................................................................................................................ 171
Figure 145: IC694MDL635 ........................................................................................................................ 174
Figure 148: IC694MDL645 ........................................................................................................................ 178
Figure 150: IC694MDL646 ........................................................................................................................ 181
Figure 152: IC694MDL648 ........................................................................................................................ 184
Figure 155: IC694MDL654 ........................................................................................................................ 188
Figure 156: Thermal Derating MDL654 & MDL655 .................................................................................... 190
Figure 157: Left-side and Right-side Connectors MDL654, MDL655, MDL658 ............................................ 190
Figure 158: Attachment to Terminal Blocks for Field Wiring ...................................................................... 191
Figure 159: Wiring for Negative Logic MDL654 ......................................................................................... 191
Figure 160: IC694MDL660 ........................................................................................................................ 192
Contents xxv
Figure 163: IC695MDL664 ........................................................................................................................ 196
Figure 166: Normal Thresholds MDL664 ................................................................................................... 200
Figure 167: Tri-State Input Circuit Diagram ............................................................................................... 200
Figure 168: Tri-State Thresholds MDL664.................................................................................................. 200
Figure 169: Quad-State Input Circuit Diagram ........................................................................................... 201
Figure 170: Quad-State Thresholds MDL664 ............................................................................................. 201
Figure 171: Effect of Input Filter Time........................................................................................................ 207
Figure 172: IC694ACC300 ......................................................................................................................... 208
Figure 173: Mode Switch........................................................................................................................... 208
Figure 174: IC694MDL310 ........................................................................................................................ 210
Figure 177: IC694MDL330 ........................................................................................................................ 214
Figure 180: IC694MDL340 ........................................................................................................................ 218
Figure 181: Thermal Derating IC694MDL340C .......................................................................................... 220
Figure 183: IC694MDL350 ........................................................................................................................ 222
Figure 184: DIP Switch Setting MDL350 .................................................................................................... 224
Figure 186: IC694MDL390 ........................................................................................................................ 226
Contents xxvi
Figure 189: IC694MDL730 ........................................................................................................................ 230
Figure 192: IC694MDL732 ........................................................................................................................ 233
Figure 194: IC694MDL734 ........................................................................................................................ 236
Figure 196: IC694MDL740 ........................................................................................................................ 239
Figure 198: IC694MDL741 ........................................................................................................................ 242
Figure 200: IC694MDL742 ........................................................................................................................ 245
Figure 203: IC694MDL752 ........................................................................................................................ 249
Figure 204: Field Wiring Pinouts MDL752 .................................................................................................. 251
Figure 205: Typical Connections Diagram MDL752 ................................................................................... 252
Figure 206: IC694MDL753 ........................................................................................................................ 253
Figure 207: Field Wiring Pinouts MDL753 .................................................................................................. 255
Figure 208: IC694MDL754 ........................................................................................................................ 256
Figure 209: LED Layout MDL754 ................................................................................................................ 257
Figure 211: DIP Switch Settings MDL754 ................................................................................................... 259
Figure 213: IC694MDL758 ........................................................................................................................ 261
Contents xxvii
Figure 216: IC695MDL765 ........................................................................................................................ 266
Figure 220: Circuit Detail MDL765............................................................................................................. 272
Figure 221: IC694MDL916 ........................................................................................................................ 280
Figure 223: Suppression of DC Loads MDL916 ........................................................................................... 283
Figure 224: Suppression of AC Loads MDL916 ........................................................................................... 283
Figure 225: DIP Switch Settings MDL916 ................................................................................................... 284
Figure 226: Typical Relay Output Circuit MDL916 ...................................................................................... 285
Figure 227: IC694MDL930 ........................................................................................................................ 286
Figure 232: IC694MDL931 ........................................................................................................................ 290
Figure 237: IC694MDL940 ........................................................................................................................ 296
Figure 241: IC694APU300 ......................................................................................................................... 302
Contents xxviii
Figure 242: Input Impedance APU300 ....................................................................................................... 306
Figure 243: Field Wiring APU300 ............................................................................................................... 307
Figure 244: IC694APU305 ......................................................................................................................... 312
Figure 245: Field Wiring APU305 ............................................................................................................... 314
Figure 246: Typical Connections APU305 .................................................................................................. 315
Figure 247: IC695HSC308 ......................................................................................................................... 328
Figure 248: LED Layout HSC304 & HSC308 ................................................................................................ 329
Figure 249: Thermal Derating HSC304 Outputs ........................................................................................ 331
Figure 250: Thermal Derating HSC308 Outputs ........................................................................................ 332
Figure 251: Field Wiring HSC304 ............................................................................................................... 333
Figure 252: Field Wiring HSC308 ............................................................................................................... 334
Figure 253: IC694MDR390 ........................................................................................................................ 335
Figure 254: Suppression of DC Loads MDR390 .......................................................................................... 337
Figure 255: Suppression of AC Loads MDR390 .......................................................................................... 337
Figure 256: Field Wiring Diagram MDR390 ................................................................................................ 338
Figure 257: IC695ALG112 ......................................................................................................................... 340
Figure 258: Field Wiring ALG106 ............................................................................................................... 344
Figure 259: Field Wiring: ALG112 .............................................................................................................. 345
Figure 260: Scaling Example ALG106 or ALG112 ....................................................................................... 348
Figure 262: IC694ALG220 ......................................................................................................................... 358
Figure 263: Input Voltage Scaling: ALG220 ............................................................................................... 360
Figure 264: Field Wiring ALG220 ........................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 265: IC694ALG221 ......................................................................................................................... 362
Figure 266: Input Current Scaling ALG221 ................................................................................................. 364
Figure 268: IC694ALG222 ......................................................................................................................... 367
Contents xxix
Figure 269: Input Scaling ALG222 ............................................................................................................. 371
Figure 270: Field Wiring Single-Ended ALG222 .......................................................................................... 374
Figure 271: Field Wiring Differential ALG222 ............................................................................................. 374
Figure 272: IC694ALG223 ......................................................................................................................... 375
Figure 275: Connection Example 1 ALG222 ............................................................................................... 382
Figure 277: IC694ALG232 ......................................................................................................................... 384
Figure 279: Field Wiring Single-Ended ALG232 .......................................................................................... 395
Figure 280: Field Wiring Differential ALG232 ............................................................................................. 395
Figure 281: IC694ALG233 ......................................................................................................................... 396
F i g u r e 2 8 4 : C o n n e c t i o n E x a m p l e 1 A L G 2 3 3 ...................................................................... 408
Figure 286: IC695ALG616 ......................................................................................................................... 409
Figure 289: Field Wiring, Single-Ended ALG608 or ALG616 ........................................................................ 425
Figure 290: Field Wiring, Differential Mode ALG608 or ALG616 ................................................................. 427
Figure 291: IC694ALG390 ......................................................................................................................... 430
Figure 292: D/A Bits versus Output Voltage ............................................................................................... 432
Figure 293: Scaling Units versus Output Voltage ....................................................................................... 432
Figure 294: IC694ALG391 ......................................................................................................................... 434
Figure 295: Derating Curve ALG391 .......................................................................................................... 436
Contents xxx
Figure 296: Relationship between Output Value (%AQ) and Output Current: ALG391................................ 436
Figure 298: Wiring Example ALG391 ......................................................................................................... 438
Figure 299: IC694ALG392 ......................................................................................................................... 440
Figure 300: Derating for Current Outputs: ALG392.................................................................................... 443
Figure 301: Derating for Mixed Current & Voltage Outputs: ALG392 ......................................................... 443
Figure 302: Scaling for Current Modes: ALG392 ........................................................................................ 444
Figure 303: Scaling for Voltage Modes: ALG392 ........................................................................................ 444
Figure 305: IC695ALG708 ......................................................................................................................... 449
Figure 306: Thermal Derating Curves for ALG708 at selected Voltage Levels (Current Mode only) ............. 452
Figure 307: Channel Scaling Example ........................................................................................................ 459
Figure 308: Field Wiring ALG704 & ALG708 ............................................................................................... 468
Figure 309: IC695ALG808 ......................................................................................................................... 470
Figure 310: Channel Scaling Example ........................................................................................................ 479
Figure 311: Field Wiring: ALG808 .............................................................................................................. 489
Figure 312: Use of Hand-Held HART Calibrator .......................................................................................... 494
Figure 313: IC695ALG626 ......................................................................................................................... 496
Figure 314: Thermal Derating ALG626 Current Mode ................................................................................ 499
Figure 315: Scaling Example ALG626/ALG628 ........................................................................................... 503
Figure 316: Scaling Example ALG626/ALG628 ........................................................................................... 503
Figure 317: Field Wiring Single-Ended ALG626 or ALG628 ......................................................................... 513
Figure 318: Field Wiring Differential Mode ALG626 or ALG628 .................................................................. 514
Figure 319: HART 2-Wire Current Loop Connection ................................................................................... 515
Figure 320: HART Active Source Device Connection .................................................................................. 515
Figure 321: IC695ALG728 ......................................................................................................................... 516
Figure 322: Thermal Derating Charts ALG728 Current Mode ..................................................................... 519
Contents xxxi
Figure 323: Scaling Example ALG728 ........................................................................................................ 527
Figure 325: Attaching HART 2-Wire Output Device ................................................................................... 537
Figure 326: HART Input Transmitter attached to Analog Output Channel .................................................. 537
Figure 327: Ladder Logic using ALL_HART_STRUCT & DYN_HART_STRUCT ............................................... 570
Figure 328: Ladder Logic Using Swap DWord & Swap Word ....................................................................... 572
Figure 329: Ladder Logic for ACSII Pack ..................................................................................................... 574
Figure 330: Ladder Logic for ACSII Unpack................................................................................................. 575
Figure 331: IC694ALG442 ......................................................................................................................... 578
Figure 333: Input Voltage Scaling ALG442 ................................................................................................ 584
Figure 334: Input Current Scaling ALG442 ................................................................................................. 584
Figure 335: Output Voltage Scaling ALG442 ............................................................................................. 585
Figure 336: Output Current Scaling ALG442 .............................................................................................. 585
Figure 337: Ramp Mode Example ALG442 ................................................................................................. 590
Figure 338: COMMREQ usage ALG442 ...................................................................................................... 591
Figure 339: COMMREQ Example ALG442 .................................................................................................. 596
Figure 340: IC694ALG542 ......................................................................................................................... 597
Figure 342: Input Scaling Example ALG542 ............................................................................................... 603
Figure 343: Output Scaling Example ALG542 ............................................................................................ 603
Figure 344: Ramp Mode Example ALG542 ................................................................................................. 616
Figure 345: IC695ALG600 ......................................................................................................................... 627
Figure 346: Thermocouple / Voltage / Current Field Wiring ALG600 .......................................................... 634
Figure 347: RTD / Resistance Field Wiring ALG600..................................................................................... 634
Figure 348: Installing Cold Junction Sensor ................................................................................................ 635
Figure 349: Input Scaling Example 1: ALG600 ............................................................................................ 639
Contents xxxii
Figure 350: Input Scaling Example 2: ALG600 ............................................................................................ 640
Figure 351: IC695ALG306 ......................................................................................................................... 655
Figure 352: IC695ALG412 ......................................................................................................................... 661
Figure 353: Field Wiring ALG306, ALG312, ALG412 (Thermocouple/Voltage) ........................................... 667
Figure 354: Installing Cold Junction Sensor ................................................................................................ 669
Figure 355: Input Scaling Example 1 .......................................................................................................... 673
Figure 356: Input Scaling Example 2 .......................................................................................................... 673
Figure 357: IC695ALG508 ......................................................................................................................... 686
Figure 358: Field Wiring for RTDs ALG508 ................................................................................................. 695
Figure 359: Input Scaling Example ALG508 ............................................................................................... 698
Figure 360: IC694BEM320......................................................................................................................... 709
Figure 361: Removable Cover BEM320 ...................................................................................................... 710
Figure 362: Module Size Selection (JP1) BEM320 ....................................................................................... 710
Figure 363: IC694BEM321......................................................................................................................... 711
Figure 364: Fuse location BEM321 ............................................................................................................. 712
Figure 365: IC694BEM331......................................................................................................................... 713
Figure 366: Terminal Assignments BEM331 .............................................................................................. 715
Figure 367: Interconnection of Devices on Genius Bus............................................................................... 715
Figure 368: Wiring Genius Bus Signals for Continuous Signal Path ............................................................. 716
Figure 369: Installing Genius Bus Terminating Resistor .............................................................................. 717
Figure 370: IC695CMM004 ....................................................................................................................... 719
Figure 371: Module LEDs & Ethernet Port LEDs: CMM004 .......................................................................... 720
Figure 372: RJ-45 Jack & Pinouts ................................................................................................................ 722
Figure 373: Termination RS-485 4-Wire Full Duplex .................................................................................. 724
Figure 374: Termination RS-485 2-Wire Half Duplex .................................................................................. 724
Figure 375: Using the Module Internal Jumpers & Built-in 120 Resistor for Termination .......................... 724
Figure 376: Using External Jumper & Built-in 120 Resistor for RS-485 4-Wire Full Duplex ......................... 725
Contents xxxiii
Figure 377: Using External Jumper & Built-in 120 Resistor for RS-485 2-Wire Half Duplex ........................ 725
Figure 378: IC695CMX128 ........................................................................................................................ 726
Figure 379: IC695RMX128 ........................................................................................................................ 728
Figure 380: IC695RMX228 ........................................................................................................................ 728
Figure 381: IC694DNM200 ....................................................................................................................... 731
Figure 382: DeviceNet Bus Topology ......................................................................................................... 733
Figure 383: DeviceNet Connector Pinout .................................................................................................. 735
Figure 384: DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Installation ........................................................................... 735
Figure 385: DeviceNet Wiring for End of Segment ..................................................................................... 735
Figure 386: DeviceNet Wiring for Daisy Chain ........................................................................................... 735
Figure 387: IC694DSM314 ........................................................................................................................ 737
Figure 388: System Overview: DSM314 ..................................................................................................... 738
Figure 389: DSM314 Features ................................................................................................................... 739
Figure 390: IC694DSM324 ........................................................................................................................ 740
Figure 391: System Overview: DSM324 ..................................................................................................... 741
Figure 392: DSM324 Features ................................................................................................................... 742
Figure 393: IC695PMM335 ....................................................................................................................... 744
Figure 394: PMM335 with DIN-Rail Mounted FTB001 Terminal Blocks ....................................................... 745
Figure 395: IC695ECM850 ........................................................................................................................ 746
Figure 396: ECM850 Ethernet Connections (Located Underneath Module) ................................................ 749
Figure 397: IC695ETM001 ......................................................................................................................... 751
Figure 398: IC695ETM001-Kxxx ................................................................................................................ 751
Figure 399: Ethernet Features ETM001-Jx .................................................................................................. 754
Figure 400: Ethernet Features ETM001-Kxxx ............................................................................................. 755
Figure 400: EDS001 Features at a Glance................................................................................................... 757
Figure 401: EIS001 Front View................................................................................................................... 760
Figure 402: IC695NIU001 .......................................................................................................................... 762
Contents xxxiv
Figure 403: IC695NIU001 PLUS ................................................................................................................. 765
Figure 404: IC695PBM300 ........................................................................................................................ 770
Figure 405: IC695PBS301 .......................................................................................................................... 772
Figure 406: IC695PNC001 (-Bxxx version) ................................................................................................. 775
Figure 407: IC695PNS001-Bxxx ................................................................................................................. 779
Figure 408: IC695CEP001 with IC694CEE001 Attached ............................................................................. 788
Figure 409: Mounting Diagram CEP001 & CEE001 .................................................................................... 792
Figure 410: Attaching CEE001 to CEP001 .................................................................................................. 792
Figure 411: DIN Rail Mounting Sequence .................................................................................................. 794
Figure 412: Panel Mounting Diagram: CEP001 or CEE001 .......................................................................... 795
Figure 413: Ground Connection Diagram .................................................................................................. 796
Figure 414: Power Terminal Block CEP001 ................................................................................................ 798
Figure 415: CEP001 Power Terminal Wiring .............................................................................................. 798
Figure 416: Locations of Ethernet Ports CEP001 ........................................................................................ 800
Figure 417: IC695GCG001 ........................................................................................................................ 804
Figure 418: IC695PRS015.......................................................................................................................... 808
Figure 419: RJ-45 Pinout PRS015 ............................................................................................................... 818
Figure 420: Externally-Mounted Terminating Resistor ............................................................................... 818
Figure 421: Using the Internal Terminating Resistor PRS015 ..................................................................... 819
Figure 422: Additional Depth due to Extended High-Density Terminal Blocks ............................................ 822
Figure 423: Depth Comparison: High-Density vs Extended High-Density Terminal Block ........................... 822
Figure 424: 36-Terminal Box-Style Terminal Block ..................................................................................... 823
Figure 425: Wire Preparation and Insertion into Box-Style Terminal Block ................................................. 824
Figure 426: 36-Terminal Spring-Style Terminal Block ................................................................................ 824
Figure 427: Inserting Terminal Block into its Cover .................................................................................... 826
Figure 428: Installing a High-Density Terminal Block ................................................................................. 826
Figure 429: Removing a High-Density Terminal Block ............................................................................... 827
Contents xxxv
Figure 430: Low-Density Terminal Block Quick Connect System ................................................................ 828
Figure 431: IC693ACC Terminal Block ....................................................................................................... 830
Figure 432: IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block........................................................................................ 831
Figure 435: Connector Pin Assignments for D-Connector with 20 Terminals.............................................. 834
Figure 436: IC693ACC334 I/O Faceplate Installation ................................................................................. 836
Figure 437: IC693ACC334 I/O Faceplate Snaps into Place .......................................................................... 836
Figure 438: IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 Cable Construction ............................................................... 837
Figure 439: Cable Construction for all other IC693CBL* Cables ................................................................. 837
Figure 440: Connector Depth for IC693CBL* Cables .................................................................................. 838
Figure 441: D-Connector Pinout ................................................................................................................ 840
Figure 442: Allowance for Extra Depth using Straight-On Connectors........................................................ 840
Figure 443: IC693ACC337 Terminal Block Top and Front Views ................................................................. 841
Figure 445: Pinout Assignments on Dual D-Connector Modules ................................................................ 844
Figure 446: High-Density TBQC System Overview ..................................................................................... 845
Figure 447: High-Density Compact Remote Terminal Base IC694RTB032 Usage ....................................... 845
Figure 448: IC694RTB032 High-Density Remote Base, 36-Terminal........................................................... 847
Figure 449: IC694TBC032 High-Density Terminal Block with Single 36-Pin D Connector ........................... 849
Figure 450: IC694CBL* Cable Wiring Details.............................................................................................. 850
Figure 451: Unshielded I/O Cable, Single Shield (Side View) ...................................................................... 863
Figure 452: Multiple Communication/High-Speed Cables, Single RF Shield (Side View) ............................. 863
Figure 453: Cable Clamp IC697ACC736 Diagrams ..................................................................................... 872
Figure 454: Cable Diameter Maximum with Cable Clamp .......................................................................... 873
Figure 455: Insulation Cover Removal ....................................................................................................... 874
Figure 456: Typical Cable Clamp Assembly installation with Expansion Backplane ..................................... 874
Contents xxxvi
Section 1: Introduction
The PACSystems RX3i controller is a member of the PACSystems family of programmable automation
controllers (PACs). Like the rest of the PACSystems family, the RX3i features a single control engine and
universal programming environment to provide application portability across multiple hardware platforms.
This chapter is an overview of PACSystems RX3i products and features. The rest of the manual describes RX3i
products in detail, and explains installation procedures.
1.1 Revisions of this Manual

Rev Date Description
 Addition of ETM001-Kxxx (ETM module redesign and compatibility change)

T Sep-19
 Updates with Respect to FW 9.90
 Addition of IC695CPL410 (new CPU module)

 Addition of IC695PNS101 (PNS module for RX3i Sequence of Events)
S Jul-18  Updated power loadings for CPE330/CPE310/CPE305/CPE302,
 Updated power loadings for PNC001 & PNS001 which have two hardware
versions.
R Mar-18 Added Thermal Derating for MDL340C (Figure 181).
Updated throughout for addition of CPE302, CPE115.
Updated Figure 99 & Figure 105 to emphasize need for connecting DC- to Earth Ground.
Q Feb-18
Deleted incorrect Isolated Power Supply information for ALG112, ALG221, ALG223, and
ALG233.
Note in Section1.3 concerning rackless CPUs
Notes throughout about availability of web-based tool for firmware updates for CPUs
with no serial port.
P Dec-17
Correction for ALG390 power connection (Sections 10.1 & 10.1.5).
Notes concerning concurrent PNC001, PNS001 and GCG001 hardware updates.
Added footnote #44 for ALG106 & ALG112 modules.
Updated Spec Sheets for ALG106/112/306/412/508/600/704/708/728/808 &

N Sep-17
CMM002/004.
Update customer care contact info.
Introduction 1
Updated Chapter 11 for the Remote Hart Get Device Information COMMREQ.
M Jul-16 Additionally, there were updates to clarify the upper word (command status) of the two-
word COMMREQ status word.
Added new sections to Analog Output Module 8-Channel Current/Voltage Isolated:

L Feb-16
IC695ALG808 for Configuration: IC695ALG808 and Module Data: IC695ALG808.
K Dec-15 Updated RX3i CEP Carrier list of Supported I/O Modules
New hardware replaces the existing hardware revision in production after full
consumption of previous revision FAB boards (C0 rev). This is applicable for both Rx3i
J Nov-15 and 90-30 systems.
Updated Output points and voltage range
H Sep-15 Updated module load requirements
Added new modules IC695EDS001 and IC695EIS001.
Added HART Pass Though functionality.
Updated list of modules supported by IC695CEP001 (up to firmware rev 2.40) &
G Jun-15
IC694CEE001.
Revised sense of Module I/O Data Ready bit in Module Status for MDL250, MDL260,
MDL350 & MDL660. The sense of this bit was inverted in prior documentation and is
corrected in this update.
F Dec-14 Updates for IC695CEP001 & IC694CEE001
Introduction 2
Added new modules IC694MDL648, IC694MDL730, IC694MDL758, IC694MDR390,

IC694ALG542, IC695RMX228, IC695PMM335, IC695ECM850, IC695PNS001,
IC695GCG001, IC695CEP001 & IC694CEE001.
Revised Hot Insertion and Removal table in Section 2:.
Updated content for IC694APU300 (added Enhanced mode) in Section 8:.
Moved IC694APU305 to Section 8:.

E Jul-14
Updated power consumption specifications for ALG106 and ALG112.
Corrected Field Wiring diagrams for ALG222 & ALG232
Updated Section 17:. For IC693ACC3xx terminal blocks, added new diagrams and
connection info between terminals and D-connectors. Added overview of how this
quick-connect system works. Also absorbed former Appendix B (32-point module
terminal blocks and cables) into Section 17:.
Introduction 3
1.2 Overview
1.2.1 Features
High-speed processor and patented technology for faster throughput
▪ Universal backplane that supports two different backplane busses per module slot:
o High-speed, PCI-based for fast throughput of new advanced I/O
o Serial backplane for RX3i serial modules and easy migration of Series 90-30 I/O
▪ Selection of CPUs to meet a wide range of programming and performance needs. Refer to
the PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Reference Manual, GFK-2222. The RX3i
product line of CPUs includes:
CPL410 1.2 GHz AMD G-Series Quad Core, 64 MB user memory with Linux
CPE400 1.2 GHz AMD G-Series Quad Core, 64 MB user memory with Field Agent
CPE330 1 GHz dual core CPU with 64 MB of user memory and embedded Ethernet/PROFINET
CPE302 1.1 GHz CPU with 2 MB of user memory and embedded Ethernet
CPE115 1 GHz CPU with 1.5 MB of user memory and embedded Ethernet/PROFINET
CPE100 1 GHz CPU with 1 MB of user memory and embedded Ethernet/PROFINET
CPU310 300 MHz CPU with 10 MB of user memory
CPU315 1 GHz CPU with 20 MB of user memory
CPU320 1 GHz CPU with 64 MB of user memory
CRU320 1 GHz Redundancy CPU with 64 MB of user memory
NIU001 300 MHz Ethernet Network Interface Unit
NIU001+ 1.1 GHz Ethernet Network Interface Unit
▪ Memory for ladder logic documentation and machine documentation in the controller to
reduce downtime and improve troubleshooting
▪ Open communications support
Introduction 4
▪ Variety of discrete, analog, and special-purpose modules
▪ Hot insertion in both the PCI Backplane and Serial Backplane for new and migrated I/O
modules. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.
▪ Isolated 24 Vdc terminal for I/O modules and a grounding bar that reduces user wiring
1.2.2 Programming and Configuration

PACSystems equipment is configured and programmed using Proficy Machine Edition (PME) software. PME
features a common user interface across product families and drag-and-drop editing. PME also includes a
built-in Web server for real-time data delivery during system operation.
 For more information about programming, instruction sets, syntax and diagnostics, refer to the
PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Programmer’s Reference Manual, GFK-2950.
 For more information about configuration and CPU features, refer to the PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-
EP CPU Reference Manual, GFK-2222.
1.2.3 PACSystems Documentation
1.2.3.1.1 PACSystems Manuals

PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Reference Manual GFK-2222
PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Programmer’s Reference Manual GFK-2950
PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User Manual GFK-2224
PACSystems TCP/IP Ethernet Communications Station Manager User Manual GFK-2225
C Programmer’s Toolkit for PACSystems GFK-2259
PACSystems Memory Xchange Modules User’s Manual GFK-2300
PACSystems Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User Manual GFK-2308
PACSystems Battery and Energy Pack Manual GFK-2741
PAC Machine Edition Logic Developer Getting Started GFK-1918
PAC Process Systems Getting Started Guide GFK-2487
High-Speed Counter Modules for PACSystems* RX3i and Series 90*-30 User’s Manual GFK-0293
PACSystems RXi, RX3i and RSTi-EP Controller Secure Deployment Guide GFK-2830
PACSystems HART Pass Through User Manual GFK-2929
Introduction 5
1.2.3.1.2 RX3i Manuals

DSM324i Motion Controller for PACSystems RX3i and Series 90-30 User’s Manual GFK-2347
PACSystems RX3i PROFIBUS Modules User’s Manual GFK-2301
PACSystems RX3i Max-On Hot Standby Redundancy User’s Manual GFK-2409
PACSystems RX3i Ethernet Network Interface Unit User’s Manual GFK-2439
PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion Controller User’s Manual GFK-2448
PACSystems RX3i PROFINET I/O Controller Manual GFK-2571
PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner Manual GFK-2737
PACSystems RX3i CEP PROFINET Scanner User Manual GFK-2883
PACSystems RX3i IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module User Manual GFK-2849
PACSystems RX3i Serial Communications Modules User’s Manual GFK-2460
PACSystems RX3i Genius Communications Gateway User Manual GFK-2892
PACSystems RX3i DNP3 Outstation Module IC695EDS001 User’s Manual GFK-2911
PACSystems RX3i IEC 104 Server Module IC695EIS001User’s Manual GFK-2949
PACSystems RX3i IC695CPE400 1.2GHz 64MB Rackless CPU w/Field Agent QSG GFK-3002
PACSystems RX3i IC695CPL410 1.2GHz 64MB Rackless CPU w/Linux QSG GFK-3053
PACSystems RX3i Sequence of Events User Manual GFK-3050
In addition to these manuals, datasheets and product update documents describe individual modules and
product revisions. The most recent PACSystems documentation is available on the GE support website
www.geautomation.com/support.
1.3 Modules for RX3i Systems

The tables in this section list the types of modules that can be included in an RX3i system:
▪ RX3i Modules (IC695 and IC694)
IC695 modules must be installed in a Universal (IC695CHSxxx) Backplane.

IC694 modules are compatible with the RX3i serial bus in Universal Backplanes and RX3i Serial Expansion
(IC694CHSxxx) Backplanes.
Introduction 6
Note: This document assumes the host RX3i CPU is installed in a rack, and compatible modules listed are
installed in the main rack or in a connected rack. However, for the CPE100, CPE115, CPE400 and CPL410,
which are rackless CPUs, those assumptions are not valid. If the host RX3i CPU is not being installed in an
RX3i rack, please refer to the documentation for that particular CPU to determine compatibility.
1.3.1 RX3i Modules (IC695 and IC694)

Catalog Minimum RX3i
Description
Number CPU Version
RX3i Power Supplies
Power Supply 120/240 Vac 125Vdc 40W IC695PSA040 All
Power Supply 24Vdc 40W IC695PSD040 All
Power Supply 24Vdc 40W Multi-purpose IC695PSD140 All
Power Supply 120/240 Vac 125Vdc 40W Multi-Purpose IC695PSA140 All
Power Supply 120/240 Vac 125Vdc 30W Serial Expansion IC694PWR321 All
Power Supply 120/240 Vac 125Vdc 30W High Capacity Serial

IC694PWR330 All
Expansion
Power Supply 24Vdc 30W High Capacity Serial Expansion IC694PWR331 All
Discrete Input Modules
Input Simulator Module IC694ACC300 All
Input 120 Vac 8-Pt Isolated IC694MDL230 All
Input 240 Vac 8-Pt Isolated IC694MDL231 All
Input 120 Vac 16-Pt IC694MDL240 All
Input 24Vac 16-Pt IC694MDL241 All
Input 120 Vac 16-Pt Isolated IC694MDL250 3.50
Input 120 Vac 32-Pt Grouped IC694MDL260 3.50
Input 125Vdc 8-Pt Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL632 All
Introduction 7

Description
Number CPU Version
Input 24Vdc 16-Pt Pos/Neg Fast IC694MDL646 All
Input 48Vdc 16-Pt Pos/Neg Logic, 1ms filter IC694MDL648 All
Input 5/12Vdc (TTL) 32-Pt Pos/Neg IC694MDL654 All
Input 24Vdc 32-Pt Pos/Neg IC694MDL655 All
Input 24Vdc 32-Pt High-Density IC694MDL660 2.90
Input 24Vdc, 16-Pt, Pos Logic IC695MDL664 6.70
Discrete Output Modules
Output 120 Vac 0.5A 12-Pt IC694MDL310 All
Output 120/240 Vac 2A 8-Pt IC694MDL330 All
Output 120 Vac 0.5A 16-Pt IC694MDL340 All
Output 120/240 Vac Isolated 16-Pt IC694MDL350 3.50
Output 120/240 Vac 2A 5-Pt Isolated IC694MDL390 All
Output 12/24Vdc 2A 8-Pt Positive Logic IC694MDL730 All
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 8-Pt Positive Logic IC694MDL732 All
Output 125Vdc 1A 6-Pt Isolated Pos/Neg IC694MDL734 All
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 16-Pt Negative Logic IC694MDL741 All
Output 12/24Vdc 1A 16-Pt Positive Logic ESCP IC694MDL742 All
Output 5/24Vdc (TTL) 0.5A 32-Pt Negative Logic IC694MDL752 All
Output 24Vdc 32-Pt High-Density IC694MDL754 2.90
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 32-Pt Positive Logic with ESCP per group IC694MDL758 7.70
Output 2 Amp 16-Pt Positive Logic IC695MDL765 6.70
Introduction 8

Description
Number CPU Version
Output 4 Amp 16-Pt Relay IC694MDL916 3.81
Output Relay N.O. 4 A 8-Pt Isolated IC694MDL930 All
Output Relay N.C. and Form C 3 A 8-Pt Isolated IC694MDL931 All
Output Relay N.O. 2 A 16-Pt IC694MDL940 All
Discrete Mixed Modules
High-Speed Counter Module (Classic Mode) All

IC694APU300
High-Speed Counter Module (Enhanced Mode) 7.13
Special I/O Processor IC694APU305 2.90
High-Speed Counter Module, 1.5MHz, 8 Inputs, 7 Outputs IC695HSC304 3.81
High-Speed Counter Module, 1.5MHz, 16 Inputs, 14 Outputs IC695HSC308 3.81
Mixed I/O 24Vdc Input (8-Pt) N.O. Relay Output (8-Pt) IC694MDR390 All
Analog Input Modules
Analog Input Module, 6 Channel Isolated Voltage/Current IC695ALG106 5.00
Analog Input Module, 12 Channel Isolated Voltage/Current IC695ALG112 5.00
Input Analog 4pt Voltage IC694ALG220 All
Input Analog 4pt Current IC694ALG221 All
Input Analog 16 Single-Ended/8 Differential Voltage IC694ALG222 All
Input Analog 16 Single-Ended Current IC694ALG223 All
Input Analog 16 Channel Current IC694ALG232 6.70
Input Analog 16 Channel Voltage IC694ALG233 6.70
Isolated Thermocouple Input Module, 6 Channels IC695ALG306 5.50
Isolated RTD Input Module, 8 Channels IC695ALG508 5.50
Introduction 9

Description
Number CPU Version
Universal Analog Input Module, Voltage, Current, Resistance, RTD, TC IC695ALG600 2.80
Analog Input Module, 8 Channel Non-Isolated / 4 Channel Differential IC695ALG608 3.00
Analog Input Module, 16 Channel Non-Isolated / 8 Channel Differential IC695ALG616 3.00
Analog Input Module, 16 Channel Non-Isolated / 8 Channel Differential

IC695ALG626 3.50
with HART Communications
Analog Input Module, 8 Channel Non-Isolated / 4 Channel Differential

IC695ALG628 3.50
with HART Communications
Analog Output Modules
Output Analog Voltage 2 Channels IC694ALG390 All
Output Analog Current 2 Channels IC694ALG391 All
Output Analog Current/Voltage 8 Channels IC694ALG392 All
Output Analog Current/Voltage 4 Channels IC695ALG704 3.00
Output Analog Current/Voltage 8 Channels IC695ALG708 3.00
Output Analog Current/Voltage 8 Channels with HART

IC695ALG728 3.50
Communications
Analog Output Current/Voltage 8 Channels, Isolated IC695ALG808 5.00
Analog Mixed I/O Modules
Analog Module, 4-Inputs, 2-Outputs, Current/Voltage IC694ALG442 All
Analog Module, 4-Inputs, 2-Outputs, Current/Voltage with Advanced

IC694ALG542 6.70
Diagnostics
Special Purpose Modules
I/O Link Interface Module IC694BEM320 All
I/O Link Master Module IC694BEM321 All
Genius Bus Controller Module IC694BEM331 All
Serial Communications Module, 2 Ports IC695CMM002 3.83
Serial Communications Module, 4 Ports IC695CMM004 3.83
Introduction 10

Description
Number CPU Version
Memory Exchange Module IC695CMX128 5.50
DeviceNet Master Module IC694DNM200 3.50
DSM314 Motion Controller IC694DSM314 All
DSM324 Motion Controller IC694DSM324 2.80
IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module IC695ECM850 8.05
RX3i DNP3 Outstation Module IC695EDS001 8.05
RX3i Ethernet 104 Server Module IC695EIS001 8.05
Ethernet Transmitter Module IC695ETM001 All
Genius Communications Gateway IC695GCG001 8.15
Serial Bus Transmitter Module IC695LRE001 All
Ethernet Network Interface Unit Module IC695NIU001 NA
PROFIBUS Master Module IC695PBM300 2.90
PROFIBUS Slave Module IC695PBS301 3.00
PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion Controller IC695PMM335 5.60
CPU315/CPU32
PROFINET Controller Module IC695PNC001 0 7.00
CPE330 8.50
CPU315/CPU32
0
CPE302/CPE305
PROFINET Scanner Module IC695PNS001
/CPE310 7.10
CRU320 8.00
CPE330 8.50
PROFINET Scanner Module for RX3i Sequence of Events IC695PNS101 CPE330 9.55
Pressure Transducer Module IC695PRS015 6.50
Redundancy Memory Xchange Module, Multi-Mode Fiber IC695RMX128 5.70
Redundancy Memory Xchange Module, Single-Mode Fiber IC695RMX228 5.70
Introduction 11
1.4 Backplanes and Power Supplies
1.4.1 RX3i Universal Backplane

The RX3i system must include at least one Universal Backplane: it accommodates the RX3i CPU. Three sizes
of Universal Backplane are available: 7-slot IC695CHS007, 12-slot IC695CHS012 (Figure 1), and 16-slot
(IC695CHS016).
With its dual-purpose backplane, the RX3i Universal Backplane supports both PCI-based backplane (IC695)
and serial backplane (IC693 and IC694) I/O and option modules. It also supports Series 90-30 I/O and option
modules.
TB 1
E
1
X
P
A
N
S
I
O
8 N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 1: 12-Slot Universal Backplane IC695CHS012
Introduction 12
1.4.2 Expansion (12-slot and 16-slot Universal Backplanes

Only)
Whenever an application requires more modules than the selected Universal
Backplane can accommodate, or whenever some modules must be installed in
another location, an RX3i Serial Bus Transmitter Module, IC695LRE001 (Figure 2),
must be installed in the last slot of the Universal Backplane. Note that only 12-slot and
16-slot Universal Backplanes accommodate the LRE001.
The Bus Transmitter module (LRE001) is connected to the first Expansion or Remote
backplane via a cable. Subsequent racks are daisy-chained together using cables (see
Figure 5 through Figure 7).
The D-connector (right side, Figure 3) is used to connect the Rx3i Serial Expansion
backplane to the LRE001.
Remote Backplanes may also be connected to the RX3i system in this manner.
Figure 2: LRE001
Figure 3: 5-Slot RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane IC694CHS398
Use of Expansion and Remote Backplanes is summarized on the following pages.

For more information about the Serial Bus Transmitter module and cables, refer to
Section 5:.
Introduction 13
1.4.3 Backplanes Available for the RX3i System

Universal and Expansion Backplanes that are compatible with RX3i systems are listed below. Refer to Chapter
3 of this manual for descriptions and specifications of the RX3i Backplanes. For information about Series 90-
30 Expansion Backplanes, refer to the Series 90-30 I/O Modules Specifications Manual, GFK-0898.
Backplanes
RX3i 16-Slot Universal Backplane IC695CHS016
RX3i 10-Slot Serial Expansion Backplane IC694CHS392
Series 90-30 10-Slot Expansion Backplane IC693CHS392
Series 90-30 10-Slot Remote Expansion Backplane IC693CHS393
Series 90-30 5-Slot Remote Expansion Backplane IC693CHS399
Introduction 14
1.4.4 Power Supplies for RX3i Systems

Power Supplies for Universal and Serial Expansion Backplanes are listed below. Refer to Chapter 4 for
descriptions and specifications of the RX3i Power Supplies. For information about Series 90-30 Power
Supplies, refer to the GFK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O Modules Specifications Manual.
Installed in
Installed in
Serial
Description Catalog Number Universal
Expansion
Backplane
Backplane
POWER
Power Supplies
P/S FAULT
OVERTEMP
RX3i Power Supply,
IC695PSA040 OVERLOAD
120/240 Vac, 125Vdc, 
IC695PSA140
40 W Power Supply
40W DC
RX3i Power Supplies, IC695PSD040

24Vdc, 40 W IC695PSD140
RX3i Serial Expansion

Power Supply, 120/240 IC694PWR321 
Vac, 125Vdc

Power Supply, 120/240
IC694PWR330 
Vac, 125Vdc, High
Capacity

Power Supply, 24Vdc, IC694PWR331 
High Capacity
Series 90-30 Power PACSystems™

Supply for Expansion RX3i
IC693PWR321 
Backplane, 120/240 Vac,
125Vdc
Series 90-30 Power Figure 4: Typical Single-Wide

Supply for Expansion RX3i Power Supply Module
IC693PWR330 
Backplane, 120/240 Vac,
125Vdc, High Capacity
Introduction 15
Series 90-30 Power

Supply for Expansion
IC693PWR331 
Backplane, 24Vdc, High
Capacity
1.5 Expansion Systems

The PACSystems RX3i can include a combination of up to seven Serial Expansion and/or Remote Backplanes.
The Expansion Backplanes can be any of the RX3i or Series 90-30 models listed earlier. The Remote
Backplanes can be any of the Series 90-30 Remote Backplanes listed in the GEK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O Module
Specifications Manual.
 If the system includes only Expansion Backplanes, the total distance from the CPU to the last
backplane cannot be more than 15 meters (50 feet)
 If the system includes any Remote Backplanes, the total distance from the CPU to the last
backplane cannot be more than 213 meters (700 feet).
Remote Backplanes provide the same functionality as Expansion Backplanes over a much greater distance.
Remote Backplanes have extra isolation circuitry that lessens the effect of unbalanced ground conditions
that can occur when backplanes are located long distances from each other and do not share the same
ground system. Communications between the CPU and a Remote Backplane may take slightly longer than
communications between the CPU and an Expansion Backplane. This delay is usually small compared to the
total CPU scan time.
Introduction 16
1.5.1 Expansion System with One Expansion or Remote

Backplane
An Expansion system can consist of a Universal Backplane with just one Expansion or Remote Backplane.
This example includes one Universal Backplane Universal Backplane

IC695CHS012 and one Expansion Backplane,
IC694CHS392. Each Backplane in this example
has a DC Power Supply. Together, they
accommodate 19 discrete, analog, and special-
function modules.
These backplanes are located 15m (50 ft) apart.

I/O Expansion Cable
They are connected via an Expansion Cable IC693CBL302
IC693CBL302, which has a built-in terminating Cable Length:
resistor. 15 m (50 ft)
If it were necessary to locate the second

One Expansion Backplane
backplane more than 15m (50 ft) from the
Universal Backplane, a Series 90-30 Remote
Backplane could be used with a custom-length
cable and external terminating resistor.
Figure 5: RX3i System using One Universal Backplane and

1.5.2 Using Multiple Expansion and Remote Backplanes

The next two example systems are similar to each other except for the distance between the backplanes. The
example on the left includes two RX3i Expansion Backplanes and a Series 90-30 Expansion Backplane. The
Expansion Backplanes can be any combination of RX3i (IC694) and Series 90-30 (IC693) Expansion
Backplanes. I/O modules in the system can be any combination of RX3i and Series 90-30 modules.
In the example on the right, two of the backplanes must be installed beyond the 15 m (50-ft) limit of an
Expansion system. Two Series 90-30 Remote Backplanes are used in those locations. All other features of the
two example systems are the same, including their I/O modules.
Introduction 17
RX3i Universal Backplane RX3i Universal Backplane

IC695CHS012 IC695CHS012
Maximum Cable
RX3i Expansion Backplane RX3i Expansion Backplane Length:
IC694CHS392 IC694CHS392 15 meters
(50 feet)
RX3i Expansion Backplane Series 90-30 Remote

IC694CHS398 Backplane IC693CHS399
Maximum Cable
Length:
15 meters Maximum Cable
(50 feet) Length:
213 meters
(700 feet)
Series 90-30 Expansion Series 90-30 Remote

Backplane IC693CHS392 Backplane IC693CHS393
I/O Terminator I/O Terminator

Plug Plug
IC693ACC307 IC693ACC307
Figure 6: RX3i System using Multiple Expansion Backplanes Figure 7: Rx3i System using Expansion and Remote
Backplanes
Introduction 18
Section 2: Installation
This chapter provides general instructions for installing PACSystems RX3i equipment.
▪ Pre-Installation Check
▪ System Layout Guidelines
▪ Enclosures
▪ System Wiring
▪ System Grounding
▪ System Installation
For additional information about system installation, refer to the following:
▪ Chapter 3, Backplanes, for backplane dimension diagrams

▪ Chapter 4, Power Supplies, for power supply specifications and wiring diagrams
▪ Chapters 5 through 16 for module wiring diagrams and specifications
▪ Chapter 17 for information about terminal blocks for some higher-density modules, the Terminal
Block Quick Connect System (TBQC) and interconnect cables.
▪ Appendix A for general standards information
▪ Appendix B for information about calculating heat dissipation
▪ Appendix C for information about the Cable Clamping Assembly
2.1 Pre-Installation Check

Upon receiving your RX3i equipment, carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage. If any part of the
system is damaged, notify the carrier immediately. The damaged shipping container should be saved as
evidence for inspection by the carrier.
As the consignee, it is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage incurred during
shipment. However, we will fully cooperate with you, should such action be necessary.
After unpacking the RX3i equipment, record all serial numbers. Serial numbers are required if you should
need to contact Customer Care during the warranty period. All shipping containers and all packing material
should be saved should it be necessary to transport or ship any part of the system.
Verify that all components of the system have been received and that they agree with your order. If the
system received does not agree with your order, contact Customer Care.
If you need technical help, contact Technical Support. For phone numbers and email addresses, refer to
Contact Information.
Installation 19
2.2 System Layout Guidelines

A good layout helps minimize the chance of electrical shock to personnel working on the system. It lets
maintenance technicians easily access the unit to make measurements, load software, check indicator lights,
remove and replace modules, etc. It also makes it easier to trace wiring and locate components while
troubleshooting. In addition, proper system layout promotes good heat dissipation and helps eliminate
electrical noise from the system. Excess heat and noise are two major causes of electronic component
failure.
 Locate RX3i equipment away 1 11 10

from other components that
generate a lot of heat, such as
transformers, power supplies, 9
or power resistors.
 Locate RX3i equipment away
from components that 8
generate electrical noise such
as relays and contacts. 2
 Locate RX3i equipment away
7
from high-voltage
components and wiring, such
as circuit breakers and fusible
disconnects, transformers, and 6
motor wiring.
 Locate equipment at a 5
convenient level that allows
technicians reasonable access
for maintaining the system.
 Route sensitive input wires
away from electrically-noisy
wires such as discrete output
and AC wiring. This can be 3 4
facilitated by grouping I/O 1. RX3i 7. Power supply
modules to keep output 2. Wireway (Wire Duct) 8. Control transformer
3. Field device connection terminal block 9. Fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
modules separated from 4. Motor connection terminal block 10. Control relays
sensitive input modules. 5. Motor starters 11. Protected enclosure
6. Circuit board
 Clearance space of 10 cm (4 in)
on all four sides of each RX3i
Figure 8: System Layout Guidelines
backplane for
ventilation/cooling is required.
 RX3i backplanes are designed
to be mounted horizontally
due to thermal considerations.
Other mounting orientations
Installation 20
may affect system

performance, reliability, and
agency approvals, and are
therefore not recommended.
 Use shielded cable
connections with the shield
grounded at one end (at
source) for all analog modules,
including RTD and
Thermocouple modules.
▪
2.3 Enclosures
The RX3i system and its components are considered open equipment [having live electrical parts that may
be accessible to users] and must be installed in a protective enclosure or incorporated into other assemblies
manufactured to provide safety. At a minimum, the enclosure or assemblies shall provide a degree of
protection against solid objects up to 12mm (e.g. fingers). This equates to a NEMA/UL Type 1 enclosure or an
IP20 rating (IEC60529) providing at least a pollution degree 2 environment.
When an RX3i system is installed into an area designated as a Hazardous Area, then the enclosure must be
one that is only accessible by use of a tool. Refer to Appendix A for reference to specific product
certifications, types of Hazardous Area approvals, Hazardous Area warnings, and additional enclosure
requirements with respect to ATEX. The enclosure must be able to adequately dissipate the heat generated
by all of the components mounted inside so that no components overheat. Heat dissipation is also a factor in
determining the need for enclosure cooling options such as fans and air conditioning. A minimum space of at
least 102 mm (4 in) is required on all sides of the RX3i backplane for cooling. Additional space may be
required, depending on the amount of heat generated by the equipment during operation, or on other
Installation 21
requirements such as minimum bend radius for system cabling. Appendix B explains how to calculate heat
dissipation for RX3i modules and field devices in an enclosure.
2.3.1 RX3i Universal Backplane Dimensions and Spacing
102mm * 12-Slot 16-Slot 102mm *

(4.00in) 462mm 604.3mm (4.00in) 102mm *
(18.19in) (23.791in) 12-Slot 16-Slot (4.00in)
428mm 570.2mm
(16.85in) (22.45in)
Universal
90mm Backplane front 5.08mm 141.5mm
(3.54in) 0.20 dia. (5.57in)
view
typical
102mm *
31.5mm
(4.00in)
(1.24in)
* Allowance for cooling
148mm
(5.83in)
Side dimension is for standard modules with

doors closed.
Universal Side dimension does not include extra depth
Backplane with required for cables and connectors.
Modules installed
side view Modules with Extended High-Density
Terminal Blocks (such as Terminal Block
IC694TBB132) are approximately ½-inch
(13mm) deeper overall.
Figure 9: RX3i Universal Backplane Dimensions and Spacing
Installation 22
The mounting holes for the 12-slot RX3i Universal

Backplane match the 10-slot Series 90-30 Backplane
exactly, for easy upgrades.
Backplanes must be mounted horizontally, as represented

above, to meet product performance and reliability
specifications by providing adequate airflow around the
modules. Other mounting orientations may affect system
performance, reliability and agency approvals, and are
therefore not recommended.
Figure 10: Vertical Mounting Not Recommended
2.3.2 RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane Dimensions and

Spacing
Each backplane has standard attachment flanges for mounting on an electrical panel.
Installation 23
5-Slot 10-Slot
102mm * 102mm *
(4.00in) 265mm 433mm
(4.00in)
(10.43in) (17.44in) 102mm *
5-Slot 10-Slot (4.00in)
250mm 428mm
(9.84in) (16.85in)
90mm Expansion 130mm

(3.54in) Backplane front 5.08mm (5.12in)
view 0.20 dia.
typical
20mm
(0.79in) 102mm *
(4.00in)
* Allowance for cooling
142mm
(5.59in) Side dimension is for modules with doors
closed.
Side dimension does not include extra depth

required for cables and connectors.
Expansion
Modules with Extended High-Density Terminal
Backplane with
Blocks (such as Terminal Block IC694TBB132)
modules installed
are approximately ½-inch (13mm) deeper
side view
overall.
Figure 11: RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane Dimensions and Spacing
2.4 System Wiring

Adhere to the following information to avoid possible misrouting of wiring to I/O modules:
▪ Label all wires to and from I/O devices. Record circuit identification numbers or other pertinent data
on the inserts that go into the faceplate door of the module.
Installation 24
▪ Wires should be dressed so that each field I/O connector is fixed relative to its respective module.
WARNING
In addition to information provided here, always follow all wiring and safety codes that
apply to your area or your type of equipment. For example, in the United States, most
areas have adopted the National Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring
conform to its requirements. In other countries, different codes will apply. For maximum
safety to personnel and property you must follow these codes. Failure to do so can lead to
personal injury or death, property damage or destruction, or both.
2.4.1 Color Coding Wires

These color codes are commonly used in industrial equipment manufactured in the United States. Where
they differ from codes that apply to your area or your type of equipment, follow your applicable codes
instead. Besides satisfying code requirements, wire color coding makes testing and troubleshooting safer,
faster, and easier.
▪ Green or green with stripe- Ground

▪ Black - Primary AC
▪ Red - Secondary AC
▪ Blue - DC
▪ White - Common or neutral
▪ Yellow - Secondary power source not controlled by the main disconnect. Alerts maintenance
personnel that there may be power present (from an external source) even if the equipment is
disconnected from its main power source.
2.4.2 Wire Routing

To reduce noise-coupling among PLC wires, electrically-noisy wiring such as AC power wiring and discrete
output module wiring should be separated from low-level signal wiring such as DC and analog input module
wiring or communications cables. Where practical, group separately the following types of wiring:
▪ AC power wiring includes the AC input to the PLC power supply, as well as other AC devices in the
control cabinet.
▪ Analog Input or Output Module wiring should be shielded to further reduce noise coupling.
▪ Discrete Output Module wiring often includes switch-inductive loads that produce noise spikes
when switched off.
▪ DC Input Module wiring, although suppressed internally, are low-level inputs that should be further
protected against noise coupling by observing these wiring practices.
▪ Communications Cables are noise-producing wiring cables from which wiring such as Genius bus or
serial cables should be kept away.
Installation 25
Where AC or Output wiring bundles must pass near noise-sensitive signal wiring bundles, avoid running
them beside each other. If they have to cross, route them a right angle to minimize coupling between them.
2.4.2.1 Grouping of Similar Modules to Keep Wires Segregated

If practical, grouping similar modules together on the backplanes can help keep wiring segregated. For
example, one backplane could contain AC modules only, while another could contain DC modules only, with
further grouping by input and output types.
2.5 System Grounding

All components of a control system and the devices it is controlling must be properly grounded. This is
particularly important for the following reasons:
▪ A low-resistance path from all parts of a system to earth minimizes exposure to shock in the event of
short circuits or equipment malfunction.
▪ The RX3i system requires proper grounding for correct operation.
▪ All backplanes grouped together in the PLC system must have a common ground connection. This is
especially important for backplanes that are not mounted in the same control cabinet.
WARNING
In addition to observing the grounding procedures described here, it is important to
follow local grounding codes. In the United States, most areas have adopted the National
Electrical Code standard and specify that all wiring conform to its requirements. In other
countries, different codes apply. For maximum safety to personnel and property, follow
these codes. Failure to do so can mean injury or death to personnel, damage to property,
or both.
In addition to observing the system grounding procedures, periodic inspections of the ground connections
should be performed to ensure that the system remains properly grounded.
▪ The PLC equipment, other control equipment, and the machine should be interconnected to
maintain a common earth ground reference, also called the machine chassis ground.
Installation 26
MOTOR DRIVES MACHINERY

PLC CABINET AND OTHER
ELECTRICAL
RACK CONTROL
EQUIPMENT
PROGRAMMING RACK
DEVICE
NOTE
SIGNAL AND POWER
CONNECTIONS
EARTH CENTRAL
ARE NOT SHOWN
GROUND GROUND POINT
Figure 12: System Grounding
2.5.1 Ground Conductors

Ground conductors should be connected in a tree fashion with branches routed to a central earth ground
point, as shown on the previous page. This ensures that no ground conductor carries current from any other
branch.
A low inductance path from all parts of a system to earth minimizes emissions and increases immunity to
electrical interferences. Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible. Braided straps
(maximum 10:1 length to width ratio recommended) or ground cables (typically green insulation with a
yellow tracer - AWG #12 (3.3 mm2) or larger) can be used to minimize resistance. Conductors must always
be large enough to carry the maximum short circuit current of the path being considered.
Installation 27
2.5.2 Backplane Safety and EMC Reference Grounding

The metal back of the backplane must be grounded
using a separate conductor; the backplane mounting
screws alone do not provide an adequate ground
connection. At a minimum, use AWG #12 (3.3 mm2)
wire with a ring terminal and star lock-washer.
Connect the other end of this ground wire to a
tapped hole in the mounting panel using a machine
screw, star lock washer, and flat washer. Alternately,
if the panel has a ground stud, use a nut and star lock
washer for each wire on the ground stud to ensure
adequate grounding. Where connections are made
to a painted panel, the paint should be removed so
clean, bare metal is exposed at the connection point.
Terminals and hardware used should be rated to
work with the aluminum backplane material.
WARNING
All backplanes must be grounded to minimize
electrical shock hazard. Failure to do so can result in
severe personal injury.
Figure 13: Ground Strap Installation
All backplanes grouped together in the PLC system must have a common ground connection. This is
especially important for backplanes that are not mounted in the same control cabinet.
2.5.3 Power Supply Grounding

Refer to the section, Power Supply Field Wiring.
2.5.4 Programmer Grounding

For proper operation, the computer (programmer) running the PLC software must have a ground connection
in common with the CPU. Normally, this common ground connection is provided by connecting the power
cord of the programming device to the same power source (with the same ground reference point) as the
backplane. If the programmer ground is at a different potential than the PLC ground, a shock hazard could
exist. Also, damage to the ports could occur when the programmer serial cable is connected between the
two.
2.5.5 Shield Grounding
Installation 28
In general, the aluminum PLC backplane is used for module shield grounding. On some modules, shield
connections to the user terminal connector on the module are routed to the backplane through the
backplane connector of the module. Other modules, such as the DSM314 require a separate shield ground,
as displayed in the module descriptions in this manual.
For modules installed in a Universal Backplane, shield grounds can be connected to the Grounding Bar at the
bottom of the Backplane using size M3 screws. The recommended torque is 0.45 Nm (4 in-lb) maximum.
TB 1
E
1
X
P
A
N
S
I
O
8 N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Grounding Bar
Figure 14: Grounding Bar on RX3i Universal Backplane
2.6 System Installation
2.6.1 Universal Backplanes

Mount a Universal Backplane using four good quality 8-32 x 1/2 (4 x 12mm) machine screws, lock washers
and flat washers. Install the screws in the four tapped holes displayed in the following figure.
Installation 29
TB 1
E
1
X
P
A
N
S
I
O
8 N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 15: Location of Mounting Screws for Universal Backplane
Backplanes must be mounted horizontally, as represented above, to meet product performance and
reliability specifications by providing adequate airflow around the modules. Other mounting orientations
may affect system performance, reliability and agency approvals, and are therefore not recommended.
2.6.1.1.1 Universal Backplane Terminal TB1

The RX3i IC695 Power Supplies do not
provide Isolated +24Vdc output power over
the backplane.
TB1 Terminals 7 and 8 can be used to

connect an optional external source of TB 1
Isolated +24Vdc (see Section 3.1.1.1 for 1
details). Isolated +24Vdc is required for 1 – 6: not used
some IC693 and IC694 modules as listed in 7: Isolated +24VDC In
the table of Module Load Requirements,
8: Isolated Ground
Section 4.2. 8
These terminals accept individual wires

from 14 to 22 AWG. 0 1
If modules that require Isolated +24Vdc are

installed in an Expansion Backplane rather
than in a Universal Backplane, an external
Isolated +24Vdc power supply will not be Slot 0: Connector for RX3i
IC695 Power Supply only
required.
Terminals 1 through 6 are not used. Figure 16: Universal Backplane Terminal TB1
Installation 30
2.6.1.2 Power Supply Models and Slot Occupancy
Power Supply #Slots Max in Universal Remote or Expansion

Redundant Mode
Catalog Number Occupied1 Backplane Backplane
IC695PSD040 1 1 Not supported Not supported
IC695PSD140 1 42 Supported Not supported
IC695PSA040 2 1 Not supported Not supported
IC695PSA140 2 42 Supported Not supported
IC693 Power Supplies Not permitted Not permitted N/A Max 1
IC694 Power Supplies Not permitted Not permitted N/A Max 1
2.6.1.3 Universal Backplane Slot Occupancy Rules
▪ An RX3i CPU module can be installed anywhere in the Universal Backplane except the rightmost
(expansion) slot. With the exception of CPE302/CPE305, CPU modules occupy 2 slots. CPE302 and
CPE305 each occupy one slot.
▪ CPE302, CPE305, I/O, and option modules can be installed in any available slot except the rightmost
(expansion) slot and slot 0, which can only accept IC695 Power Supplies. Each I/O slot has two
connectors, so can accept either an RX3i PCI-based module or a module with a serial backplane
interface.
▪ The rightmost slot is the expansion slot. It can only be used for optional Serial Bus Transmitter module
IC695LRE001.
2.6.2 Expansion Backplanes

To mount an Expansion Backplane on a panel, use four good-quality 8-32 x 1/2 (4 x 12 mm) machine screws,
lock washers and flat washers. Install the screws in the four tapped holes.
1
IC695 Power Supply modules may be installed in any Universal Backplane slot.
2
Any combination of IC695PSD140 & IC695PSA140, up to max of four.
Installation 31
Figure 17: Expansion Backplane
An Expansion Backplane can also be mounted in a 19-inch rack using a mounting bracket as described in this
section.
2.6.2.1 Setting the Rack Number DIP Switch

Each backplane is identified with a unique number called a Rack Number. Rack number 0 is always
automatically assigned to the backplane with the CPU. Rack numbers must not be duplicated in a system.
Backplanes do not need to be sequentially numbered, although for consistency, rack numbers should not be
skipped.
Rack Numbers for Expansion and Remote backplanes are set using a DIP switch on the backplane. The
following table provides the DIP switch positions for rack number selection.
Rack Number
DIP Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 open closed open closed open closed open
2 closed open open closed closed open open
3 closed closed closed open open open open
For example, these switch settings select rack number 2:

1
OPEN
Closed = switch
2
down on right
3
Figure 18: Example of Backplane DIP Switch Setting for Rack Number
Installation 32
CAUTION
Do not use a pencil to set the DIP switches. Graphite from the pencil can damage the
switch.
2.6.2.2 Recommended Mounting Orientation for Expansion

Backplanes
For Expansion and Remote Backplanes, power supply load rating depends on the mounting position of the
backplane and the surrounding temperature.
The load rating with the Expansion Backplane mounted upright on a panel is100% at 60°C (140°F).
Figure 19: Effect on Load Rating, Vertical Mounting
Power supply load ratings with the backplane mounted horizontally are:
▪ Temperature at 25°C (77°F) – full load

▪ Temperature at 60°C (140°F) – 50% of full load
Figure 20: Effect on Load Rating, Horizontal Mounting
Installation 33
2.6.3 Mounting a Backplane in a 19-Inch Rack

The IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket (Figure 21) can be used to mount a 10-Slot Expansion
Backplane, IC694CHS392, to the front face of a 19-inch rack. Install the adapter bracket by inserting the tabs
at the top and bottom of the adapter bracket into the corresponding slots at the top and bottom of the
plastic backplane cover. It is not necessary to remove the cover to install the bracket. With the bracket in
place, insert and tighten the two screws (included with the bracket) through the back of the backplane holes
into the threaded holes in the bracket.
Right side of
Baseplate
Insert two screws (one at top; one at
bottom) from the back of the baseplate
through the baseplate mounting holes
into tapped holes in the bracket. Tighten
both screws to secure the bracket to the
baseplate.
Figure 21: IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket
Dimensions for rack mounting a backplane with the IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket are
displayed in Figure 22.
480 mm
(18.89 in)
469 mm
(18.47 in)
Figure 22: Dimensions for Backplane with IC693ACC308 Front Mount Adapter Bracket
Installation 34
The IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket can be used to recess-mount a 10-Slot Expansion
Backplane, IC694CHS392, inside a 19” rack. This bracket cannot be used with a Universal Backplane.
An Expansion Backplane mounts on the rear panel of this adapter bracket using four 8-32 (4mm) screws,
nuts, lock washers, and flat washers. The Adapter Bracket bolts through its four slotted holes to the face of
the 19” rack using applicable hardware (lock washers recommended).
4.06mm
(0.160 inch) dia. x 4 7.1mm
(0.280 inch)
90mm 101.6mm
(3.540 inches) (4.00 inches)
41.4mm (1.630 inches)

21.4mm (0.842 inch)
8.8mm
(0.346 inch) inside 428mm (16.850 inches)
34.7mm
(1.368 inch)
460.3mm (18.122 inches)
11.2mm
(0.439 inch)
Figure 23: IC693ACC313 Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket
2.6.3.1 Grounding Rack-Mounted Expansion Backplanes

If an Expansion Backplane is mounted in a 19-inch rack using an Adapter bracket, the rack must be properly
grounded as described in the section, System Grounding Procedures. In addition, the backplane should be
grounded according to the guidelines in the section, Backplane Safety Grounding, using a separate ground
wire from the PLC backplane.
▪ For a Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket (IC693ACC313), the ground wire can be installed with the
ground attached to the Recessed Mount Adapter Bracket. An additional ground wire should be
installed that connects the Adapter Bracket to a solid chassis ground.
▪ For a Surface Mount Adapter Bracket (IC693ACC308), the ground wire should be run from the
backplane to a solid chassis ground on the rack.
Installation 35
2.6.4 Modules
2.6.4.1 Hot Insertion and Removal

In general, modules in a Universal Backplane (IC695CHS007, CHS012 or CHS016) can be installed or
removed while power is applied to the system. This includes backplane power and field power supplied to
the module. However, no CPU modules fall into this category. The following table lists the I/O modules that
do not support this feature or have not yet been verified to support this feature.
Note: For products that support hot insertion, the module must be properly seated on the carrier with the
latch engaged and all pins connected within 2 seconds. For removal, the module must be completely
disengaged from the carrier within 2 seconds. It is important that the module not remain partially inserted
during the insertion or removal process. There must be at a minimum of two seconds between the removal
and insertion of modules.
Note: A CPU module cannot be installed or removed from a Universal Backplane while power is applied to
system. System power must be removed before installing or removing the CPU.
The following modules support hot insertion and removal, with restrictions as noted:
Catalog Number Hot-Swap Compatible Notes / Restrictions on Hot Swap Capability
IC693ACC300 Yes
IC694ACC300 Yes
IC695ALG106 Yes
IC695ALG112 Yes
IC693ALG222 Yes - Revision FA & later Revision E & earlier do not support hot swap.
IC694ALG222 Yes - Revision BA & later Revision A does not support hot swap.
IC693ALG223 Yes - Revision EA & later Revision D & earlier do not support hot swap.
IC694ALG232 Yes
IC694ALG233 Yes
IC695ALG306 Yes
IC695ALG312 Yes
IC693ALG391 Yes
Installation 36
IC693ALG392 Yes
IC694ALG392 Yes
IC695ALG412 Yes
IC693ALG442 Yes - Revision DA & later Revision C & earlier do not support hot swap.
IC695ALG508 Yes
IC694ALG542 Yes
IC695ALG600 Yes
IC695ALG608 Yes
IC695ALG616 Yes
IC695ALG626 Yes
IC695ALG628 Yes
IC695ALG704 Yes
IC695ALG708 Yes
IC695ALG728 Yes
IC695ALG808 Yes
IC693APU300 Yes – Revision MA & later Revision L and earlier do not support hot swap.
IC694APU300 Yes – Revision CA & later Revision -BA and earlier do not support hot swap.
IC693APU305 Yes
IC694APU305 Yes
Genius Bus Controller modules that are included in a Max-

ON redundancy system should not be installed or removed
IC693BEM331 Yes from the PLC that is operating as a Master. If a module is
removed from the Master and then re-installed, the
outputs for that module will not be enabled until the next
Backup-to-Master transition.
Installation 37
Any time a Genius Bus Controller is removed from an active

system, there is a possibility that the bus may be disrupted
with a subsequent impact on the corresponding I/O
IC694BEM331 Yes devices. For systems that require online maintainability, it
is recommended that dual (redundant) Genius busses be
used.
Otherwise, the BEM331 can be hot-swapped.
IC695CMM002 Yes
IC695CMM004 Yes
IC695CMX128 Yes
IC693DSM324 Yes
IC694DSM324 Yes
IC695ECM850 Yes
IC695EDS001 Yes
IC695EIS001 Yes
IC695ETM001 Yes
The Genius Communications Gateway requires an external

24Vdc power supply and does not draw power from the
RX3i backplane. Swapping out the GCG001 will therefore
IC695GCG001 Yes not impact the PLC. However, this cannot be performed
without disconnecting its power supply. If configured to
support Genius Hot Standby, the loss of a single GCG001
will be tolerated; otherwise not.
IC695HSC304 Yes
IC695HSC308 Yes
IC693MDL230 Yes
IC694MDL230 Yes
IC693MDL231 Yes
IC694MDL231 Yes
IC693MDL240 Yes
Installation 38
IC694MDL240 Yes
IC693MDL241 Yes
IC694MDL241 Yes
IC693MDL250 Yes
IC694MDL250 Yes
IC693MDL260 Yes
IC694MDL260 Yes
IC693MDL310 Yes
IC694MDL310 Yes
IC693MDL330 Yes
IC694MDL330 Yes
IC693MDL340 Yes
IC694MDL340 Yes
IC693MDL350 Yes
IC694MDL350 Yes
IC693MDL390 Yes
IC694MDL390 Yes
IC693MDL632 Yes
IC694MDL632 Yes
IC693MDL634 Yes Hot swap can only be performed with field side terminal
block removed from the module. The terminal block is to
be removed before hot extraction from the RX3i Universal
IC694MDL634 Yes
Backplane and re-installed after hot insertion.
IC693MDL635 Yes
IC694MDL635 Yes
Installation 39

IC694MDL645 Yes
Backplane and re-installed after hot insertion.
IC694MDL646 Yes Backplane and re-installed after hot insertion.
IC694MDL648 Yes Backplane and re-installed after hot insertion.
IC693MDL654 Yes
IC694MDL654 Yes
IC693MDL655 Yes
IC694MDL655 Yes
IC694MDL658 Yes
IC693MDL660 Yes
IC694MDL660 Yes
IC695MDL664 Yes
IC693MDL730 Yes
IC694MDL730 Yes
IC693MDL731 Yes
IC693MDL732 Yes
IC694MDL732 Yes
IC693MDL733 Yes
IC693MDL734 Yes
IC694MDL734 Yes
IC693MDL740 Yes
IC694MDL740 Yes
Installation 40
IC693MDL741 Yes
IC694MDL741 Yes
IC693MDL742 Yes
IC694MDL742 Yes
IC693MDL748 Yes
IC693MDL752 Yes
IC694MDL752 Yes
IC693MDL753 Yes
IC694MDL753 Yes
IC693MDL754 Yes
IC694MDL754 Yes
IC694MDL758 Yes
IC695MDL765 Yes
IC693MDL916 Yes
IC694MDL916 Yes
IC695PBM300 Yes
IC695PBS301 Yes
Hot-Swap can only be performed while PLC is in STOP

IC695PMM335 Yes
mode
IC695PNC001 Yes
IC695PRS015 Yes
Hot-swappable only when redundant power supplies are

IC695PSA140 Yes
present and each is powered up.
Hot-swappable only when redundant power supplies are

IC695PSD140 Yes
present and each is powered up.
IC694PSM001 Yes
Installation 41
IC695RMX128 Yes
IC695RMX228 Yes
WARNING
Inserting or removing a module with power applied to the system may cause an electrical
arc. This can result in unexpected and potentially dangerous action by field devices.
Arcing is an explosion risk in hazardous locations. Be sure that the area is non-hazardous
or remove system power before removing or inserting a module.
WARNING
Do not insert or remove modules in RX3i Serial Expansion Backplanes or Series 90-30
Expansion Backplanes with power applied to the backplane. This could cause the PLC to
stop or malfunction. Injury to personnel and damage to the module or backplane may
result. If the PLC is in RUN mode, I/O data to/from this backplane will not be updated
while power is removed.
2.6.4.2 Hot Insertion and Removal Not Supported

The following modules do not support hot Insertion and removal. Do not attempt to insert or remove them
while power is applied to the rack.
Catalog Number Notes
IC693ALG220
IC694ALG220
IC693ALG221
IC694ALG221
IC693ALG222 Revision E & earlier do not support hot swap.
IC694ALG222 Revision A does not support hot swap.
IC693ALG223 Revision D & earlier do not support hot swap.
Installation 42
IC693ALG390
IC694ALG390
IC694ALG391
IC693ALG442 Revision C & earlier do not support hot swap.
IC693APU300 Revision L and earlier do not support hot swap.
IC694APU300 Revision -BA and earlier do not support hot swap.
IC693BEM320
IC694BEM320
IC693BEM321
IC694BEM321
IC693BEM341
IC695CMU310 Head-end unit - shuts down everything if removed.
IC695CPE302 Head-end unit - shuts down everything if removed.
IC695CPU310 Head-end unit - shuts down everything if removed.
IC695CRU320 Head-end unit - shuts down everything if removed.
IC693DNM200
IC694DNM200
Installation 43
IC693DSM314
IC694DSM314
IC695LRE001 Can cause communications issues with remote racks if hot-swapped.
IC693MAR590
IC693MDL760
IC693MDL930
IC694MDL930
IC693MDL931
IC694MDL931
IC693MDL940
IC694MDL940
IC693MDR390
IC694MDR390
IC695NIU001 Head-end unit - shuts down everything if removed.
IC695PNS001 Head-end unit - shuts down everything if removed.
IC695PNS101 Head-end unit - shuts down everything if removed.
Only power source in rack - shuts everything off and can cause corrupt user
IC695PSA040
memory if hot removed.
Only power source in rack - shuts everything off and can cause corrupt user
IC695PSD040
memory if hot removed.
Installation 44
2.6.4.3 Installing Modules
WARNING
Potentially dangerous voltages may be present on the screw terminals of the module,
even though power to the backplane is turned off. Always be careful when handling the
removable terminal board of the module and any wires connected to it.
▪ Be sure the module catalog number matches 1

the intended slot configuration.
▪ Holding the module firmly, align the module
with the correct slot and connector.
▪ Engage the rear pivot hook(s) of the module
(Figure 24) in the notch(es) on the top of the
backplane (1).
2
▪ Swing the module down (2) until the
connector of the module engages the
backplane connector, and the release lever(s)
on the bottom of the module snaps into place
in the bottom module retainer (3).
▪ Visually inspect the module to be sure it is 3
properly seated.
Figure 24: Installing Module in Backplane
2.6.4.4 Removing Modules
Installation 45
▪ If the module has a removable terminal 3

board, remove it as described later in this
section.
▪ Locate the release lever(s) at the bottom of
the module (Figure 25) and firmly press
upward (1), toward the module. Wider
modules have two release levers that must
both be pressed up at the same time.
▪ While holding the module firmly and fully
depressing the release lever(s), pivot the
module upward until its connector is out of
the backplane (2).
▪ Lift the module up and away from the 1
backplane to disengage the pivot hook. 2
Figure 25: Removing Module from Backplane
2.6.4.5 I/O Module Terminal Block Assemblies
Installation 46
Most PACSystems RX3i I/O modules have removable front

terminal block assemblies. Each module of this type has a door
label that can be removed, marked up as required for the
application, then re-inserted into the retaining grooves,
(Figure 28). The front of the label (Figure 26) displays the
catalog number of the module and a color band to indicate the
module type. It also provides space to record identifying
application information about the inputs or outputs wired to
the module. The wiring diagram is printed on the reverse side
and is visible to the technician (Figure 27) once the door is
swung open.
The terminal blocks have fully-hinged doors that can be

opened to either the left or right to access wiring.
REL EASE LEV ER

IC694MDL734
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5 Figure 28: Insertion of Door Label following

Mark-up for Application
Q6
Figure 26 Module Door Label Figure 27: Wiring Diagram on

Front View Reverse Side of Door
2.6.4.6 I/O Module Connections
Installation 47
For most RX3i I/O modules, connections are made to the

removable terminal board of the module. Specific wiring
information for each module is printed on the door insert
and also shown in the module description in this manual.
This section describes the 20-Connector removable

terminal block (Figure 29), which is used by most RX3i I/O
modules. Higher-density modules use other connection
methods.
Refer to Chapter 17 for details concerning the following:
▪ 36-pin removable terminal blocks used for most

higher-density modules.
▪ Connections to I/O modules that have two 20-
Connector connectors on the front of the module.
▪ Terminal Board Quick Connect (TBQC) system that
allows users to land the field wiring on interposing
terminal strips and complete the connection to the I/O
module using pre-fabricated interconnect cables.
Screw terminals on a 20-Connector terminal block accept

from two AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) to two AWG #16 (1.3
mm2), or one AWG #14 (2.1 mm2) copper 90°C (194°F)
wire(s). Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires,
but the wires into any given terminal should be the same
type (both solid or both stranded) to ensure a good
connection. Wires are routed to and from the terminals
out of the bottom of the terminal board cavity. The
suggested torque for the I/O terminal board connection
screws is from 1.1 to1.3 Nm (9.6 to 11.5 in-lb).
After the wiring is completed, wires should be bundled and

fastened at the bottom of the terminal block, as shown in
Figure 29.
Figure 29: 20-Connector removable terminal

block with Tie Wrap Landing Location noted
Installation 48
2.6.4.7 Installing or Removing a 20-Connector Terminal Block

Assembly
(Refer to Chapter 17 for instructions for installing or removing a 36-pin terminal assembly). Compare the
module catalog number on the label on the terminal assembly door and the label on the side of the to be
sure they match. If a wired terminal block is installed on the wrong module type, the module may be
damaged when the system is powered up.
WARNING
Field power must be turned off when installing or removing a Terminal Block assembly.
2.6.4.7.1 Installing a Terminal

3
Block
 To install a terminal block (Figure 30):
1. Insert the pivot hook on the bottom
of the terminal block assembly into
the slot on the bottom of the
module.
2. Pivot the terminal block assembly 2
upward to engage the connector.
3. Press the terminal block assembly
toward the module until the release
lever latch snaps into place. Check
to be sure the terminal block is
1
firmly seated.
Figure 30: Installing Terminal Block into I/O Module
Installation 49
RELEASE LEVER
2.6.4.7.2 Removing a Terminal Block
 To remove a terminal block:
1. Open the terminal block door.
2. Push up the release lever (Figure 31) to unlock the
terminal block.
3. Pull the terminal block away from the module until
the contacts have separated and the bottom pivot
hook has disengaged.
Figure 31: Release Lever Usage prior to Removal

from I/O Module
Installation 50
2.6.4.8 Installing or Removing a Terminal Block Cover

The terminal block assembly cover can be removed for easier access to the terminals.
WARNING
Potentially dangerous voltages from user devices may be present on the screw terminals
of the module, even though power to the backplane is turned off. Always be careful when
handling the removable terminal block assembly of the module and any wires connected
to it.
REL EASE LEV ER

2.6.4.8.1 Removing a Terminal Block from its
Cover
 To remove a Terminal Block from its cover:
1. Grasp the sides of the Terminal Block cover.
2. Pull down on the bottom of the Terminal Block as
shown in Figure 32.
2.6.4.8.2 Inserting a Terminal Block in its

Cover
 To re-insert a Terminal Block in its cover:
1. Align the top of the Terminal Block with the bottom
of the cover, making sure that the notches in the
Terminal Block match up with the grooves in the
cover.
2. Slide the Terminal Block upward (Figure 32) until it
clicks into place.
Figure 32: Extraction or Insertion of Terminal

Block into its Cover
Installation 51
2.6.4.9 Positive and Negative Logic Connections to Discrete

Modules
The IEC definitions for positive logic and negative logic for PACSystems RX3i modules are described in the
following sections.
2.6.4.9.1 Positive Logic

Positive logic input modules (Figure 33) sink current from the input device to the user common or negative
power bus. The input device is connected between the positive power bus and the input terminal.
Positive logic output modules (Figure 34) source current to the loads from the user common or positive
power bus. The load is connected between the negative power bus and the module output.
IEC IEC + 24V

+ 24V
SINK SOURCE
IN OUT
+
0V 0V
Figure 33: Positive Logic Input Circuit Figure 34: Positive Logic Output Circuit
2.6.4.9.2 Negative Logic

Negative logic input modules (Figure 35) source current through the input device to the user common or
positive power bus. The input device is connected between the negative power bus and the input terminal.
Negative logic output modules (Figure 36) sink current from the loads to the user common or negative
power bus. The load is connected between the positive power bus and the output terminal.
Installation 52
IEC + 24V
SOURCE IEC + 24V
SINK
IN OUT
+
0V 0V
Figure 35: Negative Logic Input Circuit Figure 36: Negative Logic Output Circuit
Installation 53
2.6.4.10 Wiring for Analog Modules

Twisted, shielded instrumentation cable is strongly recommended for analog module input or output signal
connections. Proper grounding of the shield is also important. For maximum electrical noise suppression, the
cable shield should only be grounded at one end of the cable.
It is generally best to ground the cable shield as close to the source of the noise as possible. For Analog Input
modules, ground the end that is in the noisiest environment (usually the field device end). Cut the shield off
at the module end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing. For Analog Output modules, ground at the
module end. Cut the shield off at device end of cable and insulate with shrink tubing.
It is best to keep the length of stripped cable leads as short as possible to minimize the length of unshielded
conductors exposed to the noisy environment.
Connections can be made directly to the module terminals, or via an intermediate terminal block. The
diagrams in this section show wiring for various types of analog input and analog output installations.
2.6.4.10.1 Shielding for Analog Input Modules

Generally, the shield for analog input cables should be grounded at the analog source. However, ground
connections for each channel, labeled COM and GND, can be used to connect shields at the analog input
module if appropriate. The COM terminals of the analog input module connect to the analog circuit
common in the module. The GND terminals connect to the backplane (frame ground). Shields may be
connected to either COM or GND. This section shows four shield grounding examples for analog input
modules.
Installation 54
Analog Input Shield Grounding with a

Terminal Strip
For an unbalanced source, the ground shield should be connected to the source common or ground at the
source end. If all source inputs to the module come from the same location and are referenced to the same
common, all shield grounds should be connected to the same ground point. If there is an additional terminal
strip between the analog input module and the field devices (analog sources), use the method displayed in
the following figure to continue each cable shield using a terminal on the terminal strip. Each cable is only
grounded at one end - the end closer to the field devices (analog sources). Shield connections are shown in
red (bold) in Figure 37.
Terminal
Strip
Analog
Source
Analog
Source
Analog
Source
Analog
Source
Connection
to Frame Analog Input
Ground Module
Machine or
Equipment
Enclosure
Figure 37: Analog Input Shield Grounding with a Terminal Strip
Installation 55
Appendix A: Analog Input Shield Grounding

to Common Connections
In some applications, noise rejection can be improved by connecting the source common points together at
the source end, then connecting a common line to the module at only one module COM terminal. That will
eliminate multiple grounding or ground loops that could cause false input data. The common connections
here are shown in red (bold) in Figure 38.
Analog
Analog Input
Source Module
COM
Analog
Source
Analog
Source
Analog
Source
Figure 38: Analog Input Shield Grounding to Common Connections
Installation 56
Appendix B: Analog Input Shields

Connected to Module Terminal
Board
It is usually preferable to ground cable shields at the source end. If that is difficult, or if electrical noise is not a
concern, it may be acceptable to ground cable shields at the analog input module end. They can be
connected to one of the GND terminals of the module (which are connected to frame ground through an
internal path) as shown left below. If necessary to improve noise immunity, a conductor can be used to
connect a GND terminal on the module to earth ground as displayed in Figure 39. This will bypass noise
around the module.
Analog
Input
Analog
Module
Source
Analog
Source
Analog
Source
Optional
Ground
Analog
GND Conductor
Source
Earth Ground
Figure 39: Analog Input Shields Connected to Module Terminal Board
Installation 57
2.6.4.10.2 Wiring for Current Transducers

For all of the examples displayed in Figure 40 through Figure 43, connect the (-) conductor to the Analog
Input module COM terminal, if the source is floating, to limit common-mode voltages. Common mode
voltage is limited to 11 volts.
If noise causes inaccurate readings, the (-) conductor can also be connected to the Analog Input module
GND terminal.
+ + +
+ + 2WT -
AC/DC 4WT PS
-
- -
-
COM
C COM
C
GND Ground the Cable
G Shield at field device GND
Ground the Cable Shield G
at field device end only end only
Analog Input Analog Input
Module Module
Figure 40: 4-Wire Transducer, Externally Powered by AC Figure 41: 2-Wire Transducer, Externally Powered by DC
or DC Supply Supply
+ + + + +
PS 3WT Out
- - 2WT
-
-
-
COM C
COM
C
GND
Ground the Cable Shield Ground the Cable Shield G
GND
at field device end only G
at field device end only
Analog Input
Analog Input Module
Module
Figure 42: 3-Wire Transducer, Externally Powered by DC

Supply Figure 43: 2-Wire Transducer, Self-Powered
Installation 58
Appendix A: 2-Wire Transducer Connected

to Two Measuring Devices
As shown in Figure 44, connect the (-) conductor to the Analog Input module COM terminal, if the source is
floating, to limit common-mode voltages. Common mode voltage is limited to 11 volts.
If noise causes inaccurate readings, the (-) conductor can also be connected to the Analog Input module
GND terminal.
The analog module must be the last device on the circuit. When grounding the (-) return side of the Analog
Input Module, the other current-sensing device must be floating and able to withstand a common mode
voltage of at least 20 V, including the noise level.
Current
+ + 2WT - + Sensing - +
Device
PS
- -
COM C
Ground the Cable Shield
at field device end only GND G
Analog Input
Module
Figure 44: 2-Wire Transducer Connected to Two Measuring Devices
2.6.4.10.3 Verifying Analog Input Current

RX3i Analog Current Input Modules have an internal 250 resistor across the input terminals. You can
measure the voltage across the input terminals using a voltmeter, then use Ohm’s Law to determine the
input current:
Input Current (in Amps) = V / 250
For example, if you measured 3 V across the input terminals:
Input Current (in Amps) = 3/250
Input Current (in Amps) = 0.012 (or 12 mA)
Installation 59
2.6.4.10.4 Shield Connections for Analog Output Modules

For analog output modules, the shield is normally grounded only at the source end (i.e. at the module -
Figure 45). The GND connection provides access to the backplane (frame ground) resulting in superior
rejection of noise caused by any shield drain currents. In extreme-noise environments, you can connect an
optional ground braid from the GND terminal to an external earth ground to bypass noise around the
module.
Analog
OUT Output
User Module
Load COM
OUT
User
Load COM
Optional
Shield connected
Ground
at module end Conductor
only GND
Earth
Ground
Figure 45: Shield Connections for Analog Output Module
Installation 60
Appendix A: Analog Output Shield

Grounding with a Terminal Strip
If there is a terminal strip between the analog output module and the field devices (user loads), use the
method in Figure 46 for grounding the cable shields. Each cable is only grounded at one end, the end closer
to the Analog Output Module. An optional external ground connection to the GND terminal of the module is
illustrated for installations that require extra noise suppression.
Terminal
Strip
Analog
Output
OUT Module
User
Load COM
OUT
User
Load COM
Optional
Ground
Connection
GND
Shields
Connected at
module end only
Earth
Ground
Enclosure
Figure 46: Analog Output Shield Grounding with a Terminal Strip
Installation 61
2.6.4.11 Module Fuse List
WARNING
Replace fuse only with the correct size and type. Using an incorrect fuse can result in harm
to personnel, damage to equipment, or both.
Module Catalog Current Quantity on GE Fuse Other Sources

Module Type
Number (note) Rating Module Part Number and Part Numbers
Bussman – GMC-3
IC694MDL3103 120 Vac, 0.5A 3A 2 44A724627-111
Littlefuse – 239003
Bussman - S506-5-R
IC694MDL3303 120/240 Vac, 1A 5A 2 42G6101-0013
Schurter - 034.3124
Bussman – GMC-3
IC694MDL3403 120 Vac, 0.5A 3A 2 44A724627-111
Bussman – GMC-3
IC694MDL3903 120/240 Vac, 2A 3A 5 44A724627-111
120/240 Vac or
Bussman – 215-002
IC694PWR3214 125Vdc Input,
2A 1 44A724627-109 (GDC-2 or GMC-2)
IC694PWR3304 30 W Power
Littlefuse – 239-002
Supply
24Vdc Input,
4
IC694PWR331 30 W Power 5A 1 44A724627-114 Bussman – GMC-5-R
Supply
3
Fuse is mounted in clip accessible by removing circuit board from module housing.
4
Power input fuse mounted in clip and accessible by removing front of module.
Installation 62
2.6.5 CPU Installation

 To install the CPU:
1. Make sure that rack power is off.
2. Install the CPU module in the appropriate slot
(refer to Universal Backplane Slot Occupancy
Rules, Section 2.6.1.3). With the exception of
CPE302/CPE305, the CPU occupies two slots
and can use any slots except the highest
numbered (rightmost) slot. CPE302/CPE305
occupies one slot.
3. Turn on power. When the CPU has
successfully completed initialization, the OK
LED stays on and the RUN and EN LEDs are
off. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
4. For CPUs with battery back-up, connect the
battery to either of the battery connectors on
the module. (You can connect the battery at
any step in the installation process but it will
begin to drain immediately unless power is
applied. To maximize battery life, install it
after power has been turned on).
5. For CPUs backed up by an Energy Pack, follow
the installation instructions for the specific
Energy Pack.
6. Where appropriate, communications cables
can be secured to the tie-downs on the
bottom of the module.
After the program has been verified, the mode

switch can be moved to the appropriate
operation mode position: RUN I/O ENABLED, RUN Figure 47: CPE330 (example of 2-Slot CPU)
OUTPUT DISABLE, or STOP. The LEDs indicate the
position of the mode switch and status of serial
port activity.
CAUTION
CPUs may NOT be hot-inserted in the backplane; power must be removed before installing or removing the
CPU.
Installation 63
2.6.6 Power Supplies

 To install the power supplies
1. Install the Power Supply module(s) in the
appropriate slot(s).
POWER
a) Universal Power Supplies (IC695) can be P/S FAULT
installed in any slot except the highest OVERTEMP
numbered (rightmost) slot in a Universal OVERLOAD
Backplane.
Power Supply
b) Expansion Power Supplies (IC694) must be
40W AC
installed in the Power Supply (leftmost) slot
in an Expansion Backplane.
c) Where multiple power supplies are to be
used, refer to Power Supply Models and Slot
Occupancy, Section 2.6.1.2)
2. Connect wiring to the Power Supply per the
installation instructions for that specific power
supply.
3. Use the three wiring tie-downs on the bottom of
the module to secure the power and ground
wires after installation.
PACSystems™
RX3i
Figure 48: Typical RX3i Power Supply Module
WARNING
For all Power Supplies, if the same input power source is used to provide power to two or
more power supplies in the system, connection polarity must be identical at each power
supply. A resulting difference in potential can injure personnel or cause damage to
equipment. Also, each backplane must be connected to a common system ground.
Installation 64
2.6.6.1 Power Supply Field Wiring
▪ For IC695 Power Supplies, each terminal accepts one AWG #14 to AWG #22 wire. Figure 49 (below) is a
cross-section of one of the terminals on an IC695 Power Supply. The end of each wire should be stripped
at least 3/8-inch (9mm). The terminal can accept a wire that is stripped up to 11 mm (.433 in) while
providing full seating of the insulator. The wire must be fully-inserted into the terminal block as
illustrated in Figure 49 at left, so that the insulation meets the insulation stop position inside the
terminal. Tightening the terminal screw pivots the clamp firmly against the stripped end of the wire,
holding it in place. If the wire is not fully inserted, as shown on the right, tightening the clamp may push
the wire upward, so that it is not connected.
Yes No
Figure 49: Correct Wiring Practice for Power Supply Input Terminals
▪ For IC694 Power Supplies, each terminal accepts one AWG #14 (2.1mm2) or two AWG #16 (1.3mm2)
copper 75°C (167°F) wires. The suggested torque for the Power Supply terminals is 1.36 Nm (12 in-lb).
Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires. Multiple wires in the same terminal should be of the
same type (solid or stranded) and size.
+ / L1
- / N / L2
Ground
Jumper
24VDC
Output for
I/O
Modules
Figure 50: IC695 Power Supply Terminals Figure 51: IC694 Power Supply Terminals
 For Expansion (IC694) Power Supplies only, the bottom terminals provide access to the Isolated
+24Vdc output of the Expansion Backplane, which can be used to power input circuits for certain
IC694 modules. Refer to the table Module Load Requirements, Section 4.2 for information.
Installation 65
CAUTION
If the Isolated 24Vdc supply is overloaded or shorted, the PLC will stop operation.
Installation 66
2.6.6.2 AC Power Source Connections

Connect the hot and neutral wires or lines L1 and L2 to the appropriate Power Supply terminals.
2.6.6.3 DC Power Source Connections
All RX3i Power Supplies have DC input capabilities. Connect the + and - wires from the DC source to the
appropriate terminals. These connections are polarity-sensitive DC-only supplies.
2.6.6.3.1 Ground Connection

Connect the safety ground wire to the terminal marked with a ground symbol.
2.6.6.4 External Overvoltage Protection

The Ground and MOV terminals on a Power Supply
module are normally connected to frame ground with a + / L1
user-installed jumper (as shown in Figure 52). If over-
voltage protection is not required or is supplied - / N / L2
upstream, no jumper is needed.
Jumper strap
In systems with a floating neutral input (the neutral line Frame
connects
is not referenced to Protective Earth Ground), this overvoltage Ground
jumper must NOT be installed. In addition, in a floating protection
devices to
neutral system, voltage surge protection devices such as frame ground
Screw
MOVs must be installed from L1 to earth ground, and Terminals
from L2 (Neutral) to earth ground.
Figure 52: External Overvoltage Protection
2.6.6.5 AC Power Supply Connections for Floating Neutral (IT)

Systems
If an AC input power supply is installed in a system where the Neutral line is not referenced to Protective
Earth Ground, special installation instructions must be followed to prevent damage to the power supply.
A Floating Neutral System is a system of power distribution wiring L1

where Neutral and Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by
negligible impedance. In Europe, this is referred to as an IT system
N
(refer to IEC950). In a Floating Neutral System, voltages measured
from input terminals to protective earth ground may exceed the PE
264Vac maximum input voltage power supply specification.
Figure 53: Floating Neutral
Installation 67
2.6.6.6 AC Power Supply Connections for Non-Floating Neutral

System
Systems where one leg of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two legs
of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems. Non-floating
neutral systems do not require special installation procedures.
L1 L L1
N N/PE L2
PE PE
Figure 54: Neutral Not Floating (Tied to Ground)
2.6.6.7 Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems

1. The input power terminals should be wired as shown in Figure 49 through Figure 51 above.
2. No jumper may be installed jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the Power Supply module.
3. Voltage surge protection devices such as MOVs must be installed:
▪ From L1 to earth ground

▪ From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground
The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the system is protected from power line transients that
exceed Line voltage + 100 Vac + (N-PE)MAX. The expression N-PE refers to the voltage potential between neutral
and Protective Earth (PE) ground.
For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral floating 50 Vac above earth ground, the transient
protection should be rated at: 240 Vac + 100 Vac + 50 Vac= 390 Vac
2.6.7 Serial Bus Transmitter Module

The RX3i Serial Bus Transmitter Module, IC695LRE001, provides communications between a PACSystems
RX3i Universal Backplane (IC695-model number), and serial expansion and remote backplanes (IC694- or
IC693-model numbers). It must reside in the expansion connector on the right end of a Universal Backplane.
2.6.7.1 Module Installation
Installation 68
This module may NOT be hot-inserted in the backplane; power must be removed
before installing or removing the Bus Transmitter Module.
Insert the Serial Bus Transmitter Module straight into its slot as displayed in Figure
56 below. This module does not have the same pivoting and latching mechanisms
as other RX3i modules.
Tighten the two captive screws in the corners of the module. Recommended
torque is 0.5 Nm (4.4 in-lb) maximum.
Figure 55: LRE001

Front View
Figure 56: LRE001 Attachment Using Captive Screws
2.6.7.2 Expansion Cable Installation

Subsequent backplanes in the system are linked by expansion cables as described in Section 5:. The
expansion cable may not be attached or removed while the expansion rack has power applied.
Installation 69
Section 3: Backplanes
This section describes the types of backplane that can be included in an RX3i system:
Backplane Type Catalog Number Section
7-Slot RX3i Universal Backplane IC695CHS007 3.1
5-Slot RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane IC694CHS398 3.2
10-Slot RX3i Serial Expansion Backplane IC694CHS392 3.2
5-Slot Series 90-30 Expansion Backplane IC693CHS3985
10-Slot Series 90-30 Expansion Backplane IC693CHS3925
5-Slot Series 90-30 Remote Backplane IC693CHS3995
10-Slot Series 90-30 Remote Backplane IC693CHS3935
3.1 RX3i Universal Backplanes: IC695CHS007,

IC695CHS012, IC695CHS016
Three Universal Backplanes are available for RX3i PACSystems:
 the 7-slot IC695CHS007,

 the 12-slot IC695CHS012, displayed in Figure 57 below, and
 the 16-slot IC695CHS016.
5
For information about the IC693 Series 90-30 Expansion and Remote Backplanes, refer to the Series 90-30 PLC Installation Manual, GFK-
0356.
Backplane 71
TB 1
E
1
X
P
A
N
S
I
O
8 N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 57: 12-Slot RX3i Universal Backplane IC695CHS012
The RX3i Universal Backplane supports both PCI (IC695) and serial (IC694) I/O and option modules with its
dual-bus backplane. The RX3i Universal Backplane also supports 90-30 IO and option modules. Refer to
Section 1.3 for supported modules and to Section Error! Reference source not found. for Error! Reference so
urce not found..
RX3i modules (IC695 catalog numbers) communicate over the backplane PCI bus.
RX3i modules (IC694 catalog numbers) and Series 90-30 modules (IC693) communicate over the backplane
serial bus.
3.1.1 RX3i Universal Backplane Features
For RX3i IC695 Power Removable covers for accepting heat Serial Expansion
Supply Modules Only sink on modules with heat sinks connector
TB 1
1 E
X
P
A
N
S
I
O
8 N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Backplane Grounding Bar Slot Numbers

Grounding Point
Figure 58: Features of RX3i Universal Backplanes
Backplane 72
RX3i Universal Backplane features include:
▪ Terminal Strip on the left (Figure 58) for Isolated +24Vdc input.
▪ Backplane grounding point as described in Section 0.
▪ An integral grounding bar for connecting module/shield grounds as described in Section 2.5.5.
▪ Removable covers that, when knocked out, allow heat sinks on modules equipped with heat sinks to be
inserted.
▪ Serial Expansion connector for connection (Figure 58, far right) to Serial Expansion and Remote
Backplanes (12- and 16-slot models only).
▪ Slot numbers are printed on the backplane (Figure 58) and are used for reference for configuration in
Proficy Machine Edition (PME). Slots and connectors are described on the following pages. Most
modules occupy one slot. Some modules, such as CPUs and AC Power Supplies occupy two slots.
Backplane 73
3.1.1.1 Universal Backplane TB1 Input Terminals

The RX3i IC695 Power Supplies do not provide
Isolated +24Vdc output power over the
backplane. Terminals 7 and 8 can be used to
connect an optional external source of Isolated
+24Vdc, which is required for some IC693 and TB 1
IC694 modules as listed in the table, Module 1
1 – 6: not used
Load Requirements, Section 4.2.
7: Isolated +24VDC In
These terminals accept individual wires from 14
8: Isolated Ground
to 22 AWG. 8
If modules that require Isolated +24Vdc are

installed in an Expansion Backplane instead, an 0 1
external Isolated +24Vdc power supply is not

required.
Terminals 1 through 6 are not used. Slot 0: Connector for RX3i

IC695 Power Supply only
Figure 59: TB1 Terminal Detail
3.1.1.2 Slot 0
The leftmost slot in a Universal Backplane is slot 0. Only the backplane connector of IC695 Power Supplies
can be installed in slot 0 (note: IC695 Power Supplies can be installed any slot). However, 2-slot wide
modules that have right-justified connectors, such as the CPU310, can be plugged into slot 1and also cover
slot 0.
The CPU is referenced for configuration and application logic by the leftmost slot occupied by the entire
module, not by the slot the physical connector is located in. For example, if the CPU has its physical
connector inserted in slot 3, the module occupies slots 2 and 3 and the CPU is referenced as being located in
slot 2. A double-wide CPU may therefore be located in slot 0 with its backplane connector inserted in slot 1.
3.1.1.3 Dual-Connector Slots
Backplane 74
Dual-connector slots are identified as follows:
CHS016: 0 through 15
CHS012: 0 through 11
Connector
for
CHS007: 0 through 5 PCI Bus Connector
for
They have two connectors, a connector for the RX3i Serial Bus
PCI bus, and connector for the RX3i serial bus. Each of
these slots can accept any type of compatible module:
IC695 Power Supply, IC695 CPU, or IC695, IC694 and 10
IC693 I/O or option modules.
Provided the Hot Insertion and Removal procedure Figure 60: RX3i Universal Backplane Dual Connector
described in Section 2.6.4.1 is carefully followed, I/O Slot for PCI Bus & Serial Bus
and option modules in a Universal Backplane may be
removed and replaced without powering-down.
Backplane 75
3.1.1.4 Expansion Slot (Slot 12 or Slot 16)

The rightmost slot in a Universal Backplane has a
different connector than the other slots. It can only be
used for an RX3i Serial Expansion Module,
IC695LRE001.
An RX3i 2-slot module may not occupy this expansion

slot.
The 7-slot CHS007 rack does not provide an expansion

slot, or support the LRE001 Serial Expansion Module.
E
X
P
A
N
S
I
O
N
11 12
Figure 61: Expansion Slot Connector shown at Slot 12
3.1.1.5 Slot 6 of 7-Slot Rack
Backplane 76
In the CHS007 seven-slot rack, slot 6 has one

RX3i PCI connector and can accept only IC695
single-width I/O or option modules.
5 6
Figure 62: Slot 6 of IC695CHS007
3.1.2 Module Locations in a 12- or 16-Slot Universal

Backplane
▪ IC695 Power Supply modules may be installed in any slot. DC Power Supplies IC695PSDx40 occupy one
slot and AC Power Supplies IC695PSAx40 occupy two slots. RX3i (IC694) and Series 90-30 (IC693) Power
Supplies cannot be installed in Universal Backplanes.
▪ An RX3i CPU module can be installed anywhere in the backplane except the Expansion slot. CPU
modules occupy two slots.
▪ I/O and option modules can be installed in any available slot except slot 0, which can only accept IC695
Power Supplies, and the Expansion slot. Each I/O slot has two connectors, so either an RX3i PCI-based
module or a serial module can be installed in any I/O slot.
▪ The rightmost slot is the expansion slot. It can only be used for optional serial expansion module
IC695LRE001. Refer to Chapter 5 for information about the LRE001 Serial Expansion Module and
expansion cables.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CPU AC I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Exp CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O AC
Power Power
Supply Supply
Figure 63: Configured as CPU in slot 0, Power Supply in Figure 64: Invalid: AC Power Supply cannot be in Slot 11
Slot 2
Backplane 77
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AC I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O CPU
DC Power
CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Exp
Supply
Power
Supply
Figure 65: Configured as CPU in slot 0, Power Supply in Figure 66: Invalid: CPU cannot be configured in Slot 11
Slot 6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DC Power
DC Power
CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Exp I/O CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Exp
Supply
Supply
Figure 67: Configured as Power Supply in slot 0, CPU in Figure 68: Invalid: Only a Power Supply can be installed in
Slot 1 Slot 0
Backplane 78
3.1.2.1 Locating the CPU in Slot 1

Whenever the CPU is installed in slot 1, only a single-wide power supply may be used in slot 0. Either DC
power supply can be used (IC695PSD040 or IC695PSD140). If, for a given application, the CPU must be
located in slot 1, and also uses an AC power-supply, the RX3i AC power-supply must then be located in the
slot to the right of that CPU.
3.1.2.2 Locating the CPU in a Slot Other than 1

Before deciding to place the CPU in a slot other than slot 1, it is important to consider possible issues that
could arise as follows.
Communications: For Service Request #15 (Read Last-Logged Fault Table Entry) and Service Request #20
(Read Fault Tables), the location of CPU faults is not the standard 0.1 location, but the slot the CPU is located
in. Logic that decodes fault table entries retrieved by these service requests may need updating.
COMMREQs directed to the CPU (e.g. those directed to the serial ports of the CPU) will need to be updated
with the correct CPU slot reference.
Hardware Configuration: The slot location of the CPU must be updated in the hardware configuration to
reflect the true location of the CPU.
Fault Tables: Faults logged for the CPU in the fault table will reflect the actual slot of the CPU.
Remote Series 90 PLCs that use SRTP Channels COMMREQs expect the CPU to be in slot 1 or slot 2. To support
communications with Series 90 SRTP clients such as Series 90 PLCs using SRTP Channels, the RX3i internally
redirects incoming SRTP requests destined for {backplane 0, slot 1} to {backplane 0, slot 2}, provided that
the CPU is located in backplane 0 slot 2 (and the remote client has not issued an SRTP Destination service on
the connection to discover the backplane and slot of the CPU). This special redirection permits Series 90-30
applications that expect the power supply to be located leftmost and the CPU to be located to the right of
the power supply to function. Attempts to establish channels with CPUs in slots other than 1 or 2 will fail if
initiated from Series 90 PLCs.
All external communication devices that interact with the CPU should be checked for compatibility with CPU
slot locations other than slot 1. Problems may arise with, but are not limited to, initial connection sequences
and fault reporting. Machine Edition View users should select GE SRTP as their communications driver as it
can communicate with a CPU in any slot.
3.1.3 Module Locations in a 7-Slot Universal Backplane

▪ DC Power Supplies IC695PSDx40 occupy one slot and can be installed in any slot. AC Power Supplies
IC695PSAx40 occupy two slots and cannot be installed in slot 6. IC694 and IC693 Power Supplies cannot be
installed in Universal Backplanes.
▪ Any I/O or option module can be installed in slots 1 through 5, which have two connectors and can
accommodate either an RX3i PCI-based module or a serial module. Slot 6 can accommodate only RX3i
PCI-based single-wide modules. I/O and option modules cannot be installed in slot 0, which can only
accept IC695 Power Supplies.
Backplane 79
▪ An RX3i CPU can be installed anywhere in the backplane except slot 6. CPU modules occupy two slots.
Installing the CPU in slot 1 means only a singlewide power supply can be used in slot 0. If the application
must maintain a slot 1 CPU and use an AC power supply, the AC power supply must be located in a slot
to the right of the RX3i CPU in slot 1. Before deciding to place the CPU in a slot other than slot 1, it is
important to consider the factors listed in the section, Locating the CPU in a Slot Other than 1.
Allowed Not Allowed
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
CPU AC I/O I/O RX3i AC I/O I/O I/O I/O CPU

Power I/O Power
Supply Supply
Figure 69: Configured as CPU in slot 0, Power Supply in Figure 70: CPU cannot be configured in Slot 6
Slot 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Power
RX3i RX3i
DC Power
DCPower
CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O CPU I/O I/O
Supply
Supply
Supply
I/O I/O
DC
Figure 71: Configured as CPU in slot 0, Power Supply in Figure 72: I/O or Option Module cannot be installed in
Slot 5 Slot 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O AC

DC Power
CPU I/O I/O I/O RX3i

Supply
I/O Power
Supply
Figure 73: Configured as Power Supply in slot 0, CPU in Figure 74: AC Power Supply cannot be configured in Slot
Slot 1 6
3.2 Serial Expansion Backplanes: IC694CHS392,

IC694CHS398
The RX3i system can include any combination of up to seven RX3i Serial Expansion backplane and/or
Series 90-30 Expansion/Remote Backplanes. RX3i Serial Expansion Backplanes are available with either five
I/O slots (IC694CHS398, displayed in the following figure) or ten I/O slots (IC694CHS392).
Backplane 80
DIP EXPA NSION RACK #

SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
X = CL OSED
E
X
P
NON-CPU SLOTS A
N
S
I
O
N
C
P
U
POWER I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 I/O-5

SUPPLY
Figure 75: Serial Expansion Backplane
Universal Backplane
▪ The leftmost module in an RX3i Serial Expansion
I/O Bus
Backplane must be a Serial Expansion Power Supply:
▪ IC694PWR321: Serial Expansion Power Supply,
120/240 Vac, 125Vdc
▪ IC694PWR330: Serial Expansion Power Supply, Expansion Backplane
120/240 Vac, 125Vdc, High Capacity

▪ IC694PWR331: Serial Expansion Power Supply,
24Vdc, High Capacity
Up to 15 meters (50 Ft)

▪ Module Hot Insertion and Removal are NOT permitted on Expansion Backplane
Expansion Backplanes.
▪ Each Expansion Backplane has a Rack Number Selection
DIP switch (Figure 18) that must be set before module
installation.
▪ Each Expansion Backplane has a Bus Expansion connector Expansion Backplane
at its right end for attaching an optional expansion cable.

There can be no more than 50 feet (15 meters) of cable
connecting Expansion backplanes with the Universal
Backplane. If the system includes Series 90-30 Remote
Expansion Backplane
Backplanes, the additional requirements summarized in
Section 1.3 through Section 1.5 must also be observed.
Terminating
Resistor
Figure 76: Example RX3i System with

Expansion Backplane Racks
Backplane 81
Section 4: Power Supplies
This chapter describes power supplies for RX3i PACSystems:
Power Supply Description Catalog Number Section
120/240 Vac 125Vdc 40 W Power Supply IC695PSA040 4.4
120/240 Vac 125Vdc 40 W Multi-Purpose Power Supply IC695PSA140 0
24Vdc 40 W Power Supply IC695PSD040 4.6
24Vdc 40 W Multi-Purpose Power Supply IC695PSD140 0
120/240 Vac 125Vdc 30 W Serial Expansion Power Supply IC694PWR321 4.8
120/240 Vac 125Vdc 30 W High Capacity Serial Expansion Power Supply IC694PWR330 4.9
24Vdc 30 W High Capacity Serial Expansion Power Supply IC694PWR331 4.10
4.1 Power Supply Overview

This section provides a general description of the IC695 Power Supplies, which must be used in RX3i (IC695)
Universal Backplanes, and IC694 Power Supplies, which must be used in RX3i Serial Expansion (IC694)
Backplanes. Individual power supply specifications are listed in the following sections.
The IC695 Power Supplies provide up to 40 W each. The IC694 (Expansion) Power Supplies provide up to 30
W each. However, IC694PWR321 is limited to 15 Watts on the +5Vdc output.
The total of all outputs combined cannot exceed the stated load capacity in Watts. PME Logic Developer will
automatically calculate the power consumption of modules as they are added to the system configuration.
Power requirements of system modules are shown in this section, for reference when planning the system.
The maximum load for each type of power supply is displayed in the following table.
Load
Max Max
Catalog Can be Nominal Load Sharing, Max Max
+24Vdc +24Vdc
Number Located In Input Capacity6 Redund- +3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Isolated Relay
ancy
6
A power supply must be able to provide the total of the internal and external loads that may be placed upon it by all the hardware
components in the backplane as well as by all the loads that may be connected to the Isolated +24Vdc supply on an expansion
backplane.
Power Supplies 83
Universal 120/240 Vac

IC695PSA040 40 W No 30 W 30 W – 40 W
Backplane or 125Vdc
Universal 120/240 Vac
IC695PSA140 40 W Yes 30 W 30 W – 40 W
Backplane or 125Vdc
Universal
IC695PSD040 24Vdc 40 W No 30 W 30 W – 40 W
Backplane
Universal
IC695PSD140 24Vdc 40 W Yes 30 W 30 W – 40 W
Backplane
Serial
100/240 Vac
IC694PWR321 Expansion 30 W No – 15 W 20 W 15 W
or 125Vdc
Backplane
Serial
100/240 Vac
IC694PWR330 Expansion 30 W No – 30 W 20 W 15 W
or 125Vdc
Backplane
Serial
IC694PWR331 Expansion 24Vdc 30 W No – 30 W 20 W 15 W
Backplane
4.1.1 Power Supply Field Wiring

Refer to Power Supply Field Wiring, Section 2.6.6.1. See also AC Power Source Connections (Section 2.6.6.2)
or DC Power Source Connections (Section 2.6.6.3) as appropriate for how each power supply is being
applied.
4.1.2 24Vdc Isolated Power

The IC695 Power Supplies do not have Isolated +24Vdc output terminals. The RX3i Universal Backplane
provides external input terminals (TB1) for connecting an optional Isolated +24Vdc external supply. Modules
that draw +24Vdc from the backplane are listed in the table Module Load Requirements, Section 4.2. Refer to
Universal Backplane TB1 Input Terminals for details on how to wire to terminal TB1.
4.1.3 RX3i IC695 Power Supply Outputs

The IC695 power supplies have +5.1Vdc, +24Vdc Relay, and 3.3Vdc outputs that are connected internally on
the backplane. The voltage and power required by modules installed on the backplane is supplied through
the backplane connectors.
Power Supplies 84
Backplane Backplane
+
24V Relay 24V Relay
5.1 V 5.1 V
AC Line Regulator
5.1V DC Line Regulator
5.1V
-
3.3 V 3.3V 3.3 V 3.3V
Regulator Regulator
0V 0V
Figure 77: Outputs of Power Supply IC695PSA040 Figure 78: Outputs of Power Supply IC695PSD040
& IC695PSD140
4.1.4 RX3i IC694 Power Supply Outputs

The IC694 power supplies have +5Vdc, Relay +24Vdc and Isolated +24Vdc outputs that are connected
internally on the backplane. The voltage and power required by modules installed on the backplane is
supplied through the backplane connectors.
Power Supplies 85
Power Supply Backplane Description

I24V Used internally by IC694 analog input,
analog output, and DC input modules
Also available on external terminals of
I
GND DC Input Modules and on front of IC694
Power Supplies for user applications
R24V
User internally by
IC694 Relay Outputs
RGND
Single
Point
Connection 5V Primary power to operate most
DC internal circuits on IC694 modules
DC
LGND
2-Point
Connection External connection to
FGND
earth ground.
Figure 79: Outputs of Power Supplies IC694PWR321, IC694PWR330, and IC694PWR331
4.2 Module Load Requirements

The following table summarizes the maximum load requirements in milliamps and Watts for RX3i modules.
Modules are listed alphabetically by the last six characters of the catalog number. For I/O modules, the actual
load may depend on the number of points on at the same time.
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Catalog Relay Isolated
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W
IC694ACC300 Input Simulator – – 120 0.60 – – – –
IC694ACC307 Expansion Bus Termination Plug – – 72 0.36 – – – –
Analog Input Module, 6-Channel

IC695ALG106 390 1.287 225 1.125 – – – –
Isolated Current/Voltage
Analog Input Module, 12-Channel

IC695ALG112 370 1.221 425 2.125 – – – –
Isolated Current/Voltage
IC694ALG220 Analog Input, Voltage, 4-Channel – – 27 0.135 – – 98 2.352
Power Supplies 86
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W
IC694ALG221 Analog Input, Current, 4-Channel – – 25 0.125 – – 100 2.4
Analog Input, 8-/16-Channel Voltage

IC694ALG222 Version -AA – – 112 0.56 – – 0 41 0.984
Versions –BA and later – – 112 0.56 – – 110 2.64
IC694ALG223 Analog Input, 8-/16-Channel Current – – 120 0.60 – – 65 1.56
Advanced Diagnostics, 16-Channel

IC694ALG232 – – 112 0.56 – – 110 2.64
Input Analog Voltage Module
Advanced Diagnostics, 16-Channel

IC694ALG233 – – 120 0.60 – – 65 1.56
Input Analog Current Module
Thermocouple Input Module,

IC695ALG306 400 1.320 225 1.125 – – – –
6-Channel Isolated
Thermocouple Input Module,

IC695ALG312 400 1.320 425 2.125 – – – –
12-Channel Isolated
IC694ALG390 Analog Output 2-Channel Voltage – – 32 0.16 – – 120 2.88
IC694ALG391 Analog Output 2-Channel Current – – 30 0.15 – – 215 5.16
Analog Output 8-Channel

IC694ALG392 – – 110 0.55 – – 315 7.56
Current/Voltage
Analog Module 4-Input 2-Output

IC694ALG542 Current /Voltage with Advanced - - 95 0.475 - - 150 3.6
Diagnostics
Isolated Thermocouple Input Module

IC695ALG412 400 1.320 425 2.125 – – – –
12-Channel
Analog Module 4-Input 2-Output

IC694ALG442 – – 95 0.475 – – 129 3.096
Current/Voltage
RTD Input Module, 8-Channel

IC695ALG508 400 1.320 200 1.00 - - - -
Isolated
IC695ALG600 Universal Analog Input Module 350 1.155 400 2.00 – – – –
Analog Input 8-/4-Channel

IC695ALG608 330 1.089 600 3.00 – – – –
Current/Voltage

IC695ALG616 450 1.485 600 3.00 – – – –
Current/Voltage
Power Supplies 87
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W

IC695ALG626 Current/Voltage with HART 625 2.063 600 3.00 – – – –
Communications

IC695ALG628 Current/Voltage with HART 625 2.063 450 2.25 – – – –
Communications
Analog Output, 4-Channel

IC695ALG704 375 1.238 – – – – 150 3.6
Current/Voltage

IC695ALG708 375 1.238 – – – – 250 6
Current/Voltage

IC695ALG728 Current/Voltage with HART 380 1.255 – – – – – –
Communications enabled
Analog Output 8-Channel

IC695ALG808 450 1.485 25 – 0.138 – 600 14.4
Current/Voltage Isolated
IC694APU300 High-Speed Counter – – 250 1.25 – – – –
Special I/O Processor

IC694APU305 (360mA module +10mA per output – – 440 2.2 – – 80 1.92
on)
I/O Link Interface Module 205 1.025

IC694BEM320 – – – – – –
with Optical Adapter 405 2.025
IO Link Master Module 415 2.075

IC694BEM321 – – – – – –
with Optical Adapter 615 3.075
IC694BEM331 Genius Bus Controller Module – – 1300 6.50 – – – –
IC695CHS007 Universal Backplane 7-Slot 600 1.98 240 1.20 – – – –
IC694CHS392 Expansion/Remote Backplane 10-Slot – – 150 0.75 – – – –
IC694CHS398 Expansion/Remote Backplane 5-Slot – – 170 0.85 – – – –
Serial Communications Module, 2

IC695CMM002 700 2.310 115 0.508 – – – –
Ports
Power Supplies 88
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W
Serial Communications Module, 4

IC695CMM004 700 2.310 150 0.75 – – – –
Ports
IC695CMX128 Control Memory Xchange Module 660 2.178 253 1.27 – – – –
1.1 GHz CPU with 2 MB of user

IC695CPE302 1000 3.300 5007 2.50 1008 2.4 – –
memory and embedded Ethernet

IC695CPE305 1000 3.300 5007 2.50 1008 2.4 – –

IC695CPE310 1000 3.300 5007 2.50 1008 2.4 – –
1 GHz dual core CPU with 64 MB of

IC695CPE330 user memory and embedded 0 0 0 0 750 18 – –
Ethernet/PROFINET
IC695CPU310 300MHz CPU, 10 MB user memory 1250 4.125 1000 5.00 – – – –
IC695CPU315 1 GHz CPU, 20 MB of user memory 1000 3.300 1200 6.00 – – – –
IC695CPU320 1 GHz CPU, 64 MB of user memory 1000 3.300 1200 6.00 – – – –
1 GHz Redundancy CPU, 64 MB of

IC695CRU320 1000 3.300 1200 6.00 – – – –
user memory
IC694DNM200 DeviceNet Master Module – – 450 2.25 - - - -
Motion Controller 800 4.00

IC694DSM314 – – – – – –
(+ external encoder, if used) +500 +2.50
Motion Controller 860 4.30

IC694DSM324 – – – – – –
(+ external encoder, if used) +500 +2.50
IC695ETM001 Ethernet Module 840 2.772 614 3.07 – – – –
IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication

IC695ECM850 1900 6.270 1100 5.500 - - - -
Module
IC695GCG001 Genius Communications Gateway N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
High-Speed Counter Module,

IC695HSC304 457 1.51 64 0.32 – – – –
1.5MHz, 8 inputs, 7 outputs
7
Greater if USB present at start-up. Refer to GFK-2222AD or later, Section 2.2.
8
Note that the current at power-up is 500mA. 100mA is the steady-state condition.
Power Supplies 89
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W
High-Speed Counter Module,

IC695HSC308 561 1.85 94 0.47 – – – –
1.5MHz, 16 inputs, 14 outputs
IC695LRE001 Expansion Module – – 132 1.60 – – – –
IC694MDL230 Input 120 Vac Isolated 8-Pt – – 60 0.30 – – – –
IC694MDL231 Input 240 Vac Isolated 8-Pt – – 60 0.30 – – – –
IC694MDL240 Input 120 Vac 16-Pt – – 90 0.45 – – – –
IC694MDL241 Input 24Vac/Vdc Pos/Neg Logic 16-Pt – – 80 0.40 – – 125 3.00
Input 120 Vac 16-Pt Isolated

IC694MDL250 – – 220 1.10 – – – –
(all inputs on)
Input 120 Vac 32-Pt Isolated

IC694MDL260 – – 220 1.10 – – – –
(all inputs on)
Output 120 Vac 0.5A 12-Pt

IC694MDL310 – – 210 1.05 – – – –
(all outputs on)
Output 120/240 Vac 0.5A 16-Pt

IC694MDL330 – – 160 0.80 – – – –
(all outputs on)
Output 120 Vac 0.5A 16-Pt

IC694MDL340 – – 315 1.575 – – – –
(all outputs on)
Output 120/240 Vac Isolated 16-Pt

IC694MDL350 – – 315 1.575 – – – –
(all outputs on)
Output 120/240 Vac Isolated 2A 5-Pt

IC694MDL390 – – 110 0.55 – – – –
(all outputs on)
IC694MDL632 Input 125Vdc Pos/Neg Logic 8-Pt – – 40 0.20 – – – –
IC694MDL634 Input 24Vdc Pos/Neg Logic 8-Pt – – 45 0.225 – – 62 1.488
Input 125Vdc Pos/Neg, 16-Pt

IC694MDL635 – – 80 0.40 – – – –
(all inputs on)
IC694MDL645 Input 24Vdc Pos/Neg Logic 16-Pt – – 80 0.40 – – 125 3.00
Input 24Vdc Pos/Neg Logic FAST 16-

IC694MDL646 – – 80 0.40 – – 125 3.00
Pt
Power Supplies 90
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W
Input 48Vdc 16-Pt Pos/Neg Logic,

IC694MDL648 - - 80 0.40 - - - -
1ms filter
Input 5/12Vdc (TTL) Pos/Neg 32-Pt

195 = (29mA + 0.5mA/point ON +
4.7mA/LED ON)
195 0.975
IC694MDL654 440mA (maximum) from +5V bus on – – – – – –
/ 440 / 2.20
backplane (if module isolated +5V
supply used to power inputs & all 32
inputs ON)
Input 24Vdc Pos/Neg 32-Pt

224
IC694MDL655 (29mA +0.5mA/point ON – – 195 0.975 – – 5.376
(typ)
+4.7mA/LED ON)
IC694MDL658 Input 48Vdc 32-Pt Pos/Neg Logic – – 195 0.975 – – – –
IC694MDL660 Input 24Vdc 32-Pt Pos/Neg – – 300 1.50 – – – –
IC695MDL664 Input 24Vdc 16-Pt, Pos Logic 95 0.314 225 1.125 - - - -
IC694MDL730 Output 12/24Vdc 2A 8-Pt Pos Logic - - 55 0.275 - - - -
IC694MDL732 Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 8-Pt Pos Logic – – 50 0.25 – – – –
Output 125Vdc Pos/Neg Logic 6 Pt

IC694MDL734 – – 90 0.45 – – – –
(all outputs on)
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 16-Pt Pos

IC694MDL740 – – 110 0.55 – – – –
Logic (all outputs on)
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 16-Pt Neg

IC694MDL741 – – 110 0.55 – – – –
Logic (all outputs on)
Output 12/24Vdc 1A 16-Pt Pos Logic

IC694MDL742 – – 130 0.65 – – – –
ESCP (all outputs on)
Output 5/24Vdc (TTL) 0.5A 32-Pt Neg

IC694MDL752 Logic (13mA + 3 mA/point ON + 4.7 – – 260 1.30 – – – –
mA/LED)
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 32-Pt Pos

IC694MDL753 Logic (13mA + 3mA/point ON + – – 260 1.3 – – – –
4.7mA/LED)
Output 24Vdc High-Density 32-Pt

IC694MDL754 – – 300 1.50 – – 264 6.336
(with all outputs on)
Power Supplies 91
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 32-Pt Positive

IC694MDL758 - - 250 1.25 - - 66 1.584
Logic with ESCP per group
Output Module, 24/125Vdc 16-Pt Pos

IC695MDL765 152 0.502 540 2.7
Logic
IC694MDL916 Output 4 Amp 16-Pt Relay – – 300 1.50 – – – –
Relay NO 4A Isolated 8-Pt Output

IC694MDL930 – – 6 0.03 70 1.68 – –
(all outputs on)
Relay NC and Form C 8 A Isolated 8-Pt

IC694MDL931 – – 6 0.03 110 2.64 – –
Output (all outputs on)
Relay NO 2A 16-Pt Output

IC694MDL940 – – 7 0.035 135 3.24 – –
(all outputs on)
Mixed I/O 24Vdc Input (8-Pt)

IC694MDR390 - - 80 0.40 70 1.68 - -
N.O. Relay Output (8-Pt)
IC695NIU001 Ethernet Network Interface Unit 1250 4.125 1000 5.00 – – – –
Ethernet Network Interface Unit Plus

IC695NIU001 520 1.716 950 4.750 – – – –
(version AAAA and later)
IC695PBM300 PROFIBUS Master Module 440 1.452 – – – – – –
IC695PBS301 PROFIBUS Slave Module 440 1.452 – – – – – –
PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion

IC695PMM335 1010 3.333 440 2.2 - - - -
Controller
PROFINET Controller Module

IC695PNC001-
(maximum with 2 SFP devices 1200 3.960 1500 7.5 – – – –
Ax
installed, 0.35 A per SFP device)
PROFINET Controller Module

IC695PNC001-
(maximum with 2 SFP devices 1200 3.960 750 4.125 – – – –
Bxxx
PROFINET Scanner Module

IC695PNS001-
(maximum with 2 SFP devices 1900 6.270 1100 5.5 - - - -
Axxx
PROFINET Scanner Module

IC695PNS001-
(maximum with 2 SFP devices 1300 4.290 700 3.5 - - - -
Bxxx
Power Supplies 92
+24Vdc +24Vdc
+3.3Vdc +5Vdc
Module
Number
mA W mA W mA W mA W
PROFINET Scanner Module RX3i SoE

IC695PNS101 (maximum with 2 SFP devices 1300 4.290 700 3.5 - - - -
IC695PRS015 Pressure Transducer Module 700 2.310 115 0.575 – – – –
Redundancy Memory Xchange

IC695RMX128 580 .264 220 1.1 – – – –
Module, Multi-Mode Fiber
Redundancy Memory Xchange

IC695RMX228 580 .264 220 1.1 – – – –
Module, Single-Mode Fiber
4.2.1 Power Supply Loading Example

To determine the total load placed on a power supply, add the current requirements of each module and the
backplane. The following table provides an example of power supply loading.
Catalog +24Vdc +24Vdc

Module +3.3Vdc +5.1Vdc
Number Relay Isolated9
IC695CPU310 300MHz CPU 10 Meg memory 1250 1000 – –
IC695CHS012 Universal Backplane, 12-Slot 600 240 – –
IC695ETM001 Ethernet Module 840 614 – –
IC695LRE001 Expansion Module – 132 – –
IC694ALG220 Analog Input, Voltage, 4-Ch – 27 – 989
IC694ALG390 Analog Output 2-Ch Voltage – 32 – 1209
Analog Current/Voltage 4-Ch In /

IC694ALG442 – 95 – -
2-Ch Out
IC694APU300 High-Speed Counter – 250 – 40009
IC694MDL340 120 Vac 0.5A 16-Pt Output – 315 – –
IC694MDL230 120 Vac Isolated, 8-Pt Input – 60 – –
9
Because the IC695 power supply does not provide +24Vdc Isolated power, an external +24Vdc supply, wired via terminal TB1 on the
Universal Backplane, is required for modules ALG220, ALG221, ALG222 and APU300.
Power Supplies 93
IC694MDL240 120 Vac 16-Pt Input – 90 – –
Relay NO 4A Isolated 8-Pt Output

IC694MDL930 – 6 70 –
(all outputs on)
Relay NC and Form C 8 A Isolated

IC694MDL931 – 6 110 –
8-Pt Output (all outputs on)
Total Amps 2.690 2.867 0.180 –
Converted to Watts (x3.3V) (x5.1V) (x24V) –
Power Consumption from Power

=8.877W =14.622W =4.32W –
Supply
Total Power Consumption from Power Supply 8.877 + 14.622 + 4.32 = 27.817 W
At ambient temperatures, up to 32°C, power supply IC695PSA040 provides the following power outputs:
▪ 40 W maximum total
▪ 5.1Vdc = 30 W maximum
▪ 3.3Vdc = 30 W maximum
In this example, all of the module power requirements are met by Power Supply PSA040.
4.2.2 Load Sharing / Redundancy

To meet the power needs of the application, as many as four multi-purpose power supplies can be installed
in a Universal Backplane. These power supplies can be combined to provide:
▪ Load Sharing
▪ Power Supply Module Redundancy
▪ Power Source Redundancy
No other types of RX3i power supply can be included in these applications.
4.2.2.1 Load Sharing

Multi-purpose power supplies can be combined into load sharing applications. The following rules must be
observed:
If multiple power supplies are required to meet the system load requirements, Multi-purpose power supplies
must be wired to the same power source in such a way that they all can be powered up or powered down
simultaneously. The On/Off switch on the front-panel of each of the power supplies must be left in the On
position.
Power Supplies 94
CAUTION
In a load-sharing application, it is important to ensure that the load-sharing power supply
modules’ On/Off switches cannot be inadvertently used. The minimum number of power
supplies needed to meet the system power requirements MUST have their switches
always kept in the On position. Also, the load-sharing power supplies must be connected
to the system power source through the same external switch. The system must be
powered up and powered down only from the external switch. If individual power
supplies are powered up or powered down using their On/Off switches or separate
external switches, resulting in insufficient power capacity, equipment damage may result.
It may be necessary to re-load the PLC operating system to resume operation.
4.2.2.2 Connections for Load Sharing

In load-sharing installations, additional multi-purpose power supplies above the minimum required for the
system load may be wired to the same power source, or to a different source.
Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi-

Power purpose purpose purpose purpose Power
Source Power Power Power Power Source
Supply Supply Supply Supply
A B
External
Switching
Device
Example: Power Supplies Needed Extra Power Supply

to Meet Load Requreements Optionally Connected to
Different Source
Figure 80: Power Supply Connections for Load Sharing
Power Supplies 95
4.2.2.3 Connections for Power Supply Module Redundancy

Power supply module redundancy can be provided by using one additional multi-purpose power supply
above the minimum required for the system power load (Figure 81). In this type of installation, all Multi-
purpose power supplies contribute a share of the backplane power and run at a correspondingly reduced
load. This results in longer life for the individual power supplies. In addition, should one power supply
module fail, system operation is not interrupted. The front panel switch can be used to remove a redundant
unit. Note that this type of system does not provide protection against loss of the input power source. If
more than one power supply is switched off, the remaining power supplies may become overloaded and
shut down. An External switching device must be used to remove power from more than one power supply
at a time in the Power Supply Redundancy mode.

Power purpose purpose purpose purpose Optional
Source Power Power Power Power Power
Supply Supply Supply Supply Source
A B
This Extra Power Supply

Example: Three Power Supplies
Provides Power Supply
Needed to Meet Load Requirements
Module Redundancy
Figure 81: Redundant Power Supply Connections
4.2.2.4 Power Source Redundancy

If the overall power needs of the system can be met using either one or two Multi-purpose power supplies,
then power source redundancy can be provided. This requires using twice the minimum number of Multi-
purpose power supplies required to meet the system load requirements. In this type of system, half of the
Multi-purpose power supplies must be connected to one power source and the other half must be
connected to a separate source. This arrangement provides all the advantage of a Basic Redundancy system,
as described above, plus power source redundancy. The front panel switch may be used to remove an
individual power supply as long as the minimum number of units remains powered up.
Power Supplies 96

Power purpose purpose purpose purpose Power
Source Power Power Power Power Source
Supply Supply Supply Supply
A B
External External
Switching Switching
Device Device
Example: Two Load-Sharing Power Supplies Two Extra Load-Sharing Power Supplies
Needed to Meet Load Requreements Provide Power Source Redundancy
Figure 82: Connections for Power Source Redundancy
4.3 AC Power Supply Connections for Floating

Neutral (IT) Systems
If an AC input power supply is installed in a system where the Neutral line is not referenced to Protective
Earth Ground, special installation instructions must be followed to prevent damage to the power supply.
A Floating Neutral System is a system of power distribution wiring where L1

Neutral and Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by negligible
impedance. In Europe, this is referred to as an IT system (refer to
N
IEC950). In a Floating Neutral System, voltages measured from input
terminals to protective earth ground may exceed the 264Vac PE
maximum input voltage power supply specification.
Figure 83: Floating Neutral
4.3.1 Special Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems

The input power terminals should be wired according to the instructions in Power Supply Field Wiring, Section
2.6.6.1 with the following exceptions.
1) For IC695 power supplies, no jumper may be installed between terminal 5 or 6 and terminal 7.
2) For IC694 and IC693 power supplies, no jumper may be installed between terminals 3 and 4 of the power
supply module.
3) Voltage surge protection devices such as MOVs must be installed:
▪ From L1 to earth ground
▪ From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground
The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the system is protected from power line transients that
exceed Line voltage + 100V + (N-PE)MAX. The expression N-PE refers to the voltage potential between neutral
and Protective Earth (PE) ground. For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral floating 50 Vac above
earth ground, the transient protection should be rated at:
Power Supplies 97
240 Vac + 100 Vac + 50 Vac = 390 Vac
4.3.2 Non-Floating Neutral System

Systems where one leg of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two legs
of the power distribution wiring is tied to Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems. Non-floating
neutral systems do not require special installation procedures.
L1 L L1
N N/PE L2
PE PE
Figure 84: Non-Floating Neutral Wiring
Power Supplies 98
4.4 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc, 40 W:

IC695PSA040
Power Supply IC695PSA040 is a 40-Watt supply that
operates from an input voltage source in the range of
85 to 264Vac or 100 Vdc to 300 Vdc.
POWER
P/S FAULT
This power supply provides three outputs:
OVERTEMP
OVERLOAD
▪ +5.1Vdc output,
▪ +24Vdc relay output that can be used to power Power Supply
40W AC
circuits on Output Relay modules.
▪ +3.3Vdc. This output is used internally by RX3i
modules with IC695 catalog numbers.
CAUTION
Only one IC695PSA040 can be used
in a PACSystems RX3i (IC695
catalog number) Universal
Backplane.
This power supply cannot be used

with other RX3i power supplies in
redundant or increased capacity
modes.
Power supply version

PACSystems™
IC695PSA040C or earlier may cause
RX3i
equipment damage if inadvertently
installed in the same backplane as
another RX3i power supply.
Figure 85: IC695PSA040
If the number of modules required exceeds the
capacity of the power supply, the additional modules
must be installed in Expansion or Remote backplanes.
The power supply indicates when an internal fault

occurs so the CPU can detect loss of power or log the
appropriate fault code.
Power Supplies 99
4.4.1.1 LEDs
Four LEDs on the power supply indicate:
▪ Power (Green/Amber). When this LED is green, it

indicates power is being supplied to the
backplane. When this LED is amber, power is
applied to the power supply but the Power Supply
switch is off.
▪ P/S Fault (Red). When this LED is lit, it indicates
the power supply has failed and is no longer
supplying sufficient voltage to the backplane.
▪ Over Temperature (Amber). When this LED is lit,
it indicates the power supply is approaching or
exceeding its maximum operating temperature.
▪ Overload (Amber). When this LED is lit, it
indicates the power supply is approaching or
exceeding its maximum output capability on at
least one of its outputs.
The CPU Fault Table shows a fault if any Over-

temperature, Overload, or Power Supply fault occurs.
4.4.1.2 On/Off Switch

The ON/OFF switch is located behind the door on the
front of the module. The switch controls the
operation of the outputs of the supply. It does NOT
interrupt line power. Projecting tabs next to the
switch help prevent accidentally turning it on or off. Figure 86: PSA040 Showing Terminals & On/Off Switch
4.4.1.3 Wiring Terminals

Terminals for power, ground, and MOV disconnect
accept individual 14 to 22 AWG wires.
Power Supplies 100

4.4.2 Specifications: PSA040
Nominal Rated Voltage 120/240 Vac or 125 Vdc

Input Voltage Range
AC 85 to 264 Vac
DC 100 to 300 Vdc
Input Power
(Maximum with Full Load) 70 W maximum
Inrush Current10 4 A, 250 ms maximum
Output Power 40 W maximum total
5.1 Vdc = 30 W maximum
The maximum total output power available depends on the
ambient temperature, as shown.
Output Voltage 24 Vdc: 19.2 to 28.8 Vdc
5.1 Vdc: 5.0 to 5.2Vdc (5.1 Vdc nominal)
3.3 Vdc: 3.1 to 3.5Vdc (3.3 Vdc nominal)
Output Current 24 Vdc: 0 to 1.6 A
5.1 Vdc: 0 to 6 A
3.3 Vdc: 0 to 9 A
Isolation (input to backplane): 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Ripple (all outputs) 150 mV
Noise (all outputs) 150 mV
Ride-through time 20 ms is the length of time the power supply maintains valid
outputs if the power source is interrupted
Wiring Terminals Each terminal accepts one 14 AWG to 22 AWG wire
Current per Terminal 6A
Number of Daisy-Chained PSA040 Up to 4
Supplies
For product standards and general specifications, refer to Appendix A.
WARNING
The door of the power supply module must be closed. During normal operation with an AC power source
either 120 Vac or 240 Vac is present on the AC power supply. The door protects against accidental shock
hazard that could cause severe or fatal injury to personnel.
10
The Inrush Current specification is given as a guide for sizing the external power source for the IC695PSA040. Peak inrush current may
be higher for shorter durations.
Power Supplies 101

4.4.2.1 Thermal Derating: PSA040

The maximum output power for power supply PSA040 depends on the ambient temperature, as displayed in
the following figure. Full output power is available up to at least 32°C (89.6°F).
Figure 87: Thermal Derating Curves for PSA040
4.4.2.2 Over-Current Protection: PSA040

The 5.1 Vdc output is electronically limited to 7 A. The 3.3Vdc output is limited to 10 A. If an overload
(including short circuit) occurs, it is sensed internally and the power supply shuts down. The power supply
Power Supplies 102

continually tries to restart until the overload condition is removed. An internal, non-repairable, fusible link in
the input line is provided as a backup. The power supply usually shuts down before the fusible link blows. The
fusible link also protects against internal supply faults. The CPU Fault Table displays a fault if any Over-
temperature, Overload, or Power Supply fault occurs. There is no additional indication if the power supply
fusible link blows.
4.4.3 Field Wiring: PSA040
4.4.3.1 Power Source and Ground Connections

The wires from the power source and ground connect
to the terminals on the power supply as shown in Figure To additional
88. Each terminal accepts one AWG 14 to AWG 22 wire. units
When tightening the screw terminals, do not exceed To additional

units
the maximum torque limit of 0.5 Nm (4.4 in-lb).
Keep as short as
WARNING possible. Connect
directly to
mounting panel.
If the same external AC power
source is used to provide power to
two or more RX3i power supplies in
the system, connection polarity
Figure 88: Field Wiring PSA040
must be identical at each power
supply. A resulting difference in
potential can injure personnel or
cause damage to equipment. Also,
each backplane must be connected
to a common system ground.
4.4.3.2 Input Over-Voltage Protection
Power Supplies 103

The bottom terminal is normally connected to

frame ground with a user-installed jumper as
+ / L1
shown in Figure 89. If over-voltage protection is
not required or is supplied upstream, no jumper is
- / N / L2
needed.
To Hi-pot test this supply, over-voltage protection Jumper strap

connects Frame
must be disabled during the test by removing the Ground
overvoltage
jumper. Re-enable over-voltage protection after protection
testing by reinstalling the jumper. devices to
frame ground
Screw
Terminals
Figure 89: Over-Voltage Protection for PSA040
In systems with a floating neutral input (Figure 83 - the neutral line is not referenced to Protective Earth
Ground), this jumper must NOT be installed. In addition, in a floating neutral system, voltage surge
protection devices such as MOVs must be installed from L1 to earth ground, and from L2 (Neutral) to earth
ground, as discussed in Special Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems, Section 4.3.1.
Power Supplies 104

4.5 Multi-purpose Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or

125Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSA140
Power Supply IC695PSA140 is a multi-purpose 40 W
supply that operates from an input voltage source in the
range of 85 to 264Vac or 100 Vdc to 300 Vdc.
POWER
P/S FAULT
OVERTEMP
OVERLOAD
▪ +5.1Vdc output
▪ +24Vdc relay output that can be used to power Power Supply
40W AC
circuits on Output Relay modules.
▪ +3.3Vdc. This output is used internally by RX3i
modules with IC695 catalog numbers.
This power supply is suitable for use in load-sharing and

redundancy applications. Up to four multi-purpose power
supplies (PSA140 and/or PSD140) can be used in a
PACSystems RX3i (IC695 catalog number) Universal
Backplane. Use these Power Supplies if the number of
modules required exceeds the capacity of one power
supply. This power supply occupies two backplane slots.
The power supply indicates when an internal fault occurs

so the CPU can detect loss of power or log the
appropriate fault code.
PACSystems™
RX3i
Figure 90: IC695PSA140
CAUTION
This power supply cannot be used with RX3i IC695PSD040 or IC695PSA040 Power
Supplies in redundant or increased capacity modes. Damage to equipment may result.
Power Supplies 105

4.5.1.1 LEDs

indicates that power is being supplied to the
backplane. When this LED is amber, power is
applied to the power supply but the Power Supply
switch is off.
▪ P/S Fault (Red). When this LED is lit, it indicates
the power supply has failed and is no longer
supplying sufficient voltage to the backplane.
▪ Over Temperature (Amber). When this LED is lit, it
indicates the power supply is approaching or
▪ Overload (Amber). When this LED is lit, it indicates
the Power Supply is approaching or exceeding its
maximum output capability on at least one of its
outputs.
The CPU Fault Table shows a fault if any Over-

temperature, Overload, or Power Supply fault occurs.

The ON/OFF switch is located behind the door on the
front of the module. The switch controls the operation
of the outputs of the supply. It does NOT interrupt line
power. Projecting tabs next to the switch help prevent
accidentally turning it on or off.
Figure 91: PSA140 Showing Terminals & On/Off Switch
Terminals for power, ground, and MOV disconnect
accept individual 14 to 22 AWG wires.
4.5.2 Specifications: PSA140

Input Voltage Range
AC 85 to 264 Vac
DC 100 to 300 Vdc
Power Supplies 106

Input Power
70 W maximum
(Maximum with Full Load)
40 W maximum total
Output Power
The maximum total output power available depends on the
ambient temperature.
24 Vdc: 19.2 to 28.8 Vdc

Output Voltage 5.1 Vdc: 5.0 to 5.2 Vdc (5.1 Vdc nominal)
3.3 Vdc: 3.1 to 3.5 Vdc (3.3 Vdc nominal)
24 Vdc: 0 to 1.6 A
Output Current 5.1 Vdc: 0 to 6 A
3.3 Vdc: 0 to 9 A
Isolation (input to backplane): 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
20 ms. This is the length of time the power supply maintains

Ride-through time
valid outputs if the power source is interrupted
Wiring Terminals Each terminal accepts one 14 AWG to 22 AWG wire.
Current per Terminal 6A
Number of Daisy-Chained PSA140 Supplies Up to 4
Number of PSA140 Power Supplies in

Up to 4
Universal Backplane
WARNING
The door of the power supply module must be closed. During normal operation with an AC power source
either 120 Vac or 240 Vac is present on the AC power supply. The door protects against accidental shock
hazard that could cause severe or fatal injury to personnel.
11
The Inrush Current specification is given as a guide for sizing the external power source for the IC695PSA140. Peak inrush current may
Power Supplies 107

4.5.2.1 Thermal Derating: PSA140

The maximum output power for power supply PSA140 depends on the ambient temperature.
5V fully Loaded
45
40
35
30
Power (W)
25 5
V
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperaure (C)
3.3 V Fully loaded
45
40
35
30
Power (W)
25 5
V
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature (C)
Figure 92: Thermal Derating Curves for PSA140
4.5.2.2 Over-Current Protection: PSA140

The 5.1Vdc output is electronically limited to 7 Amps. The 3.3Vdc output is limited to 10 A. If an overload
(including short circuits) occurs, it is sensed internally and the power supply shuts down. Because it is
designed for redundancy applications, this power supply latches off in fault conditions. It does not
automatically try to restart until the overload condition is removed. Input power must be cycled to clear a
latched fault. However, if the power supply is used in a non-redundant application where automatic
restarting is required, a jumper plug can be installed.
An internal non-repairable fusible link in the input line is provided as a backup. The power supply usually
shuts down before the fusible link blows. The fusible link also protects against internal supply faults. The CPU
Fault Table shows a fault if any Over-temperature, Overload, or P/S Fault occurs. There is no additional
indication if the power supply fusible link blows.
Power Supplies 108

In a non-redundancy application, where automatic restarting may

be appropriate, a jumper plug (or shunt) can be installed at the rear
Location for optional
jumper plug
of the module as shown in Figure 93. The jumper plug must have
0.100 inch spacing on center and accommodate 0.25 inch pins.
Example parts are Radio Shack DIP Programming Shunt #276-1512
and DIGI-Key #59000-ND. The module must be removed from the
Figure 93: Jumper Location PSA140 backplane to install the jumper plug.
4.5.3 Field Wiring: PSA140

The wires from the power source and ground connect
to the terminals on the power supply as shown in Figure To additional
94. Each terminal accepts one AWG 14 to AWG 22 wire. units
When tightening the screw terminals, do not exceed To additional

units
the maximum torque limit of 0.5 Nm (4.4 in-lb).
Keep as short as
WARNING possible. Connect
directly to
mounting panel.
If the same external AC power
source is used to provide power to
two or more RX3i power supplies in
the system, connection polarity
Figure 94: Field Wiring for PSA140
must be identical at each power
supply. A resulting difference in
potential can injure personnel or
cause damage to equipment. Also,
each backplane must be connected
Power Supplies 109


+ / L1
shown in Figure 95. If over-voltage protection is
not required or is supplied upstream, no jumper
- / N / L2
is needed.
To Hi-pot test this supply, over-voltage Jumper strap

protection must be disabled during the test by connects Frame
overvoltage Ground
removing the jumper. Re-enable over-voltage
protection
protection after testing by reinstalling the devices to
jumper. frame ground
Screw
Terminals
Figure 95: Over-Voltage Protection for PSA140
Ground), this jumper must NOT be installed. In addition, in a floating neutral system, voltage surge
protection devices such as MOVs must be installed from L1 to earth ground, and from L2 (Neutral) to earth
ground, as discussed in Special Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems, Section 4.3.1.
Power Supplies 110

4.6 Power Supply, 24Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSD040

Power Supply IC695PSD040 is a 40 W supply that operates from an
input voltage source in the range of 18Vdc to 30 Vdc.
POWER
▪ +5.1Vdc output P/S FAULT
▪ +24Vdc relay output that can be used to power circuits on OVERTEMP

OVERLOAD
Output Relay modules
▪ +3.3Vdc. This output is used internally by RX3i modules with Power Supply
IC695 catalog numbers 40W DC
CAUTION
Only one IC695PSD040 can be installed in a
PACSystems RX3i (IC695 catalog number)
Universal Backplane.
This Power supply cannot be used with other RX3i

power supplies in redundant or increased
capacity modes.
Power supply version IC695PSD040C or earlier

may cause equipment damage if inadvertently
installed in the same backplane as another RX3i
power supply.
PACSystems™
RX3i
This power supply occupies one slot. If the number of modules
required exceeds the capacity of the power supply, the additional
modules must be installed in expansion or remote backplanes. Figure 96: IC695PSD040
The power supply indicates when an internal fault occurs so the CPU
can detect loss of power or log the appropriate fault code.
Power Supplies 111

4.6.1.1 LEDs
▪ Power (Green/Amber). When this LED is green, it indicates

power is being supplied to the backplane. When this LED is
amber, power is applied to the power supply but the power
supply switch is off.
▪ P/S Fault (Red). When this LED is lit, it indicates the Power
Supply has failed and is no longer supplying sufficient
voltage to the backplane.
▪ Over Temperature (Amber). When this LED is lit, it indicates
the power supply is approaching or exceeding its maximum
operating temperature.
▪ Overload (Amber). When this LED is lit, it indicates the
Power Supply is approaching or exceeding its maximum
output capability on at least one of its outputs.
If the red P/S FAULT LED is lit, the power supply has failed and is
no longer supplying sufficient voltage to the backplane.
The amber OVERTEMP and OVERLOAD LEDs light to warn of

high temperature or high load conditions.
The CPU Fault Table shows a fault if any Over-temperature,

Overload, or Power Supply fault occurs.

The ON/OFF switch is located behind the door on the front of
the module. The switch controls the operation of the outputs of
the supply. It does NOT interrupt line power. A projecting tab
next to the switch helps prevent accidentally turning it on or off.
4.6.1.3 Wiring Terminals Figure 97: PSD040 Terminals and

Switch Locations
Terminals for +24V and –24V power, ground, and MOV
disconnect accept individual 14 to 22AWG wires.
Power Supplies 112

4.6.2 Specifications: PSD040
Nominal Rated Voltage 24 Vdc
Input Voltage Range 18 to 30 Vdc
Input Power 60 W maximum at full load
40 W maximum total of both outputs

Output Power 3.3 Vdc = 30 W maximum
Maximum output power depends on ambient temperature

Output Voltage
5.1Vdc: 0 to 6 A
Output Current
3.3 Vdc: 0 to 9 A
Isolation None
10 ms is the length of time the Power Supply maintains valid

outputs if the power source is interrupted. If this Power Supply is
Ride-through time used with IC694 and IC693 modules that have relay outputs, note
that dropouts longer than 10ms will cause dropouts on the
modules.
Wiring Terminals Each terminal accepts one 14 AWG to 22 AWG wire.
Terminal Current 6A
Number of Daisy-chained PSD040

Up to 2
Supplies
4.6.2.1 Thermal Derating: PSD040
12
The Inrush Current specification is given as a guide for sizing the external power source for the IC695PSD040. Peak inrush current may
Power Supplies 113

The maximum output power for power supply PSD040 depends on the ambient temperature. Full output
power is available up to at least 40°C (89.6°F).
5V Fully Loaded
45
40
35
Power (W)
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature (C)
3.3V 5V
3.3V Fully Loaded
45
40
35
Power (W)
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature (C)
3.3V 5V Total
Figure 98: Thermal Derating Curves for PSD040
4.6.2.2 Over-Current Protection: PSD040

The 5.1Vdc output is electronically limited to 7 A. The 3.3Vdc output is limited to 10 A. If an overload
(including short circuits) occurs, it is sensed internally and the power supply shuts down. The power supply
continually tries to restart until the overload condition is removed. An internal non-repairable fusible link in
the input line is provided as a backup. The power supply usually shuts down before the fusible link blows. The
fusible link also protects against internal supply faults. The CPU Fault Table shows a fault if any Over-
Power Supplies 114

temperature, Overload, or Power Supply fault occurs. There is no additional indication if the power supply
fusible link blows.
4.6.3 Field Wiring: PSD040

The wires from the power source and ground
connect to the terminals on the power supply as
shown in Figure 99. Each terminal accepts one
AWG 14 to AWG 22 wire.
When tightening the screw terminals, do not

exceed the maximum torque limit of 0.5 Nm
(4.4 in-lb).
Important: Be sure to connect DC- to Earth

Ground.
WARNING Figure 99: Field Wiring for PSD040

If the same external DC power
source is used to provide
power to two or more power
supplies in the system,
connection polarity must be
identical at each RX3i power
supply. A resulting difference
in potential can injure
personnel or cause damage to
equipment. Also, each
backplane must be connected
Power Supplies 115

The bottom terminal is normally connected

to frame ground with a user-installed
+ / L1
jumper as shown in Figure 100. If over-
voltage protection is not required or is
supplied upstream, no jumper is required. - / N / L2
To Hi-pot test this supply, over-voltage

Jumper strap
protection must be disabled during the test connects Frame
by removing the jumper. Re-enable over- overvoltage Ground
voltage protection after testing by protection
devices to
reinstalling the jumper.
frame ground
Screw
Terminals
Figure 100: Over-Voltage Protection for PSD040
WARNING
This power supply is not isolated and is therefore not compatible with floating or positive
grounded systems.
Power Supplies 116

4.7 Multi-Purpose Power Supply, 24Vdc, 40 W:

IC695PSD140
Power supply IC695PSD140 is a multi-purpose 40-Watt supply that operates
from an input voltage source in the range of 18Vdc to 30 Vdc.
POWER
P/S FAULT
OVERTEMP
▪ +5.1Vdc output OVERLOAD
▪ +24Vdc relay output that can be used to power circuits on Output Relay
Power Supply
modules 40W DC
▪ +3.3Vdc. This output is used internally by RX3i modules with IC695 catalog
numbers
Multi-purpose power supply IC695PSD140 is suitable for use in load-sharing

and redundancy application. It must be installed in a PACSystems RX3i (IC695
catalog number) Universal Backplane. It can be used as the only power supply
in the backplane, or combined with up to three additional multi-purpose power
supplies.
The power supply indicates when an internal fault occurs so the CPU can detect
loss of power or log the appropriate fault code.
PACSystems™
RX3i
Figure 101: IC695PSD140
CAUTION
This power supply cannot be used with RX3i IC695PSD040 or IC695PSA040 power
supplies in redundant or increased capacity modes. Damage to equipment may result.
Power Supplies 117

4.7.1.1 LEDs

indicates power is being supplied to the backplane. When
this LED is amber, power is applied to the power supply
but the power supply switch is off.
▪ P/S Fault (Red). When this LED is lit, it indicates the Power
Supply has failed and is no longer supplying sufficient
voltage to the backplane.
▪ Over Temperature (Amber). When this LED is lit, it
indicates that the power supply is approaching or
▪ Overload (Amber). When this LED is lit, it indicates the
power supply is approaching or exceeding its maximum
output capability on at least one of its outputs.
If the red P/S FAULT LED is lit, the power supply has failed and
is no longer supplying sufficient voltage to the backplane.
The amber OVERTEMP and OVERLOAD LEDs light to warn of

high temperature or high load conditions.
The CPU Fault Table shows a fault if any Over-temperature,

Overload, or Power Supply fault occurs.

Terminals for +24V and –24V power, ground, and MOV
disconnect accept individual 14 to 22 AWG wires.
Figure 102 PSD140 Terminals and
4.7.1.3 On/Off Switch On/Off Switch
The ON/OFF switch is located behind the door on the front of

the module. The switch controls the operation of the outputs
of the supply. It does NOT interrupt line power. A projecting
tab next to the switch helps prevent accidentally turning it on
or off.
Power Supplies 118

4.7.2 Specifications: PSD140

40 W maximum total of both outputs

Output Power 3.3 Vdc = 30 W maximum
Maximum output power depends on ambient temperature
5.1 Vdc: 5.0V to 5.2 Vdc (5.1Vdc nominal)

Output Voltage
3.3 Vdc: 3.1V to 3.5 Vdc (3.3Vdc nominal)
5.1 Vdc: 0 to 6 A
Output Current
3.3 Vdc: 0 to 9 A
Isolation None
10 ms is the length of time the power supply maintains valid

outputs if the power source is interrupted. If this power supply is
used with IC694 and IC693 modules that have relay outputs,
Ride-through time
special precautions should be taken because dropouts in the
source voltage will be seen by the module and may cause relay
dropouts.
Wiring Terminals Each terminal accepts one 14 AWG to 22 AWG wire
Terminal Current 6A
Number of Daisy-Chained PSD140

Up to 4
Supplies
Number of PSD140 Supplies in

Up to 4
Universal Backplane
13
The Inrush Current specification is given as a guide for sizing the external power source for the IC695PSD140. Peak inrush current may
Power Supplies 119

4.7.2.1 Thermal Derating: PSD140

The maximum output power for power supply PSD140 depends on the ambient temperature. Full output
power is available up to at least 40°C (89.6°F).
5.1 Volt Fully-Loaded
45
40 Total
35
Power (W)
30 28 Volts
25 30 Volts
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature (C)
3.3 Volt Fully Loaded

45
40 Total
35
22 Volts
Power (W)
30
24 Volts
25
26 Volts
20 30 Volts
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature (C)
Figure 103: Thermal Derating Curves for PSD140
4.7.2.2 Over-Current Protection: PSD140

The 5.1Vdc output is electronically limited to 7 A. The 3.3Vdc output is limited to 10 A. If an overload
(including short circuits) occurs, it is sensed internally and the power supply shuts down. Because it is
designed for redundancy applications, this power supply latches OFF in fault conditions and will not
automatically try to restart. Input power must be cycled to clear a latched fault.
An internal non-repairable fusible link in the input line is provided as a backup. The power supply usually
shuts down before the fusible link blows. The fusible link also protects against internal supply faults. The CPU
Fault Table shows a fault if any Over-temperature, Overload, or P/S Fault occurs. There is no additional
indication if the power supply fusible link blows.
Power Supplies 120

In a non-redundancy application, where automatic restarting may

Location for
be appropriate, a jumper plug (or shunt) can be installed at the optional
jumper plug
rear of the module as shown in Figure 104. The jumper plug must
have 0.100 inch spacing on center and accommodate 0.25 inch
pins. Example parts are Radio Shack DIP Programming Shunt
Figure 104: Jumper Location PSD140
#276-1512 and DIGI-Key #59000-ND. The module must be
removed from the backplane to install the jumper plug.
4.7.3 Field Wiring: PSD140

The wires from the power source and ground connect to
the terminals on the power supply as shown in Figure
105. Each terminal accepts one AWG 14 to AWG 24 wire.
Important: Be sure to connect DC- to Earth Ground.
Figure 105: Field Wiring for PSD140
Power Supplies 121


+ / L1
shown in Figure 106. If over-voltage protection
is not required or is supplied upstream, no
jumper is required. - / N / L2
To Hi-pot test this supply, over-voltage

protection must be disabled during the test by Jumper strap
connects Frame
removing the jumper. Re-enable over-voltage Ground
overvoltage
protection after testing by reinstalling the protection
jumper. devices to frame
ground
Screw Terminals
Figure 106: Over-Voltage Protection for PSD140
WARNING
This power supply is not isolated and is therefore not compatible with floating or positive
grounded systems.
Power Supplies 122

4.8 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc:

IC694PWR321
Power Supply IC694PWR321 is a 30-Watt supply that
Serial Expansion PWR
operates from an input voltage source in the range of
OK
85Vac to 264Vac or 100 Vdc to 300 Vdc.
RUN
PACSystems™
RX3i
IC694PWR321
▪ +5Vdc output Standard
▪ Relay +24Vdc output that can be used to power Power Supply
circuits on Output Relay modules INPUT
▪ Isolated +24Vdc. This power is used internally by 100 – 240 VAC

50/60 HZ 100VA
some modules. It can also be used to power field
TORQUE 125VDC, 50 W
devices connected to 24Vdc Input modules 12 IN-LB
(1.3 Nm)
USE COPPER
Power Supply IC694PWR321 can be used in an Expansion CONDUCTORS
RATED FOR
backplane in an RX3i system. The battery backup and 75 DEG. C
serial port functions are not available in Expansion ONLY
Backplanes. +
24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8 A MAX.
4.8.1.1 LEDs --
The green PWR LED shows the operating state of the

Power Supply. PWR is ON when the power supply has a
MODULES IN
correct source of power and is operating properly. It is THIS
OFF when a power supply fault occurs or power is not BACKPLANE
CANNOT BE
applied. HOT-SWAPPED
The green OK LED is steady ON if the PLC is operating

properly. It is OFF if a problem is detected by the PLC.
Figure 107: IC694PWR321
The green RUN LED is ON when the PLC is in Run mode.
4.8.2 Specifications: PWR321

Input Voltage Range
AC 85 Vdc to 264 Vac
DC 100 Vdc to 300 Vdc
Input Power 90 VA with Vac Input

(Maximum with Full Load) 50 W with Vdc Input
Power Supplies 123

Inrush Current14 4 A peak, 250 ms maximum
5Vdc and 24 Vdc Relay: 15 W maximum

24 Vdc Relay: 15 W maximum
Output Power
24 Vdc Isolated: 20 W maximum
NOTE: 30 W maximum total (all three outputs)
5Vdc: 5.0 Vdc to 5.2 Vdc (5.1Vdc nominal)

Output Voltage Relay 24 Vdc: 24 to 28 Vdc
Isolated 24 Vdc: 21.5 to 28 Vdc
Isolation (input to backplane): 1500 Vac (for 1 minute)
Protective Limits
5 Vdc output: 6.4 Vdc to 7Vdc
Over-voltage:
5 Vdc output: 4 A maximum
Over-current:
20 ms minimum This is the length of time the power supply

Ride-through Time:
maintains valid outputs if the power source is interrupted.
2 A, part number 44A724627-109.

Fuse
Refer to Module Fuse List, Section 2.6.4.11.
4.8.2.1 Over-Current Protection: PWR321

The 5 Vdc output is electronically limited to 3.5 A. If an overload (including short circuits) occurs, it is sensed
internally and the power supply shuts down. The power supply continually tries to restart until the overload
condition is removed. An internal replaceable fuse in the input line is provided as a backup. The power supply
usually shuts down before the fuse blows. The fuse also protects against internal supply faults.
WARNING
The door of the power supply module must be closed. During normal operation with an
AC power source either 120 Vac or 240 Vac is present on the AC Power Supply. The door
protects against accidental shock hazard that could cause severe or fatal injury to
personnel.
4.8.3 Field Wiring: PWR321
14
The Inrush Current specification is given as a guide for sizing the external power source for the IC695PWR321. Peak inrush current
may be higher for shorter durations.
Power Supplies 124

The Hot, Neutral, and Ground wires from the 120 Vac power source or L1, L2, and Ground wires from the 240
Vac power source connect to the top three terminals on the Power Supply.

Connect the + and - wires from the 125Vdc power source to the + / L1
top two terminals. These connections are not polarity-sensitive on
power supply PWR321. - / N / L2
Ground
WARNING
Factory-
If the same external DC power source is used to installed
Jumper
provide power to two or more power supplies in
the system, connection polarity must be
identical at each RX3i power supply. A resulting 24VDC
Output
difference in potential can injure personnel or for I/O
Modules
cause damage to equipment. Also, each
backplane must be connected to a common
system ground.
Figure 108: Field Wiring for PWR321
The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide output connections to the Isolated
+24Vdc. This output can be used to provide power for external circuits (within limitations of the power
supply).
CAUTION
If the Isolated 24Vdc supply is overloaded or shorted, the PLC will stop operation
Power Supplies 125

4.8.3.3 Input Over-Voltage Protection: PWR321

Terminal 4 is normally connected to frame ground
(terminal 3) with a factory-installed jumper strap, as shown + / L1
in Figure 109. If over-voltage protection is not required or
is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by - / N / L2
removing the jumper.

Jumper strap
connects Frame
To Hi-pot test this supply, over-voltage protection must be Ground
overvoltage
disabled during the test by removing the terminal strip protection
devices to
jumper. Re-enable over-voltage protection after testing by frame ground
Screw
reinstalling the strap. Terminals
Figure 109: Over-Voltage Protection for PWR321
Ground), this jumper must NOT be installed. In a floating neutral system, voltage surge protection devices
such as MOVs must be installed from L1 to earth ground, and from L2 (Neutral) to earth ground, as discussed
in Special Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems, Section 4.3.1.
Power Supplies 126

4.9 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc High

Capacity: IC694PWR330
High Capacity Power Supply IC694PWR330 is rated for 30
W. It allows all 30 W to be consumed from the +5Vdc
OK
output. This power supply operates from an input voltage
RUN
source in the range of 85 to 264Vac or 100 to 300 Vdc. PACSystems™
RX3i
PWR330 Power supplies provide the following outputs:
IC694PWR330
High Capacity
▪ +5Vdc output Power Supply
▪ Relay +24Vdc which provides power to circuits on INPUT

Output Relay modules 100 – 240 VAC
50/60 HZ 100VA
▪ Isolated +24Vdc, which is used internally by some
modules, can also be used to provide external power TORQUE 125VDC, 50 W
12 IN-LB
for 24Vdc Input modules (1.3 Nm)
USE COPPER
CONDUCTORS
Power Supply IC694PWR330 must be installed in an RATED FOR
75 DEG. C
Expansion backplane in an RX3i system. The battery ONLY
backup and serial port functions are not available in
+
Expansion Backplanes. 24 VDC
OUTPUT
0.8 A MAX.
4.9.1.1 LEDs --

Power Supply. PWR is ON when the power supply has a MODULES IN
THIS
correct source of power and is operating properly. It is BACKPLANE
OFF when a Power Supply fault occurs or power is not CANNOT BE
HOT-SWAPPED
applied.

Figure 110: IC694PWR330

Input Voltage Range
AC 85 Vac to 264 Vac
DC 100 Vdc to 300 Vdc
Power Supplies 127

Input Power 100 VA with Vac Input

(Maximum with Full Load) 50 W with Vdc Input
Inrush Current15 4 A peak, 250ms maximum
5 Vdc: 30 W maximum
Output Power
5 Vdc: 5.0 to 5.2 Vdc (5.1 Vdc nominal)

Output Voltage 24 Vdc Relay: 24 to 28 Vdc
24 Vdc Isolated: 21.5 to 28 Vdc
Isolation (input to backplane) 1500 Vac (for 1 minute)
Protective Limits
Over-voltage:
5 Vdc output: 6.4 to 7 Vdc
Over-current: 5 Vdc output: 7 A maximum
20 ms minimum is the length of time the power supply

Ride-through Time
maintains valid outputs if the power source is interrupted.
2 A, GE part number 44A724627-109.

Fuse
4.9.2.1 Over-Current Protection

The 5 Vdc output is electronically limited to 7 Amps. If an overload (including short circuits) occurs, it is
sensed internally and the power supply shuts down. The power supply continually tries to restart until the
overload condition is removed. An internal replaceable fuse in the input line is provided as a backup. The
power supply usually shuts down before the fuse blows. The fuse also protects against internal supply faults.
WARNING
The door of the power supply module must be closed. During normal operation with an
AC power source either 120 Vac or 240 Vac is present on the AC Power Supply. The door
protects against accidental shock hazard that could cause severe or fatal injury to
personnel.
15
Power Supplies 128


The Hot, Neutral, and Ground wires from the 120 Vac power source or L1, L2, and Ground wires from the 240
Vac power source connect to the top three terminals on the Power Supply.

Connect the + and - wires from the 125Vdc power source to the top two + / L1
terminals. These connections are not polarity-sensitive on Power Supply

PWR330. - / N / L2
Ground
WARNING Factory-
installed
Jumper
If the same external DC power source is used to
provide power to two or more power supplies in the
24VDC
system, connection polarity must be identical at Output
for I/O
each RX3i power supply. A resulting difference in Modules
potential can injure personnel or cause damage to

equipment. Also, each backplane must be connected
to a common system ground. Figure 111: Field Wiring for
PWR330
The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip provide output connections to the Isolated
+24Vdc. This output can be used to provide power for external circuits (within power limitations of the
supply).
CAUTION
If the Isolated 24Vdc supply is overloaded or shorted, the PLC will stop operation

Terminal 4 is normally connected to frame
ground (terminal 3) with a factory-installed + / L1
jumper strap. If over-voltage protection is not
required or is supplied upstream, this feature can - / N / L2
be disabled by removing the jumper.
Jumper strap
To Hi-pot test this supply, over-voltage protection connects Frame
must be disabled during the test by removing the overvoltage Ground
protection
terminal strip jumper. Re-enable over-voltage devices to
protection after testing by reinstalling the strap. frame ground
Screw
Terminals
Power Supplies 129

Ground), this jumper must NOT be installed. In a floating neutral system, voltage surge protection devices
such as MOVs must be installed from L1 to earth ground, and from L2 (Neutral) to earth ground, as discussed
in Special Instructions for Floating Neutral Systems, Section 4.3.1.
4.10 Power Supply, 24Vdc High-Capacity:

IC694PWR331
High Capacity Power Supply IC694 PWR331 is rated for
30 W output. For applications requiring greater +5Vdc
OK
current capacity than is available with a standard supply
RUN
(PWR321), a High-Capacity Power Supply allows all 30 W PACSystems™
to be consumed from the +5Vdc supply. This supply can RX3i
operate from an input voltage source in the range of
IC694PWR331
12Vdc to 30 Vdc. Although it is capable of maintaining all High Capacity
outputs within specifications with input voltages as low as Power Supply
12Vdc, it requires an initial input voltage of 18Vdc to start

up. INPUT
24 VDC
PWR331 Power supplies provide the following outputs: TORQUE 50 WATT
12 IN-LB
(1.3 Nm)
USE COPPER
▪ +5Vdc output CONDUCTORS
RATED FOR
▪ Relay +24Vdc, which provides power to circuits on 75 DEG. C
ONLY
Output Relay modules
▪ Isolated +24Vdc, which is used internally by some +
24 VDC
modules, can also be used to provide external power OUTPUT
0.8 A MAX.
for 24Vdc Input modules --
Power Supply IC694PWR331 must be installed in an

Expansion backplane in an RX3i system. The battery
backup and serial port functions are not available in MODULES IN
THIS
Expansion Backplanes. BACKPLANE
CANNOT BE
HOT-SWAPPED
4.10.1.1 LEDs
Power Supply. PWR is ON when the power supply has a Figure 113: IC694PWR331
correct source of power and is operating properly. It is OFF
when a power supply fault occurs or power is not applied.

Power Supplies 130


Input Voltage Range
Start 18 to 30 Vdc
Run 12 to 30 Vdc
Inrush Current16 4 A peak, 100 ms, maximum
5 Vdc: 30 W maximum (De-rate per Figure 114)

Output Power
5 Vdc: 5.0 to 5.2 Vdc (5.1 Vdc nominal)

Output Voltage 24 Vdc Relay: 19.2 to 28.8 Vdc
24 Vdc Isolated: 19.2 to 28.8 Vdc
Isolation (input to backplane) 1500 Vac (for 1 minute)
Protective Limits
Over-voltage: 5 Vdc output: 6.4 to 7 Vdc
Over-current; 5 Vdc output: 7 A maximum
10 ms minimum. This is the length of time the power supply

Ride-through Time:
maintains valid outputs if the power source is interrupted
5 A, GE part number 44A724627-114.

Fuse
4.10.2.1 Thermal Derating: PWR331
16
Power Supplies 131

6.1
6.0
5.8
5.6
5.4
5.2
5 VDC
CURRENT 5.0
4.8
4.6
4.4
4.2
4.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (°C)
Figure 114: Thermal Derating Curve for 5Vdc Output PWR331
4.10.2.2 Over-Current Protection: PWR331

The 5 Vdc output is electronically limited to 7 A. If an overload (including short circuits) occurs, it is sensed
internally and the power supply shuts down. The power supply continually tries to restart until the overload
condition is removed. An internal replaceable fuse in the input line is provided as a backup. The power supply
usually shuts down before the fuse blows. The fuse also protects against internal supply faults.
4.10.2.3 Calculating Input Power Requirements: PWR331

Use the following procedure to determine input power requirements for the 24Vdc High Capacity Power
Supply:
▪ Determine total output power load from typical specifications listed for
individual modules in this chapter
▪ Multiply the output power by 1.5 to determine the input power value
▪ Divide the input power value by the operating source voltage to determine the
input current requirements
▪ Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current
▪ Allow for start-up surge current requirements
▪ Allow margins (10% to 20%) for variations

The + wire connects to the top terminal screw, and the - wire connects to the second. These connections are
polarity-sensitive for PWR331. Ground connects to the third screw.
Power Supplies 132

WARNING
If the same external DC power source is used to provide power to two or more power
supplies in the system, connection polarity must be identical at each power supply. Do
not cross the Positive (+) and Negative (-) lines. A resulting difference in potential can
injure personnel or cause damage to equipment. Also, each backplane must be
connected to a common system ground.
The bottom two terminals of the power supply terminal strip +
provide connections to the Isolated +24Vdc output. This output

-
can be used to provide power for external circuits (within power
Ground
limitations of the supply).
Factory-
installed
Jumper
CAUTION 24VDC
Output
for I/O
If the Isolated 24Vdc supply is overloaded or Modules
shorted, the PLC will stop operation.
Figure 115: Field Wiring for PWR331

Terminal 4 is normally connected to
frame ground (terminal 3) with a
factory-installed jumper strap, as + / L1
shown in Figure 116. If over-voltage
protection is not required or is
- / N / L2
supplied upstream, this feature can
be disabled by removing the
jumper. Jumper strap
connects Frame
To Hi-pot test this supply, over- overvoltage Ground
voltage protection must be protection
disabled during the test by devices to
removing the terminal strip jumper. frame ground
Screw
Re-enable over-voltage protection Terminals
after testing by reinstalling the
jumper.
Power Supplies 133

Section 5: Serial Bus Transmitter & Expansion

Cables
This chapter describes the serial expansion module and expansions cables for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
It also gives specifications for building custom expansion cables.
Description Catalog Number Section
Serial Bus Transmitter Module IC695LRE001 5.1
Expansion Cable, Wye, 1m (3 ft) Length IC693CBL300 5.2.2
Expansion Cable, Wye, 2m (6 ft) IC693CBL301 5.2.2
Expansion Cable, 2 Connectors, Built-in Terminating Resistor, 15m (50 ft) IC693CBL302 5.2.1
Expansion Cable, Wye, 0.15m (0.5 ft) IC693CBL312 5.2.2
Expansion Cable, Wye, 8m (25 ft) IC693CBL313 5.2.2
Termination Resistor Pack IC693ACC307 5.3.3
Discrete Input Modules 135

5.1 Serial Bus Transmitter Module: IC695LRE001

The RX3i Serial Bus Transmitter Module, IC695LRE001, provides
communications between a PACSystems RX3i Universal Backplane (IC695-
model number), and serial expansion and remote backplanes (IC694- or
IC693-model numbers). It converts the signal levels present in the Universal
Backplane to the signal levels required by a Serial Expansion Backplane.
The Serial Bus Transmitter Module must reside in the special expansion
connector on the right end of the Universal Backplane.
Two green LEDs indicate the operating status of the module and the status
of the expansion link.
▪ The EXP OK LED is lit when backplane 5Vdc power is applied to the
module.
▪ The Expansion Active LED indicates the status of the expansion bus. This
LED is ON when the Expansion module is communicating with expansion
backplanes. It is OFF when they are not communicating.
The connector on the front of the module is used to attach the expansion
cable.
Figure 117: IC695LRE001
5.1.1 Specifications: LRE001

5.0 Vdc: 132mA
Current Required from Backplane
3.3 Vdc: 0 mA
15 m (50 ft) – Expansion Backplanes

Maximum Total Expansion Cable Length
213 m (700 ft) – Remote Backplanes

500 k Bytes per second

Effective Data Rate
if the expansion bus includes Remote backplanes
Electrical Isolation Non-isolated differential communications
5.1.2 Expansion Module Installation

The Serial Bus Transmitter Module (LRE001) resides in the special expansion connector located on the right-
hand end of the 12- or 16-slot RX3i Universal Backplane. It does not latch into the backplane. Secure LRE001
with the captive screws supplied (Figure 118).
This module may NOT be hot-inserted in the backplane; power must be removed before installing or
removing the Expansion Module. In addition, the expansion cable may not be attached or removed while the
expansion rack has power applied.
Figure 118: Install LRE001 in Rightmost Connector & Secure with Captive Screws
5.1.3 Powering Down Individual Expansion or Remote

Backplanes

Expansion and Remote Backplanes can be powered down individually without affecting the operation of
other backplanes; however, powering off a backplane generates a loss of module (LOSS_OF_MODULE) fault
in the PLC Fault Table for each module in the backplane. When this fault condition occurs, and until the
backplane is powered back on and all modules recovered, the lost I/O modules are not scanned.
5.2 I/O Bus Expansion Cables: IC693CBL300, 301,

302 ,312, 313
I/O Bus Expansion Cables are used to connect a Serial Bus Transmitter Module, IC695LRE001, in a Universal
Backplane (IC695CHS012 or IC695CHS016) to a Serial Expansion Backplane (IC694CHS392, IC694CHS398,
IC693CHS392 or IC693CHS398).
These cables are also used to interconnect additional expansion and remote backplanes (as listed above) in
the RX3i system.
Several lengths and configurations of prefabricated cables are available (part numbers IC693CBL300,
IC693CBL301, IC693CBL302, IC693CBL312, and IC693CBL313), as described in this section.
The prefabricated cables described in this section are made with a continuous, 100% shield. The braided
cable shield is connected to the metal shell of the connector around the entire perimeter of the connector.
That provides a low-impedance path to frame ground for any noise energy that is coupled onto the cable
shield.
5.2.1 Cable with Two Connectors: IC693CBL302

Cable IC693CBL302 (shown in Figure 119) is 15 meters (50 feet) long and has one male connector on each
end. This cable has I/O bus terminating resistors built into the end connector on the cable.
Male Connector to Male Connector to

Expansion Module in Single Expansion
CPU Baseplate Baseplate
Figure 119: Cable IC693CBL302

This cable does not require a separate Universal Backplane

termination block. It can only be used in a
system with just one expansion backplane
(Figure 120).
Figure 120: Cable IC693CBL302 Usage
5.2.2 Cables with Three Connectors: IC693CBL300, 301, 312,

313
Cables IC693CBL300, IC693CBL301, IC693CBL312, and IC693CBL313 (shown in Figure 121) have a male and
female connector on one end and a male connector on the other end (“wye” cables).
Female Connector for

Daisy-chain or
Termination Plug
Male Connector to Male Connector to

Expansion Module in Expansion
CPU Baseplate Baseplate 1 - 7
Figure 121: Cables IC693CBL300, IC693CBL301, IC693CBL312, or IC693CBL313

These cables are the same except for their lengths: Universal Backplane
▪ IC693CBL312: 0.15 m (0.5 ft)

▪ IC693CBL300: 1 m (3 ft)
▪ IC693CBL301: 2 m (6 ft)
▪ IC693CBL313: 8 m (25 ft) Expansion Backplane
Combinations of these cables can be used to daisy-

chain up to seven expansion backplanes to the
main backplane (Figure 122). Custom cables can
also be made. Wiring information is given in this
Expansion Backplane
section.
These cables can also be used to provide

connection points for custom point-to-point cables
(IC693CBL300 is often used for this).
Last Expansion Backplane
These cables do not have built-in termination. The
last cable in the expansion system must be
Terminator
terminated as displayed in bottom right of Figure Plug
122. Terminator Plug IC693ACC307 can be used for
this purpose.
Figure 122: Usage of Wye Cables with Terminating Plug
The maximum number of cables that can be included in an I/O expansion system is seven, and the total
maximum cable length between the Universal Backplane and the last expansion backplane is 15 m (50 ft).
Failure to observe these limits could result in erratic system operation.
5.3 Specifications: IC693CBL300, 301, 302, 312,

313
Belden 8107 only (no substitutes):
Computer cable, overall braid over foil shield, twisted–pair
30 volt/80°C (176°F)
Cable
24 AWG (.22mm2) tinned copper, 7 x 32 stranding
Velocity of propagation = 70%
Nominal impedance = 100
Crimp Plug = Amp 207464–7; Pin = Amp 66506–9

25-Pin Male Connector
Solder Plug = Amp 5-747912–2
Crimp Receptacle = Amp 207463–1; Pin = Amp 66504–9

25-Pin Female Connector
Solder Receptacle = Amp 5-747913–2

Kit – Amp 5745833–5:

Connector Shell Metal–plated plastic (plastic with nickel over copper)
Crimp ring – Amp 745508–1, split ring ferrule
Connector part numbers are provided for reference only. Any part meeting the same specifications could be
used for making custom cables.
5.3.1 Expansion Port Pin Assignments

All connections between cables are point–to point, that is, pin 2 of one end to pin 2 of the opposite end, pin
3 to pin 3, and such.
Pin Number Signal Name Function Termination Pairings
16 DIODT I/O Serial Data Positive
17 DIODT/ I/O Serial Data Negative

}
24 DIOCLK I/O Serial Clock Positive
25 DIOCLK/ I/O Serial Clock Negative

}
20 DRSEL Remote Select Positive
21 DRSEL/ Remote Select Negative

}
12 DRPERR Parity Error Positive
13 DRPERR/ Parity Error Negative

}
8 DRMRUN Remote Run Positive
9 DRMRUN/ Remote Run Negative

}
2 DFRAME Cycle Frame Positive
3 DFRAME/ Cycle Frame Negative

}
1 FGND Frame Ground for Cable Shield
7 0V Logic Ground
The I/O expansion bus must be terminated at the last backplane in an expansion system. Each signal pair must
be terminated with 120, ¼-watt resistors wired between the appropriate pins, as indicated by the brackets
above:
16 – 17; 24 – 25; 20 – 21; 12 – 13; 8 – 9; 2 – 3.

5.3.2 Building Custom Cables

For custom length cables, the best noise immunity is achieved when using a metalized connector cover that
makes contact with the braided wires and foil shield in the cable and with the connector shell on the
terminating end. It is not sufficient to only solder the drain wire to the connector shell. The shield must be
continuous across the entire length of the cable, including at the terminations.
When using 100% shielded cables all CPU and expansion backplanes in the system must be solidly referenced
to the same ground point or a potential difference between backplanes could disturb signal transmission.
Use the following steps to build a 100% shielded cable:
1. Strip approximately 5/8 inch of insulation from the cable to expose the shield.
2. Put a split–ring ferrule over the cable insulation.
3. Fold the shield back over the top of the cable insulation and ferrule.
Foil & Braid

(to be folded back
over ferrule and Split-Ring Cable
ground wire) Ferrule Jacket
Conductors Ground Wire
Attach to Frame Ground Wire to Pin 1

for custom length point-to-point
cables
OR
Fold back for custom wye cables
Figure 123: Construction of a Custom Shielded Cable
4. Place the collar of the metal hood over the top of the folded shield, and securely clamp the hood.
5. Test the cable for continuity between both connector shells. Connect an ohmmeter between the shells
and flex the cable at both ends. If the metallic connector hood is not making proper contact with the
cable shield at either end, the connection will show intermittent continuity on the ohmmeter.
6. Plug the metal hooded cable into an expansion port and securely tighten the two screws. Installing and
tightening the screws electrically connects the shield to the backplane frame ground, which should be
connected to earth ground.

5.3.2.1 Cable with Continuous Shielding

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED
PIN (7 PAIRS) PIN
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/ BASEPLATE
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL EXPANSION
WYE
DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/ PORT
CABLE
SINGLE DPRERR 12 12 DPRERR
DPRERR/ 13 13 DPRERR/ OR
CONNECTOR
END DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN
DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/ WYE
DPFRAME 2 2 DPFRAME CABLE
DOUBLE
DPFRAME/ 3 3 DPFRAME/
CONNECTOR
0V 7 7 0V
END
NC NC
FGND 1 1 FGND
25-PIN 25-PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25-PIN 25-PIN

MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE
METALIZED SHELL METALIZED SHELL
NOTE:
Bold dashed line shows continuous (100%) shielding when metallized shell connectors are plugged together.
Figure 124: Wiring Diagram – Cable with Continuous Shielding
5.3.2.2 Cable for Applications Requiring Less Noise Immunity

TWISTED PAIRS, SHIELDED
(7 PAIRS)
PIN PIN
DIODT 16 16 DIODT
DIODT/ 17 17 DIODT/
DIOCLK 24 24 DIOCLK
DIOCLK/ 25 25 DIOCLK/
DRSEL 20 20 DRSEL
WYE DRSEL/ 21 21 DRSEL/
CABLE DRPERR 12 12 DRPERR BASEPLATE
DRPERR/ 13 13 DRPERR/ EXPANSION
SINGLE DRMRUN 8 8 DRMRUN PORT
CONNECTOR DRMRUN/ 9 9 DRMRUN/
END DFRAME 2 2 DFRAME OR
DFRAME/ 3 3 DFRAME/
0V 7 7 0V WYE
NC NC CABLE
FGND 1 1 FGND
25-PIN 25- PIN SHIELD DRAIN WIRE 25- PIN 25- PIN
FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE
Figure 125: Wiring Diagram – Cable without Continuous Shielding

5.3.3 Termination Requirement for Expansion or Remote

System
When two or more backplanes are connected via the I/O Bus Expansion System, the I/O Expansion Bus must
be properly terminated. The most common method of terminating the I/O Expansion Bus is by installing a
termination resistor pack (IC693ACC307) on the open connector on the last (i.e. most distant from the CPU)
expansion or remote backplane in the system.
The resistor pack is physically mounted inside of a connector. Although a termination resistor pack is shipped
with each backplane, only the last backplane in the chain needs to have this termination connector installed.
Unused termination packs may be discarded. The prewired 50-foot (15-meter) cable (IC693CBL302) has
termination resistors wired inside the connector on one end of the cable. This cable can be used if only one
expansion rack is needed in a system and a 50-foot cable link is required (the IC693ACC307 resistor pack is
not needed in this case). Also, a custom-built cable with built-in resistors would eliminate the need for the
IC693ACC307 resistor pack.

Section 6: Discrete Input Modules

This chapter describes discrete input modules for PACSystems RX3i systems.
Discrete Input Module Description Catalog Number Section
Input 120 Vac 16-Pt IC694MDL240 6.3
Input 24Vac/Vdc 16-Pt Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL241 6.4
Input 120 Vac 32-Pt Grouped IC694MDL260 6.6
Input 125Vdc 8-Pt Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL632 6.7
Input 24Vdc 16-Pt Pos/Neg Logic Fast IC694MDL646 6.11
Input 48Vdc, 16-Pt Isolated Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL648 0
Input 5/12Vdc (TTL) 32-Pt Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL654 6.13
Input 24Vdc 16-Pt Pos Logic with Diagnostics IC695MDL664 6.15
Input Simulator Module IC694ACC300 6.16

6.1 Input Module, 120 Vac, 8-Point Isolated:

IC694MDL230
The 120 Vac Isolated Input module, IC694MDL230, provides eight isolated
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 input points, each with a common power input terminal. Because the inputs
F are isolated, each input can be powered by a separate AC power source.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
The input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. Current passing into
an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I). Input
IC694MDL230 characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches. Power to
I1 operate the field devices must be supplied by the user. This module requires
an AC power source; it cannot be used with a DC power source.
I2
Eight green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 8. The red
bands on the label show that MDL230 is a high-voltage module.
I3
This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i system.

I4
Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane
which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.
I5
I6
I7
I8
Figure 126: IC694MDL230

6.1.1 Specifications: MDL230

Rated Voltage 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Input Voltage Range 0 to 132 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Inputs per Module 8 (each input point has a separate common)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to frame 250 Vac continuous;

ground 1500 Vac for one minute
250 Vac continuous;

Point to Point
1500 Vac for one minute
Input Current 14.5 mA (typical) at rated voltage
Input Characteristics:
On–state Voltage 74 to 132 Vac
Off–state Voltage 0 to 20 Vac
On–state Current 6 mA minimum
Off–state Current 2.2 mA maximum
On response Time 30 ms maximum
Off response Time 45 ms maximum
Power Consumption 60 mA (all inputs on) sourced from 5 Vdc bus on backplane
6.1.2 Field Wiring: MDL230

Terminals Connections
1 No connection
2 Input 1
3 Input 1 Return
4 Input 2
5 Input 2 Return
6 Input 3
7 Input 3 Return

8 Input 4 Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
9 Input 4 Return
1 NC
H N
10 No connection 2 I1
3 H N
11 No connection 4 I2
5 H N
12 Input 5 I3
6
13 Input 5 Return 7
H N
8 I4
14 Input 6 9
.27μf 10 NC
15 Input 6 Return 11 NC
H N
12 I5
16 Input 7
400K 13
H N
14 I6
17 Input 7 Return
1K
15
240 H N
18 Input 8 16 I7
17
19 Input 8 Return H N
1.0μf 18 I8
19
20 No connection
Optical 20 NC
Coupler
Figure 127: Field Wiring MDL230

6.2 Input Module, 240 Vac, 8-Point Isolated:

IC694MDL231
The 240 Vac Isolated Input module, IC694MDL231, provides eight isolated
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 input points, each with a common power input terminal. The input circuits are
F reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. Current passing into an input point results
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I). Input characteristics are compatible
with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
IC694MDL231 electronic proximity switches.
Because the inputs are isolated, each input can be powered by a separate AC
I1 power source. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user.
This module requires an AC power source; it cannot be used with a DC power
I2 source.
I3
I4 This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i system.
I5
I6
I7
Rated Voltage 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
I8
Inputs per Module 8 (each input point has a separate common)
Isolation:
Figure 128: IC694MDL231 Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous;
and to frame ground 1500 Vac for one minute
Point to Point 250 Vac continuous;

1500 Vac for one minute
Input Current 15 mA (typical) at rated voltage

Power Consumption 60mA (all inputs on) from 5 Vdc bus on

backplane

Terminals Connections Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
1 No connection
2 Input 1 1 NC
H N
3 Input 1 Return 2 I1
4 Input 2 3 H N
6 Input 3 5 H N
8 Input 4 7
H N
10 No connection 9
11 No connection .15μf 10 NC
12 Input 5 11 NC
H N
12 I5
13 Input 5 Return
14 Input 6 771K 13
H N
14 I6
15 Input 6 Return 1K
15
16 Input 7 267 H N
16 I7
17 Input 7 Return
17
18 Input 8 1.0μf I8 H N
18
19 Input 8 Return
19
20 No connection Optical 20 NC
Coupler

6.3 Input Module, 120 Vac, 16-Point:

IC694MDL240
The 120 Vac Input module, IC694MDL240, provides sixteen input points with one common power input
terminal. The input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. Current passing into an input point
results in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I). Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of
input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.
Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user. This module requires an AC power source; it
cannot be used with a DC power source.
Sixteen green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 16. The red bands on the label show that
MDL240 is a high-voltage module.
Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under power. Refer to
Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
F
Rated Voltage 120 Vac
IC694MDL240
I1
I2 Inputs per Module 16 (one group with a single common)

I3
The maximum number of inputs on at
I4
the same time depends on the ambient
I5 temperature (Figure 131).
I6
Isolation: Field to Backplane 250 Vac continuous;
I7
(optical) and to frame ground 1500 Vac for one minute
I8
I9 Input Current 12 mA (typical) at rated voltage

I10
I11
I12 On–state Voltage 74 to 132 Vac

I13
I14
I15 On–state Current 6 mA minimum

I16
Off–state Current 2.2mA maximum

Power Consumption 90 mA (all inputs on) from 5 Vdc bus on

backplane

6.3.2 Thermal Derating: MDL240

Number of Inputs ON
120 VAC
16 16 Inputs On
132 VAC
12
9 Inputs On
8
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

Ambient Temperature (°C)
Figure 131: Thermal Derating MDL240

1 Input 1
2 Input 2
3 Input 3
4 Input 4
5 Input 5
6 Input 6
7 Input 7
8 Input 8
9 Input 9
10 Input 10
11 Input 11
12 Input 12

14 Input 14 I1
1
I2
15 Input 15 2 I3
3
16 Input 16 I4
4
I5
17 No connection 5
I6
6
I7
18 No connection 7
I8
8
19 Inputs 1-16 I9
9
Common (Return) I10
.27μf 10
11 I11
20 No connection
I12
12
400K 13 I13
14 I14
620 I15
15
16 I16
240 17 NC
Optical 1.0μf 18 NC
Coupler N H
19
To Other 20 NC
Circuits

6.4 Input Module, 24Vac/Vdc 16-Point Pos/Neg

Logic IC694MDL241
The 24Vac/Vdc 16-Point C Positive/Negative Logic Input module, IC694MDL241,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 provides sixteen input points in one group with a common power input
F terminal. This module can be used with AC or DC field inputs. In DC mode, it
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 can be wired for either positive or negative logic. Input characteristics are
compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
IC694MDL241 switches, and electronic proximity switches. Current passing into an input
point results in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I).
I1
I2
Power to operate AC and DC input devices must be supplied by the user.
I3
Sixteen green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 16. The
I4 blue bands on the label show that MDL241 is a low-voltage module.
I5
I6
I7 Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal

I8 Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section
I9 2.6.4.1.
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16


Rated Voltage 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
Input Voltage Range 0 to +30 Vdc or 0 to +30 Vac, 50/60Hz
Inputs per Module 16 (one group with a single common)
Isolation: Field to Backplane 250 Vac continuous;

(optical) and to frame ground 1500 Vac for one minute
Input Characteristics
On–state Voltage 11.5 to 30 Vac or DC
Off–state Voltage 0 to +4 Vac or DC
On–state Current 3.2mA minimum
Off–state Current 1 mA maximum
On response Time 12 ms typical
Off response Time 28 ms typical
Power Consumption: 5 Vdc 80 mA (all inputs on) from 5 Vdc bus on backplane
125 mA from the Isolated 24 Vdc backplane bus or from user supplied
Power Consumption17: 24 Vdc
power
17
If terminals 18 & 19 are employed, the following applies:
If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external source of Isolated +24Vdc is required. The external source must
be connected via the TB1 connector located on the left side of the backplane.
If this module is located in an RX3i Expansion Backplane or Series 90-30 backplane, the backplane power supply provides the Isolated
+24Vdc for the module.

Inputs 1-16
1 Common
(Return)
2 Input 1
3 Input 2

Other Circuits
5 Input 4
1
I1
6 Input 5 680
2
.1μf I2
3
I3
7 Input 6 4
I4
5
Optical I5
8 Input 7 Coupler 6
I6
7
I7 H -- +
3.3K 8
9 Input 8 I8
9
I9
10 Input 9 10 N + --
I10
11
I11
12
11 Input 10 I12
13
I13
14
12 Input 11 I14
15
I15
16
13 Input 12 I16
17
18 24V OUT
14 Input 13
19 0V OUT
20 NC
15 Input 14
16 Input 15 Figure 134: Field Wiring MDL241
17 Input 16
24Vdc for input

18
devices
0V for input
19
devices
20 No connection

Note: If the 24V OUT pin is used to connect to input devices in the field, the isolation specification for this
module changes to:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to frame ground: 50 Vac continuous; 500 Vac for 1 minute
6.5 Input Module, 120 Vac 16-Point Isolated:

IC694MDL250
The 120 Vac 16-Point Isolated Input module, IC694MDL250, provides sixteen
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 isolated input points. Input points can be used on different phases of the AC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 supply or powered from the same supply. An RC snubber protects each input
TB against transient electrical noise on the power line.
The input filtering time of the module can be changed during system operation
IC694MDL250 by the application program. No DIP switch settings are required.
I1
This module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style
I2
(IC694TBB132), Spring-style (IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring-style
I3
(IC694TBS132) Terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide the extra
I4 shroud depth typically needed for field wiring to AC devices. Refer to Chapter
I5 17 for more information about Terminal Blocks. Terminal Blocks are ordered
I6 separately.
I7
Individually numbered LEDs show the ON/OFF status of each Input point. The
I8
TB LED is green when the removable terminal block of the module is locked in
I9
place. It is red when the terminal block is not locked. The module also sends an
I10 Addition of Terminal Block or Loss of Terminal Block message to the RX3i CPU to
I11 report the terminal block status.
I12
The red bands on the door card indicate the MDL250 is a high-voltage module.
I13
I15
I16
Module cannot be used with a Series 90-30 PLC CPU.


Input Voltage Range 0 – 132 Vac (47 to 63 Hz), 120 Vac nom.
Inputs per Module 16 isolated
Isolation:
Field to Backplane 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Group to Group 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Input Current 7.0 mA per point (typical) at rated voltage
Input Filter Times 20 ms – 2540 ms in 20 ms increments. Sent from CPU.
ON response Time 0.5ms, 1.0ms, 2.0ms, 5.0ms, 10.0ms, 50.0ms & 100.0ms
(as per filter setting)
Power Consumption 220 mA (all inputs on) from 5 V bus on backplane
Diagnostics Field side terminal block reported to RX3i CPU.
On–state Voltage 70-132 Vac
On/Off Response Time +0-1 AC cycles for filter times up to 840 ms

+1-2 AC cycles for filter times of 840 to 1600 ms
+3-4 AC cycles for filter times of 1920 ms or more

6.5.2 Input Filter Setup: MDL250

If an input filter time should be applied to all the module inputs, input filtering should be enabled in the
software configuration of the module. The Digital Filter Settings Length must be set to 16, and a memory
location to be used for the filter value must be specified. Configuring a Digital Filter Settings Length of 0
disables the input filter.
During system operation, the input filter time can be changed from the programmer by entering a filter
setting value from 1 to 127 decimal (1hex to 7Fhex) into the assigned memory location. This filter setting value
is equal to the new filter time divided by 20 decimal. For example, to change the filter time to 200ms, enter
the value 10dec (0Ahex) into the memory location. Some example filter times and their hexadecimal setting
values are listed below.
Setting Filter Time in Setting Filter Time in Setting Filter Time in

(hexadecimal) ms (hexadecimal) ms (hexadecimal) ms
0A 200 21 660 5A 1800
0F 300 22 680 5F 1900
11 340 2A 840 71 2260
12 360 2F 940 72 2280
1A 520 51 1620 7A 2240
1F 620 52 1660 7F 2540
6.5.3 Module Status Data: MDL250

Discrete input module IC694MDL250 optionally provides sixteen bits of status data to the CPU in the
assigned Module Status Reference location. By default, the configured length of this status area is 0. To
access this data, the length must be changed from 0 to 16.
The module uses the lower eleven input bits to report its internal status information to the RX3i CPU, as
follows:
Note that the sense of bit 9 is inverted compared to most other modules. Here “1” indicates not ready.

Connections Terminal Terminal Connections
Input 1 1 19 Input 9
Input 1 Return 2 20 Input 9 Return

Field Wiring Terminals Field Wiring
Input 2 3 I1 I9 21 Input 10
H 1 19 H
~ I1RTN I9RTN ~
N 2 20 N
I2 I10
H 3 21 H
Input 3 5 N
~ I2RTN I10RTN ~N 23 Input 11
4 22
I3 I11
H 5 23 H
Input 3 Return 6 ~ ~N 24 Input 11 Return
I3RTN I11RTN
N 6 24
H 7 25 H
N
~ I4RTN I12RTN ~N
8 26
I5 I13
H 9 27 H
Input 5 9 N
10 28
I6 I14
H 11 29 H
Input 5 Return 10 ~ ~N 28 Input 13 Return
I6RTN I14RTN
N 12 30
H 13 31 H
N
~ I7RTN I15RTN ~N
14 32
I8 I16
H 15 33 H
Input 7 13 N
16 34
NC NC
17 35
NC NC
18 36
No connection 17 35 No connection
No connection 18 36 No connection

6.6 Input Module, 120 Vac, 32-Point:

IC694MDL260
The 120 Vac Grouped Input module, IC694MDL260, provides thirty-two
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 discrete input points. The inputs are arranged in four isolated groups of
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 F eight. Isolation is provided between the four groups of inputs, however all
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TB inputs within a group are referenced to the same user common
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
connection.
IC694MDL260 Module MDL260 can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended

Box-style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style (IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring-
I1
I2 style (IC694TBS132) Terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide the
I3
I4 extra shroud depth typically needed for field wiring to AC devices. Refer to
I5
I6
Chapter 17 for more information about Terminal Blocks. The Terminal
I7 Block is ordered separately.
I8
I9
I10 Input filter times can be set from the programmer using the assigned
I11
I12 output data references of the module.
I13
I14
I15 Individually-numbered LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through
I16
I17 32. The red/green TB LED is green when the removable terminal block of
I18
I19
the module is locked in place. It is red when the terminal block is not
I20 locked. The module also sends an Addition of Terminal Block or Loss of
I21
I22 Terminal Block message to the RX3i CPU to report the terminal block status.
I23
I24
I25 The red bands on the label show that MDL260 is a high-voltage module.
I26
I27
I29
I30
I32
Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section
2.6.4.1.
Figure 137: IC694MDL260 Module cannot be used with a Series 90-30 PLC CPU.

Input Voltage Range 0 to 132 Vac (47 to 63Hz)
Inputs per Module 32 (four isolated groups of 8 inputs)
Input Filter Times 20 to 2540ms in 20 ms increments. Sent from CPU.
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) 264 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for one minute
Group to Group 264 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for one minute
Thermal Derating Refer to Figure 138.
Power Consumption 220 mA at 5 Vdc with all inputs on
Diagnostics Terminal block presence reported to RX3i CPU
On/Off response Time +0-1 AC cycles for filter times up to 840 ms

+3-4 AC cycles for filter times of 1920 ms or more

The number of inputs that can be on at the same time depends on the ambient temperature:

32
28
Number of Inputs On
70VAC
24
132VAC
20
16 14 Inputs On
12
8
4
10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient Temperature (Degrees C)
Figure 138: Thermal Derating Curve MDL260

software configuration of the module. For an MDL260 module installed in an RX3i main backplane, this is
done by setting the Digital Filter Settings Length to 16 and specifying a memory location for the data.
Configuring a Digital Filter Settings Length of 0 disables the input filter.
During system operation, the input filter time can easily be changed from the programmer by entering a
filter setting value from 1 to 127 decimal (1hex to 7Fhex) into the assigned memory location. This filter setting
value is equal to the new filter time divided by 20. For example, to change the filter time to 200ms, enter the
value 10dec (200 / 20 = 10) into the memory location. The input filter time is automatically sent to the module
each scan.
Some example filter times and their hexadecimal setting values are listed below.
Setting Filter Time in Setting Filter Time in Setting Filter Time in

(hexadecimal) ms (hexadecimal) ms (hexadecimal) ms
0A 200 21 660 5A 1800
0F 300 22 680 5F 1900
11 340 2A 840 71 2260
12 360 2F 940 72 2280
1A 520 51 1620 7A 2240
1F 620 52 1660 7F 2540


Discrete input module IC694MDL260 optionally provides sixteen bits of status data to the CPU in its assigned
Module Status Reference location. By default, the configured length of this status area is 0. To access this
data, the length must be changed from 0 to 16.
The module uses the lower eleven input bits to report its internal status information to the RX3i CPU, as
follows:

Connections Terminal Terminal Connections
Common 1 - 8 9 27 Common 17 - 24

Input 12 13 Field Wiring Terminals Field Wiring 31 Input 28

Input 1 Input 17
1 19
Input 2 Input 18
2 20
Input 14 15 Input 3 Input 19 33 Input 30
3 21
Input 4 Input 20
4 22
Input 15 16 Input 5
34 Input 31
Input 21
5 23
6 24
Input 7 Input 23
7 25
Common 9 - 16 18 Input 8 Input 24
36 Common 25 - 32
8 26
9 27
Input 9 Input 25
10 28
Input 10 Input 26
11 29
Input 11 Input 27
12 30
Input 12 Input 28
13 31
Input 13 Input 29
14 32
Input 14 Input 30
15 33
Input 15 Input 31
16 34
Input 16 Input 32
17 35
18 36

6.7 Input Module, 125Vdc Pos/Neg, 8-Point

IC694MDL632
The 125Vdc Positive/Negative Logic Input module, IC694MDL632, provides
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 eight input points in two isolated groups with four points in each group.
F Each group has a separate common (the two commons are not tied
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 together inside the module). Each group can be wired for either positive or
negative logic. Current passing into an input point results in a logic 1 in the
input status table (%I). Input characteristics are compatible with a wide
IC694MDL632
range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches.
I1
Power to operate field devices must be supplied by the user.

I2
I3
I4
Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal
I5 2.6.4.1.
I6
I7
I8

Rated Voltage 125 Vdc (Positive or Negative Logic)
Input Voltage Range 0 to +150 Vdc
8 (two groups of four inputs)

Inputs per Module Maximum number of inputs on at the same time depends on ambient
temperature (Figure 141).
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to

250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for one minute
frame ground
Input Current 4.5 mA typical
On–state Voltage 90 to 150 Vdc
Off–state Voltage 0 to 30 Vdc
On–state Current 3.1 mA
40 mA from the 5 V bus on the backplane

Power Consumption
36 mA (typical) from user input supply (all inputs ON)


Number of
Inputs ON
8
145V Supply
6 150V Supply
4 2 Inputs ON
2 2 Inputs ON
45°C
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

Terminal Connections Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
1 No connection 1 NC
I1
2
3 NC
2 Input 1 I2
22K
4
5 NC
I3
3 No connection
6
680 .1μf 7 NC
I4
4 Input 2 8
125 VDC + --
9 NC
5 No connection
Optical
Coupler 10
-- + *
5.6K 11 NC
I5
6 Input 3 12
13 NC
I6
7 No connection 14
15 NC
I7
8 Input 4 16
17 NC
I8 * Optional Connection
18
9 No connection 125 VDC + --
19 NC
20 -- + *
10 Inputs 1-4
Common
11 No connection

12 Input 5
13 No connection
14 Input 6
15 No connection
16 Input 7
17 No connection
18 Input 8
19 No connection
20 Inputs 5-8 Negative logic connections are shown with dashed lines in Figure 142 above.
Common


IC694MDL634
The 24Vdc Positive/Negative Logic Input module, IC694MDL634, provides eight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 input points in one group with a common power input terminal. This input
F module can be wired for either positive logic or negative logic. Input
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches. Current
passing into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I).
IC694MDL634
Field devices can be powered from an external supply. Depending on their
requirements, some input devices can be powered from the +24V OUT and
I1
0V OUT terminals of the module.
I2
Eight green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 8. The blue
bands on the label show that MDL634 is a low-voltage module.
I3
I4
2.6.4.1. Note that field side terminal block must be removed from the
I5
module during such a procedure.
I6
I7
I8


Rated Voltage 24 Vdc
Isolation: Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous;

On–state Voltage 11.5 to 30 Vdc
Off–state Voltage 0 to +5 Vdc
On–state Current 3.2 mA minimum
Power Consumption: 5Vdc 45 mA (all inputs on) from 5Vdc bus on backplane
62 mA from the Isolated 24Vdc backplane bus or from user

Power Consumption: 24Vdc18
supplied power
18
If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external source of Isolated +24 Vdc is required. The external source must
be connected through the TB1 connector located on the left side of the backplane.
If this module is located in an RX3i Expansion Backplane or Series 90-30 backplane, the backplane power supply provides the isolated
+24 Vdc for the module.

Terminal Connections Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
1 Inputs 1-8 Other Circuits

Common 1
I1
2
2 Input 1 I2
3
.1μf I3
680 4 - +
3 Input 2 I4
5
I5
4 Input 3 Optical 6 + -
Coupler I6
7
I7
5 Input 4 3.3K 8
I8
9
6 Input 5 10 NC
11 NC
7 Input 6
12 NC
8 Input 7 13 NC
14 NC
9 Input 8 15 NC
16 NC
11 No connection 18 24V OUT

19 0V OUT
13 No connection
14 No connection Figure 144: Field Wiring MDL634
15 No connection
16 No connection
17 No connection
18 24Vdc for input
devices
19 0V for input
devices
20 No connection Negative logic connections are displayed with dashed lines in Figure 144 above.
module changes to:


IC694MDL635
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
sixteen input points in one group with a common power input terminal.
F This input module can be wired for either positive logic or negative logic.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices,
such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.
Current passing into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status
IC694MDL635 table (%I).
I1
Power to operate field devices must by supplied by the user.
I2
I3
Sixteen green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 16. The
red bands on the label show that MDL635 is a high-voltage module.
I4

I6
I8 2.6.4.1.
I9
I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16
6.9.1


16 (one group with a single common). See Thermal

Inputs per Module
Derating Figure 146.
Isolation: Field to Backplane (optical) and to 250 Vac continuous;

frame ground 1500 Vac for one minute
Power Consumption: 5Vdc 80 mA (all inputs on) from 5 Vdc bus on backplane
31.5 mA from user supplied power

Power Consumption: 125Vdc
(all inputs ON at 125 Vdc)

6.9.2.1 Thermal Derating: MDL635
Thermal Derating 125V

150V
18
16
14
12
Points ON
10
8
6
4
2
0
30C 35C 40C 45C 50C 55C 60C
Ambient tem p
6.9.3.1 Terminal Block Wiring

Torque: 1.08 to 1.30 Nm (9.6 to 11.5 in-lb)
Wiring: Copper conductors stranded or solid 90C rated: One 14-22 AWG or two 16-22 AWG
Wiring Notes: No combination of solid or stranded wires are to be used in the same terminal.
No combination of different wire sizes is to be used in one terminal.
Terminal Connection
Inputs 1-16
1
Common
2 Input 1
3 Input 2
4 Input 3
5 Input 4
6 Input 5
7 Input 6

8 Input 7
Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
9 Input 8 Other C ircuits
10 Input 9 1
I1
2
I2
11 Input 10 3
.1μf
I3
2.2K
4
12 Input 11 I4
5
I5
13 Input 12 O pt ical 6
Coupler I6
7
I7
14 Input 13 63.2K 8 - +
I8
9
15 Input 14 I9 + -
10
I10
16 Input 15 11
I11
12
17 Input 16 I12
13
I13
14
18 Not used I14
15
I15
19 Not used 16
I16
17
20 Not used 1 8*
1 9*
2 0* *Do not use.


IC694MDL645
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 sixteen input points in one group with a common power input terminal.
F This input module can be wired for either positive logic or negative logic.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices,
IC694MDL645 Current passing into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status
table (%I).
I1
I2 Field devices can be powered from an external supply. Depending on their

I3 requirements, some input devices can be powered from the +24 V OUT and
0 V OUT terminals of the module.
I4
I5 Sixteen green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 16. The
I7
I8

I11 2.6.4.1.Note that field side terminal block must be removed from the
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16



125 mA from the Isolated 24Vdc backplane bus or from user

Power Consumption: 24Vdc19
supplied power
19

Terminal Connection
Inputs 1-16
1 Other Circuits
Common
1
2 Input 1 I1
2
3 Input 2 3
I2
4 Input 3 .1μf I3
680 4
5 Input 4 I4
5
I5
6 Input 5 Optical 6
I6
7 Input 6 Coupler 7
I7
8 Input 7 3.3K 8 - +
I8
9 Input 8 9
I9 + -
10 Input 9 10
I10
11 Input 10 11
I11
12 Input 11 12
I12
13
13 Input 12 I13
14
14 Input 13 I14
15
15 Input 14 I15
16
16 Input 15 I16
17
17 Input 16 18 24V OUT
24Vdc for input 19 0V OUT
18
devices 20 NC
19 0V for input devices
20 No connection
module changes to:

6.11 Input Module: 24Vdc 16-Point Pos/Neg Logic

IC694MDL646
The 24Vdc Positive/Negative Logic 16-Point Input module, IC694MDL646,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 provides sixteen input points in one group with a common power input
F terminal. The on and off response times for this module are typically 1 ms. This
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 input module can be wired for either positive logic or negative logic. Input
characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches. Current
IC694MDL646
passing into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status table (%I).
I1
Field devices can be powered from an external supply. Depending on their
I2
requirements, some input devices can be powered from the +24 V OUT and
I3
0V OUT terminals of the module.
I4
I5 Sixteen green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 16. The
I7
I8

I10
I11
I12
I13
I14
I15
I16



Power Consumption: 24Vdc20 125 mA from the Isolated 24Vdc backplane bus or from user
supplied power
20

Terminal Connection Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring

Inputs 1-16
1
Common Other Circuits
2 Input 1 1
I1
3 Input 2 2
4 Input 3 I2
3
5 Input 4 .1μf I3
680 4
6 Input 5 I4
5
7 Input 6 I5
Optical 6
8 Input 7 Coupler I6
7
9 Input 8 I7
3.3K 8 - +
10 Input 9 I8
9
11 Input 10 I9 + -
10
12 Input 11 I10
11
13 Input 12 I11
12
14 Input 13 I12
13
15 Input 14 I13
14
16 Input 15 I14
15
17 Input 16 I15
16
24Vdc for input I16
18 17
devices
0V for input 18 24V OUT
19 19 0V OUT
devices
20 NC
20 No connection
module changes to:

6.12 Input Module: 48 Vdc 16-Point Isolated

Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL648
The 48Vdc Positive/Negative Logic 16-Point Input module, IC694MDL648,
provides sixteen isolated input points in one group with a common power
input terminal. The ON and OFF response times for this module are 1ms
maximum. This input module is designed to be used in either positive logic or
negative logic applications. Input characteristics are compatible with a wide
range of user-supplied input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches. Current passing into an input point results in a
logic 1 in the Controller’s input status table (%I).
The blue bands on the label indicate that this is a low-voltage module.
This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i PLC System.

Power to operate input devices is derived from an external 48Vdc power

source supplied by the user
6.12.1.1 LED Indicators

LED indicators provide the ON/OFF status of each point. They may be viewed
via the lens at the top of the module. This LED block has two horizontal rows
with eight green LEDs in each row: the top row is labeled A1 through 8
(corresponding to points 1 through 8); the bottom row is labeled B1 through
8 (points 9 through 16).


Inputs per Module 16 (one group with a single common).

Note Thermal Derating (Figure 153)
Isolation 1500 V between field side and logic side
Power Consumption: 5Vdc 80 mA (all inputs on) from 5Vdc bus on PLC backplane
Power Consumption: 48Vdc 74 mA from the user-supplied 48Vdc power supply


The Figure 154provides wiring information for connecting user-supplied input devices and power source to
the 48Vdc positive/negative logic input module.


6.13 Input Modules, 5/12Vdc (TTL) 32-Point

Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL654, IC694MDL655,
IC694MDL658
PACSystems RX3i 32-Point Positive/Negative Logic input modules each
provides thirty-two positive or negative logic input points in four isolated
groups of eight. Each group is referenced to its own common connection.
5/12Vdc (TTL) 32-Point Positive/Negative Logic Input module, IC694MDL654,

provides thirty-two discrete TTL voltage threshold input points that
operate at levels up to 15V. A single, regulated +5V supply (current limited
to approximately 150mA) is available through the I/O connectors on the
front of the module. This supply is generated on the module and is isolated
from the backplane. Its power input comes from the +5V logic supply on
the PLC backplane. By installing jumpers on the I/O connector, you can
choose to power the inputs from this internal supply instead of powering
them with an external user provided supply.
24Vdc 32-Point Positive/Negative Logic Input module, IC694MDL655,

provides thirty-two discrete input points that operate at levels up to 30V.
Power to operate field devices can come from an external supply or from
the isolated +24Vdc output of the module.
48Vdc 32-Point Positive/Negative Logic Input module, IC694MDL658,

provides thirty-two discrete input points that operate at levels up to 60V.
Power to operate field devices must be provided using an external supply.
The blue band on the front label indicates a low-voltage module.
These modules do not report special fault or alarm diagnostics. Green LEDs
indicate the ON/OFF status of each input point.
These modules can be installed in any I/O slot in the RX3i system.
These modules support insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal
2.6.4.1.
6.13.1 Specifications: MDL654, MDL655, MDL658
IC694MDL654 IC694MDL655 IC694MDL658

Rated Voltage, 5 to12 Vdc 24 Vdc 48 Vdc

Positive or Negative Logic
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 Vdc 0 to 30 Vdc 0 to 60 Vdc
Input Current (typical ON 3.0 mA at 5 Vdc 7.0 mA at 24Vdc 1.7mA at 48 Vdc
current at rated voltage) 8.5 mA at 12 Vdc
On–state Voltage 4.2 to 15 Vdc 11.5 to 30 Vdc 34 to 60 Vdc
Off–state Voltage 0 to 2.6 Vdc 0 to 5Vdc 0 to 10 Vdc
On–state Current >2.5 mA (min) guaranteed on >3.2mA (min) >1.0 mA (min)
guaranteed on guaranteed on
Off–state Current <1.2 mA (max) guaranteed off <1.1 mA (max) <0.4 mA (max)
guaranteed off guaranteed off
On or Off Response Time21 1 ms maximum 2 ms maximum 2 ms maximum
Inputs per Module 32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
30 m (98.4 ft), maximum cable length for module IC694MDL654.
For modules MDL654 and MDL655, the maximum number of inputs per
group that can be on at the same time depends on the ambient
temperature as displayed in Figure 156.
There is no thermal derating for module MDL658.
Isolation:
Field to Backplane 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for one minute
(optical) and For modules IC694MDL654 and IC694MDL655, if the 5V OUT / 24V OUT pin
to frame ground is used to connect to input devices in the field, the isolation is
50 Vac continuous; 500 Vac for one minute.
Internal Power Consumption 440 mA (max) from +5 Vdc bus 195 mA (max) from 195 mA (max) from
on backplane (if module +5 Vdc bus on +5 Vdc bus on
isolated +5 Vdc supply used to backplane; (29 mA + backplane; (29 mA
power inputs and all 32 inputs 0.5mA/point ON + + 0.5 mA/point ON
ON) 4.7 mA/LED ON) + 4.7 mA/LED ON)
96 mA (typical) from user input 224 mA (typical)
supply at 5 Vdc and 32 inputs from isolated
ON); 272 mA (typical) from user +24 Vdc supply22
input supply at 12 Vdc and 32
inputs ON)
Isolated +5 Vdc Supply For MDL654: +5Vdc ±5%
Current limit For MDL654: 150mA (typical)
21
Within the module; does not include communications with CPU
22
If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external source of Isolated +24Vdc is required. The external source must be
connected via the TB1 connector located on the left side of the backplane.
+24Vdc for the module.

6.13.2 Thermal Derating: MDL654 & MDL655

Number of 8 IC694MDL654: 5/12V Supply
Inputs per
Group ON 6 IC694MDL654: 15V Supply
IC694MDL655: 24V Supply
4
IC694MDL655: 30V Supply
3
2
35°C
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

Figure 156: Thermal Derating MDL654 & MDL655
6.13.3 Field Wiring: MDL654, MDL655, MDL658

Connections are made to two male 24–pin connectors (Fujitsu FCN–365P024–AU) on the front of the
module. Inputs are arranged in four groups of eight. Each group has its own common connection. Within
each group, four points attach to the A half of the connector and four points attach to the B half of the
connector.
Figure 157: Left-side and Right-side Connectors MDL654, MDL655, MDL658

32-Point Input
Module
Wiring from each module connector to field
devices is made through a cable. Prewired
cables are available, or custom cables can be
Cable 1 Cable 2
used. Input devices can be wired directly to
Terminal Terminal the cables, or to intermediate Terminal
Block 1 Block 2
Blocks, IC693ACC337. Refer to Chapter 17
for information about prewired cables,
custom cables, and Terminal Block
IC693ACC337.
Figure 158: Attachment to Terminal Blocks for Field Wiring
6.13.3.1 TTL Wiring: MDL654

Conventional TTL wiring practices should be followed when installing USER 5V
CIRCUIT
module IC694MDL654. COMx
TTL
MODULE
For noise immunity, I/O control lines connected to the module must IC
INPUT
be less than 30 meters in length (signal attenuation limits wiring

length to less than this maximum). OUTPUT
INPUT x
To be compatible with TTL outputs, the negative logic configuration

should be used as shown in Figure 159.
Figure 159: Wiring for Negative Logic

MDL654

6.14 Input Module, 24Vdc 32-Point Grouped

IC694MDL660
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 thirty-two discrete input points. The inputs are positive or negative logic
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 F
inputs and will operate at levels up to 30V.
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TB
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
The inputs are arranged in four isolated groups of eight; each group has its
own common. Isolation is provided between the four groups of inputs;
IC694MDL660 however, each group of eight inputs is referenced to the same user
common connection.
I1
I2
I3 Module MDL660 provides seven selectable input filter times. Filter times
I4
I5 can be set from the programmer using the assigned output data references
I6
I7 of the module.
I8
I9
I10 32 green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 32. The
I11
I12
red/green TB LED is green when the removable terminal block of the
I13 module is locked in place. It is red when the terminal block is not locked.
I14
I15 The module also sends an Addition of Terminal Block or Loss of Terminal Block
I16
I17 message to the RX3i CPU to report the terminal block status.
I18
I19
I20 The blue bands on the label show that MDL660 is a low-voltage module.
I21
I22
I24
I25
I27
I28
I29 2.6.4.1.
I30
I31
I32 Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility
(if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU
has no serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade
Figure 160: IC694MDL660 kit.23
This module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended

Box-style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style (IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring
style (IC694TBS132) Terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide the
extra shroud depth typically needed for field wiring to AC devices. Refer to
Section 17: for more information about Terminal Blocks. The Terminal
Block is ordered separately.
This module cannot be used with a Series 90-30 PLC CPU.

Inputs per Module 32 (four isolated groups of 8 inputs)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for one minute
Thermal De-Rating Refer to Figure 161.
Input Filter Times 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 50 ms and 100 ms,
selectable per module
On response time 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms, 5.0 ms, 10.0 ms, 50.0 ms & 100.0 ms
Off response time 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0ms, 5.0 ms, 10.0 ms, 50.0 ms & 100.0 ms
Power Consumption 300 mA (all inputs on) from 5 Vdc bus on backplane
Diagnostics Terminal block presence/absence reported to RX3i CPU

The number of points that can be on at the same time depends on the ambient temperature and the
voltage.

Number of Points ON 9.6W 6.5W 5.6W

32
24V
28
27
24
30V
20
18
16
12
25 30 40 50 60
44 55

Connection Terminal Terminal Connection

1 19
Input 2 Input 18
Input 2 2 2 20 20 Input 18
Input 3 Input 19
3 21
4 22
Input 5 Input 21
5 23
Input 4 4 Input 6 Input 22
22 Input 20
6 24
Input 7 Input 23
Input 5 5 7 25 23 Input 21
Input 8 Input 24
8 26
9 27
Input 9 Input 25
Input 7 7 10 28 25 Input 23
Input 10 Input 26
11 29
12 30
Input 12 Input 28
13 31
Common Input 13 Input 29
Common
9 14 32 27
1–8 Input 14
17 - 24
Input 30
15 33
Input 15 Input 31
Input 9 10 16 34 28 Input 25
Input 16 Input 32
17 35
18 36

Common Common
18 36
9 – 16 25 - 32

Discrete Input Module IC694MDL660 can optionally be configured to provide 16 bits of status data. By
default, the length assigned to the module status data is 0. To use the status data, the length must be
changed to 16.
If a length of 16 has been assigned to the module status data, the module uses the lower eleven input bits to
report its internal status information to the RX3i CPU, as follows:

software configuration of the module. The Digital Filter Settings Length must be set to 16, and a memory
location to be used for the filter value must be specified. Configuring a Digital Filter Settings Length of 0
disables the input filter.
During system operation, the input filter time can be changed from the application by modifying the
memory location used for the filter value. Bits 0- 7 contain the filter time configuration data as displayed in
the following table. Bits 8 - 15 are not used.
Binary Value in the

Filter Time
Output Reference Bits
0000 0000 0.5ms
0000 0001 1ms
0000 0011 2ms
0000 1001 5ms
0001 0011 10ms
0110 0011 50ms
1100 0111 100ms

6.15 Input Module, 24 Vdc 16-Point Grouped

IC695MDL664
The Smart Digital Input module, IC695MDL664 provides sixteen positive
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OK
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
logic input channels in two groups of eight. The module uses 24Vdc field
S1
input power.
S2
Each group of eight inputs is referenced to an isolated common
connection.
IC695MDL664 Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices,
I1 Current passing into an input point results in a logic 1 in the input status
I2 table (%I).
I3 Power to operate field devices must by supplied by the user.
I4
Sixteen dual LEDs indicate the ON/OFF/FAULT status of points 1 through
16. Two LEDs, S1 and S2 indicate whether field power is applied to each of
I5
the two input channel groups, and the status of the terminal block. The
I6
module also logs an Addition of Terminal Block or Loss of Terminal Block
I7
message to the I/O fault table to report the terminal block status.
I8 The blue bands on the label show that MDL664 is a low-voltage module.
I9 Features of the Smart Digital input module include:
I10  Selectable Input Filter Time from 0.5 ms to 100 ms.
 Open wire / Short to DC- (with external sense resistor)
I11
 Short to DC + (with external sense resistor and external pull-up resistor)
I12
 Input Pulse Test
I13
I15 Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal,
I16 Section 2.6.4.1.
Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility
kit.23
This module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended
Box-style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style (IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring
style (IC694TBS132) Terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide the
extra shroud depth typically needed for field wiring to AC devices. Refer to
Section 17: for more information about Terminal Blocks. The Terminal
Block is ordered separately.
6.15.1 LED Operation: MDL664

The Smart Input Module has 19 bi-color LEDs on the faceplate. The states of the input points are indicated by
16 green and amber channel status LEDs. The Module OK LED indicates module status. The field status LEDs

(S1 and S2) indicate whether the external +24Vdc power supply is present and is above the minimum level,
whether faults are present, and whether the terminal block is locked into place.
LED Name Function LED Indications
OK Module Off: Module is not receiving power from the RX3i backplane or the module
status has failed self-test.
Solid green: Module OK and configured.
Blinking green: The module has not received configuration from the CPU.
If configuration is not successful, the module will continue to blink in this
mode.
Amber: Module hardware watchdog timeout
Blinking amber: Module internal error. Record the blink pattern and
contact technical support.
1–16 Channel Off: Input is off

status
Green: Input is on
Amber: Input fault
S1, S2 Terminal Off: Terminal present and field power not present
block and
field power Green: Terminal and field power present
status
Red: Terminal not present or field power over-voltage
Note: The OK, S1 and S2 LEDs blink green in unison when the module is in firmware update mode.

Inputs per Module 16 (two isolated groups of 8 inputs each)
Power Requirements
Input Voltage (24V nominal), VIN 18Vdc–32Vdc
Ripple Voltage, maximum 10% Vpp
Backplane Power Consumption
+3.3Vdc 95 mA
+5.1Vdc 225 mA (worst-case, i.e. with all channels on.)
Thermal De-Rating None required with input voltages in the 18Vdc–24Vdc range.
For the 25Vdc–32Vdc range, refer to Figure 164 below.
DC Characteristics

Input Resistance 1966 Ω

Input Capacitance 0.05 μf
Input Current (at 24Vdc) 12.2 mA
Input Voltage ON (Logic 1) 0.5 × VIN Vdc
Input Voltage OFF (Logic 0) 0.3 × VIN Vdc
AC Characteristics
Turn On Delay, typical 20.6 ms
Turn Off Delay, typical 20.6 ms
Digital Input Filter Time 0.5–100 ms, 20 ms default
Isolation
Field to Backplane
Continuous 250 Vac
For 1 minute 1500 Vac
Group to Group
Continuous 250 Vac

With input voltage in the 18Vdc to 24Vdc range, no temperature de-rating is required, and all input channels
can operate within the entire Surrounding Air temperature range. With input voltage greater than 24Vdc,
the number of active channels must be reduced as temperature increases, according to the following de-
rating curve.
25 VDC–32 VDC Input Voltage

Maximum Number of 16
Active Channels 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10 20 30 40 50 60
Surrounding Air Temperature, °C
NC 2 20 NC

Input 2 3 Field Wiring Terminals Field Wiring 21 Input 10

NC 4 2 20 22 NC
Input 3 5 4 22
23 Input 11
NC 6 24 NC
6 24
Input 4 7 Input 4 7 25 Input 12 25 Input 12

8 26
NC 8 +
26 NC
-
10 28
NC 10 12 30 28 NC
Input 6 11 14 32 29 Input 14
NC 12 30 NC
16 34
Input 7 13 DC + 17 35 DC + 31 Input 15
DC - 18 36 DC -
NC 14 32 NC
NC 16 34 NC
DC + 17 35 DC+
DC - 18 36 DC-
6.15.5 Circuit Operation: MDL664
6.15.5.1 Normal Operation

The input circuit references the input to the Normal Thresholds

common (DC -) on the field side of the module. An
DC+
ON condition for the input device is read as a logic
1, and an OFF condition for the input device is read
as a logic 0. Logic 1
50% DC+
Undetermined
30% DC-
Logic 0
DC-
Figure 166: Normal Thresholds MDL664
6.15.5.2 Tri-State Operation (Open Wire / Short to DC- Detection)

Field Module
Connections Circuitry
DC+ Tri-state Thresholds
Input DC +
Device
( With Logic 1
Optional
Sense
DC+ -4V
Resistor )
Sense
Undetermined
DC+ -7V
Logic 0
50% DC+
I/O Point Undetermined
30% DC+
Input Input Fault
Circuit
DC-
DC-
Figure 168: Tri-State Thresholds MDL664

Figure 167: Tri-State Input Circuit Diagram
The Open Wire / Short to Ground diagnostic can be enabled on any circuit configured as a tri-state input. In
addition to being configured as a tri-state input, the circuit must have a non-inductive sense resistor placed
as close as practical to the actual dry contacts (such as across the field device terminals).
6.15.5.3 Quad-State Operation (Open Wire / Short to DC- and Short

to DC+ Detection)

Quadstate Input Diagram

Field Module
Connections Circuitry Quad-state Thresholds
DC+
Input DC
Device Pull- up Short to DC+ +
( With
Optional DC+ - 4V
Pull- up &
Sense
Undetermined
Sense
Resistor) DC+ - 7V
Logic 1
50% DC+
Undetermined
I/O Point 30% DC+
Logic 0
10% DC+
Input
Circuit
Input Fault
DC-
DC-
Figure 170: Quad-State Thresholds MDL664
Figure 169: Quad-State Input Circuit Diagram
The Open Wire / Short to DC- diagnostic and the Short to DC+ diagnostic can be enabled on any circuit
configured as a quad-state input. In addition to being configured as a quad-state input, the circuit must have
a non-inductive sense resistor placed as close as practical to the actual dry contacts (such as across the field
device terminals) and a pull-up resistor between the high side of the Input Device and DC+.

6.15.5.4 External Resistor Selection

For Tri-State and Quad-State, the external resistor values must be calculated to allow the logic levels to fall
within the ranges for the selected Input mode when driven by the expected voltage of the device connected
to the input point.
Example
Consider an ideal situation with an input configured for Quad-state, a DC+ reference of 24V, and the input
point connected to normally open contact that is driven by a voltage between 22V and 24V. A sense resistor
is placed across the contact and a pull-up resistor connects the contact to the voltage source.
Select the pull-up resistor first, using the logic 1 voltage levels. For Quad-state logic 1, the voltage at the
input point must be between 12Vdc (50% of DC+) and 17Vdc (DC+ -7V.) The closed contact shorts the sense
resistor, so the voltage at the input point is determined by a divider between the internal resistance and the
external pull-up resistor. To achieve the best margin across the range of input voltages, two resistances are
determined to complete the divider from the maximum and minimum device voltage to the midpoint of the
logic 1 range (14.5Vdc.) From these two results, a standard resistor value that lies between the limits is
chosen, such as 1100Ω.
14.5 = 22 ∗ Rp = 1017
14.5 = 24 ∗ Rp = 1288
The sense resistor across the contact is solved next, using the logic 0 voltage levels. For Quad-state logic 0,
the voltage at the input point must be between 2.4Vdc (10% of DC+) and 7.2Vdc (30% of DC+.) The voltage
at the input point is determined by a voltage divider between the internal resistance and the two external
resistors. To achieve the best margin across the range of input voltages, two resistances are determined to
complete the divider from the maximum and minimum device voltage to the midpoint of the logic 0 range
(4.8Vdc.) From these two results, a standard resistor value that lies between the limits is chosen, such
as 6200Ω.
4.8 = 22 ∗ Rs = 5945
4.8 = 24 ∗ Rs = 6764
6.15.6 Input and Output Data Formats: MDL664
6.15.6.1 Channel Value Data

The module reports its input channel data in one bit per input, beginning at the configured Channel Value
Reference Address.

6.15.6.2 Channel Diagnostic and Status Data

The module can be configured to report channel diagnostic and status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this
data at the configured Diagnostic Reference Address of the module. Use of this feature is optional.
The data for each channel occupies two words whether or not the channel is used.
Note: At least two sweeps must occur to clear the diagnostic bits: one scan to send the %Q data to the
module and one scan to return the %I data to the CPU. Because module processing is asynchronous to the
controller sweep, more than two sweeps may be needed to clear the bits, depending on the sweep rate and
the point at which the data is made available to the module.
6.15.6.3 Module Status Data: MDL664

The module can be configured to return two words of module status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this
data in the 32-bit Module Status Data reference area configured for the module.

6.15.6.4 Pulse Test Command Output Data

The module uses these bits (one bit per input), beginning at the configured Pulse Command Output Reference
Address to command an on-demand pulse test. To command an on-demand pulse test, the Pulse Test Enable
parameter for the channel must be set to Enabled – Manual.
6.15.7 Diagnostics: MDL664

The module always performs a set of standard diagnostic checks. Individual circuits can be configured not to
log a fault to the CPU if a fault occurs. The module returns current diagnostics for all circuits to %I bits.
6.15.7.1 Input Pulse Test

The Input Pulse Test is an optional diagnostic feature that exercises the input points to confirm they can
detect and respond to changes in the actual input state. Pulse testing verifies the ability of the input circuits
to detect a change in state. Pulse Testing should be enabled if the module has loads that hold state for long
periods of time. The application must be capable of withstanding the loss of the input feedback for up
to 16 ms.
When the pulse test occurs, the input point power is removed, and then the input is connected internally to
DC+. This verifies the ability of the input to detect a change in state. Each of the input points is tested
individually to ensure there are no shorts between inputs. If a change in state is not detected, a fault is
logged with the CPU. Valid field power must be present for the pulse test to run successfully.
6.15.7.1.1 On Demand Pulse Test

To use this feature, the Pulse Test Enable parameter for the channel must be set to Enabled-Manual. To
command a pulse test, set the Pulse Test Command bit for the channel(s) to be pulse tested.
The module will perform one or more pulse tests for each channel selected. Since this will take many sweeps,
you should keep the Pulse Test Command bit set until the Pulse Test Complete bit is set for that channel in
the Channel Diagnostic and Status Data.
The module will keep the Pulse Test Complete bit set as long as the Pulse Test Command bit is set. One
output scan with the Pulse Test Command bit cleared clears the Pulse Test Complete status bit and the Pulse
Test Failure diagnostic bit.
6.15.7.1.2 Automatic Pulse Test

To use this feature, the Pulse Test Enable parameter for the channel must be set to Enabled-Auto.
The Input Pulse Test occurs at a frequency selected in the Hardware Configuration, with no intervention from
the CPU. The pulse test execution is based on the Time of Day clock set in the CPU, and the frequency is
relative to 12:00am. For example, a frequency of 12 hours will result in a pulse test run at 12:00am and
12:00pm.
If the pulse test fails, the Pulse Test Failed bit is set.

6.15.8 Configuration: MDL664
6.15.8.1 Module Settings: MDL664

Parameter Function
Channel Value Reference Specifies the memory location where the module reports 16 bits of
Address channel values.
Channel Value Reference
Length
Diagnostic Reference Address Specifies the starting address for reporting channel diagnostics data.
Diagnostic Reference Length Provides thirty-two bits of diagnostic data per channel.
Setting this value to 0 disables channel diagnostics reporting.
Module Status Reference Specifies the starting address for reporting module status data.
Address
Module Status Reference Provides thirty-two bits of module status data. Setting this value to 0
Length disables channel diagnostics reporting.
Pulse Test Command Output Specifies the memory location for manual pulse test command data.
Reference Address/
Pulse Test Command Output
Reference Length
Channel Faults w/o Terminal Enables or disables generation of channel faults and alarms after a
Block Terminal Block has been removed.
Inputs Default w/o Terminal Enables or disables defaulting inputs when the terminal block is
Block removed.
Loss of Terminal Block Enables or disables logging of a fault to indicate a Terminal Block has
Detection been removed.
Loss of Field Power Group 1 Enables or disables loss of field power detection for the specified group.
Detection/
Loss of Field Power Group 2
Detection
Inputs Default Specifies whether inputs will go to Force Off or Hold Last State if module
loses communication with the CPU.
I/O Scan Set Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set defined in the CPU
configuration. Determines how often the RX3i polls the data.

6.15.8.2 Channel Settings: MDL664

Parameter Function Input Type
Input Type Selects the input operation, along with enabling the
corresponding fault logging. Choices are: Dual state, Tri-
state or Quad-state.
Digital Filter Enables or disables the digital filter for the input. All
Digital Filter Frequency Selects the digital filter frequency in 0.5ms increments. All
For details, refer to Input Filter Time: MDL664.
Pulse Test Enable Enables or disables pulse testing of input. Allows you to All
select Manual or Automatic pulse testing. For details
about this feature, refer to Diagnostics: MDL664.
Pulse Test Frequency If Pulse Test Enable is set to Auto, allows you to select the All
frequency of pulse testing.
Diagnostic Reporting Enable Enables or disables channel diagnostics. If enabled, All

channel diagnostic data is written to the Channel
Diagnostic and Status Data.
Open Wire Reporting Enable If enabled, an open wire condition is reported in the Tri-State
Channel Diagnostic and Status Data. Quad-State
Short to Power Reporting If enabled, a short to power is reported in the Channel Quad-State
Enable Diagnostic and Status Data.
Pulse Test Failed Enable If enabled, the results of manual or automatic pulse All
testing are reported in the Channel Diagnostic and Status
Data.
Fault Reporting Enable If enabled, channel faults are reported to the I/O fault All
table.
Open Wire Reporting Enable If enabled and the corresponding diagnostic reporting is Tri-State
enabled, an open wire condition is reported in the I/O Quad-State
fault table.
Short to Power Reporting If enabled and the corresponding diagnostic reporting is Quad-State
Enable enabled, a short to power is reported in the I/O fault table.
Pulse Test Failed Enable If enabled and the corresponding diagnostic reporting is All
enabled, a failed pulse test is reported in the I/O fault
table.

6.15.8.3 Input Filter Time: MDL664

An input filter time of 0.5 ms to 100 ms can be selected for the module, in 0.5ms increments. The default
filter time is 20 ms. The input filter can be disabled.
OFF ON State
20ms
Signal
Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs Sampled Inputs
ON for 5ms ON for 30ms OFF for 3ms

Not recognized Recognized by block Not recognized
if Filter Time = 20ms
Figure 171: Effect of Input Filter Time
The filter is a digital low-pass filter. The module continuously samples an input for the length of the filter
time period. The input must remain at a constant state for the length of the Filter Time for the module to
recognize the state.
An input filter helps reject spurious noise spikes and multiple inputs generated by the bounce of mechanical
devices. In controlled, noise-free environments, signals generated by clean, solid state electronics may be
unnecessarily slowed by a filter, delaying system response. In such an environment, no additional filter time
is needed. In noisy environments, use a longer filter time to prevent noise from possibly causing erratic or
unsafe system operations.

6.16 Input Simulator, 8-/16-Point IC694ACC300

The Input Simulator module, IC694ACC300, can be used to simulate the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 operation of 8-point or 16-point discrete input modules. The Input
F Simulator has no field connections.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
The Input Simulator can be substituted for actual inputs until the program
or system is debugged. It can also remain permanently installed to provide
1 either 8 or 16 conditional input contacts for manual control of output
2 devices.
3
Before the Input Simulator module is installed, a switch in
4 the back of the module (Figure 173) can be used to set it
5
up for either 8-point or 16 point-operation. When this
I
N switch is set for 8 points, only the first 8 toggle switches
P 6
on the front of the Input Simulator can be used.
U
T 7
Toggle switches on the front of the Input Simulator
S 8
I simulate the operation of discrete input devices. A switch
M 9 in the ON position results in a logic 1 in the input table
U
L 10 (%I).
A
T 11 Figure 173: Mode
O
Individual green LEDs indicate the ON or OFF position of
Switch
R 12 each toggle switch.
13
14
15
16 2.6.4.1.
Figure 172: IC694ACC300

6.16.1 Specifications: ACC300
Inputs per Module 8 or 16 (switch selectable)
Off Response Time 20 ms maximum
On Response Time 30 ms maximum
Internal Power Consumption 120 mA (all inputs on)

from 5 Vdc bus on backplane

Section 7: Discrete Output Modules

This chapter describes discrete output modules for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
Catalog
Discrete Output Module Description Section
Number
Output 120 Vac 0.5A 12-Pt IC694MDL310 7.1
Output 120/240 Vac 2A 8-Pt IC694MDL330 7.2
Output 120 Vac 0.5A 16-Pt IC694MDL340 7.3
Output 120/240 Vac 16-Pt Isolated IC694MDL350 7.4
Output 120/240 Vac 2A 5-Pt Isolated IC694MDL390 7.5
Output 12/24Vdc 2A 8-Pt Positive Logic IC694MDL730 7.6
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 8-Pt Positive Logic IC694MDL732 7.7
Output 125Vdc 1A 6-Point Isolated Positive/Negative Logic IC694MDL734 7.8
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 16-Pt Negative Logic IC694MDL741 7.10
Output 12/24Vdc 1A 16-Pt Positive Logic with ESCP per Group IC694MDL742 7.11
Output 5/24Vdc (TTL) 0.5A 32-Pt Negative Logic IC694MDL752 7.12
Output 12/24Vdc 0.75A 32-Pt Positive Logic with ESCP per Group IC694MDL754 7.14
Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 32-Pt Positive Logic with ESCP per Group IC694MDL758 7.15
Output 24/125Vdc 2A 16-Pt Grouped Positive Logic with ESCP &

IC695MDL765 7.16
Diagnostics
Output Relay 4 Amp 16-Pt IC694MDL916 7.17
Output Isolated Relay N.O. 4 A 8-Pt IC694MDL930 7.18
Output Isolated Relay N.C. and Form C 3 A 8-Pt IC694MDL931 7.19
Output Relay N.O. 2A 16-Pt IC694MDL940 7.20
Discrete Output Modules 209

7.1 Output Module, 120 Vac, 0.5 Amp, 12-Point:

IC694MDL310
The 120 Vac 0.5 Amp Output module, IC694MDL310, provides 12 output
1 2 3 4 5 6 points in two isolated groups of six points. Each group has a separate
F common. The two commons are not tied together inside the module. The
1 2 3 4 5 6 groups can be used on different phases of the AC supply or powered from
the same supply. Each group is protected with a 3 Amp fuse. An RC snubber
for each output protects against transient electrical noise on the power line.
IC694MDL310
This module provides a high degree of inrush current (10x the rated current)
Q1 so the outputs can control a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads.
Q2 AC power to operate loads connected to outputs must be user supplied. This

module requires an AC power source; it cannot be used with a DC power
Q3
source.
Q4
Individual numbered LEDs show the ON/OFF status of each output point.
Q5
The red LED (F) turns ON if an output fuse blows. The red bands on the label
Q6 show that MDL310 is a high-voltage module.
Q7 This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i system.

Q8
Q9 Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section
2.6.4.1.
Q10
Q11
Q12

Output Voltage Range 85Vac to 132Vac, 50/60 Hz
Outputs per Module 12 (two groups of six outputs each)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
and to Frame Ground
Output Current 0.5 Amp maximum per point

1 Amp maximum per group at 60°C (140°F)
2 Amps maximum per group at 50°C (122°F)
Maximum load current depends on ambient temperature as

displayed in Figure 175.
Output Characteristics
Inrush Current 5 Amps maximum for one cycle
Minimum Load Current 50mA
Output Voltage Drop 1.5 volts maximum
Output Leakage Current 3mA maximum at 120 Vac
On Response Time 1ms maximum
Off Response Time 1/2 cycle maximum
Power Consumption 210mA (all outputs on) from 5Vdc bus on backplane
Fuses (quantity 2) 3 Amps, part number 44A724627-111. Refer to Module Fuse List,
Section 2.6.4.11 for more information.


Total Module Load
Current (Amps)
4 4 Amps
2 2 Amps
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C


Terminal Connection
1 Output 1
2 Output 2
3 Output 3
4 Output 4
5 Output 5
6 Output 6
7 No connection
8 No connection
9 Outputs 1 - 6
common
(return)
10 No connection
11 Output 7

12 Output 8 Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
13 Output 9
1 Q1
14 Output 10 .022 2 Q2
100
3 Q3
15 Output 11 4 Q4
5 Q5
16 Output 12 Optical 6 Q6
47
Coupler
7 NC
17 No connection
8 NC
H N
Other Circuits 9
18 No connection
3.0A 10 NC
11 Q7
19 Outputs 7-10
common 12 Q8
13 Q9
(return)
14 Q10
20 No connection 15 Q11
16 Q12
17 NC
18 NC
H N
19
20 NC

7.2 Output Module, 120/240 Vac, 2 Amp, 8-Point:

IC694MDL330
The 120/240 Vac 2 Amp Output module, IC694MDL330, provides eight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 output points in two isolated groups of four points. Each group has a
F separate common. The two commons are not tied together inside the
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 module.
The groups can be used on different phases of the AC supply or powered

IC694MDL330
from the same supply. AC power to operate loads connected to outputs
must be user supplied. This module requires an AC power source; it cannot
Q1
Q1 be used with a DC power source.
Q2
Q2
Each group is protected with a 5 Amp fuse for each common. An RC
Q3
snubber for each output protects against transient electrical noise on the
Q4 power line. This module provides a high degree of inrush current (10 times
Q3
the rated current) so the outputs can control a wide range of inductive and
Q5
incandescent loads.
Q4
Q6
Q7
Q5
The red LED (F) turns ON if an output fuse blows. The red bands on the label
Q8
show that MDL330 is a high-voltage module.
Q6
Q10
Q7
Q11
2.6.4.1.
Q8
Q12
7.2.1

Rated Voltage 120/240 Vac
Output Voltage Range 85 to 264Vac, 50/60 Hz
Outputs per Module 8 (two groups of four outputs each)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Frame Ground
Output Current 2 Amp maximum per point

4 Amps maximum per group at 40°C (104°F) Maximum load
current depends on ambient temperature as displayed in Figure
178.

6mA maximum at 240 Vac
Power Consumption 160mA (all outputs on) from 5 Vdc bus on backplane
Fuses (quantity 2) 5 Amp, part number 44A724627-114. Refer to Module Fuse List,


Total Module Load
Current (Amps)
2 2 Amps
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C


Terminal Connection
1 No connection
2 Output 1
3 No connection
4 Output 2
5 No connection
6 Output 3
7 No connection
8 Output 4
9 No connection
10 Outputs 1 - 4
common
(return)
11 No connection

13 No connection
1 NC
14 Output 6 2 Q1
3 NC
5 NC
16 Output 7 6 Q3
47 NC
Optical 100 7
17 No connection Coupler
8 Q4
.047 9 NC
18 Output 8
Other Circuits 10
11 NC
19 No connection 5.0A
12 Q5
20 Outputs 5 - 8 13 NC
common 14 Q6
(return) 15 NC
16 Q7
17 NC
18 Q8
19 NC
H N
20

7.3 Output Module, 120 Vac, 0.5 Amp, 16-Point:

IC694MDL340
The 120 Vac 0.5 Amp Output module, IC694MDL340, provides sixteen
output points in two isolated groups of eight points. Each group has a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
separate common. The two commons are not tied together inside the
F
module. The groups can be used on different phases of the AC supply or
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 powered from the same supply. Each group is protected with a 3 Amp fuse.
An RC snubber protects each output against transient electrical noise on
the power line. This module provides a high degree of inrush current; so the
IC694MDL340 outputs can control a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads.
Q1 AC Power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied by the

user. This module requires an AC power source.
Q2
Q3 Individual numbered LEDs show the ON/OFF status of each output point.
The red LED (F) turns ON if either of the fuses blows. A load must be
Q4
connected to the blown fuse for the indicator to light. The red bands on the
Q5 label show that MDL340 is a high-voltage module.
Q6
Q7
Q8 Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section
Q9 2.6.4.1.
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16

Outputs per Module 16 (two groups of eight outputs each)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and 250 Vac continuous;

to Frame Ground 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Output Current 0.5 amp maximum per point

3 amps maximum per group
Inrush Current 20 amps maximum for one cycle
Minimum Load Current 50 mA
Output Leakage Current 2 mA maximum at 120 Vac
Power Consumption 315 mA (all outputs ON) from 5 Vdc bus on backplane
Fuses (quantity 2) 3 Amps, part number 44A724627-111. Refer to Module

Fuse List, Section 2.6.4.11 for more information.

Effective with IC694MDL340C, the following thermal derating applies:
Figure 181: Thermal Derating IC694MDL340C

Terminal Connection
1 Output 1
2 Output 2
3 Output 3
4 Output 4
5 Output 5
6 Output 6
7 Output 7
8 Output 8

9 Outputs 1 – 8 Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring

common
(return) 1 Q1
2 Q2
10 No 3 Q3
connection 4 Q4
5 Q5
11 Output 9 22
Solid State 6 Q6
Relay 7 Q7
12 Output 10
.022 8 Q8
H N
13 Output 11 Other Circuits 9
10 NC
3.0A
14 Output 12 11 Q9
12 Q10
15 Output 13 13 Q11
14 Q12
16 Output 14
15 Q13
17 Output 15 16 Q14
17 Q15
18 Output 16 18 Q16
H N
19
19 Outputs 9 - 16 20 NC
common
(return)
20 No
connection

7.4 Output Module, 120/240 Vac 16-Point

Isolated: IC694MDL350
The 120/240 Vac 16-Point Isolated Output module, IC694MDL350, provides
sixteen individually-isolated output points. A high level of noise immunity
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
minimizes the need for external snubbers to protect the outputs against
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TB
transient electrical noise on the power line. The outputs can control a wide
range of inductive and incandescent loads.
Power to operate the output loads must be provided with an external AC power
IC694MDL350
supply.
Q1
A DIP switch at the rear of the module is used to select the outputs’ default
Q2
mode: Force Off or Hold Last State. The module must be removed from the
Q3 backplane to set this switch.
Q4
This module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style
Q5 (IC694TBB132), Spring-style (IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring-style
Q6 (IC694TBS132) Terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide the extra
shroud depth typically needed for field wiring to AC devices. Refer to Chapter 17
Q7
for more information on Terminal Blocks. Terminal Blocks are ordered
Q8 separately.
Q9
Individually-numbered LEDs show the ON/OFF status of each output point. The
Q10
TB LED indicates presence of the removable Terminal Block. The TB LED is green
Q11 when the Terminal Block is present or red when the Terminal Block is not
Q12 present. The red bands on the door card indicate the MDL350 is a high-voltage
module.
Q13
Q14 The IC694MDL350 module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i system.
Q15 Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane
Q16 which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.


Output Voltage Range 74 – 265Vac (47 to 63 Hz), 120/240 Vac nominal
Outputs per Module 16 isolated
Isolation:
Field to Logic Side 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Power Consumption 315 mA (with all outputs ON) from 5Vdc bus on backplane
Diagnostics Field side terminal block status reported to RX3i CPU
Output Current Per Point 2A max. at 30°C, 1A max. at 60°C

(Linear de-rating)
Per Module 5A max. at 30°C, 4A max. at 60°C
Minimum Load Current 10 mA per point
Output Leakage Current 2 mA maximum
On, Off Response Times 1/2 cycle maximum
Fuses No internal fusing. Use of appropriate external fuses is recommended

for short circuit protection.
7.4.1.1 Setting the Output Defaults

The DIP switch at the rear of the module selects the default operation for the output circuits of this module.
The module must be removed from the backplane to set this switch. Note that there are two DIP switches on
the module. Only the upper switch is used for this module.

With the Outputs Default Mode switch in the

right (open) position, the outputs will turn off
whenever communication with the CPU is lost.
Outputs Default DIP Switch
Closed (left) = Hold Last State When the switch is in the left position, the
Open (right) = Force Off
outputs will hold their last programmed value
whenever communication with the CPU is lost.
Not Used
Figure 184: DIP Switch Setting MDL350
Backplane power and power to the outputs must be present to Hold Last State. Otherwise, the module will
default outputs regardless of the DIP switch setting.
The Outputs Default Mode selection made with the DIP switch must match the selection made for this
feature in the software configuration of this module. If the two do not match, a warning message is
displayed in the fault table.

Output 1 1 19 Output 9
Supply Supply
Supply Supply
Supply Supply
Supply Supply
Supply Supply

Output 6 12 Field Wiring Terminals Field Wiring 30 Output 14

Supply Supply
Q1 1 19 Q9
Output 7 13 N H H N 31 Output 15
~ 2 20 ~
Output 7 14 Q2 3 21 Q10 32 Output 15
Supply N H H N Supply
~ 4 22 ~
Output 8 15 Q3 5 23 Q11 33 Output 16
N H H N
~ 6 24 ~
Supply Q4 7 25 Q12 Supply
N H H N
~ 8 26 ~
No 17 35 No
Q5 9 27 Q13
connection connection
N H H N
~ 10 28 ~
No 18 36 No
Q6 11 29 Q14
connection N H H N connection
~ 12 30 ~
Q7 13 31 Q15
N H H N
~ 14 32 ~
Q8 15 33 Q16
N H H N
~ 16 34 ~
NC 17 35 NC
NC 18 36 NC

Discrete output module IC694MDL350 provides sixteen bits of status data to the CPU in the assigned Module
Status Reference location. By default, the configured length of this status area is 0. To access this data, the
length must be changed from 0 to 16.
The module uses the lower 11 input bits to report its status information to the RX3i CPU. It has the following
content:

7.5 Output Module, 120/240 Vac Isolated, 2 Amp,

5-Point: IC694MDL390
The 120/240 Vac 2 Amp Isolated Output module, IC694MDL390, provides
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 five isolated output points, each with a separate common. Each output
F circuit is isolated from the others relative to the AC power source. The
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 commons are not tied together inside the module. The output circuits can
be used on different phases of the AC supply or powered from the same
supply.
IC694MDL390
AC Power to operate the loads connected to the outputs must be supplied
by the user. This module requires an AC power source, it cannot be used with
Q1
a DC power source.
Outputs are individually fused with a 3 Amp fuse. An RC snubber protects

Q2
each output against transient electrical noise on the power line. This
module provides a high degree of inrush current (greater than 10 times
the rated current) so the outputs can control a wide range of inductive and
incandescent loads.
Q3
The red LED (F) turns ON if an output fuse blows. The red bands on the
label show that MDL390 is a high-voltage module.
Q4
This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i system. It should be
configured as an 8-point output module with programs referencing the
five least significant bits.
Q5

Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal,
Section 2.6.4.1.
Outputs per Module 5 (each output isolated from the others)
Isolation:

Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous;

and to Frame Ground 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Point to Point 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Output Current 2 Amps maximum per point

5 Amps maximum per module at 45°C (113°F)
2 Amps maximum per module at 60°C (140°F) Maximum load
current depends on ambient temperature as displayed in Figure
187.
6mA maximum at 240 Vac
Fuses (quantity 5) 3 Amps, part number 44A724627-111. Refer to Module Fuse List,

7.5.2 Thermal Derating MDL390

Total Module Load
Current (Amps)
5 5 Amps
2 2 Amps
1
45°C
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C


Terminal Connection
1 No connection
2 Output 1
return
3 No connection
4 Output 1
5 No connection
6 Output 2return
7 No connection
8 Output 2
9 No connection
10 Output 3
return
11 No connection
12 Output 3

13 No connection Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
14 Output 4
return
3.0A 1 NC
2
4 Q1
16 Output 4 5 NC
6
8 Q2
18 Output 5 Optical 100 47
9 NC
return Coupler
10
.047 NC
19 No connection 11
12 Q3
20 Output 5 13 NC
14
15 NC
16 Q4
17 NC
18
19 NC
20 Q5
7.6 Output Module, 12/24Vdc 2A Positive Logic 8-

Point: IC694MDL730
The 12/24Vdc 2 Amp Positive Logic Output module, IC694MDL730,
provides one group of eight outputs with a common power output
terminal. This module has positive logic characteristics; it sources current
to the loads from the user common or positive power bus. The output
device is connected between the negative power bus and the module
output. The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of load
devices, such as: motor starters, solenoids, and indicators.
The red LED (F) turns ON if either of the fuses blows. A load must be
connected to the blown fuse for the indicator to light up. The module has
two 5-Amp fuses with each fuse protecting four outputs: the first fuse

protects A1 – A4; the second fuse protects A5 – A8. The fuses are
electrically connected to the same common.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The blue bands on the label indicate that MDL730 is a low-voltage module. F
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i or Series 90 30
system.
IC694MDL730
2.6.4.1. Q1
DC power to operate the field devices is supplied by the user.

Q2
7.6.1 LEDs
Q3
Output Status Green Output is ON
(1-8)
OFF Output is OFF Q4
OFF Fuses are OK

Fuse (F) Q5
Red One or more of the fuses is blown
Q6
Q7
Q8

Rated Voltage 12/24 Vdc
Output Voltage Range 12 to 24 Vdc (+20%, -15%)
Outputs per Module 8 (one group of eight outputs)

Isolation 1500 volts between field side and logic side
Output Current24 2 Amps maximum per point
2 Amps maximum per fuse at 60˚C (140˚F)

4 Amps maximum per fuse at 50˚C (122˚F)
Inrush Current 9.4 Amps for 10 ms
Output Voltage Drop 1.2 volt maximum
Off–state Leakage 1mA maximum
Off Response Time 2ms maximum
7.6.3 Thermal Derating MDL730

Field wiring connections to the module are made via the removable terminal assembly described below.
24
Maximum load current depends upon surrounding air temperature.

7.6.4.1 Terminal Assemblies

The MDL730 module has a special terminal assembly that is equipped with holding screws. These screws
prevent the terminal assembly to module connections from deteriorating in applications where the
controller is subject to severe vibration. To install these terminal assemblies, follow the standard installation
instructions in Chapter 17, then tighten the two holding screws to 8 to 10 in-lbs (1 Nm).
Screw terminals accept two copper wires in the range AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) to AWG #16 (1.3 mm2), or one
AWG #14 (2.1 mm2) copper 90°C (194°F) wire. Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but the
wires into any given terminal must be the same type (both solid or both stranded) and the same size. Screw
torque is from 9.6 in-lbs to 11.5 in-lbs (1.1 Nm to1.3 Nm).

7.7 Output Module, 12/24Vdc 0.5A Positive Logic

The 12/24Vdc 0.5 Amp Positive Logic Output module, IC694MDL732, provides
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 one group of eight outputs with a common power output terminal. This
F module has positive logic characteristics; it sources current to the loads
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 from the user common or positive power bus. The output device is
connected between the negative power bus and the module output. The
output characteristics are compatible with a wide range of load devices,
IC694MDL732
such as: motor starters, solenoids, and indicators.
Q1 Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user.
Q2
There are no fuses on this module. The blue bands on the label show that
MDL732 is a low-voltage module.
Q3

Q4
Q5
2.6.4.1.
Q6
Q7
Q8

Outputs per Module 8 (one group of eight outputs)
Isolation: Field to Backplane (optical) and to Frame 250 Vac continuous;

Ground 1500 Vac for 1 minute

Output Current 0.5 Amps maximum per point
2 Amps maximum per common
Output Voltage Drop 1 volt maximum
Power Consumption 50mA (all outputs on) from 5Vdc bus on

backplane

Terminal Connection
1 DC+
2 Output 1
3 Output 2
4 Output 3
5 Output 4
6 Output 5
7 Output 6
8 Output 7
9 Output 8
10 Outputs 1 - 8
common (return)
11 No connection

12 No connection Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
13 No connection
1
3 Q2
+
5 Q4
16 No connection 6 Q5 -
7 Q6
17 No connection
1μf 8 Q7
Other 10
19 No connection Circuits
11 NC
12 NC
14 NC
15 NC
16 NC
17 NC
18 NC
19 NC
20 NC

7.8 Output Module 125Vdc, 1 Amp, 6-Point

Isolated Positive/Negative: IC694MDL734
The 125Vdc 1 Amp Positive/Negative Logic Output module, IC694MDL734,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
provides six isolated output points. Each output point has a separate
F common terminal. This output module can be wired to have either
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 positive logic characteristics so that it sources current to the loads from
the user common or positive power bus; or negative logic characteristics
so that it sinks current from the loads to the user common or negative
IC694MDL734 power bus. The output characteristics are compatible with a wide range
of load devices, such as: motor starters, solenoids, and indicators.
Q1 Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user. External
fusing is recommended. Two Amp loads can be driven by wiring and
driving two outputs in parallel.
There are no fuses on this module. The red bands on the label show that
Q3

Q4 Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal,
Section 2.6.4.1.
Q5
Q6
7.8.1


Output Voltage Range +10.8 to +150 Vdc
Outputs per Module 6 (isolated)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to Frame Ground 250 Vac continuous;

1500 Vac for 1 minute
Inrush Current 7 Amps for 100 ms at 2% duty cycle, using 2

outputs wired in parallel
Power Consumption 90 mA (all outputs on) from 5Vdc bus on

backplane

Terminal Positive Logic Connection Negative Logic Connection
1 Output 1 Output 1 return (DC+)
2 Output 1 return (DC+) Output 1
5 No connection No connection


M odule Circuits Terminals Field Wiring
Positive Negative
Logic Logic
1 Q1 -- +
2 + - OR
Q1
Q2
-- +
3
4
+ - OR
Q2
5 NC
6 NC
7 Q3 -- +
8 + - OR
Q3
9 Q4 -- +
10
+ - OR
Q4
11 NC
12 NC
13 Q5 -- +
+ - OR
14 Q5
15 Q6 -- +
OR
16 + - Q6
17 NC
18 NC
19 NC
20 NC

7.9 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5 Amp, Positive

Logic, 16-Point: IC694MDL740
The 12/24Vdc 0.5 Amp Positive Logic Output module, IC694MDL740,
provides sixteen output points in two groups of eight. Each group has a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
common power output terminal. The module has positive logic
F
characteristics; it sources current to the loads from the user common or
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
positive power bus. Output devices are connected between the negative
power bus and the module terminals. The output characteristics of this
module are compatible with a wide range of load devices, such as: motor
IC694MDL740 starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power to operate the field devices must
be supplied by the user.
Q1
There are no fuses on this module. The blue bands on the label show that
Q3
MDL740 is a low-voltage module.
Q4
Q5
Q6 Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal

Q7
2.6.4.1.
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16
7.9.1


Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to Frame 250 Vac continuous;

Group to Group 250 Vac continuous;


Terminal Connection
1 DC +
2 Output 1
3 Output 2
4 Output 3

6 Output 5
1
7 Output 6 2 Q1
3 Q2
8 Output 7 4 Q3
+
5 Q4
9 Output 8
6 Q5 -
7 Q6
10 Outputs 1 – 8
common (return) 1μf 8 Q7
9 Q8
11 DC + Other 10
Circuits
11
12 Output 9 12 Q9
13 Q10
13 Output 10
14 Q11
+
15 Q12
14 Output 11
16 Q13 -
15 Output 12 17 Q14
18 Q15
16 Output 13 19 Q16
20
17 Output 14
18 Output 15 Figure 197: Field Wiring MDL740
19 Output 16
20 Outputs 9 - 16
common (return)

7.10 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5 Amp, Negative

Logic 16-Point: IC694MDL741
The 12/24Vdc 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output module, IC694MDL741,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
provides sixteen output points in two groups. Each group has a common
F power output terminal. This output module has negative logic
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 characteristics; it sinks current from the loads to the user common or
negative power bus. Output devices are connected between the positive
power bus and the output terminals. The output characteristics of this
IC694MDL741 module are compatible with a wide range of load devices, such as: motor
starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power to operate the field devices must
Q1 be supplied by the user.
Q2
Q3
There are no fuses on this module.
Q4
The blue bands on the label show that MDL741 is a low-voltage module.
Q5

Q7
Q9 Section 2.6.4.1.
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16


Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to Frame Ground 250 Vac continuous;

Group to Group 250 Vac continuous;


Power Consumption 110mA (all outputs on) from 5Vdc bus on

backplane

Terminal Connection
1 Outputs 1 – 8
common (DC+)
2 Output 1
3 Output 2
4 Output 3
5 Output 4
6 Output 5
7 Output 6

9 Output 8
1
10 DC– 2 Q1
3 Q2
11 Outputs 9 – 16 4 Q3
common (DC+) +
5 Q4
Q5 –
6
12 Output 9
7 Q6
13 Output 10 1μf 8 Q7
9 Q8
14 Output 11 Other 10
Circuits
11
15 Output 12
12 Q9
13 Q10
16 Output 13
14 Q11
+
17 Output 14 15 Q12
–
16 Q13
18 Output 15 17 Q14
18 Q15
19 Output 16
19 Q16
20 DC– 20

7.11 Output Module, 12/24Vdc 1A Positive Logic,

16-Point with ESCP per Group: IC694MDL742
The 12/24Vdc 1 Amp Positive Logic Electronic Short Circuit Protection (ESCP)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Output module, IC694MDL742, provides sixteen output points in two
F groups of eight. Each group has a common power output terminal. This
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 output module has positive logic characteristics: it sources current to the
loads from the user common or positive power bus. Output devices are
connected between the negative power bus and the output terminals. The
IC694MDL742 output characteristics of this module are compatible with a wide range of
load devices, such as: motor starters, solenoids, and indicators.
Q1
Q2 Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user.
Q4 There are no fuses on this module. The red LED (F) in the module header
Q5
indicates electronic short circuit protection trips. The blue bands on the
label show that MDL742 is a low-voltage module.
Q6

Q8
Q10 Section 2.6.4.1.
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16
7.11.1

7.11.2 Electronic Short-Circuit Protection (ESCP)

Module MDL742 has two Electronic Short Circuit Protection circuits. The first circuit protects points 1 to 8
and the second protect points 9 to 16. The module electronically monitors the common signal for each
group. If a short circuit occurs, the module turns off the output points in that group, and turns on the red LED
(F). The point LEDs do not turn off. Electronic Short Circuit Protection does not prevent individual outputs
from exceeding their ratings, but it protects the module in case of a short-circuited load. Electronic Short
Circuit Protection is reset by cycling the 12/24Vdc user power to the module.
Isolation:


4 Amps maximum per group at 50°C
3 Amps maximum per group at 60°C
Maximum total load current depends on the ambient

temperature as displayed in Figure 201.


Total Module Load
Current (Amps)
4 Amps per Group
8
3 Amps per Group

6
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

Ambient Temperature(°C)

Terminal Connection
1 DC +
2 Output 1
3 Output 2
4 Output 3
5 Output 4
6 Output 5
7 Output 6
8 Output 7
9 Output 8

10 Outputs 1 – 8 Module Circuits Terminals Field Wiring

common
(return) 1
2 Q1
11 DC +
3 Q2
12 Output 9 4 Q3
+
5 Q4
13 Output 10 6 Q5 -
.22μf
7 Q6
14 Output 11
8 Q7
15 Output 12 9 Q8
Other ESCP 10
Circuits
16 Output 13 11
12 Q9
17 Output 14 13 Q10
14 Q11
18 Output 15 +
15 Q12
19 Output 16 16 Q13 -
17 Q14
20 Outputs 9 - 16 18 Q15
common 19 Q16
(return) 20

7.12 Output Module, 5/24Vdc (TTL) Negative Logic,

The 5/24Vdc (TTL) Negative Logic Output module, IC694MDL752, provides thirty-
two discrete outputs arranged in four isolated groups of eight. Each group has its
own common. The outputs are negative logic or sinking-type outputs (the ON
state for a point results in an active low output).
The module has two modes of operation. In TTL mode, the outputs can switch
loads across +5Vdc (±5%) and are capable of sinking a maximum current of
25mA per point. In 12/24V mode, the outputs can switch loads over the range of
+12 to -24Vdc (+20%, -15%) and are capable of sinking a maximum current of
0.5A per point.
There are two pins on the I/O connectors for each group common. Each pin has a
current-handling capacity of 3 Amps. It is recommended that connections be
made to both pins when connecting the common; however, it is required for
high-current applications (between 3 and 4 Amps).
Each group can be used to drive different loads. For example, the module can
drive TTL loads, 12Vdc loads, and 24Vdc loads on different groups. It is
important to consider the effects of electrical noise when mixing TTL and
inductive-type loads.
Each point has an internal pull–up resistor. The resistor passively pulls up the
output to the user positive side power input (typically +5V for TTL mode) when
the output point FET is OFF, providing a high logic level for TTL applications. All
32 outputs are forced OFF when the CPU is stopped.
Power to provide current to the loads must be provided by the user. The module
also draws a minimum amount of power from the user supply to provide gate
drive to the output devices
Backplane isolation between the field side and logic side is provided by opto-couplers on the module. No
special fault or alarm diagnostics are reported. Individual numbered LEDs show the ON/OFF status of each
output.

Rated Voltage 5, and 12 through 24 Vdc, negative logic

(active low)
Output Voltage Range 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc (TTL mode)
10.2 to 28.8 Vdc (12/24V mode)
Outputs per Module 32 (four groups of eight outputs each)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to 250 Vac continuous;
Frame Ground 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Output Current 25mA per point (maximum in TTL mode)
0.5 Amps per point (maximum in 12/24V mode); with 4 Amps
maximum per group and 3 Amps maximum per group common pin
Power Consumption 260mA (maximum) from 5Vdc bus on backplane;
(13mA + 3 mA/point ON + 4.7 mA/LED)
12 mA (maximum) per group from user supply
at 5Vdc and all eight outputs in group ON
Inrush Current 4.6 Amps for 10ms
On–state (active low) 0.4 Vdc (maximum in TTL mode)
Voltage Drop 0.24 Vdc (maximum in 12/24V mode)
Off–state Leakage Current 0.1mA maximum
On Response Time 0.5ms maximum
Off Response Time 0.5ms maximum


Connections to the output circuits are made from the load devices to two male 24–pin D-connectors (Fujitsu
FCN–365P024–AU) on the front of the module.
The connectors on this module can be connected directly to field devices using a cable having a mating
female connector on one end and stripped and tinned wires on the other end. You can purchase a pair of
pre–wired cables, catalog numbers IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 or build cables. Refer Chapter 17 of this
manual for more information.
Connections can also be made a pair of cables with connectors on each end. These cables connect the
module with DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks as described in Chapter 17.
Q26 Q2
LOAD Q25 12 12 LOAD LOAD Q1
1 12
1 LOAD
Q27 Q28 Q3 Q4
LOAD 11 11 LOAD LOAD 2 11
2 LOAD
Q29 Q30 Q5 Q6
3 LOAD
Q31 Q32 Q7 Q8
LOAD 9 9 LOAD LOAD 4 94 LOAD
COM4 COM4 COM1 COM1
+ -- 8 8 + -- 5 85
7 7 NC 6 76 NC
VIN4 VIN1
VIN3 VIN2
NC 6 6 NC 7 67
COM3 COM3 COM2 COM2
5 5 8 58
-- + -- +
Q24 Q23 Q16 Q15
Q22 Q21 Q14 Q13
3 LOAD
Q20 Q19 Q12 Q11
2 LOAD
Q18 Q17 Q10 Q9
1 LOAD
I13 I13 I13 I13
Figure 204: Field Wiring Pinouts MDL752

7.12.3 Typical Connections: MDL752
xVIN
10K Contactor
Coil
(User Load) 24V
PTx
xCOM
xVIN
COMx
10K
RX3i 5V
TTL INPUT
PTx
INx
xCOM
xVIN
10K User
TTL Input 5V
PTx
xCOM
Figure 205: Typical Connections Diagram MDL752

7.13 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5A Positive Logic,

The 12/24Vdc 0.5A Positive Logic Output module, IC694MDL753, provides
thirty-two discrete outputs in four isolated groups of eight. Each group has
its own common. The outputs are positive logic or sourcing type outputs;
they switch the loads on the positive side of the power supply, and supply
current to the load. The outputs can switch user loads over the range of +12
to +24Vdc (+20%, -15%) and can source a maximum current of 0.5 Amps per
point. There are two pins on the I/O connectors for each group common.
Each pin has a current handling capacity of 3 Amps. It is recommended that
connections be made to both pins when connecting the common; however,
it is required for high-current applications (between 3 and 4 Amps).
Each group can be used to drive different loads. For example, three groups
might drive 24Vdc loads, while the fourth was reserved for driving 12Vdc
loads.
Power to provide current to the loads must be provided by the user. The
module also draws a minimum amount of power from the user supply to
provide gate drive to the output devices.
Backplane isolation between the field side and logic side is provided by
opto–couplers on the module.
All 32 outputs are forced OFF when the CPU is stopped. No special fault or
alarm diagnostics are reported. Individual numbered LEDs show the ON/OFF
status of each output.

2.6.4.1.
7.13.1

Rated Voltage 12 through 24 Vdc, positive logic

Output Voltage Range 10.2 to 28.8 Vdc
Outputs per Module 32 (four groups of eight outputs each)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane (optical) and to 250 Vac continuous;

Output Current 0.5 Amps per point with 4 Amps maximum per group
and 3 Amps maximum per group common pin
Power Consumption 260 mA (maximum) from 5Vdc bus on backplane;

(13mA + 3mA/point ON + 4.7mA/LED)
16.5mA (maximum) per group from user supply

9.6mA (maximum) per group from user supply

On–state Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc
Off–state Leakage Current 0.1mA maximum

Connections to the output circuits are made from the load devices to two male 24–pin D-connectors (Fujitsu
FCN–365P024–AU) on the front of the module. The connectors on this module can be wired directly to field
devices using a cable having a mating female connector on one end and stripped and tinned wires on the
other end. You can purchase a pair of pre–wired cables, catalog numbers IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 or
build cables. Refer to Chapter 17 of this manual for more information.

Connections can also be made a pair of cables with connectors on each end. These cables connect the
module with DIN-rail mounted terminal blocks as described in Chapter 17.
Q25 Q26 Q1 Q2
Q27 Q28 Q3 Q4
Q29 Q30 Q5 Q6
Q31 Q32 Q7 Q8
COM4 VIN4 COM1 VIN1
8 8 5 5
VIN4 VIN1
-- + 7 7 NC
-- + 6 6 NC
VIN3 VIN2
NC 6 6 + -- NC 7 7 + --
COM3 COM2
5 5 8 8
VIN3 VIN2
Q24 Q23 Q16 Q15
Q22 Q21 Q14 Q13
Q20 Q19 Q12 Q11
Q18 Q17 Q10 Q9
I13 I13 I13 I13
Figure 207: Field Wiring Pinouts MDL753
If the total current is greater than 3 Amps for a group, use both VIN pins for the group by adding a second
wire (shown by dashed lines above).

7.14 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.75A Positive

Logic, 32-Point with ESCP per Group:
IC694MDL754
The 12/24Vdc, 0.75A Positive Logic ESCP Output module, IC694MDL754, provides
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S1
thirty-two discrete outputs in two isolated groups of 16. Each group has its own
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
S2 common. The outputs are positive logic or sourcing type outputs; they switch
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TB the loads on the positive side of the power supply, and supply current to the
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
load. The outputs can switch user loads over the range of +12Vdc to +24Vdc
(+20%, -15%) and can source a maximum current of 0.75 Amps per point.
IC694MDL754
Q1
Each point has electronic overcurrent/short circuit protection and generates an
Q2
Q3
individual fault if either condition exists. In addition to output driver faults being
Q4 sent back to the RX3i controller, the module provides a loss of field side power
Q5
Q6 fault, ESCP point failure within a group, field terminal block ON/OFF status and a
Q7
Q8 DIP switch configuration mismatch fault.
Q9
Q10
Q11 Each group can be used to drive different loads. For example, one group might
Q12
Q13
drive 24Vdc loads, and the other could drive 12Vdc loads. Power for the loads
Q14 must be provided by the user.
Q15
Q16
Q17
Q18
A DIP switch at the rear of the module is used to select the outputs default
Q19 mode: Force Off or Hold Last State. The module must be removed from the
Q20
Q22
Q23
Q24 This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i system. Module supports
Q25
Q26 insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under
Q27
Q28
power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.
Q29
Q30
Q31 Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility (if the
Q32
host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU has no
serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade kit.23
This module can be used with either a Box-style (IC694TBB032) or Spring-style

(IC694TBS032) front Terminal Block (Refer to Chapter 17). The Terminal Block is
ordered separately.
7.14.1


Each output point provides “self-recovering” protection against overcurrent, short circuit and over-
temperature. The fault is present until the condition that caused the fault is removed or the faulted point is
turned off. After the fault condition is removed the output driver automatically sets the output to the state it
was in before the fault occurred.
Each output point provides transient voltage protection to clamp high voltages at or below 40 Vdc. Reverse
voltage protection is provided for field power inputs.
7.14.3 LEDs: MDL754

Thirty-two green/yellow LEDs on the module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S1 Outputs 1 – 16 Power Present indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 32.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
S2 Outputs 17 – 32 Power Present These LEDs are green when the corresponding
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TB outputs are on, and yellow if the outputs are
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Terminal Block Present
faulted. They are off when the corresponding
outputs are off.
Figure 209: LED Layout MDL754
Two green/yellow LEDs indicate the presence of field power to each of the isolated output groups. They are
green if field power is within limits. They are yellow if a point fault exists within their group. And they are off
when field power is absent or outside operating limits.
The red/green Terminal Block LED is green when the removable terminal block of this module is locked in place.
It is red when the terminal block is not locked. The Terminal Block LED blinks if there is a non-recoverable module
fault. The module also sends an Addition of Terminal Block or Loss of Terminal Block message to the RX3i CPU to
report the Terminal Block status.
Rated Voltage 12/24 Vdc, nominal

Output Voltage Range 10.2Vdc to 30 Vdc
Outputs per Module 32 (two isolated groups of 16 outputs each)
Isolation:
Output Current 0.75 Amps per point
Power Consumption 300 mA (maximum) from 5Vdc bus on backplane;
Thermal Derating No derating at 24Vdc.
At 30 Vdc, outputs are de-rated above 42 degrees C as displayed
in Figure 210.

External Power Supply

Rated Voltage +12Vdc to +30 Vdc, 12/24Vdc nominal
Module does not provide isolation between external power and
I/O points. Isolation can be achieved through the use of an
isolated external power supply.
External Power Supply Current Required Module version –CC and later: 72 mA/group with all outputs
(not including load current) commanded Off, 132 mA/group with all outputs commanded
ON.
Module version –BC and earlier: 72 mA/group with all outputs
commanded OFF, 100 mA/group with all outputs commanded
ON.
Inrush Current 3 A supplied for 10ms without ESCP trip
Output Voltage Drop 0.3 Vdc maximum
Steady-state overcurrent trip 5 A typical per point
Output Leakage Current 0.1 mA maximum
On Response Time 0.5 ms maximum
Off Response Time 0.5 ms maximum
Protection Short-circuit protection, over-current protection, over-
temperature protection, all with auto recovery.

Number of Outputs ON
24 VDC
32 32 Outputs On
24
30 VDC
16
12 Outputs On
8
42°C
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C

7.14.6 Output Defaults: MDL754

The DIP switch at the rear of the module selects the default operation for the output circuits of this module.
the module. Only the upper switch is used for module IC694MDL754.

With the Outputs Default switch in the right

(open) position, the outputs mode is set to
Force Off. In this mode, the outputs will go to
Outputs Default DIP Switch
Closed (left) = Hold Last State
zero whenever communication with the CPU
Open (right) = Force Off is lost. When the switch is in the left position,
the Outputs Default mode is set to Hold Last
Not Used for IC694MDL754 State. In this mode, the outputs will retain
their last programmed value whenever
communication with the CPU is lost, and field
Figure 211: DIP Switch Settings MDL754
power is present.
The Outputs Default selection made with the DIP switch must match the selection made for this feature in
the software configuration of this module. If the two do not match, a Module Outputs Default Mode
Configuration Mismatch fault occurs.
The following table summarizes the operation of Outputs Default mode with and without backplane power
and field (external) power.
Backplane Field Outputs Default Operation

Power Power
On On Force Off or Normal Operation. If module fault detected, outputs are set to
Hold Last State zero.
On Off Force Off or Module detects loss of field power, communicates fault to CPU
Hold Last State while setting outputs to Off state. After field power is restored,
the outputs are held in Off state until the module receives new
output data from the CPU. Point LEDs indicate desired output
without field power.
Off On Force Off Module detects loss of communications and turns off the
outputs within 400ms. LEDs are off.
Hold Last State Module detects loss of communications and holds outputs on
their last states until the CPU sends new output data. LEDs are
off



Q1 1 19 Q17
Q2 2 20 Q18
Q3 3 21 Q19
Q4 4 22 Q20
Q5 5 23 Q21
Q6 6 24 Q22
Q7 7 25 Q23
Q8 8 26 Q24
Q9 9 27 Q25
Q10 10 28 Q26
Q11 11 29 Q27
DC+ for 17 -
DC+ for 1 - 16 17 Q12 12 30 Q28 35
32
Q13 13 31 Q29
Q14 14 32 Q30
DC- for 1 - 16 18 36 DC- for 17 - 32
Q15 15 33 Q31
Q16 16 34 Q32

The module can optionally report sixteen bits of status data to the CPU. To access this data, the length must
be changed from 0 to 16. It has the following content:
Status bit 15 indicates the state of the Output Default DIP switch of this module. The module configuration
should be set to match the DIP switch, as discussed earlier in this section.
7.14.9 ESCP Status Data: MDL754

The module can optionally report the ESCP fault status of the outputs in input bits 0 - 31. By default, the
length of this data area is 0. To access this data, the length must be changed from 0 to 32. The ESCP fault can
be identified using the ESCP status bits:

Output ESCP Status Bits
Output Group 1 Output Group 2
0 - 15 16 - 31
7.15 Output Module, 12/24Vdc, 0.5A Positive Logic,

32-Point with ESCP per Group: IC694MDL758
The 12/24Vdc, 0.5A Positive Logic Output module with ESCP per group,
IC694MDL758, provides thirty-two discrete outputs in two isolated groups of 16.
Each group has its own common. The outputs are positive logic or sourcing-type
outputs; they switch the loads on the positive side of the power supply, and supply
current to the load. The outputs can switch user loads over the range of +12 to
+24Vdc (+20%, -15%) and can source a maximum current of 0.5 Amps per point.
Each group has electronic short circuit protection and generates a fault if any
output in the group is in a short circuit condition. The module provides an ESCP
failure status within a group back to the RX3i controller. In addition to this, the
module provides a fault on loss of field side power within a group.
Each group can be used to drive different loads. For example, one group might drive
24Vdc loads, and the other could drive 12Vdc loads. Power for the loads must be
provided by the user from an isolated source.
This module can be used with either a Box-style (IC694TBB032) or Spring-style

(IC694TBS032) front Terminal Block (Refer to Chapter 17). The Terminal Block is
ordered separately.


Each output group provides “self-recovering” protection against short circuit. The fault is present until the
condition that caused the fault is removed or the faulted group is turned off. After the fault condition is
removed the output driver automatically sets the output to the state it was in before the fault occurred.
Each output point provides transient voltage protection to clamp high voltages at or below 40 Vdc.
7.15.2 LEDs: MDL758
Figure 214: LED Layout MDL758
Thirty-two green LEDs to show the status of the corresponding output channels
Output Status GREEN Output is ON

(1-32)
OFF Output is OFF
Two bi-color LEDs show the fault status of the two output channel groups:
 S1 corresponds to fault condition on channels 1-16;
 S2 corresponds to fault condition on channels 17-32.
ESCP Status GREEN Groupx Outputs are Normal

(S1-S2)
RED Groupx Outputs have ESCP fault
A single green LED shows the status of module power from backplane.
Module Status GREEN Module power OK

(OK)
OFF Module power not available

Rated Voltage 12Vdc through 24Vdc, positive logic

Output Voltage Range 10.2Vdc to 28.8Vdc
Outputs per Module 32 (two groups of sixteen outputs each)
Isolation
Field to Backplane (optical) and to 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Frame Ground
Output Current 0.5 Amps per point with 8 Amps maximum per group without ESCP
trip
UL Approved Load Ratings
0.5 Amps per point pilot duty
0.5 Amps per point resistive
Power Consumption 250 mA (maximum) from 5Vdc bus on backplane
33mA (maximum) per group from user supplied isolated 24Vdc with
all sixteen outputs in group ON
20mA (maximum) per group from user supplied isolated 12Vdc with
all sixteen outputs in group ON
Inrush Current 5.4 Amps for 10 ms without ESCP trip
On-state Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc
Off-state Leakage Current 0.1mA maximum
Installation Environment Surrounding Air 60˚C maximum;
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environments only
7.15.4 Module Data: MDL758

Module MDL758 uses sixteen input bits and thirty-two output bits to exchange status and filter information
with the RX3i CPU. The memory types and offsets for this data are selected in the hardware configuration for
the module.
7.15.4.1 Input Data: MDL758

The module uses sixteen input bits to report its status information to the RX3i CPU. It has the following
content:
7.15.4.2 Output Data: MDL758

The module receives thirty-two bits of output data from the RX3i CPU, one bit per output point. Bit 0
determines the state of Output 1; bit 31 determines the state of Output 32.

Field wiring connections to the module are made via the interposing quick-connect (TBQC) terminal
assembly (Refer to Chapter 17):


Q1 1 19 Q17
Q2 2 20 Q18
Output 13 13 Q3 3 21 Q19 31 Output 29
Q4 4 22 Q20
Q5 5 23 Q21
Output 15 15 Q6 6 24 Q22 33 Output 31

Q7 7 25 Q23
Output 16 16 Q8 8 26 Q24 34 Output 32
Q9 9 27 Q25
DC+ for 1 - 16 17 35 DC+ for 17 - 32
Q10 10 28 Q26
DC- for 1 - 16 18 Q11 11 29 Q27 36 DC- for 17 - 32
Q12 12 30 Q28
Q13 13 31 Q29
Q14 14 32 Q30
Q15 15 33 Q31
Q16 16 34 Q32
+ 17 35 +
- 18 36 -

7.16 Output Module, 24/125Vdc, 2A Positive Logic,

16-Point with ESCP & Diagnostics:
IC695MDL765
The 24/125Vdc 2A Smart Digital Output module, IC695MDL765, provides 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OK
sixteen discrete outputs in two isolated groups of 8 outputs. Each group of 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
S1
outputs is referenced to an isolated common, providing group-to-group S2
isolation. The module uses 24Vdc or 125Vdc.
The outputs are positive logic or sourcing-type outputs; they switch the loads on IC695MDL765
the positive side of the power supply, and supply current to the load. The
Q1
outputs can switch user loads over the ranges of +18Vdc to +30 Vdc or 105Vdc
Q2
to 132Vdc and can source a maximum current of 2 Amps per point.
Q3
Power for the loads must be provided by the user. Q4
Q5
The field status LEDs (S1 and S2) indicate whether the external +24Vdc or Q6
+125Vdc power supply is present and above the minimum level, whether faults Q7
are present, and whether the terminal block is locked into place. The module Q8
also logs an Addition of Terminal Block or Loss of Terminal Block message to the I/O Q9
fault table to report the terminal block status.
Q10
Q11
Each point has electronic short circuit protection (ESCP) that shuts down an
Q12
output and generates an individual fault if capacitive or incandescent surge
current exceeds 10 amps, or if it exceeds 2 amps for more than 10 ms. In Q13
addition to output driver faults being sent back to the RX3i controller, the Q14
module provides a loss of field side power fault, ESCP point failure within a group Q15
and field terminal block ON/OFF status. Q16
Features of the Smart Digital Output module include:
 Output Pulse Test Capability Figure 216:

IC695MDL765
 Output Hold Last State or Default
Additional Diagnostics include:
 Over temperature
 Failed Switch Detection
 Overload Detection and Shutdown
 No-load Detection

This module can be used with either a Box-style (IC694TBB032) or Spring-style (IC694TBS032) front Terminal
Block (Refer to Chapter 17). The Terminal Block is ordered separately.
The red bands on the label show that the MDL765 is a high-voltage module.
Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility (if the host CPU has a serial port) or
using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU has no serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware
upgrade kit.23

Each output point provides protection against overcurrent, short circuit and over-temperature. The fault is
present until the condition that caused the fault is removed and the faulted point is turned off.
Each output point provides transient voltage protection to clamp high voltages at or below 136Vdc.
7.16.2 LED Operation: MDL765

The 16 green/amber channel status LEDs on the module
OK 1 – 16 indicate the ON/OFF status of points 1 through 16.
Channel Status
S1
S2 The Module OK LED indicates module status. The field
status LEDs (S1 and S2) indicate whether the external
+24Vdc or +125Vdc power supply is present and is above
Figure 217: LED Layout MDL765 the minimum level, whether faults are present, and
whether the terminal block is locked into place. The module
also logs an Addition of Terminal Block or Loss of Terminal
Block message to the I/O fault table to report the Terminal
Block status.
LED Function LED Indications

Name
OK Module status Off: Module is not receiving power from the RX3i backplane or the
module has failed self-test.
Solid green: Module OK and configured.

Blinking green: The module has not received configuration from the CPU.
If configuration is not successful, the module will continue to blink in this
mode.
Amber: Module hardware watchdog timeout.
Blinking amber: Module internal error. Record the blink pattern and
contact technical support.
1–16 Channel status Off: Output is off
Green: Output is on
Amber: Output fault
S1, S2 Terminal block and Off: Terminal block present and field power not present
field power status
Green: Terminal block and field power present
Red: Terminal block not present or field power error. Field power errors
include detecting 125Vdc when configured for 24Vdc or detecting only
24Vdc when configured for 125Vdc.
Note: The OK, S1 and S2 LEDs blink green in unison when the module is in firmware update mode.

Field Power Voltage (24V nominal I/O), VIn 18 to 30 Vdc
Field Power Voltage (125V nominal I/O), VIn 105 to 132Vdc
Ripple Voltage, Field Power 10%Vpp
Outputs per Module 16 (two isolated groups of 8 outputs each)
Isolation
Field to Backplane
Continuous 250 Vac
Group to Group
Continuous 250 Vac
Backplane Power Consumption

+3.3Vdc 152mA
+5.1Vdc 540mA

Thermal De-rating None required with output currents of 1 amp per

channel. For 2 amps per channel, refer to Figure
218.
Continuous Output Current per Point Refer to Output Load Ratings: MDL765.
Peak Inrush Current 10A supplied for 10ms without ESCP trip
Output Leakage Current 1mA maximum
Group Output Current at 35⁰C ambient 8A maximum
Module Output Current at 35⁰C ambient 16A maximum
Sourcing Circuit Output On Voltage (VIn-2) to VIn

(IOUT = 2A)
Minimum Load Current with no-load detection 50 mA

enabled
Maximum Switching Frequency Refer to Output Load Ratings: MDL765 below.
Protection Short-circuit protection, overcurrent protection,

and over-temperature protection.
Over-temperature, short-circuit, and overcurrent
faults must be recovered by turning the point off
and back on.

7.16.3.1 Output Load Ratings: MDL765

Resistive 2A at 132Vdc
2A at 30 Vdc
No external suppression components required.
Inductive (Pilot Duty) 0.6A at 132Vdc
For inductive loads greater than 2.2H, maximum switching frequency is

0.125Hz.
Overall maximum switching frequency: 1 Hz
1.2A at 30 Vdc
For inductive loads greater than 0.8H, maximum switching frequency is

0.5Hz.
Overall maximum switching frequency: 1 Hz
Incandescent (Lamp) 0.75A at 132Vdc
0.75A at 30 Vdc

With output currents of 1 amp per channel, no temperature de-rating is required, and all channels can
operate within the entire Surrounding Air temperature range. With output currents of 2 amps per channel,
the number of active channels must be reduced as temperature increases, according to the following de-
rating curve.

1A per Channel
Maximum Number of 16
Active Channels 15
14
13
12
11
10
9 2A per Channel
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10 20 30 40 50 55 60
Surrounding Air Temperature, °C

Field wiring connections to the module are made to the interposing quick-connect (TBQC) terminal
assembly, as described in Chapter 17.
NC 2 20 NC
NC 4 22 NC
NC 6 24 NC
NC 8 26 NC
NC 10 28 NC
NC 12 30 NC


NC 14 32 NC
2 20
Output 8 15 Output 2 3 21 Output 10 33 Output 16

4 22
NC 16 34 NC
DC+ 17 6 24 35 DC+
DC- 18 36 DC-
8 26
10 28
12 30
14 32
16 34
DC+ 17 35
DC+
18 36
DC- DC-
7.16.5 Circuit Operation: MDL765

The two eight-circuit DC sourcing circuit groups have all output devices connected to the negative side of
the power supply (DC-). The sourcing circuit outputs provide power to the output devices. For sourcing
circuit outputs, an ON condition is logic 1 and an OFF condition is logic 0.
Field Module
Connections Circuitry
DC +
Sourcing
Circuit
Output
K1
Device
DC -
Figure 220: Circuit Detail MDL765

7.16.6 Input and Output Data Formats: MDL765
7.16.6.1 Output Value Data: MDL765

The application uses these bits (one bit per output), beginning at the configured Outputs Reference Address to
write the commanded output values to the module.
7.16.6.2 Output Command Value Feedback Data: MDL765

The module uses these bits (one bit per output), beginning at the configured Output Command Reference
Address to report the output feedback data values.
7.16.6.3 Channel Diagnostic and Status Data: MDL765

The module can be configured to report channel diagnostic and status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this
data at the Diagnostic Reference Address configured for this module. Use of this feature is optional.
The data for each channel occupies two words whether the channel is used or not.
Note: At least two sweeps must occur to clear the diagnostic bits: one scan to send the %Q data to the
module and one scan to return the %I data to the CPU. Because module processing is asynchronous to the
controller sweep, more than two sweeps may be needed to clear the bits, depending on the sweep rate and
the point at which the data is made available to the module.


The module can be configured to return two words of module status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this
data in the 32-bit Module Status reference area configured for this module.
7.16.6.5 Pulse Test Command Output Data: MDL765

The module uses these bits (one bit per output), beginning at the configured Pulse Command Output
Reference Address to command an on-demand pulse test. To command an on-demand pulse test, the Pulse
Test Enable parameter for the channel must be set to Enabled – Manual.
7.16.7 Diagnostics: MDL765

The module always performs its standard diagnostic checks, plus one optional output diagnostic. The
module returns current circuit diagnostics to %I bits for all circuits.
For Over-temperature, Short Circuit, Failed Switch and Overload, the user must de-assert the output %Q bit
to clear the error. The corresponding %I bit will be turned off within at least two CPU sweeps.
7.16.7.1 Over Temperature Diagnostics: MDL765

Each circuit has a built-in thermal sensor. If the internal temperature exceeds the allowable limit the module
logs an OVER-TEMPERATURE fault in the I/O fault table and turns off the circuit to protect its internal
electronics. The temperature must decrease below the allowable limit before the output can turn on again.
This diagnostic is always performed for all the outputs.
7.16.7.2 Short Circuit Diagnostics: MDL765

Output circuits are protected by a short circuit threshold sensor at the switching device. If the instantaneous
current on an output exceeds 10 amps, the module turns the output off within microseconds. The module
will try to restart the load; if two additional attempts are unsuccessful, the output circuit is forced off, and
the module logs a SHORT CIRCUIT fault in the I/O fault table. To restore normal operation to output the
cause of the current surge must be removed, then the diagnostic must be cleared from the CPU.
This diagnostic detects shorts across the load only. Also, systems with floating power supplies do not detect
shorts of I/O points to ground because there is no return current path. Systems with power supplies
grounded on the negative side detect grounded output points as Short Circuit.

Partial (high resistance) shorts may not draw enough current to be detected by the Pulse Test.
7.16.7.3 Failed Switch Diagnostics: MDL765

The module automatically monitors all circuits for several types of faults, which may be reported as Failed
Switch diagnostics.
Failed Switch is reported if the switch state is not the same as the commanded state of the circuit. The
module logs a FAILED SWITCH fault in the I/O fault table identifying the failed circuit. The logic state of the
circuit is set to OFF.
When an output fault occurs, the actual condition of the output switch is not known. If the output switch has
failed shorted (or closed), current flow is not interrupted when the module forces the output state OFF.
Action external to the module must be taken to remedy the problem. The FAILED SWITCH fault can alert
personnel or cause program logic to be activated, possibly shutting off power to the module, I/O section, or
process.
7.16.7.4 No Load Diagnostics: MDL765

Reporting for this diagnostic can be enabled or disabled for individual outputs.
By default, outputs are configured to report No-Load conditions. In this configuration, energizing the output
activates a no-load current level. If the load does not continuously draw 50mA from the output circuit, the
module logs a NO LOAD fault in the I/O fault table. This diagnostic should be not be used for circuits on
which very small loads (small relays or indicating lamps) will draw less than 50 mA. To clear the No-Load
error, a load of at least 85mA must be applied to the output.
7.16.7.5 Overload Diagnostic: MDL765

In addition to the protection provided by the built-in Short Circuit detection, Overload Shutdown provides
further protection for output loads, field wiring, and switching devices connected to this module. If a load
exceeds 2 amps DC continuously for 10ms, the module turns the output off and logs an OVERLOAD fault in
the I/O fault table.
7.16.7.6 Under-Voltage Detection: MDL765

The field power supply on each group includes support for detecting supply voltages below the minimum
voltage for the selected voltage standard. The fault can be disabled by group. Detecting the fault has no
impact on the state of the output control.
7.16.7.7 Output Pulse Test: MDL765

The Output Pulse Test is an optional diagnostic feature that exercises the output points to confirm they can
be switched to a known state.

The pulse test attempts to switch the output from its Normal State to its Default State. For a load with a
Normal State of ON, the source output is pulsed OFF. For a load with a Normal State of OFF, the source
output is pulsed on. A fault is logged in the I/O fault table if a failure is detected in the output point.
Pulse Testing should remain enabled if the module has loads that hold one state for long periods of time,
unless any load(s) are sensitive to pulses or interruptions of up to 16ms. It should be disabled if the loads
experienced by this module will normally change state as the program executes. These will report faults
during normal operation, and do not need to be pulsed.
Pulse Test Selections: Pulse test frequency

Output Default State / Output Normal State
7.16.7.7.1 On Demand Pulse Test: MDL765

To use this feature, the Pulse Test Enable parameter for the channel must be set to Enabled-Manual. To
command a pulse test, set the Pulse Test Command bit for the channel(s) to be pulse tested.
The module performs one or more pulse tests for each channel selected. Since this will take many sweeps,
you should keep the Pulse Test Command bit set until the Pulse Test Complete bit is set for that channel in
the Channel Diagnostic and Status Data.
The module keeps the Pulse Test Complete bit set as long as the Pulse Test Command bit is set. If the pulse
test fails, the Pulse Test Failed bit is set at the same time as the Pulse Test Complete bit. One output scan
with the Pulse Test Command bit cleared clears the Pulse Test Complete status bit and Pulse Test Failure
diagnostic bit.
7.16.7.7.2 Automatic Pulse Test: MDL765

To use this feature, set the Pulse Test Enable parameter for the channel to Enabled-Auto. The Output Pulse
Test occurs at a frequency selected in the Hardware Configuration, with no intervention from the CPU. The
pulse test execution is based on the Time of Day clock set in the CPU, and the frequency is relative to
12:00am. For example, a frequency of 12 hours will result in a pulse test run at 12:00am and 12:00pm.
If the pulse test fails, the Pulse Test Failed bit is set.
7.16.8 Configuration: MDL765
7.16.8.1 Module Settings: MDL765

Parameter Function
Outputs Reference Address Specifies the memory location used by the module for 16
Outputs Value Reference Length bits of output data.
Output Command Feedback Reference Specifies the starting address where the module returns
Address 16 bits of feedback output data.

Output Command Feedback Reference Provides 1 bit per channel of feedback output data.
Length Setting this value to 0 disables feedback data reporting.
Diagnostic Reference Address Specifies the starting address for reporting channel
diagnostics data.
Diagnostic Reference Length Provides thirty-two bits of diagnostic data per channel.
Setting this value to 0 disables channel diagnostics
reporting.
Module Status Reference Address Specifies the starting address for reporting module status
data.
Module Status Reference Length Provides thirty-two bits of module status data. Setting this
value to 0 disables channel diagnostics reporting.
Pulse Test Command Output Reference Specifies the memory location for 16 bits of manual pulse
Address/ test command data.
Pulse Test Command Output Reference
Length
Channel Faults w/o Terminal Block Enables or disables generation of channel faults and
alarms after a Terminal Block has been removed.
Loss of Terminal Block Detection Enables or disables logging of a fault to indicate a Terminal
Block has been removed.
Loss of Field Power Group 1 Detection/ Enables or disables loss of field power detection for the
Loss of Field Power Group 2 Detection specified group.
Voltage Selection Specifies field power voltage level for under-voltage

detection. Can be enabled or disabled by the Loss of Field
Power Group 1/Group 2 Detection parameter.
Inputs Default Specifies whether inputs will go to Force Off or Hold Last
State if the module loses communication with the CPU. An
output goes to its power up default state when the
module is first powered up.
I/O Scan Set Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set defined in
the CPU configuration. Determines how often the RX3i
polls the data.

7.16.8.2 Channel Settings: MDL765

Parameter Function
Outputs Default Mode Force Off, Force On, or Hold Last State
Outputs are forced into this state when the CPU is placed into
Outputs Disabled. This includes immediately after download of
Hardware Configuration.
Outputs remain in the Outputs Default state indefinitely or until

one of the following occurs:
CPU is placed into Outputs Enabled.
Communications with the CPU are restored.
Power is removed from the module.
Pulse Test Enable Enables or disables pulse testing of the output. Allows you to
select Manual or Automatic pulse testing. For details about this
feature, refer to Output Pulse Test: MDL765 above.
Pulse Test Frequency If Pulse Test Enable is set to Auto, allows you to select the
frequency of pulse testing.
Pulse Test Normal State Available when Pulse Test is enabled.
Specifies the state in which this output point will spend the
majority of its time. The module performs a pulse test only from
the normal state to the default state.
Pulse Test Default State Available when Pulse Test Enable is enabled.
Specifies the state the point will go to if a channel failure occurs.
When the output is placed into the default state the module will
not perform a pulse test into the normal state.
Diagnostic Reporting Enable Enables or disables channel diagnostics. If enabled, channel

diagnostic data is written to the Channel Diagnostic and Status
Data.
Open Load Reporting Enable If enabled, an open load (no-load) condition is reported in the
Channel Diagnostic and Status Data.
Pulse Test Failed Enable If enabled, the results of manual or automatic pulse testing are
reported in the Channel Diagnostic and Status Data.

Parameter Function
Over Load Reporting Enable Always enabled: An output over load condition is reported in the
Channel Diagnostic and Status Data.
Fault Reporting Enable If enabled, channel faults are reported to the I/O fault table.
Open Load Reporting Enable If enabled and the corresponding diagnostic reporting is enabled,
an open load (no-load) condition is reported in the I/O fault table.
Pulse Test Failed Enable If enabled and the corresponding diagnostic reporting is enabled,
a failed pulse test is reported in the I/O fault table.
Over Load Reporting Enable Always enabled: An output over load condition is reported in the
I/O fault table.

7.17 Output Module, Isolated Relay, N.O., 4 Amp,

The 4 Amp 16-Point Relay Output module IC694MDL916 provides sixteen Form A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 relays for controlling output loads. The maximum output switching capacity of
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 each circuit is 4 Amps. Each output point is isolated from the other points, and
TB each point has a separate common power output terminal. Outputs provide a high
degree of noise immunity, minimizing the need to add external snubbers. The
IC694MDL916 relay outputs can control a wide range of output devices, such as: motor starters,
solenoids, and indicators.
Q1
Q2 The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate the field devices.
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6 The red bands on the door card show that MDL916 is a high-voltage module.
Q7
A DIP switch at the rear of the module is used to select the default mode for the
Q8
outputs: Force Off or Hold Last State. The module must be removed from the
Q10
Q11
Q12
Individually-numbered LEDs indicate the ON/OFF state of each output. The
Q13 red/green TB LED is green when the removable terminal block of this module is
Q14 locked in place. It is red when the terminal block is not locked.
Q15
Module MDL916 can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style
Q16
(IC694TBS132) Terminal Block (Refer to Chapter 17). Extended terminal blocks
provide the extra shroud depth typically needed for shielded wires. Terminal Blocks
are ordered separately.
The module reports Addition of Terminal Block, Loss of Terminal Block, and Hold Last
State Configuration Mismatch messages to the RX3i CPU.
Outputs per Module 16 isolated Form A relay outputs

External Power Supply 0 – 125Vdc (5/24/125Vdc nominal)

0 – 250 Vac (47 to 63 Hz), 120-240 Vac nominal
Isolation
Field to Backplane and to 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute.
Frame Ground, Group to
Group
Power Consumption 300mA at 5Vdc from backplane maximum (all outputs ON)
150mA at 24Vdc from backplane relay power (all outputs ON)
Thermal Derating Refer to below.
Output Voltage25 5 – 125Vdc (5/24/125Vdc nominal)

5 – 250 Vac (47 to 63 Hz), 120-240 Vac nominal
Output Current 10mA per point minimum

4A for 5-250 Vac maximum (resistive or general purpose)
4A for 5-30 Vdc maximum (resistive)
2A pilot duty per output (5Vdc to 30 Vdc, 5Vac to 240 Vac)
Output Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc maximum
Output Leakage Current Not Applicable (open contact)
Response Times (On/Off) 10ms maximum (At nominal voltage excluding contact bounce)
Switching Frequency 20 cycles per minute maximum
Protection None. External snubbers may be applied if necessary
Relay Contact Life Refer to Load Current Limitations: MDL916 below
Diagnostic Information Field side terminal block presence detection reported to CPU (RX3i only)

The following table shows the number of outputs that can be on at the same time under the maximum load
of 4 Amps per point.
25
When this module is used with DC power supply IC695PSD040 or PSD140, special precautions should be taken because dropouts in
the source voltage will be seen by this module and may cause relay dropouts.

IC694MDL916 with 4A
60
loads
59
58
Ambient (Degrees C)
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Channels

7.17.1.2 Load Current Limitations: MDL916
Operating Maximum Current for Load Type Typical Contact Life

Voltage Resistive Lamp or Solenoid26 (Number of Operations)
5 to 240 Vac 4 Amps 2 Amps 200,000
5 to 240 Vac 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 1,000,000
5 to 240 Vac 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 700,000
5 to 24Vdc – 3 Amps 100,000
5 to 24Vdc 4 Amps 2 Amps 200,000
5 to 24Vdc 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 700,000
5 to 24Vdc 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 1,000,000
7.17.1.3 Suppression Circuits: MDL916

Relay contact life, when switching inductive loads, will approach resistive load contact life if suppression
circuits are used. Examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads are displayed in the following
figure. The 1A, 200V diode shown in the DC load typical suppression example is an industry standard
1N4935. The resistor and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components, available from
most electronics distributors.
MDL916 DC Loads AC Loads

MDL916
1A, 200V .022µF 100 Ohms
600V 1/2W
Load Coil Load Coil
~
DC Supply AC Source
Figure 223: Suppression of DC Loads MDL916 Figure 224: Suppression of AC Loads MDL916
26
Assumes a 7ms L/R time constant (DC inductive load) or Cos φ > 0.4 (AC inductive load).

7.17.1.4 Setting the Output Defaults: MDL916

The DIP switch at the rear of the module determines how the outputs will operate if the CPU is set to Stop
Mode or loses communications with the module. The Outputs Default Mode selection made with the DIP
switch must match the selection made for this feature in the software configuration of this module. If the
two do not match, a warning message is displayed in the fault table.
the module. Only the upper switch is used.
With the Outputs Default Mode switch in the right (open) position, the outputs will turn off whenever
communication with the CPU is lost.
When the switch is in the left position, the outputs

will hold their last programmed value whenever
Outputs Default mode DIP Switch communication with the CPU is lost. Backplane
Closed (left) = Hold Last State
Open (right) = Force Off
power must be present to Hold Last State.
Otherwise, the module will default outputs
Not Used regardless of the DIP switch setting.
Figure 225: DIP Switch Settings MDL916

The module can optionally use 16 input bits to report its status information to the RX3i CPU. To access this
data, the length must be changed from 0 to 16. The module status data has the following content:

Output 1, Normally-Open 1 19 Output 9, Normally-Open
Output 1 Return 2 20 Output 9 Return

No Connection 13 31 No Connection
No Connection 16 34 No Connection
1 Q1
Relay N. O.
Figure 226: Typical Relay Output Circuit MDL916

7.18 Output Module, Isolated Relay, N.O., 4 Amp, 8-

Point: IC694MDL930
***********v The 4 Amp Isolated Relay Output module, IC694MDL930, provides eight
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 normally–open relay circuits for controlling output loads. The output
F switching capacity of each circuit is 4 Amps. Each output point is isolated
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 from the other points, and each point has a separate common power
output terminal. The relay outputs can control a wide range of output
devices, such as: motor starters, solenoids, and indicators.
IC694MDL930
The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate the field devices
Q1 connected to this module.
Q2
Q3

Q4
Module does not support insertion into or removal from an RX3i Universal
Backplane which is under power (see Hot Insertion and Removal Not
Q5
Supported, Section 2.6.4.2).
Q6
Q7
Q8

Rated Voltage 24 Vdc, 120/240 Vac (nominal - refer to the following table for exceptions)
Operating Voltage 5 to 30 Vdc
5 to 250 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Outputs per Module 8 isolated outputs
Isolation:
Field to Backplane and to 250 Vac continuous;
Maximum Load 4 Amps resistive maximum per output
2 Amps pilot duty per output

20 Amps maximum per module for UL installations

Maximum Load depends on the ambient temperature as displayed in Figure 228
Minimum Load 10mA
Maximum Inrush 5 Amps
On Response Time27 15ms maximum
Off Response Time27 15ms maximum
Power Consumption 6mA (all outputs on) from 5 Vdc bus on backplane
70mA (all outputs on) from relay 24Vdc bus on backplane

Total Module Load
Current (Amps)
32
24
16
8 8 Amps
55°C
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
27


24 to 120 Vac 4 Amps 2 Amps 150,000
24 to 120 Vac 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 500,000
24 to 120 Vac 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 1,000,000
240 Vac 4 Amps 2 Amps 50,000
240 Vac 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 500,000
240 Vac 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 200,000
24Vdc – 3 Amps 50,000
24Vdc 4 Amps 2 Amps 100,000
24Vdc 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 500,000
24Vdc 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 1,000,000
125Vdc 0.2 Amp 0.1 Amp 300,000
circuits are used. Examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads are displayed in the following
figure. The 1A, 200V diode shown in the DC load typical suppression example is an industry standard
1N4935. The resistor and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components, available from
most electronics distributors.
7.18.1.2.1 Load Suppression Examples for Output Module MDL930

MDL930 .022 100 Ohms
1A, 200V
600V 1/2W
2 2
Load Coil Load Coil

3
3
~
DC Supply AC Source
28
Assumes a 7ms time constant

1 No connection
1 NC
2 Output 1-1 2
3 Q1
3 Output 1-2 4
LED
5 Q2
4 Output 2-1
6
7 Q3
5 Output 2-2
8
6 Output 3-1 9 Q4
Relay N. O.
10 NC
7 Output 3-2 11 NC
12
8 Output 4-1 13 Q5
14
9 Output 4-2 15 Q6
16
18
20 NC
12 Output 5-1
13 Output 5-2 Figure 231: Field Wiring MDL930
14 Output 6-1
15 Output 6-2
16 Output 7-1
17 Output 7-2
18 Output 8-1
19 Output 8-2
20 No connection

7.19 Output Module, Isolated Relay, N.C. and Form

C, 8A, 8-Point: IC694MDL931
The 8 Amp Isolated Relay Output module, IC694MDL931, provides four
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 normally-closed and four Form C relay circuits for controlling output loads
F provided by the user. The output switching capacity of each circuit is 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Amps. Each output relay is isolated from the other relays, and each relay
has a separate common power output terminal. The relay outputs can
IC694MDL931 control a wide range of load devices, such as: motor starters, solenoids,
and indicators.
Q1
The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate the field devices.
Q2
Q3

Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

Rated Voltage 24 Vdc, 120/240 Vac, 50/60 Hz (nominal - refer to the following table for
exceptions)
Output Voltage Range 5 to 30 Vdc
5 to 250 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Outputs per Module 8 isolated outputs
Isolation:
Field to Backplane and to 250 Vac continuous;

Maximum Load 8 Amps resistive maximum per output
20 Amps maximum per module for UL installations
Maximum load depends on ambient temperature as shown.
Minimum Load 10mA
Output Leakage Current 1mA maximum at 250 Vac, (25°C (77°F))
110mA (all outputs on) from relay 24V bus on backplane
29


Total Module Load 4A per Point
Current (Amps)
32
6A per Point
8A per Point
24
16
35°C 45°C
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C



Voltage Resistive Lamp or Solenoid30 (Number of operations)
8 Amps 3 Amps 200,000
6 Amps 2.5 Amps 300,000

5 to 120 Vac
4 Amps 1.5 Amps 400,000
1 Amp 0.5 Amp 1,100,000
8 Amps 3 Amps 100,000
6 Amps 2.5 Amps 150,000

240 Vac
4 Amps 1.5 Amps 200,000
1 Amp 0.5 Amp 800,000
8 Amps 3 Amps 100,000
6 Amps 2.5 Amps 150,000

24Vdc
4 Amps 1.5 Amps 200,000
1 Amp 0.5 Amp 800,000
48Vdc 1.5 Amps – 100,000
100 Vdc 0.5 Amp – 100,000
125Vdc 0.38 Amp 0.12 Amp 100,000
150 Vdc 0.30 Amp 0.10 Amp 100,000
circuits are used. The examples below show typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads. The 1A, 200V
diode shown in the DC load typical suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4935. The resistor and
capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components.
30
For inductive loads

7.19.1.2.1 Load Suppression Examples for Output Module IC694MDL931

MDL931 .022 100 Ohms
1A, 200V
600V 1/2W
2 2
Load Coil Load Coil

3
3
~
DC Supply AC Source

1 Output 1 1 Q1 NC
2
2 Output 1 return 3 Q2 NC
LED
4
3 Output 2 Q3 NC
5
4 Output 2 return 6
7 Q4 NC
5 Output 3 Relay N. O. 8
9 Q5 NC
6 Output 3 return Relay N. C. 10
11 Q5 NO
7 Output 4 12 Q6 NC
LED
13
8 Output 4 return 14 Q6 NO
15 Q7 NC
9 Output 5 16
(if normally-closed relay) 17 Q7 NO
Relay N. O.
18 Q8 NC
10 Output 5 return 19
20 Q8 NO
11 Output 5
(if normally-open relay)
12 Output 6
(if normally-closed relay)
13 Output 6 return

14 Output 6
15 Output 7
16 Output 7 return
17 Output 7
18 Output 8
19 Output 8 return
20 Output 8

7.20 Output Module, Relay Output, N.O., 2 Amp,

The 2 Amp Relay Output module, IC694MDL940, provides sixteen
normally-open relay circuits for controlling output loads. The output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
switching capacity of each output is 2 Amps. The output points are in four
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 groups of four points each. Each group has a common power output
terminal. The relay outputs can control a wide range of load devices, such as:
motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the internal relay circuits
is provided by the +24Vdc bus on the backplane.
Q1 The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate field devices.

Q2
Q3 There are no fuses on this module. The red bands on the label show that
Q4 MDL940 is a high-voltage module.
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
Q10
Q11
Q12
Q13
Q14
Q15
Q16


Rated Voltage 24 Vdc, 120/240 Vac (nominal - refer to the following table for
exceptions)
5 to 250 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Outputs per Module 16 (four groups of four outputs each)
Isolation:
Field to Backplane and to Frame 250 Vac continuous;

Maximum Load 2 Amps pilot duty maximum per output
Minimum Load 10mA
Power Consumption, all outputs 7mA from 5Vdc bus on backplane

on
135mA from relay 24V bus on backplane
31


24 to 120 Vac 2 Amps 1 Amp 300,000
24 to 120 Vac 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 500,000
24 to 120 Vac 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 1,000,000
240 Vac 2 Amps 1 Amp 150,000
240 Vac 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 200,000
240 Vac 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 500,000
24Vdc – 2 Amps 100,000
24Vdc 2 Amps 1 Amp 300,000
24Vdc 1 Amp 0.5 Amp 500,000
24Vdc 0.1 Amp 0.05 Amp 1,000,000
125Vdc 0.2 Amp 0.1 Amp 300,000
circuits are used. The following figures are examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads. The
1A, 200V diode shown in the DC load suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4935. The resistor and
capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components.
7.20.1.1.1 Load Suppression Examples for Output Module MDL940

MDL940 .022 100 Ohms
1A, 200V
600V 1/2W
Relay
Relay
Output Output
Load Coil Load Coil
Comm Comm
~
DC Supply AC Source
32
Assumes a 7 ms time constant

1 Outputs 1 – 4 common (return) Other

Circuits 1
2 Q1
2 Output 1 3 Q2
LED 4 Q3
3 Output 2 Q4
5
4 Output 3 6
7 Q5
8 Q6
5 Output 4 Relay N. O.
9 Q7
6 Outputs 5 -8 common (return) 10 Q8

11
7 Output 5 12 Q9
13 Q10
8 Output 6 14 Q11
15 Q12
9 Output 7 16
17 Q13
10 Output 8 Q14
18
19 Q15
11 Outputs 9 - 12 common (return) Q16
20
12 Output 9
13 Output 10
14 Output 11
15 Output 12
16 Outputs 13 – 16 common (return)
17 Output 13
18 Output 14
19 Output 15
20 Output 16

Section 8: Discrete Mixed I/O Modules

This chapter describes the following discrete mixed input/output module for RX3i PACSystems:
Discrete Mixed I/O Module Description Catalog Number Section
High-Speed Counter Module 80kHz 12-Input 4-Output IC694APU300 8.1
Serial I/O Processor Module IC694APU305 8.2
High-Speed Counter Module 1.5MHz 8-Input 7-Output IC695HSC304 8.3
High-Speed Counter Module 1.5MHz 16-Input 14-Output IC695HSC308 8.3
Mixed I/O 24Vdc Input (8 points) N.O. Relay Output (8 points) IC694MDR390 8.4
Discrete Mixed I/O Modules 301

8.1 High-Speed Counter Module: IC694APU300

Two versions of the APU300 exist: Enhanced version IC694APU300-CA and
later (Figure 241) and Classic version IC694APU300-BA and earlier. All
classic features are supported by the enhanced version. Refer to High-Speed
Counter Modules for PACSystems* RX3i and Series 90*-30 User’s Manual,
GFK-0293D or later, for complete specifications and to Chapter 6 of that
manual for enhanced features.
The High-Speed Counter module, IC694APU300, provides direct processing
of rapid pulse signals up to 1MHz (Enhanced), 80kHz (Classic). The module
senses inputs, processes the input count information, and instantaneously
controls the outputs per each counter’s configuration without needing to
communicate with a CPU.
The High-Speed Counter uses 16 bits of discrete input memory (%I),
15 words of analog input memory (%AI), and 16 bits of discrete output
memory (%Q) in the CPU.
The High-Speed Counter can be configured to have:
▪ 4 identical, independent simple counters
▪ 2 identical, independent more complex counters
▪ 1 complex counter
▪ 2 simple counters with Clock Z input (Enhanced version only)
Additional module features include:
▪ 12 positive logic (source) inputs with input voltage range selection
of either 5 Vdc or 10 to 30 Vdc
▪ 4 positive logic (source) outputs
▪ Enhanced version supports both Differential and Single-Ended
Encoders. Classic version supports Single-Ended only.
▪ Counts per timebase register for each counter
▪ Internal module diagnostics
▪ A removable terminal board for field wiring
▪ LEDs to indicate the state of each input, each output and three
Figure 241: IC694APU300 status LEDs (enhanced version only). Classic version has two LEDs.
Inputs can be used as count signals, direction, disable, edge-sensitive
strobe, and preload inputs depending on the counter type selected by the
user. Outputs can be used to drive indicating lights, solenoids, relays, and
other devices.
The blue bands on the label indicate that the APU300 is a low-voltage
module. This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i system.
Power for the module is drawn from the backplane 5Vdc bus. Power sources for input and output devices
must be supplied by the user or by the +24 Vdc Isolated output of the power supply. The module also
provides a selectable threshold voltage to allow the inputs to respond to either 5Vdc signal levels or 10 to 30
Vdc signal levels.

IC694APU300 Revision CA & later supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane
which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1. Revision -BA and earlier do not.
upgrade kit.23
8.1.1 Counter Types: APU300

A counter type must be selected when the module is configured. In Enhanced mode, whenever differential
encoders are used, the number of available counters will be reduced (refer to High-Speed Counter Modules for
PACSystems* RX3i and Series 90*-30 User’s Manual, GFK-0293, Sections 7-8). The number of counters listed
below applies to single-ended applications. The choices are:
 Type A – selects four identical, independent simple counters.

 Type B – selects two identical, independent more complex counters.
 Type C – selects one complex counter.
 Type Z – selects two simple counters with Clock Z input (enhanced mode only).
8.1.1.1 Type A Configuration: APU300

When used in this basic configuration, the module has four identical programmable up or down counters.
Enhanced supports 32-bit or 16-bit counters; Classic supports 16-bit counters only. Each counter:
 Can be programmed to count either up or down.

 Has three inputs: a Preload input, a Count Pulse input, and a Strobe input.
 Has one output, with programmable on and off Output Presets.
8.1.1.2 Type B Configuration: APU300

In this configuration, the module has two identical bidirectional 32-bit counters.
 The count inputs can be configured to accept Up/Down, Pulse/Direction, or A Quad B signals.
 Each counter has two completely independent sets of Strobe inputs and Strobe registers.
 Each counter has two outputs; each output has programmable on/off Presets.
 Each counter has one Disable input that can be used to suspend counting.
8.1.1.3 Type C Configuration: APU300

The Type C configuration is suitable for applications requiring motion control, differential counting, or
homing capability.
In this configuration, the module has one 32-bit counter with four outputs.
 Each output has programmable on/off output presets, three strobe registers with strobe inputs, and
two Preload values with Preload inputs.

 Two sets of bidirectional counter inputs can be connected to operate in a differential fashion. Each
set of inputs can be configured for A Quad B, Up/Down, or Pulse/Direction operation.
 The module has a Home Position register for preloading the Accumulator to the Home Position
value.
8.1.1.4 Type Z Configuration (Enhanced Mode): APU300

Type Z is a simple counter that uses a pair of clock inputs to perform Up/Down. Pulse/Direction, or A Quad B
Counting. A special Clock Z input combines the functions of a Strobe input (copies the current count value to
a Strobe register), Disable input (optionally suspends counting), and Clear input (optionally resets the
Accumulator to zero). Each Type Z counter has four set-point values that can be used to control its outputs.
The Type Z counter has multiple modes of operation which may be selected by the user. Refer to High-Speed
Counter Modules for PACSystems* RX3i and Series 90*-30 User’s Manual, GFK-0293, Sections 6 & 7 for a full
description of the Type Z counter and enhanced mode configuration.
8.1.2 Status LEDs: APU300
8.1.2.1 Enhanced Version: APU300

8.1.2.1.1 Module Status LEDs
S1 (MODULE OK) Green The High-Speed Counter is powered up and has completed its internal
diagnostics.
Red The watchdog timer circuit has detected a module failure.
Off Module is not powered up correctly or internal diagnostics failed.
S2 (CONFIG) On A user configuration has been downloaded to the module.
Off A configuration has not been downloaded; the default configuration is in

effect.
S3 (FIELD On Output field power present

POWER)
Off Output field power not present
8.1.2.1.2 Input Status LEDs

A status LED is provided for each of the twelve input points.
1 -12 On Input is on
Off Input is off
8.1.2.1.3 Output Status LEDs

A status LED is provided for each of the four output points.

1-4 Green Output is on
Amber Output has overcurrent fault
Off Output is off
8.1.2.2 Classic Version: APU300

MODULE OK Green The High-Speed Counter is powered up and has completed its internal
diagnostics.
Off Module is not powered up correctly or internal diagnostics failed.
CONFIG On A user configuration has been downloaded to the module.
Off A configuration has not been downloaded; the default configuration is in

effect.
8.1.3 Specifications: APU300

IC694APU300 Classic IC694APU300 Enhanced
General
250 mA (1.25 W) from backplane 5Vdc 250 mA (1.25 W) from backplane 5Vdc
Power Consumption
bus bus
Powered by user supplied 5Vdc, or 10 Powered by user supplied 4.7Vdc to 40
Output Points
Vdc - 30 Vdc Vdc
Maximum Count
80 kHz 1 MHz (duty cycle 25% to 87%)
Rate
BOARD OK (S1), CONFIG OK (S2), Field
LEDs BOARD OK and CONFIG OK Power OK (S3), Input Status, Output
Status
Isolation
Field to Backplane
250 Vac continuous, 250 Vac continuous,
(optical) and to
1500 Vac for one minute 1500 Vac for one minute
frame ground
250 Vac continuous, 250 Vac continuous,
Group to Group
1500 Vac for one minute 1500 Vac for one minute
Inputs
Voltage Range 5 Vdc (TSEL jumpered to INCOM) 5 Vdc (TSEL jumpered to INCOM)
10 to 30 Vdc (TSEL open) 10 to 30 Vdc (TSEL open)
Number of Positive
12 (Single Ended) 12 (Single Ended) or 6 (Differential)
Logic Inputs
Input Thresholds
5 Vdc Range 10–30 Vdc Range 5 Vdc Range 10–30 Vdc Range
(I1 to I12)

Von 3.55 V min. 8.35 V min. 3.55 V min. 8.35 V min.

Ion 3.2 mA min. 3.2 mA min. 3.2 mA min. 3.2 mA min.
Voff 1.5 V max. 2.4 V max. 1.5 V max. 2.4 V max.
Ioff 0.8 mA max. 0.8 mA max. 0.8 mA max. 0.8 mA max.
Survivable Peak
± 500 V for 1μSec ± 500 V for 1μSec
Voltage
Transient Common
Mode Noise 1000 V/μSec minimum 1000 V/μSec minimum
Rejection
Input Impedance Refer to Figure 242 for V-I characteristics
Outputs
10 to 30 Vdc at 500 mA maximum
Voltage Range 4.7 to 40 Vdc at 1.5A maximum
4.75 to 6 Vdc at 20 mA maximum
Off State Leakage
10μA maximum per point 10μA maximum per point
Current
Output Voltage 0.5 V maximum at 500 mA
0.5 V maximum at 500 mA
Drop 1.5 V maximum at 1.5 A
Inrush current – 1.6 A without ESCP tripping
CMOS Load Drive
Yes Yes
Capability
Positive Logic
Four Four
Outputs
Outputs are short circuit protected by a
Outputs are protected for overcurrent
Output Protection
3A pico fuse common to all four outputs
(ESCP) with self-healing capability.
Outputs protected from reverse wiring
Reverse Polarity
None between OUTPWR and OUTCOM
Protection
terminals
8.1.3.1 Input Impedance: APU300
Figure 242: Input Impedance APU300

8.1.4 Field Wiring: APU300

Refer to High-Speed Counter Modules for PACSystems* RX3i and Series 90*-30 User’s Manual, GFK-0293D (or
later) Chapter 2 for detailed wiring information.
Shielded cable must be used for connecting to the High-Speed Counter module. The shield for the cable
must have a high frequency ground within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the module to meet the IEC 1000-4-4
levels specified in Appendix A. The cable length is limited to 30 meters.
CAUTION
Do not connect voltage in the 10 Vdc to 30 Vdc range to the module inputs when the 5Vdc input range (pins
13 to 15 jumpered) is selected. Doing so will damage the module.
TERMINALS FIELD WIRING
I1
1
I2
2
I3
3
4 I4
I5
5
I6
6 +
I7
7
8 I8
I9
9
CONNECT I10
JUMPER 10
FOR 11 I11
5V INPUT
RANGE I12
12
13
+
14
15
16 O1
17 O2
18 O3
19 O4
20
Figure 243: Field Wiring APU300
8.1.4.1 Input Characteristics: APU300

The High-Speed Counter uses single-ended positive logic (source) type inputs.
 Transducers with CMOS buffer outputs (74HC04 equivalent) can directly drive the High-Speed Counter
inputs using the 5Vdc input range.
 Transducers using open collector outputs must include a 470 pull-up resistor to 5Vdc to guarantee
compatibility with the High-Speed Counter inputs.
 Transducers using high voltage open collector (sink) type outputs must have a 1k pull-up resistor to
+12Vdc for compatibility with the High-Speed Counter 10 to 30 Vdc input range.

Note: Classic versions of the APU300 required that transducers using TTL totem pole outputs include a
470 pull-up resistor (to 5Vdc) to guarantee compatibility with the High-Speed Counter inputs.
The enhanced APU300 versions do not require a 470 pull-up resistor for such transducers.
8.1.4.2 Input Voltage Ranges: APU300

The default voltage range is 10 Vdc to 30 Vdc. To use this voltage range, leave the threshold selection
terminals (pins 13 and 15) unconnected.
To select the 5Vdc threshold, connect a jumper between two terminals on the detachable terminal board
connector.

8.1.4.3 Terminal Assignments for Each Counter Type (Classic Mode):

APU300
The following table shows which terminals to use for the Classic Mode counter type selected during module
configuration.
Use in Counter Type33

Signal
Terminal Pin Definition
Name
Type A Type B34 Type C35
1 I1 Positive Logic Input A1 A1 A1
2 I2 Positive Logic Input A2 B1 B1
3 I3 Positive Logic Input A3 A2 A2
4 I4 Positive Logic Input A4 B2 B2
5 I5 Positive Logic Input PRELD1 PRELD1 PRELD1.1
6 I6 Positive Logic Input PRELD2 PRELD2 PRELD1.2
7 I7 Positive Logic Input PRELD3 DISAB1 DISAB1
8 I8 Positive Logic Input PRELD4 DISAB2 HOME
9 I9 Positive Logic Input STRB1 STRB1.1 STRB1.1
12 I12 Positive Logic Input STRB4 STRB2.2 MARKER
Common for positive logic

13 INCOM INCOM INCOM INCOM
inputs
OUTPWR36
14 Power for positive logic outputs OUTPWR OUTPWR OUTPWR
DC+
33
Notation: Inputs and outputs identified by two numbers separated by a decimal point (x.y) indicate the counter number (x) to the left
of the decimal point and the counter element (y) number on the right. For example, STRB1.2 indicates Counter 1, Strobe 2 input.
34
Type B, Type Z Counters:
A1, B1 are the A and B inputs for counter 1.
A2, B2 are the A and B inputs for counter 2 (classic notation).
A3, B3 are the A and B inputs for counter 3 (enhanced notation).
35
Type C Counter:
A1, B1 are the A and B count inputs for (+) loop
A2, B2 are the A and B count inputs for (–) loop
36
OUTPWR does not source power for user loads. Output power must be supplied from an external supply.

Threshold select, 5V or 10 to
15 TSEL TSEL TSEL TSEL
30V
16 O1 Positive Logic Output OUT1 OUT1.1 OUT1.1
OUTCOM Common for positive logic

20 OUTCOM OUTCOM OUTCOM
DC- outputs

8.1.4.4 Terminal Assignments for Each Counter Type (Enhanced

Mode): APU300
The following table lists terminal block pin assignments based on the counter type combinations and input
mode settings. Footnotes appear on the previous page.
Input C1 C2 C3 C4 I1 I2 I3 I4 I533 I633 I733 I833 I933 I1033 I1133 I1233
Single
A A A A A1 A2 A3 A4 PRELD1 PRELD2 PRELD3 PRELD4 STRB1 STRB2 STRB3 STRB4
Ended
Single PRELD1. DISAB1. PRELD3. DISAB3.

B34 - B34 - A1 B1 A3 B3 STRB1.1 STRB1.2 STRB3.1 STRB3.2
Ended 1 1 1 1
Single PRELD1. PRELD1. MARKE

C35 - - - A1 B1 A2 B2 DISAB1 HOME STRB1.1 STRB1.2 STRB1.3
Ended 1 2 R
Single PRELD1. PRELD2. PRELD3. DISAB3.

A A B34 - A1 A2 A3 B3 STRB1.1 STRB2.1 STRB3.1 STRB3.2
Ended 1 1 1 1
Single PRELD1. PRELD2.

A A Z34 - A1 A2 A3 B3 ‡
‡ STRB1.1 STRB2.1 Z3.1 ‡
Ended 1 1
Single PRELD1. DISAB1. PRELD3. PRELD4.

B34 - A A A1 B1 A3 A4 STRB1.1 STRB1.2 STRB3.1 STRB4.1
Ended 1 1 1 1
Single PRELD1. DISAB1.

B34 - Z34 - A1 B1 A3 B3 ‡ ‡ STRB1.1 STRB1.2 Z3.1 ‡
Ended 1 1
Single PRELD3. PRELD4.

Z34 - A A A1 B1 A3 A4 ‡ ‡ Z1.1 ‡ STRB3.1 STRB4.1
Ended 1 1
Single PRELD3. DISAB3.

Z34 - B34 - A1 B1 A3 B3 ‡ ‡ Z1.1 ‡ STRB3.1 STRB3.2
Ended 1 1
Single
Z34 - Z34 - A1 B1 A3 B3 ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ Z1.1 ‡ Z3.1 ‡
Ended
PRELD1.1 PRELD3.1 STRB1.1 STRB3.1

Differential A - A - A1+ A1- A3+ A3- PRELD1.1- PRELD3.1- STRB1.1- STRB3.1-
+ + + +
STRB1.1 STRB1.2
Differential B34 - - - A1+ A1- B1+ B1- PRELD1+ PRELD1- DISAB1+ DISAB1- STRB1.1- STRB1.2-
+ +
Differential Z34 - - - A1+ A1- B1+ B1- ‡ ‡ ‡ ‡ Z1+ Z1- ‡ ‡
8.1.5 ESCP Outputs with 1.5 Amps per Point Minimum
‡
No connection.

The Enhanced APU300 modules support ESCP (Electronic Short Circuit Protection) for all four outputs. The
ESCP fault will be detected if the output channel is shorted to OUTCOM. The module will report ESCP fault
condition in the I/O status data – Bit 24 to Bit 27 corresponding to Output1 to Output4 respectively. Also,
the output LEDs O1 to O4 will be amber during the short circuit condition.
8.2 Serial I/O Processor Module: IC694APU305

The PACSystems RX3i I/O Processor module, IC694APU305, provides direct
1 2 processing of rapid pulse signals for industrial control applications such as:
3 4
CFG OK ▪ Fast response process control

▪ Velocity measurement
▪ Material handling, marking, and packaging
IC694APU305
The module is able to sense inputs, process the input information, and control
I1
the outputs without needing to communicate with a CPU.
I2
Features
I3
I4
▪ Up to 12 positive logic (source) inputs with input voltage range selection
I5 of either 5Vdc (TTL) or 10 to 30 Vdc (non-TTL).
I6 ▪ Up to eight positive logic (source) outputs: four outputs with 1 amp rating
I7 and four configurable outputs with 0.5-amp rating
I8 ▪ Outputs protected by replaceable fuse (one fuse for all outputs)
I9/ ▪ Counts per Timebase register for input rate measurement

Q5
I10/ ▪ Total Counts register accumulates total counts received by module
Q6
I11? ▪ Four Strobe data registers for input position capture
Q8
I12/ ▪ Two Timer data registers for indicating input pulse length or input spacing
Q8 in milliseconds
Q1
Q2
▪ Thirty-two range comparators (outputs returned in %I and %AI data)
Q3
▪ Internal module diagnostics
Q4
Figure 244: IC694APU305
Inputs can be used as count signals or edge-sensitive strobe signals. Outputs can be used to drive indicating
lights, solenoids, relays, and other devices.

Power to operate the logic circuitry of the module is obtained from the 5Vdc bus on the backplane. +24Vdc
power sources for the input and output devices must be supplied (80mA max).
The I/O Processor module provides a configurable threshold voltage to allow the inputs to respond to either
a 5Vdc signal level or a 10 to 30 Vdc signal level.
Six green LEDs indicate the operating status of the module, the status of configuration parameters, and the
state of hardware outputs 1 through 4.
8.2.1 Specifications: APU305

Power Supply Voltage 5Vdc from backplane
Power Supply Current 360mA + (10mA x number of ON faceplate outputs)
Field I/O to logic isolation Peak (1 second): 1500 V
Steady State: 30 Vac/Vdc
Maximum Number of modules per RX3i No limit
system
Input Specifications
Input type Positive Logic, optically isolated. Note: Input Common is
internally connected to Output Common
Input Circuit Power Supplied by module using DC/DC converter
Encoder Power Supplied by user (5V or 10–30 Vdc). (Inputs will operate
with Output Circuit power disconnected)
Input Impedance 4300 typical
Input Threshold 8.0v (non–TTL), 1.5V (TTL)
Input Hysteresis 250 mV typical
Maximum Input Voltage +30 Vdc
Input duty cycle limit If Input 1–12 voltages exceed 24.0 Vdc, de-rate total
input duty cycle from 100% at 40° C to 50% at 60° C
Input filter delays Absolute Encoder: 20 μs
AQUADB Encoder & Preload: 20 μs / 2 μs selectable
AQUADB Home Switch: 10 ms
AQUADB IN 6–8: 10 ms
Minimum Strobe Input Pulse Width 2ms (Minimum time between consecutive strobe inputs)
Strobe Register Resolution 1ms (Maximum time from when strobe input is asserted
until the strobe register value is updated)
Maximum Count Rate 30 kHz (Absolute Encoder)
200 kHz (A Quad B Encoder)
Input Cable Shielded cable recommended, Maximum length: 30m
Output Specifications
Output type Positive Logic, optically isolated
Maximum Supply Voltage 30.0 Vdc

Continuous Output Current (10–30 Vdc 1.0 A (each output 1–4)

supply) 0.5 A (each output 5–8)
Total Continuous Output Current at 40° C 4.0 A (total of outputs 1–8)
Output 1–4 derating above 40° C De-rate total Output 1–4 current to 2.0A at 60° C
Output 5–8 derating above 40° C De-rate total Output 5–8 current to 0.5A at 60° C
Output current using 5Vdc supply 20 mA typical with 5.0 Vdc supply
2 mA minimum with 4.9Vdc supply
Inductive Load Clamp Voltage –8.0 V typical (outputs 1–4)
–1.0 V typical (outputs 5–8)
OFF state leakage current 10 mA (each output)
Output Fuse 5 A (5x20mm replaceable) common to all outputs
Output Response Time 500 μs typical
8.2.2 Field Wiring: APU305
1 IN1 The I/O Processor Module has a removable terminal strip for connection to
2 IN2 field devices.
3 IN3
4 IN4
CAUTION
5 IN5
6 IN6 Do not apply loads greater than 0.5 Amp to the OUT5
7 IN7 through OUT8 outputs (terminals 9 through 12), or 1.0
8 IN8 Amp to OUT1 through OUT4 (terminals 16 through 19).
y
9 IN9/OUT5
y
V Doing so may damage the module.
10 IN10/OUT6
11 IN11/OUT7
Notes
12 IN12/OUT8
13 INCOM
14
▪ Pin 13 (Input Common) and pin 20 (Output Common) are internally
I connected together in the IOP module.
N 15 SHIELD V
T
E 16 OUT1 ▪ All 12 I/O Processor inputs are positive logic (source) type.
R 17
N
OUT2 ▪ Transducers using TTL open collector outputs must include a 2000
A 18 OUT3
L
(maximum) pull-up resistor (to 5V) to guarantee compatibility with
19 OUT4
the inputs.
20 OUTCOM
▪ Transducers using high voltage open collector (sink) type outputs
Figure 245: Field Wiring must have a 1k (maximum) pull-up resistor to +12V for compatibility
APU305 with the 10 to 30 volt input range.
8.2.2.1 Typical Connections: APU305

Terminals Field Wiring
IN1 d0
1 10 Bit
IN2 d1 Gray Code
2
IN3 d2 Absolute
3 Encoder
IN4 d3
4
IN5 d4
5
IN6 d5
6
IN7 d6
7
IN8 d7
8
IN9/OUT5 d8
9
IN10/OUT6 d9
10
Internal
IN11/OUT7
11 Load
Connection IN12/OUT8
12 Load
INCOM 0V
13
OUTPWR PWR
14
SHIELD
15
OUT1
16 Load
OUT2
17 Load External
OUT3 24V Power
18 Load
Supply
OUT4 Load
19
OUTCOM
20
Figure 246: Typical Connections APU305
8.2.3 Configuration: APU305
8.2.3.1 Settings Tab: APU305

Settings Description
Reference Addresses 32 discrete inputs (%I),
and Lengths 15 words of analog inputs (%AI),
32 discrete outputs (%Q), and
6 words of analog outputs (%AQ).
Input Threshold Selects the Input voltage level to be used. If 5Vdc inputs are used, select TTL,
otherwise select Non-TTL (for 10–30 Vdc inputs). Default: Non-TTL
In Timer #1 Mode Selects the inputs that control the starting and stopping of Timer 1. The resulting
time recorded for Timer 1 is reported in the eleventh %AI word. IN10 causes
Timer 1 to report the elapsed time (in ms) from the configured edge of input 10
to the other edge of input 10. IN09-10 causes Timer 1 to report the elapsed time
(in ms) from the configured edge of input 10 to the configured edge of input 9.
Default: IN10
In Timer #2 Mode Selects the inputs that control the starting and stopping of Timer 2. The resulting
time recorded for Timer 2 is reported in the twelfth %AI word. IN12 causes Timer
2 to report the elapsed time (in ms) from the configured edge of input 12 to the
other edge of input 12. IN11-12 causes Timer 2 to report the elapsed time (in ms)
from the configured edge of input 12 to the configured edge of input 11. Default:
IN12

Timebase The timebase for the Counts per Timebase return data (second %AI word). The
(ms) default is 1000ms (1 second) resulting in Counts per Timebase return data that
indicates input counts per second.
Strobe1 Edge The strobe 1 (Input 9) trigger edge: positive (rising) or negative (falling).
Strobe1 Enable Selects whether strobe 1 (Input 9) is Always enabled (default selection) or is only
enabled when preset output 5 is On (Rcomp-05 selection).
Output 5 Selects whether point 9 is output or an input. Disabled (default) defines the point
as Input #9. Enabled defines it as output #5.
Output 6 Selects whether point 10 is an output or an input. Disabled (default) defines the
point as Input #10. Enabled defines it as output #6.
Output 7 Selects whether point 11 is an output or an input. Disabled (default) defines the
point as Input 11. Enabled defines it as output #7.
Output 8 Selects whether point 12 is to be used for an output or an input. Disabled
(default) defines the point as Input #12. Enabled defines it as output #8.
Outputs Default The state outputs will assume if the output mode configured for the CPU is set to
Outputs Disabled or the CPU is no longer available. Continue (default) indicates
that outputs continue to operate under control of the input counts to the I/O
Processor. Force Off causes the outputs to be forced to off Hold Last State causes
the I/O Processor to retain the last state of the outputs.
Function ABS-256 (default): Encoder 8-bit parallel gray code input (for 0–255 counts)
ABS-360: Encoder 9-bit parallel (excess 76 gray code for 0–359 count rollover)
ABS-512: Encoder 9-bit parallel gray code (for 0–511 counts)
If ABS-360 or 512 is selected, Input 9 is not available for a strobe Input and
Output 5 is unavailable.
ABS-1024: Encoder 10-bit parallel gray code (for 0–1023 counts)
If ABS-1024 is selected, Inputs 9 and 10 are not available for strobe Inputs and
Outputs 5 and 6 are unavailable.
AQUADB: Encoder AQUADB input selection
Encoder Direction Changes the count direction (up or down) without reversing the Absolute
Encoder direction of rotation. If Normal (default) is selected, increasing the count
input causes the IOP to register up counts and decreasing the count input causes
the IOP to register down counts. The Reverse selection produces the opposite
effect.

Position Offset Adjusts the count input with an offset value to compensate for a rotational offset
error in the Encoder coupling. Enter any required count value within the count
range. Default: 0
8.2.3.2 A Quad B Encoder Parameters: APU305

Input Filter The Input filter range for the AQUADB Count inputs, the Marker input, and the Preload
input. If the maximum count input rate is < 25 kHz, use the 20µs default selection,
otherwise use the 2µs selection. Default: 20µs.
Max Counts The count range for the internal counter registering the AQUADB input counts. It counts
from 0 to this maximum value and then rolls over to 0. The range for this parameter is
10 to 64,999 counts. Default: 255
Preload The initializing count value to be set into the input counter when the Preload command is
Position received by the I/O Processor. The Preload command can be from either the Preload input
or the %Q bit command. Range: 0 to maximum counts
Home The initializing count value to be set into the input counter when the Marker input is
Position received by the I/O Processor when executing the Home cycle. Range: 0 to maximum
counts
8.2.3.3 ABS or AQUADB Encoder Parameters: APU305

These parameters are repeated for each output.
Mode The type of pulse generated by the range comparator output. Preset (the default) causes
the output to be On (or Off) continuously from one preset point to the other. Timer causes
timed pulses to be produced at the preset points defined by Timer 1 and Timer 2.
ON Preset The count input value that causes the output to turn On. Can be any value in the count
range. Default: Maximum encoder value for Absolute Encoders, 255 for AQUADB mode
OFF Preset The count input value that causes the output to turn Off. Can be any value in the count
range. Default: 0
Timer# 1 Effective only when the output mode is Timer. The length of the pulse (in ms) produced by
(ms) the output when the input count reaches the On preset value.
0 specifies no output pulse at the On preset point. Default: 0
Timer #2 Effective only when the output mode is Timer. The length of the pulse (in ms) produced by
(ms) the output when the input count reaches the Off preset value.
0 specifies no output pulse at the Off preset point. Default: 0
8.2.4 Module Data: APU305

Each CPU sweep, the I/O Processor Module automatically exchanges the following status and command
data, with the CPU:
▪ Status Bits: 32 bits of %I data

▪ Status Words: 15 words of %AI data
▪ Discrete Commands: 32 bits of %Q data
▪ Immediate Command Data: 6 words of %AQ data
8.2.4.1 %I Status Bits: APU305

The Starting Address of the Status Bits is selected during configuration. The following table lists bit offsets
from the Starting Address.
Offset Description Offset Description
00 Range Comparator 1 status 16 Input 9 status
04 Range Comparator 5 status 20 Strobe 1 status (Input 9 latch)
08 Range Comparator 9 status 24 Home Found37
09 Range Comparator 10 status 25 Preload Latch status37
10 Range Comparator 11 status 26 Home Switch Input (IN5) status37
11 Range Comparator 12 status 27 IN6 status37
14 Range Comparator 15 status 30 Module Ready
15 Range Comparator 16 status 31 Error
37
Applies to AQUADB function only.


8.2.4.1.1 %I Status Bit Descriptions: APU305

Range The ON/OFF state for range comparator outputs 1-8. If the Output Mode = Preset,
Comparator 1-8 the state of the status bit is defined by the ON/OFF presets. If the Output Mode =
Status Timer, the status bit will be on after each preset point is passed for the length of time
designated by Timer 1 or Timer 2. These bits always indicate the output state for
range comparators 1-8, even if the corresponding hardware output is disabled (and
Terminal Points 9-12 are used as Inputs).
Range The ON/OFF state for range comparator outputs 9-16 based solely on the ON & OFF
Comparator 9-16 presets defined for each output.
Status
Input 9-12 Status The present on/off input status for Inputs 9-12. State changes in these inputs
produce strobe inputs 1-4 according to the configured strobe edge (input 9 = strobe
1, input 10 = strobe 2, etc.).
Strobe 1-4 status Indicates that strobe data has been captured by Inputs 9-12, respectively. Once
(Input 9-12 latch) acknowledged, the corresponding %Q command (Reset Strobe) should be sent to
clear the strobe status for future strobe captures. Following strobes will be locked out
until this flag is cleared.
Home Found Indicates that the Home marker, after a Home command sequence, has been
(AQUADB only) recognized and the AQUADB Input Counter has been set to the Home preload value.
Preload Latch Indicates that the AQUADB input counter has been preloaded by a Preload Input.
Status (AQUADB When acknowledged, this status indication should be cleared (by the Reset Preload
only) Latch %Q bit). This latch locks out the effect of the Preload Input, it will not be effective
again until this bit is cleared. This latch does not apply to the %Q preload command bit.
Home Switch The status of the Home switch input. When this switch is closed during the Home
Input (AQUADB cycle, the next encoder marker encountered will preload the counter with the
only) configured Home value and set the Home Found %I indication. If a Home Switch is
not used, this %I bit can be used as a general-purpose input reporting the status of
faceplate Input 5.
IN6, IN7, IN8 The on/off status of Inputs 6, 7, & 8.

(AQUADB only)
Module Ready Power-up tests have all completed successfully and the module is ready for
operation.
Error An error condition has been detected by the module. The error code is reported in
the first %AI word. If the error was caused by a bad data command, the data has been
ignored. Once acknowledged by the program, the %Q command (Clear error) must
be toggled to clear the error status.

8.2.4.2 %AI Data Words: APU305

The following %AI Data words are transferred automatically to the CPU each sweep. The Starting Address of
the Status Words is selected during configuration. The following table lists word offsets from the Starting
Address.
Offset Description
000 Module Status Code
001 Counts per timebase
002 Gray Code Encoder Data38
003 Binary Data
004–005 Total Counts
006 Strobe Data 1 (Input 9)
010 Start/Stop Timer 1 Data
011 Start/Stop Timer 1 Data
012 Range Comparator 17-32 status (16 bits)
013, 014 reserved
38
Not applicable for the AQUADB function selection.

8.2.4.2.1 %AI Data Word Descriptions: APU305

Module Status Code Indicates the Error identification code when an error has been detected. The
error identified is the first error encountered. The error condition must be
cleared before other errors will be reported.
Error Description
Code
0010 Encoder Position Offset out of range (ABS Encoder Function only)
xx11 ON Preset xx is out of range
xx12 OFF Preset xx is out of range
0015 Home Position out of range (AQUADB Function only)
0016 Preload Position out of range (AQUADB Function only)
001E AQUADB Input Quadrature error (AQUADB Function only)
001C Internal Home Command Sequence State Machine Error

(AQUADB function only)
001D Absolute Encoder Input Error (ABS Encoder Function Only)
Counts per Timebase Indicates the number of input counts received in the last time interval defined by
the Timebase configuration parameter. With the default Timebase (1000 ms),
this indicates counts per second.
Gray Code Encoder Indicates the Gray code value presently being received by the module inputs
Data from the Encoder parallel outputs (ABS Encoder only)
Binary Data The binary equivalent of the Gray code value being received by the module
inputs from the Encoder parallel outputs, or the input counter Binary count value
for the AQUADB selection.
Total Counts The total input counts received by the module. This total counts register can be
initialized (preloaded) by a %AQ data command from the CPU. It is initialized to 0
at power-up. For AQUADB operation, it is also initialized to 0 at the Home
position marker. In AQUADB mode, the Preload Input does not affect Total
Counts.
Strobe Data 1-4 The captured input binary data value recorded when the strobe input occurred.
Inputs 9-12 correspond to Strobe inputs 1-4, respectively.
Either input edge may be configured to trigger the strobe data capture.

Start/Stop Timer 1 The time (in ms) between the input edges of Input 10 (default) or the input
Data edges of Inputs 9-10 depending upon the configuration. To start the capture of
(ms) this timing data, the strobe latch for Input 10 must be cleared, and if the strobe 2
enable configuration is RCOMP–6, the output range comparator 6 must be on
when the Input 10 strobe occurs. If Input 9 is used to stop the time measurement
and the strobe 1 enable configuration is RCOMP–5, output range comparator 5
must be on (when strobe input occurs) before the timing will stop.
Start/Stop Timer 2 The time (in ms) between the input edges of Input 12 (default) or the input
Data edges of Inputs 11-12 depending upon the configuration. To start the capture of
(ms) this timing data the strobe latch for Input 12 must be cleared, and if the strobe 4
enable configuration is RCOMP–8, output range comparator 8 must be on when
the Input 12 strobe occurs.
If Input 11 is used to stop the time measurement and the strobe 3 enable
configuration is RCOMP–7, output range comparator 7 must be on (when strobe
input occurs) before the timing will stop.
Range Comparator Indicates the ON/OFF state for range comparator outputs 17-32 based solely on
17-32 status the ON and OFF presets defined for each output.
(16 bits)
8.2.4.3 %Q Control Bits: APU305

The following %Q Control Bits are transferred automatically to the CPU each sweep. The Starting Address of
the Control Bits is selected during configuration. The following table lists bit offsets from the Starting
Address.
Offset Description Offset Description
00 Enable Output 1 16 - 19 reserved
01 Enable Output 2
02 Enable Output 3
03 Enable Output 4
04 Enable Output 5 (only if cfg = enabled) 20 Reset Strobe 1 (Input 9 latch)

08 - 15 reserved 24 Home Command39
25 Reset Preload Latch39
26 Preload Command39
27 - 30 reserved
31 Clear Error
8.2.4.3.1 %Q Control Bit Descriptions: APU305

Enable Output Enables each hardware Output (ON = Enable). If the configuration for Outputs 5-8 is
1-8 DISABLED, these corresponding output bit commands have no effect.
Reset Strobe 1-4 Clears the respective strobe latch condition so the next strobe can be captured and
(Input 9-12 Latch) reported via the corresponding %I bits. If this %Q bit is held ON, the %I status bit will
stay OFF and every strobe input pulse will cause new strobe data to be captured in
the associated %AI strobe register.
Home Command Initiates the Home command sequence. When the Home Marker Input is recognized,
(AQUADB only) the input counter will be preloaded with the configured home value, and the Home
Found %I indication will be set.
Reset Preload Clears the Preload Latch status after it has been set by the Preload switch input. If this
Latch command is left on, it will allow all Preload switch inputs to be effective.
(AQUADB only)
Preload Preloads the input counter with the configured preload value. The Preload Latch
Command status %I indication will not be set by this command since it only applies to the
(AQUADB only) Preload faceplate input.
Clear Error Toggling this command ON clears the module status error condition reported by the
%I Error bit and the %AI module status word and thus allows another error condition
to be reported.
39
Applies to AQUADB function only.

8.2.4.4 %AQ Immediate Commands: APU305

Six %AQ words are sent automatically from the CPU to the I/O Processor Module during each sweep. These
words can be used to transfer immediate command data to the module for temporarily altering
configuration parameters or to initialize counter data. Configuration parameter changes made in this
manner do not affect the module configuration data (stored in the CPU) which will again become effective if
the module is power cycled.
Each immediate command requires three sequential %AQ words. Two immediate commands are always sent
during each PLC sweep. The first word of each command set contains the identifying command number and
the other two words contain the data. The actual address of each command word depends on the starting
address configured for the %AQ references.
Even though the commands are sent each sweep, the module will act on a command only if the command
has changed since the last sweep. Whenever any of the three-word data changes, the module accepts the
data as a new command and responds accordingly.
When these commands are sent, all three %AQ words should be loaded on the same PLC sweep. If they
cannot be loaded on the same sweep (for example, when entering data from the programmer), the steps
below must be followed to ensure that no wrong or incomplete data is momentarily sent.
Step 1) Set Word 1 to Null Command (0000).
Step 2) Set correct data in Words 2 and 3.
Step 3) Set command in Word 1.
The following immediate commands may be sent by %AQ data to the I/O Processor:
Data Command # (hex)

Command
Word 3 Word 2 Word 1
Null (not used) (not used) 0000
Load Home Position (AQUADB)40 (not used) Home Position 0101
Load Preload Position (AQUADB)40 (not used) Preload Position 0102
Load Timebase (not used) Timebase (ms) 0106
Load Encoder Position Offset41 (not used) Offset 0107
Load Total Counts (not used) Counts 0109
Load ON/OFF Preset Pairs 1-32 OFF preset ON preset 0140 - 015F
40
AQUADB function only.
41
ABS Encoder function only.

Load Output Timer 1.1-8.1 (not used) Time (ms) 01C0 - 01C7
Load Output Timer 1.2-8.2 (not used) Time (ms) 01D0 - 01D7

8.2.4.4.1 %AQ Immediate Command Descriptions: APU305

Null The default %AQ Immediate command. Since the %AQ words are transferred each
PLC sweep, you should always enter the Null command to avoid inadvertent
execution of another immediate command.
Load Home The Home reference position value that will be preloaded into the Input counter at
Position the marker location after a Home command.
(AQUADB)
Load Preload The position value that will be preloaded into the Input Counter when a Preload
Position Switch Input is recognized or the %Q Preload command is set.
(AQUADB)
Load Timebase The timebase to be used for determining the Counts per Timebase value returned in
the second %AI word assigned to the module.
Load Encoder The Encoder offset value. The Input Count Value is shifted relative to the Encoder
Position Offset Input by this amount as follows:
(ABS Encoder Input Count Value = Encoder Input - Offset
Function only)
Load Total Counts The Total Count value reported in the fifth and sixth %AI words assigned to the
module
Load ON/Off The ON and OFF preset value for the specified range comparator output.
Preset Pairs 1-32
Load Output The Output Timer 1 value for the specified range comparator output 1-8.
Timer 1.1-8.1
Load Output The Output Timer 2 value for the specified range comparator output 1-8.
Timer 1.2-8.2
8.3 High-Speed Counter Modules: IC695HSC304,

IC695HSC308
For detailed information about both RX3i High-Speed Counter modules, please refer to the RX3i High-Speed
Counters Manual, GFK-2441.

PACSystems RX3i High-Speed Counter modules provide direct

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
processing of rapid pulse signals up to 1.5 MHz for industrial control S1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
applications such as: S2 __ __ __ __ __ __ __
1 __
__ 2 __
3 __
4 __
5 __6 __7
TB __ __ __ __ __ __ __
8 __
__ 9 10
__ 11
__ 12
__ 13
__ 14
__
▪ Turbine flowmeter
▪ Meter proving
IC695HSC308
▪ Velocity measurement
▪ Material handling I1
I2
▪ Motion control I3
I4
▪ Process control I5
I6
I7
These modules can sense inputs, process input count information, and I8
control outputs without CPU intervention. I9
I10
I11
High-Speed Counter module IC695HSC304 provides: 8 high-speed I12
I13
inputs, 7 high-speed outputs, and 1 to 4 counters. I14
I15
I16
High-Speed Counter module IC695HSC308 provides: 16 high-speed Q1
Q2
inputs, 14 high-speed outputs, and 1 to 8 counters. Q3
Q4
Q5
Standard counter types A, B, C, D, E, Z, and a user-defined type can be Q6
Q7
combined on a module. Q8
Q9
Q10
Module features include: Q11
Q12
Q13
▪ Terminal Block insertion or removal detection Q14
▪ Meets CE, UL/CUL 508 and 1604, and ATEX requirements
▪ Flash memory for future upgrades
▪ Module fault reporting
▪ Configurable I/O Interrupts Figure 247: IC695HSC308
▪ Select module parameters easily changed without re-

configuration.
These modules must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1. When the module is removed from the backplane or is power-
cycled, it stops counting and accumulated counts are lost.
High-Speed Counter modules can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style
(IC694TBB132), Spring-style (IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring-style (IC694TBS132)) Terminal Block (Refer
to Chapter 17). Extended terminal blocks provide the extra shroud depth needed for shielded wiring.
Terminal Blocks are ordered separately.
8.3.1 LEDs: HSC304 & HSC308

Individual green LEDs indicate the ON/OFF status of the external input and output points of this module.
These LEDs are green when the corresponding points are on. They are off when the corresponding points are
off. LED positions are illustrated below.
HSC308 HSC304
Module Status S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S1 External Input Points S1 __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Field Status S2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 __1 __2 __3 __4 __5 __6 __7
S2 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ S2
1
__ 2 __
__ 3 __
4 __
5 __
6 __
7
Terminal Block TB __ __ __ __ __ __ __
External Output Points TB
8
__ 9 10
__ __ 11
__ 12
__ 13
__ 14
__
Present
Figure 248: LED Layout HSC304 & HSC308
The Module Status (S1) LED indicates the status of the module. Solid green indicates that the module has
been configured. Blinking green indicates no configuration. Blinking amber/yellow indicates a fatal module
failure.
The Field Status (S2) LED is off if field power is not present. For module IC695HSC308, this LED is off unless
power is present on BOTH VA and VB. Solid green indicates that field power is present and that no output
circuit faults have been detected on circuits for which fault detection has been enabled in the configuration.
If S2 is amber/yellow, field power is present but circuit faults exist for one or more outputs.
The red/green Terminal Block LED is green when the removable terminal block of this module is locked in
place. It is red when the terminal block is not locked. The module also sends an Addition of Terminal Block or
Loss of Terminal Block message to the RX3i CPU to report the Terminal Block status.
During a firmware update, the S1, S2, and TB LEDs blink in a green/off pattern.
8.3.2 Specifications: HSC304 & HSC308
Number of Counter Channels IC695HSC304: 4 counters ( 8 inputs and 7 outputs)

IC695HSC308: 8 counters (16 inputs and 14 outputs)
High-Speed Counter Types Configurable as Types A, B, C, D, E, Z, and User-Defined.
Maximum Count Rates 1.5MHz with configurable input filtering, all counter types except
750kHz for Type C or User-Defined when using four counter outputs. (40
MHz internal oversampling). For A-Quad B count mode, 1.5MHz is the
maximum overall count rate.
Counting Range -2147483648 to 2147483647
Oscillator Accuracy Over ±100ppm
Operating Temperature
Range
Oscillator Drift Over Time ±5ppm maximum per year
Backplane Power IC695HSC304: 64 mA maximum at 5Vdc
Requirements 457 mA maximum at 3.3Vdc

IC695HSC308: 94 mA maximum at 5Vdc

561 mA maximum at 3.3Vdc
LEDs Module Status (S1), Field Status (S2), Terminal Block (TB), plus LEDs to
indicate state of each input and output point.
Input Voltages 5Vdc nominal: 4.7Vdc to 5.5Vdc
12 to 24Vdc nominal: 10 Vdc to 26.4Vdc
Peak input voltage 35Vdc
Input Impedance >5k
Output Voltage Range 4.7 to 40 Vdc, VA/VB input range
Output Current Rating 1.5A maximum per channel, 10.5A maximum per module
Thermal De-rating Number of output points on at the same time depends on ambient
temperature and current per point. For module IC695HSC308, thermal
de-rating also depends on distribution of output points on the module.
Refer to the charts that follow (Figure 249 & Figure 250)
Output Control Module outputs can be mapped to any number of counter setpoint
outputs. Each counter controls up to 4 setpoints with “turn on” and
“turn off” values. If multiple setpoint outputs are assigned to the same
external module output, the signals are logically ORed. External outputs
can optionally be configured for control through output scan bits from
PLC memory.
Surge Current per Point 4.5A < 450µS (Self-protected for overcurrent faults)
Minimum Load Current 0mA (up to 150mA to satisfy open load detection)
Maximum On State Voltage 0.35Vdc at 1.5A
Drop/Output
Maximum Off-State Leakage 200µA
Current/Output
Output Delay time Off to On: 125µS at 1.5A
On to Off: 85µS at 1.5A
Current Limit 4.5A < 450µS, 1.5A continuous
Reverse Polarity Protection Outputs protected from reverse wiring
Isolation Field to Backplane: 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Field to Frame Ground, Inputs to Outputs, Output Group A to Output
Group B: 50 Vac continuous; 500 Vac for 1 minute

8.3.2.1 Thermal Derating: HSC304 & HSC308 Outputs

The charts below show thermal deratings for modules IC695HSC304 and IC695HSC308 with maximum loads
of 0.75A on each output.
For example, if five outputs are used on module IC695HSC304, at 60°C the total current of all outputs would
be 3.75 Amps. If smaller loads are used on the outputs, then more output channels can be used at a given
temperature.
IC695HSC304 with 0.75A Output Loads

60
59
58
Ambient (Degrees C)
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Output Channels
Figure 249: Thermal Derating HSC304 Outputs
For module IC695HSC308, more output channels can be used at the same time at a given ambient
temperature when outputs are evenly distributed into two groups. If outputs are either set up as one output
group or unevenly distributed between two output groups, fewer output channels can be used for a given
ambient temperature.
For example, if eight outputs are used on module IC695HSC308, and they are equally distributed between
two output groups, the total current of all outputs at 60°C can be up to 6 Amps. At a given ambient
temperature, if smaller loads are used on the outputs, more output channels can be used.

IC695HSC308 with 0.75A Output Loads

60
Combined Groups,
Ambient (Degrees C) 55 with outputs evenly
distributed into two
50 output groups
45
40 Single Group of
35
outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Output Channels
Figure 250: Thermal Derating HSC308 Outputs
8.3.3 Field Wiring: HSC304 & HSC308

Field wiring connections are made to the removable terminal assembly. For installations that must meet
radiated emissions requirements as in EN 55022, high-speed connections must be made with
double-shielded cable. The outside braided shield should be terminated at the entrance to the enclosure and
not continue within the enclosure. Both ends of the shielded cable should be grounded. If low-frequency
(power line) ground loops are an issue with the application, directly ground one end of the shielded cable
and capacitively tie the other end of the shielded cable to ground with approximately 0.01µF capacitance.
8.3.3.1 Field Wiring: HSC304

Common 9 27 Common

Output 1 10 Field Wiring Terminals Field Wiring

28 Output 1
Input 1 Input 1
1 19
Input 2
Output 2 11 2 20 Input 2 29 Output 2
Input 3 Input 3
3 21
Output 3 12 Input 4 Input 4 30 Output 3
4 22
Input 5
+ 5 23
Input 5
+
Output 4 13 Input 6
6 24
Input 6 31 Output 4
- Input 7 Input 7 -
7 25
Output 5 14 Input 8
8 26
Input 8 32 Output 5
Common Common
9 27
Output 6 15 Output 1
10 28
Output 2 Output 2
11 29
12 30
Output 4 Output 4
13 31
DC+ for 17 Output 5
14 32
Output 5 35 DC+ for
Output 6 Output 6
Voltage 15 33 Voltage
Output 7 Output 7
Source A 16 34 Source A
VA
+ 17 35 + VA
DC- for 18 - 18 36 - 36 DC- for
Voltage Voltage
Source A Figure 251: Field Wiring HSC304 Source A
All outputs on module IC695HSC304 form a single output group. Each row of terminals (i.e.: 1-18, 19-36) is
internally connected. The dual connection points are for wiring convenience; the module cannot be wired for
differential inputs. For load distributions, Refer to Thermal Derating: HSC304 & HSC308 Outputs above.

8.3.3.2 Field Wiring: HSC308

All sixteen High-Speed Counter inputs on this module are positive logic (source) type.
Connection Terminal Field Wiring Terminals Field Wiring Terminal Connection

Input 1 Input 9
1 19
Input 1 1 Input 2
19 Input 9
2 20 Input 10
Input 3 Input 11
Input 2 2 3 21 20 Input 10
Input 4 Input 12
4 22
Input 3 3 Input 5 21 Input 11
+ 5 23
Input 13
+
Input 6 Input 14
Input 4 4 -
6 24 22 Input 12
Input 7 Input 15 -
7 25
Input 5 5 Input 8
8 26
Input 16 23 Input 13
Common Common
9 27
Input 6 6 Output 1
24 Input 14
Output 8
10 28
Output 2 Output 9
Input 7 7 11 29 25 Input 15
Output 3 Output 10
12 30
Input 8 8 Output 4 Output 11 26 Input 16
13 31
Output 5 Output 12
Common 9 14 32 27 Common
Output 6 Output 13
15 33
Output 1 10 Output 7 Output 14 28 Output 8
16 34
VA
Output 2 11 + 17 35 + VB 29 Output 9
- 18 36 -
Output 4 13 Figure 252: Field Wiring HSC308 31 Output 11
DC+ for 17 35 DC+ for

Voltage Voltage
Source A Source B
DC- for 18 36 DC- for

Voltage Voltage
Source A Source B
Inputs 1 to 16 form one isolated input group.

Outputs 1 to 7 and 8 to 14 form two isolated output groups, each with its own voltage connections.

Outputs should be evenly distributed between the two output groups, as discussed under Thermal Derating:
HSC304 & HSC308 Outputs above.
8.4 Mixed I/O Module: IC694MDR390

The 24Vdc 8-Input/8-N.O. Relay Output module provides eight isolated
input points with one common power input terminal, and eight isolated
normally open relay circuits in the same module.
The input circuits can have either positive or negative characteristics in that
they sink or source current to/from the input devices to/from the user
common. Input characteristics are compatible with a wide range of user-
supplied devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches. Current through an input results in a logic 1 in the input
status table (%I).
The relay output circuits are arranged in two groups of four circuits each.
Each group has a common power output terminal. The normally-open relay
circuits are used for controlling output loads provided by the user. The
output switching capacity of each output is 2 Amps. The relay outputs can
control a wide range of user-supplied load devices, such as motor starters,
solenoids, and indicators.
The top half of the outside left edge of the insert is color-coded blue to
indicate low-voltage circuits and the bottom half of the outside left edge is
color-coded red to indicate high-voltage circuits.
This module can be installed in any I/O slot in an RX3i PLC System.
Power for the internal relay circuits is provided by the +24Vdc bus on the
backplane. The user must supply the AC or DC power to operate field
devices. There are no fuses on this module.
Figure 253: IC694MDR390
8.4.1 LEDs: MDR390

LED indicators that provide the ON/OFF status of each point are visible through the lens at the top of the
module. The LEDs are arranged in two horizontal rows with eight green LEDs in each row. The top row
(labeled A1 through A8) indicates the states of the input points (1 through 8). The bottom row (labeled B1
through B8) indicates the states of the relay output points (1 through 8).

8.4.2 Specifications: MDR390
Inputs
Input Voltage range –30 to +32 Vdc
Inputs per Module 8 (one group of eight inputs)
Isolation 1500 Vrms between field and logic side
500 Vrms between inputs
On-State Voltage 15 to 32 Vdc
Off-State Voltage 0 to +5 Vdc
On-State Current 4 mA (minimum)
Off-State Current 1.5 mA (maximum)
On Response Time 7 ms typical
Off Response Time 7 ms typical
Outputs
Rated Voltage 24Vdc, 120/240 Vac
5 to 250 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Outputs per Module 8 (two groups of four outputs each)
Isolation 1500 Vrms between field and logic side
500 Vrms between groups
Maximum Load 2 Amps maximum per output
Minimum Load 10 mA
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Internal Power Consumption 80 mA (all I/O on) from +5Vdc backplane bus
70 mA (all outputs on) from relay +24Vdc backplane bus
Maximum load current is dependent on operating voltage as displayed in the following table.

8.4.2.1 Load Current Limitations: MDR390

Operating Voltage Maximum Current for Load Type Typical Operations
(number of operations)
Resistive Lamp or Solenoid 42
240 Vac, 120 Vac, 24 Vdc 2A 0.6A 200,000

240 Vac, 120 Vac, 24 Vdc 1A 0.3A 400,000
240 Vac, 120 Vac, 24 Vdc 0.5A 0.1A 800,000
circuits are used. The following figures are examples of typical suppression circuits for AC and DC loads. The
1A, 100V diode shown in the DC load typical suppression circuit is an industry standard 1N4934. The resistor
and capacitor shown for AC load suppression are standard components, available from most electronics
distributors.
MDR390 DC Loads AC Loads

MDR390
1A, 100V .022µF 100 Ohms
600V 1/2W
Load Coil Load Coil
~
DC Supply AC Source
Figure 254: Suppression of DC Loads MDR390 Figure 255: Suppression of AC Loads MDR390
8.4.3 Field Wiring: MDR390

The following figure provides wiring information for connecting user supplied input and load devices, and
power source(s) to the 24 Volt Input/Relay Output module:
42
For inductive loads.

Figure 256: Field Wiring Diagram MDR390

Section 9: Analog Input Modules

This chapter describes Analog Input modules for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
Analog Input Module Description Catalog Number Section
Analog Input Module 6-Channel Isolated Current/Voltage IC695ALG106 9.1
Analog Input Module 12-Channel Isolated Current/Voltage IC695ALG112 9.1
Analog Input Module 4-Channel Voltage IC694ALG220 9.3
Analog Input Module 4-Channel Current IC694ALG221 9.4
Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel Voltage IC694ALG222 9.5
Analog Input Module 16-Channel Current IC694ALG223 0
Advanced Diagnostics Analog Input Module: 16-Channel Voltage IC694ALG232 9.7
Advanced Diagnostics Analog Input Module: 16-Channel Current IC694ALG233 0
Analog Input Module 8-Channel Non-Isolated / 4-Channel Differential IC695ALG608 0
Analog Input Module 16-Channel Non-Isolated / 8-Channel Differential IC695ALG616 0
Analog Input Modules s 339

9.1 Analog Input Modules Isolated

Current/Voltage: IC695ALG106 and
IC695ALG112
Isolated Analog Current/Voltage Input module IC695ALG106 provides 6
MODULE OK isolated input channels.
FIELD STATUS Isolated Analog Current/Voltage Input module IC695ALG112 (Figure 257)
TB provides 12 input channels.
Analog input channels can be configured for these ranges:
IC695ALG112  Current: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, ±20mA
 Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc, ±5Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1 Vdc to 5Vdc
I1 These modules must be installed in an RX3i Universal Backplane. The
modules require the use of one front-mounted terminal block (ordered
I2
separately). Terminal blocks are available in the following different styles:
I3  Box-style (IC694TBB032),
I4
 Extended Box-style (IC694TBB132),
 Spring-style (IC694TBS032), and
I5
 Extended Spring-style (IC694TBS132).
16
Extended terminal blocks provide the extra shroud depth needed for shielded
wiring. Refer to Terminal Block Detection below for more information about
I7
terminal blocks.
18 Note: Terminal blocks for this module must be ordered separately.
19 9.1.1 Features
▪ Completely software-configurable, no module jumpers to set
I10
▪ On-board error-checking
I11 ▪ Open-circuit detection for all voltage and 4–20mA inputs44
I12
▪ Configurable scaling and offsets per channel
▪ High alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, low-low alarm detection and
reporting selectable per channel
Figure 257: IC695ALG112 ▪ Supports diagnostic point fault contacts in the logic program
▪ Positive and negative Rate of Change Alarms
▪ Configurable interrupts for channel alarms and faults
▪ Terminal Block insertion or removal detection
▪ Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal
Section 2.6.4.1.
Analog Input Modules 340

9.1.2 Specifications: ALG106 & ALG112

Input Ranges Current: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, ±20mA
Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc, ±5V, 0 to 5V, 1 to 5V
Power Requirements ALG106-EA or earlier: 230 mA maximum at 5.0V +5% / -2.5%,
(from the backplane) 320 mA maximum at 3.3V +5% / -3%
ALG112-EA or earlier: 490 mA maximum at 5.0V +5% / - 2.5%,
310 mA maximum at 3.3V +5% / - 3%
ALG106-FB or later: 230 mA maximum at 5.0V +5% / -2.5%,
300 mA maximum at 3.3V +5% / -3%
ALG112-FB or later: 490 mA maximum at 5.0V +5% / - 2.5%,
310 mA maximum at 3.3V +5% / - 3%
Power Dissipation within Module IC695ALG106: 2.97 watts maximum with 20mA inputs on all 6 channels
IC695ALG112: 4.89 watts maximum with 20mA inputs on all 12 channels
Thermal Derating No derating
Resolution 16-bit ADC converted to Floating-point or Integer
Input Data Format Configurable as floating-point IEEE 32-bit or 16-bit integer in a 32-bit field
Filter Options 8Hz, 12Hz, 16Hz, 40Hz, 250Hz, 1000Hz
Input Impedance >500 k voltage inputs
Current Input Resistance 250  ±1%
Open Circuit Detection time 1 second maximum
Over-voltage ±35Vdc continuous, maximum
Overcurrent ±35mA continuous, maximum
Normal Mode Noise Rejection At 50Hz At 60Hz
in dB 8 Hz filter 90 75
12 Hz filter 75 80
16 Hz filter 35 75
Common Mode Noise Rejection 100dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 8 Hz filter
100dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 12 Hz filter
Channel-Channel DC Crosstalk -70 dB minimum
Isolation Voltage
terminal block to I-coupler, transformer isolated
backplane/chassis 250 Vac continuous/1500 Vac for 1 minute
and channel to channel
Analog Step Change Response The analog input will settle to 0.1% of its final value within 1.7ms for a step
change on the input pins of the module. (Any digital filtering is additional to this
time.)
Digital Filtering Settling Time The settling time depends on the configured filter time.
(ms) 8 Hz Filter: 127 ms
12 Hz Filter: 67 ms
16 Hz Filter: 56 ms
40 Hz Filter: 21 ms
250 Hz Filter: 3.1 ms
1000 Hz Filter: 0 ms (No digital filtering, only the analog front-end filter)
Analog Module Scan Time The module provides a new sample every 1ms, regardless of the digital filtering
(ms) selected. Refer to the Digital Filtering Settling Time for the amount of time required
to have settled data.

Calibrated Accuracy43 0.1% of range at 25°C
0.2% of range over entire temperature span
Calibration Interval 12 months typical to meet accuracy specifications over time.

Offset can be applied as a periodic calibration adjustment.
43
In the presence of severe RF interference (IC 801-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded by 2.0% of range,

9.1.2.1 Indicator Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs): ALG106 & ALG112

MODULE OK — indicates the module’s ability to perform normal operations.
Green, ON Module OK and configured
or Green or Amber, slow flashing Module OK but not configured.
Green, quick flashing Error
Not OK: no backplane power present or module is

OFF
defective
FIELD STATUS — indicates the status of the module’s field connections.
No faults on any enabled channel, and Terminal Block is

Green, ON
present
Amber, ON Fault on at least one channel
OFF Terminal block not present or not fully seated
TB — indicates the status of the module’s connection to its terminal block.
Green, ON Terminal block present
Red, ON Terminal block not present or not fully seated
OFF No backplane power to module
9.1.3 Field Wiring: ALG106
Terminal Connection Connection Terminal
1 CH 1 Current In No Connection 19
2 CH 1 Voltage In No Connection 20
3 CH 1 RTN No Connection 21

Figure 258: Field Wiring ALG106

Terminal Connection Connection Terminal
1 CH 1 Current In CH 7 Current In 19
2 CH 1 Voltage In CH 7 Voltage In 20
3 CH 1 RTN CH 7 RTN 21

CH 10 Voltage
11 CH 4 Voltage In 29
In
CH 11 Voltage
In
CH 12 Voltage
In
Figure 259: Field Wiring: ALG112
There are no shield terminals on these modules. For shielding, tie cable shields to the ground bar along the
bottom of the backplane. M3 tapped holes are provided in the ground bar for this purpose.
9.1.4.1.1 Operating Note

These modules have separate enable/disable options for Diagnostic Reporting and Interrupts. Normally,
disabling a diagnostic (such as Low/High Alarm or Over/Under range) in the configuration means that its
diagnostic bit is never set. However, if interrupts are enabled for a condition and that interrupt occurs, the
diagnostic bit for that condition is also set during the same controller logic scan. The next PLC input scan
always clears this interrupt status bit back to 0, because Diagnostic Reporting has it disabled.
9.1.5 Configuration: ALG106 & ALG112
9.1.5.1 Module Parameters: ALG106 & ALG112

Parameter Default Description
Channel Value %AIxxxxx Starting address for the input data of the module. This
Reference Address defaults to the next available %AI block.
Channel Value ALG106: 12 The number of words used for the input data of the
Reference Length module.
ALG112: 24
Diagnostic Reference %Ixxxxx Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data.
Address This defaults to the next available %I block.
Diagnostic Reference ALG106: 0 or 192 The number of bit reference bits (0 or 192) for the Channel
Length Diagnostics data. Default is 0, which means mapping of
ALG112: 0 or 384 Channel Diagnostics is disabled.
Change this to 192 / 384 to enable Channel Diagnostics
mapping.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of the module. This
Reference Address defaults to the next available %I block.
Module Status 0 The number of bits (0 or 32) for the Module Status data.
Reference Length Default is 0, which means mapping of Module Status data is
disabled. Change this to 32 to enable Module Status data
mapping.
I/O Scan Set 1 Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set defined in
the CPU configuration. Determines how often the RX3i
polls the data
Inputs Default Force Off In the event of module failure or removal, this parameter
specifies the state of the Channel Value References.
Force Off = Channel Values clear to 0.
Hold Last State = Channel Values hold their last state.
Channel Faults w/o Disabled Enabled / Disabled: Controls whether channel faults and
Terminal Block configured alarm responses will be generated after a
Terminal Block removal. The default setting of Disabled
means channel faults and alarms are suppressed when the
Terminal Block is removed. This parameter does not affect
module faults including the Terminal Block loss/add fault
generation.
AD Filter Frequency 40Hz Can be set to 8, 12, 16, 40, 250, or 1000Hz.

9.1.5.2 Channel Parameters: ALG106 & ALG112

Range Type Disabled Current/Voltage, Disabled
Range ±10 Vdc ±10 Vdc, 0 to +10 Vdc, 0 to +5Vdc, ±5Vdc, 1Vdc to +5Vdc,
±20mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA
Channel Value 32-bit Floating 16-bit integer or 32-bit floating point

Format Point
High Scale Value The defaults for the Note: Scaling is disabled if both High Scale Eng. Units
(Eng Units) four Scaling equals High Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units
parameters depend equals Low Scale A/D Units.
on the configured
Range Type and Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.
Range. Each Range
Low Scale Value Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be
and Range Type
(Eng Units) lower than the high scaling value.
have a different set
High Scale Value of defaults. Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be
(A/D Units) greater than the low scaling value.
Low Scale Value Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type.
(A/D Units)
9.1.5.3 Input Scaling: ALG106 & ALG112

By default, the module converts a voltage or current input over the entire span of its configured Range into a
floating-point value for the CPU. For example, if the Range of a channel is 4 to 20mA, the module reports
channel input values from 4.000 to 20.000. By modifying one or more of the four channel scaling parameters
(Low/High Scale Value parameters) from their defaults, the scaled Engineering Unit range can be changed
for a specific application. Scaling can provide inputs to the PLC that are already converted to their physical
meaning, or convert input values into a range that is easier for the application to interpret. Scaling is always
linear and inverse scaling is possible. All alarm values apply to the scaled Engineering Units value, not to the
A/D input value.
The scaling parameters only set up the linear relationship between two sets of corresponding values. They
do not have to be the limits of the input.
Example 1
For a voltage input, 6.0 volts equals a speed of 20 feet per second, and 1.0 volt equals 0 feet per second. The
relationship in this range is linear. For this example, the input values should represent speed rather than
volts. The following channel configuration sets up this scaling:

High Scale Value (Eng Units) = 20.000 20.000
Low Scale Value (Eng Units) = 0.000

Feet per
High Scale Value (A/D Units) = 6.000 Second
(Engineering
Units)
Low Scale Value (A/D Units) = 1.000
0.000
1.000 Voltage (A/D Units) 6.000
Figure 260: Scaling Example ALG106 or ALG112
For this example, 1.0 Vdc to 6.0 Vdc is the normal voltage range, but the module will attempt to scale the
inputs for a voltage that lies outside the range. If a voltage of 10.0 Vdc were input to the channel, the module
would return a scaled channel value of 36.000. The application should use alarms or take other precautions
for scaled inputs that are outside the acceptable range or invalid.
Example 2
An existing application uses traditional analog to digital (A/D) count integer values. With scaling and the 16-
bit integer input option, a channel can be configured to report integer count values. In this example, the
application should interpret +10 Vdc as 32000 counts and -10 Vdc as -32000 counts. The following channel
configuration will scale a ±10 Vdc input channel to ±32000 counts.
Channel Value Format = 16-bit Integer 32,000
High Scale Value (Eng Units) = 32000.0

Counts
Low Scale Value (Eng Units) = -32000.0
High Scale Value (A/D Units) = 10.000
Low Scale Value (A/D Units) = -10.000

-32,000 +10,000
-10,000
Voltage

Channel Parameters (Continued)
Positive Rate of Change Limit 0.000 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
(Eng Units) trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. Default is disabled.
Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate” parameter.
Negative Rate of Change Limit 0.000 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
(Eng Units) trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. Default is disabled.
Rate of Change Sampling Rate 0.000 Time from 0 to 300 seconds to wait between comparisons.
Default of 0.0 is to check after every input sample.
9.1.5.4 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG106 & ALG112

When either of the Rate of Change parameters is configured to be non-zero, the module takes the difference
in Engineering Units between the previous rate of change sample and the current sample, then divides by
the elapsed time between samples.
If the Engineering Unit change from the previous sample to current sample is negative, the module
compares the rate change with the Negative Rate of Change parameter.
If the Engineering Unit change between samples is positive, the module compares the results in comparing
the rate change with the Positive Rate of Change parameter value.
In either case, if the rate of change is greater than the configured rate, a rate of change alarm occurs. The
actions taken by the module following the alarm depend on the enabled rate of change actions that have
been set up in the "Diagnostic Reporting Enable", "Fault Reporting Enable", and "Interrupts Enabled"
parameters.
The Rate of Change Sampling Rate parameter determines how frequently the module compares the Rate of
Change. If the Rate of Change Sampling Rate is 0 or any time period less than the channel update rate, the
module compares the Rate of Change for every input sample of the channel.

High-High Alarm The defaults for Alarms and Deadbands

(Eng Units) the High-High,
High, Low, and All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering Units.
Low-Low To use alarming, the A/D Alarm Mode must also be configured
High Alarm
parameters as enabled.
(Eng Units)
depend on the
High-High Alarm and Low-Low Alarm: When the configured
configured Range
Low Alarm value is reached or passed, a Low-Low Alarm or High-High Alarm
Type and Range.
(Eng Units) is triggered. The configured values must be lower than/higher
Each Range and
than the corresponding low/high alarm limits.
Range Type has a
Low-Low Alarm different set of High Alarm and Low Alarm: When the configured value is
(Eng Units) default values. reached or below (above), a Low (High) Alarm is triggered.
High-High Alarm High and Low Alarm Deadbands: A range in Engineering Units
Deadband above the alarm condition (low deadband) or below the alarm
(Eng Units) condition (high deadband) where the alarm status bit can
remain set even after the alarm condition goes away. For the
High Alarm alarm status to clear, the channel input must fall outside the
Deadband deadband range.
(Eng Units)
Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear to be outside
Low Alarm the Engineering Unit User Limits range. For example, if the
Deadband engineering unit range for a channel is -1000.0 to +1000.0 and a
(Eng Units) High Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm Deadband value
range is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband of 1100.0 or more
would put the High Alarm clear condition below –1000.0 units
making the alarm impossible to clear within the limits.
9.1.5.4.1 Using Alarming: ALG106 & ALG112

The Diagnostic Reporting Enable, Fault Reporting Enable, and Interrupt Enable configuration parameters can
be used to enable different types of responses for individual channel alarms. By default, all responses are
disabled on every channel. Any combination of alarm enables can be configured for each channel.
▪ If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the module reports channel alarms in reference memory at the
Diagnostic Reference address corresponding to that channel.
▪ If Fault Reporting is enabled, the module logs a fault log in the I/O Fault table for each occurrence of a
channel alarm.
▪ If Interrupts are enabled, an alarm can trigger execution of an Interrupt Block in the application program,
as explained below.

User Offset 0.000 Engineering Units offset to change the base of the
input channel. This value is added to the scaled value
on the channel prior to alarm checking.
Software Filter Integration Time 0.000 If Software Filtering is enabled, the Integration Time
(ms) parameter specifies the amount of time in milliseconds
for the software filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.
A value of 0 indicates software filter is disabled. A value

of 100 indicates data will achieve 63.2% of its value in
100ms. Default is disabled
Diagnostic Reporting Enable Disabled Diagnostic Reporting Enable options are used to
If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, enable reference memory reporting of alarms into the
the additional parameters listed Diagnostic Reference area.
below can be used to enable specific
types of alarms. Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault logging of
alarms into the I/O Fault Table.
Fault Reporting Enable Disabled
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the Interrupts Enable options enable I/O Interrupt trigger
additional parameters listed below when alarm conditions occur.
can be used to enable specific types
These parameters enable or disable the individual
of Faults.
diagnostics features of a channel.
Interrupts Enable Disabled
When any of these parameters is enabled, the module
If Interrupts are enabled, the
uses associated parameters to perform the enabled
additional parameters listed below feature.
of Interrupts.
Low Alarm Enable Disabled For example, if Over Range is enabled in the Diagnostic
Reporting Enable menu, the module will set the Over
High Alarm Enable Disabled Range bit in the Diagnostic Reference for the channel.
Under Range Enable Disabled
Over Range Enable Disabled If any of these parameters is disabled, the module does
not react to the associated alarm conditions.
Open Wire Enable Disabled
Low-Low Alarm Enable Disabled

For example, if Low Alarm Enable is set to Disabled in
High-High Alarm Enable Disabled
the Fault Reporting Enable menu, the Low Alarm fault is

Negative Rate of Change Disabled not logged in the I/O Fault Table when Low Alarm is
Detection Enable detected on the channel.
Positive Rate of Change Detection Disabled

Enable

9.1.5.4.2 Using Interrupts: ALG106 & ALG112

To configure an I/O Interrupt, the Interrupt enable bit or bits must be set in the configuration profile of the
module. In addition, the program block that should be executed in response to the channel interrupt must
be mapped to the reference address corresponding to that channel.
Example:
In this example, the Channel Values Reference Address block is mapped to %AI0001-%AI0020. An I/O
Interrupt block should be triggered if a High Alarm condition occurs on channel 2.
▪ Configure the High-Alarm condition.

▪ Set the High-Alarm Interrupt Enable flag for Channel 2 in the module configuration.
The reference address for Channel 2 corresponds to %AI00003 (2 Words per channel), so the interrupt
program block Scheduling properties should be set for the "I/O Interrupt" Type and "%AI0003" as the Trigger.
9.2 Note on Using Interrupts

This module has separate enable/disable options for Diagnostic Reporting and Interrupts. Normally,
diagnostic bit for that condition is also set during the I/O Interrupt block logic execution. The next PLC input
scan always clears this interrupt status bit back to 0, because Diagnostic Reporting has it disabled.
9.2.1 Module Data: ALG106 & ALG112

The module reports its input channel data in its configured input words, beginning at its assigned Channel
Value Reference Address. Each channel occupies two words (whether the channel is used or not):
Channel Value Contains this Input

Reference Address
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6

For Module IC695ALG112 Only:
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 Channel 9
+18, 19 Channel 10
+20, 21 Channel 11
+22, 23 Channel 12
Depending on its configured Channel Value Format, each enabled channel reports a 32-bit floating-point or
16-bit integer value to the CPU.
In the 16-bit integer mode, the low word of the 32-bit channel data area contains the 16-bit integer channel
value. The high word (upper 16-bits) of the 32-bit value is set with the sign extension of the 16-bit integer.
This sign-extended upper word allows the 16-bit integer to be read as a 32-bit integer type in logic without
losing the sign of the integer. If the 16-bit integer result is negative, the upper word in the 32-bit channel
data has the value 0xFFFF. If the 16-bit integer result is positive, the upper word is 0x0000.

9.2.1.1 Channel Diagnostic Data: ALG106 & ALG11244

In addition to the input data from field devices, the module can be configured to report channel diagnostics
status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this data at the Diagnostic Reference Address configured of the
module. Use of this feature is optional.
The diagnostics data for each channel occupies 2 words (whether the channel is used or not):
Diagnostic Reference Contains Diagnostics

Address Data for:
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 Channel 9
+18, 19 Channel 10
+20, 21 Channel 11
+22, 23 Channel 12
When a diagnostic bit equals 1, the alarm or fault condition is present on the channel. When a bit equals 0
the alarm or fault condition is either not present or detection is not enabled in the configuration for that
channel. For each channel, the format of this data is:
44
Whenever the PME option “Sending out Channel Faults while Terminal Block is not installed” is enabled, firmware versions earlier than
v2.00 permitted an open wire fault to be generated whenever a terminal block was removed, but additionally did so erroneously for
ranges that do not support such a fault: 0-20mA & ±20mA. FW v2.00 and later do not generate open-wire faults for the 0-20mA &
±20mA ranges. Note: the open wire fault is supported on the 4-20mA range only.

9.2.1.2 Module Status Data: ALG106 & ALG112

The module can also optionally be configured to return 32 bits of module status data to the CPU. The CPU
stores this data in the 32-bit Module Status Data reference area configured for the module.
9.2.1.2.1 Terminal Block Detection

The module automatically checks for the presence of a Terminal Block.
The TB LED indicates the state of the terminal block of the module. It is green when the Terminal Block is
present or red if it is not.
Faults are automatically logged in the CPU I/O Fault table when the terminal block is inserted or removed
from a configured module in the system. The fault type is Field Fault and the fault description indicates

whether the fault is a "Loss of terminal block" or an "Addition of terminal block". If a Terminal Block is not
present while a configuration is being stored, a "Loss of terminal block" fault is logged.
Bit 1 of the Module Status Reference indicates the status of the terminal block. To enable Module Status
reporting, the Module Status Reference must be configured. During operation, the PLC must be in an I/O
Enabled mode for the current Module Status to be scanned and updated in reference memory.

9.3 Analog Input Module 4-Channel Differential

Voltage: IC694ALG220
The 4–Channel Analog Voltage Input module, IC694ALG220, provides four
analog input channels. This module accepts inputs in the range of -10 to
MODULE 0K
+10 volts. Individual channels can be used with 4 to 20 mA inputs by
jumpering the input terminals.
Conversion speed for each of the four channels is one millisecond. This
provides an update rate of four milliseconds for any channel.
IC694ALG220
This module can be installed in any I/O slot of an RX3i PLC system.
Module does not support insertion into or removal from an RX3i

I1
Universal Backplane which is under power (see Hot Insertion and Removal
Not Supported, Section 2.6.4.2).
9.3.1 Isolated +24Vdc Power
I2 If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external

source of Isolated +24Vdc is required to provide power for the module.
The external source must be connected via the TB1 connector on the left
side of the backplane.
If this module is located in an Expansion or Remote backplane, the

I3
backplane power supply provides the Isolated +24Vdc output for the
module.
9.3.2 LEDs: ALG220

I4
The Module OK LED is ON when the module power supply is operating.
Figure 262: IC694ALG220
9.3.3 Specifications: ALG220
Voltage Range45 -10 to +10 Vdc
45
Both inputs must be within ±11 volts of COM, including any noise present on the inputs.

Calibration Factory calibrated
Update Rate 4 ms (all four channels)
Resolution 5 mV/20 µA, (1 LSB = 5 mV)
Absolute Accuracy46 ±10 mV/40 µA (typical) over operating temperature

±30 mV/160 µA (maximum) over operating temperature
Linearity <1 Least Significant Bit
Isolation, Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
and to frame ground
Cross–Channel Rejection > 80dB
Input Impedance > 9 M (voltage mode)
250  (current mode)
Input Filter Response 17 Hz
Internal Power Consumption 27 mA from +5Vdc bus on the backplane
98 mA from the isolated +24Vdc backplane bus
9.3.4 Data Format: ALG220

Module data is stored in the PLC CPU in 16–bit 2’s complement format as displayed in the following figure.
MSB LSB
+/- 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X X
9.3.4.1 Scaling and Resolution: ALG220

The module scales input data so that –10 Vdc corresponds to –32000 and +10 Vdc corresponds to +32000.
Resolution per bit is 5 mV or 20 mA per bit.
46
In the presence of severe RF interference (IEC 801–3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±100 mV/400 µA.

32000
Scaled Data
Units
(decimal)
0
32000
10 0 10
VOLTAGE (V)
Figure 263: Input Voltage Scaling: ALG220
A 4 to 20 mA input corresponds to a 1 to 5 Volt input to the module; therefore, the resolution of the 4 to 20
mA input signal is approximately 10 bits binary (1 part in 1024). The resolution can be increased to
approximately 11 bits (1 part in 2048) by using a precision 250 resistor instead of the jumper. The resistor
causes the voltage input module to see a 4 to 20 mA input as 2 to 10 volts.

Terminal Connection
1-3 Current mode input jumper for Channel 1
2-4 Current mode input jumper for Channel 2
3 Channel 1 +
4 Channel 2+
5 Channel 1-
6 Channel 2 -
7 Common
8 Common
9 Shield Termination Point for Channel 1
11 - 13 Current mode input jumper for Channel 3
12 - 14 Current mode input jumper for Channel 4
13 Channel 3 +
14 Channel 4+
15 Channel 3-
16 Channel 4 -
17 Common
18 Common


I1
I3
*Optional Connection
J = Current Mode
To minimize the capacitive loading and noise, all field connections to the module should be wired using a
good grade of twisted, shielded instrumentation cable. The shields can be connected to either COM or GND.
The COM connection provides access to the common of the analog circuitry in the module. The GND
connection provides access to the backplane (frame ground). The (-) side of the voltage source can also be
tied to the COM terminal if the source is floating to limit common-mode voltages.
The optional jumpers shown can be used to configure a channel for use with 4 to 20 mA inputs. The
resolution of 4 to 20 mA inputs can be increased from 10 bits to approximately 11 bits by installing a 250
resistor instead of the jumper
Connect the + and - terminals together for all unused inputs to minimize any fluctuations in the analog input
table for the unused points.

9.4 Analog Input Module 4-Channel Differential

Current: IC694ALG221
The 4–Channel Analog Current Input module, IC694ALG221, provides four
analog input channels. This module has two possible input ranges:
MODULE 0K
▪ 4 to 20 mA
▪ 0 to 20 mA
Two range jumpers are provided with the module; one for channels one
IC694ALG221 and two, and the other for channels three and four.
Conversion speed for each of the four channels is one–half millisecond.

This provides an update rate of two milliseconds for any channel.
I1
Resolution of the converted signal is 12-bit binary
(1 part in 4096) over either range.
Input protection for the module is sufficient for operation with reduced
performance with up to 200 V common–mode. The module provides
I2 electrical isolation of externally generated noise between field wiring and
the backplane through the use of optical isolation.
This module can be installed in any I/O slot of an RX3i system.

I3
Universal Backplane which is under power (see Hot Insertion and Removal
Not Supported, Section 2.6.4.2).
9.4.1 LEDs: ALG221

I4

Input Current Ranges 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA
Calibration Factory calibrated to 4 µA per count
Update Rate 2 milliseconds (all four channels)
Resolution at 4–20 mA 4 µA (1 LSB = 4 µA)
Resolution at 0–20 mA 5 µA (1 LSB = 5 µA)
Absolute Accuracy47 0.1% full scale + 0.1% reading
Common Mode Voltage 200 volts
Linearity < 1 Least Significant Bit
and to frame ground
Common Mode Rejection > 70dB at DC; >70dB at 60Hz
Cross–Channel Rejection > 80dB from DC to 1kHz
Input Impedance 250
Internal Power Consumption 100 mA from the isolated +24Vdc supply

25 mA from +5Vdc bus on the backplane

Module data is stored in the PLC CPU in 16–bit 2’s complement format as displayed in the following figure.
MSB LSB
X 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X
47
In the presence of severe RF interference (IEC 801–3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±0.5% FS.

9.4.3.1 Current Inputs, A/D Data and Scaled Units: ALG221

The default range for each input is 4 to 20 mA, scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA
corresponds to a count of 32000 with each 1000 counts representing 0.5 mA.
When a jumper is added to the I/O terminal board, the input range for a PAIR of inputs is changed to 0 to
20mA. In 0 to 20 mA range, 0 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000
with each 800 counts representing 0.5 mA.
32000
Scaled Data 0 to 20mA Range

Units
(decimal)
4 to 20mA Range
0
0 4 Current (mA) 20
Figure 265: Input Current Scaling ALG221
If the current source is reversed into the input or is less than the low end of the current range, the module
provides an input data word corresponding to the low end of the current range (0000H in PLC memory). If an
input is greater than 20 mA, the module provides an input data value at full scale (7FF8H in PLC memory).

Terminal Connection
1 0-20mA Jumper for Channels 1 & 2
2 0-20mA Jumper for Channels 1 & 2
3 Channel 1 +
4 Channel 2+
0-20mA
1 CH1 5 Channel 1-
2 CH2
(+)
3 * (+)
6 Channel 2 -
I1 4
7 Common
5 I2
( -- )
6 8 Common
COM ( -- )
7
COM Shield Termination Point for
8 9
* Channel 1
GND 9 *
10 Shield Termination Point for
0-20mA GND 10
Channel 2
CH3 11
CH4
(+)
* 12 11 0-20mA Jumper for Channels 3 & 4
13
(+) 12 0-20mA Jumper for Channels 3 & 4
I3 14
15 I4 13 Channel 3 +
( -- )
16
COM ( -- ) 14 Channel 4+
17
COM
* 18 15 Channel 3-
GND 19 * 16 Channel 4 -
20 GND
17 Common
*Optional Connections
18 Common
Figure 266: Field Wiring ALG221 Shield Termination Point for

19
Channel 3
Shield Termination Point for

20
Channel 4

good grade of twisted, shielded instrumentation cable. The shields can be connected to either COM or GND.
The COM connection provides access to the common of the analog circuitry in the module. The GND
connection provides access to the Backplane (frame ground).
To limit common–mode voltages, each current source common line may also be tied to its associated COM
terminal if the source is floating. These optional connections are shown above.

9.5 Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel Voltage:

IC694ALG222
The 16–Channel Analog Voltage Input module, IC694ALG222, provides
sixteen single-ended or eight differential input channels.
MODULE 0K
Each channel can be configured using the configuration software for either
MODULE P/S of two input ranges:
▪ 0 to 10 V (unipolar), default
▪ -10 to +10 V (bipolar)
High and Low alarm limits can be configured for both ranges.
IC694ALG222
I1 Revision –BA and later supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i
Universal Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and
I2
Removal, Section 2.6.4.1 .
I3
Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility
I4 (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU
I5
kit.23
16
I7
If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external source
18
of Isolated +24Vdc is required to provide power for the module. The
19
external source must be connected via the TB1 connector on the left side of
I10 the backplane.
I11
If this module is located in an Expansion or Remote backplane, the
backplane power supply provides the Isolated +24Vdc for the module.
I12
I13
9.5.2 LEDs: ALG222
The MODULE OK LED provides module status information on power-up:
I14
▪ ON: status is OK, module configured
I15 ▪ OFF: no backplane power or software not running (watchdog timer
I16 timed out)
▪ Continuous rapid flashing: configuration data not received from CPU
▪ Slow flashes, then OFF: failed power–up diagnostics or encountered
code execution error
Figure 267: IC694ALG222 The Module P/S LED indicates that the internally-generated +5Vdc supply is
above a minimum designated level for the module.

Number of Channels 1 to 16 selectable, single-ended
1 to 8 selectable, differential

Input Voltage Ranges 0 Vdc to +10 Vdc (unipolar) or

-10 Vdc to +10 Vdc (bipolar); selectable each channel
Calibration Factory calibrated to:

2.5 mV per count on 0 V to +10 V (unipolar) range
5 mV per count on -10 to +10 V (bipolar) range
Update Rate Single Ended Input Update Rate: 5 ms

Differential Input Update Rate: 2 ms
Resolution at 0V to +10 Vdc 2.5 mV (1 LSB = 2.5 mV)
Resolution at -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc 5 mV (1 LSB = 5 mV)
Absolute Accuracy48,49 ±0.25% of full scale at 25°C (77°F)

±0.5% of full scale over specified operating temperature range
Linearity < 1 LSB
and to frame ground
Common Mode Voltage ±11 V (bipolar range)

(Differential)50
Cross-Channel Rejection > 70dB from DC to 1 kHz
Input Impedance >500k (single-ended mode)

>1 M (differential mode)
Input Filter Response 23 Hz (single-ended mode)

57 Hz (differential mode)
Internal Power Consumption 112 mA (maximum) from the backplane +5Vdc bus
IC694ALG222-BA and later: 110 mA (maximum) from the isolated

+24Vdc supply
IC694ALG222-AA: 41 mA (maximum) from the isolated +24Vdc

supply
48
In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±5% of full scale.
49
In the presence of severe Conducted RF interference (IEC 61000-4-6, 10Vrms), accuracy may be degraded to ±1% of full scale.
50
The sum of the differential input, common-mode voltage, and noise must not exceed ±11 volts when referenced to COM.

9.5.4 Configuration: ALG222

Configurable parameters for module IC694ALG222 are described below.
9.5.4.1 Module Settings: ALG222

Parameter Choices Description
Active Channels 1 to 16 for Single-ended The number of channels to be scanned. Channels are
mode, or 1 to 8 for scanned in sequential, contiguous order.
Differential mode
Mode Single-ended (default), In Single-ended mode, there are 16 inputs referenced

or to a single common. In Differential mode, each of the
8 inputs has its own signal and common.
Differential
Channel Value Valid memory type: %AI The starting address for input data from the module.
Reference Address
Channel Value Read-only. Each channel provides 16 bits (1 word) of analog input
Reference Length data to the Controller CPU.
Module Status Valid memory type: %I The starting address for status information from the
Reference Address module.
Module Status 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40 The number of status bits (0 to 40) reported to the
Reference Length Controller. When set to 0, status reporting is disabled.
To enable status reporting, set this parameter to a
value other than 0.
Data formats are shown in Section 9.5.5.
I/O Scan Set 1 through 32 Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set
defined in the CPU configuration. Determines how
often the RX3i polls the data
9.5.4.2 Input Channel Parameters: ALG222

Voltage 0 to 10 Vdc (default) or In the 0 to 10 Vdc default range, input voltage values
-10 Vdc to 10 Vdc from 0 to 10 Vdc the module reports 0 to 32,000
integer values to the CPU.

In the -10 to 10 Vdc range, input voltage values from -

10 to 10 Vdc, the module reports-32,000 to 32,000
Alarm Low (Engineering 0 to 10 Vdc Range Each channel can be assigned a low alarm limit alarm.
Units) = 0 to 32760 Values entered without a sign are assumed to be
positive. Be sure the alarm low values are appropriate
-10 Vdc to 10 Vdc Range for the selected range.
= -32767 to 32752
Alarm High 0 to 10 Vdc Range Each channel can be assigned a high alarm limit.
(Engineering Units) = 0 to 32760 Values entered without a sign are assumed to be
positive. Be sure the alarm high values are appropriate
-10 Vdc to 10 Vdc Range for the selected range.
= -32767 to 32752

9.5.4.3 Input Scaling: ALG222

The default input mode and range is single–ended, unipolar. In 0 to 10 Vdc mode, input data is scaled so that
0 volts corresponds to a count of 0 and 10 volts corresponds to a count of +32000.
The bipolar range and mode can be selected by changing the configuration parameters of the module. In
bipolar mode, -10 V corresponds to a count of -32000, 0 V corresponds to a count of 0, and +10 V
corresponds to a count of +32000.
Factory calibration adjusts the analog value per bit (resolution) to a multiple of full scale (2.5 mV per bit for
unipolar; 5 mV per bit for bipolar). The data is then scaled with the 4000 counts over the analog range. The
data is scaled as displayed in the following figure.
4000
A/D
Bits
(decimal)
0
0 10
Voltage: 0 to 10 V Range
Figure 268: Input Scaling ALG222

The 12-bit resolution module analog input data is stored in the PLC CPU in 16–bit 2’s complement format in
the unipolar range as displayed in the following figure.
MSB LSB
X 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X

9.5.5.1 Status Data: ALG222

Analog Module IC694ALG222 can be configured to return 8, 16, 24, 32, or 40 status bits to the PLC CPU. This
status data provides the following information about module operation:

Terminal Single-ended Mode Differential Mode

1, 2 not used
3 Channel 1 Channel 1 +
4 Channel 2 Channel 1 -
19 Common Common
20 Ground Ground
Connections for 16-channel single-ended mode are displayed in Figure 269 and for the 8-channel differential
mode in Figure 270. Single-ended mode is the default operating mode for the module. Differential mode
must be set up by configuration.

16 Single-ended Channels 8 Differential Channels
Figure 269: Field Wiring Single-Ended ALG222 Figure 270: Field Wiring Differential ALG222

9.6 Analog Input Module 16-Channel Current:

IC694ALG223
The 16-Channel Analog Current Input module, IC694ALG223, provides sixteen single-
ended inputs. Each input can be configured using the configuration software for any
MODULE 0K
of three input ranges:
USER SUPPLY ▪ 4 to 20 mA
▪ 0 to 20 mA
▪ 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
High and Low alarm limits are available on all ranges. In the 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
IC694ALG223 range, a low alarm limit can be set up to detect input current from 4 mA to 0 mA,
providing open-wire fault detection in 4 to 20 mA applications.
I1 The module also reports module status and external power supply status to the CPU
I2 using its assigned program reference addresses.
I3
Revision –BA and later supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal
I4 Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.
I5
Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility (if the host
CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU has no serial port).
16
Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade kit.23
I7
9.6.1 Module Power
18
This module consumes 120 mA from the 5Vdc bus on the PLC backplane. It also
19 requires 65 mA from a user-supplied +24Vdc supply, which must also supply current
I10
for each current loop employed.
I11 9.6.2 LEDs: ALG223

I12
The MODULE OK LED provides module status information on power–up as follows:
▪ ON: status is OK, module configured;
I13
▪ OFF: no backplane power or software not running (watchdog timer timed out);
I14 ▪ Continuous rapid flashing: configuration data not received from CPU;
▪ Slow flashes, then OFF: failed power–up diagnostics or encountered code
I15
execution error.
I16 The User Supply LED indicates that the external 24Vdc supply is within
specifications.
9.6.3

Number of Channels 1 to 16 selectable; single-ended
Input Current Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced

(selectable per channel)

4 μA per count on 4 to 20 mA range
5 μA per count on 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced range
Update Rate Update Rate: 6 ms
Resolution at 4–20 mA 4 μA (4 μA/bit)
Resolution at 0–20 mA 5 μA (5 μA/bit)
Resolution at 4–20 mA Enhanced 5 μA (5 μA/bit)
Absolute Accuracy51 ±0.25% of full scale at 25°C (77°F): ± 0.5% of full scale over specified
operating temperature range
Linearity < 1 LSB from 4 to 20 mA (4 to 20 mA range)

< 1 LSB from 100 μA to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
ranges)
Isolation, Field to Backplane 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
(optical) and to frame ground
Common Mode Voltage52 0 volts (single-ended channels)
Cross–Channel Rejection > 70dB from DC to 1kHz
Input Low Pass Filter Response 19 Hz
External Supply Voltage Range 20 to 30 Vdc
External Supply Voltage Ripple 10%
Internal Power Consumption 120 mA from the +5Vdc bus on the backplane
65 mA from 24Vdc external user power supply (in addition to current
loop currents)
51
52
In the presence of severe Conducted RF interference (IEC 61000-4-6, 10Vrms), accuracy may be degraded to ±0.5% of full scale.


Active Channels 1 to 16 The number of channels to be scanned. Channels are

scanned in sequential, contiguous order.
Channel Value Valid memory type: %AI The starting address for input data from the module.
Reference Address
Channel Value Read-only. Each channel provides 16 bits (1 word) of analog input
Reference Length data to the Controller CPU.
Module Status Valid memory type: %I The starting address for status information from the
Module Status 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40 The number of status bits (0 to 40) reported to the
Reference Length Controller CPU. When set to 0, status reporting is
disabled. To enable status reporting, set this parameter
to a value other than 0.
Data formats are shown on the following page.
I/O Scan Set 1 through 32 Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set defined
in the CPU configuration. Determines how often the RX3i
polls the data
9.6.5.2 Input Channel Parameters: ALG223

Range 4-20 mA (default), In the 4-20 mA range, input currents from 4 to 20 mA are
0-20 mA, or reported to the CPU as values from 0 to 32000 units. In
4-20 mA enhanced the 0 to 20 mA range, input currents from 0 to 20 mA are
reported to the CPU as values from 0 to 32000 units. In
the 4 to 20 mA enhanced range, currents from 4 to 20
mA are reported to the CPU as values from 0 to 32000
units. Currents below 4 mA are reported as negative
values with 0 represented as –8000 units.

Alarm Low 4-20 mA = 0 to 32759 Each channel can be assigned a low alarm limit alarm.
(Engineering Units) Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive.
0-20 mA = 0 to 32759 Be sure the alarm low values are appropriate for the
selected range.
4-20 mA enhanced
= -8000 to +32759
Alarm High 4-20 mA = 1 to 32760 Each channel can also be assigned a high alarm limit.
(Engineering Units) Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive.
0-20 mA = 1 to 32760 Be sure the alarm high values are appropriate for the
selected range.
4-20 mA enhanced
= -7999 to +32760

The 12-bit resolution module analog input data is stored in the PLC CPU in 16–bit 2’s complement format as
displayed in the following figure.
MSB LSB
X 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X


In the 4 to 20 mA range, input data is scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA
corresponds to a count of 32000.
In the 0 to 20 mA range, 0 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000. Full

12–bit resolution is available over the 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA ranges.
4 to 20 mA Enhanced range can also be configured. In that range, 0 mA corresponds to a count of -8000, 4
mA corresponds to a count of 0 (zero) and 20 mA corresponds to a count of +32000. A low alarm limit can be
set up to detect input current from 4 mA to 0 mA, providing open-wire fault detection in 4 to 20 mA
applications.
Analog values are scaled over the range of the converter. Factory calibration adjusts the analog value per bit
(resolution) to a multiple of full scale (4 μA/bit). This calibration leaves a normal 12–bit converter with 4000
counts (normally 212 = 4096 counts). The data is then scaled with the 4000 counts over the analog range.
The data is scaled as displayed in the following figure.
4000

Units
(decimal)
4 to 20mA Range
0
0 4 Current (mA) 20
Figure 272: Input Scaling ALG223


Analog Module IC694ALG223 can be configured to return 8, 16, 24, 32, or 40 status bits to the PLC CPU. This
status data provides the following information about module operation:

Terminal Connection
User supplied 24V Input; provides loop power via

1
24VOUT terminal (pin 2)

2 +24V loop power tie point
3 Current Input, Channel 1
Figure 273: Field Wiring ALG223 Common connection to input current sense resistors;
19
user supplied 24V input return or 24VIN return
20 Frame ground connections for cable shields

24VIN
1 ** *
24VOUT
2 24VIN
CH1 1
3
CH2 * 2 I
4 CH1
3
5 User
24V 4 Current
6
* ** 5 Source
24V
6 I
** * User
Common
19
COM 20 19
* Optional Shield
GND COM 20 Connection
* User Current Loop Driver
GND
** Optional Shield Co nnection
** * Pin 2 Connected to Pin 1 internally
Figure 275: Connection Example 2 ALG222
To limit common-mode voltages, the current source can

be tied to the COM terminal provided the source is
floating.

9.7 Analog Input Module Advanced Diagnostics

16-Channel Voltage: IC694ALG232

The PACSystems RX3i 16-Channel Analog Voltage Input module, IC694ALG232,

provides sixteen single-ended or eight differential input channels. Each channel
MODULE 0K
can be configured for either of two input ranges:
MODULE P/S ▪ 0 to 10 V (unipolar), default
▪ -10 to +10 V (bipolar)
High and Low alarm limits can be configured for both ranges.
This module can be installed in any I/O slot that has a serial connector in an RX3i
IC694ALG232
system.
I1 9.7.1 Features
I2 ▪ Isolated +24Vdc Power
I3
I4
I5 reporting selectable per channel
16 ▪ Module fault reporting
▪ Supports diagnostic point fault contacts in the logic program
I7
18 ▪ Display of module serial number, revision and date code in programming
19 software.
▪ Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane
I10
I11
▪ Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility
I12 (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU
I13
has no serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade kit.23
I14 9.7.2 Isolated +24Vdc Power

I15 If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external source of
isolated +24Vdc is required to provide power for the module. The external source
I16
must be connected via the TB1 connector on the left side of the backplane.
If this module is located in an Expansion or Remote backplane, the backplane
power supply provides the Isolated +24Vdc for the module.
Figure 276: IC694ALG232 9.7.3 LEDs: ALG232
The MODULE OK LED provides module status information as follows:
▪ ON: status is OK, module configured
▪ OFF: no backplane power or software not running (watchdog timer timed out)
▪ Continuous rapid blinking: configuration data not received from CPU
▪ Slow blinking, then OFF: failed power-up diagnostics or encountered code
execution error
The Module P/S LED indicates that the internally-generated +5Vdc supply is above
a minimum designated level for the module.


Number of Channels 1 to 16 selectable, single-ended input mode
1 to 8 selectable, differential input mode
Input Ranges 0 Vdc to +10 Vdc (unipolar) or

-10 Vdc to +10 Vdc (bipolar); selectable each channel

0.3125 mV per count on 0 Vdc to +10 Vdc (unipolar) range
0.3125 mV per count on -10 to +10 Vdc (bipolar) range
Update Rate for All Channels Single Ended Input 5 ms
Differential Input 3 ms
Resolution at 0 Vdc to +10 Vdc 1 LSB = 0.3125 mV
Resolution at -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc 1 LSB = 0.3125 mV
Linearity < 4 LSB
Common Mode Voltage ±11 Vdc (bipolar range)

(Differential)55
Cross-Channel Rejection > 70dB from DC to 1 kHz
Input Impedance >500k (single-ended mode)

>1 M (differential mode)
Input Filter Response 23 Hz (single-ended mode)

38 Hz (differential mode)
Internal Power Consumption 112 mA (maximum) from the backplane +5Vdc bus
110 mA (maximum) from the backplane isolated +24Vdc supply
53
54
In the presence of severe Conducted RF interference (IEC 61000-4-6, 10Vrms), accuracy may be degraded to ±1% of full scale.
55
The sum of the differential input, common mode voltage, and noise must not exceed ±11 volts when referenced to COM.

9.7.5.1 Module Parameters: ALG232

Active Channels 1 to 16 for Single-ended The number of channels to be scanned. Channels are
Input Mode, or 1 to 8 for scanned in sequential, contiguous order.
Differential Input Mode
Channel Value Valid memory types: %AI The starting address in memory for input data from the
Reference Address (default), %AQ, %R, %W, module.
%G, %M, %T, Symbolic * Note: To support this feature “Variable Mode”
Memory* property should be enabled in Machine Edition.
Channel Value Read-only Depends on the number of active channels. Each

Reference Length channel provides two words of analog input data to the
Controller CPU.
Diagnostic Valid memory types: %I Starting address for the channel diagnostics data. Used
Reference Address (default), %Q, %AI, %AQ, only when Module Level Diagnostic Reporting is
%R, %W, %G, %M, %T, enabled.
Symbolic Memory* * Note: To support this feature “Variable Mode”
property should be enabled in Machine Edition.
Diagnostic Read-only The amount of memory required for the channel

Reference Length diagnostics data. When Module Level Diagnostic
Reporting is enabled, 32 bits (2 words) of diagnostic
data are allocated for each active channel.
Module Status Valid memory types: %I The starting address in memory for status information
Reference Address (default), %Q, %AI, %AQ, from the module.
%R, %W, %G, %M, %T, * Note: To support this feature “Variable Mode”
Symbolic Memory* property should be enabled in Machine Edition.
Module Status 0, 32 The number of module status bits reported to the CPU.
Reference Length Data format is displayed in the following figure.
When set to 0, status reporting is disabled. To enable
status reporting, set this parameter to a value other
than 0.

Inputs Default Force Off (default) or In the event of module failure or removal, this
Hold Last State parameter specifies the state of all Channel Value
References for the module.
Hold Last State = Channels hold their last state.
Analog Input Mode Single-Ended Input Mode In Single-Ended Input Mode, 16 inputs are referenced
(default), or to a single common.
Differential Input Mode In Differential Input Mode, each of the 8 inputs has its
own signal and common.
Selection must match the input wiring to the module.
Module Level Disabled (default) or If enabled, 32 bits of data are allocated for each active
Diagnostic Enabled channel. Diagnostic Reporting and Fault Reporting can
Reporting be enabled separately for each channel.
9.7.5.2 Channel Configuration Parameters: ALG232

Range 0 to 10 V (default) or In the 0 to 10 V default range, input voltage values

-10 to 10 V from 0 to 10 V report 0 to 32,000 integer values to
the CPU. In the -10 to 10 V range, input voltage
values from -10 to 10 V report -32000 to 32,000
Channel Value 32-bit Floating-point 32-bit Floating-point: A real value, range

Format (default) 3.40282e+38 through 3.40282e+38
or 16-bit Integer 16-bit Integer: The low word of the 32-bit channel
data contains the 16-bit integer channel value. The
high word contains the sign of the 16-bit integer. If
the 16-bit integer result is negative, the upper word
in the 32-bit channel data is set to 0xFFFF. If the 16-
bit integer result is positive, the upper word is set
to 0x0000.
When the Channel Value Format parameter is set
to 16-bit Integer, 1000 Eng Units are equal to 1.0
A/D Unit.
High Scale Value The defaults and ranges Scaling is disabled if:
(Eng Units) for the four scaling High Scale Eng. Units = High Scale A/D Units
parameters depend on the and
Low Scale Value configured Range Type Low Scale Eng. Units = Low Scale A/D Units.
(Eng Units) Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.

High Scale Value and Channel Value When Channel Value Format is set to 32-bit Floating-
(A/D Units) Format. point, range is -3.40282e+38 through
3.40282e+38. When set to 16-bit Integer, range -
Low Scale Value 32,768 through +32,767.
(A/D Units)
Positive Rate of Range: 0.0 (default) Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second
Change Limit through 3.40282e+38 that will trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. If
(Eng Units/Second) set to 0, limit is disabled. Used with “Rate of
Change Sampling Rate” parameter.
Negative Rate of Range: 0.0 (default) Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second
Change Limit through 3.40282e+38 that will trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. If
(Eng Units/Second) set to 0, limit is disabled. Used with “Rate of
Change Sampling Rate” parameter.
Rate of Change 0 (default) through 300 Time from 0 through 300 seconds to wait between
Sampling Rate comparisons. If set to the default value of 0.0, the
module checks after every input sample.
(ms)

High-High The defaults and Alarms and Deadbands

Alarm ranges for these
(Eng Units) parameters All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering Units. To
depend on the use alarming, Diagnostic Reporting or Fault Reporting must be
High Alarm configured Range enabled.
(Eng Units) and Channel Value
High-High Alarm and Low-Low Alarm: When the configured value
Format.
Low Alarm is reached or passed, a Low-Low Alarm or High-High Alarm is
(Eng Units) triggered. The configured values must be lower than/higher
than the corresponding low/high alarm limits.
Low-Low Alarm
(Eng Units) High Alarm and Low Alarm: When the configured value is reached
or below (above), a Low (High) Alarm is triggered.
High-High
Alarm High and Low Alarm Deadbands: A range in Engineering Units
(Eng Units) condition (high deadband) where the alarm status bit can
remain set even after the alarm condition goes away. For the
High Alarm alarm status to clear, the channel input must fall outside the
Deadband deadband range.
(Eng Units)
Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear condition to
Low Alarm be outside the Engineering Unit User Limits range. For example,
Deadband if the engineering unit range for a channel is -1000.0 to +1000.0
(Eng Units) and a High Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm Deadband
value range is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband of 1100.0 or
Low-Low Alarm more would put the High Alarm clear condition below –1000.0
Deadband units making the alarm impossible to clear within the limits.
(Eng Units)
User Offset 16-Bit Integer Engineering Units offset to change the base of the input
range: -32768 channel. This value is added to the scaled value on the channel
through 32768 prior to alarm checking.
32-Bit Floating-
point, range: -
3.40282e+38
through
3.40282e+38. 0.0
(default)
0.0 (default)

Software Disabled (default) Controls whether software filtering will be performed on the
Filtering or Enabled inputs.
Integration 0 (default) through Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the software
Time 4,294,967,295 ms filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.
(ms)
A value of 0 indicates software filter is disabled. A value of 100
indicates data will achieve 63.2% of its value in 100ms.
Diagnostic Disabled (default) If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the module reports channel
Reporting or Enabled alarms in the Diagnostic Reference memory. Channel alarms can
Enable be individually enabled.
(Available only if
Fault Reporting Module Level If Fault Reporting is enabled, the module logs a fault log in the
Enable Diagnostic I/O Fault table for each occurrence of a channel alarm. Fault
Reporting is enabled reporting for channel alarms can be individually enabled.
on the Settings tab.)

By default, the module converts a voltage input over the entire span of its configured Range into a floating-
point value for the CPU. By modifying one or more of the four channel scaling parameters (Low/High Scale
Value parameters) from their defaults, the scaled Engineering Unit range can be changed for a specific
application. Scaling can provide inputs to the Controller that are already converted to their physical
A/D input value.

9.8 Example:
For a voltage input, 6.0 volts equals a speed of
20 feet per second, and 1.0 volt equals 0 feet
20.000
per second. The relationship in this range is
linear. For this example, the input values should
represent speed rather than volts. The following
channel configuration sets up this scaling:
Feet/Second
High Scale Value (Eng Units) = 20.000 (Engineering
Units)
0.000 6.000
1.000
For this example, 1.0V to 6.0V is the normal
voltage range, but the module will attempt to Voltage (A/D Units)
scale the inputs for a voltage that lies outside
the range. If a voltage of 10.0V were input to
the channel, the module would return a scaled Figure 277: Input Scaling ALG232
channel value of 36.000. The application should
use alarms or other precautions for scaled
inputs that are outside the acceptable range or
otherwise invalid.

9.8.1.1 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG232

ALG232 can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of Change in Engineering Units per
Second. When either of the Rate of Change parameters is configured to be non-zero, the module takes the
difference in Engineering Units between the previous sample and the current sample, then divides by the
elapsed time between samples.
If the Engineering Unit change between samples is positive, the module compares the rate change with the
Positive Rate of Change parameter value.
been set up in the Diagnostic Reporting Enable and Fault Reporting Enable parameters.
Change. The minimum value which can be used with this parameter is 60 ms, i.e., the module can compare
the rate of change after every 60 ms.
When the CPU transitions to RUN mode or the module field power is cycled, the ALG232 waits 100ms before
starting Rate of Change detection. This is to ignore any glitches in the input signal.
9.8.1.1.1 Using Alarming

The Diagnostic Reporting Enable and Fault Reporting Enable configuration parameters can be used to enable
different types of responses for individual channel alarms. By default, all responses are disabled on every
channel. Any combination of alarms can be enabled for each channel.
Diagnostic Reference address for that channel.
channel alarm.

9.8.1.2 Module Status Data: ALG232
9.8.2 Channel Input Data: ALG232

The module reports its channel input data in its configured input words, beginning at its assigned Channel
Value Reference Address. Each channel occupies 2 words (whether the channel is used or not):
The 16-bit resolution module analog input data is stored in the CPU in 16-bit 2’s complement format as
MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9.8.2.1 Channel Diagnostic Data: ALG232

status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this data at the Diagnostic Reference Address configured for the
The diagnostics data for each channel occupies two words (whether the channel is used or not):

channel.
For each channel, the format of this data is:

Terminal Single-ended Mode Differential Mode
1, 2 not used

19 Common Common
20 Ground Ground
Connections for 16-channel single-ended mode are displayed in Figure 278 and for 8-channel differential
mode in Figure 279. Single-ended mode is the default operating mode for the module. Differential mode
must be selected by configuration.
16 Single-ended Channels 8 Differential Channels
Figure 278: Field Wiring Single-Ended ALG232

Figure 279: Field Wiring Differential ALG232

9.9 Analog Input Module Advanced Diagnostics

16-Channel Current: IC694ALG233
The PACSystems RX3i 16-Channel Analog Current Input module, IC694ALG233,
provides sixteen single-ended input channels. Each input can be configured using
MODULE 0K
the configuration software for any of three input ranges:
USER SUPPLY
▪ 4 to 20 mA
▪ 0 to 20 mA
▪ 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
IC694ALG233 High and Low alarm limits are available on all ranges. In the 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
range, a low alarm limit can be set up to detect input current from 4 mA to 0 mA,
I1 providing open-wire fault detection in 4 to 20 mA Enhanced applications.
I2 The module also reports module status and external power supply status to the
CPU using its assigned program reference addresses.
I3
This module can be installed in any I/O slot that has a serial connector in an RX3i
I4
system.
I5
16
9.9.1 Module Power
This module consumes 120 mA from the 5Vdc bus on the RX3i backplane. It also
I7
requires 65 mA from a user-supplied +24Vdc supply, which must also supply
18 current for each current loop employed.
19
9.9.2 Features
I10
I11 ▪ Open-circuit detection for all inputs in 4 to 20 mA Enhanced Range
I12 ▪ Configurable scaling and offsets per channel
I13
I14
I15 ▪ Supports diagnostic point fault contacts in the logic program
I16 ▪ Positive and negative Rate of Change Alarms
▪ Display of module serial number, revision and date code in programming
software.
has no serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade kit.23
9.9.3 LEDs: ALG233

ON: status is OK, module configured;

OFF: no backplane power or software not running (watchdog timer timed out);
Continuous rapid blinking: configuration data not received from CPU;
Slow blinking, then OFF: failed power-up diagnostics or encountered code execution error.
The USER SUPPLY LED indicates that the external 24Vdc supply is within specifications.

Number of Channels 1 to 16 selectable; single-ended
Input Current Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced (selectable per channel)

0.5 μA per count on 4 to 20 mA range
0.625 μA per count on 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced range
Update Rate for All Channels 5 ms
Resolution at 0–20 mA 0.625 μA/bit

Enhanced

± 0.5% of full scale over specified operating temperature range
Linearity < 4 LSB from 4 to 20 mA (4 to 20 mA range)

< 4 LSB from 100 μA to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
ranges)
Common Mode Voltage 0 volts (single-ended channels)
Cross-Channel Rejection > 70dB from DC to 1kHz
Input Low Pass Filter Response 23 Hz
External Supply Voltage Range 20 to 30 Vdc
56
57
In the presence of severe Conducted RF interference (IEC 61000-4-6, 10Vrms), accuracy may be degraded to ±0.5% of full scale.

Power Consumption 120 mA from the +5Vdc bus on the backplane

65 mA from 24Vdc external user power supply (in addition to current loop
currents)

Active Channels 1 to 16 The number of channels to be scanned. Channels are

scanned in sequential, contiguous order.
Channel Value Valid memory types: The starting address in memory for input data from the
Reference Address %AI (default), %AQ, %R, module.
%W, %G, %M, %T,
Symbolic Memory58
Channel Value Read-only Depends on the number of active channels. Each

Reference Length channel provides two words of analog input data to the
Controller CPU.
Diagnostic Reference Valid memory types: %I Starting address for the channel diagnostics data. Used
Address (default), %Q, %AI, only when Module Level Diagnostic Reporting is
%AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M, enabled.
%T, Symbolic Memory58
Diagnostic Reference Read-only The amount of memory required for the channel
Length diagnostics data. When Module Level Diagnostic
Reporting is enabled, 32 bits of diagnostic data are
allocated for each active channel.
Module Status Valid memory types: %I The starting address in memory for status information
Reference Address (default), %Q, %AI, from the module.
%AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M,
%T, Symbolic Memory58
Module Status 0, 32 The number of module status bits reported to the CPU.
Reference Length Data format is displayed in the following figure.
58
Note: To support this feature, Variable Mode property should be enabled in Machine Edition.

When set to 0, status reporting is disabled. To enable

status reporting, set this parameter to a value other than
0.
I/O Scan Set 1 through 32 Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set defined
in the CPU configuration. Determines how often the
RX3i polls the data
Inputs Default Force Off (default) or In the event of module failure or removal, this parameter
Hold Last State specifies the state of all Channel Value References for the
module.

Module Level Disabled (default) or If enabled, 32 bits of data are allocated for each active
Diagnostic Reporting Enabled channel. Diagnostic Reporting and Fault Reporting can
be enabled separately for each channel.

9.9.5.2 Channel Configuration Parameters: ALG233

Range 4-20 mA (default), In the 4-20 mA range, input currents from 4 to 20 mA

0-20 mA, or are reported to the CPU as values from 0 to 32000 units.
4-20 mA +
(enhanced) In the 0 to 20 mA range, input currents from 0 to 20 mA
are reported to the CPU as values from 0 to 3200 units.
In the 4 to 20 mA enhanced range, currents from 4 to

20 mA are reported to the CPU as values from 0 to
32000 units.
Currents below 4 mA are reported as negative values

with 0 represented as –8000 units.
Channel Value Format 32-bit Floating- 32-bit Floating-point: A real value, range 3.40282e+38
point (default) through 3.40282e+38
or 16-bit Integer
16-bit Integer: The low word of the 32-bit channel data
contains the 16-bit integer channel value. The high
word contains the sign of the 16-bit integer. If the 16-bit
integer result is negative, the upper word in the 32-bit
channel data is set to 0xFFFF. If the 16-bit integer result
is positive, the upper word is set to 0x0000.
When the Channel Value Format parameter is set to 16-

bit Integer, 1000 Eng Units are equal to 1.0 A/D Unit.
High Scale Value The defaults and Scaling is disabled if:

(Eng Units) ranges for the four
scaling parameters High Scale Eng. Units = High Scale A/D Units
Low Scale Value depend on the and
(Eng Units) configured Range Low Scale Eng. Units = Low Scale A/D Units.
Type and Channel
High Scale Value Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.
Value Format.
(A/D Units)
When Channel Value Format is set to 32-bit Floating-
Low Scale Value point, range is -3.40282e+38 through 3.40282e+38.
(A/D Units) For 16-bit Integer, range is -32,768 through +32,767.
Positive Rate of Change Range: 0.0 (default) Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
Limit through trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. If set to 0, limit
(Eng Units/Second) 3.40282e+38 is disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
parameter.

Negative Rate of Change Range: 0.0 (default) Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
Limit through trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. If set to 0, limit
(Eng Units/Second) 3.40282e+38 is disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
parameter.
Rate of Change Sampling 0.0 (default) Time from 0 through 300 seconds to wait between
Rate through 300.0 comparisons. If set to the default value of 0.0, the
(Seconds) module checks after every input sample.

High-High Alarm The defaults and ranges for Alarms and Deadbands
(Eng Units) these parameters depend
on the configured Range All of the alarm parameters are specified in
High Alarm and Channel Value Format. Engineering Units. To use alarming, Diagnostic
(Eng Units) Reporting or Fault Reporting must be enabled.
Low Alarm High-High Alarm and Low-Low Alarm: When the

(Eng Units) configured value is reached or passed, a Low-Low
Alarm or High-High Alarm is triggered. The configured
Low-Low Alarm values must be lower than/higher than the
(Eng Units) corresponding low/high alarm limits.
High-High Alarm High Alarm and Low Alarm: When the configured value
Deadband is reached or below (above), a Low (High) Alarm is
(Eng Units) triggered.
High Alarm High and Low Alarm Deadbands: A range in Engineering

Deadband Units above the alarm condition (low deadband) or
(Eng Units) below the alarm condition (high deadband) where the
alarm status bit can remain set even after the alarm
Low Alarm condition goes away. For the alarm status to clear, the
Deadband channel input must fall outside the deadband range.
(Eng Units)
Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear
Low-Low Alarm condition to be outside the Engineering Unit User
Deadband Limits range. For example, if the engineering unit
(Eng Units) range for a channel is -1000.0 to +1000.0 and a High
Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm Deadband value
range is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband of 1100.0
or more would put the High Alarm clear condition
below –1000.0 units making the alarm impossible to
clear within the limits.
User Offset 16-bit Integer Engineering Units offset to change the base of the
range: -32768 through input channel. This value is added to the scaled value
32768 on the channel prior to alarm checking.
32-bit Floating-point, range:

-3.40282e+38 through
3.40282e+38. 0.0 (default)
Software Disabled (default) or Controls whether software filtering will be performed

Filtering Enabled on the inputs.

Integration Time 0 (default) through Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the
(ms) 4,294,967,295 ms software filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.

100ms.
Diagnostic Disabled (default) or If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the module reports

Reporting Enable Enabled channel alarms in the Diagnostic Reference memory.
Channel alarms can be individually enabled.
(Available only if Module Level
Fault Reporting Diagnostic Reporting is If Fault Reporting is enabled, the module logs a fault
Enable enabled on the Settings tab.) log in the I/O Fault table for each occurrence of a
channel alarm. Fault reporting for channel alarms can
be individually enabled.

In the 4 to 20 mA range, input data is
4000
scaled so that 4 mA corresponds to a
count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a
count of 32000.
In the 0 to 20 mA range, 0 mA Units
corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA (decimal)
corresponds to a count of 32000. Full

12-bit resolution is available over the 4 to
20 mA and 0 to 20 mA ranges. 4 to 20mA Range
4 to 20 mA Enhanced range can also be

configured. In that range, 0 mA 0
corresponds to a count of -8000, 4 mA 0 4 Current (mA) 20
corresponds to a count of 0 (zero) and 20
mA corresponds to a count of +32000. A Figure 281: Input Scaling ALG233
low alarm limit can be set up to detect
input current from 4 mA to 0 mA,
providing open-wire fault detection in 4
to 20 mA applications.
Analog values are scaled over the range of the converter. Factory calibration adjusts the analog value per bit
(resolution) to a multiple of full scale (4 μA/bit). This calibration leaves a normal 12-bit converter with 4000
counts (normally 212 = 4096 counts). The data is scaled with the 4000 counts over the analog range. The
data is scaled as shown above.
9.9.5.4 Rate of Change Alarms

The ALG233 can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of Change in Engineering Units per
Change. The minimum value which can be used with this parameter is 60 ms i.e., the module can compare
9.9.5.6 Channel Input Data: ALG233

Value Reference Address. Each channel occupies 2 words, whether or not the channel is used: Depending on
its configured Channel Value Format, each enabled channel reports a 32-bit floating-point or 16-bit integer
value to the CPU.

The 16-bit resolution module analog input data is stored in the CPU in 16-bit 2’s complement format as
MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


channel.

Terminal Connection
User supplied 24V Input; provides loop power via

1
24VOUT terminal (pin 2)
2 +24V loop power tie point

Common connection to input current sense

19 resistors; user supplied 24V input return or 24VIN
return
20 Frame ground connections for cable shields

24VIN 24VIN
1 ***
24VOUT
1
2 2 I
CH1 CH1
3 3
4
CH2 * 4
User Current Source
5 5
24V 6
24V
6 I
* **
* User Common
** 19
* Optional Shield Connection
19 COM 20
COM GND
20
GND
* User Current Loop Driver Figure 284: Connection Example 2 ALG233
** Optional Shield Connection
*** Pin 2 Connected to Pin 1 internally
To limit common-mode voltages, the current source can
be tied to the COM terminal if the source is floating

9.10 Analog Input Module 8-/4-Channel

Current/Voltage: IC695ALG608
Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel
Non-Isolated Differential Analog Input Current/Voltage module IC695ALG608
MODULE OK provides eight single-ended or four differential input channels. Non-Isolated
Differential Analog Input Current/Voltage module IC695ALG616, (Figure 285)
FIELD STATUS
provides 16 single-ended or 8 differential input channels. Analog input
TB channels can be configured for these ranges:
▪ Current: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, ±20mA

IC695ALG616 ▪ Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc, ±5Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc.
This module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-

I1
style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style (IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring-style
I2 (IC694TBS132) terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide the extra
I3 shroud depth needed for shielded wiring. Refer to Chapter 17 for more
information about Terminal Blocks. Terminal Blocks are ordered separately.
I4
I5 These modules must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
16
9.10.1 Features
I7
18 ▪ Completely software-configurable, no module jumpers to set

▪ Full auto-calibration
19
I10 ▪ Open-circuit detection for all voltage and 4-20mA inputs
I11 ▪ Configurable scaling and offsets per channel
I12
I13 ▪ Module fault reporting
I14
I15 ▪ Positive and negative Rate of Change Alarms
I16 ▪ Auto-calibration at startup
Figure 285: IC695ALG616 Section 2.6.4.1.

9.10.2 LEDs: ALG608 & ALG616

The Module OK LED indicates module status. The Field Status LED indicates the presence of a fault on at least
one channel or a terminal block error. The TB (Terminal Block) LED indicates the presence or absence of the
terminal block. LEDs are powered by the backplane power bus.
LED Indicates
Module OK ON Green: Module OK and configured.
Slow Flashing Green or Amber: Module OK but not configured.
Quick Flashing Green: Error.
OFF: Module is defective or no backplane power present
Field Status ON Green: No faults on any enabled channel, and Terminal Block is present.
ON Yellow: Fault on at least one channel.
OFF: Terminal block not present or not fully seated.
TB ON Red: Terminal block not present or not fully seated.
ON Green: Terminal block is present.
OFF: No backplane power to module.

Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc, ±5Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc
Backplane Power Module Rev 5.0V +5% / -2.5% 3.3V +5% / -3%
Requirements
ALG608 -EA & earlier 330mA max 600mA max
-FB & later 200mA max 200mA max
ALG616 -EA & earlier 450mA max 600mA max
-FB & later 350mA max 200mA max
CPU Version PACSystems RX3i CPU firmware version 3.0 and later
Programmer Version Machine Edition version 5.0 SP3 and later
Module Rev Power Dissipation

Power Dissipation within ALG608 -EA & earlier 4.83W max

Module
-FB & later 2.58W max
ALG616 -EA & earlier 6.48W max
-FB & later 4.25W max
Thermal De-rating None
Resolution Refer to the table Resolution and Range Types in this section.
Input Data Format Configurable as floating-point IEEE 32-bit or 16-bit integer in a 32-bit field
Module Scan Time The module scan can consist of up to four acquisition cycles. Each cycle includes a
(in ms) specific set of channels, as described in the section “Channel Scanning”. Total Scan
Time depends on the number of acquisition cycles in the scan, and the configured
filter option.
Configured Filter Number of Acquisition Cycles in the Scan
1 2 3 4
8 Hz filter 121 241 362 482
12 Hz filter 81 161 242 322
16 Hz filter 61 121 182 242
40 Hz filter 21 41 62 82
200 Hz filter 5 9 14 18
500 Hz filter, filtering and rate

3 5 7 9
detection disabled
500 Hz filter, all options

3 6 9 12
enabled
Input Impedance >100 k voltage inputs
Over-voltage ±60 Vdc continuous, maximum

Normal Mode Noise At 50Hz At 60Hz

Rejection in dB
8 Hz filter 103 97
12 Hz filter 94 89
16 Hz filter 39 65
40 Hz filter 4 7
200 Hz filter 0.1 0.2
500 Hz 0.0 0.0
Common Mode Noise 120dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 8 Hz filter

Rejection
Channel-Channel DC -80 dB minimum (single ended mode)

Crosstalk
-80 dB minimum (differential mode, grounded common)
-60 dB minimum (differential mode, floating common)
Calibrated Accuracy59 at ±5Vdc, ±10 Vdc, ±20 mA: 0.05% of range.

13°C – 33°C with 8 Hz, 12 0 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc, 0 to 20 mA: 0.1% of range.
Hz and 16 Hz filter 4 to 20 mA: 0.125% of range
Calibrated Accuracy59 at 0°C 0 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc: 0.2% of range.

– 60°C with 8 Hz, 12 Hz and
16 Hz filter 0 to 20 mA: 0.25% of range.
4 to 20 mA: 0.3125% of range.
±5Vdc, ±10 Vdc: 0.1% ±20 mA: 0.125% of range.
Calibration Interval 12 months typical to meet accuracy specifications over time. Offset can be
applied as a periodic calibration adjustment.
Isolation Voltage Opto-isolated, transformer isolated
terminal block to 250 Vac continuous/1500 Vac for 1 minute

backplane/chassis
59
In the presence of severe RF interference (IC 801-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded by ±1.5% of range.

9.10.4 Configuration: ALG608 & ALG616
9.10.4.1 Module Parameters: ALG608 & ALG616

Channel Value %AIxxxxx Starting address for the input data of the module.
Reference Address This defaults to the next available %AI block.
Channel Value ALG608: 16 The number of words used for the input data of the module.
Reference Length This parameter cannot be changed.
ALG616: 32
Diagnostic Reference %Ixxxxx Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data.
Address
Diagnostic Reference 0 The number of bit reference bits required for the Channel
Length Diagnostics data.
When set to 0, Channel Diagnostics is disabled. To enable
Channel Diagnostics mapping, change this to a non-zero value.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of the module.
Reference Address
Module Status 0 The number of bits (0 to 32) required for the Module Status
Reference Length data.
When set to 0, mapping of Module Status data is disabled. To
enable Module Status data mapping, change this to a non-zero
value.
I/O Scan Set 1 Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set defined in the
CPU configuration. Determines how often the RX3i polls the
data
specifies the state of all Channel Value References for the
module.

Inputs Default w/o Enabled Enabled / Disabled: Controls whether inputs will be set to their
Terminal Block defaults if the Terminal Block is removed.

Terminal Block configured alarm responses are generated after Terminal Block
removal. If Disabled, channel faults and alarms are suppressed
when the Terminal Block is removed. This setting does not affect
module faults including the Terminal Block loss/add fault
generation.
Analog Input Mode Single-ended Single-ended / Differential: This selection must match the input
Input Mode wiring to the module.
A/D Filter Frequency 40Hz Low pass A/D hardware filter setting for all inputs: 8, 12, 16, 40,
200, or 500Hz. Frequencies below the filter setting are not
filtered by hardware.
Range -10 Vdc to Current/Voltage: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc, 0 to +10 Vdc, 0 to +5Vdc,
(Not for Range Type +10 Vdc 1Vdc to +5Vdc, -5Vdc to +5Vdc, -20mA to +20mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0
Disabled) to 20 mA

9.10.4.2 Channel Parameters: ALG608 & ALG616

Channel Value Format 32-bit 16-bit integer or 32-bit floating-point

Floating-point
High Scale Value The defaults Note: Scaling is disabled if both High Scale Eng. Units equals High
(Eng Units) for the four Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units equals Low Scale A/D
Scaling Units.
parameters
depend on the Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.
configured
Low Scale Value Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be lower than
Range Type
(Eng Units) the high scaling value.
and Range.
High Scale Value Each Range Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be greater
(A/D Units) and Range than the low scaling value.
Type has a
Low Scale Value different set of Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type.
(A/D Units) defaults.
9.10.4.3 Input Scaling: ALG608 & ALG616

A/D input value.
Example 1
For a voltage input, 6.0 volts represents a speed of 20 feet per second, and 1.0 volt represents 0 feet per
second. The relationship in this range is linear. For this example, the input values should represent speed
rather than volts. The following channel configuration sets up this scaling:


Feet per
Second
High Scale Value (A/D Units) = 6.000 (Engineering
Units)
0.000
inputs for a voltage that lies outside the range. If a voltage of 10.0 Vdc were input to the channel, the module
9.11 Example 2
An existing application uses traditional analog to digital (A/D) count integer values. With scaling and the
optional 16-bit integer input option, a channel can be configured to report integer count values. In this
example, the application should interpret +10 Vdc as 32000 counts and -10 Vdc as -32000 counts. The
following channel configuration will scale a ±10 Vdc input channel to ±32000 counts.

Counts

-32,000 +10,000
-10,000
Voltage

Positive Rate of Change Limit 0.0 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
(Eng Units) trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. Default is disabled.
Used with Rate of Change Sampling Rate parameter.
Negative Rate of Change Limit 0.0 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
(Eng Units) trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. Default is disabled.
Used with Rate of Change Sampling Rate parameter.
Rate of Change Sampling Rate 0.0 Time from 0 to 300 seconds to wait between comparisons.
Default of 0.0 is to check after every input sample.
9.11.1.1 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG608 & ALG616

Modules IC695ALG608 and IC695ALG616 can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of
Change in Engineering Units per Second. When either of the Rate of Change parameters is configured to be
non-zero, the module takes the difference in Engineering Units between the previous rate of change sample
and the current sample, then divides by the elapsed time between samples.
parameters.

High-High Alarm The defaults for the Alarms and Deadbands

(Eng Units) High-High, High,
Low, and Low-Low All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering Units. To
parameters depend use alarming, the A/D Alarm Mode must also be configured as
High Alarm enabled.
on the configured
(Eng Units)
Range Type and
High-High Alarm and Low-Low Alarm: When the configured value is
Range. Each Range
reached or passed, a Low-Low Alarm or High-High Alarm is
Low Alarm and Range Type has
triggered. The configured values must be lower than/higher than
(Eng Units) a different set of
the corresponding low/high alarm limits.
default values.
High Alarm and Low Alarm: When the configured value is reached
Low-Low Alarm
or below (above), a Low (High) Alarm is triggered.
(Eng Units)
High and Low Alarm Deadbands: A range in Engineering Units
High-High Alarm above the alarm condition (low deadband) or below the alarm
Deadband condition (high deadband) where the alarm status bit can remain
(Eng Units) set even after the alarm condition goes away. For the alarm status
to clear, the channel input must fall outside the deadband range.
High Alarm Deadband
(Eng Units) Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear condition to be
outside the Engineering Unit User Limits range. For example, if the
engineering unit range for a channel is -1000.0 to +1000.0 and a
Low Alarm Deadband High Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm Deadband value range
(Eng Units) is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband of 1100.0 or more would
put the High Alarm clear condition below –1000.0 units making
the alarm impossible to clear within the limits.
Low-Low Alarm
Deadband
(Eng Units)
User Offset 0.0 Engineering Units offset to change the base of the input channel.
This value is added to the scaled value on the channel prior to
alarm checking.
Software Filtering Disabled Disabled / Enabled. Controls whether software filtering will be
performed on the inputs.
Integration Time 0 Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the software filter
(ms) to reach 63.2% of the input value.
A value of 0 indicates software filter is disabled.

A value of 100 indicates data will achieve 63.2% of its value in
100ms.
Default is 0.

9.11.1.2 Using Alarming: ALG608 & ALG616

Diagnostic Reference address for that channel.
channel alarm.
as explained below.
9.11.1.3 Using Interrupts: ALG608 & ALG616

To properly configure an I/O Interrupt, the Interrupt enable bit or bits must be set in the configuration profile
of the module. In addition, the program block that should be executed in response to the channel interrupt
must be mapped to the reference address of the corresponding channel.
Example:

9.11.1.3.1 Fault Reporting and Interrupts: ALG608 & ALG616

9.11.2 Module Data: ALG608 & ALG616

The module reports its input channel data in its configured input words, beginning at its assigned Channel

Reference Address
+0, 1 Channel 1

+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 Channel 9
+18, 19 Channel 10
+20, 21 Channel 11
+22, 23 Channel 12
+24, 25 Channel 13
+26, 27 Channel 14
+28, 29 Channel 15
+30, 31 Channel 16

9.11.2.1 Resolution and Range Types: ALG608 & ALG616

The actual resolution for each input depends on the Range Type and A/D Filter Frequency configured for that
channel. At higher Filter Frequencies, input resolution decreases. The approximate resolution in bits for each
Filter Frequency and Range Type are displayed in the following table.
Resolution (in bits)

Range Type
Filter 0 to 5Vdc,
0 to 10 Vdc,
Frequency 1 to 5Vdc,
±10 Vdc ±5Vdc,
0 to 20mA,
±20 Vdc
4 to 20mA
8 Hz 18 17 16
12 Hz 17 16 15
16 Hz 17 16 15
40 Hz 16 15 14
200 Hz 15 14 13
500 Hz 14 13 12
9.11.2.2 Channel Scanning: ALG608 & ALG616

These modules use 4 A/D converters to achieve the fastest possible channel scan times. The module has up
to four acquisition cycles for each module scan. The acquisition cycles and channels acquired during each
cycle are:
Acquisition Channels Acquired

Cycle
IC695ALG608 IC695ALG616
1 1, 5 1, 5, 9, 13
2 2, 6 2, 6, 10, 14
3 3, 7 3, 7, 11, 15
4 4, 8 4, 8, 12, 16
To bypass an acquisition cycle, all channels that would be acquired during that cycle must be disabled.
For fastest scan times, always wire by acquisition cycle. For example, if only eight channels were used on the
16-channel module, IC695ALG616, channels 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, and 14 should be used for optimum
performance.

9.11.2.3 Channel Diagnostic Data: ALG608 and ALG616


Address Data for:
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 Channel 9
+18, 19 Channel 10
+20, 21 Channel 11
+22, 23 Channel 12
+24, 25 Channel 13
+26, 27 Channel 14
+28, 29 Channel 15
+30, 31 Channel 16
channel.


9.11.2.4 Module Status Data: ALG608 & ALG616

The module can also optionally be configured to return two bits of module status data to the CPU. The CPU

9.11.3 Field Wiring: ALG608 & ALG616, Single-Ended Mode

The following table lists wiring connections for Non-Isolated Analog Input Modules in Single-ended mode.
Single-ended mode is the configured default operating mode.
Terminal IC695ALG608 IC695ALG616 IC695ALG608 IC695ALG616 Terminal

1 Channel 1 IN+ Channel 1 Current Return (IRTN1) 19

5 Common Common 23
10 No Connection Channel 9 IN+ No Connection Channel 9 Current 28
Return (IRTN9)
Return (IRTN10)
Return (IRTN11)
Return (IRTN12)
14 Common Common 32
Return (IRTN13)
Return (IRTN14)
Return (IRTN15)
Return (IRTN16)
There are no shield terminals on these modules. For shielding, tie the cable shields to the ground bar along
the bottom of the backplane. M3 tapped holes are provided for this purpose.
All the common terminals are connected together internally, so any common terminal can be used for the
negative lead of the external power supply.
Current Input
Channel 1 IN+ + I
Channel 1 Current Return
For single-ended mode, a voltage input should
Channel 2 IN+ Channel 2 Current Return be connected between its Channel IN+
Voltage Input
Channel 3 IN+ Channel 3 Current Return terminal and a Common (CM) return terminal.
+
Channel 4 IN+ V Channel 4 Current Return
A current input should be connected between
Common Common its Channel IN+ terminal and its Channel
• • Current Return Terminal. In addition, a jumper
•
wire should be connected between the
•
Channel Current Return terminal and a
• •
Common (COM) return.
Figure 288: Field Wiring, Single-Ended ALG608 or ALG616
9.11.4 Field Wiring: ALG608 & ALG616, Differential Mode

The following table lists wiring connections for Non-Isolated Analog Input Modules configured for
Differential mode.

2 Channel 1 IN - No Connection 20
5 Common Common 23
7 Channel 3 IN- No Connection 25
Return (IRTN9)
11 No Connection Channel 5 IN- No Connection 29
Return (IRTN11)
14 Common Common 32
Return (IRTN13)
Return (IRTN15)

Voltage Input For differential inputs, two adjacent

Channel 1 IN+ Channel 1 Current Return
V terminals are connected as one channel. The
Channel 1 IN- No Connection lower-numbered terminal acts as the high
Current Input
Channel 2 IN+ Channel 2 Current Return side.
I
Channel 2 IN- No Connection
A voltage input is connected between the
Common Common
* two adjacent Channel IN terminals, as shown
• • in Figure 289.
• •
A current input is connected between the
• •
Channel IN+ and Current Return terminals
Figure 289: Field Wiring, Differential Mode ALG608 or ALG616 for that channel. In addition, a jumper wire
must be connected between the Channel IN
* Keep this jumper as short as possible to minimize error due - terminal and the corresponding Channel
to the added resistance of the wire. This resistance should be Current Return terminal.
25mΩ or less.
Tie common to signal ground for improved
channel-to-channel Crosstalk immunity.
Two door cards are provided with the module: one shows connections for single-ended mode and the other
shows connections for differential mode. Insert the card that matches the wiring that will be used.

Section 10: Analog Output Modules

This chapter describes Analog Output modules for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
Analog Output Module Description Catalog Number Section
Analog Output 2-Channel Voltage IC694ALG390 10.1
Analog Output 2-Channel Current IC694ALG391 10.2
Analog Output 8-Channel Current/Voltage IC694ALG392 10.3
Analog Output 4-Channel Current/Voltage IC695ALG704 10.3.8
Analog Output 8-Channel Current/Voltage IC695ALG708 10.3.8
Analog Output 8-Channel Current/Voltage Isolated IC695ALG808 10.4
Analog Output Modules 429

10.1 Analog Output Module Voltage 2-Channel:

IC694ALG390
The 2–Channel Analog Voltage Output module, IC694ALG390, has two output
MODULE 0K channels, each capable of converting 13 bits of binary (digital) data to an
analog output signal for field devices. The Analog Voltage Output module
provides outputs in the range of -10 volts to +10 volts. Both channels are
updated on every scan.
IC694ALG390 The outputs on this module can be set up to either Default to 0 volts or
Hold-Last-State if the CPU goes to the Stop mode or Reset. Selection of the
output default state is made by a jumper on the module. If the jumper is not
installed, the outputs Hold Last State.

Q1

If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external source of
Q2
Isolated +24Vdc is required to provide power for the module. The external
source can be connected via the TB1 connector on the left side of the
backplane or directly on the terminal block of this module.
If this module is located in an Expansion or Remote backplane, its primary

power source can be either the Isolated +24Vdc from the backplane power
supply or an external Isolated +24Vdc power supply connected to the
terminal block of this module. If the external source is set between 27.5-30
Figure 290: IC694ALG390 Vdc, it takes over the load from the Isolated 24Vdc system supply. Note that
an external source should be used if it is desired to maintain hold last state
operation during a loss of backplane power.
10.1.2 LED
Voltage Range -10 to +10 volts

Calibration Factory calibrated to 2.5 mV per count
Supply Voltage (nominal) +24Vdc, from isolated +24Vdc on backplane or user-supplied

voltage source, and +5Vdc from backplane
External Supply Voltage Range 18Vdc to 30 Vdc
Update Rate Approximately 5ms (both channels)

Update rate is application dependent.
Resolution 2.5 mV (1 LSB = 2.5 mV)
Absolute Accuracy60 ±5 mV at 25°C (77°F)
Offset 1 mV maximum, 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)
Output Loading (maximum) 5 mA (2k minimum resistance)
Output Load Capacitance 2000 pF, maximum
Isolation, Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vdc for 1 minute
and to frame ground
Internal Power Consumption 32 mA from +5Vdc supply
120 mA from +24Vdc supply (isolated backplane or user supply)
10.1.4 Module Data: ALG390

Module data is stored by the PLC CPU in 16–bit 2’s complement format:
MSB LSB
+/- 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X X
Resolution of the converted signal is 12-bit binary plus sign, which is effectively 13 bits (1 part in 8192). The
module scales the digital data to create an output voltage for the output:
10.1.4.1 D/A Bits versus Output Voltage
60
In the presence of severe RF interference (IEC 801–3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±50 mV.

4000
D/A
BITS 0
(decimal)
4000
10 0 10
VOLTAGE (V)
Figure 291: D/A Bits versus Output Voltage
10.1.4.2 Scaling: ALG390

Scaling of the output is displayed in the following figure.
32000
Units
(decimal) 0
32000
10 0 10
VOLTAGE (V)
Figure 292: Scaling Units versus Output Voltage

Terminal Connection
1 No connection
2 No connection
3 Output 1

4 Output 2
5 Output 1 Common
6 Output 2 Common
7 Shield termination point for output 1
8 Shield termination point for output 2
9 No connection
10 No connection
11 - 13 Output default selection jumper
12 No connection
14 No connection
15 No connection
16 No connection
17 External +24Vdc Power Supply +
18 No connection
19 External +24Vdc Power Supply -
20 No connection
To minimize capacitive loading and noise, all field connections should be wired using a good grade of
twisted, shielded instrumentation cable. The shields should be connected to GND on the user terminal
connector block. The GND connection provides access to the backplane (frame ground) resulting in superior
rejection of noise caused by any shield drain currents.
DEF0 is the optional Output Default Jumper. It determines the operation of both outputs when the CPU is in
Stop or Reset mode. The jumper should be installed if outputs should default to 0. The jumper should not be
installed if outputs should hold their last state (the last valid commanded value received from the CPU).
An optional external +24Vdc supply can be installed as shown.

10.2 Analog Output Module Current 2-Channel:

IC694ALG391
The 2–Channel Analog Current Output module, IC694ALG391, has two output
MODULE 0K channels, each capable of converting 12 bits of binary (digital) data to an
analog output signal for field devices. Each output can be set using a jumper on
the module to produce output signals in one of two ranges:
▪ 0 to 20 mA
IC694ALG391
▪ 4 to 20 mA.
Each output may also be set up as a less accurate voltage source. The selection
of current or voltage output is made with a jumper or resistor on the module
terminals. Both channels are updated on every scan.
Q1
The outputs on this module can be set up to either Default to 0/4 mA or Hold–
Last–State if the CPU goes to the Stop mode or Reset. Selection of the output
default state is made by a jumper on the terminal board of this module. Refer to
Output Defaults in this section for more information.
Backplane which is under power (see Hot Insertion and Removal Not Supported,
Section 2.6.4.2).
Q2
If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, an external source of
Isolated +24Vdc is required to provide power for the module. The external
source can be connected via the TB1 connector on the left side of the backplane
or directly on the terminal block of this module.
Figure 293: IC694ALG391 If this module is located in an Expansion or Remote backplane, its primary
power source can be either the Isolated +24Vdc from the backplane power
supply or an external Isolated +24Vdc power supply connected to the terminal
block of this module. If the external source is set between 27.5-30 Vdc, it takes
over the load from the Isolated 24Vdc system supply. Note that an external
source should be used if it is desired to maintain hold last state operation
during a loss of backplane power.
10.2.2 LED

Output Current Range 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA

Output Voltage Range 1 to 5 volts and 0 to 5 volts
Calibration Factory calibrated to 4 μA per count
External Supply Voltage Range 20 Vdc to 30 Vdc. Depends on the current load and the
ambient temperature as displayed in Figure 294.
Update Rate 5 ms (approximate, both channels)
Application dependent.
Resolution:
4 to 20mA 4 μA (1 LSB = 4 μA)
0 to 20mA 5 μA (1 LSB = 5 μA)
1 to 5V 1 mV (1 LSB = 1 mV)
0 to 5V 1.25 mV (1 LSB = 1.25 mV)
Absolute Accuracy:61
4 to 20mA ±8 μA at 25°C (77°F)
0 to 20mA ±10 μA at 25°C (77°F)
1 to 5V ±50 mV at 25°C (77°F)
0 to 5V ±50 mV at 25°C (77°F)
Maximum Compliance Voltage 25Vdc
User Load (current mode) 0 to 850 
Output Load Capacitance (current mode) 2000 pF
Output Load Inductance (current mode) 1H
Maximum Output Loading (voltage mode) 5 mA (2k minimum resistance)
(2000 pF maximum capacitance)
Isolation, Field to Backplane (optical) and to 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vdc for 1 minute
frame ground
Internal Power Consumption 30 mA from +5Vdc supply
215 mA from Isolated +24Vdc supply
10.2.3.1 Load Current Derating
61
In the presence of severe RF interference (IEC 801–3, 10 V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±80μA (4 to 20 mA range), ±100μA (0 to
20 mA range).

26.5V
50 51mA
28V
40 40mA
TOTAL NOTE
MODULE 30 30V 30mA WHEN IN VOLTAGE MODE,
LOAD ASSUME 20.5 mA PER
CURRENT CHANNEL IN ADDITION TO
20 VOUT LOAD CURRENT PER
(mA)
CHANNEL.
10
45C EXAMPLE: BOTH CHANNELS IN 0 TO +10V
MODE WITH 2K LOADS = 51 mA
10C 20C 30C 40C 50C 60C

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (C)
Figure 294: Derating Curve ALG391

Module data is stored by the PLC CPU in 16–bit 2’s complement format as displayed in the following figure.
MSB LSB
X 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X
The 13 most significant bits from the %AQ register are converted to sign magnitude by the PLC and sent to
the module.
10.2.4.1 D/A Bits versus Output Current

The module scales the output data received from the CPU according to the range selected for the channel.
32000
0 to 20mA Range
%AQ
Output
4 to 20mA Range
0
0 4 20
Current (mA)
Figure 295: Relationship between Output Value (%AQ) and Output Current: ALG391
In the 4 to 20 mA range, the module scales output data with each 1000 counts representing 0.5 mA. In this
range, a count of 0 corresponds to 4 mA and a count of 32000 corresponds to 20 mA.
In the 0 to 20 mA range, the module scales output data so that each 800 counts represents 0.5 mA. In this
range, a count of 0 corresponds to 0 mA and a count of 32000 corresponds to 20 mA with each 800 counts
representing 0.5 mA.

If the module receives negative data from the CPU, it outputs the low end of the range (either 0 mA or
4 mA). If a value greater than 32767 is received, it is not accepted.

good grade of twisted, shielded instrumentation cable. The shields should be connected to GND on the user
terminal connector block. The GND connection provides access to the backplane (frame ground) resulting in
superior rejection of noise caused by any shield drain currents. If no jumper is installed, the module performs
as a current source. If the jumper is present, the module performs as a voltage source.

In this example, Output 1 is used as a voltage output (JMPV1

connected to IOUT1) in the 0 to 5 V range (RANGE 1 jumper installed)
Terminals Field W iring Output 2 is used as a current output (JMPV2 not connected) in the 4
VOUT 1 to 20 mA mode (RANGE2 jumper not installed). Both outputs will

1 Hold Last State (no Output Default jumper installed, external +24Vdc
VOUT 2
2 power supply connected).
IOUT 1
3 Q1 2K
IOUT 2
4 VOUT1
(Minimum)
Output 1 Used as Voltage Output.
RTN 1 1
5 Q2 Voltage mode jumper connected
VOUT2
RTN 2 2 from terminal 3 (IOUT1)
6 IOUT1 to terminal 9 (JMPV1)
GN D 3
7
GN D
* 4
IOUT2
Output 2 Used as Current Output.
8 * 5
RTN1
Voltage mode jumper NOT
JMPV1
9 RTN2 connected to terminal 9 (JMPV2)
6
JMPV2 GND
10 7
DEF0 GND
11 8
12 NC * 9
JMPV1
JMPV2
10
13
0-20mA 11
14 CH1
Output Default Jumper
15 NC * 12 No jumper = Hold Last State

[Present = default to 0/4mA]
13
16 14 Output 1 Range Select Jumper
17 * +
15 Present = 0 to 5V (0 to 0mA)
[No jumper = 1 to 5V (4 to 20mA)]
18 24V 16
-
19 17 External +24V Power
CH2 Supply for Hold Last State
20 0-20m A 18 24V
Outputs
+
19
*Optional Connections 20
Output 2 Range Select Jumper
No jumper = 4 to 20mA (1 to 5V)
[Present = 0 to 0mA (0 to 5V)]
Figure 297: Wiring Example ALG391

10.2.5.1 Current or Voltage Outputs

The range of each channel and its operation in current or voltage mode are set with jumpers on the module
terminals. For voltage operation, a 250 resistor can be used instead of a voltage jumper to increase the
voltage range. The following table lists the output ranges that can be set up for each output, and the jumper
or resistor settings for each range.
Range Range Jumper Voltage Jumper or

of the Output Installed Resistor Installed
4 mA to 20 mA No No
0 mA to 20 mA Yes No
0 Vdc to 5 Vdc Yes jumper
0 Vdc to 10 Vdc Yes 250 resistor
1 Vdc to 5 Vdc No jumper
2 Vdc to 10 Vdc No 250 resistor
10.2.5.2 Output Defaults

Both module outputs can be set to either Default to 0 or 4 mA or Hold Last State if the CPU goes to STOP
mode or is Reset. The Output Default operation of this module is set using another jumper on the terminal
block.
If the Output Default (DEF0/4) jumper is installed on module terminals 11 and 13, both outputs default to
the low end of their ranges.
If the Output Default jumper is not installed, both outputs hold the last valid output value received from the
PLC CPU. This option requires an external +24Vdc power supply to maintain output power when the system
power goes down.

10.3 Analog Output Module Current/Voltage 8-

Channel: IC694ALG392
The 8–Channel Analog Current/Voltage Output module; IC694ALG392, provides up to
MODULE 0K eight single-ended output channels with current loop outputs and/or voltage outputs.
USER SUPPLY
Each output channel can be set up using the configuration software for any of these
ranges:
▪ 0 to +10 volts (unipolar)

IC694ALG392
▪ 10 to +10 volts (bipolar)
Q1 ▪ 0 to 20 milliamps
▪ 4 to 20 milliamps
Q2
Each channel is capable of converting 15 to 16 bits (depending on the range selected)
of binary data to an analog output. All eight channels are updated every 12 ms.
Q3
In current modes, the module reports an Open Wire fault to the CPU for each channel.
Q4 The module can go to a known last state when system power is interrupted. As long as
external power is applied to the module, each output will maintain its last value or
Q5
reset to zero, as configured.

Q6
Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which
Q7
is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.
Q8

The module must receive its 24Vdc power from an external source.
If the module is located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, the external source can be
connected via the TB1 connector on the left side of the backplane or directly to the
module terminal block.
If this module is located in an Expansion or Remote backplane, the external source

must be connected to the terminal block of this module.
10.3.2 LEDs: ALG392

The Module OK LED indicates module status. The User Supply LED indicates whether the external +24Vdc
power supply is present and is above the minimum level. Both LEDs are powered from the +5Vdc backplane
power bus.
LED Indicates
Module OK ON: Module OK and configured
Flashing: Module OK but not configured
OFF: Module is defective or no +5V backplane power present
User Supply ON: External power supply present
OFF: No user power

Number of Output Channels 1 to 8 selectable, single–ended
Output Current Range 4 to 20 mA and 0 to 20 mA
Output Voltage Range 0 to 10 V and –10 V to +10 V
Calibration Factory calibrated to .625 μA for 0 to 20 mA; 0.5 μA for 4 to
20 mA; and .3125 mV for voltage (per count)
User Supply Voltage (nominal) +24Vdc, from user supplied voltage source
External Supply Voltage Range 20 Vdc to 30 Vdc
Power Supply Rejection Ratio (PSRR)
Current 5 μA/V (typical), 10 μA/V (maximum)
Voltage 25 mV/V (typical), 50 mV/V (maximum)
External Power Supply Voltage Ripple 10% (maximum)
Internal Supply Voltage +5Vdc from PLC backplane
Update Rate 8 ms (approximate, all eight channels)
Determined by I/O scan time, application dependent.
Resolution: 4 to 20mA: 0.5 μA (1 LSB = 0.5 μA)
0 to 20mA: 0.625 μA (1 LSB = 0.625 μA)
0 to 10 Vdc: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)
-10 to +10 Vdc: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)
Absolute Accuracy:62
Current Mode ±0.1% of full scale at 25°C (77°F), typical
±0.25% of full scale at 25°C (77°F), maximum
±0.5% of full scale over operating temperature range (maximum)
Voltage Mode ±0.25% of full scale at 25°C (77°F), typical
62
In the presence of severe RF interference (IEC 801–3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±1% full scale (FS) for current outputs and
±3% FS for voltage outputs.

Maximum Compliance Voltage VUSER –3 V (minimum) to VUSER (maximum)

User Load (current mode) 0 to 850 Ω (minimum at VUSER = 20 V, maximum
1350 Ω at VUSER = 30 V)
(Load less than 800 Ω is temperature dependent.)
Output Load Capacitance (current 2000 pF (maximum)
mode)
Output Load Inductance (current 1H
mode)
Output Loading (voltage mode) 5 mA (2k minimum resistance)
Output load Capacitance (1 μF maximum capacitance)
Isolation, Field to Backplane (optical) 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vdc for 1 minute
and to frame ground
Power Consumption 110 mA from +5Vdc PLC backplane supply
315 mA from +24Vdc user supply
In order to meet the IEC 1000-4-3 levels for RF Susceptibility specified in Appendix A, when this module is
present, the system must be mounted in a metal enclosure.

10.3.3.1 Derating Graphs: ALG392

For maximum performance and module life, the module should be operated at maximum load resistance to
offload heat. Module thermal derating depends on the voltage level and the use of current and voltage
outputs. The first two charts (in Figure 299 below) show the maximum ambient temperature for current-
only modules at 30 Vdc and at 26.5Vdc, respectively.
10.3.3.1.1 Current Outputs Only

Ambient Ambient
Temperature
Temperature
1200 ohm loads 800 ohm lo ads
60 1000 ohm lo ads
60 500 ohm lo ads
55 500 ohm lo ads 250 ohm lo ads

55
Shorted loads
250 ohm lo ads
50 50
shorted loads
45 45
40 40
V USER = 30V V USER = 26.5V
35 35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Number of Active Channels Number of Active Channels
Figure 299: Derating for Current Outputs: ALG392
10.3.3.1.2 Mixed Current and Voltage Outputs

In the derating graphs displayed in Figure 300, voltage channels have 2k loads and current channels have
shorted loads. To determine the maximum operating temperature for mixed current and voltage outputs,
select the line in the chart below that corresponds to the number of voltage channels being used. For
example, a module uses two voltage channels and three current channels. The total channels in use is five,
so, from Figure 300, the maximum operating temperature is approximately 52.5°C:
8 Channels V
Ambient 6 Channels V
Temperature (°C)
60
55 4 Channels V
50
2 Channels V
45
40
VUSER = 30V
35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Active Channels Current and Voltage Mixed
Figure 300: Derating for Mixed Current & Voltage Outputs: ALG392

10.3.4 Current and Voltage Ranges and Resolution: ALG392

In the 4 to 20 mA range the module scans output data from the PLC so that 4 mA corresponds to a count of
0, and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000. In the 0 to 20 mA range, user data is scaled so that 0 mA
corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to 32000. In 0 to 20 mA mode, a value up to 32767
provides a maximum output of approximately 20.5 mA. In current mode, the module also reports an open
loop fault to the PLC.
For voltage operation in the default unipolar mode (0 to +10 volts), data is scaled so that 0 volts corresponds
to a count of 0 and +10 volts corresponds to a count of 32000. In this mode, a value up to 32767 creates an
over-range output of approximately 10.24 volts.
In the -10 to +10 volt range, data is scaled so that -10 volts corresponds to a count of -32000 and +10 volts
corresponds to a count of +32000. In this range, output values from -32767 to +32767 result in an over-
range of approximately -10.24 volts to +10.24 volts.
Scaling for both current and voltage ranges is displayed in the following figure.
32000
0 to 20mA Range
Scaled
output
value
4 to 20mA Range
0
0 4 20
Current (mA)
Figure 301: Scaling for Current Modes: ALG392
32000 32000
Scaled
output
Scaled value
output
value 0
0 -32000
0 +10 -10 0 +10

Voltage (V), Unipolar Mode Voltage (V), Bipolar Mode
Figure 302: Scaling for Voltage Modes: ALG392
The resolution per bit depends on the configured range of that channel:
4 to 20 mA: 0.5 μA

0 to 20 mA: 0.625 μA
0 to 10 Vdc: 0.3125 mV
-10 Vdc to +10 Vdc: 0.3125 mV

Module ALG392 uses up to eight output reference words. Each channel provides 16 bits of analog output
data as an integer value. Output resolution is 15 bits except for the bipolar voltage mode, which has 16-bit
resolution. The 16th bit is the sign bit.
Range Resolution Range Limits
0 to 20 mA 15 bits 0 to 32767
4 to 20 mA 15 bits 0 to 3276763
0 to 10 Vdc 15 bits 0 to 32767
-10 Vdc to 10 Vdc 16 bits - 32768 to 32767

This module uses either 8 or 16 discrete input bits, as configured. The lower 8 bits are used for module status
information as displayed in the following figure.
In current mode, individual channels can also report Broken Wire diagnostics. Those diagnostics are reported
in the upper eight bits, as shown:
63
In 4-20 mA mode, if the PLC CPU sends a channel a value that is greater than 32000, the module uses the value 32000 instead.

Terminal Signal Name Signal Definition
User Supplied +24Vdc

1 24VIN
Input
2 V CH 1 Channel 1 Voltage Output
3 I CH 1 Channel 1 Current Output

14 V CH 7 Channel 7 Voltage Output Field Wiring for Terminals Field Wiring for
Current Outputs Voltage Outputs
24 VDC IN
1 (+ ) (-)
16 V CH 8 Channel 8 Voltage Output ( -) (+ ) 2 VQ1
+
IQ1 3 (+ ) (-)
- ( -) (+ ) 4 VQ2
18 V COM Voltage Common

IQ2 5 (+ ) (-)
( -) (+ ) 6 VQ3
IQ3 7
Current Common/User (+ ) (-)
19 I COM 8 VQ4
+24Vdc Return ( -) (+ )
IQ4 9 (+ ) (-)
( -) (+ ) 10 VQ5
IQ5 11 (+ ) (-)
( -) (+ ) 12 VQ6
IQ6 13 (+ ) (-)
( -) (+ ) 14 VQ7
IQ7 15 (+ ) (-)
Frame ground connection 16 VQ8
20 GND ( -) (+ )
for cable shields IQ8 17
VCOM
18
19 FGND
Optional Cable
20 Shield Ground
Figure 303 shows connections for current and voltage outputs. Each channel can be configured to operate as
a voltage output or a current output - not both simultaneously.
Parameter Description Values Default Values
Active Channels Number of channels scanned 1 through 8 1
Reference Address for Starting address for %AQ reference standard range %AQ0001, or next
Module Output Data type highest available
address
Reference Address for Starting address for %I reference type standard range %I00001, or next
Channel Status Data highest available
address

Length Number of %I status locations 8 or 16 8
STOP Mode Output state when module toggled Hold Last State or Hold Last State
from RUN to STOP mode Default to Zero
Output Channel Range Type of Output Range 0, +10 Vdc

±10 Vdc 0, 10 Vdc
4, 20 mA
0, 20 mA
Active Channels indicates the number of channels that will be scanned by the PLC CPU.
The choice made for STOP Mode determines whether the outputs on this module will hold their last states or
default to zero when the goes from RUN to STOP mode.
The %AQ Reference Address parameter selects the start of the area in the %AQ memory where the output
data to the module will begin.
The %I Reference Address selects the start of the area in %I memory for the status data of this module. If the
length is set to 8, then only module status will be reported. If the length is set to 16, channel status will also
be reported for channels that are operating as current outputs.
Each channel can be set up to operate on one of four output ranges:
▪ 0 to 10 Vdc (default)
▪ -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc range
▪ 4 to 20 mA, and 0 to 20 mA
▪ 0 to 20 mA
10.3.8 Analog Output Module 4-Channel Current/Voltage:

IC695ALG704 Analog Output Module 8-Channel

The Analog Current/Voltage Output module, IC695ALG704, provides four

MODULE OK non-isolated configurable voltage or current output channels. The Analog
FIELD STATUS Current/Voltage Output module, IC695ALG708 (Figure 304), provides eight
TB non-isolated configurable voltage or current output channels.
Analog channels can be configured for these output ranges:
IC695ALG708
▪ Current: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
▪ Voltage: ± 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc
Q1 These modules can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-
Q2
shroud depth needed for shielded wiring. Refer to Chapter 17 for more
information about Terminal Blocks. Terminal Blocks are ordered separately.
Q3
These modules must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane. They
require an RX3i CPU with firmware version 3.0 or later. Machine Edition
Q4 Version 5.0 SP3 Logic Developer-PLC or later must be used for
configuration.
Q5
The module must receive its 24Vdc power from an external source. The
Q6
external source must be connected directly to the terminal block of this
module. It cannot be connected via the TB1 connector on the RX3i
Q7 Universal Backplane.
10.3.10 Features: ALG704 & ALG708
Q8
▪ Individually enable or disable channels
▪ Clamping and Alarm Limits
▪ Latching of Alarms
▪ Configurable output bias
▪ Rapid channel acquisition times based on filter frequency
▪ Full auto-calibration
▪ High alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, low-low alarm detection
and reporting selectable per channel
▪ Configurable Hold Last State or Output Defaults
Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and
Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.
▪ Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software
utility (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool
(if the host CPU has no serial port). Instructions are included with
the firmware upgrade kit.23

10.3.11 LEDs: ALG704 and ALG708

The Module OK LED indicates module status. The Field Status LED indicates whether the external +24Vdc
power supply is present and is above the minimum level and whether or not faults are present. All LEDs are
powered from the backplane power bus.
LED Indicates
Quick Flashing Green: Module performing power-up sequence.
Field Status ON Green No faults on any enabled channel, Terminal Block is present, and field power is
present.
ON Amber and TB Green: Terminal Block is installed, fault on at least one channel, or field
power is not present.
ON Amber and TB Red: Terminal Block not fully removed, field power still detected.
OFF and TB Red: Terminal block not present and no field power is detected.
TB ON Red: Terminal block not present or not fully seated. Refer to above.
ON Green: Terminal block is present. Refer to above.
10.3.12 Specifications: ALG704 and ALG708

Output Ranges Current: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA
Voltage: ± 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc
Backplane Power ALG704/708-CB or earlier: 375 mA maximum at 3.3V

Requirements
ALG704/708-DC or later: 250 mA maximum at 3.3V
Power Dissipation within IC695ALG704: 4.8 Watts maximum

Module (Vuser=24V) IC695ALG708: 7.25Watts maximum

Thermal De-rating IC695ALG704: None
IC695ALG708: Voltage mode: none

Current mode: Refer to Figure 305.
External Power Supply Vuser Voltage Range: +19.2V to +30 Vdc

Current required for ALG704: 150mA maximum
Current required for ALG708: 250mA maximum
Resolution ±10 Vdc: 15.9 bits, 0 to 10 Vdc: 14.9 bits,

0 to 20mA: 15.9 bits, 4 to 20mA: 15.6 bits
Output Data Format Configurable as floating-point IEEE 32-bit or 16-bit integer in a 32-bit field
Update Rate 8 ms (approximate, all eight channels)

(Determined by I/O scan time, application dependent.)
Output Over-voltage Current outputs only: -30V for 60 seconds, +30V for one hour
Protection
Calibrated Accuracy64 Accurate to within 0.15% of full scale at 25°C

Accurate to within 0.30% of full scale at 60°C
Output Load Reactance Current: 10µH maximum, Voltage: 1µF maximum
Maximum Output Load Current: 850 maximum at Vuser = 20V

Voltage: 2k minimum
Output Gain Drift Voltage output: 20ppm per degree C typical

Current output: 35ppm per degree C typical
Output Settling Time Voltage or current output: 2ms, 0 to 95%.
Isolation, Field to 2550 Vdc for one second

Backplane
Maximum Compliance Vuser – 3V (minimum) to Vuser (maximum)

Voltage
64
In the presence of severe RF interference (IC 801-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±1% FS.

10.3.12.1 Thermal Derating, Current Mode: ALG708

Module IC695ALG704 has no thermal derating.
Module IC695ALG708 has no thermal derating in voltage mode.
Thermal derating for module IC695ALG708 in current mode is displayed in Figure 305.
Vuser = 26.5V Vuser = 30V
60 60
Ambient (Degrees C)
59 59
Ambient (Degrees C)
58 58
Shorted Shorted
57 57
56 250 Ohms 56 250 Ohms
55 55
54 500 Ohms 500 Ohms
54
53 850 Ohms 53 850 Ohms
52 52
51
51
50
50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Channels Channels
Figure 305: Thermal Derating Curves for ALG708 at selected Voltage Levels (Current Mode only)
10.3.13 Configuration: ALG704 and ALG708
10.3.13.1 Module Parameters

Outputs Reference %AQxxxxx Starting address for the output data of this module. This
Address defaults to the next available %AQ block.
Outputs Reference ALG704: 8 The number of words used for the output data of this module.
Length This parameter cannot be changed.
ALG708: 16
Output Command %AIxxxxx Stating address for the command feedback data of this
Feedback Reference module. This defaults to the next available %AI address after a
Address non-zero length is configured.
Output Command 0 The number of words used for the command feedback data of
Feedback Length this module. Length defaults to 0. It can be set to 8 or 16,
depending on the module type being configured.
Diagnostic Reference %Ixxxxx Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data. This
Address defaults to the next available %I block.

Diagnostic Reference 0 Read Only. The number of bit reference bits required for the
Length Channel Diagnostics data. Default is 0, which means mapping
of Channel Diagnostics is disabled. Change this to a non-zero
value to enable Channel Diagnostics mapping. Maximum
length is 128 bits for module IC695ALG704 or 256 bits for
module IC695ALG708.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of this module. This
Module Status 0 Read Only. The number of bits (0 or 32) required for the
Reference Length Module Status data. Default is 0, which means mapping of
Module Status data is disabled. Change this to a non-zero
value to enable Module Status data mapping.
10.3.13.1.1 Analog Output Commanded Feedback

The module returns a copy of the analog output data received from CPU in its corresponding channel analog
input shared memory. Output Feedback can be monitored to check the values being sent to the channels.
The data is in the same scaled format as the output data for each channel. During normal operation, this
feedback data should match the actual output data after one or more PLC scans of module inputs. During
faults, ramping, over-range, and clamping conditions, the analog output data may differ from the
commanded output.
10.3.13.1.2 Over-Temperature
If Over-Temperature is enabled, the module generates an Over-Temperature alarm if the internal
temperature of this module is too great for the number of outputs that are on at the same time. In addition
to the configurable options for Over-Temperature fault reporting and interrupts, an over temperature
condition is also indicated by the Over-Temperature bit in the Status Reference data of this module.
Detection of the Over-Temperature status bit is always enabled.

Module Parameters (Continued)
data
Terminal Block configured alarm responses will be generated after a Terminal
Block removal. The default setting of Disabled means channel
faults and alarms are suppressed when the Terminal Block is
removed. This parameter does not affect module faults
including the Terminal Block loss/add fault generation.
Module Fault Enabled Enabled / Disabled. Controls whether the module will report
Reporting Enabled faults resulting from either loss of field power or over-
temperature conditions.
Field Power Enabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Fault Reporting enabled, this
Removed Enabled parameter controls reporting of Field Power Removed module
faults.
Over Temp Enabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Fault Reporting enabled, this
Enabled parameter controls reporting of Over-temperature module
faults.
Module Interrupt Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

Reporting Enabled
Field Power Disabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Interrupt Reporting enabled,
Removed Enabled this parameter controls interrupts for Field Power Removed
module faults.
Over Temp Disabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Interrupt Reporting enabled,
Enabled this parameter controls interrupts for Over-temperature
module faults.
Range Type Disabled Current Sets up the type of output to be used for each channel. Choices
are: Disabled Voltage, Disabled Current, Current/Voltage.
Range (Only for -10 Vdc to +10 For Current/Voltage: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc, 0 Vdc to +10 Vdc,
Range Type Vdc 4mA to 20 mA, 0mA to 20 mA.
Current/Voltage)
Channel Value 32-bit Floating- 16-bit integer or 32-bit floating-point

Format point

Outputs Default Force to Default Controls the state the output will be set to in Outputs Disabled
Value mode (stop), if a fault occurs, if power is lost, or if the
configuration is cleared.
Choices are Hold Last State, or default to a specific configured

default value.
10.3.13.1.3 Range Type

Each channel on the module that will be used should be configured for Current/Voltage. Its voltage or
current range and other parameters can then be configured as needed. If the channel output will not be used
and is not wired, select either “Disabled” option. If a channel is disabled, it is not necessary to configure any
of its other parameters.
If the channel is wired to a current output, but is not being used, select "Disabled Current". This will set the
output current of that channel to 0mA (the output voltage of that channel will be non-zero).
If the channel is wired to a voltage output, but is not being used, select "Disabled Voltage". This will set the
output voltage of that channel to 0V (the output current of that channel will be non-zero).
10.3.13.1.4 Output Defaults

If Hold Last State is enabled, an output will hold its last commanded value when the CPU indicates Outputs
Not Enabled, or if one of the fault conditions listed below occurs. If Hold Last State is disabled, the output is
commanded to go to the Default Value. The Default Value must be set within the selected output range. If
both Default Value and Ramp Rate are enabled, the channel will ramp to the default value. Fault conditions
are:
▪ CPU outputs are not enabled

▪ Backplane power is not ok. In that case, there is no ramping, even if ramping has been enabled.
▪ Loss of communications from CPU.
▪ Loss of I/O communications.
▪ Loss of field power.
Outputs Default Notes

▪ Hot Removal of the module in an I/O Enabled mode will cause all outputs to Hold Last State (even
channels configured for Force to Default Value). If that operation is not desirable, the outputs can be
forced to default by first turning off field power and removing the Terminal Block of this module before
hot-removing the module.
▪ Resetting the module using SVC_REQ 24 causes all channels to Hold Last State even if Default Value is
configured. The application program must handle output defaulting before execution of the Service
Request.

▪ Default Ramp Rate configuration is ignored if backplane power from the power supply is lost. Channels
configured for Default Value go to the default value immediately.
▪ The first time a configuration is stored following a return of backplane power, the Default Ramp rate is
not used. Any channel configured for Default Value goes to its default value immediately. If analog
power was not lost and the same configuration is restored on the next power-up, the channel state is
unchanged from the time the power was lost. The Default Ramp Rate is used for any subsequent
reconfiguration.

Output Default Conditions and Actions

Condition Hold Last Default Outputs Channel Output Setting
State or Ramp Rate Enabled and
Default Enabled Ramp Rate (Except where indicated, field
Value Enabled power is assumed to be
present).
Outputs Enabled N/A N/A No Output goes to its commanded

and No Faults value from reference memory;
defaults don’t apply.
N/A N/A Yes Output is ramped to the

commanded output from
reference memory at the
Outputs Enabled ramp rate.
Defaults don’t apply.
Outputs Disabled, Default No N/A Output is set to the Default

Fault Mode, or Value Value
Reconfiguration
Default Yes N/A Output is ramped to the Default
Value Value at the Default ramp rate,
starting at the last commanded
value before entering mode.
Hold Last N/A N/A Output is held at the last

State commanded value
Loss of Backplane Default N/A N/A Output is set to the Default

Power or First Value Value.
Configuration Store
after Power-up Hold Last N/A N/A Output is held at last
State commanded value.
Hot Removal, Reset N/A N/A N/A Output is held at last

with SVCREQ 24 or commanded value.
Cleared
Configuration
Loss of Field Power N/A N/A N/A All outputs go to 0V and 0mA.

10.3.13.2 Channel Parameters

parameters depend on equals Low Scale A/D Units.
the configured Range
Type and Range. Each Default = High A/D Limit of selected range type.
Range and Range Type
have a different set of
(Eng Units) Must be lower than the high scaling value.
defaults.
(A/D Units) Must be greater than the low scaling value.
(A/D Units)
10.3.13.2.1 Output Scaling: ALG704 and ALG708

By default, the module converts a floating-point value from the CPU into a voltage or current output over the
entire span of its configured Range. For example, if the Range of a channel is 4 to 20mA, the module accepts
channel output values from 4.000 to 20.000. By modifying one or more of the four channel scaling
parameters (Low/High Scale Value parameters) from their defaults, the scaled Engineering Unit range can be
changed for a specific application. Scaling is always linear and inverse scaling is possible. All alarm values
apply to the scaled Engineering Units value, not to the A/D units value.
do not have to be the limits of the output.
Example
In this example, the application should interpret 32000 counts as +10 Vdc and –32000 counts as -10 Vdc.
The following channel configuration will scale a ±10 Vdc output channel to ±32000 counts.

Counts

-32,000 +10,000
-10,000
Voltage

Figure 306: Channel Scaling Example

High Alarm The defaults All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering
(Eng Units) depend on the Units. When the configured value is reached or below
configured (above), a Low (High) Alarm is triggered.
Low Alarm Range.
(Eng Units)
Outputs Enabled 0.0 The rate in Engineering Units at which the output will change
Ramp Rate during normal operation.
(Eng Units)
Default Ramp Rate 0.0 The rate in Engineering Units at which the output will change
(Eng Units) if a fault condition occurs or if outputs are not enabled.
Output Clamping Disabled Enabled / Disabled. Refer to description below.

Enabled
Upper Clamp Limit The defaults The Upper Clamp Limit must be greater than the Lower
(Eng Units) depend on the Clamp Limit. This parameter can be used to restrict the
configured output to a range that is narrower than its configured Range
Lower Clamp Limit Range. Type. For example, a channel configured for –10 Vdc to +10
(Eng Units) Vdc could be restricted to -8V to +7.5V.
Default Value 0.0 If Hold Last State is disabled, the output is commanded to go
(Eng Units) to the Default Vale when the CPU is not in Outputs Enabled
mode or under certain fault conditions.
User Offset 0.0 A configurable value that can be used to change the base of
(Eng Units) the channel. This value is added to the scaled value of the
channel before alarm-checking.
10.3.13.3 Lower, Upper Clamp and Alarms: ALG704 and ALG708

Alarms can be used to indicate when the module has been commanded to meet or exceed the configured
high or low limits for each channel. These are set at six configurable alarm trigger points:
▪ High Alarm and Low Alarm

▪ Upper Clamp and Lower Clamp
▪ Over-range and Under-range Alarm
Each alarm is individually configurable per channel to generate diagnostics bit status, fault alarms, or
interrupt alarms.

If a channel is commanded higher than the Upper Clamp value, the output is set to the Upper Clamp value
and an Upper Clamp condition is indicated. If a channel is commanded lower than the Lower Clamp value,
the output is set to the Lower Clamp value and a Lower Clamp condition is indicated.
The High and Low Alarm checks are performed on the engineering units output value after possibly being
adjusted by ramping, clamping, and fault conditions.

If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, enable reference memory reporting of alarms
the additional parameters listed into the Diagnostic Reference area.
below can be used to enable specific
types of alarms. Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault
logging of alarms into the I/O Fault Table.
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the These parameters enable or disable the
additional parameters listed below individual diagnostics features of a channel.
When any of these parameters is enabled, the
of Faults.
module uses associated parameters to perform
the enabled feature.
Low Alarm Enable Disabled

For example, if Over Range is enabled in the
High Alarm Enable Disabled
Diagnostic Reporting Enable menu, the module
Under Range Enable Disabled will set the Over Range bit in the Diagnostic
Reference for the channel.
Over Range Enable Disabled
Lower Clamp Alarm Enable Disabled

If any of these parameters is disabled, the
Upper Clamp Alarm Enable Disabled module does not react to the associated alarm
conditions.
For example, if Low Alarm Enable is set to

Disabled in the Fault Reporting Enable menu, the
Low Alarm fault is not logged in the I/O Fault
Table when Low Alarm is detected on the
channel.

10.3.13.3.1 Alarming and Fault Reporting

Diagnostic Reference address configured for that channel.
channel alarm.
as explained below.
10.3.13.3.2 Using Interrupts

of this module. In addition, the program block that should be executed in response to the channel interrupt
must be mapped to the reference address corresponding to that channel.
Example:
In this example, the Output Reference Address block is mapped to %AQ0001-%AQ0008. An I/O Interrupt
block should be triggered if a High Alarm condition occurs on channel 2.

The reference address of Channel 2 corresponds to %AQ00003 (2 Words per channel), so the interrupt
program block Scheduling properties should be set for the "I/O Interrupt" Type and "%AQ0003" as the
Trigger.
Fault Reporting and Interrupts

10.3.14 Module Data: ALG704 and ALG708

The module receives its channel data from its configured output words, beginning at its assigned Channel


Reference Address
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
Depending on its configured Channel Value Format, each enabled channel output reference location is read
as a 32-bit floating-point or 16-bit integer value.
In the 16-bit integer mode, low word of the 32-bit channel data area contains the 16-bit integer channel
value. The high word (upper 16-bits) of the 32-bits is ignored. The full range of the 16-bit integer is a signed
decimal value from +32767 to –32768.
Because the channel reference location is 32 bits, it is possible for the application program to write 32-bit
signed decimal values to the output reference. However, the program logic must restrict the magnitude of
the value to the range +32767 to –32768. Exceeding this range will result in misinterpretation of the sign bit,
and incorrect output channel operation.
10.3.14.1 Channel Diagnostic Data: ALG704 and ALG708

status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this data at the Diagnostic Reference Address configured for this
The diagnostics data each channel occupies 2 words (whether the channel is used or not):
Diagnostic Contains Diagnostics

Reference Address Data for:
+0, 1 Channel 1

+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
channel.
10.3.14.2 Module Status Data: ALG704 and ALG708

stores this data in the 32-bit Module Status Data reference area configured for this module.


Terminal Block Detection

The TB LED indicates the state of the terminal block of this module. It is green when the Terminal Block is
10.3.15 Field Wiring: ALG704 and ALG708

The following table lists wiring connections for the Non-Isolated Analog Output Modules. There are no shield
terminals. For shielding, tie cable shields to the ground bar along the bottom of the backplane. M3 tapped
holes are provide in the ground bar for this purpose.
1 Channel 2 Voltage Out Channel 1 Voltage Out 19
2 Channel 2 Current Out Channel 1 Current Out 20
3 Common (COM) Common (COM) 21
4 Channel 4 Voltage Out Channel 3 Voltage Out 22
5 Channel 4 Current Out Channel 3 Current Out 23
7 No Connection Channel 6 Voltage Out No Connection Channel 5 Voltage Out 25
8 No Connection Channel 6 Current Out No Connection Channel 5 Current Out 26
10 No Connection Channel 8 Voltage Out No Connection Channel 7 Voltage Out 28
11 No Connection Channel 8 Current Out No Connection Channel 7 Current Out 29

18 Common (COM) External + Power Supply (+24V In) 36
Each channel can be individually-configured to operate as a voltage output or a current output, not both
simultaneously. All the common terminals are connected together internally, so any common terminal can
be used for the negative lead of the external power supply.
Current
Channel 2 Voltage Out 1 Output 19 Channel 1 Voltage Out
Channel 2 Current Out 2 + 20 Channel 1 Current Out
I
Common 3 Voltage _ 21 Common
Output
Channel 4 Voltage Out 4 22 Channel 3 Voltage Out
+
Channel 4 Current Out 5 V 23 Channel 3 Current Out
_
Common 6 24 Common
. .
. .
. .
18 36
24VDC
- +
Figure 307: Field Wiring ALG704 & ALG708

10.4 Analog Output Module 8-Channel

Current/Voltage Isolated: IC695ALG808

The Analog Current/Voltage Output Isolated module, IC695ALG808, provides

MODULE OK eight configurable voltage or current output channels. Analog channels can
FIELD STATUS be configured for the following output ranges:
TB
IC695ALG808
▪ Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc
The module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane. These modules

Q1
can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style
Q2 (IC694TBS132) Terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide the extra
shroud depth needed for shielded wiring. Terminal Blocks are ordered
Q3 separately.
Q4
Q5
The module must receive 24Vdc field power from an external source. The
external source must be connected directly to the terminal block of this
module. It cannot be connected via the TB1 connector on the RX3i
Q6
Q7
10.4.2 Features
Q8
▪ Individually enable or disable channels
▪ Clamping and Alarm Limits
Figure 308: IC695ALG808 ▪ Latching of Alarms
▪ Configurable output bias
▪ Open-circuit detection for current outputs
▪ Short-circuit detection for voltage outputs
▪ High alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, low-low alarm detection
and reporting selectable per channel
▪ Configurable Hold Last State or Output Defaults
Section 2.6.4.1.

10.4.3 LEDs: IC695ALG808

LED Indicates

Quick Flashing Green: Module performing power-up sequence.
Field Status ON Green No faults on any enabled channel, Terminal Block is present, and field power is
present.
ON Amber and TB Green: Terminal Block is installed, fault on at least one channel, or
field power is not present.
ON Amber and TB Red: Terminal Block not fully removed, field power detected.
OFF and TB Red: Terminal block not present and no field power is detected.
TB ON Red: Terminal block not present or not fully seated. Refer to above.
ON Green: Terminal block is present. Refer to above.
10.4.4 Specifications: IC695ALG808

Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc
Backplane Power Requirements For ALG808-FA and earlier:
450mA maximum at 3.3V; 25mA maximum at 5.0V
For ALG808-GB and later:
250mA maximum at 3.3V; 17mA maximum at 5.0V
Power Dissipation within 7.25 Watts maximum (Vuser=24V)

Module
Thermal De-rating None required
External +Power Supply Voltage Range: 19.2V to 30V (24V nominal)

Current: 660mA maximum

Resolution ±10 Vdc: 15 bits, 0 to 10 Vdc: 14 bits, 0 to 20mA: 15 bits,

4 to 20mA: 15 bits
Output Data Format Configurable as floating-point IEEE 32-bit or 16-bit integer in a 32-bit
field
Analog Update Rate 8 ms (approximate, all eight channels)

(Determined by I/O scan time,
application dependent)
Output Over-voltage Protection Current outputs only: -30V for 60 seconds, +30V for one hour

(From 0 to 0.05mA, accuracy is ±35µA)
Accurate to within 0.25% of full scale at 0-60°C
(From 0 to 0.05mA, accuracy is ±70µA)
Maximum Output Load Current: 1350 maximum

Voltage: 2k minimum

Output Settling Time Voltage or current output: 2ms, 0 to 95%
Isolation, Field to Backplane 2550 Vdc for one second
Isolation, Channel to Channel 250 Vac continuous

1500 Vac for one minute per channel
10.4.5 Configuration: IC695ALG808

Outputs Reference %AQxxxxx Starting address for the output data of this module. This
Address defaults to the next available %AQ block.
Outputs Reference 16 The number of words used for the output data of this module.
Output Command %AIxxxxx Stating address for the command feedback data of this
Feedback Reference module. This defaults to the next available %AI address after a
Address non-zero length is configured.

Feedback Length this module. Length defaults to 0. It can be set to 16.
Address defaults to the next available %I block.
Length Channel Diagnostics data. Default is 0, which means mapping
of Channel Diagnostics is disabled. Change this to a non-zero
value to enable Channel Diagnostics mapping. Maximum
length is 256 bits for module IC695ALG808.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of this module. This
Module Status 0 Read Only. The number of bits (0 or 32) required for the
Reference Length Module Status data. Default is 0, which means mapping of
Module Status data is disabled. Change this to a non-zero
value to enable Module Status data mapping.

The module returns a copy of the analog output data received from the CPU in its corresponding channel
analog input shared memory. Output Feedback can be monitored to check the values being sent to the
channels. The data is in the same scaled format as the output data for each channel. During normal
operation, this feedback data should match the actual output data after one or more PLC scans of module
inputs. During faults, ramping, over-range, and clamping conditions, the analog output data may differ from
the commanded output.
Detection of the Over-Temperature status bit is always enabled.

data
removed. This parameter does not affect module faults
including the Terminal Block loss/add fault generation.
Module Fault Enabled Enabled / Disabled. Controls whether the module will report
Reporting Enabled faults resulting from either loss of field power or over-
temperature conditions.
faults.
Over Temp Enabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Fault Reporting enabled, this
Enabled parameter controls reporting of Over-temperature module
faults.

Reporting Enabled
Field Power Disabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Interrupt Reporting enabled,
Removed Enabled this parameter controls interrupts for Field Power Removed
module faults.
Over Temp Disabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Interrupt Reporting enabled,
Enabled this parameter controls interrupts for Over-temperature
module faults.
Range Type Disabled Current Sets up the type of output to be used for each channel. Choices
are: Disabled Voltage, Disabled Current, Current/Voltage.
Range (Only for -10 Vdc to +10 For Current/Voltage: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc, 0 Vdc to +10 Vdc,
Range Type Vdc 4mA to 20 mA, 0mA to 20 mA.
Current/Voltage)

Format point

Outputs Default Force to Default Controls the state the output will be set to in Outputs Disabled
Value mode (stop), if a fault occurs, if power is lost, or if the
configuration is cleared.
Choices are Hold Last State, or default to a specific configured

default value.

output current of that channel to 0mA (the output voltage of that channel will be non-zero).
output voltage of that channel to 0V (the output current of that channel will be non-zero).

are:
▪ CPU outputs are not enabled.

▪ Backplane power is not ok. In that case, there is no ramping, even if ramping has been enabled.


Request.
The first time a configuration is stored following a return of backplane power, the Default Ramp rate is not
used. Any channel configured for Default Value goes to its default value immediately. If analog power was
not lost and the same configuration is restored on the next power-up, the channel state is unchanged from
the time the power was lost. The Default Ramp Rate is used for any subsequent reconfiguration.


Default Enabled Ramp Rate (Except where indicated, field
Value Enabled power is assumed to be
present).
Outputs Enabled N/A N/A No Output goes to its commanded

and No Faults value from reference memory;

reference memory at the
Outputs Enabled ramp rate.
Defaults don’t apply.
Outputs Disabled, Default No N/A Output is set to the Default

Fault Mode, or Value Value
Reconfiguration
Default Yes N/A Output is ramped to the Default
Value Value at the Default ramp rate,

Loss of Backplane Default N/A N/A Output is set to the Default

Power or First Value Value.
Configuration Store
after Power-up Hold Last N/A N/A Output is held at last
State commanded value.
Hot Removal, Reset N/A N/A N/A Output is held at last

with SVCREQ 24 or commanded value.
Cleared
Configuration


Type and Range. Each Default = High A/D Limit of selected range type.
Range and Range Type
have a different set of
(Eng Units) Must be lower than the high scaling value.
defaults.
(A/D Units)
10.4.5.2.1 Output Scaling


Example

Counts

-32,000 +10,000
-10,000
Voltage
Figure 309: Channel Scaling Example

Low Alarm Range.
(Eng Units)
(Eng Units)

Enabled
(Eng Units) Vdc could be restricted to -8V to +7.5V.
10.4.5.3 Lower, Upper Clamp and Alarms


interrupt alarms.


If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the enable reference memory reporting of alarms into
additional parameters listed below the Diagnostic Reference area.
can be used to enable specific types of
alarms. Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault logging
of alarms into the I/O Fault Table.
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the These parameters enable or disable the individual
additional parameters listed below diagnostics features of a channel.
can be used to enable specific types of
Faults.
module uses associated parameters to perform the
enabled feature.

Diagnostic Reporting Enable menu, the module will set
Under Range Enable Disabled the Over Range bit in the Diagnostic Reference for
the channel.
Open Wire Enable (current mode Disabled

only) If any of these parameters is disabled, the module
does not react to the associated alarm conditions.
Upper Clamp Alarm Enable Disabled

Short Circuit Enable (voltage mode Disabled the Fault Reporting Enable menu, the Low Alarm fault
only) is not logged in the I/O Fault Table when Low Alarm is
detected on the channel.

10.4.5.3.1 Alarming and Fault Reporting

channel alarm.
as explained below.

Example:
In this example, the Output Reference Address block is mapped to %AQ0001-%AQ0008. An I/O Interrupt
block should be triggered if a High Alarm condition occurs on Channel 2.

The reference address of Channel 2 corresponds to %AQ00003 (2 Words per channel), so the interrupt
program block Scheduling properties should be set for the "I/O Interrupt" Type and "%AQ0003" as the
Trigger.

10.4.6 Module Data: IC695ALG808

The module receives its channel data from its configured output words, beginning at its assigned Channel


Reference Address
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8

10.4.6.1 Channel Diagnostic Data


+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
channel.



Terminal Block Detection

10.4.7 Field Wiring: IC695ALG808

The following table lists wiring connections for the Isolated Analog Output Modules. There are no shield
terminals.

Terminal Assignment Assignment Terminal
1 No Connect No Connect 19
2 Channel 1 Current/Voltage Output Channel 5 Current/Voltage Output 20
3 Channel 1 Ground/Return Channel 5 Ground/Return 21
17 External + Power Supply (+24V In) No Connect 35
18 External - Power Supply (+24V Rtn) No Connect 36
Each channel can be individually configured to operate as a voltage output or a current output - not both
simultaneously.

Current
No Connect Voltage
1 Output
Output 19 No Connect
Channel 1 Output 2 + + 20 Channel 5 Output
V I
Channel 1 Return 3 _ _ 21 Channel 5 Return
No Connect 4 22 No Connect
5 23
6 24
. .
17
24VDC
+ .
.
18 - 36
Figure 310: Field Wiring: ALG808

Section 11: Analog Modules with HART

Communications
This chapter describes Non-Isolated Analog modules that provide HART® communications and are
compatible with PACSystems RX3i controllers.
▪ Overview of HART Communications for PACSystems RX3i (Section 11.1)

▪ Module Descriptions, specifications, configuration parameters, and wiring information for:
▪ Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel Current/Voltage with HART: IC695ALG626 (Section 11.1.4)
▪ Analog Input Module 8-/4-Channel Current/Voltage with HART: IC695ALG628 (Section 11.1.4)
▪ Analog Output Module 8-Channel Current/Voltage with HART: IC695ALG728 (Section 11.3)
▪ HART Reference Data (Section 11.5)
▪ COMMREQs for HART Modules (Section 11.6)
▪ HART Function Blocks for the Application Program (Section 11.7)
▪ Converting HART Data to / from RX3i Format (Section 11.8)
11.1 Overview of HART Communications for

PACSystems RX3i
HART (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) protocol is an open standard owned by the members of
the HART Communication Foundation. HART combines simultaneous 4-20mA current loop operation with
digital communications using the same signal. It imposes a frequency-shifted AC signal on the normal 4 to
20mA current loop signal. Both analog and digital communications signals utilize the same set of wires
without signal disruptions. For more information about HART, refer to the HART Application Guide,
published by the HART Communication Foundation (www.hartcomm.org).
For PACSystems RX3i, point-to-point HART communications are provided by the three analog modules
described in this chapter. Each channel on modules IC695ALG626, ALG628, and ALG728 can utilize HART 5.0
protocol to communicate with HART field devices. The HART devices must be revision 5.0 or later; earlier
HART versions use a different messaging format that is not supported by the RX3i analog HART modules.
To utilize HART communications, a channel must be configured for HART operation as described in this
chapter, and for 4-20mA current range. During module operation, the 4-20mA channel signal
HART® is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation of Austin, Texas USA. Any use of the term HART hereafter in
this document, or any document referenced by this document, implies the registered trademark.
Analog Modules with HART Communications 491

communicates one process variable. Additional process variables, configuration data, and device data are
transferred digitally using the HART protocol. The 4-20mA signal is not affected by the HART signal.
Effective with Release 8.50 of the RX3i CPU firmware, the product line also supports HART Pass Through
functionality, which is described in the PACSystems HART Pass Through User Manual, GFK-2929.
11.1.1 RX3i HART Module Operation

HART is a master-slave communications protocol. An RX3i analog module with HART communications acts
as the Primary Master for a single HART field device. It tolerates the presence of a Secondary Master, usually
an optional handheld device. The RX3i Analog HART module does not support multi-drop communications
(i.e. multiple field devices on a channel), nor does it support Burst Mode transmissions.
The RX3i HART module automatically issues HART commands to any HART device that is present and
enabled in configuration. The response data from these commands is maintained within the internal
memory of the RX3i HART module and is made available to the RX3i Controller via input scanning of HART
Data, or via the Get Device Information COMMREQ (command 1).
An RX3i HART module can be configured to make HART device data available to the RX3i controller via input
scanning by using the HART Data Scan Control. With this option, the automatic HART command response
data from each device is formatted and written to RX3i reference memory at the HART Data Reference
Address. This occurs during the normal RX3i input scan. This option may be disabled.
Two modes of automatic data presentation are configurable: “All Data” and “Dynamic Data”.
 Dynamic Only periodically executes HART command #3 and provides the resulting PV, SV, TV, and FV
variables to the RX3i input reference memory. If HART Slot Variables are enabled, HART command #33
slot variable values are also updated automatically. Dynamic Only data also includes the most current
Communication and Device Status.
 All Data option provides the same information as the Dynamic Only option, plus additional data from
HART commands 0, 12, 13, 15, 16, 48, and 50.
During start-up, or after a device configuration changes (as indicated by the "configuration changed" bit on
the HART device being set), the RX3i HART module executes HART commands 0, 3, 12, 13, 15, 16, 33, 48,
and 50 (All Data mode). In addition, if HART Slot Variables are enabled (Dynamic Data mode), the module
periodically re-issues commands #3 and #33. The repetition period at which the Dynamic Data commands
are issued depends on the configuration for HART Pass-Through Service Options and on the number of HART
devices enabled in a modem group. HART command #59 is issued each time a HART device initializes: it sets
the number of preambles to 5.
In many applications, the Dynamic Only option should provide all of the needed HART variables. The variable
data updates automatically in the input scan data of the HART module (no COMMREQ trigger is needed). If
the Dynamic Only data is not sufficient, additional HART data may be accessed automatically using the All
Data option. Enabling either the Dynamic Only or All Data option affects the PLC I/O sweep time because of
increased input scan data from the module.

If neither scan option provides all the necessary inputs, or if additional control of HART devices is needed,
COMMREQs are available that provide additional functionality or replace the automatic input scanning.
Three COMMREQs are available.
 The Get Device Information COMMREQ (Command 1) returns the same data for a HART device as the All
Data scan option; however, this COMMREQ must be reissued in logic to get updates of the variable data.
 The HART Pass-Through COMMREQ is capable of executing any HART command including
manufacturer-specific commands; however, care must be used to correctly format HART command
request and response data, which must be byte-packed and “big-endian” formatted. Instructions are
given in this chapter.
 The Remote Get Device Information COMMREQ returns the same data for a HART device as the All Data
scan option; however, this COMMREQ must be reissued in logic to get updates of the variable data.
11.1.2 Using DO I/O with HART Modules

The HART modules fully support the DOIO function block provided only analog channel values and analog
diagnostics are to be scanned. However, DOIO will not function under certain conditions when HART devices
are enabled and the HART Data Scan Control is set to either All Data or Dynamic Only.
Due to RX3i CPU limitations, only modules with input scan sizes of 256 bytes or less can use the DOIO
function block. HART modules will function normally with DOIO except when the input scan size exceeds
256 bytes (this input size limitation may be increased or eliminated in future releases). When this input scan
size is exceeded, any attempt to use DOIO for HART module inputs or outputs will fail, and the DOIO
function will not pass power flow. The exact number of devices that can be enabled while DOIO continues to
operate normally depends on the RX3i HART module employed.
 For ALG628 and ALG728, the number of HART devices that can be enabled with All Data selected is one,
and the number of devices with Dynamic Only selected is five or fewer.
 For ALG626, the number devices enabled with Dynamic Only selected is three. Furthermore, DOIO will
not function at all for ALG626 whenever any HART devices are enabled with All Data selected.
11.1.3 Using a Hand-held Calibrator with RX3i Analog HART

Modules
It is often necessary to perform maintenance on field devices using a hand-held HART calibrator. The RX3i
HART module behaves as a HART master and the field device is considered the slave.
When using a hand-held communicator in conjunction with the HART I/O, the calibrator is considered a
secondary master.

RX3i HART
Module
4-20mA Loop
Slave
Device
Primary
Master
Secondary
Master
Figure 311: Use of Hand-Held HART Calibrator
The master must initiate the communication with the field device. The device simply replies with an
appropriate response.
Any given channel may have a master, a secondary master (hand-held calibrator), and a slave connected
simultaneously.
11.1.4 HART Pass-Through Functionality

HART Pass Through is the term given to the bidirectional tunneling of HART commands and responses
through a PLC system. The HART communications in question are between those HART devices connected
to HART-capable analog I/O modules and a monitoring station. Both the I/O and the monitoring station
must be connected to the same PLC. For further information, refer to the PACSystems HART Pass Through User
Manual, GFK-2929.
Compatible PACSystems* PLC CPUs support two independent and distinct HART Pass Through technologies:
 PACSystems Field Device Tool (FDT) HART Device Type Managers (DTMs) and
 the PACSystems HART Multiplexer.
Both technologies support HART devices connected to analog IO modules with HART support. The analog
I/O modules may be located in one of the following:
1) an RX3i CPU rack,
2) an RX3i PROFINET Scanner rack (i.e. an I/O rack under the control of a PNS001 or PNS101 module),
or
3) an RX3i PROFINET CEP remote drop, which is always controlled by a CEP001 module.

Support for the PROFINET racks requires that the supervising RX3i PROFINET IO Controller (PNC001) be
located in the RX3i CPU rack. Operation with Hot Standby CPU Redundancy and PROFINET I/O is supported
using a redundant IP connection.
The following RX3i analog modules support HART:
IC695ALG626
IC695ALG62865
IC695ALG728
If used for HART Pass Through, the supporting RX3i PROFINET Controller (PNC001) and PROFINET Scanner
(PNS001 or CEP001) must also contain HART-compatible firmware:
IC695PNC001 Firmware Release 2.20
IC695PNS001 Firmware Release 2.30 or PNS10166
IC695CEP001 Firmware Release 2.30.
The primary difference between the PACSystems FDT HART DTMs and the PACSystems HART Multiplexer is
that they are designed to work with different types of HART asset management applications.
 The PACSystems FDT HART DTMs are installed whenever the HART devices will be configured and
monitored using an FDT Frame Application such as GE Device Manager Essentials™ or another FDT-
compatible asset management application.
 The PACSystems HART Multiplexer is installed whenever the HART devices will be configured and
monitored using AMS™ from Emerson Process Management™.
Both technologies require Ethernet communications between the host PC and the PLC. Note that the
architecture of the PLC system is the same in either solution.
11.2 Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel

Current/Voltage with HART: IC695ALG626
65
If used, IC695ALG628 must be installed in the RX3i CPU Rack. At time of publication, it is not supported by PROFINET scanners
IC695PNS001 or IC695CEP001. Refer to IPIs for IC695PNS001 or IC695CEP001 for future updates.
66
When used with HART, the PNS101 is used in place of PNS001, and would not typically be employed for Sequence of Events
application.

Analog Input Module 8-/4-Channel

Non-Isolated Differential Analog Current/Voltage Input module,
MODULE OK IC695ALG628, provides 8 single-ended or 4 differential input channels.
Non-Isolated Differential Analog Current/Voltage Input module,
FIELD STATUS
IC695ALG626, provides 16 single-ended or 8 differential input channels.
TB Both modules feature HART version 5.0 communications capability on each
channel. Module IC695ALG626 has four internal HART modems. Module
IC695ALG628 has two internal HART modems. In single-ended mode, four
IC695ALG626 single-ended channels are multiplexed into each HART modem. In
differential mode, two differential channels are multiplexed into each HART
I1 modem.
I2 Analog input channels can be configured for these ranges:
 Current: 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA, ±20mA
I3
 Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc, ±5Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1 Vdc to 5Vdc.
I4 Channels that will use HART communications must be configured for the 4-
I5 20mA range.
16 11.2.1 Features
I7 Completely software-configurable, no module jumpers to set

Full auto-calibration

18
On-board error-checking

19 Open-circuit detection for all voltage and 4-20mA inputs

I10
Configurable scaling and offsets per channel

High alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, low-low alarm detection and

I11
I12  Module fault reporting
 Supports diagnostic point fault contacts in the logic program
I13
 Flash memory for future upgrades
I14  Positive and negative Rate of Change Alarms
I15  Auto-calibration at startup
 Configurable interrupts for channel alarms and faults
I16
 Terminal Block insertion or removal detection
 Version 5.0 HART communications
 These modules must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
 Modules support insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal
Section 2.6.4.1.
The modules can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style
(IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring-style (IC694TBS132) Terminal Block. Extended terminal blocks provide
the extra shroud depth needed for shielded wiring. Terminal Blocks are ordered separately.

11.2.2 Specifications: ALG626 and ALG628

Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc, ±5Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc
Backplane Power Module FB & later EA & earlier Specification
Requirements ALG626 400 600 mA maximum at 5.0V +5% / - 2.5%
200 625 mA maximum at 3.3V +5% / - 3%
ALG628 260 450 mA maximum at 5.0V +5% / - 2.5%
200 625 mA maximum at 3.3V +5% / - 3%
Power Dissipation Module FB & later EA & earlier Specification
within Module ALG626 4.50 7.35 Watts maximum
ALG628 2.83 5.55 Watts maximum
Thermal De-rating Module IC695ALG628 has no thermal derating.
Module IC695ALG626 has no thermal derating in voltage mode.
Thermal derating for IC695ALG626 in current mode is shown in Figure 313.
Resolution Refer to Resolution and Range Type table below.
Input Data Format Configurable as floating-point IEEE 32-bit or 16-bit integer in a 32-bit field.
Analog Module Scan The module scan can consist of up to four acquisition cycles. Each cycle includes a
Time specific set of channels, as described in the Channel Scanning section below. Total
(ms) Scan Time depends on the number of acquisition cycles in the scan, the
configured filter option, and whether the channels are analog or HART.
Configured Filter Number of Acquisition Cycles in the Scan
1 2 3 4
Analo
Analog HART HART Analog HART Analog HART
g
8 Hz filter 121 128 241 254 362 380 482 506
12 Hz filter 81 88 161 174 242 260 322 346
16 Hz filter 61 68 121 134 182 200 242 266
40 Hz filter 21 28 41 54 62 80 82 106
200 Hz filter 5 12 9 22 14 32 18 42
500 Hz filter 3 N/A 5 N/A 7 N/A 9 N/A
500 Hz filter
with rate detection N/A N/A 6 N/A 9 N/A 12 N/A
enabled

HART Data Scan The HART data scan can consist of up to four acquisition cycles (similar but
Time asynchronous to the analog scan time). Each cycle includes a specific set of
(in seconds) channels:
for ALG626 single ended: channels 1-4, 5-8, 9-12, 13-16 are separate channel groups.
for ALG626 differential: channels 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 are separate channel groups.
for ALG628 single ended: channels 1-4, 5-8 are separate channel groups.
for ALG628 differential: channels 1-2, 3-4 are separate channel groups.
Note: If you have only four Hart Devices on an ALG626 module, to minimize
update times it is best to connect them to channels 1, 5, 9, and 13 so you only
have one Hart-enabled channel per channel group.
Total HART scan time depends on the number of acquisition cycles in the scan,
number of retries, enabling/disabling of slot variables, and use of Pass-Through
commands. If slot variables are enabled, update times are doubled.
# Channels in Group Enabled for HART: Each HART Data Channel updates
every:
1 0.7 second (typical)
2 1.9 seconds (typical)
Input Impedance >100k voltage inputs
Current Input Resistance 249 ±1%
Over-voltage ±60 Vdc continuous, maximum
Normal Mode Noise Rejection in dB At 50Hz At 60Hz
8 Hz filter 85 85
12 Hz filter 85 85
16 Hz filter 35 62
40 Hz filter 3 6
200 Hz filter 0 0
500 Hz 0 0
Common Mode Noise Rejection 120dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 8 Hz filter
Channel-Channel DC Crosstalk -80 dB minimum (single ended mode)
-80 dB minimum (differential mode, grounded common)
-60 dB minimum (differential mode, floating common)
Calibrated Accuracy67 at 13°C – 33°C ±5Vdc, ±10 Vdc, ±20mA 0.05% of range
with 8 Hz, 12 Hz and 16 Hz filter 0 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc, 0 to 0.1% of range
20mA
4 to 20mA 0.125% of range
Calibrated Accuracy67 at 0°C – 60°C 0 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 5Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc 0.2% of range
with 8 Hz, 12 Hz and 16 Hz filter 0 to 20mA 0.25% of range.
67

4 to 20mA 0.3125% of
range
±5Vdc, ±10 Vdc 0.1% of range
±20 mA 0.125% of range
Calibration Interval 12 months typical to meet accuracy specifications over time.
Offset can be applied as a periodic calibration adjustment.
terminal block to backplane/chassis 250 Vac continuous/1500 Vdc for 1 minute
11.2.2.1 Thermal Derating: ALG626 Current Mode

For module IC695ALG626 in current mode, the number of inputs that can be on at the same time depends
on the ambient temperature as displayed in Figure 313.
IC695ALG626
Number of Current Type Inputs vs. Ambient Temperature
Ambient (Degrees C)
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Channels
Figure 313: Thermal Derating ALG626 Current Mode
11.2.2.2 LEDs
terminal block. LEDs are powered from the backplane power bus.
LED State Indicates
Module OK ON Green Module OK and configured
Green or Amber, blinking slowly Error
Green, blinking rapidly Module OK but not configured

OFF Module is defective or no backplane power present
Field Status ON Green No faults on any enabled channel, and Terminal Block is
present
ON Yellow Fault on at least one channel
OFF Terminal block not present or not fully seated
TB ON Red Terminal block not present or not fully seated
ON Green Terminal block is present
11.2.3 Configuration: ALG626 and ALG628

Channel Value %AIxxxxx Starting address for the input data of this module. This defaults to
Reference Address the next available %AI block. The format of this data is shown in
Section 0.
Channel Value ALG628: 16 The number of words used for the input data of this module. This
Reference Length ALG626: 32 parameter cannot be changed.
Diagnostic Reference %Ixxxxx Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data. The
Address format of this data is shown in Section 11.2.4.2.
Diagnostic Reference 0 The number of bit reference bits required for the Channel
Length Diagnostics data. When set to 0, Channel Diagnostics is disabled.
To enable Channel Diagnostics mapping, change this to a non-
zero value.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of this module. The format of
Reference Address this data is shown in Section 11.2.4.3.
Module Status 0 The number of bits (0 to 32) required for the Module Status data.
Reference Length When set to 0, mapping of Module Status data is disabled. To
enable Module Status data mapping, change this to a non-zero
value.
HART Data Scan No data Selects whether the CPU will automatically scan from the HART
Control module: no data, changed data only, or all data for each HART-
enabled channel. Refer to the below for details of memory usage.
Dynamic Data Only: the first 18 words or 288 bits of HART data
per input device.
All Data: all of the HART data (88 words or 1408 bits for each
HART input device.


HART Pass-Through Once per two Selects whether the module will automatically service a HART
Service Options channel pass-through command in each 1, 2, or 4 channel scans or only
scans upon change of the HART device configuration or if data hasn’t
been read for 10 seconds (Pass-Through Only). If Pass-Through
Only is selected, scan data is not automatically available to the
application program. However, it can be read using COMMREQ 1.
HART Status Starting address for the HART Status data. The format of this data
Reference Address is shown on in Section 11.5.1.
HART Status Length of the HART Status data; 4 words or 64 bits.
Reference Length
HART Data Reference Starting address for the HART data for the module in %I, %Q, %AI,
Address %AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M, or %T memory. The format of this data is
shown in Section 11.5.2.
HART Data Reference 0 Length of the HART data. If Data Scan Control is set to no data,
Length the length is 0. The length is automatically set according to the
selection made for HART Data Scan Control
HART Data Scan HART Data
Control Reference Length
No Data 0
Dynamic Data Only Highest HART-enabled Channel
Number X (18 words or 288 bits)
All Data Highest HART-enabled Channel
CPU configuration. Determines how often the RX3i polls the data
specifies the state of all Channel Value References for the
module.
Inputs Default w/o Enabled Enabled / Disabled: Controls whether inputs will be set to their
Terminal Block defaults if the Terminal Block is removed.
removed. This parameter does not affect module faults including
the Terminal Block loss/add fault generation.
Analog Input Mode Single-ended Single-ended / Differential: This selection must match the input
Input Mode wiring to the module.
A/D Filter Frequency 40Hz Low pass A/D hardware filter setting for all inputs on the module:
8, 12, 16, 40, 200, or 500Hz. Default is 40Hz. Frequencies below
the filter setting are not filtered by hardware.


Range -10 Vdc to +10 For Current/Voltage: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc, 0 to +10 Vdc, 0 to
(Not for Range Type Vdc +5Vdc, 1Vdc to +5Vdc, -5Vdc to +5Vdc, -20mA to +20mA, 4 to
Disabled) 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA

Format point
High Scale Value The defaults for Note: Scaling is disabled if both High Scale Eng. Units equals
(Eng Units) the four Scaling High Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units equals Low Scale
parameters A/D Units.
depend on the
configured Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.
Range Type
Low Scale Value Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be lower
and Range.
(Eng Units) than the high scaling value.
Each Range and
High Scale Value Range Type Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be
(A/D Units) have a different greater than the low scaling value.
set of defaults.
(A/D Units)
11.2.3.2.1 Input Scaling: ALG626 and ALG628

A/D input value.

Example 1
For a voltage input, 6.0 volts represents a speed of 20 feet per second, and 1.0 volt represents 0 feet per

Feet per
(Engineering
Units)
0.000
Figure 314: Scaling Example ALG626/ALG628
inputs for a voltage that lies outside the range. If a voltage of 10.0V were input to the channel, the module
Example 2

Counts

-32,000 +10,000
-10,000
Voltage
Figure 315: Scaling Example ALG626/ALG628

Positive Rate of Change Limit 0.0 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that
(Eng Units) will trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. Default is
disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
parameter.
Negative Rate of Change Limit 0.0 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that
(Eng Units) will trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. Default is
disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
parameter.
Rate of Change Sampling Rate 0.0 Time to wait between comparisons (from 0 to 300
seconds). Default of 0.0 is to check after every input
sample.
11.2.3.2.2 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG626 and ALG628

These modules can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of Change in Engineering Units
per Second. When either Rate of Change parameter is configured to be non-zero, the module takes the
difference in Engineering Units between the previous rate of change sample and the current sample, then
divides by the elapsed time between samples.
If the Engineering Units change from the previous sample to current sample is negative, the module
If the Engineering Units change between samples is positive, the module compares the results in comparing
parameters.


(Eng Units) the High-High, All of the alarm parameters are specified in
High, Low, and Engineering Units. To use alarming, the A/D Alarm
High Alarm Low-Low Mode must also be configured as enabled.
(Eng Units) parameters High-High Alarm and Low-Low Alarm: When the
depend on the configured value is reached or passed, a Low-Low
configured Range Alarm or High-High Alarm is triggered. The configured
Low Alarm
Type and Range. values must be lower than/higher than the
(Eng Units)
Each Range and corresponding low/high alarm limits.
Range Type has a High Alarm and Low Alarm: When the configured value
Low-Low Alarm different set of is reached or below (above), a Low (High) Alarm is
(Eng Units) default values. triggered.
High and Low Alarm Deadbands: A range in
High-High Alarm Deadband Engineering Units above the alarm condition (low
(Eng Units) deadband) or below the alarm condition (high
deadband) where the alarm status bit can remain set
High Alarm Deadband even after the alarm condition goes away. For the
(Eng Units) alarm status to clear, the channel input must fall
outside the deadband range.
Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear
Low Alarm Deadband
condition to be outside the Engineering Unit User
(Eng Units)
Limits range. For example, if the engineering unit
range for a channel is -1000.0 to +1000.0 and a High
Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm Deadband
Low-Low Alarm Deadband value range is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband of
(Eng Units) 1100.0 or more would put the High Alarm clear
condition below –1000.0 units making the alarm
impossible to clear within the limits.
Software Filtering Disabled Disabled / Enabled. Controls whether software

filtering will be performed on the inputs.
Integration Time 0 Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the
(ms) software filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.
A value of 0 indicates software filter is disabled. A
value of 100 indicates data will achieve 63.2% of its
value in 100ms. Default is 0.

11.2.3.2.3 Using Alarming: ALG626 and ALG628

channel alarm.
as explained below.

Example:



HART Communications Disabled Enabled/disabled. Set this to enabled if the channel will
use HART communications. Enabling HART
communications on a channel forces the channel to 4-
20mA operation.
HART Slot Variables Disabled Enabled/disabled. If HART Slot Variables is enabled, the
module will periodically send HART command #33 to
request data. Channel variables will be read and placed in
the HART scan block channel data. For each slot, the
variable assignment code can be set between 0 and 255.
Slot Code 0, 1, 2, 3 1 The slot transmitter variable assignment code that will be
used to retrieve data from the connected HART device.
This is used with HART Pass-Through command 33, byte
0. These values are used in the request data for HART
command #33.
11.2.4 Input Module Data Formats: ALG626 and ALG628

This section explains how the module uses separate reference areas that can be assigned during module
configuration:
▪ Channel Value Reference Data, required memory for the analog input channel values.
▪ Input Channel Diagnostic Reference Data, optional memory for channel faults and alarms.
▪ Module Status Reference Data, optional memory for general module status data.
In addition, during configuration, optional HART Reference Data, memory can be assigned. Refer to the
section “HART Reference Data” later in this chapter for details.

11.2.4.1 Channel Value Reference Data: ALG626 and ALG628

The module reports its input channel data in its configured Channel Value Reference input words, beginning at
its assigned Channel Value Reference Address. Each channel value occupies 2 words, whether the channel is
used or not:
Channel Value
Contains this Input
Reference Address
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 Channel 9
+18, 19 Channel 10
+20, 21 Channel 11
+22, 23 Channel 12
+24, 25 Channel 13
+26, 27 Channel 14
+28, 29 Channel 15
+30, 31 Channel 16

11.2.4.1.1 Resolution and Range Type

The actual resolution for each input depends on the Range Type and A/D Filter Frequency configured for that
channel. At higher Filter Frequencies, input resolution decreases. The approximate resolution in bits for each
Filter Frequency and Range Type are displayed in the following table.
Range Type
Filter 0 to 10 0 to 5Vdc,
Frequency Vdc, 1Vdc to 5Vdc,
±10 Vdc
±5Vdc, ±20 0 to 20mA,
Vdc 4 to 20mA
8 Hz 18 17 16
12 Hz 17 16 15
16 Hz 17 16 15
40 Hz 16 15 14
200 Hz 15 14 13
500 Hz 14 13 12
11.2.4.1.2 Channel Scanning

These modules use 4 A/D converters to achieve the fastest possible channel scan times. The module has up
to four acquisition cycles for each module scan. The acquisition cycles and channels acquired during each
cycle are:
Channels Acquired
Acquisition
Cycle
IC695ALG628 IC695ALG626
1 1, 5 1, 5, 9, 13
2 2, 6 2, 6, 10, 14
3 3, 7 3, 7, 11, 15
4 4, 8 4, 8, 12, 16
To bypass an acquisition cycle, all channels that would be acquired during that cycle must be disabled.
For fastest scan times, always wire by acquisition cycle. For example, if only eight channels were used on the
16-channel module, IC695ALG626, channels 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, and 14 should be used for optimum
performance.

11.2.4.2 Input Channel Diagnostic Reference Data: ALG626 and

ALG628
If the module is configured to use a Diagnostic Reference Address, it reports channel diagnostics status data to
the CPU. The CPU stores this data at the Diagnostic Reference Address configured for this module. Use of this
feature is optional.

Address Data for:
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 Channel 9
+18, 19 Channel 10
+20, 21 Channel 11
+22, 23 Channel 12
+24, 25 Channel 13
+26, 27 Channel 14
+28, 29 Channel 15
+30, 31 Channel 16

11.2.4.3 Module Status Reference Data: ALG626 and ALG628

The module can optionally be configured to return two bits of module status data to the CPU. The CPU stores
this data in the 32-bit Module Status Reference area configured for this module.
During operation, the PLC must be in an I/O Enabled mode for the current Module Status to be scanned and
updated in reference memory.

The module automatically checks for the presence of a Terminal Block. The TB LED indicates the state of the
terminal block of this module. It is green when the Terminal Block is present or red if it is not.

whether the fault is a "Loss of terminal block" or an "Addition of terminal block." If a Terminal Block is not
Bit 2 of the Module Status Reference indicates the status of the terminal block.
11.2.5 Field Wiring: IC695ALG626 and ALG628, Single-Ended

Mode
The following table lists wiring connections for Single-ended mode.
Terminal ALG628 ALG626 ALG628 ALG626 Terminal

5 Common Common 23
10 No Channel 9 IN+ No Connection Channel 9 Current Return (IRTN9) 28
Connection
11 No Channel 10 IN+ No Connection Channel 10 Current Return 29
Connection (IRTN10)
Connection (IRTN11)
Connection (IRTN12)
14 Common Common 32
Connection (IRTN13)
Connection (IRTN14)
Connection (IRTN15)
Connection (IRTN16)

Current Input For single-ended mode, a voltage

Channel 1 IN+ + I input should be connected
between its Channel IN+ terminal
Channel 2 IN+ Channel 2 Current Return and a Common (COM) return
Voltage Input
Channel 3 IN+ Channel 3 Current Return terminal.
+
Channel 4 IN+ V Channel 4 Current Return A current input should be
Common Common connected between its Channel IN+
terminal and its Channel Current
• • Return Terminal. In addition, a
• • jumper wire should be connected
between the Channel Current
• • Return terminal and a Common
(COM) return.
Figure 316: Field Wiring Single-Ended ALG626 or ALG628
11.2.6 Field Wiring: IC695ALG626 and ALG628, Differential

Mode
The following table lists wiring connections for modules configured for Differential mode.
Terminal ALG628 ALG626 ALG628 ALG626 Terminal

5 Common Common 23
10 No Connection Channel 5 IN+ No Connection Channel 5 Current Return (IRTN9) 28
12 No Connection Channel 6 IN+ No Connection Channel 6 Current Return 30
(IRTN11)
14 Common Common 32
(IRTN13)
(IRTN15)

For differential inputs, two adjacent

Voltage Input
Channel 1 IN+ Channel 1 Current Return terminals are connected as one
V channel. The lower-numbered
Channel 1 IN- No Connection
terminal acts as the high side.
Channel 2 IN+ Current Input
I A voltage input is connected
Channel 2 IN- No Connection between the two adjacent Channel
Common Common IN terminals, as shown in Figure 317.
*
• • A current input is connected
between the Channel IN+ and
• •
Current Return terminals for that
• • channel. In addition, a jumper wire
must be connected between the
Figure 317: Field Wiring Differential Mode ALG626 or ALG628 Channel IN - terminal and the
corresponding Channel Current
* Keep this jumper as short as possible to minimize error due to the
added resistance of the wire. This resistance should be 25mΩ or less.
Return terminal.
Tie common to signal ground for

improved channel-to-channel
Crosstalk immunity.
Two door cards are provided with the module: one shows connections for single-ended mode and the other
shows connections for differential. Insert the card that matches the wiring that will be used.
11.2.7 HART Device Connections

Example connections for 2-wire transmitters are displayed in the following figure.
11.2.7.1 Connecting Two-Wire Current Loop

Channel n IN+ HART Device 24V Channel n Current Return

- + + -
Common
Figure 318: HART 2-Wire Current Loop Connection
11.2.7.2 Connecting an Active-Source Device
Channel n IN+ HART Device Channel n Current Return

+ -
Common
Figure 319: HART Active Source Device Connection

11.3 Analog Output Module 8-Channel

Non-Isolated Analog Current/Voltage Output module, IC695ALG728, provides
eight configurable voltage or current output channels with HART version 5.0
communications capability on each channel. The module has two internal
HART modems. Four single-ended channels are multiplexed with each HART
modem.
Analog channels can be configured for these output ranges:
▪ Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc
Channels that will use HART communications must be configured for the
4-20mA range.
11.3.1 Features
 Completely software-configurable, no module jumpers to set
 Individually enable or disable channels
 Clamping and Alarm Limits
 Latching of Alarms
 Configurable output bias
 Rapid channel acquisition times based on filter frequency
 Full auto-calibration
 On-board error-checking
 Configurable scaling and offsets per channel
 High alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, low-low alarm detection and
 Module fault reporting
 Configurable Hold Last State or Output Defaults
 Version 5.0 HART communications
 The module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
 Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal
Section 2.6.4.1.
 Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility
Figure 320: IC695ALG728 (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU
kit.23
 This module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-
shroud depth needed for shielded wiring. Terminal Blocks are ordered
separately.


The module must receive its 24Vdc power from an external source. The external source must be connected
directly to the terminal block of this module. It cannot be connected via the TB1 connector on the RX3i
11.3.3 LEDs: ALG728

LED State Indicates
Module OK ON Green Module OK and configured
Green or Amber, blinking slowly Module OK but not configured
Green, blinking rapidly Module performing power-up sequence
Field Status ON Green No faults on any enabled channel, and Terminal Block is
present
ON Amber and TB Green Terminal Block is installed, fault on at least one channel,
or field power is not present
ON Amber and TB Red Terminal Block not fully removed, field power still
detected.
OFF and TB Red Terminal block not present and no field power is
detected.
TB ON Red Terminal block not present or not fully seated
ON Green Terminal block is present

Voltage: ±10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc

Backplane Power For ALG728-CB or earlier: 380 mA maximum at 3.3Vdc

Requirements
For ALG728-DC or later: 250 mA maximum at 3.3Vdc
Power Dissipation within 7.25 Watts maximum

Module (Vuser=24Vdc)
Thermal Derating Refer to Thermal Derating Charts ALG728 below. Applies to Current Mode
only.
External Power Supply Vuser Voltage Range: +19.2Vdc to +30 Vdc

Current required: 250mA maximum
Resolution ±10 Vdc: 15.9 bits, 0 to 10 Vdc: 14.9 bits, 0 to 20mA: 15.9 bits,
4 to 20mA: 15.6 bits
HART Communications Version 5.0 HART protocol
Output Data Format Configurable as floating-point IEEE 32-bit or 16-bit integer in a 32-bit
field
Analog Update Rate 16ms with HART (approximate, all eight channels)
(Determined by I/O scan time, 8ms without HART (approximate, all eight channels)
application dependent.)
HART Data Scan Time (in seconds) The HART data scan can consist of up to two acquisition cycles (similar
but asynchronous to the analog scan time).
Each cycle includes a specific set of channels. For ALG728: 1-4, 5-8 are separate channel groups.
Total HART scan time depends on the number of acquisition cycles in the scan, number of retries,
enabling/disabling of slot variables, and use of pass-through commands. If slot variables are enabled,
update times are doubled.
1 HART device in group Each HART Data channel updates every 0.7 second (typical)
2 HART devices in group Each HART Data channel updates every 1.9 seconds (typical)
Output Over-voltage Current outputs only: -30V for 60 seconds, +30V for one hour
Protection

Accurate to within 0.30% of full scale at 60°C
68

Maximum Output Load Current: 850  maximum at Vuser = 20V

Voltage: 2 k minimum

Output Settling Time Voltage Output: 2ms, 0 to 95%

Current output with HART: 70ms, 0 to 95%
Current output without HART: 23ms, 0 to 95%
Isolation, Field to Backplane 2550 Vdc for one second
Maximum Compliance Vuser – 3V (minimum) to Vuser (maximum)

Voltage
11.3.4.1 Thermal Derating, ALG728 Current Mode
IC695ALG728 Vuser = 26.5V IC695ALG728 Vuser = 30V

Ambient (Degrees C)
60
60 59
Ambient (Degrees C)
59 58
58 57
56
57
56
Shorted 55 Shorted
54
55 53
54 250 Ohms 52
51 250 Ohms
53
52 50
51 500 Ohms 49
48 500 Ohms
50 47
49 46
48 850 Ohms 45 850 Ohms
47 44
46 43
42
45 41
40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Channels Channels
Figure 321: Thermal Derating Charts ALG728 Current Mode

Outputs Reference %AQxxxxx Starting address for the output data of this module. This defaults
Address to the next available %AQ block. The format of this data is shown
on in Section 11.4.2.
Outputs Reference ALG728: 16 The number of words used for the output data of this module.

Output Command %AIxxxxx Stating address for the command feedback data of this module.
Feedback Reference This defaults to the next available %AI address after a non-zero
Address length is configured.
Feedback Length this module. Length defaults to 0. It can be set to 8 or 16,
depending on the module type being configured.
Address defaults to the next available %I block. The format of this data is
shown in Section 11.4.2.2.
Length Channel Diagnostics data. Default is 0, which means mapping of
Channel Diagnostics is disabled. Change this to a non-zero value
to enable Channel Diagnostics mapping. Maximum length is 256
bits.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of this module. This defaults
Reference Address to the next available %I block. The format of this data is shown in
Section 11.4.2.3.
Module Status 0 Read Only. The number of bits (0 or 32) required for the Module
Reference Length Status data. Default is 0, which means mapping of Module Status
data is disabled. Change this to a non-zero value to enable
Module Status data mapping.

The module returns a copy of the analog output data received from CPU in its corresponding channel analog
input shared memory. Output Feedback can be monitored to check the values being sent to the channels.
The data is in the same scaled format as the output data for each channel. During normal operation, this
feedback data should match the actual output data after one or more PLC scans of module inputs. During
faults, ramping, over-range, and clamping conditions, the analog output data may differ from the
commanded output.
Detection of the Over-temperature status bit is always enabled.


HART Data Scan No data Selects whether the CPU will automatically scan from the HART
Control module: no data, changed data only, or all data for each HART-
enabled channel. Refer to the below for details of memory usage.
Dynamic Data Only: the first 18 words or 288 bits of HART data per
input device.
All Data: all of the HART data (88 words or 1408 bits for each HART
input device.
HART Pass-Through Once per Selects whether the module will automatically service a HART pass-
Service Options two through command each 1, 2, or 4-channel scans or only upon
channel change of HART device configuration, or if data hasn’t been read for
scans 10 seconds (Pass-Through Only). If Pass-Through Only is selected,
scan data is not available to the application program.
HART Status Starting address of the HART Status data. Format of this data is
Reference Address shown in Section 11.5.1.
HART Status Length of the HART Status data; 4 words or 64 bits.
Reference Length
HART Data Starting address for the HART data of this module in %I, %Q, %AI,
Reference Address %AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M, or %T memory. Format of this data is shown
in Section 11.5.2.
HART Data 0 Length of the HART data. If Data Scan Control is set to no data, the
Reference Length length is 0. The length is automatically set according to the
selection made for HART Data Scan Control:
HART Data Scan Control HART Data Reference Length
No Data 0
Dynamic Data Only Highest HART-enabled Channel
All Data Highest HART-enabled Channel
I/O Scan Set 1 Assigns the module I/O status data to a scan set defined in the CPU
configuration. Determines how often the RX3i polls the data
Channel Faults w/o Disabled Enabled / Disabled: Controls whether channel faults and configured
Terminal Block alarm responses will be generated after a Terminal Block removal.
The default setting of Disabled means channel faults and alarms are
suppressed when the Terminal Block is removed. This parameter
does not affect module faults including the Terminal Block loss/add
fault generation.
Module Fault Enabled Enabled / Disabled. Controls whether the module will report faults
Reporting Enabled resulting from either loss of field power or over-temperature
conditions.
faults.

Over Temp Enabled Enabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Fault Reporting enabled, this
parameter controls reporting of Over-temperature module faults.
Reporting Enabled
Field Power Disabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Interrupt Reporting enabled, this
Removed Enabled parameter controls interrupts for Field Power Removed module
faults.
Over Temp Enabled Disabled Enabled / Disabled. With Module Interrupt Reporting enabled, this
parameter controls interrupts for Over-temperature module faults.


Range Type Disabled Sets up the type of output to be used for each channel. Choices are:
Current Disabled Voltage, Disabled Current, Current/Voltage. Channels used
for HART communications must have Range Type set to
Current/Voltage.
Range (Only for -10 Vdc to For Current/Voltage: -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc, 0V to +10 Vdc, 4mA to 20
Range Type +10 Vdc mA, 0mA to 20 mA. Channels used for HART communications must
Current/Voltage have Range set to 4mA to 20A.
)
Channel Value 32-bit 16-bit integer or 32-bit floating-point
Format Floating-
point
Outputs Default Force to Controls the state the output will be set to in Outputs Disabled mode
Default Value (stop), if a fault occurs, if power is lost, or if the configuration is
cleared.
Choices are Hold Last State, or default to a specific configured default
value.
output current for that channel to 0mA (the output voltage for that channel will be non-zero).
output voltage for that channel to 0V (the output current for that channel will be non-zero).

are:
▪ CPU outputs are not enabled
▪ Backplane power is not ok. In that case, there is no ramping, even if ramping is enabled.


Request.
reconfiguration.

Default Value Enabled Ramp Rate (Except where indicated, field
Enabled power is assumed to be present).
Outputs Enabled and N/A N/A No Output goes to its commanded

No Faults value from reference memory;

reference memory at the Outputs
Enabled ramp rate. Defaults don’t
apply.
Outputs Disabled, Default Value No N/A Output is set to the Default Value
Fault Mode, or
Reconfiguration Default Value Yes N/A Output is ramped to the Default
Value at the Default ramp rate,


Loss of Backplane Default Value N/A N/A Output is set to the Default Value.
Power or First
Configuration Store
after Power-up Hold Last N/A N/A Output is held at last commanded
State value.
Hot Removal, Reset N/A N/A N/A Output is held at last commanded
with SVCREQ 24 or value.
Cleared
Configuration

Type and Range. Default = High A/D Limit of selected range type.
Low Scale Value Each Range and Range Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type. Must
(Eng Units) Type have a different be lower than the high scaling value.
set of defaults.
(A/D Units)
11.3.5.2.3 Output Scaling: ALG728

11.4 Example


Counts

-32,000 +10,000
-10,000
Voltage
Figure 322: Scaling Example ALG728

Low Alarm Range.
(Eng Units)
(Eng Units)

Enabled
(Eng Units) Vdc could be restricted to -8Vdc to +7.5Vdc.
11.4.1.1.1 Lower, Upper Clamp and Alarms: ALG728


interrupt alarms.


If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the enable reference memory reporting of alarms into the
additional parameters listed below can Diagnostic Reference area.
be used to enable specific types of
alarms. Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault logging of
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the These parameters enable or disable the individual
additional parameters listed below can diagnostics features of a channel.
Faults.
feature.

“Diagnostic Reporting Enable” menu, the module will
Under Range Enable Disabled set the Over Range bit in the Diagnostic Reference for
the channel.

If any of these parameters is disabled, the module
Upper Clamp Alarm Enable Disabled does not react to the associated alarm conditions.

the “Fault Reporting Enable” menu, the Low Alarm
fault is not logged in the I/O Fault Table when Low
Alarm is detected on the channel.

11.4.1.1.2 Alarming and Fault Reporting: ALG728

channel alarm.
as explained below.

Example:
In this example, the Outputs Reference Address block is mapped to %AQ0001-%AQ0008. An I/O Interrupt
block should be triggered if a High Alarm condition occurs on channel 2.

The reference address for Channel 2 corresponds to %AQ00003 (2 Words per channel), so the interrupt
program block Scheduling properties should be set for the I/O Interrupt Type and %AQ0003 as the Trigger.


HART Communications Disabled Enabled/disabled. Set HART Communications to enabled

if the channel will use HART communications. Enabling
HART communications forces the channel to 4-20mA
operation.
HART Slot Variables Disabled Enabled/disabled. If HART Slot Variables is enabled, the
module will periodically send HART command #33 to
request data. Channel variables will be read and placed in
the HART scan block channel data. For each slot, the
variable assignment code can be set between 0 and 255.
Slot Code 0, 1, 2, 3 1 The slot transmitter variable assignment code that will be
used to retrieve data from the connected HART device.
These values are used in the request data for HART
command #33.
11.4.2 Output Module Data Formats: ALG728

This section explains how the module uses separate reference areas that can be assigned during module
configuration:
▪ Output Value Reference Data, required memory for the analog output channel values.
▪ Output Channel Diagnostic Reference Data, optional memory for channel faults and alarms.
▪ Module Status Reference Data, optional memory for general module status data.
In addition, during configuration, optional HART Reference Data, memory can be assigned. Refer to the
section “HART Reference Data” later in this chapter for details.
11.4.2.1 Output Value Reference Data: ALG728

The module receives its channel data from its configured output words, beginning at its assigned Outputs
Reference Address. Each channel occupies 2 words, whether the channel is used or not:
Outputs Reference Address Contains Data for:
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3

+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8

11.4.2.2 Output Channel Diagnostic Reference Data: ALG728

The module can optionally be configured to report channel diagnostics status data to the CPU. The CPU
stores this data at the Diagnostic Reference Address configured for this module. Use of this feature is optional.
The diagnostics data each channel occupies 2 words (whether the channel is used or not):

Address Data for:
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
channel.



The module automatically checks for the presence of a Terminal Block. The TB LED indicates the state of the
terminal block of this module. It is green when the Terminal Block is present or red if it is not.

The following table lists wiring connections for the module. There are no shield terminals. For shielding, tie
cable shields to the ground bar along the bottom of the backplane. M3 tapped holes are provide in the
ground bar for this purpose.
Channel 2 Channel 1
1 19
Voltage Out Voltage Out

Channel 2 Channel 1
2 20
Current Out Current Out
Common Common
3 21
(COM) (COM)
Channel 4 Channel 3
4 22
Voltage Out Voltage Out
Channel 4 Channel 3
5 23
Current Out Current Out
Common Common
6 24
(COM) (COM)
Current
Channel 6 Channel 2 Voltage Out 1 Output 19 Channel 1 Voltage Out
Channel 5
7 25
Voltage Out +
Voltage Out
Channel 2 Current Out 2 20 Channel 1 Current Out
I
Channel 6 Common 3 Voltage _ 21 Common Channel 5
8 Output 26
Current Out Channel 4 Voltage Out 4 22 Channel 3 Voltage Out Current Out
+
Channel 4 Current Out 5 V 23 Channel 3 Current Out
Common _ Common
9 Common 6 24 Common 27
(COM) (COM)
. .
10
Channel 8
Voltage Out
. . Channel 7
Voltage Out
28
. .
Channel 8 18 36 Channel 7
11 24VDC
29
Current Out - +
Current Out
Common Common
12 30
(COM) Figure 323: Field Wiring ALG728 (COM)
Common Common
13 31
(COM) (COM)
Common Common
14 32
(COM) (COM)
Common Common
15 33
(COM) (COM)
Common Common
16 34
(COM) (COM)
Common Common
17 35
(COM) (COM)

Common
18 +24V In 36
(COM)
Each channel can be individually-configured to operate as a voltage output or a current output, not both
simultaneously. All the common terminals are connected together internally. Therefore, any common
terminal can be used for the negative lead of the external power supply.
11.4.4 HART Device Connections

Example connections for 2-wire transmitters are displayed in the following figure.
11.4.4.1.1 Connecting a HART Output Device
Channel I out +
HART Device
Common -
Figure 324: Attaching HART 2-Wire Output Device
11.4.4.1.2 Connecting a HART Input Transmitter to an Output Channel

In this type of application, the HART output module, IC695ALG728, cannot read the analog current level
from the HART device. However, the module can communicate with the HART signal. There is no analog
input to the module.
Channel I out HART Device

250 - + +
24V
Ohms -
Common
Figure 325: HART Input Transmitter attached to Analog Output Channel
11.5 HART Reference Data

If HART Data Scan Control is configured as “Dynamic Data Only” or “All Data”, the CPU automatically scans
the HART data listed on the next page into the HART Data Reference Address configured for this module. The
data length depends on whether All Data or Dynamic Data is selected.

This data includes response data associated with several HART Pass-Through Commands. The module stores
this data, and then passes it to the CPU either in the automatic HART data scan described above, or in
response to function blocks in the application program.
Note that invalid or uninitialized REAL (floating-point) data will be set to NaN (Not-A-Number).
11.5.1 HART Status Data

In addition to the HART Reference Data, the module reports the status of HART communications in its
configured HART Status Reference Address. The length of this data is 4 words / 64 bits:
Word 1 Device Present, one bit per channel. Channel 1 in lowest bit. For 8-channel module,
bits 9-16 are not used.
Word 2 Device Initializing, one bit per channel. Channel 1 in lowest bit. For 8-channel
module, bits 9-16 are not used.
Words 3 and 4 Not used
11.5.2 HART Data Format

Byte Offset Field Description Type

Begin End
0x0000 0x0003 HART Primary Variable, CMD#3, Bytes 5-8 REAL
0x0004 0x0007 HART Secondary Variable CMD#3, Bytes 10-13 REAL
Dynamic HART Data Only
0x0008 0x000b HART Tertiary Variable CMD#3, Bytes 15-18 REAL

0x000c 0x000f HART Fourth Variable CMD#3, Bytes 20-23 REAL
0x0010 0x0013 Slot 0 value. CMD#33, Bytes 2-5 REAL
0x0014 0x0017 Slot 1 value CMD#33, Bytes 8-11 REAL
0x0018 0x001b Slot 2 value CMD#33, Bytes 14-17 REAL
0x001c 0x001f Slot 3 value CMD#33, Bytes 20-23 REAL
0x0020 HART communication status byte from the last HART command response. BYTE
0x0021 HART device status byte from the last HART command response. BYTE
0x0022 Spare for alignment. BYTE*2
0x0024 HART device Manufacturer ID. CMD#0, Byte 1 BYTE
0x0025 HART device type code. CMD#0, Byte 2 BYTE
0x0026 Minimum number of preambles device requires. CMD#0, Byte 3 BYTE
0x0027 HART Universal command code. CMD#0, Byte 4 BYTE
0x0028 HART Transmitter specific revision. CMD#0, Byte 5 BYTE
0x0029 HART device software revision number. CMD#0, Byte 6 BYTE
0x002A HART device hardware revision number. CMD#0, Byte 7 BYTE
0x002B HART flags. CMD#0, Byte 8 BYTE
0x002C 0x002F HART device ID number. CMD#0, Byte 9-11 BYTE*4
0x0030 0x0037 8-character device tag. CMD#13, Bytes 0-5 in unpacked ASCII. BYTE*8
All HART Data
0x0038 0x0047 Device Descriptor. CMD#13, Bytes 6-17 in unpacked ASCII BYTE*16
0x0048 HART Primary Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 4 BYTE
0x0049 HART Secondary Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 9, 0 if not present. BYTE
0x004a HART Tertiary Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 14, 0 if not present. BYTE
0x004b HART Fourth Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 19, 0 if not present. BYTE
0x004c HART Primary Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 0 BYTE
0x004d HART Secondary Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 1 BYTE
0x004e HART Tertiary Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 2 BYTE
0x004f HART Fourth Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 3 BYTE
0x0050 Units code for range parameter. CMD#15, Byte 2 BYTE
0x0051 0x0053 Spare for alignment BYTE*3
0x0054 0x0057 Low transmitter range for analog signal in eng. units. CMD#15, Bytes 3-6 REAL
0x0058 0x005b High transmitter range for analog signal in eng. units. CMD#15, Bytes 7-10 REAL
0x005c Slot 0 units code. CMD#33, Byte 1 BYTE
0x005d Slot 1 units code. CMD#33, Byte 7 BYTE
0x005e Slot 2 units code. CMD#33, Byte 13 BYTE
0x005f Slot 3 units code. CMD#33, Byte 19 BYTE
0x0060 Slot 0 variable code. CMD#33, Byte 0 BYTE
0x0064 0x0083 32-character message. CMD#12, Bytes 0-23 unpacked ASCII. BYTE*32
0x0084 0x0087 Stored date in the field device. CMD#13, Bytes 18-20. BYTE*4
The final assembly number is used for identifying the material and electronics
0x0088 0x008b BYTE*4
that comprise the field device. CMD#16, Bytes 0-2

0x008c 0x00a4 The extended status returned by HART command 48. BYTE*25
0x00a5 0x00af Spare BYTE*11
11.6 COMMREQs for HART Modules

Three Communication Request (COMMREQ) functions can be used in the application program to
communicate with RX3i HART modules.
COMMREQ 1, Get HART Device Information, reads (local rack)
 The TaskID must be set to 1.
Remote Get HART Device Information, reads (remote rack)
 The TaskID must be set to:

o Rack mounted PNC, Hex 85 or decimal 133
o Embedded PNC, Hex 20085 or decimal 131205
Note that a UDFB that automates the COMMREQ control logic is available for download from the GE support
website. (Article ID: 000017816) https://ge-ip.force.com/communities/en_US/Download/Remote-Get-
HART-Device-Information-COMMREQ-UDFB
▪
COMMREQ 2, Send HART Pass-Through Command
 The TaskID must be set to 1.
11.6.1 Get HART Device Information, COMMREQ 1 Command

Block
Word Value
Definition
Offset Dec (Hex)
Word 1 8 (0008) Length of command Data Block in words beginning at Word 7.
Word 2 0 (0000) Always 0 (no-wait mode request)
Word 3 Memory type of COMMREQ status word. (Words 3 and 4 specify the starting
address where the status word will be written.) It can be:
Memory Type Memory Type Decimal code
%I Discrete input table (Bit mode) 70
%Q Discrete output table (Bit mode) 72
%I Discrete input table (Byte mode) 16
%Q Discrete output table (Byte mode) 18

Word Value
Definition
Offset Dec (Hex)
%R Register memory 8
%W Word memory 196
%AI Analog input table 10
%AQ Analog output table 12
Word 4 0-based offset COMMREQ status word address minus 1.
Example: if Words 3 and 4 contain values of 8 and 9 respectively, the status
word will be written to %R10.
Word 5, 6 0 (0000) Reserved
Word 7 1 (0001) Command code for the COMMREQ to be executed.
Get HART Device Information = 1.
Word 8 1 (0001) Number of Response Reference areas that follow (does not include
COMMREQ status word). Always 1.
Word 9 Memory type for the reply data. (Words 9—12 specify the starting address
where the response will be written.)
%W Word memory 196
%T Discrete temporary memory (Byte) 20
%M Discrete internal memory (Byte) 22
Word 10 0 (0000) Bit Offset (must be 0 for all requests).
Word 11 0-based offset Starting address to which the response will be written. The value entered is
(low word). the 0-based offset from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type
specified in Word 9. This offset is in bytes or words depending on the memory
type specified. Valid ranges of values depend on the memory ranges of the
host PLC.
Example: If Words 9 and 11 contain values of 8 and 250 respectively, the
response will be written to %R251.
Word 12 0-based offset High word of offset. Value = 0 for most memory types. High word is non-zero
(high word) only on if %W memory is used.
Word 13 Words: 90 Maximum size of response area. Must be 90 if word memory type is used; 180
(005A) if discrete memory type is used.
Bytes: 180
(00B4)
Word 14 Range 1-16. Channel Number 1-16 (valid range depends on module channel count and
single-ended versus differential mode)
11.6.2 Remote Get HART Device Information, Command Block

Word Value
Definition
Offset Dec (Hex)
Word 1 11 (000B) Length of command Data Block in words beginning at Word 7.
Word 2 0 (0000) Always 0 (no-wait mode request)
Word 3 Memory type of COMMREQ status words69. (Words 3 and 4 specify the
starting address where the status words will be written.) It can be:
%W Word memory 196
Word 4 0-based offset COMMREQ status words address minus 1.
Example: if Words 3 and 4 contain values of 8 and 9 respectively, the status
words will be written to %R10 and %R11.
Word 5, 6 0 (0000) Reserved
Word 7 1 (0001) Command code for the COMMREQ to be executed.
Get HART Device Information = 1.
Word 8 1 (0001) Number of Response Reference areas that follow (does not include
COMMREQ status word). Always 1.
Word 9 Memory type for the reply data. (Words 9—12 specify the starting address
where the response will be written.)
%W Word memory 196
Word 10 0 (0000) Bit Offset (must be 0 for all requests).
Word 11 0-based offset Starting address to which the response will be written. The value entered is
(low word). the 0-based offset from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type
specified in Word 9. This offset is in bytes or words depending on the memory
type specified. Valid ranges of values depend on the memory ranges of the
host PLC.
Word 12 0-based offset High word of offset. Value = 0 for most memory types. High word is non-zero
(high word) only on if %W memory is used.
69
The COMMREQ status words consist of two words of memory. The lower 16-bit word provides the COMMREQ Status and the upper
16-bit word provides the Command Status.

Word Value
Definition
Offset Dec (Hex)
Word 13 Words: 90 Maximum size of response area. Must be 90 if word memory type is used; 180
(005A) if discrete memory type is used.
Bytes: 180
(00B4)
Word 14 Range 1-16. Channel Number 1-16 (valid range depends on module channel count and
Word 15 Device ID ID of Remote PROFINET Scanner.
Word 16 Slot Remote Rack Slot number of HART capable Analog module.
Word 17 SubSlot Remote Rack SubSlot number of HART capable Analog module
11.6.2.1 Command Status Word

The Command status word for the Remote Get HART Device Information command is displayed in the
following figure.
Value Description
Dec (Hex)
0 (0000) No command-specific status available.
1 (0001) Invalid PROFINET device number.
2 (0002) Undeclared PROFINET device (invalid name or nonexistent).
3 (0003) Invalid slot or subslot number.
4 (0004) Non-specific PROFINET error.
5 (0005) Invalid channel number.
6 (0006) Non-specific command error.
11.6.2.2 Minimum Firmware & GSDML Requirements

The Remote Get HART Device Information COMMREQ requires the following firmware revisions and
GSDMLs:
 RX3i CPUs with version 8.95 or later

 IC695PNC001 RX3i PROFINET Controller version 2.26 or later
 IC695PNS001 RX3i PROFINET Scanner version 2.41 or later, or IC695PNS101
 IC695PNS001 RX3i PROFINET Scanner GSDML-V2.3-GEIP-RX3iPNS-20160602.xml
Note that the updated IC695PNS001 RX3i PROFINET Scanner GSDML-V2.3-GEIP-RX3iPNS-20160602.xml is

required to enable the HART Pass Through Service Options settings for HART capable analog modules in PME.
The settings are:

 Once per Channel Scan

 Once per Two Channel Scans (default)
 Once per Four Channel Scans
 Pass-Thru Only
The first three option settings set the rate at which an analog module that supports HART communications
queries a HART device for its Remote Get HART Device Information data. Whereas, the Pass-Thru Only setting
configures channel scanning that occurs only when the HART device configuration changes or has not been read
for 10 seconds. Note that the Remote Get HART Device Information feature does not work when the “Pass-Thru
Only” setting is selected.
11.6.3 COMMREQ Status Word

The COMMREQ status word for the Remote and Local Get HART Device Information command is displayed in
the following figure.
Value Description
Dec (Hex)
0 (0000) Device has not yet processed the COMMREQ.
1 (0001) Command Complete
Note: This status does not necessarily mean success. Some commands have reply
data that must also be checked.
2 (0002) Command Terminated – module busy
3 (0003) Command Terminated – invalid command
4 (0004) Command Terminated – invalid command data
5 (0005) Command Terminated – not enough data
6 (0006) Not used
7 (0007) Command Terminated – not enough memory in reply area
The command did not specify sufficient PLC memory for the reply. Command will be
ignored.

8 (0008) Command Terminated – command-specific error.
Local COMMREQ: Refer to Additional Code in the Status Block for more information.
Remote COMMREQ; Refer to the additional codes in section 11.6.2.1 Command Status
Word for more information.
Example: If the first word (lower) contains a value of 8 and the second word (upper)
contains a value of 3 then the error is an “Invalid slot or subslot number.”
265 (0109) Error, Hart device not connected
521 (0209) Error, Channel not HART-enabled
777 (0309) Error, Analog Output Module, No field power
1033 (0409) Error. HART command not allowed
1289 (0509) Error. Invalid HART command
1545 (0609) Error. Device did not respond
1801 (0709) Error, HART data count too large
11.6.4 Remote and Local Get HART Device Information, Reply

Data Format
The response to a Remote and Local Get HART Device Information COMMREQ is written to the PLC memory
location specified in words 9-12 of the COMMREQ.
Byte Name Description

1, 2 Command Code Echo of Command code. (0x0001)
3, 4 Channel Number Echo of Channel Number
5-8 HART Primary Variable CMD#3, Bytes 5-8. Type: REAL
9-12 HART Secondary Variable CMD#3, Bytes 10-13 Type: REAL
13-16 HART Tertiary Variable CMD#3, Bytes 15-18. Type: REAL
17-20 HART Fourth Variable CMD#3, Bytes 20-23. Type: REAL
21-24 Slot 0 value CMD#33, Bytes 2-5. Type: BYTE
HART communication status byte from the
37 last HART command response, refer to next
page


HART device status byte from the last HART
38
command response, refer to next page.
39-40 Spare for alignment. Type: BYTE
HART device Manufacturer ID. CMD#0, Byte
41 Type: BYTE
1
42 HART device type code. CMD#0, Byte 2 Type: BYTE
Minimum number of preambles device
43 CMD#0, Byte 3. Type: BYTE
requires
44 HART Universal command code CMD#0, Byte 4. Type: BYTE
45 HART Transmitter specific revision CMD#0, Byte 5 Type: BYTE
46 HART device software revision number CMD#0, Byte 6 Type: BYTE
7 HART device hardware revision number CMD#0, Byte 7 Type: BYTE
48 HART flags CMD#0, Byte 8 Type: BYTE
49-52 HART device ID number CMD#0, Byte 9-11 Type: 4 BYTEs
CMD#13, Type: 8 BYTEs. Bytes 0-5 are unpacked
53-60 8-character device tag.
ASCII
CMD#13, TYPE: 16 BYTEs. Bytes 6-17 are
61-76 Device Descriptor
unpacked ASCII
77 HART Primary Variable Units CMD#3, Byte 4. Type: BYTE
78 HART Secondary Variable Units CMD#3, Byte 9, 0 if not present. Type: BYTE
79 HART Tertiary Variable Units CMD#3, Byte 14, 0 if not present. Type: BYTE
80 HART Fourth Variable Units CMD#3, Byte 19, 0 if not present. Type: BYTE
81 HART Primary Variable Code CMD#50, Byte 0 Type: BYTE
82 HART Secondary Variable Code CMD#50, Byte 1 Type: BYTE
83 HART Tertiary Variable Code CMD#50, Byte 2 Type: BYTE
84 HART Fourth Variable Code CMD#50, Byte 3 Type: BYTE
85 Units code for range parameter CMD#15, Byte 2 Type: BYTE
86-88 Spare for alignment 3 BYTEs
Low transmitter range for analog signal in
89-92 CMD#15, Bytes 3-6 Type: REAL
engineering units
High transmitter range for analog signal in
93-96 CMD#15, Bytes 7-10 Type: REAL
engineering units


97 Slot 0 units code CMD#33, Byte 1 Type: REAL
101 Slot 0 variable code CMD#33, Byte 0 Type: REAL
CMD#12, Bytes 0-23 unpacked ASCII. Type: 32
105-136 32-character message
BYTEs
137-140 Stored date in the field device CMD#13, Bytes 18-20. Type 4 BYTEs
Number identifying the field device’s
141-144 CMD#16, Bytes 0-2. Type 4 BYTEs
material and electronics
The extended status returned by HART
145-169 Type: 25 BYTEs
command 48.
170-180 Spare for alignment Type: 11 BYTEs
11.6.5 Sending a HART Pass-Through Command to a HART

Device
The HART module automatically uses several HART Pass-Through commands as described earlier in this
chapter. In addition, the application program can use the Send HART Pass-Through Command (COMMREQ
2) to send HART Pass-Through commands to an RX3i HART module. The HART module stores the data
returned by the command in its on-board memory. This data can then be scanned automatically by the CPU
or read as needed from the application program.
A list of Pass-Through commands is included in this section. The RX3i HART module then passes the
command to the intended HART input or output device. Responses to HART Pass-Through commands are
available to the application program in the COMMREQ replies.
The Send HART Pass-Through Command COMMREQ automatically fills in the Start Character, Address, Byte
Count, Status, and the checksum. The RX3i HART module waits until the data from the HART device is
available before it replies to this command, so the application program does not have to query the module
for the response. The application program must check the COMMREQ Status word to determine when the
reply data is available. The reply is returned between 750mS and 8 seconds later. The reply time depends on
the number of channels enabled, the Pass-Through rate selected, and whether other Pass-Through
operations are occurring at the same time.
Only one application program Pass-Through command per channel is allowed at a time. If another request is
made on a channel that has a Pass-Through in-progress, the module returns a COMMREQ Status Word =
0x0002 (module busy).

11.6.5.1 HART Pass-Through Command Block, COMMREQ 2

Word Value
Definition
Offset Dec (Hex)
Word 1 10+x 000A + x Length of command Data Block in words beginning at Word 7
Word 2 0 0000 Always 0 (no-wait mode request)
Memory type of COMMREQ status word. It can be:
Word 3
%W Word memory 196
COMMREQ status word address minus 1
Word 4 0-based offset Example: if Words 3 and 4 contain values of 8 and 9 respectively, the status
word will be written to %R10.
Word 5 0 0000 Reserved
Word 6 0 0000 Reserved
Command code for the COMMREQ to be executed.
Word 7 2 0002
HART Pass-Through Command = 2
Number of Response Reference areas that follow (does not include
Word 8 1 0001
COMMREQ status word). Always 1
Memory type for the reply data. (Words 9—12 specify the starting address
where the response will be written).
Word 9 %W Word memory 196
Word 10 0 0000 Bit Offset (must be 0 for all requests)
Starting address to which the response will be written. The value entered is
the 0-based offset from the beginning of PLC memory for the memory type
specified in Word 9. This offset will be in bytes or words depending on the
0-based offset
Word 11 memory type specified. Valid ranges of values depend on the memory ranges
(low word)
of the host PLC.

Word Value
Definition
Offset Dec (Hex)
0-based offset High word of offset. Value = 0 for most memory types. Would only have a
Word 12
(high word) non-zero value if %W memory is used
Response data Maximum size of response area. Size in bytes if discrete memory type used
Word 13
size for response. Size in words if word type used
Channel
Channel Number 1-16 (valid range depends on module channel count and
Word 14 Number
(1-16).
HART command HART Pass-Through Command type. HART Pass-Through Commands that
Word 15
(0x0 – 0xff) can be sent to an RX3i HART module are listed in this section.
Command Data
Word 16 Size (in bytes) of command data that follows
byte count
… … …
HART Command Data. Request data must be byte-packed and in big-endian
Word format, PLC CPU format is little-endian, so some commands may require
…
16+x swapping of fields from little-endian to big-endian format as described in this
chapter. This is usually needed for floating-point data.
11.6.5.2 HART Pass-Through Reply Data Format

The RX3i HART module returns the response data below to the CPU memory location specified by words 9-
12 of the COMMREQ. Data beginning at Word 7 of the reply is byte-packed and in big-endian format. PLC
CPU format is little-endian, so some commands may require swapping of fields from big-endian to little-
endian format as described in this chapter. This is usually needed for floating-point data.
Word Name Description
Command
1 Echo of Command code (0x0002)
Code
Channel
2 Echo of Channel Number (same as request)
Number
HART Echo of HART Pass-Through Command type. Refer to the tables in this
3
command section.
Low byte is HART Comm Status and high byte is HART Dev Status from
4 HART Status
HART device response.
Spare for future use. User logic should not check this value because future
5 Spare
module revisions may make this non-zero.
Response
6 Byte Count Size in bytes of the response data that follows.
(x)

7L Data Low First response data byte from device.
7H Data High Second response data byte from device.
… … …
7+(x-1)/2
Data Low ….
L
7+(x-1)/2
Data High Last response data byte from device.
H

11.6.5.3 COMMREQ Status Word

The following table defines the values that can be returned in the COMMREQ status word.
Value Description
Dec (Hex)
0 (0000) Device has not yet processed the COMMREQ.
1 (0001) Command Complete. This status does not necessarily mean success. Some commands
have reply data that must also be checked.
2 (0002) Command Terminated – module busy
3 (0003) Command Terminated – invalid command
4 (0004) Command Terminated – invalid command data
5 (0005) Command Terminated – not enough data
6 (0006) Not used
7 (0007) Command Terminated – not enough memory in reply area. The command did not
specify sufficient PLC memory for the reply. Command will be ignored.
8 (0008) Command Terminated – command-specific error. Refer to the additional codes in in the
Status Block for more information.
265 (0109) Error, Hart device not connected
521 (0209) Error, Channel not HART-enabled
777 (0309) Error, Analog Output Module, No field power
1033 (0409) Error. HART command not allowed
1289 (0509) Error. Invalid HART command
This status information relates to the execution of the COMMREQ function, not to the status of the HART
communications. HART communications status is provided in the response data, as shown previously in this
section.
11.6.6 HART Pass-Through Commands and Command Codes

for RX3i Modules

Within a HART command, data can be represented as integers, floating-point numbers, ASCII text strings, or
enumerated item lists. Unmarked data types are 8-, 16, or 24-bit integers (including code values)
Universal Commands Data in Command Data in Reply

# Function Byte Data Type Byte Data Type
0 "254" (expansion)
Manufacturer identification
1
code
2 Manufacturer device type code
3 Number of preambles required
4 Universal command revision
Device-specific command
0 Read unique identifier None 5
revision
6 Software revision
7 Hardware revision Integer
Device function flags:
8 bit 0 = multisensor device, Bit
bit 1 = protocol bridge device
9-11 Device ID number
0 PV units code
1 Read primary variable None
1-4 Primary variable (PV) Floating pt
Read current and
2 None 0-3 Current (mA) Floating pt
percent of range
0-3 Current (mA) Floating pt
4 PV units code
5-8 Primary variable (PV) Floating pt
Read current and four 9 SV units code
3 predefined dynamic None 10-13 Secondary variable (SV) Floating pt
variables 14 TV units code
15-18 Third variable (VT) Floating pt
19 FV units code
20-23 Fourth variable (FV) Floating pt
Polling
6 Write polling address 0 same as command
address
Read unique identifier Same as command #0, refer to
11 0-5 Tag ASCII 0-11
associated with tag above
12 Read message None 0-23 Message (32 characters) ASCII
0-5 Tag (8 characters) ASCII
Read tag, descriptor,
13 None 6-17 Descriptor (16 characters) ASCII
date
18-20 Date Date
0-2 Sensor serial number
Units code for sensor limits and
3
Read Primary Variable min. span
14 None
sensor information 4-7 Upper sensor limit Floating pt
8-11 Lower sensor limit Floating pt
12-15 Minimum span Floating pt
0 Alarm select code
Read output
15 None 1 Transfer function code
information
2 PV/range units code

Universal Commands Data in Command Data in Reply

3-6 Upper range value Floating pt
7-10 Lower range value Floating pt
11-14 Damping value (seconds) Floating pt
15 Write-protect code
16 Private-label distributor code
Read final assembly
16 None 0-2 Final assembly number
number
Message
17 Write message 0-23 ASCII Same as command
(32 characters)
Tag
0-5 ASCII
(8 characters)
Write tag, descriptor,
18 Descriptor Same as command
date 6-17 ASCII
(16 characters)
18-20 Date Date
Write final assembly Final assembly
19 0-2 Same as command
number number
Among the common-practice commands listed below, commands #60 and #62 through #70 are used to
configure and control the multiple outputs generated by some multivariable transmitters. Such multiple
outputs are numbered 1 to 4, corresponding to the HART dynamic variables: PV (primary variable), SV
(secondary variable), TV (third variable) and FV (fourth variable).
Common-Practice Commands Data in Command Data in Reply
Transmitted variable Transmitted variable code for

0 0
code for slot 0 slot 0
Transmitted variable
1 1 Units code for slot 0
code for slot 1
Transmitted variable Floating

2 2-5 Variable for slot 0
code for slot 2 point
Read Transmitted variable Transmitted variable code for

3 6
33 transmitter code for slot 3 slot 1
variables
7 Units code for slot 1
Floating
8-11 Variable for slot 1
point
Truncated after last requested code
Transmitted variable code for
12
slot 2

Floating
point
Transmitted variable code for

18
slot 3
Floating
point
Truncated after last requested variable
Write damping Damping value Floating

34 0-3 Same as command
value (seconds) point
0 Range units code
Floating
Write range 1-4 Upper range value
35 point Same as command
values
Floating
5-8 Lower range value
point
Set upper range

36 value (= push None none
SPAN button)
Set lower range

37 value (= push None none
ZERO button)
Reset
38 Configuration None none
Changed flag
EEPROM control code:

(0 = write to EEPROM
39 EEPROM control 0 Same as command
1 = read EEPROM to
RAM)
Current (mA)
Enter/exit fixed Floating
40 0-3 (0 = fixed current Same as command
current mode point
mode)
Perform device
41 None none
self-test

Perform master
42 None none
reset
Set (trim) PV
43 None none
zero
44 Write PV units 0 PV units code Same as command
Measured current Floating

45 Trim DAC zero 0-3 Same as command
(mA) point
Measured current Floating

46 Trim DAC gain 0-3 Same as command
(mA) point
Write transfer
47 0 Transfer function code Same as command
function
0-5 Device-specific status Bit
6-7 Operational modes (1-5)

Read additional
48 None 8-10 Analog outputs saturated70 Bit
device status
11-13 Analog outputs fixed70 Bit
14-24 Device-specific status Bit
Write PV sensor
49 0-2 Sensor serial number Same as command
serial number
0 PV transmitter variable code
Read dynamic 1 SV transmitter variable code

50 variable None
assignments 2 TV transmitter variable code
3 FV transmitter variable code
70
24 bytes each: LSB…MSB refers to analog outputs 1 to 24. Response is truncated after last byte implemented.

PV transmitter variable
0
code
SV transmitter variable
1
Read dynamic code
51 variable Same as command
assignments TV transmitter variable
2
code
FV transmitter variable
3
code
Set transmitter Transmitter variable

52 0 Same as command
variable zero code
transmitter variable
0
Write code
53 transmitter Same as command
variable units transmitter variable
1
units code
0 Transmitter variable code
Transmitter variable sensor serial

1-3
number
Transmitter variable limits units

4
code
Read
Floating
transmitter Transmitter variable 5-8 Transmitter variable upper limit
54 0 point
variable code
information Floating
9-12 Transmitter variable lower limit
point
Transmitter variable damping Floating

13-16
value (sec.) point
Transmitter variable minimum Floating

17-20
span point
0
Write code
transmitter
55 Same as command
variable transmitter variable
Floating
damping value 1-4 damping value
point
(seconds)

Write 0
code
transmitter
56 Same as command
variable sensor
transmitter variable Floating
serial number 1-3
sensor serial number point
0-5 Unit tag (8 characters) ASCII
Read unit tag, 6-17 Unit descriptor (16 characters) ASCII

57 None
descriptor, date
Unit date (3 bytes: day, month,
18-20 Date
year)
Unit tag (8
0-5 ASCII
characters)
Write unit tag, Unit descriptor (16

58 6-17 ASCII Same as command
descriptor, date characters)
Unit date (3 bytes:

18-20 Date
day, month, year)
Write number
Number of response
59 of response 0 Same as command
preambles
preambles

0 Analog output number code
1 Analog output units code

Read analog
output and analog output
60 0 Floating
percent of number code 2-5 Analog output level
point
range
Floating
6-9 Analog output percent of range
point
0 PV analog output units code
Floating
1-4 PV analog output level
point
5 PV units code
Floating
6-9 Primary variable (PV)
point
Read dynamic 10 SV analog output units code

variables and
Floating
61 Primary None 11-14 Secondary variable
point
Variable analog
output 15 TV analog output units code
Floating
16-19 Third variable
point
20 FV analog output units code
Floating
21-24 Fourth variable
point
Truncated after last supported variable
Analog output
Slot 0 analog output number
0 number code for 0
code
slot 0
Analog output
Read analog
62 1 number code for 1 Slot 0 units code
outputs (5.1)
slot 1
Analog output
Floating
2 number code for 2-5 Slot 0 level
point
slot 2

Analog output
3 number code for 6
code
slot 3
7 Slot 1 units code
Floating
8-11 Slot 1 level
point

12
code
13 Slot 2 units code
Floating
Truncated after last requested level 14-17 Slot 2 level
point

18
code
19 Slot 3 units code
Floating
20-23 Slot 3 level
point
Truncated after last requested level

1 Analog output alarm select code
Analog output transfer function

2
code
Read analog 3 Analog output range units code

Analog output number
63 output 0
code Floating
information 4-7 Analog output upper range value
point
Floating
8-11 Analog output lower range value
point
Analog output additional Floating

12-15
damping value (seconds) point

0
Write analog code
output
64 Same as command
additional Analog output
Floating
damping value 1-4 additional damping
point
value

0
code
Analog output units

1
Write analog code
65 output range Same as command
values Analog output upper Floating
2-5
range value point
Analog output lower Floating

6-9
range value point

0
code
Enter/exit fixed
Analog output units
66 analog output 1 Same as command
code
mode
Floating
2-5 Analog output level71
point
71
“not a number” exits fixed output mode


0
code
Trim analog Analog output units

output zero code
Externally-measured Floating
2-5
analog output level71 point

0
code
Trim analog Analog output units

output gain code
Externally-measured Floating
2-5
analog output level71 point

0
Write analog code
69 output transfer Same as command
function Analog output transfer
1
function code

Analog output endpoint units

1
code
Read analog
70 output 0
code Analog output upper endpoint Floating
endpoint values 2-5
value point
Analog output lower endpoint Floating

6-9
value point
Transmitter variable
0
code for slot 0
Write burst Transmitter variable

1
mode code for slot 1
107 transmitter Same as command
variable (for Transmitter variable
2
command 33) code for slot 2
Transmitter variable
3
code for slot 3
Write burst
mode Burst mode command
command number
number
Burst mode control

Burst mode
109 0 code Same as command
control
(0 = exit, 1 = enter)
0 Primary Variable units code
Floating
1-4 Primary Variable value
point
5 Second Variable units code

Read all
Floating
110 dynamic none 6-9 Second Variable value
point
variables
10 Third Variable units code
Floating
11-14 Third Variable value
point
15 Fourth Variable units code

Floating
16-19 Fourth Variable value
point
11.6.7 HART Communications Status

Each message from a field slave device includes two bytes of status information, which is also referred to as
the “response code”. The format of the HART communications status data is shown in this section.
11.6.7.1 Response Data with Command Response = 1

If the Most Significant Bit of the first byte is 1 (Communications Error), an error has occurred in the outgoing
HART communication. The rest of the bits individually indicate one or more error conditions:
Byte 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Communication error = 1
Not used Parity error
Overrun error
Framing error
Checksum error
Reserved (0)
Rx buffer overflow
Not used
Error conditions include parity and overrun errors. In addition, a field device will report an overflow of its
receive buffer. It will also report any discrepancy between the message content and the received checksum.

11.6.7.2 Response Data with Command Response = 0

If the Most Significant Bit of the first byte is 0 (Command Response), the outgoing HART communications
completed normally. The first byte then contains an integer value (the Command Response code) with the
command status. The second byte contains the field device status, indicating the operational state of the
slave device:
Byte 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Byte 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Field device malfunction Command Response = 0

Configuration changed Bits 0-6 contain an integer value:
Cold start 0 no command-specific error
1 (undefined)
More status available (see below) 2 invalid selection
Analog output current fixed 3 passed parameter too large
4 passed parameter too small
Analog output saturated 5 too few data bytes received
6 device-specific command error
Non-primary variable out of limits
7 in write-protect mode
Primary Variable out of limits 8-15 multiple meanings, see next page
16 access restricted
28 multiple meanings, see next page
32 device is busy
64 command not implemented
11.6.7.3 Field Device Status Codes

The Field Device Status codes in the second byte are explained below.
Field Device Status Code Meaning
Field device malfunction Measurements may not be correct.
Configuration changed The configuration has been changed, so the master should check the
configuration, and clear the bit by sending Command #38.
Cold start Set for the first transaction when a field device is powered up.
More status available The master should issue Command #48 to read more status information.
Analog output fixed The output has been set to a fixed value for testing. This bit applies only to
analog output #1. In a multi-drop output device, command #48 may
return similar status information for the other outputs.
Analog output saturated Analog output #1 is out of range.
Primary variable out of limits The primary measurement is outside the sensor operating limits. The
analog signal and the digital signal read by HART commands may be
incorrect.

Non-primary variable out of A non-primary measurement is outside the sensor operating limits. The
limits analog signal and the digital signal read by HART commands may be
incorrect. Command #48 may provide more information.

11.6.7.4 Command Codes with Multiple Meanings

The interpretation of Command Codes 8-15 and 28 in the first Command Response byte depends on the
command that was issued.
Code in
For these Commands Meaning of the Code
First Byte
1, 2, 3, 33, 60, 62, 110 Update failure

8
34, 55, 64 Set to nearest possible value
(warning)
48 Update in progress
35, 65 Lower range value too high

9
36, 37, 43, 52 Applied process too high
(error)
45, 46, 67, 68 Not in proper current mode (fixed at 4 or 20mA)
6 Multi-drop not supported

10
35, 65 Lower range value too low
(error)
36, 37, 43, 52 Applied process too low
35, 65 Upper range value too high

11
40, 45, 46, 66, 67, 68 In multi-drop mode
(error)
53 Invalid transmitter variable code
35, 65 Upper range value too high

12
(error)
53, 66, 67, 68 Invalid units code
35, 65 Both range values out of limits

13
(error)
69 Invalid transfer function code
35, 36, 65 Span too small

14
(warning)
37 Pushed upper range value over limit
15
65, 66, 67, 68, 69 Invalid analog output number code
(error)
28
65 Invalid range units code
(error)

11.7 Function Blocks to Read HART Data

Proficy Machine Edition release 5.5 includes two custom HART function blocks for use in ladder logic
application programs. These function blocks can be used to assign variable names to HART data inputs or on
HART Get Device Information response data, beginning at word 3.
▪ DYN_HART_STRUCT interprets the first 36 bytes of the HART data map for a channel. This function
block reads on demand the same data that would be automatically scanned if the module were
configured for HART Data Scan Control set to “Dynamic Data”.
▪ ALL_HART_STRUCT interprets the entire HART data for a channel, including the data interpreted by
the DYN_HART_STRUCT function block. This function block reads on demand the same data that
would be automatically scanned if the module were configured for HART Data Scan Control set to “All
Data”.
Instead of being read into an assigned CPU reference address, the data read by these Function Blocks is
placed into a reference address that is defined by the Function Block.
The HART function blocks are located in the Toolchest under the folder "HART Utilities". To create an instance
of one of these function blocks, drag and drop the desired function from the Toolchest folder into LD logic.
11.7.1 DYN_HART_STRUCT
The DYN_HART_STRUCT function block interprets the first 36 bytes on the data (offsets 0x0000 to 0x0023)
of the HART data map for a channel. Refer to the example in this section. Use of this function block is not
required. It only provides a mechanism to assign variable names to the HART data,
When the DYN_HART_STRUCT function executes (receives power flow), each of the HART variables in
reference memory is assigned to DYN_HART_STRUCT instance variables. The instance variable names
closely match the names listed in the table. They can be used as input to other functions, or for debugging
purposes. The entire instance can be added to a Data Watch window so that HART data is easily viewed.
The instance data variables are only updated when the function block receives power flow. An instance of the
function block is needed for each HART channel on which automatic assignment is desired.
Parameter types:
IN - Type = WORD, Length = 18, Pass-by = Reference
11.7.1.1 Data Obtained with the DYN_HART_STRUCT Function Block

Byte Offset Field Description Data Type
Begin End
0x0000 0x0003 HART Primary Variable, CMD#3, Bytes 5-8 REAL

0x0004 0x0007 HART Secondary Variable CMD#3, Bytes 10-13 REAL
0x0008 0x000b HART Tertiary Variable CMD#3, Bytes 15-18 REAL
0x000c 0x000f HART Fourth Variable CMD#3, Bytes 20-23 REAL
0x0010 0x0013 Slot 0 value. CMD#33, Bytes 2-5 REAL
0x0014 0x0017 Slot 1 value CMD#33, Bytes 8-11 REAL
0x0018 0x001b Slot 2 value CMD#33, Bytes 14-17 REAL
0x001c 0x001f Slot 3 value CMD#33, Bytes 20-23 REAL
0x0020 HART communication status byte from the last HART command BYTE
response. Refer to Section 11.6.7.
0x0021 HART device status byte from the last HART command response. BYTE
(Dynamic Data)
0x0022 Spare for alignment. (Dynamic Data) BYTE*2
11.7.2 ALL_HART_STRUCT
The ALL_HART_STRUCT function block interprets the entire HART data map for a channel. This is the same
data obtained by the DYN_HART_STRUCT block, plus the additional data displayed in the following figure.
Parameter types: IN - Type = WORD, Length = 88, Pass-by = Reference
11.7.2.1 Additional Data Obtained with the ALL_HART_STRUCT

Function Block
Byte Offset
Field Description Data Type
Begin End
0x0024 HART device Manufacturer ID. CMD#0, Byte 1 BYTE
0x0025 HART device type code. CMD#0, Byte 2 BYTE
0x0026 Minimum number of preambles device requires. CMD#0, Byte 3 BYTE
0x0027 HART Universal command code. CMD#0, Byte 4 BYTE
0x0028 HART Transmitter specific revision. CMD#0, Byte 5 BYTE
0x0029 HART device software revision number. CMD#0, Byte 6 BYTE
0x002A HART device hardware revision number. CMD#0, Byte 7 BYTE
0x002B HART flags. CMD#0, Byte 8 BYTE
0x002C 0x002F HART device ID number. CMD#0, Byte 9-11 BYTE*4
0x0030 0x0037 8-character device tag. CMD#13, Bytes 0-5 in unpacked ASCII. BYTE*8
0x0038 0x0047 Device Descriptor. CMD#13, Bytes 6-17 in unpacked ASCII BYTE*16
0x0048 HART Primary Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 4 BYTE

0x0049 HART Secondary Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 9, 0 if not present. BYTE
0x004a HART Tertiary Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 14, 0 if not present. BYTE
0x004b HART Fourth Variable Units. CMD#3, Byte 19, 0 if not present. BYTE
0x004c HART Primary Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 0 BYTE
0x004d HART Secondary Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 1 BYTE
0x004e HART Tertiary Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 2 BYTE
0x004f HART Fourth Variable Code. CMD#50, Byte 3 BYTE
0x0050 Units code for range parameter. CMD#15, Byte 2 BYTE
0x0051 0x0053 Spare for alignment BYTE*3
Low transmitter range for analog signal in engineering units.
0x0054 0x0057 REAL
CMD#15, Bytes 3-6
High transmitter range for analog signal in engineering units.
0x0058 0x005b REAL
CMD#15, Bytes 7-10
0x005c Slot 0 units code. CMD#33, Byte 1 BYTE
0x005d Slot 1 units code. CMD#33, Byte 7 BYTE
0x005e Slot 2 units code. CMD#33, Byte 13 BYTE
0x005f Slot 3 units code. CMD#33, Byte 19 BYTE
0x0064 0x0083 32-character message. CMD#12, Bytes 0-23 unpacked ASCII. BYTE*32
0x0084 0x0087 Stored date in the field device. CMD#13, Bytes 18-20. BYTE*4
The final assembly number is used for identifying the material and
0x0088 0x008b BYTE*4
electronics that comprise the field device. CMD#16, Bytes 0-2
0x008c 0x00a4 The extended status returned by HART Command 48. BYTE*25
0x00a5 0x00af Spare BYTE*11

Appendix A: Example: ALL_HART_STRUCT

and DYN_HART_STRUCT
This example uses the following HART module hardware configuration parameters:
▪ HART Data Scan Control is set to: All Data

▪ HART Data Reference Address is configured as: %AI1001
The example shows ALL_HART_STRUCT for channels 1 and 2 on a HART module, and DYN_HART_STRUCT
for channels 3 and 4 on the same module. The math function blocks in the example show how the structure
instance variables can be used on the HART data.
When using either ALL_HART_STRUCT or DYN_HART_STRUCT, the instance data should be made global.
This is done by adding ",g" to the end of the instance name when it is created (for example, "ch1,g" creates a
global instance named "ch1"). If the instance data is not global, the instance can only be used in the program
block where the ALL_HART_STRUCT or DYN_HART_STRUCT function block is executed.
Figure 326: Ladder Logic using ALL_HART_STRUCT & DYN_HART_STRUCT

11.8 Converting HART Data to / from RX3i Format

When using HART Pass-Through COMMREQ (command 2) only, HART data must be both byte-packed and in
big-endian format as defined by the HART Specification. Because PACSystems CPUs use little-endian format,
floating-point values and ASCII data must be reformatted by the program logic.
Note that this conversion is not required when using COMMREQ 1 or for HART data that is automatically
scanned.
Two function blocks in the Proficy Machine Edition release 5.5 toolchest can be used to pack/unpack HART
ASCII data:
▪ ASCII_PACK prepares ASCII data before sending it to a HART module.

▪ ASCII_UNPACK can be used to unpack ASCII characters returned by a HART device.
These are described in the next section.
11.8.1 Converting Floating-Point Data (Endian Flip)

Floating-point values that begin at word 17 of a Pass-Through Request must be converted to big-endian
format. Floating-point values that begin at word 7 of the reply must be converted from big-endian format.
The basic procedure is to pass any HART float values through the SWAP_DWORD (size = 1) and
SWAP_WORD (size = 2) functions, as displayed in the following figure. This swaps the words within the float
DWord, and swaps the bytes within the two float words. In this example shows how to format floating-point
data prior to sending HART command 34, Write Damping Value.

Figure 327: Ladder Logic Using Swap DWord & Swap Word
11.8.2 ASCII_PACK
ASCII_PACK prepares ASCII data before sending it to a HART module using COMMREQ2 (HART Pass-Through
Request). All of the function block parameters are either Type = WORD, Pass-By = Value or word arrays of
Type = WORD and Pass-by = Reference. All word-based reference memory types and symbolics can be used.
It is possible to use data of a different type for the array data (for example, using a byte array of data as input
to the ASCII_PACKED and ASCII_UNPACKED blocks), although Machine Edition will issue a warning during
verification. In the example mentioned, the size of the input byte array would need to be at least as large as
the data size of the function block parameter word array.
Parameter types:
NUM - Type = WORD, Length = 1, Pass-by = Value
Q- Type = WORD, Length = 12, Pass-by = Reference

Appendix A: Example Function Block:

ASCII_PACK
This example shows how ASCII_PACK can be used to prepare ASCII data before using a COMMREQ to send it
to a HART module. First, the logic sets up the data that will be used by the COMMREQ. The ASCII_PACK
function block packs the 32 ASCII characters of the message and also places that into the COMMREQ data
area. After clearing the COMMREQ status to 0, the logic uses a COMMREQ to send HART command 17 "Write
Message" to the device.
HART ASCII format packs data into 6 bits per character, 4 characters per 3 bytes. This chart shows the format
with the most significant hex digits in the rightmost column and the lowest row.
Less significant
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 at A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
1 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
2 SP ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
More significant

Figure 328: Ladder Logic for ACSII Pack
11.8.3 ASCII_UNPACK
ASCII_UNPACK can be used to unpack ASCII characters returned by a HART device in Pass-Through Reply
data send in response to COMMREQ 2.
All of the function block parameters are either Type = WORD, Pass-By = Value or word arrays of Type =
WORD and Pass-by = Reference. All word-based reference memory types and symbolics can be used.
Parameter types:

NUM - Type = WORD, Length = 1, Pass-by = Value
Q- Type = WORD, Length = 16, Pass-by = Reference
11.8.4 Example Function Block 3: ASCII_UNPACK:

In this example, after initializing the COMMREQ completion status, the ladder logic sends COMMREQ
command #12, "Read Message" to the HART module in Rack 0, Slot 7. When the status = complete and the
Response Byte Count =24, showing that all the data is present, the ASCII_UNPACK function block unpacks
the HART ASCII data.
Figure 329: Ladder Logic for ACSII Unpack

Section 12: Analog Mixed I/O Modules

This chapter describes the following Analog Mixed I/O modules for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
Analog Mixed I/O Module Description Catalog Number Section
Analog Module 4-Input 2-Output Current/Voltage IC694ALG442 12.1
Analog Module 4-Input 2-Output Current/Voltage with Advanced 12.2

IC694ALG542
Diagnostics
Analog Mixed I/O Modules 577

12.1 Analog Module 4-Input/2-Output

Analog Current/Voltage Input/Output module, IC694ALG442, provides four
MODULE 0K differential input channels and two single-ended output channels. Each channel can
MODULE P/S
be configured with the Machine Edition software for one of the following ranges:
▪ 0 to +10 volts (unipolar), default.
IC694ALG442
▪ -10 to +10 volts (bipolar)
▪ 0 to 20 mA
I1
▪ 4 to 20 mA
Input channels can also be configured for 4 - 20 mA Enhanced mode.
I2
This module may be installed in any I/O slot in the RX3i system.
12.1.1 Features
I3
Outputs can be configured to either Hold Last State if system power is interrupted or
to reset to the low end of their range. Outputs can also be configured to operate in
I4
ramp mode on command from the application program. In ramp mode, the output
channel ramps to a new value over a period of time, rather than taking the new value
immediately.
Q1
High and low alarm limits can be set for all input channels and an open-wire fault
(current output modes) can be reported to the CPU for each output channel.
Q2
Revision BA & later supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal
Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal, Section 2.6.4.1.
Figure 330: IC694ALG442 CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU has no serial port).

This module must receive 24Vdc power from an external source. If the module is
located in an RX3i Universal Backplane, the external source can be connected via the
TB1 connector on the left side of the backplane or directly on the module terminal
block. If the module is located in an Expansion Backplane, the external source must
be connected to the terminal block of this module.
12.1.3 LEDs: ALG442


Power Requirements
External Supply Voltage Range 20 to 30 Vdc (24Vdc typical)
Power Supply Rejection Ratio Current: 5 μA/V (typical), 10 μA/V (maximum)

Voltage: 25 mV/V (typical), 50 mV/V (maximum)
(Measured by varying VUSER from 24Vdc to 30 Vdc)
Voltage Ripple 10%
Power Consumption 95 mA from internal +5Vdc Supply, 129 mA from external supply
Update Rate Update Rate: 3 ms
and to frame ground
Analog Outputs Two, Single–Ended
Analog Current Output
Output Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Resolution 0 to 20 mA: 0.6 μA (1 LSB = 0.6 μA)

4 to 20 mA: 0.5 μA (1 LSB = 0.5 μA)
Absolute Accuracy72,73 ±0.1% of full scale at 25°C (77°F), typical

72
Analog Current output: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±1%
of full scale.
73
Applicable for all inputs and outputs: In the presence of severe Conducted RF interference (IEC 61000-4-6, 10Vrms), accuracy may be
degraded to ±2% of full scale.

User Load 0 to 850Ω (minimum at VUSER = 20 V, maximum 1350Ω at VUSER = 30

V)
Output Load Capacitance 2000 pF (maximum)
Output Load Inductance 1 H (maximum)
Analog Voltage Output
Output Ranges -10 to +10 V (bipolar), 0 to +10 V (unipolar)
Resolution –10 V to +10 V: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)

0 to +10 V: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)

Output Loading 5 mA (2k minimum resistance)
Output Load Capacitance 1 μF (maximum capacitance)
74
Analog Voltage output: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±4%
of full scale.

Analog Inputs Four, differential
Analog Current Input
Input Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
Resolution Versions –Dx and later: 0.625μA (1 LSB = 0.625μA)
Earlier versions: 5 μA (1 LSB = 5μA)
Absolute Accuracy75 ±0.25% of full scale at25°C (77°F)

Linearity <1 LSB
Common Mode Voltage 200 Vdc (maximum)
Common Mode Rejection >70 dB at DC; >70 dB at 60 Hz
Cross Channel Rejection >80 dB from DC to 1 kHz
Input Impedance 250 Ω
Analog Voltage Input
Input Ranges 0 to +10 V (unipolar), -10 to +10 V (bipolar)
Resolution Versions –Dx and later, both ranges: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125
mV)
Earlier versions: 0 to +10 V: 2.5 mV (1 LSB = 2.5 mV)

–10 to +10 V: 5 mV (1 LSB = 5 mV)
Absolute Accuracy76,73 ±0.25% of full scale at25°C (77°F);

Linearity <1 LSB
75
Analog Current Input: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±2%
of full scale.
76
Analog Voltage Input: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±1%
of full scale

Input Impedance 800k (typical)

The diagram below shows voltage and current connections for the module. Each channel can be configured
independently as a voltage or a current channel, not both simultaneously.
Terminal Signal Definition
1 24VIN User Supplied +24Vdc Input
Jumper terminal for connecting 250

2 JMP1
sense resistor for CH1

3 JMP2
Positive connection for differential

4 +CH1
analog input channel 1

5 +CH2
Negative connection for differential

6 -CH1

7 -CH2

8 JMP3

9 JMP4

10 +CH3

11 +CH4


12 -CH3 Field Terminals Field
analog input channel 3 Wiring Wiring
Negative connection for differential 24 VDC IN

13 -CH4 1
analog input channel 4 +
JMP1
2
14 Vout CH1 Voltage output for channel 1 - JMP2
3
15 Iout CH1 Current output for channel 1 4 (+)
(+) 5 I1
16 Vout CH2 Voltage output for channel 2 ( )-
I2 6
17 Iout CH2 Current output for channel 2 -
( ) 7
JMP3
8
18 V COM Common return for voltage outputs JMP4
9
19 I RET
Common return for User Supplied 10 (+)
+24 V and current outputs (+) 11 I3
I4 12 -
( )
Frame ground connections for cable
20 GND -
( )
13
shields (+) -
( )
-
( ) (+) 14 VQ1
IQ1 15 (+) ( ) -
( )- (+) 16 VQ2
IQ2 17
VCOM
18
COM
(I RET) 19 FGND*
20
* Optional Shield
Connection
12.1.6 Input Scaling: ALG442

Resolution per bit depends on the configured input or output range as shown in the table of module
specifications. The module scales each current and voltage input to a value in counts for the CPU.
Configured Range Scaled Counts Values
0 to 10 V (default) 0 to 32767

-10 to 10 V -32768 to 32767
4 to 20 mA 0 to 32767
0 to 20 mA 0 to 32767
0 to 20 mA Enhanced -8000 to 32,000
In the 0 to +10 V default range, 0 volts corresponds to a count of 0 and +10 volts corresponds to a count of
32000. In the -10 to +10 volt range, -10 volts corresponds to a count of -32000 and +10 volts corresponds to
a count of +32000. Full 12-bit resolution is available over either range.
In the 4 to 20 mA range, 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000. In

the 0 to 20 mA range, 0 mA corresponds to a count of 0 and 20 mA corresponds to a count of 32000. Full
12-bit resolution is available over the 0 to 20 mA range. If the value exceeds 32,000 it is truncated to 32,000.
In the 4 to 20 mA Enhanced range, 0 mA corresponds to a count of -8000, 4 mA corresponds to a count of 0

(zero) and 20 mA corresponds to a count of +32000. The Enhanced range automatically provides 4 to 20 mA
range scaling. Negative digital values are provided for input current levels between 4 mA and 0 mA. This
creates a low alarm limit that detects when the input current falls from 4 mA to 0 mA, providing open-wire
fault detection in 4 to 20 mA applications. If the value exceeds 32,000 it is truncated to 32,000.
Counts Counts
32000 32000
0 to 20mA
Range
0 4 to 20mA
Range
0 +10V 0 4 Current (mA) 20
0V to +10V Inputs
Figure 333: Input Current Scaling ALG442
Figure 332: Input Voltage Scaling ALG442
If the current source is reversed into the input, or is less than the low end of the current range, the module
inputs a data word corresponding to the low end of the current range (0000H in %AI). If an input is out of
range (greater than 20 mA), the A/D converter adjusts it to full scale (corresponding to 7FFFH in %AI).
12.1.7 Output Scaling: ALG442

The module scales counts data received from the CPU to a current or voltage value for each output.

Configured Values Sent By Values Accepted by

Range CPU Module
0 to 10 V 0 to 32767 0 to 32767
(default)
-10 to 10 V -32768 to 32767 - 32768 to 32767
4 to 20 mA 0 to 32767 0 to 32000
0 to 20 mA 0 to 32767 0 to 32767
For a 0 to 10 V output, the module scales count outputs from 0 to 32000 to output voltages from 0 to +10
volts. The module scales count values from 32001 to 32767 to over range voltages up to a maximum of
approximately 10.24 volts.
For a -10 to +10 V output, the module scales count outputs in the range ±32000 to output voltages from –10
V to +10 V. The module scales count values from -32001 to -32768 and from +32001 to +32767 to over
range voltages up to a maximum of approximately ±10.24 V.
For a 4 to 20 mA output, the module scales count outputs from 0 to 32000 counts to output currents from 4
to 20 mA. If the CPU sends a value above 32000 counts, the module uses the value 32000 in the D/A
converter. No error is returned.
For a 0 to 20 mA output, the module scales count outputs from 0 to 32000 to output currents from 0 to 20
mA. The module scales count values from 32001 to 32767 up to a maximum output current of
approximately 20.5 mA.
Counts
Counts Counts 32000
+32000 +32000
0 to 20mA
Range
0
0 4 to 20mA
-32000 Range
-10V 0 +10V 0 +10V
0 4 20
-10V to +10V Outputs 0V to +10V Outputs Current (mA)
Figure 334: Output Voltage Scaling ALG442 Figure 335: Output Current Scaling
ALG442
12.1.8 I/O Data: ALG442

This module uses two %AQ references and four %AI references, depending on configuration. Data in the %AI
and %AQ registers is in 16–bit 2’s complement format.
MSB LSB
X 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X
The module also uses 8, 16 or 24 %I references for status data, depending on the alarm status configuration.
Status data format is shown on the next page.
12.1.8.1 Input Data

Resolution of the converted signal is 12-bit binary (1 part in 4096). The placement of the 12 bits from the
A/D converter in the %AI data word is shown above.
The bits in the %AI data table that were not used are forced to 0 (zero) by the analog input channel.
12.1.8.2 Output Data

Each output channel is capable of converting 15 to 16 bits (depending on the range selected) of binary data
to an analog output.
12.1.9 Status Data: ALG442

The Analog Module can be configured to return 8, 16, or 24 status bits to the PLC CPU. Content of the status
data is displayed in the following figure.

12.1.9.1 Error Code

Byte 1 of the status data contains a status/error code for COMMREQs sent to the module. Only the most
recent error is reported; an existing error code will be overwritten if another error occurs. The priority of
errors is:
1. Invalid COMMREQ function (highest priority)

2. Invalid channel.
3. Invalid data (ramp or alarm parameter) (lowest priority).
If multiple errors occur, the one with the highest priority is reported in the error code. The module will not
stop standard operation if an error is detected; these error bits are informational only, and can be ignored.

The following module parameters can be configured using the Machine Edition software:
12.1.10.1 Module Settings


Stop Mode Hold (default) or DeFlow Output state when module goes from Run to Stop
mode.
If the configured Stop Mode is Hold, the module holds
outputs at the last state received from the CPU.
If the Stop Mode is Default Low, the outputs will go to
their low values as follows:
Current mode (4-20 mA): outputs go to 4 mA
Current mode (0-20 mA): outputs go to 0 mA
Voltage mode (unipolar (0 to +10 Vdc) and bipolar
(+10 Vdc to -10 Vdc): outputs go to 0V
Input Channel Value Valid memory type: %AI Starting %AI address for the analog input data of this
Input Channel Value Read-only Each input channel provides 16 bits (1 word) of analog
Reference Length input data to the Controller CPU.
Output Channel Valid memory type: %AQ Starting %AQ address for the analog output data of
Value Reference this module.
Address
Output Channel Read-only Each input channel receives 16 bits (1 word) of analog
Value Reference input data to the Controller CPU.
Length
Module Status Valid memory type: %I Starting %I address for the status data of this module.
Reference Address
Module Status 0 (Module status Number of status bits (0 to 24) that will be used for
Reference Length reporting Disabled) module and channel status data.
8 (module and power When set to 0, status reporting is disabled.
status only) To enable status reporting, set this parameter to a
16 (above plus input value other than 0.
status) For resulting data format, refer to Section 12.1.9
24 (all above plus output above.
status)
The choice for Stop Mode (Hold or DeFlow) determines how outputs operate when the module goes from
Run to Stop mode. If the configured Stop Mode is Hold (the default), the module holds outputs at the last
state received from the CPU. If the Stop Mode is DeFlow, the outputs will go to their low values. In current
mode (4-20 mA), outputs go to 4 mA if configured for DeFlow. In current mode (0-20 mA), outputs go to 0
mA if configured for DeFlow. In voltage mode (unipolar (0 to +10 Vdc) and bipolar (+10 Vdc to -10 Vdc),
outputs go to 0V if configured for DeFlow.

12.1.10.2 Output Channel Configuration Parameters ALG442

Output Range 0 to +10 V, -10 to +10 V, Type of output range.

4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA
12.1.10.3 Input Channel Configuration Parameters ALG442

Input Range 0 to +10 V, -10 to +10 V, Type of input range

4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA Enhanced
Alarm Low Limit -32768 to 32759 Low limit alarm value for each input.
Must be less than the high alarm for the same channel.
Alarm High -32767 to 32760 High limit alarm value for each input.
Limit
The Alarm Low and Alarm High parameters can be used to set
up limits that cause alarms to be passed to the Controller for
each channel. Values entered without a sign are assumed to be
positive.
These configured alarm limits are stored until changed by a

new configuration. The configured high and low alarm limits
can be changed temporarily by a COMMREQ command.
The Alarm Low and Alarm High parameters can be used to set up limits that cause alarm indications to be
passed to the PLC for each channel. Values entered without a sign are assumed to be positive. These
configured alarm limits are stored until changed by a new configuration. The configured high and low alarm
limits can be changed temporarily by a COMMREQ from the application program as described later in this
chapter.
12.1.11 Ramp Mode Operation: ALG442

Outputs on module ALG442 can be set up by a COMMREQ command to operate in Ramp mode. In normal
operating mode, a new value entered in the %AQ reference for an output channel causes the output to
change directly to the new value. In Ramp mode, the output goes to the new value over a period of time. The
output channel starts a new ramp (either up or down) each time the value in its %AQ reference changes. The
module performs range checking on new output values and automatically adjusts out-of-range values before
making the ramp computations.

Output Example Output in Ramp Mode

Example Output in Standard Mode
Final Output Value

Corresponding to
New %AQ Value
%AQ Value Changes Time
Figure 336: Ramp Mode Example ALG442
Use of Ramp mode is set up for either channel or both output channels using a COMMREQ command as
explained in this chapter. The ramp slope can be set up in the COMMREQ as:
 a total ramp time from 1 millisecond to 32 seconds, or:

 a sequence of 1 to 32000 1-millisecond steps.
A channel stays in Ramp mode until the module receives a new COMMREQ either changing or canceling the
ramp operation, or until power is cycled. The channel will not change modes after a hardware configuration
download. Because COMMREQ settings are temporary, it will be lost after a power cycle.
If the module receives a new COMMREQ that changes ramp operation while an output is in the process of
ramping, the new ramp settings take effect as follows:
 If Ramp mode is turned off during a ramp, the channel goes directly to the value in its %AQ reference.
 If a channel is set up to ramp over a period of time, but a new COMMREQ is received commanding the
channel to instead ramp in a sequence of measured steps, ramp operation changes as soon as the
COMMREQ is processed (assuming that the step is valid).
 If a channel is set up to ramp as a sequence of measured steps, but a new COMMREQ is received
commanding the channel to instead ramp over a period of time, it immediately starts a new ramp using
the present output as the starting output and the present time as the start time.
If the module receives a Ramp command for an invalid channel, step height or ramp time, the module
ignores the command and returns an error code in the first byte of its %I status references. The error code
can be cleared by a Clear Errors COMMREQ as described in this chapter, or by reconfiguring the module.
12.1.12 Changing Module Operation on Command: ALG442

Module ALG442 can respond directly to a specific COMMREQ command from the application program to:
 clear the %I error code for this module

 modify the Input alarm limits, and
 put one or both outputs in Ramp mode and set up the ramp characteristics

These changes to module are not retained during loss of power. If the module is power-cycled, new
commands must be sent to the module to again modify the configured alarm limits, or to set up Ramp
operation for the outputs.
12.1.12.1 COMMREQ Format

The Communications Request is triggered when the logic program passes power to the COMMREQ Function
Block.
(Enable )------------- COMM - CommReq Delivered

REQ (logic)
-
(Command Block address) IN FT - Function Faulted (logic)
(Rack/Slot Location of - SYSID

the module)
(Task value) - TASK
Figure 337: COMMREQ usage ALG442
When sent to module ALG442, the parameters of the COMMREQ are:
Enable Control logic for activating the COMMREQ Function Block.
IN The location of the Command Block. The Command Block contains the parameters of the
COMMREQ request. It can be located at any valid address within a word-oriented memory
area (%R, %AI, %AQ, %P, %L, or %W) in the PACSystems PLC.
SYSID A hexadecimal word value that gives the rack (high byte) and slot (low byte) location of
the analog module.
TASK Task must be set to zero.
FT Output The FT output is set if the PLC CPU is unable to deliver the COMMREQ to the module.
When the FT output is set, the module is unable to return a COMMREQ status word to the
PLC logic application.

12.1.12.2 COMMREQ Command Block

The format of the COMMREQ for module ALG442 is displayed in the following figure. For more information
about using COMMREQs, refer to the online help and the PACSystems , RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Reference
Manual, GFK-2222.
Word Offset Value Description
Word 1 Must be 0004 Length of the command block
Word 2 0000 Not used
Word 3 (Refer to below) Memory type of COMMREQ Status Word
Word 4 0-based. Offset of COMMREQ Status Word
Word 5 0 Reserved
Word 6 0 Reserved
Word 7 E201H (-7679 decimal) COMMREQ command number
Word 8 0006 Byte length of Command Data (refer to below)
Word 9 (Refer to Memory Types and Memory type in the CPU for the Command Data
Offsets below)
Word 10 0-based Memory offset for the Command data
12.1.12.3 Memory Types and Offsets

The COMMREQ Command Block specifies a memory type and location to receive status information about
the execution of the command (word 3), and for the command data (word 9). The memory types are listed in
the following table. For word 4 and word 10, the address offset is a zero-based number. For example, the offset
for %R100 is 99 decimal.
Type Value Value Description

(Decimal) (Hex.)
%R 8 08H Register memory (word mode)
%AI 10 0AH Analog input memory (word mode)
%AQ 12 0CH Analog output memory (word mode)
%I 16 10H Discrete input memory (byte mode)

70 46H Discrete input memory (bit mode)

%Q 18 12H Discrete output memory (byte mode)

72 48H Discrete output memory (bit mode)
%T 20 14H Discrete temporary memory (byte mode)

74 4AH Discrete temporary memory (bit mode)
%M 22 16H Discrete momentary internal memory (byte mode)

76 4CH Discrete momentary internal memory (bit mode)
%G 56 38H Discrete global data table (byte mode)

86 56H Discrete global data table (bit mode)
%W 196 C4H Word memory (word mode; limited to %W1-%W65536)

12.1.12.4 COMMREQ Command Data Format

In the COMMREQ Command Block (above) words 9 and 10 assign a CPU memory location for six bytes of
command data. The program logic can use these bytes to set the parameters of the COMMREQ. This module
does not use the last command data word.
word 1 command word
word 2 alarm or ramp data
word 3 Unused for module ALG442
Command to be Performed Word 1 Contains Word 2 Contains
Change the low alarm limit of the specified 0000 (Input 1) New low alarm limit for the input
input channel to the value in word 2. 0001 (Input 2)
0002 (Input 3)
0003 (Input 4)
Change the high alarm limit of the specified 0010 (Input 1) New high alarm limit for the input
input channel to the value in word 2. 0011 (Input 2)
0012 (Input 3)
0013 (Input 4)
Change the low alarm limit of the specified 0020 (Input 1) Increment used to change the
input channel by the increment in word 2. 0021 (Input 2) configured low alarm limit. Increment
0022 (Input 3) can be + or -.
0023 (Input 4)
Change the high alarm limit of the specified 0030 (Input 1) Increment used to change the
input channel by the increment in word 2. 0031 (Input 2) configured high alarm limit. Increment
0032 (Input 3) can be + or -.
0033 (Input 4)
Turn off Ramp operation for the specified 0040 (Output 1)

output channel and put it in normal mode. 0041 (Output 2)
Put the specified output channel in Ramp step 0050 (Output 1) Step (1 to 32000 counts) to be taken
mode. Step increment in word 2. 0051 (Output 2) each millisecond.
Put the specified output channel in Ramp time 0060 (Output 1) Time in milliseconds: 1 to 32000
mode. Ramp total time in word 2. 0061 (Output 2) (1 ms to 32 seconds)
Clear the %I error code for this module. 00C0

If the requested command is not valid (for example, if the changed alarm limit would be out of range) the
module ignores the COMMREQ command and returns an error code in the %I status data for this module.
The module does NOT stop operating; these error bits are informational only and can be ignored. The error
code remains in the %I status bits until cleared by another COMMREQ (command 00C0, refer to directly
above), or until the module is reconfigured.
Appendix A: COMMREQ Example

This example shows setting up FST_SCN

COMMREQ data and issuing the BLKMV MOVE MOVE
INT WORD WORD
COMMREQ to an Analog Mixed CONST IN1 Q
%R0001
%R0008 %R0009
module. +00000 CONST IN Q CONST IN Q
CONST E201 0006
IN2 LEN LEN
+00004
00001 00001
The application program should CONST IN3
+00000
verify the completion of the
CONST IN4
COMMREQ in progress before +00008
CONST
initiating another, so the module +00000 IN5
does not receive COMMREQs CONST IN6

+00000
faster than it can process them.
CONST IN7
One way to do that is to zero the +00000
contents of the COMMREQ FST_SCN

status (%R0001 in this example) MOVE MOVE
INT INT
as the COMMREQ is enabled. %R0011
CONST %R0010
IN Q CONST IN Q
Since the status returned for a +00008 +00100
LEN LEN
completed COMMREQ is never 00001 00001
zero, a non–zero status word
%T0001 %T0002
indicates that the COMMREQ has MOVE S
INT
completed.
CONST %R0001 %T0003
+00000 IN Q
In this example, the COMMREQ LEN
00001 %T0001
command block starts at
R
%R0002 and is initialized on the
%T0003 %M0001
first scan. The 6 bytes of COMM_ S
COMMREQ data sent to the REQ
module must have been moved %R0002 IN FT

into %R0101-%R0103 before the CONST
SYSID
COMMREQ is enabled. 0002
CONST TASK
0000
The module is located in rack 0,
slot 2 so the SYSID input to the %T0002
COMMREQ is 0002. NE_
INT
%T0002
CONST I1
+00000 Q R
%R0001 I2
%T0004
Figure 338: COMMREQ Example ALG442
Setting %T0001 moves zero into the COMMREQ status word, enables %T0003 for one sweep to initiate the
COMMREQ, and sets %T0002 to begin checking the status word. When a non–zero status word is detected,
%T0002 is reset to discontinue checking and %T0004 is set to indicate that the module is ready for the next
COMMREQ. Reference %M0001 is set if a COMMREQ fault occurs.

12.2 Analog Module 4-Input/2-Output

Current/Voltage with Advanced Diagnostics:
IC694ALG542
Advanced Diagnostics mixed I/O Analog Current/Voltage module, IC694ALG542,
provides four differential input channels and two single-ended output channels. MODULE 0K
Each channel can be configured with the Machine Edition software for one of the USER SUPPLY
following ranges:
▪ 0 to +10 volts (unipolar), default.

▪ -10 to +10 volts (bipolar) IC694ALG542
▪ 0 to 20 mA
▪ 4 to 20 mA I1
Input channels can also be configured for 4–20 mA Enhanced mode.
I2
Individual outputs can be configured to either Hold Last State if system power is
interrupted or to reset to the low end of their range. Outputs can also be configured
to operate in ramp mode on command from the application program. In ramp
I3
mode, the output channel ramps to a new value over a period of time, rather than
taking the new value immediately.
High and low alarm limits can be set for all input channels and an open wire fault I4
(current output modes) can be reported to the CPU for each output channel.
12.2.1 Features Q1
▪ Open-circuit detection for all inputs in 4 to 20 mA Enhanced Range

Q2
▪ High alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, low-low alarm detection and reporting
selectable per channel
Figure 339:
▪ Module fault reporting IC694ALG542
▪ Display of module serial number, revision and manufacturing date code in

programming software.

▪ Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility (if the

This module requires 150mA plus loop current(s) from a user-supplied 24Vdc external source.
12.2.3 LEDs: ALG542

Power Requirements
External Supply Voltage Range 20 to 30 Vdc (24 Vdc typical)
Power Supply Rejection Ratio Current: 5 μA/V (typical), 10 μA/V (maximum)
Voltage: 25 mV/V (typical), 50 mV/V (maximum)
(Measured by varying VUSER from 24 Vdc to 30 Vdc)
Voltage Ripple 10%
Power Consumption 95 mA from backplane +5 Vdc supply
150 mA from external +24 Vdc supply
Update Rate Update Rate: 2ms
Isolation Field to Backplane 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1 minute
Analog Outputs Two, Single–Ended
Analog Current Output

Output Current Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Resolution 0 to 20 mA: 0.625 μA (1 LSB = 0.625 μA)

4 to 20 mA: 0.5 μA (1 LSB = 0.5 μA)
User Load 0 to 850Ω (minimum at VUSER = 20 V, maximum 1350Ω at VUSER = 30 V)
Output Load Capacitance 2000 pF (maximum)
Output Load Inductance 1 H (maximum)
Analog Voltage Output
Output Ranges -10 to +10 V (bipolar), 0 to +10 V (unipolar)
Resolution –10 V to +10 V: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)
0 to +10 V: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)
Output Loading 5 mA (2 kΩ minimum resistance)
Output Load Capacitance 1 μF (maximum capacitance)
77
Analog Current Output: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to
±1% of full scale.
78
Applicable for all outputs and inputs: In the presence of severe Conducted RF interference (IEC 61000-4-6, 10Vrms), accuracy may be
degraded to ±2% of full scale.
79
Analog Voltage Output: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to
±4% of full scale

Analog Inputs Four, differential

Analog Current Input
Input Ranges 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Enhanced
Resolution 0–20 mA: 0.625 μA (1 LSB = 0.625 μA)
4–20 mA: 0.5 μA/bit (1 LSB = 0.5 μA)
4–20 mA Enhanced: 0.5 μA/bit (1 LSB = 0.5 μA
Absolute Accuracy at 0–20 mA80,78 ±0.25% of full scale at25°C (77°F);
Absolute Accuracy at 4–20 mA80,78 ±0.25% of full scale at25°C (77°F);
Absolute Accuracy at 4–20 mA ±0.25% of full scale at25°C (77°F);
Enhanced80, 78 ±0.5% of full scale over specified operating temperature range
Linearity <4 LSB
Input Impedance 250 Ω
Analog Voltage Input
Input Ranges 0 to +10 V (unipolar), -10 to +10 V (bipolar)
2.5 mV per count on 0 V to +10 V (unipolar) range
5 mV per count on -10 to +10 V (bipolar) range
Resolution at 0V to +10 Vdc 0 to +10 V: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)
–10 to +10 V: 0.3125 mV (1 LSB = 0.3125 mV)
Resolution at -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc 1 LSB = 0.3125 mV
Absolute Accuracy81,78 ±0.25% of full scale at25°C (77°F);
over specified operating ±0.5% of full scale over specified operating temperature range
temperature range
Linearity <4 LSB
Input Impedance 800k (typical)
80
Analog Current Input: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±2%
of full scale.
81
Analog Voltage Input: In the presence of severe Radiated RF interference (IEC 61000-4-3, 10V/m), accuracy may be degraded to ±1%
of full scale.


The diagram below shows voltage and current connections for the module. Each channel can be configured
independently as a voltage or a current channel, not both simultaneously.
Terminal Signal Definition
1 24VIN User Supplied +24Vdc Input
Jumper terminal for connecting 250 Field Terminals Field

2 JMP1 Wiring Wiring
sense resistor for CH1 current mode
24 VDC IN
Jumper terminal for connecting 250 1
3 JMP2 +
sense resistor for CH2 current mode JMP1
2
- JMP2
Positive connection for differential analog 3
4 +CH1
input channel 1 4 (+)
(+) 5 I1
Positive connection for differential analog
5 +CH2
input channel 2 I2 6 -
( )
-
( ) 7
Negative connection for differential JMP3
6 -CH1 8
analog input channel 1 JMP4
9
7 -CH2
Negative connection for differential 10 (+)
analog input channel 2 (+) 11 I3
I4 12 -
( )
8 JMP3
sense resistor for CH3 current mode
-
( )
13 (+) ( )-
-
( ) (+) 14 VQ1
9 JMP4 IQ1 15 -
sense resistor for CH4 current mode (+) ( )
-
( ) (+) 16 VQ2
Positive connection for differential analog IQ2 17
10 +CH3
input channel 3 VCOM
18
COM
Positive connection for differential analog (I RET) 19
11 +CH4 FGND*
input channel 4 20
12 -CH3
analog input channel 3 * Optional Shield
Connection
13 -CH4
14 Vout CH1 Voltage output for channel 1
15 Iout CH1 Current output for channel 1

16 Vout CH2 Voltage output for channel 2
17 Iout CH2 Current output for channel 2
18 V COM Common return for voltage outputs
Common return for User supplied +24 Vdc

19 I RET
and current outputs
Frame ground connections for cable

20 GND
shields
12.2.6 Input Scaling: ALG542

By default, the module converts a voltage or current input over the entire span of its configured Range. By
modifying one or more of the four channel scaling parameters (Low/High Scale Value parameters), the
scaled Engineering Unit range can be changed for a specific application. Scaling can provide inputs to the
Controller that are already converted to their physical meaning, or convert input values into a range that is
easier for the application to interpret. Scaling is always linear and inverse scaling is possible.
All alarm values apply to the scaled Engineering Units value, not to the A/D input value. The scaling
parameters only set up the linear relationship between two sets of corresponding values. They do not have
to be the limits of the input.
Appendix A: Example:
For a voltage input, 6.0 volts equals a speed of 20 feet per second, and 1.0 volt equals 0 feet per second. The


Feet/Second
For this example, 1.0V to 6.0V is the normal voltage (Engineering
range, but the module will attempt to scale the Units)
inputs for a voltage that lies outside the range. If a
voltage of 10.0V were input to the channel, the
0.000 6.000
module would return a scaled channel value of 1.000
36.000. The application should use alarms or other Voltage (A/D Units)
precautions for scaled inputs that are outside the
acceptable range or otherwise invalid. Figure 341: Input Scaling Example ALG542
12.2.7 Output Scaling: ALG542

entire span of its configured Range. By modifying one or more of the four channel scaling parameters
(Low/High Scale Value parameters), the scaled Engineering Unit range can be changed for a specific
application. Scaling is always linear and inverse scaling is possible.
All alarm values apply to the scaled Engineering Units value, not to the A/D units value. The scaling
parameters only set up the linear relationship between two sets of corresponding values. They do not have
to be the limits of the output.
In this example, the application should interpret
32000 counts as +10 Vdc and –32000 counts as -10
Vdc. The following channel configuration will scale a
±10 Vdc output channel to ±32000 counts.
Channel Value Format = 16-Bit Integer

Figure 342: Output Scaling Example ALG542

12.2.8 I/O Data: ALG542

This module uses two %AQ references and four %AI references, depending on configuration. Data in the %AI
and %AQ registers is in 16-bit 2’s complement format.
12.2.8.1 Input Data

its configured Channel Value Format, each enabled channel reports a 32-bit floating-point or 16-bit integer
value to the CPU.
12.2.8.2 Output Data

The module drives its channel output data in its configured output words, beginning at its assigned Channel
its configured Channel Value Format, each enabled channel drives analog voltage/current corresponding to
a 32-bit floating-point or 16-bit integer value driven by CPU.
This sign-extended upper word allows the 16-bit integer to be driven as a 32-bit integer type in logic without
12.2.9 Status Data: ALG542


The following parameters can be configured using the Machine Edition software.
12.2.10.1 Module Settings

Input Reference Valid memory types: %AI (default), The starting address in memory for input data
Address %AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M, %T, from the module.
Symbolic Memory.82
Input Reference Read-only Each input channel provides two words of

Length analog data to the Controller CPU.
82
To use this feature “Variable Mode” property must be enabled in Proficy* Machine Edition.

Output Reference Valid memory types: %AI (default), The starting address in memory for output data
Address %AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M, %T, to the module.
Symbolic Memory.82
Output Reference Read-only Each channel accepts two words of analog

Length output data to the Controller CPU.
Diagnostic Valid memory types: %I (default), Starting address for the channel diagnostics
Reference Address %Q, %AI, %AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M, %T data. Used only when Module Level Diagnostic
Symbolic Memory.82 Reporting is enabled.
Diagnostic Read-only The amount of memory required for the

reference Length channel diagnostics data. When Module Level
Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, two words (32
bits) of diagnostic data are allocated for each
channel, whether or not the channel is used.
Module Status Valid memory types: %I (default), The starting address in memory for status
Reference Address %Q, %AI, %AQ, %R, %W, %G, %M, %T, information from the module.
Symbolic Memory.82
Module Status 0, 32 The number of module status bits reported to

Reference Length the Controller. Data format is displayed in the
following figure.
When set to 0, status reporting is disabled. To

enable status reporting, set this parameter to a
value other than 0.
defined in the CPU configuration. Determines
how often the RX3i polls the data
Inputs Default Force Off (default) or In the event of module failure or removal, this
Hold Last State parameter specifies the state of all Channel
Value References for the module.

Module Level Disabled (default) or Enabled If enabled, 32 bits of data are allocated for each
Diagnostic active channel. Diagnostic Reporting and Fault
Reporting Reporting can be enabled separately for each
channel.

12.2.10.2 Output Channel Configuration Parameters ALG542

Range Type Disabled (default), Enables/disables the output channel.

Voltage/Current
Range 0 to +10 V (default), Selects the analog output type.

-10 to +10 V,
4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA
Channel Value 32-Bit Floating-point 32-Bit Floating-point: A real value, range 3.40282e+38
Format (default) through 3.40282e+38
16-Bit Integer
16-Bit Integer: The low word of the 32-bit channel data
contains the 16-bit integer channel value. The high word is
ignored. It is possible for the application program to write 32-
bit signed decimal values to the output reference. However,
the program logic must restrict the magnitude of the value to
the range +32767 to -32768. Exceeding this range results in
misinterpretation of the sign bit and incorrect output channel
operation.
Outputs Default Force to Default Value Determines how the output channel operates when one of the
(default) following events occurs:
Hold Last State
 The CPU transitions to Stop Disabled mode.
 The CPU transitions to Run Disabled mode.
 There is a loss of backplane power fault.
 There is a non-recoverable module fault for this
module.
 There is a critical CPU fault.
 The configuration is cleared.
Force To Default Value: When an event listed above occurs,

the module sets the channel output to the Default Value set
for the channel. The channel output remains set to the default
value until the CPU completes a successful reconfiguration of
the outputs. If the Default Ramp Rate is set to a value other
than 0, the channel ramps to the default value.
Hold Last State: When one of the listed events occurs, the
module retains the last successful configured state on its
outputs until the CPU completes a successful reconfiguration
of the outputs.

High Scale Value The defaults and ranges Scaling is disabled if:
(Eng Units) for the four scaling
parameters depend on High Scale Eng. Units = High Scale A/D Units
Low Scale Value the configured Range and
(Eng Units) and Channel Value Low Scale Eng. Units = Low Scale A/D Units.
Format.
(A/D Units)
When Channel Value Format is set to 32-Bit Floating-point,
Low Scale Value range is -3.40282e+38 through 3.40282e+38. When set to 16-
(A/D Units) Bit Integer, range -32,768 through +32,767.
High Alarm The defaults and ranges The alarm parameters are specified in Engineering Units. To
(Eng Units) for these parameters use alarming, Diagnostic Reporting or Fault Reporting must be
depend on the enabled.
Low Alarm configured Range and
(Eng Units) Channel Value Format. High Alarm: When the channel value reaches or exceeds this
value, a High Alarm is triggered.
Low Alarm: When the channel value reaches or goes below

this value, a Low Alarm is triggered.
Outputs Enabled Valid range: 0.0, or The maximum rate at which the output will change during
Ramp Rate normal operation (outputs are enabled and no fault conditions
(Eng Units/ms) Lower Limit: (High Scale exist).
Eng Units -Low Scale
Eng Units) / 60,000 A value of 0 disables ramping.
through High Scale Eng
Units
Default Ramp Valid range: 0.0, or The maximum rate at which the output will change if the
Range Outputs Default parameter is set to Force to Default and one
(Eng Units/ms) Lower Limit: (High Scale or more of the events defined for Force to Default occurs.
Eng Units -Low Scale
Eng Units) / 60,000 A value of 0 disables ramping.
through High Scale Eng
Units
Output Disabled (default), Disabled: The Upper Clamp Limit is set to the same value as
Clamping Enable Enabled the High Scale Value. The Lower Clamp Limit is set to the same
value as the Low Scale Value.
Enabled: You can select the values for Upper Clamp Limit and
Lower Clamp Limit.

Upper Clamp Valid range: 0.0, or Enabled when Output Clamping is Enabled.
Limit
(Eng Units) Lc+ through Heu+, The highest value to which the output can be set. If the
where Lc+ is a value commanded value exceeds the upper clamp limit, the output
greater than the Lower is set to the upper clamp limit and an Upper Clamp condition
Clamp Limit, and Heu+ occurs: an alarm is issued if the Upper Clamp Alarm Enable
is a calculated value parameter is set to Enabled under Diagnostic Reporting
slightly greater than the Enable and/or Fault Reporting Enable.
High Scale Value (Eng
Units). If Output Clamping Enable is set to Disabled, the Upper Clamp
Limit is set to the same value as the High Scale Value (Eng
Default: Heu+. Units).
Note: If you change the High Scale Value (Eng Units), the
Upper Clamp Limit is not automatically updated. To update it
automatically to Heu+, set the Output Clamping Enable
parameter to Disabled and then set it to Enabled. This also sets
the value of the Lower Clamp Limit to its default.
Lower Clamp Valid range: 0.0, or Enabled when Output Clamping is Enabled.
Limit
(Eng Units) Leu- through Hc-, where The lowest value to which the output can be set. If the
Leu is a calculated value commanded value exceeds the lower clamp limit, the output
slightly lower than the is set to the lower clamp limit and a Lower Clamp condition
Low Scale Value (Eng occurs: an alarm is issued if the Lower Clamp Alarm Enable
Units), and Hc- is a value parameter is set to Enabled under Diagnostic Reporting
lower than the Upper Enable and/or Fault Reporting Enable.
Clamp Limit (Eng Units).
If Output Clamping Enable is set to Disabled, the Lower Clamp
Default: Leu-. Limit is set to the same value as the Low Scale Value (Eng
Units).
Note: If you change the Low Scale Value (Eng Units), the Lower
Clamp Limit is not automatically updated. To update it
automatically to Leu-, set the Output Clamping Enable
parameter to Disabled and then set it to Enabled. This also sets
the value of the Upper Clamp Limit to its default.

Default Value Valid range: 0.000 - If the Outputs Default parameter is set to Force to Default
(Eng Units) 10.500 Value the channel will be set to this value if one or more of the
Default: events defined for Force to Default Value occurs.
-10 to +10 V: 0.0
Other ranges: Lowest

value of configured
Range.
User Offset 16-Bit Integer range: Engineering Units offset to change the base of the channel.
-32768 to 32768 This value is added to the scaled value on the channel prior to
alarm checking.
32-Bit Floating-point,
range:
3.40282e+38. 0.0
(default)
Diagnostic Disabled (default) or If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the module reports

Reporting Enabled channel alarms in the Diagnostic Reference memory. Channel
Enable alarms can be individually enabled.
(Available only if Module
Level Diagnostic
Reporting is enabled on
the Settings tab.)
Fault Reporting If Fault Reporting is enabled, the module logs a fault log in the
Enable I/O Fault table for each occurrence of a channel alarm. Fault
reporting for channel alarms can be individually enabled.

12.2.10.3 Input Channel Configuration Parameters ALG542

Range Type Disabled (default), Enables/disables the output channel.
Voltage/Current
Input Range Disabled (default) Selects the analog input type.
0 to +10 V,
-10 to +10 V,
4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA Enhanced
Channel 32-Bit Floating-point 32-Bit Floating-point: A real value, range 3.40282e+38

Value Format (default) through 3.40282e+38
16-Bit Integer 16-Bit Integer: The low word of the 32-bit channel data
contains the 16-bit integer channel value. The high word is
ignored. It is possible for the application program to write 32-
bit signed decimal values to the output reference. However,
the program logic must restrict the magnitude of the value to
the range +32767 to -32768. Exceeding this range results in
misinterpretation of the sign bit and incorrect output channel
operation.
High Scale The defaults and ranges Scaling is disabled if:

Value for the four scaling
(Eng Units) parameters depend on the High Scale Eng. Units = High Scale A/D Units
configured Range and and
Low Scale Channel Value Format. Low Scale Eng. Units = Low Scale A/D Units.
Value
(Eng Units) Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.
When Channel Value Format is set to 32-Bit Floating-point,

High Scale
range is -3.40282e+38 through 3.40282e+38. When set to
Value
16-Bit Integer, range -32,768 through +32,767.
(A/D Units)
Low Scale
Value
(A/D Units)

Positive Rate Range: 0.0 (default) Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
of Change through 3.40282e+38 trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. If set to 0, limit is
Limit disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
(Eng parameter.
Units/Sec)
Negative Rate Range: 0.0 (default) Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
of Change through 3.40282e+38 trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. If set to 0, limit is
Limit disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
(Eng parameter.
Units/Sec)
Rate of 0.06 (default) through Time from 0.06 through 300 seconds to wait between
Change 300.0 comparisons. If set to 0.0, the module checks after every 0.06
Sampling second input sample.
Rate
(Seconds) Note: Module will start the Rate of Change detection 100ms
after switching CPU to RUN mode or module field power is
cycled. This is to ignore any glitches in the input signal.

High-High The defaults and ranges Alarms and Deadbands

Alarm for these parameters
(Eng Units) depend on the configured All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering Units.
Range and Channel Value To use alarming, Diagnostic Reporting or Fault Reporting must
High Alarm Format. be enabled.
(Eng Units)
Low Alarm value is reached or passed, a Low-Low Alarm or High-High
(Eng Units) Alarm is triggered. The configured values must be lower
than/higher than the corresponding low/high alarm limits.
Low-Low
Alarm High Alarm and Low Alarm: When the configured value is
(Eng Units) reached or below (above), a Low (High) Alarm is triggered.
High-High High and Low Alarm Deadbands: A range in Engineering Units

Alarm above the alarm condition (low deadband) or below the alarm
Deadband condition (high deadband) where the alarm status bit can
(Eng Units) remain set even after the alarm condition goes away. For the
alarm status to clear, the channel input must fall outside the
High Alarm deadband range.
Deadband
(Eng Units) Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear condition
to be outside the Engineering Unit User Limits range. For
Low Alarm example, if the engineering unit range for a channel is -1000.0
Deadband to +1000.0 and a High Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm
(Eng Units) Deadband value range is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband
of 1100.0 or more would put the High Alarm clear condition
Low-Low below –1000.0 units making the alarm impossible to clear
Alarm within the limits.
Deadband
(Eng Units)
User Offset 16-Bit Integer range: Engineering Units offset to change the base of the input
-32768 through 32768 channel. This value is added to the scaled value on the channel
prior to alarm checking.
32-Bit Floating-point
range:
3.40282e+38.
0.0 (default)
Software Disabled (default) or Controls whether software filtering will be performed on the
Filtering Enabled inputs.

Integration 0 (default) through Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the software
Time 4294967295 ms filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.
(ms)
indicates data will achieve 63.2% of its value in 100ms.
Diagnostic Disabled (default) or If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the module reports channel
Reporting Enabled alarms in the Diagnostic Reference memory. Channel alarms
Enable can be individually enabled.
(Available only if Module
Level Diagnostic Reporting
is enabled on the Settings
tab.)
Fault If Fault Reporting is enabled, the module logs a fault log in the
Reporting I/O Fault table for each occurrence of a channel alarm. Fault
Enable reporting for channel alarms can be individually enabled.
12.2.10.3.1 Outputs Default Notes

Request.
reconfiguration.


Default Value Enabled Ramp Rate (Except where indicated, field
Enabled power is assumed to be present).
Outputs Enabled and N/A N/A No Output goes to its commanded

No Faults value from reference memory;

reference memory at the Outputs
Enabled ramp rate. Defaults don’t
apply.
Outputs Disabled, Default Value No N/A Output is set to the Default Value
Fault Mode, or
Reconfiguration Default Value Yes N/A Output is ramped to the Default
Value at the Default ramp rate,

Loss of Backplane Default Value N/A N/A Output is set to the Default Value.
Power or First
Configuration Store
after Power-up Hold Last N/A N/A Output is held at last commanded
State value.
Hot Removal, Reset N/A N/A N/A Output is held at last commanded
with SVCREQ 24 or value.
Cleared
Configuration
12.2.11 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG542

The ALG542 can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of Change in Engineering Units per

Change. The minimum value which can be used with this parameter is 60 ms i.e., the module can compare
12.2.12 Ramp Mode Operation: ALG542

In ALG542, the output channels can be set up to operate in Ramp mode. In this mode, the output goes to the
new value over a period of time, instead of changing directly to the new value (Standard Mode). The output
channel starts a new ramp (either up or down) each time the value in its %AQ reference changes.
In normal operating mode, the ramp operation of any given output channel is defined by the channel
configuration parameter Outputs Enabled Ramp Rate (Eng Units / ms). A value of zero indicates that the ramp
operation is disabled and the respective output channel operates in Standard mode.
Output
Sample Output in Ramp Mode
Sample Output in Standard Mode
Final Output Value

Corresponding to
%AQ Value
Time
%AQ Value Changes
Figure 343: Ramp Mode Example ALG542
An output channel can also be set up to operate in Ramp mode using COMMREQ command. The ramp slope
can be set up in the COMMREQ as:

1. Ramp Time Mode: A total ramp time from 1 millisecond to 32 seconds.

2. Ramp Step Mode: A step size of 1 to 32000 counts in every millisecond.
A channel stays in any one of the above modes until the module receives a new COMMREQ either changing
or canceling the ramp operation, or until power is cycled. In this case the value of channel configuration
parameter Outputs Enabled Ramp Rate (Eng Units / ms) is overridden by the data sent along with the
command. The output channel will not change modes even after re-loading the hardware configuration.
After canceling the ramp operation using a new COMMREQ the value of channel configuration parameter
Outputs Enabled Ramp Rate (Eng Units / ms) is restored and the ramp operation is enabled / disabled
accordingly.
If the module receives a new COMMREQ that changes ramp operation while an output is in the process of
ramping, the new ramp settings take effect as follows:
1. If Ramp mode is turned off during a ramp, the channel goes directly to the value in its %AQ
reference.
2. If a channel is set up to ramp over a period of time, but a new COMMREQ is received commanding
the channel to instead ramp in a sequence of measured steps, ramp operation changes as soon as
the COMMREQ is processed (assuming that the step is valid).
3. If a channel is set up to ramp as a sequence of measured steps, but a new COMMREQ is received
commanding the channel to instead ramp over a period of time, it immediately starts a new ramp
using the present output as the starting output and the present time as the start time.
If the module receives a command for an invalid channel, step height or ramp time, the module ignores the
command and returns an error code in its %I status references. The error code can be cleared by a Clear
Errors COMMREQ or by reconfiguring the module.
12.2.13 Clamp Mode Operation: ALG542
12.2.13.1 Output Channel Clamping Enable Upper Clamp Limit (Eng

Units)
Available when Output Clamping Enable is set to Enabled. This permits the user to define the uppermost
value to which the output can be set. If the commanded value exceeds the upper clamp limit, the output is
set to the upper clamp limit and an Upper Clamp condition occurs: an alarm is issued if the Upper Clamp
Alarm Enable parameter is set to Enabled under Diagnostic Reporting Enable and/or Fault Reporting Enable
and/or Interrupts Enable.
User can use the upper clamp to restrict the maximum output to a value lower than its configured Range
Type.
For example, a -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc channel can be restricted to -10 Vdc to +8.5Vdc.
The Upper Clamp Limit also provides an output over range capability.

If Output Clamping Enable is set to Disabled, the Upper Clamp Limit is set to the same value as the High Scale
Value (Eng Units).
Valid range: Lc+ through Heu+, where Lc+ is a value greater than the Lower Clamp Limit, and Heu+ is a
calculated value slightly greater than the High Scale Value (Eng Units).
Default: Heu+. If you change the High Scale Value (Eng Units), the Upper Clamp Limit is not automatically
updated. To update it automatically to Heu+, set the Output Clamping Enable parameter to Disabled and
then set it to Enabled. This also sets the value of the Lower Clamp Limit to its default.
12.2.13.2 Output Channel Clamping Enable Lower Clamp Limit (Eng

Units)
Available when Output Clamping Enable is enabled. This permits the user to define the lowest value to which
the output can be driven. If the commanded value exceeds the lower clamp limit, the output is set to the
lower clamp limit and a Lower Clamp condition occurs: an alarm is issued if the Lower Clamp Alarm Enable
parameter is set to Enabled under Diagnostic Reporting Enable and/or Fault Reporting Enable and/or
Interrupts Enable.
User can use the lower clamp to restrict the minimum output to a value higher than its configured Range
Type. For example, a -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc channel can be restricted to -7.5Vdc to +10 Vdc.
The Lower Clamp Limit also provides an output under range capability.
If Output Clamping Enable is set to Disabled, the Lower Clamp Limit is set to the same value as the Low Scale
Value (Eng Units).
Valid range: Leu- through Uc-, where Leu is a calculated value slightly lower than the Low Scale Value (Eng
Units), and Uc- is a value lower than the Upper Clamp Limit (Eng Units).
Default: Leu-. If you change the Low Scale Value (Eng Units), the Lower Clamp Limit is not automatically
updated. To update it automatically to Leu-, set the Output Clamping Enable parameter to Disabled and
then set it to Enabled. This also sets the value of the Upper Clamp Limit to its default.
12.2.14 Changing Module Operation on Command: ALG542

Module ALG542 can respond directly to a specific COMMREQ (Communication Request) command from the
application program to:
1. Clear %I error code for the module.

2. Modify the Input alarm limits, and.
3. Put one or both outputs in Ramp mode and set up the ramp characteristics.
These changes to module are not retained during loss of power. If the module is power-cycled, new
commands must be sent to the module to again modify the configured alarm limits, or to set up Ramp
operation for the outputs.

12.2.14.1 COMMREQ Command Block

The format of the COMMREQ for module ALG542 is displayed in the following figure. The COMMREQ
Command Block specifies a memory type and location to receive status information about the execution of
the command (word 3), and for the command data (word 9). For more information about using COMMREQs,
refer to the online help and the PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Reference Manual, GFK-2222.
Word Offset Value Description
Word 1 Must be 0004 Length of the command block
Word 2 0000 Not used.
Word 3 Refer to GFK-2222. Memory type of COMMREQ status word
Word 4 0-based Offset of COMMREQ status word
Word 5 0 Reserved
Word 6 0 Reserved
Word 7 E201 hex (-7679 decimal) COMMREQ command number
Word 8 0008 Byte length of command data
Word 9 Refer to GFK-2222 Memory type in the CPU for the Command Data
Word 10 0-based Memory offset for the command data.

12.2.14.2 COMMREQ Command Data Format

In the COMMREQ Command Block (above) words 9 and 10 assign a CPU memory location for eight bytes of
command data. The program logic can use these bytes to set the parameters of the COMMREQ.
1. Word 1 - Command Word

2. Word 2 - Channel Value Format (0000 - 16-Bit Integer / 0001 - 32-Bit Float).
3. Word 3 & 4 - Alarm or Ramp data.
Command to be Performed Word 1 (hex) Word 2 Contents of Word 3 & 4
Change the low alarm limit of 0000 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New low alarm limit for the input /
the specified input / output 0001 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer output.
channel to the value in words 0002 (Input 3)
3 & 4. 0003 (Input 4)
0004 (Output
1)
0005 (Output
2)
Change the high alarm limit of 0010 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New high alarm limit for the input /
the specified input / output 0011 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer output.
3 & 4. 0013 (Input 4)
0014 (Output
1)
0015 (Output
2)
Change the low-low alarm limit 0100 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New low-low alarm limit for the
of the specified input channel 0101 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer input.
to the value in words 3 & 4. 0102 (Input 3)
0103 (Input 4)
Change the high-high alarm 0110 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New high-high alarm limit for the
limit of the specified input 0111 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer input.
3 & 4. 0113 (Input 4)
Change the low alarm dead 0200 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New low alarm dead band limit for
band limit of the specified 0201 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer the input.
input channel to the value in 0202 (Input 3)
words 3 & 4. 0203 (Input 4)

Change the high alarm dead 0210 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New high alarm dead band limit for
band limit of the specified 0211 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer the input.
input channel to the value in 0212 (Input 3)
words 3 & 4. 0213 (Input 4)
Change the low-low alarm 0300 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New low-low alarm dead band limit
dead band limit of the 0301 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer for the input.
specified input channel to the 0302 (Input 3)
value in words 3 & 4. 0303 (Input 4)
Change the high-high alarm 0310 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / New high-high alarm dead band
dead band limit of the 0311 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer limit for the input.
specified input channel to the 0312 (Input 3)
value in words 3 & 4. 0313 (Input 4)
Change the low alarm limit of 0020 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / Increment used to change the input
the specified input / output 0021 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer / output configured low alarm limit.
channel by the increment in 0022 (Input 3) Increment can be + or -.
words 3 & 4. 0023 (Input 4)
0024 (Output
1)
0025 (Output
2)
Change the high alarm limit of 0030 (Input 1) 32-Bit Float / Increment used to change the input
the specified input / output 0031 (Input 2) 16-Bit Integer / output configured high alarm
channel by the increment in 0032 (Input 3) limit. Increment can be + or -.
words 3 & 4. 0033 (Input 4)
0034 (Output
1)
0035 (Output
2)
Turn off Ramp operation for 0040 (Output --

the specified output channel 1)
and put it in normal mode.83 0041 (Output
2)
Put the specified output 0050 (Output 32-Bit Float Step to be taken (in Eng Units / ms).
channel in Ramp step mode. 1)
Step increment in word 3 & 4.83 0051 (Output
2)
83
These commands do not modify the configuration parameter Outputs Enabled Ramp Rate of the specified output channel of ALG542.

Put the specified output 0060 (Output 16-Bit Integer Time in milliseconds: 1 to 32000
channel in Ramp time mode. 1) (1 ms to 32 seconds)
Ramp total time in word 0061 (Output
3 & 4.83 2)
Clear the module %I error code 00C0 --
If the requested command is not valid (for example, if the changed alarm limit would be out of range or the
specified data format in word 2 does not match with the data format used by the channel configuration) the
module ignores the COMMREQ command and returns an error code in the %I status data for the module. The
module does not stop operating; these error bits are informational only and can be ignored. The error code
remains in the %I status bits until cleared by another COMMREQ (command 00C0, refer to directly above), or
until the module is reconfigured.

12.2.14.3 COMMREQ Error Code

The first byte of the ALG542 module status data contains a status/error code for COMMREQs sent to the
module. Only the most recent error is reported; an existing error code will be overwritten if another error
occurs. Following is the list of supported error codes:
Error Code Description
0 No Error.
1 Invalid channel.
2 Invalid alarm level.
3 Invalid ramp time or step.
4 Invalid data format.
8 Invalid COMMREQ function.
The priority of errors is:
1. Invalid COMMREQ function (highest priority).

2. Invalid channel.
3. Invalid data format.
4. Invalid data (ramp or alarm parameter) (lowest priority).
If multiple errors occur, the one with the highest priority is reported in the error code. The module will not
stop standard operation if an error is detected; these error bits are informational only, and can be ignored.

Section 13: Universal Analog Input Module

This chapter describes the following Analog module for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
Universal Analog Input Module Description Catalog Number Section
Universal Analog Input: Voltage, Current, Resistance, RTD,

IC695ALG600 13.1
Thermocouple; 8-Channel
Universal Analog Input Module 625

13.1 Universal Analog Input: Voltage, Current,

Resistance, RTD, Thermocouple, 8-Channel + 2
CJC: IC695ALG600
Universal Analog Input Modules 626

Universal Analog Input module, IC695ALG600, provides eight general purpose input
MODULE OK channels and two Cold Junction Compensation (CJC) channels. Inputs are divided
FIELD STAT US into two equal groups of four. Channels can be individually-configured using the
TB Machine Edition software for:
▪ Any combination of up to 8 channels of voltage, current, thermocouple, RTD,

IC695ALG600 and resistance inputs.
▪ Thermocouple Inputs: B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
I1 ▪ RTD Inputs: PT 385 / 3916, N 618 / 672, NiFe 518, CU 426
▪ Resistance Inputs: 0 to 250 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 3000 / 4000
I2 ▪ Current: 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA, +20 mA
▪ Voltage: +50mV, +150 mV, 0–5 V, 1–5 V, 0–10 Vdc, +10 Vdc
I3
13.1.1 Features
I4
▪ Six hardware analog-to-digital filter frequencies, individually-selectable by
I5 channel
I6 ▪ Full auto-calibration
I6 ▪ Open-circuit detection for most input types
▪ Short-circuit detection for RTDs.
▪ User-defined scaling
I8
▪ High alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, low-low alarm detection and reporting
▪ Supports diagnostic point fault contacts in the logic program.
▪ Module Status, Field Status, and TB LEDs
▪ CJC compensation on terminal block
▪ Temperature in Celsius or Fahrenheit
▪ Configurable software filters for each input channel
▪ Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software utility (if the
This module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane. It cannot be located in an expansion or remote
backplane.

13.1.2 LEDs: ALG600

terminal block. LEDs are powered from the backplane power bus.
LED Indication Meaning
Module ON Green Module OK and configured.

OK
Slow Blinking Green Module OK but not configured.
Quick Blinking Green Module starting up, waiting for CPU-to-module communication to
be established.
Blinking Amber Internal Module Failure.
(Count the number of blinks for a two-digit blink code.)
Field ON Green No faults on any enabled channel, and Terminal Block is present.
Status
ON Yellow Fault on at least one channel.
OFF Terminal block not present or not fully seated.
TB ON Red Terminal block not present or not fully seated.
ON Green Terminal block is present.
OFF No backplane power to module.

Specification Description
Backplane Power Requirements For IC695ALG600-DD and earlier: 400 mA maximum at 5Vdc;
For IC695ALG600-EE and later: 190 mA maximum at 5Vdc;

CPU Memory Usage 40 bytes (20 words) of input references for channel input data.
40 bytes for enhanced diagnostics
4 bytes for module status reporting.

Power Dissipation within 5.4 watts maximum

Module
LEDs One bi-color green/amber LED to indicate the module status

One bi-color green/yellow LED to indicate the field status
One bi-color red/green LED to indicate the terminal block status
Channel Acquisition Time 10 ms at 1000 Hz, 13 ms at 200 Hz, 27 ms at 40 Hz, 67 ms at 16 Hz,

87 ms at 12 Hz, 127 ms at 8 Hz
Channel Update Time The sum of the channel acquisition times for a bank of 4 channels plus
one of the following, if applicable:
a) RTD Lead resistance measurement time (= channel acquisition time)

b) CJC acquisition time 7 ms.
Input resolution 11 to 16 bits, depending on configured range and A/D filter frequency.
Inputs in  Resistance 0-250, 0-500, 0-1000, 0-2000, 0-3000, 0-4000
Platinum 385 100, 200, 500,1000
Platinum 3916 100, 200, 500,1000
Nickel 672 120
Nickel 618 100,200, 500,1000
Nickel-Iron 518 604
Copper 426 10
RTD Inputs Copper 426 -100 to 260 C
Nickel 618 -100 to 260 C
Nickel 672 -80 to 260 C
Nickel-Iron 518 -100 to 200 C
Platinum 385 -200 to 850 C
Platinum 3916 -200 to 630 C
Thermocouple Inputs Type B 300 to 1820 C
Type C 0 to 2315 C

Type E -270 to 1000 C
Type J -210 to 1200 C
Type K -270 to 1372 C
Type N -210 to 1300 C
Type R 0 to 1768 C
Type S 0 to 1768 C
Type T -270 to 400 C
Voltage / Current Inputs -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc, 0 to +10 Vdc, 0 to +5Vdc, 1Vdc to +5Vdc, -50mV to
+50mV, -150mV to +150mV, -20mA to +20mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA
Configurable Input Filter 8Hz, 12Hz, 16Hz, 40Hz, 200Hz, 1000Hz
Scaling Floating-point user scaling.
Max RTD Cable Impedance 25 
RTD Wire Length 1000 ft max w/settling time of 1ms
Input Impedance >1M for Tc/V/RTD
Open circuit detection time 5 seconds max. Open circuit detection is available for all configurations
except ±20mA current, 0-20mA current, and ±10 Vdc voltage.
Max Over-voltage ±14.5Vdc continuous
Max Overcurrent 28mA continuous
Normal Mode Noise Rejection 95 dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 8 Hz filter

85 dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 12 Hz filter
Common Mode Noise 120dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 8 Hz filter

Rejection 110dB minimum at 50/60 Hz with 12 Hz filter
Settling time to 5% of Full Scale <80mS
(notch filter dependent)

Calibrated Accuracy at 25°C Better than 0.1% of range (except 10Cu RTD)
Accuracy depends on A/D filter, data format, input noise, and ambient
temperature.
Calibration interval 12 months typical to meet accuracy specifications over time. Module
will allow for user offset to be applied as a periodic calibration
adjustment.
Input Offset Drift with 3.0 m/°C maximum

Temperature 2.0 µV/°C maximum
Gain Drift with Temperature 50 ppm/°C typical (90 ppm/°C maximum)
Module error over Full Temp 0.5% of range typical (depends on range)
range 1.0% of range maximum
Module Scan Time (Assumes 2 ADCs running in parallel, no CJC or lead resistance)
10ms per Channel * 4 Channels = 40ms (1KHz filter)
(notch filter dependent) 127ms per Channel * 4 Channels = 508ms (8Hz filter)
Channels that are disabled are not scanned, shortening scan time.
Module conversion method Sigma-delta

±12.5Vdc channel to channel Tc/V/I/RTD
channel to channel 250 Vac continuous/1500 Vac for 60 seconds
group to group 250 Vac continuous/1500 Vac for 60 seconds
terminal block to
backplane/chassis

13.1.3.1 Accuracy Specifications

Maximum Error at: +25°C 0°C to +60°C
Configured Input Filter 8, 12, 16Hz 200Hz 1000Hz 8, 12, 16Hz 200Hz 1000Hz
± 10.5 V, 0.0 to +10.5 V ± 5 mV ± 5.5 mV ± 7 mV ± 10 mV ± 11 mV ± 14 mV
0 to +5.25 V, +1.0 to +5.25 ± 5.5
Voltage ± 3 mV ± 3.3 mV ± 4.2 mV ± 5 mV ± 7 mV
V mV
Inputs84
± 155 mV ± 30 µV ± 33 µV ± 42 µV ± 110 µV ± 121 µV ± 154 µV
± 55 mV ± 15 µV ± 17 µV ± 21 µV ± 70 µV ± 77 µV ± 98 µV
Current ± 22.5 mA, 0.0 to +22.5 mA,
± 20 µA ± 22 µA ± 28 µA ± 40 µA ± 44 µA ± 56 µA
Inputs84 +3.0 to +22.5 mA
Type J (-180C to +1200C) ± 0.6°C ± 0.7°C ± 0.9°C ± 2.3°C ± 2.6°C ± 3.3°C
Type J (-210C to -180C) ± 0.8°C ± 0.9°C ± 1.2°C ± 3.3°C ± 3.7°C ± 4.7°C
Type N (-160C to +1300C) ± 1.0°C ± 1.1°C ± 1.4°C ± 4.5°C ± 5.0°C ± 6.3°C
Type N (-210C to -160C) ± 1.8°C ± 2.0°C ± 2.6°C ± 8.0°C ± 8.8°C ± 11.2°C
Type T (-190C to +400C) ± 0.9°C ± 1.0°C ± 1.3°C ± 4.0°C ± 4.4°C ± 5.6°C
Type T (-270C to -190C) ± 6.7°C ± 7.4°C ± 9.4°C ± 18.0°C ± 19.8°C ± 25.2°C
Thermocouple
Type K (-200C to +1372C) ± 1.0°C ± 1.1°C ± 1.4°C ± 4.0°C ± 4.4°C ± 5.6°C
Inputs84
Type K (-270C to -200C) ± 9.5°C ± 10.5°C ± 13.3°C ± 21.0°C ± 23.1°C ± 29.4°C
Type E (-200C to +1000C) ± 0.6°C ± 0.7°C ± 0.9°C ± 2.5°C ± 2.8°C ± 3.5°C
Type E (-270C to -200C) ± 5.3°C ± 5.8°C ± 7.5°C ± 14.0°C ± 15.4°C ± 19.6°C
Type S and R ± 2.8°C ± 3.1°C ± 4.0°C ± 11.5°C ± 12.7°C ± 16.1°C
Type C ± 1.7°C ± 1.9°C ± 2.4°C ± 7.0°C ± 7.7°C ± 9.8°C
Type B ± 3.3°C ± 3.7°C ± 4.5°C ± 20.0°C ± 22.0°C ± 28.0°C
100 Ω Platinum 385 ± 0.7°C ± 0.8°C ± 1.0°C ± 1.2°C ± 1.4°C ± 1.7°C
RTD Inputs84
Nickel 672 ± 0.3°C ± 0.4°C ± 0.5°C ± 0.5°C ± 0.6°C ± 0.7°C
Nickel 618 ± 0.3°C ± 0.6°C ± 0.5°C ± 0.5°C ± 0.6°C ± 0.7°C
Nickel-Iron 518 ± 0.4°C ± 0.5°C ± 0.6°C ± 0.7°C ± 0.8°C ± 1.0°C
Copper 426 ± 1.0°C ± 1.1°C ± 1.4C ± 2.4 °C ± 2.7 °C ± 3.4 °C
Resistance 250  ± 0.25 Ω ± 0.28 Ω ± 0.35 Ω ± 0.35 Ω ± 0.39 Ω ± 0.49 Ω
Inputs84 500  ± 0.3 Ω ± 0.33 Ω ± 0.42 Ω ± 0.45 Ω ± 0.5 Ω ± 0.63 Ω
84
Accuracy is dependent on the ADC output rate selection, data format, and input noise. In severe RF environments, accuracy may be
degraded by up to ±2% of full scale.

1000  ± 0.5 Ω ± 0.55 Ω ± 0.7 Ω ± 0.8 Ω ± 0.88 Ω ± 1.2 Ω

2000  ± 0.9 Ω ± 1.0 Ω ± 1.26 Ω ± 1.5 Ω ± 1.65 Ω ± 2.1 Ω
3000  ± 1.3 Ω ± 1.43 Ω ± 1.82 Ω ± 2.2 Ω ± 2.42 Ω ± 3.08 Ω
4000  ± 1.7 Ω ± 1.87 Ω ± 2.38Ω ± 2.9 Ω ± 3.19 Ω ± 4.06 Ω
Cold Junction
± 1.5°C maximum
Temperature
CJC Sensor ± 0.3°C maximum 0°C to +80°C

The following table lists wiring connections for the module. Except for RTD and resistance type inputs,
channels are wired as differential inputs. There are no shield terminals. For shielding, tie cable shields to the
ground bar along the bottom of the backplane. M3 tapped holes are provided in the ground bar for this
purpose.
TC / Voltage / TC / Voltage /
Terminal RTD or Resistance RTD or Resistance Terminal
Current Current
1 CJC1 IN+ Channel 1 EXC+ 19
2 CJC1 IN- Channel 1 IN+ Channel 1 IN+ 20
3 Channel 2 EXC+ Channel 1 iRTN 21
4 Channel 2 IN+ Channel 2 IN+ Channel 1 IN- Channel 1 IN - 22
5 Channel 2 iRTN Channel 3 EXC+ 23
6 Channel 2 IN- Channel 2 IN - Channel 3 IN+ Channel 3 IN+ 24
8 Channel 4 IN+ Channel 4 IN+ Channel 3 IN- Channel 3 IN- 26
10 Channel 4 IN- Channel 4 IN - Channel 5 IN+ Channel 5 IN+ 28
14 Channel 6 IN- Channel 6 IN- Channel 7 IN+ Channel 7 IN+ 32
17 Channel 8 iRTN CJC2 IN+ 35
18 Channel 8 IN- Channel 8 IN- CJC2 IN- 36

Current Input 2 Wire RTD or Resistor
Channel IN+ Channel EXC+

I
Channel IN+
Channel iRTN
Channel IN- Channel IN-
Voltage Input
3 or 4 Wire RTD or Resistor
Channel IN+ Channel EXC+ Excitation
V Sense +
Channel IN+
Channel iRTN
Channel IN- Channel IN- RTD Return
Sense -
Negative sense not connected on 4-Wire RTD
Figure 345: Thermocouple / Voltage / Current Field Wiring

ALG600 Figure 346: RTD / Resistance Field Wiring ALG600
▪ For current inputs, tie the Return to the associated IN- pin.
▪ For 2 wire RTDs, tie EXC+ and IN+ together at the terminal block.
▪ For 4 wire RTDs, leave one of the negative sense leads unconnected.
▪ For 3 wire RTDs, IN+ = Sense+, IN- = RTD Return, and EXC+ = Excitation current.
▪ Unconnected RTD channels must have a jumper installed to assure proper operation. Failure to do so
could affect the accuracy of adjacent channels.
13.1.4.1 Installing CJC Sensors

When using thermocouple inputs on this module, the use of

CJC sensors is recommended. Installing one CJC sensor will Thermistor
End
greatly improve the accuracy of thermocouple readings.
Installing two CJC sensors will provide the highest
thermocouple input accuracy. Refer to “CJC Scan Enable” later
in this chapter for information about configuring and using CJC Sensor
CJC sensors.
A CJC sensor compensates for offset voltages introduced into CJC1 IN+
CJC IN1-
the input signal where the thermocouple wires are connected
to the module. A set of two CJC sensors is available as part
number IC695ACC600.
The thermistor end of the CJC sensor must be installed in the

CJC1 IN+ or CJC2 IN+ terminal for accurate thermocouple
temperature measurements. The gold pin end of the sensor
must be installed in the CJC1 IN- or the CJC2 IN- terminal.
Open the Terminal Block contacts fully before installing the

CJC sensor. Insert the sensor into the Terminal Block contact, CJC2 IN+
CJC2 IN-
maintaining metal-to-metal contact between the thermistor
and the Terminal Block contact.
Spring-style Terminal Block
For a Box-style Terminal Block, maintain pressure while

screwing down the contact. Figure 347: Installing Cold Junction Sensor
13.1.4.2 Connecting Channels to the Same Thermocouple Point

When connecting one or more channels from channels 1–4 and one or more channels from channels 5–8 to
the same thermocouple point electrically, the point should be grounded. It can be grounded at either the
sensor or the module, by adding a jumper wire from frame ground to the low side of one thermocouple
input.

Channel Value %AIxxxxx Starting address for the input data of the module. This defaults to
Reference Address the next available %AI block.

Inputs Default Force Off In the event of module failure or removal, this parameter specifies
the state of the Channel Value References.
Channel Value 20 The number of words used for the input data of the module.
Reference Length
Diagnostic %Ixxxxx Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data. This
Diagnostic 0 The number of bit reference bits (0 – 320) required for the Channel
Reference Length Diagnostics data. Default is 0, which means mapping of Channel
Diagnostics is disabled. Change this to a non-zero value to enable
Channel Diagnostics mapping.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of the module. This defaults to
Reference Address the next available %I block.
Module Status 0 The number of bits (0 – 32) required for the Module Status data.
Reference Length Default is 0, which means mapping of Module Status data is
disabled. Change this to a non-zero value to enable Module Status
data mapping.
CJC Scan Enable Disabled Cold Junction Compensation can be: No Scan, Scan CJC1, Scan
CJC2, Scan Both CJCs. Use of these parameters is described later in
this section.
fault generation.

13.1.5.2 Channel 1 – 8 Parameters

Range Type Disabled Voltage/Current, Thermocouple, RTD, Resistance,

Disabled
Range -10 Vdc to +10 For voltage/current:

(Not for Range Type Vdc -10 Vdc to +10 Vdc, 0 to +10 Vdc, 0 to +5Vdc, 1Vdc to
Disabled) +5Vdc,
-50mV to +50mV, -150mV to +150mV,
-20mA to +20mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA
For Thermocouple: B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
For RTD:
Platinum 385: 100  / 200 / 500 / 1000 
Platinum 3916: 100  / 200  / 500  / 1000 
Nickel 672: 120 
Nickel 618: 100  / 200  / 500  / 1000 
Nickel-Iron 518: 604 
Copper 426: 10 
For Resistance: 0-250 , 0 – 500 , 0 – 1000 ,

0 - 2000 , 0 – 3000 , 0 – 4000 
Channel Value Format 32-bit Floating- 16-bit integer or 32-bit floating-point

point
Temperature Units Celsius Celsius, Fahrenheit

(for Thermocouple or
RTD Range Type only)
RTD RTD 2 Wire (for RTD Range Type only) RTD 2 or 3 Wire
RTD Lead Resistance Enabled (for RTD Range Type only) Enabled, Disabled
Compensation
(Eng Units) the four Scaling High Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units equals Low
parameters Scale A/D Units.
configured Range
Low Scale Value Type and Range. Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type.
(Eng Units) Each Range and Must be lower than the high scaling value.

High Scale Value Range Type has a Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.
(A/D Units) different set of Must be greater than the low scaling value.
defaults.
(A/D Units)


By default, the module converts a voltage, current, resistance, or temperature input over the entire span of
its configured Range into a floating-point value for the CPU. For example, if the Range of a channel is 4 to
20mA, the module reports channel input values from 4.000 to 20.000. By modifying one or more of the four
channel scaling parameters (Low/High Scale Value parameters) from their defaults, the scaled Engineering
Unit range can be changed for a specific application. Scaling can provide inputs to the PLC that are already
converted to their physical meaning, or convert input values into a range that is easier for the application to
interpret. Scaling is always linear and inverse scaling is possible. All alarm values apply to the scaled
Engineering Units value, not to the A/D input value.
Example 1
For a voltage input, 6.0 Vdc represents a speed of 20 feet per second, and 1.0 Vdc represents 0 feet per

Feet per
(Engineering
Units)
0.000
Figure 348: Input Scaling Example 1: ALG600
For this example, 1.0V to 6.0V is the normal voltage range, but the module will attempt to scale the inputs
for a voltage that lies outside the range. If a voltage of 10.0V were input to the channel, the module would
return a scaled channel value of 36.000. The application should use alarms or take other precautions for
scaled inputs that are outside the acceptable range or invalid.
Example 2


Counts

-32,000 +10,000
-10,000
Voltage
Figure 349: Input Scaling Example 2: ALG600
Channel 1 – 8 Parameters continued
Positive Rate of Change 0.000 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
Limit trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. Default is
(Eng Units) disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
parameter.
Negative Rate of Change 0.000 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
Limit trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. Default is
(Eng Units) disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
parameter.
Rate of Change Sampling 0.000 Time from 0 to 300 seconds to wait between
Rate comparisons. Default of 0.0 is to check after every input
sample.
13.1.5.4 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG600

The Universal Analog module can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of Change in
Engineering Units per Second. When either of the Rate of Change parameters is configured to be non-zero,
the module takes the difference in Engineering Units between the previous rate of change sample and the
current sample, then divides by the elapsed time between samples.

been set up in the "Diagnostic Reporting Enable, " "Fault Reporting Enable," and "Interrupts Enabled"
parameters.


High, Low, and All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering Units.
Low-Low To use alarming, the A/D Alarm Mode must also be
High Alarm
parameters configured as enabled.
(Eng Units)
depend on the
configured Range
Low Alarm value is reached or passed, a Low-Low Alarm or High-High
Type and Range.
(Eng Units) Alarm is triggered. The configured values must be lower
Each Range and
than/higher than the corresponding low/high alarm limits.
Range Type has a
Deadband above the alarm condition (low deadband) or below the
(Eng Units) alarm condition (high deadband) where the alarm status bit
can remain set even after the alarm condition goes away. For
High Alarm the alarm status to clear, the channel input must fall outside
Deadband the deadband range.
(Eng Units)
Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear to be
Low Alarm outside the Engineering Unit User Limits range. For example,
Deadband if the engineering unit range for a channel is -1000.0 to
(Eng Units) +1000.0 and a High Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm
Deadband value range is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband
below –1000.0 units making the alarm impossible to clear
within the limits.

Software Filter Integration Time 0.000 Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the
(ms) software filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.

100ms. Default is disabled
A/D Filter Frequency 40 Hz Low pass A/D hardware filter setting: 8, 12, 16, 40, 200,
or 1000Hz. Default is 40Hz. Frequencies below this are
not filtered by hardware.
Diagnostic Reporting Enable Disabled Diagnostic Reporting Enable options are used to enable
If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, reference memory reporting of alarms into the
the additional parameters listed Diagnostic Reference area.
below can be used to enable
specific types of alarms. Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault logging of
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the Interrupts Enable options enable I/O Interrupt trigger
additional parameters listed when alarm conditions occur.
These parameters enable or disable the individual
specific types of Faults.
additional parameters listed
feature.
specific types of Interrupts.
Low Alarm Enable Disabled For example, if Over Range is enabled in the
“Diagnostic Reporting Enable” menu, the module will
High Alarm Enable Disabled set the Over Range bit in the Diagnostic Reference for
the channel.

If any of these parameters is disabled, the module does
not react to the associated alarm conditions.
Calibration Fault Enable Disabled

Low-Low Alarm Enable Disabled
High-High Alarm Enable Disabled For example, if Low Alarm Enable is set to Disabled in
the “Fault Reporting Enable” menu, the Low Alarm
Negative Rate of Change Disabled fault is not logged in the I/O Fault Table when Low
Detection Enable Alarm is detected on the channel.
Positive Rate of Change Detection Disabled

Enable

13.1.5.5 Using Alarming: ALG600

channel alarm.
as explained below.
13.1.5.6 Using Interrupts


13.1.5.6.2 Note on Using Interrupts

This module has separate enable/disable options for Diagnostic Reporting and Interrupts. Normally,

13.1.5.7 CJC Parameters

Channel Value Format 16-bit Integer 16-bit integer or 32-bit floating-point
User Offset 0.000 Temperature offset added to CJC values.

(Temperature Units) Range –25°C to +25°C with C temp units and
-45°F to +45°F with F temp units.
Diagnostic Reporting Enable Disabled These parameters enable or disable the

individual diagnostics features of a CJC input.
13.1.5.8 CJC Scan Enable

Cold Junction Compensation for the module can be configured as: Disabled, CJC1 only, CJC2 only, or Both
CJCs.
Compensation CJC1 CJC2

Description
Options Scanning Scanning
No Scan Module assumes 25C for any thermocouple compensation. Disabled Disabled


Description
Scan Both Highest thermocouple compensation accuracy. Uses both Enabled Enabled
values in thermocouple compensation as explained below.
Scan CJC1 only Lowers the thermocouple compensation accuracy, but can Enabled Disabled
improve scan time for channels 5-8.
Scan CJC2 only Lowers the thermocouple compensation accuracy, but can Disabled Enabled
improve scan time for channels 1-4.
When scanning both CJC inputs, the module subtracts the temperature of CJC2 from the temperature of
CJC1. It then multiplies the difference by a specific multiplier for each channel to compensate for the
position of the channel on the terminal block.
Channel Channel Multiplier Channel Channel Multiplier
1 0.10 5 0.45
2 0.05 6 0.60
3 0.25 7 0.75
4 0.25 8 0.90
For example: if CJC1 is 30C and CJC2 is 25C, the compensated channel 1 terminal block temperature is
30 - [ (30-25) * 0.10 ] = 29.5C. The module then adjusts this temperature for the particular thermocouple
type to determine the thermoelectric effect (mV) caused by the connection at the terminal block.

The module reports its input channel data in 20 input words, beginning at its assigned Channel Value
Reference Address. Each channel occupies two words (whether the channel is used or not):
Channel Value
Contains this Input
Reference Address
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5

+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 CJC1
+18, 19 CJC2
value. The high word (upper 16-bits) of the 32-bit value are set with the sign extension of the 16-bit integer.

13.1.6.1 Resolution and Update Time

The actual resolution and update time for each input depend on the Range Type and A/D Filter Frequency
configured for that channel. At higher Filter Frequencies, channel update time increases while input
resolution decreases. The approximate number of bits for each Filter Frequency and Range Type are
displayed in the following table.
Range Type: Range Type:

Voltage / Current TC / mV Channel Update
Filter Frequency
Approximate Approximate Number Time
Number of Bits of Bits
8 Hz 16 16 127 ms
12 Hz 16 16 87 ms
16 Hz 16 16 67 ms
40 Hz 16 14 27 ms
200 Hz 14 13 13 ms
1000 Hz 11 11 10 ms
13.1.6.2 Isolated Input Groups

This module provides two isolated groups of four input channels each. This allows fast inputs and slower or
highly-filtered inputs to be connected to the same module without adversely affecting the update rate of the
fast inputs. To take advantage of this feature, up to four inputs requiring fast response should be placed
together in one isolated group while slower inputs should be connected to the other isolated group. For
example, voltage and current inputs with higher frequency input filter settings should be grouped together
on one of the isolated groups while thermocouple, RTD, resistance, or voltage/current inputs with low-
frequency input filter settings should be grouped together on the other isolated group.
Each isolated group provides a CJC input. The CJC input is considered a slow-response input and will reduce
the update rate for the associated channel group when enabled.


In addition to the 20 words of input data from field devices, the module can be configured to report 320 bits
(20 words) of channel diagnostics status data to the CPU. The CPU stores this data at the Diagnostic Reference
Address configured for the module. Use of this feature is optional.

+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
+16, 17 CJC1
+18, 19 CJC2
channel.



13.1.6.5 Terminal Block Detection


Section 14: Thermocouple Input Modules

This chapter describes the following Thermocouple input modules for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
Thermocouple Module Description Catalog Number Section
Thermocouple Input Module 6-Channel Isolated IC695ALG306 14.1
Thermocouple Input Module 12-Channel Isolated IC695ALG312 14.1
Thermocouple Input Module 12-Channel Isolated (Improved Noise

IC695ALG412 14.2
Rejection)
For operating information common to these modules, refer to Section 14.3.
Thermocouple Input Modules 653

14.1 Thermocouple Input 6-/12-Channel Isolated

Modules IC695ALG306 & IC695ALG312

Thermocouple Input module, IC695ALG306, provides six isolated differential

thermocouple input channels. MODULE OK
FIELD STATUS
Thermocouple Input module, IC695ALG312, provides twelve isolated
TB
differential thermocouple input channels.
Each channel can be individually configured for inputs from:

IC695ALG306
 Thermocouple types: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N, or C
 Voltage: ±150mV or ±50mV
I1
14.1.1 Features
I2
 Thermocouple Linearization based on ITS-90
 32-bit IEEE floating-point or 16-bit integer (in 32-bit field) input data
I3
format selectable per channel
 Temperature units selectable in C and F
 User Scaling
 Programmable notch filter from 2.3Hz to 28Hz per channel I4
 Under Range/Over Range alarm detection and reporting by channel

 Alarm dead band for high alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, and low-low
I5
alarm by channel
 Wire-off (open circuit) condition support for all inputs.
 Module fault status reporting (Watchdog, Ram Fail, Flash Fail)
I6
 Module identity and status reporting including LED status indicators
 User offset for all channels including CJCs.
 Supports Cold Junction Compensation on Terminal Block (Cold Junction
Sensors sold separately).
 Support field upgrade of firmware application code. Figure 350: IC695ALG306
 Optional “CJC Disable” selection
 Reports CJC temperatures as separate channels in Input Data.
 CJC update rate is fixed at 20Hz.
 CJC filter setting fixed with first notch at 10Hz, and 3dB input attenuation
at 4.7Hz.
 Terminal Block detection switch
 The module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
Section 2.6.4.1.
(if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host
CPU has no serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware
upgrade kit.23

The module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style

Number of Channels 6 / 12 Individually isolated channels
Resolution 11.5–16 bits (refer to filter table)
Measuring method selectable per Voltage: ±50mV and ±150mV

channel Thermocouple types: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N and C
Integration time for 12 channels Configurable from 15 ms to 120 ms.
Voltage Accuracy over temperature ±0.1% of voltage span at 25 °C.

span ±0.25% of span over temperature range.
Thermocouple Input Types and Thermocouple Type Temperature Range(C)

Ranges
Type B +300 to +1820
Type C 0 to +2315
Type E -270 to +1000
Type J -210 to +1200
Type K -270 to +1372
Type N -210 to +1300
Type R 0 to +1768
Type S 0 to +1768
Type T -270 to +400
Voltage Input Ranges Input Type Voltage Range
-50mV to +50mV -55.0 mV to +55.0 mV
-150mV to +150mV -155.0 mV to +155.0 mV
Module temperature accuracy for Thermocouple Type & Range +25°C 0°C to +60°C
thermocouple inputs over
temperature span (2.3, 4, and 4.7 Hz Type J (-180C to +1200C) ±0.6°C ±2.3°C

filters). Does not include cold Type J (-210C to -180C) ±0.8°C ±3.3°C
junction compensation or
thermocouple tolerances. Type N (-160C to +1300C) ±1.0°C ±4.5°C
Type N (-210C to -160C) ±1.8°C ±8.0°C
Type T (-190C to +400C) ±0.9°C ±4.0°C
Type T (-270C to -190C) ±6.7°C ±18.0°C
Type K (-200C to +1372C) ±1.0°C ±4.0°C
Type K (-270C to -200C) ±9.5°C ±21.0°C
Type E (-200C to +1000C) ±0.6°C ±2.5°C
Type E (-270C to -200C) ±5.3°C ±14.0°C
Type S and R ±2.8°C ±11.5°C
Type C ±1.7°C ±7.0°C
Type B ±3.3°C ±20.0°C
Measurement Units Degrees C or F, or Voltage
Repeatability 0.05% of voltage span at a constant temperature over a

30-second period
Diagnostics reported to the User configurable for Over Range, Under Range, High and Low
controller Alarm, High-high and Low-low alarm, Open Circuit Detection,
Positive and Negative Rate of Change alarm
Channel-to-channel crosstalk 70 dB minimum
Common Mode Rejection 2.3 Hz filter, 50/60Hz: 100 dB

4 Hz filter, 50Hz: 100 dB
4.7 Hz filter, 60Hz: 100 dB
Default or Hold Last State Configurable per channel for Default to 0 or Hold Last State
Fault Reporting Configurable per channel to enable or disable fault reporting for
under or over range alarm, open circuit, rate of change alarm.
Rate of change Configurable per channel to enable/disable and specify positive

and negative rate of change alarms.

Channel Value Format Configurable as 16-bit integer (in a 32-bit field) or 32-bit real
number.
Backplane Power Requirements For ALG306-EB or earlier: 3.3V = 400mA; 5V = 225mA

ALG312-EB or earlier: 3.3V = 400mA: 5V = 425mA
For ALG312-FC or later: 3.3V = 315mA: 5V = 150mA
Input Impedance Voltage: >=500k
Power Dissipation within the module IC695ALG306 = 2.5W max

IC695ALG312 = 3.5W max
Isolation Voltage (Field to Backplane 250 Vac Continuous

and Channel to Channel) 1500 Vac 1 minute
(CJC inputs are not isolated from the 2550 Vdc 1 second
backplane)
Normal Mode Noise Rejection 2.3 Hz filter, 50Hz/60Hz: 67dB

4 Hz filter, 50Hz/60Hz: 80dB
24 Hz filter, 50Hz/60Hz: 25dB
CJC measurement resolution 0.01° (C or F) for temperatures 0-60°C
CJC Temperature Accuracy ±1.5°C max (0-60°C) when using IC695ACC600 with an accuracy
of ±0.3°C)
Module Filter Frequency Update Time (ms) Normal Mode Rejection at

Filter (-3dB frequency) 50/60 Hz
settings,
update 2.3 Hz 120 (130 max) 67dB at 50/60 Hz
times,
4 Hz 70 (80 max) 80dB at 50 Hz
rejection and
resolution 4.7 Hz 60 (70 max) 80dB at 60 Hz
24 Hz 20 (30 max) 25dB at 50 Hz
28 Hz 15 (25 max) 25dB at 60 Hz

14.1.2.1 Update Time: ALG306 & ALG312

The channel update times include channel scan time and filter delay time. The update rate of any individual
channel is independent of that of any other channel.
Module update time is the time required for the module to sample and convert the input signals, and
provide the resulting data values to the processor.
14.1.2.2 Module Resolution: ALG306 & ALG312

The module resolution depends on the input type and the filter chosen. The following table summarizes the
effective number of bits of resolution, by filter and input type. It is based on the full-scale range of the input
type. If integer format is used, the resolution is limited to 16 bits.
Filter Setting / Resolution
2.3Hz 4.0Hz 4.7Hz 24Hz 28Hz

Input
Type Op Range Bits °C Bits °C Bits °C Bits °C Bits °C
J >-180°C 15.0 0.09 14.8 0.10 14.7 0.11 11.6 0.93 11.0 1.40
<-180°C 0.12 0.14 0.15 1.25 1.89
K >-200°C 14.6 0.15 14.4 0.17 14.3 0.18 11.2 1.56 10.6 2.37
<-200°C 2.37 2.72 2.92 25.0 37.9
T >-190°C 13.4 0.13 13.2 0.15 13.1 0.16 10.0 1.39 9.4 2.11
<-190°C 1.18 1.36 1.46 12.50 18.95
E >-200°C 15.0 0.09 14.8 0.11 14.7 0.12 11.6 1.00 11.0 1.52
>-200°C 1.18 1.36 1.46 12.50 18.95
R 13.1 0.47 12.9 0.54 12.8 0.58 9.7 5.00 9.1 7.58
S 13.0 0.47 12.8 0.54 12.7 0.58 9.6 5.00 9.0 7.58
B 12.5 0.79 12.3 0.91 12.2 0.97 9.1 8.33 8.5 12.63
N >-160°C 14.4 0.16 14.2 0.18 14.1 0.19 11.0 1.67 10.4 2.53
<-160°C 0.30 0.34 0.36 3.13 4.74
C 14.9 0.26 14.7 0.30 14.6 0.32 11.5 2.78 10.9 4.21
Voltage (µV) (µV) (µV) (µV) (µV)
±50mV 15.5 2.4 15.3 2.8 15.2 3.0 12.1 25.0 11.5 37.9
±150mV 17.0 2.4 16.8 2.8 16.7 3.0 13.6 25.0 13.0 37.9

14.2 Thermocouple Input 12-Channel Isolated

Module IC695ALG412

The Thermocouple Input module, IC695ALG412, provides twelve isolated

differential thermocouple input channels. The ALG412 offers a 10dB MODULE OK
improvement in noise rejection compared to the ALG312 thermocouple input FIELD STATUS
module. TB
Each channel can be individually configured for inputs from:

IC695ALG412
 Thermocouple types: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N, or C
 Voltage: ±50mV I1
14.2.1 Features I2
I3

I4
 Thermocouple Linearization based on ITS-90
 32-bit IEEE floating-point or 16-bit integer (in 32-bit field) input data I5

I6
 Temperature units selectable in C and F
 User Scaling I7
 Programmable notch filter from 2.3 Hz to 28 Hz per channel
 Under Range/Over Range alarm detection and reporting by channel I8
 Alarm dead band for high alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, and low-low
I9
alarm by channel
 Wire-off (open circuit) condition support for all inputs. I10
 Module fault status reporting (Watchdog, Ram Fail, Flash Fail)

I11
 Module identity and status reporting including LED status indicators
 User offset for all channels including CJCs. I12
 Supports Cold Junction Compensation on Terminal Block (Cold Junction
Sensors sold separately).
 Support field upgrade of firmware application code.
 Optional CJC enable selections Figure 351: IC695ALG412
 Reports CJC temperatures as separate channels in Input Data
 CJC update rate is fixed at 20Hz.
 CJC filter setting fixed with first notch at 60Hz, and 3dB input attenuation
at 26.5Hz.
 Terminal Block detection switch.
 Module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
Section 2.6.4.1.
(if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host
CPU has no serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware
upgrade kit.23
These modules can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style
(IC694TBS032), or Extended Spring-style (IC694TBS132) Terminal Block.

Number of Channels 12 Individually isolated channels
Resolution 11.5–16 bits (refer to filter table)
Measuring method selectable per Voltage: ±50mV

channel Thermocouple types: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N and C
Integration time for 12 channels Configurable from 15 ms to 120 ms.
Voltage Accuracy over ± 0.1% of voltage span at 25 °C.

temperature span ± 0.25% of span over temperature range.
Thermocouple Input Types and Thermocouple Type Temperature Range(C)

Ranges
Type B +300 to +1820
Type C 0 to +2315
Type E -270 to +1000
Type J -210 to +1200
Type K -270 to +1372
Type N -210 to +1300
Type R 0 to +1768
Type S 0 to +1768
Type T -270 to +400
Voltage Input Ranges Input Type Voltage Range
-50mV to +50mV -55.0 mV to +55.0 mV
Module temperature accuracy for Thermocouple Type & Range +25°C 0°C–60°C 40°C–75°C
thermocouple inputs over
temperature span (2.3, 4, 4.7 and Type J (-180C to +1200C) ± 0.6°C ± 2.3°C -
8Hz filters). Does not include cold
Type J (-210C to -180C) ± 0.8°C ± 3.3°C -
junction compensation or
thermocouple tolerances. Type J (5C to 45C) - - ± 1.25°C
Type N (-160C to +1300C) ± 1.0°C ± 4.5°C -

Type N (-210C to -160C) ± 1.8°C ± 8.0°C -
Type T (-190C to +400C) ± 0.9°C ± 4.0°C -
Type T (-270C to -190C) ± 6.7°C ± 18.0°C -
Type K (-200C to +1372C) ± 1.0°C ± 4.0°C -
Type K (-270C to -200C) ± 9.5°C ± 21.0°C -
Type K (5C to 45C) - - ± 2.5°C
Type E (-200C to +1000C) ± 0.6°C ± 2.5°C -
Type E (-270C to -200C) ± 5.3°C ± 14.0°C -
Type S and R ± 2.8°C ± 11.5°C -
Type C ± 1.7°C ± 7.0°C -
Type B ± 3.3°C ± 20.0°C -
Measurement Units Degrees C or F, or Voltage
Repeatability 0.05% of voltage span at a constant temperature over a 30-second

period
Diagnostics reported to the User configurable for Over Range, Under Range, High and Low
controller Alarm, High-high and Low-low alarm, Open Circuit Detection,
Positive and Negative Rate of Change alarm
Channel-to-channel crosstalk 70 dB minimum
Common Mode Rejection All filters, 50/60 Hz: 110 dB
Default or Hold Last State Configurable per channel for Default to 0 or Hold Last State
Fault Reporting Configurable per channel to enable or disable fault reporting for
under or over range alarm, open circuit, rate of change alarm.
Rate of change Configurable per channel to enable/disable and specify positive and
negative rate of change alarms.
Channel Value Format Configurable as 16-bit integer (in a 32-bit field) or 32-bit real
number.
Backplane Power Requirements For ALG412-CB and earlier: 3.3V = 400mA; 5.0V = 425mA

For ALG412-DC and later: 3.3V = 315mA; 5.0V = 150mA
Input Impedance Voltage: >=500k
Power Dissipation within the IC695ALG412 = 3.5W max

module
Isolation Voltage (Field to 250 Vac Continuous

Backplane and Channel to
Channel) 1500 Vac 1 minute
(CJC inputs are not isolated from 2550 Vdc 1 second

the backplane)
CJC measurement resolution 0.01° (C or F) for temperatures 0-60°C
CJC Temperature Accuracy ±1.5°C max (0-60°C) when using IC695ACC600 with an accuracy
of ±0.3°C)
Module Filter Frequency Update Time Normal Mode Noise Rejection at

Filter (-3dB frequency) (milliseconds) 50/60 Hz
settings,
update 2.3 Hz 120 (130 max) 80dB at 50/60 Hz
times,
4.0 Hz 70 (80 max) 80dB at 50 Hz, 65dB at 60 Hz
rejection
and 4.7 Hz 60 (70 max) 80dB at 50/60 Hz
resolution
8.0 Hz 30 (40ms max) 48dB at 50 Hz; 28dB at 60 Hz
24.0 Hz 20 (30 max) 38dB at 50 Hz
28.0 Hz 15 (25 max) 38dB at 60 Hz

14.2.2.1 Update Time: ALG412

The channel update times include channel scan time and filter delay time. The update rate of any individual
channel is independent of that of any other channel.
Module update time is the time required for the module to sample and convert the input signals, and
provide the resulting data values to the processor.
14.2.2.2 Module Resolution: ALG412

effective number of bits of resolution, by filter and input type. It is based on the full-scale range of the input
type. If integer format is used, the resolution is limited to 16 bits.
Input Type Filter Setting / Resolution
2.3Hz 4.0Hz 4.7Hz 8Hz 24Hz 28Hz

Op
Range Bits °C Bits °C Bits °C Bits °C Bits °C Bits °C
J <-180°C 14.8 0.04 15.0 0.03 14.6 0.0 14.9 0.0 13.9 0.08 13.6 0.0
5 4 9
>-180°C 14.9 0.04 14.9 0.04 15.2 0.0 15.2 0.0 14.4 0.05 14.0 0.0
3 3 7
K <-200°C 13.8 0.06 13.5 0.08 13.1 0.1 13.0 0.1 11.7 0.27 10.9 0.4
0 1 8
>-200°C 14.3 0.04 14.3 0.04 14.5 0.0 14.5 0.0 13.4 0.08 12.7 0.1
4 4 4
T <-190°C 13.4 0.05 13.4 0.05 13.4 0.0 13.1 0.0 11.7 0.16 11.1 0.2
5 6 5
>-190°C 15.2 0.01 15.0 0.02 15.0 0.0 15.1 0.0 14.0 0.03 13.5 0.0
2 2 5
E <-200°C 14.5 0.04 14.4 0.05 14.0 0.0 14.3 0.0 13.4 0.09 12.7 0.1
6 5 5
>-200°C 15.1 0.03 15.0 0.03 15.0 0.0 15.2 0.0 13.6 0.08 13.0 0.1
3 3 3
R 14.4 0.07 14.6 0.06 14.7 0.0 14.4 0.0 13.1 0.16 12.2 0.3
6 7 1

S 14.3 0.07 14.1 0.08 14.3 0.0 14.3 0.0 13.1 0.16 13.6 0.1
7 7 2
B 13.2 0.14 13.0 0.15 12.8 0.1 12.3 0.2 11.2 0.52 10.9 0.6
7 4 5
N <-160°C 14.3 0.06 14.3 0.06 14.3 0.0 14.2 0.0 12.9 0.16 12.7 0.1
6 7 8
>-160°C 14.9 0.04 14.9 0.04 15.0 0.0 14.9 0.0 13.9 0.08 13.3 0.1
4 4 3
C 14.1 0.11 13.9 0.13 14.1 0.1 14.3 0.1 13.2 0.2 12.8 0.2
1 0 6
Voltage (µV) (µV) (µV) (µV) (µV) (µV

17 0.63 16.9 0.7 16.1 1.2 16.1 1.2 14.2 4.2 14.1 )
±50mV 4.6
14.3 Thermocouple Module Operation: ALG306,

ALG312 & ALG412
The information in this section applies to all three Thermocouple Input Modules: ALG306, ALG312 and
ALG412.
14.3.1 LEDs: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

Module Off Module is not receiving power from the RX3i backplane, or the
OK module has failed self-test.
Solid Green Module OK and configured.
Blinking Green, rapidly Module performing power up sequence.

Blinking Green, slowly The module has not received configuration from the CPU. If
configuration is not successful, the module will continue to blink in
this mode.
Field ON Green No faults on any enabled channel, Terminal Block is present, and
Status field power is present.
ON Amber and Terminal Block is installed, fault on at least one channel, or field
TB Green
ON Amber and TB Red Terminal Block not fully removed, field power still detected.
OFF and TB Red Terminal block not present and no field power is detected.
TB ON Red Terminal block not present or not fully seated. Refer to above.
ON Green Terminal block is present. Refer to above.
14.3.2 Field Wiring: ALG306, ALG312, & ALG412

The following table lists wiring connections for the Isolated Thermocouple Input Modules. There are no
shield terminals. For the 6-Channel module, IC695ALG306, the channel 7 to 12 connections are not used.
Voltage Input Assignment

Assignment
Terminal Channel IN+ (ALG312 / Terminal
(All Modules) V
Channel IN- ALG412 only)
2 CJC1-IN+ No Connect 20
Figure 352: Field Wiring ALG306, ALG312,
3 CJC1-IN- No Connect 21
ALG412 (Thermocouple/Voltage)
4 CH1+ CH7+ 22
5 CH1- CH7- 23
6 CH2+ CH8+ 24
7 CH2- CH8- 25
8 CH3+ CH9+ 26

9 CH3- CH9- 27
10 CH4+ CH10+ 28
11 CH4- CH10- 29
12 CH5+ CH11+ 30
13 CH5- CH11- 31
14 CH6+ CH12+ 32
15 CH6- CH12- 33
16 CJC2 IN+ No Connect 34
17 CJC2 IN- No Connect 35
Depending on the Terminal block type chosen, the wire gauge supported ranges from 0.081…1.5mm2
(28…14AWG) solid or stranded wire.
14.3.2.1 Grounding
bottom of the backplane. M3 tapped holes are provided in the ground bar for this purpose. For optimal
performance, thermocouple inputs should be ungrounded, and use shielded cable with the shield(s)
grounded at the module end. If a grounded thermocouple is required, a 0.1uF capacitor from the shield to
the ground bar may be necessary on the module end to eliminate ground noise created from grounding
both ends of the shield.
14.3.2.2 Installing CJC Sensors

When using thermocouple inputs, the use of CJC

sensors is recommended. Installing one CJC sensor CJC1 IN+
will greatly improve the accuracy of thermocouple CJC1 IN-
readings. Installing two CJC sensors will provide the

highest thermocouple input accuracy for the module.
A CJC sensor compensates for offset voltages Thermistor
End
introduced into the input signal where the
thermocouple wires are connected to the module. A
set of two CJC sensors is available as part number
IC695ACC600.
Under normal circumstances, adding one or both CJC CJC Sensor

sensors does not affect the channel or module scan
times.
CJC2 IN+
CJC2 IN-
The thermistor end of the CJC sensor must be
installed in the CJC1 IN+ or CJC2 IN+ terminal for
accurate temperature measurements. The gold pin
end of the CJC sensor must be installed in the CJC1 IN- Spring-style Terminal Block
or the CJC2 IN- terminal.
Figure 353: Installing Cold Junction Sensor
Open the Terminal Block contacts fully before installing the CJC sensor. Insert the sensor into the Terminal
Block contact, maintaining metal-to-metal contact between the thermistor and the Terminal Block
contact.
For a Box-style Terminal Block, maintain pressure while screwing down the contact.
Note: To use cold junction compensation, CJC scanning must be enabled in the hardware configuration
profile of the module.
For each CJC sensor used, the Open Wire diagnostic should be enabled in the CJC Channel
configuration. This diagnostic will allow you to detect improper installation or a failed CJC sensor.
14.3.3 Configuration: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412
14.3.3.1 Module Parameters: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

Channel Value %AIxxxxx Starting address for the input data of the module. This defaults
Reference Address to the next available %AI block.
Channel Value 28 The number of words used for the input data of the module.
Reference Length Each channel is mapped to 2 words whether or not the channel is
used.

Inputs Default Force Off The state of the Channel Value References when the module is
not available.
Diagnostic %Ixxxxx Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data. This
Diagnostic 0 The number of bit reference bits required for the Channel
Reference Length Diagnostics data. Default is 0, which means mapping of Channel
Diagnostics is disabled. Change this to a non-zero value to
enable Channel Diagnostics mapping.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of the module. This defaults
Reference Address to the next available %I block.
Module Status 0 The number of bits required for the Module Status data. Default
Reference Length is 0, which means mapping of Module Status data is disabled.
Change this to a non-zero value to enable Module Status data
mapping.
CJC Scan Enable Disabled Cold Junction Compensation can be: No Scan, Scan CJC1, Scan
CJC2, Scan Both CJCs. Use of these parameters is described
below.
removed. This parameter does not affect module faults including
the Terminal Block loss/add fault generation.
CPU configuration. Determines how often the RX3i polls the data
14.3.3.1.1 CJC Scan Enable
Cold Junction Compensation for the module can be configured as: No Scan, Scan CJC1, Scan CJC2, or Scan
Both. The module uses the CJC inputs to compensate for the thermal gradient on the terminal block and
adjusts the terminal temperature appropriately.

Description
No Scan Module assumes 25°C for any thermocouple Disabled Disabled

compensation.
Scan Both Highest thermocouple compensation accuracy. Uses Enabled Enabled

both values in thermocouple compensation as explained
below.
Scan CJC1 Module assumes ambient temperature measured by CJC1 Enabled Disabled
for any thermocouple compensation.


Description
Scan CJC2 Module assumes ambient temperature measured by CJC2 Disabled Enabled
for any thermocouple compensation.
14.3.3.2 Channel Parameters: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

Range Type Disabled Voltage, Thermocouple, Disabled
Range Depends on the For voltage: -50mV to +50mV, -150mV to +150mV

configured Range
Type For Thermocouple: B, C, E, J, K, N, R, S, T
Channel Value 32-bit Floating-point 16-bit integer or 32-bit floating-point

Format

(for Thermocouple
Range Type only)
High Scale Value The defaults for the The upper end value, in engineering units, used for
(Eng Units) Scaling parameters scaling.
depend on the
configured Range Note: Scaling is disabled if both High Scale Eng. Units
Type and Range. equals High Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units
Each Range and equals Low Scale A/D Units.
Range Type has a
Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type.
different set of
Low Scale Value defaults. The lower end value, in engineering units, used for scaling.
(Eng Units)
Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be
lower than the high scaling value.
High Scale Value The upper end value, in A/D units, used for scaling.
(A/D Units)
Default is High A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be
greater than the low scaling value.
Low Scale Value The lower end value, in A/D units, used for scaling.
(A/D Units)
Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type.
14.3.3.3 Input Scaling: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

By default, the module converts a voltage or temperature input over the entire span of its configured Range
into a floating-point value for the CPU. By modifying one or more of the four channel scaling parameters
A/D input value.

Example 1
For a voltage input, 60 mV equals a speed of 20 feet per second, and 10 mV equals 0 feet per second. The

Feet per
Second
(Engineering
High Scale Value (A/D Units) = 60.000 Units)
0.000
10.00mV Voltage (A/D Units)
60.00mV
Figure 354: Input Scaling Example 1
For this example, 10.0mV to 60.0mV is the normal voltage range, but the module will attempt to scale the
inputs for a voltage that lies outside the range. If a voltage of 100.0mV were input to the channel, the
module would return a scaled channel value of 36.000. The application should use alarms or take other
precautions for scaled inputs that are outside the acceptable range or invalid.
Example 2
example, the application should interpret +150mV as 32000 counts and -150mV as -32000 counts. The
following channel configuration will scale a ±150mV input channel to ±32000 counts.
High Scale Value (Eng Units) = 32000

Counts
Low Scale Value (Eng Units) = -32000
Low Scale Value (A/D Units) = -150.00 -32,000

-150.00mV +150.00mV
Voltage
Figure 355: Input Scaling Example 2

Positive Rate of Change Limit 0.0 Positive rate of change in Engineering Units per Second,
(Eng Units/Second) above which will trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm.
Default is disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling
Rate” parameter.
Negative Rate of Change Limit 0.0 Negative rate of change in Engineering Units per Second,
(Eng Units)/Second below which will trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm.
Default is disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling
Rate” parameter.
Rate of Change Sampling Rate 0.0 Time from 0 to 300 seconds to wait between
(Seconds) comparisons. Default of 0.0 is to check after every input
sample.
14.3.3.4 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

A Thermocouple Input module can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of Change in
Engineering Units per Second. When either of the Rate of Change parameters is configured to be non-zero,
the module takes the difference in Engineering Units between the previous rate of change sample and the
current sample, then divides by the elapsed time between samples.
parameters.


High, Low, and All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering Units. To
Low-Low use alarming, the A/D Alarm Mode must also be configured as
High Alarm
parameters enabled.
(Eng Units) depend on the
configured Range
Low Alarm value is reached or passed, a Low-Low Alarm or High-High Alarm
Type and Range.
is triggered. The configured values must be lower than/higher
Each Range and
(Eng Units) than the corresponding low/high alarm limits.
Range Type has a
condition (high deadband) where the alarm status bit can
(Eng Units) remain set even after the alarm condition goes away. For the
alarm status to clear, the channel input must fall outside the
High Alarm
deadband range.
Deadband
Alarm Deadbands cannot cause the alarm clear to be outside the
(Eng Units)
Engineering Unit User Limits range. For example, if the
Low Alarm engineering unit range for a channel is -1000.0 to +1000.0 and a
Deadband High Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm Deadband value
range is 0.0 to 1100.0. A deadband greater than 1100.0 would
(Eng Units) put the High Alarm clear condition below –1000.0 units making
the alarm impossible to clear within the limits.
User Offset 0.000 Engineering Units offset to change the base of the input
channel. This value is added to the scaled value on the channel
(Eng Units) prior to alarm checking.
Software Filtering Disabled Enable or disable Software Integration Time Filter.
Software Filter 0.000 Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the software
Integration Time filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.
(ms)
indicates data will achieve 63.2% of its value in 100ms. Default is
disabled

A/D Filter 4.7Hz All modules: 2, 3, 4, 4.7, 24, 28Hz

Frequency
ALG412 only: 8 Hz
14.3.3.5 Using Alarming: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

channel alarm.
as explained below.

Diagnostic Reporting Enable Disabled Diagnostic Reporting Enable options are used
If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the to enable reference memory reporting of
additional parameters listed below can alarms into the Diagnostic Reference area.
alarms. Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the Interrupts Enable options enable I/O Interrupt
additional parameters listed below can trigger when alarm conditions occur.
be used to enable specific types of Faults.
These parameters enable or disable the
Interrupts Enable Disabled individual diagnostics features of a channel.
If Interrupts are enabled, the additional When any of these parameters is enabled, the
parameters listed below can be used to
module uses associated parameters to
enable specific types of Interrupts.
perform the enabled feature.
Low Alarm Enable Disabled For example, if Over Range is enabled in the
“Diagnostic Reporting Enable” menu, the
module will set the Over Range bit in the
Under Range Enable Disabled Diagnostic Reference for the channel.
Over Range Enable Disabled If any of these parameters is disabled, the

module does not react to the associated
Open Wire Enable Disabled alarm conditions.
Low-Low Alarm Enable Disabled For example, if Low Alarm Enable is set to
Disabled in the “Fault Reporting Enable”
High-High Alarm Enable Disabled menu, the Low Alarm fault is not logged in the
I/O Fault Table when Low Alarm is detected on
Negative Rate of Change Detection Disabled
the channel.
Enable
Positive Rate of Change Detection Enable Disabled
14.3.3.6 Using Interrupts: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

must be mapped to the reference address configured for that channel.

 Configure the High-Alarm condition.

 Set the High-Alarm Interrupt Enable flag for Channel 2 in the module configuration.
14.3.3.6.2 Note on Using Interrupts


14.3.3.7 CJC Parameters

Channel Value Format 32-bit floating- 16-bit integer in 32-bit field, or

point 32-bit floating-point
User Offset (Temperature Units) 0.0 Temperature offset added to CJC values.
For Celsius: –25C to +25C
For Fahrenheit: -45F to +45F
enable reference memory reporting of alarms
If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, into the Diagnostic Reference area.
the additional parameters listed
below can be used to enable Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault
specific types of alarms. logging of alarms into the I/O Fault Table.
Fault Reporting Enable Disabled Interrupts Enable options enable I/O Interrupt
trigger when alarm conditions occur.
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the
additional parameters listed below These parameters enable or disable the
can be used to enable specific individual diagnostics features of a channel.
types of Faults.
Interrupts Enable Disabled module uses associated parameters to
perform the enabled feature.
additional parameters listed below For example, if Over Range is enabled in the
can be used to enable specific “Diagnostic Reporting Enable” menu, the
types of Interrupts. module will set the Over Range bit in the
Diagnostic Reference for the channel.
If any of these parameters is disabled, the
Over Range Enable Disabled module does not react to the associated alarm
conditions.
For example, if Low Alarm Enable is set to
Disabled in the “Fault Reporting Enable”
menu, the Low Alarm fault is not logged in the
I/O Fault Table when Low Alarm is detected on
the channel.

14.3.4 Module Data: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

The module reports its input channel data in its assigned input words, beginning at the configured Channel
Value Reference Address. Each channel occupies 2 words (whether the channel is used or not):
Channel Value
Channel Value
Contains this Input Reference Address Contains this Input
Reference Address
(ALG312 / ALG412 Only)
+0, 1 Channel 1 +16, 17 Channel 9
+8, 9 Channel 5 +24, 25 CJC1
+10, 11 Channel 6 +26, 27 CJC2
+12, 13 CJC1 (IC695ALG306)
Channel 7 (IC695ALG312)
+14, 15 CJC2 (IC695ALG306)
Channel 8 (IC695ALG312)
value. The high word (upper 16-bits) of the 32-bit value are set with the sign extension of the 16-bit integer.

14.3.4.1 Channel Diagnostic Data: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

module. Use of this feature is optional. The diagnostics data for each channel occupies 2 words (whether the
channel is used or not):
Diagnostic Diagnostic
Contains Diagnostic Contains Diagnostics
Reference Reference Address
Data for: Data for:
Address (ALG312 / ALG412 Only)
+8, 9 Channel 5 +24, 25 CJC1
+10, 11 Channel 6 +26, 27 CJC2
+12, 13 CJC1 (ALG306)

Channel 7 (ALG312 / ALG412)
+14, 15 CJC2 (ALG306)

Channel 8 (ALG312 / ALG412)


14.3.4.2 Module Status Data: ALG306, ALG312 & ALG412

14.3.4.3 Terminal Block Detection

whether the fault is a "Loss of terminal block" or an "Addition of terminal block." If a Terminal Block is not

Section 15: RTD Input Module

This chapter describes the following RTD input module for PACSystems RX3i controllers.
RTD Module Description Catalog Number Section
RTD Input 8-Channel Isolated Module IC695ALG508 15.1
RTD Input Module 685

15.1 RTD Input 8-Channel Isolated Module

IC695ALG508
The RTD Input module, IC695ALG508, provides eight isolated differential
RTD input channels. Each channel can be individually configured for: MODULE OK
FIELD STATUS
RTD Inputs: 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000  Pt 385 TB
50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000  Pt 391.6
100, 200, 500, and 1000  Ni 618
120  Ni 672 IC695ALG508
604  NiFe 518

10, 50 and 100  Cu 426 I1
Resistance Inputs: 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, and 4000  I2
15.1.1 Features I3
▪ Completely software-configurable, no module jumpers to set I4

▪ RTD Linearization based on ITS-90
▪ 32-bit IEEE floating-point or 16-bit integer (in 32-bit field) input data
I5
▪ Temperature units selectable in C and F
I6
▪ User Scaling
▪ Programmable notch filter from 2.3Hz to 28Hz per channel
I6
▪ Under range/Over range alarm detection and reporting by channel
▪ Alarm dead band for high alarm, low alarm, high-high alarm, and
I8
low-low alarm by channel
▪ Wire-off (open circuit) condition support for all inputs.
▪ Module fault status reporting (Watchdog, Ram Fail, Flash Fail)
▪ Module identity and status reporting including LED status indicators Figure 356: IC695ALG508
▪ Support for 2-, 3-, or 4-wire RTD types for each channel.
▪ For Resistance inputs, fixed 2-wire measurement mode.
▪ Periodic Lead Resistance compensation measurement update enable/disable control for 3-wire
RTDs. When enabled, the module will switch to measure the lead resistance once every 100
samples, and will use this value for the next 100 samples.
▪ RTD user offset support for all channels
▪ Terminal Block detection switch.
▪ The module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
▪ Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under

This module can be used with a Box-style (IC694TBB032), Extended Box-style (IC694TBB132), Spring-style
15.1.2 LEDs: ALG508

Module Off Module is defective or no backplane power present

OK
Solid Green Module OK and configured
Blinking Green, rapidly Module performing power-up sequence
Blinking Green or Module OK but not configured.

Amber, slowly
Field ON Green No faults on any enabled channel, Terminal Block is present, and
Status field power is present.
ON Amber and Terminal Block is installed, fault on at least one channel, or field
TB Green
ON Amber and TB Red Terminal Block not fully removed, field power still detected.
OFF and TB Red Terminal block not present and no field power is detected.
TB ON Red Terminal block not present or not fully seated. Refer to above.
ON Green Terminal block is present. Refer to above.

Number of Channels 8

Measuring method selectable

RTD/resistance: up to 4k
per channel
▪ 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000 Platinum 385 (IEC751 1983, Amend 2
1995; JISC 1604 1997)
▪ 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000 Platinum 391.6 (JISC 1604: 1981)
RTD input types ▪ 100, 200, 500, and 1000 Nickel 618 (DIN 43760 Sept. 1987)
▪ 120 Nickel 672 (MINCO Application Aid #18, 5/90 Type Ni)
▪ 10, 50, and 100 Copper 426 (SAMA RC21-4-1966)
▪ 604 Nickel-Iron 518
Resistance Input Types 0-260, 0-525, 0-1050, 0-2100, 0-3150, 0-4200
Maximum RTD Lead

25 each side, for a total of 50.
Resistance
Input Type Resistance Range Supported () Excitation Current
0-260, 0-525 0.717 mA

Resistance
0-1050, 0-2100, 0-3150, 0-4200 0.238 mA
50 1.175 mA
Platinum 385 100 0.717 mA
200, 500, 1000 0.238 mA
50 1.175 mA
RTD and Resistance Input
Platinum 391.6 100, 200 0.717 mA
Types
500, 1000 0.238mA
Nickel 672 120 0.717 mA
100,200 0.717 mA
Nickel 618
500,1000 0.238 mA
Nickel-Iron 518 604 0.238 mA
10 1.654 mA
Copper 426
50, 100 1.175 mA
RTD Ranges RTD Type Low temp (C) High temp (C)

Copper 426 -100.0 +260.0
Nickel 618 -100.0 +260.0
Nickel 672 -80.0 +260.0
Nickel-Iron 518 -100.0 +200.0
Platinum 385 -200.0 +850.0
Platinum 391.6 -200.0 +630.0

RTD Type +25°C 0°C to +60°C
50 Ω Platinum 385 ±1.0°C ±1.7°C

Temperature accuracy for
inputs from 4-wire RTDs over 100 Ω Platinum 385 ±0.7°C ±1.2°C
temperature span (2.3, 4, and
4.7Hz filters). This data does 200 Ω Platinum 385 ±0.6°C ±1.0°C
do not include the RTD sensor
accuracy, which must be 500 Ω Platinum 385 ±0.5°C ±0.9°C
included when determining
1000 Ω Platinum 385 ±0.5°C ±0.9°C
the overall system
performance. 100 Ω Platinum 391.6 ±0.6°C ±1.1°C
200 Ω Platinum 391.6 ±0.5°C ±0.9°C

Three-wire RTDs have similar
500 Ω Platinum 391.6 ±0.4°C ±0.8°C
accuracies, but depend on the
lead resistances being 1000 Ω Platinum 391.6 ±0.4°C ±0.8°C
balanced.
Nickel 672 ±0.3°C ±0.5°C
Nickel 618 ±0.3°C ±0.5°C

For 2-wire RTDs, the lead
resistance of the RTD Nickel-Iron 518 ±0.4°C ±0.7°C
contributes to the
temperature error. 10 Ω Copper 426 ±1.0°C ±2.4°C
All tolerances double when 50 Ω Copper 426 ±0.8°C ±1.9°C

24Hz or 28Hz filters are used.
100 Ω Copper 426 ±0.8°C ±1.9°C
Resistance +25°C 0°C to +60°C
250 ±0.25 Ω ±0.35 Ω
500 ±0.3 Ω ±0.45 Ω

Temperature accuracy for
Resistance inputs 1000 ±0.5 Ω ±0.8 Ω
2000 ±0.9 Ω ±1.5 Ω
3000 ±1.3 Ω ±2.2 Ω
4000 ±1.7 Ω ±2.9 Ω

Measurement Units Degrees C or F, or 
0.05% of span at a constant temperature over a 30-second period (0.1%

Repeatability
for 10 copper, 28Hz filter)
User configurable for Over Range, Under Range, High and Low Alarm,
Diagnostics reported to the
High-high and Low-low alarm, Open Circuit Detection, Positive and
controller
Negative Rate of change alarm
Service Requests Report module firmware revision
Hot-Swap Supports removal and replacement under power
Calibration Module should be field calibrated via the configuration software.
Channel-to-channel crosstalk 70 dB minimum at 120mS update rate for all channels
2.3Hz filter, 50/60Hz: 100 dB for 4-wire,

90 dB for 2- and 3-wire
Common Mode Rejection 4Hz filter, 50/60Hz: 100 dB
4.7Hz filter, 50/60Hz: 100 dB
24Hz, 28Hz filter 50/60Hz: 80 dB
For each of fault and disabled modes, the configuration will specify
Default or Hold Last State
either to default a channel input to 0 or hold the last state of the input
The configuration can enable or disable fault reporting for either of

Fault Reporting
under or over range alarm, open circuit, and rate of change alarm.
For each channel, the configuration can enable/disable and specify

Rate of change
positive and negative rate of change alarms.
16-bit integer (in a 32-bit field) or 32-bit real number data for each
Channel Value Format
channel.
ALG508-CA and earlier: 3.3Vdc: 400mA; 5.0 Vdc: 200mA

Power Consumption
ALG508-DB and later: 3.3Vdc: 315mA; 5.0 Vdc: 120mA
Excitation Current 0.238mA-1.654 mA, depending on the input range.
Power Dissipation 2.5W max

Isolation Voltage 250 Vac Continuous

(Field to Backplane and 1500 Vac 1 minute
2550 Vdc 1 second
Channel to Channel)
2.3 Hz filter, 50Hz: 67dB

Normal Mode Noise Rejection
24 Hz filter, 50Hz: 25dB
28 Hz filter, 60Hz: 25dB
Filter Frequency
(-3dB Update Time (ms) Normal Mode Rejection at 50/60 Hz
frequency)
Filter
Settings,
2.3 Hz 120 (130 max) 67dB at 50/60 Hz
Update
Times, 4.0 Hz 70 (80 max) 80dB at 50 Hz
Rejection,
and 4.7 Hz 60 (70 max) 80dB at 60 Hz
Resolution
24.0 Hz 20 (30 max) 25dB at 50 Hz
28.0 Hz 15 (25 max) 25dB at 60 Hz
15.1.3.1 Update Time: ALG508

The module update time (refer to above) assumes all channels are configured with the same parameters. If
channels are configured differently, the module update time corresponds to the slowest channel update
time chosen. Update Time is the time required for the module to sample and convert the input signals
provide the resulting data values to the processor. The channel times include channel scan time and filter
delay time.

15.1.3.2 Module Resolution: ALG508

effective resolution for the module by filter chosen, and input type selected for 2- or 4-wire modes. If 3-wire
mode is used, the resolution values shown are reduced by 1.2 bits. If integer format is used, the resolution is
limited to 16 bits.
Filter Setting / Resolution
2.3Hz 4.0 Hz and 4.7 Hz 24 Hz 28 Hz

RTD Type
Bits85 m°C Bits85 m°C Bits85 m°C Bits85 m°C
Platinum 385 16.5 13.2 16.3 15.2 13.4 113 12.8 172
Platinum 391.6 16.5 10.6 16.3 12.2 13.4 91.0 12.8 138
Nickel 672 16.5 5.2 16.3 6.0 13.4 44.7 12.8 67.8
Nickel 618 16.2 7.3 16.0 8.3 13.1 56.2 12.5 94.3
Nickel-Iron 518 16.5 5.7 16.3 6.5 13.4 48.6 12.8 73.7
Copper 426
10  13.6 29.0 13.4 33.3 10.5 249 9.9 377
50  15.6 7.8 15.4 8.9 12.5 66.5 11.9 101
100  16.2 5.2 16.0 5.9 13.1 44.3 12.5 67.2
Resistance Bits m Bits m Bits m Bits m
250 16.6 2.6 16.4 3.0 13.5 22.4 12.9 34.0
500 16.6 5.3 16.4 6.1 13.5 45.3 12.9 68.7
1000 16.6 10.6 16.4 12.1 13.5 90.6 12.9 137
2000 17.0 16.0 16.8 18.4 13.9 137 13.3 208
3000 16.6 31.7 16.4 36.4 13.5 272 12.9 412
4000 17.0 32.0 16.8 36.8 13.9 275 13.3 416
85
The effective number of bits is based on the full-scale range of the input type.

2 RTD 1 Exc RTD 5 Exc 20
3 RTD 1 In + RTD 5 In + 21
4 RTD 1 In - RTD 5 In - 22
5 RTD 1 Rtn RTD 5 Rtn 23
7 RTD 2 In + RTD 6 In + 25
8 RTD 2 In - RTD 6 In - 26
11 RTD 3 In + RTD 7 In + 29
12 RTD 3 In - RTD 7 In - 30
15 RTD 4 In + RTD 8 In + 33
16 RTD 4 In - RTD 8 In - 34
The pinout is set up for two, three or four-wire RTD sensors. No additional jumper or shorting wires are
needed for wiring in any of the three modes. Connect the RTD sensor as shown:

Figure 357: Field Wiring for RTDs ALG508
Depending on the Terminal block type chosen, the wire gauge supported ranges from .081…1.5mm2
(28…14AWG) solid or stranded wire.
15.1.4.1 Grounding
bottom of the backplane. M3 tapped holes are provided in the ground bar for this purpose. For optimal
performance, RTD inputs should be ungrounded, and use shielded cable with the shield(s) grounded at the
module end. If a grounded thermocouple is required, a 0.1uF capacitor from the shield to the ground bar
may be necessary on the module end to eliminate ground noise created from grounding both ends of the
shield.

Channel Value %AIxxxxx Starting address for the input data of this module. This defaults to
Reference Address the next available %AI block.
Inputs Default Force Off In the event of module failure or removal, this parameter specifies
Channel Value The number of words used for the input data of this module.
Reference Length
Diagnostic %Ixxxxx Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data. This defaults
Reference Address to the next available %I block.

Diagnostic 0 The number of bit reference bits required for the Channel Diagnostics
Reference Length data. Default is 0, which means mapping of Channel Diagnostics is
disabled. Change this to a non-zero value to enable Channel
Diagnostics mapping.
Module Status %Ixxxxx Starting address for the status data of this module. This defaults to
Reference Address the next available %I block.
Module Status 0 The number of bits required for the Module Status data. Default is 0,
Reference Length which means mapping of Module Status data is disabled. Change this
to a non-zero value to enable Module Status data mapping.
fault generation.


Range Type Disabled RTD, Resistance, Disabled
Range For resistance: 0-250, 0-500, 0-1000, 0-2000, 0-3000, 0-4000 
For RTD: 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000  Pt 385

50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000  Pt 391.6
100, 200, 500, and 1000  Ni 618
120  Ni 672
604  NiFe 518
10, 50 and 100  Cu 426

Format point
RTD RTD 2 Wire (for RTD Range Type only) RTD 2, 3 or 4 Wire
RTD Lead Enabled (for RTD Range Type only) Enabled, Disabled
Resistance
Compensation
(Eng Units) the Scaling High Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units equals Low Scale
parameters A/D Units.
configured
Low Scale Value Range Type and Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type.
(Eng Units) Range. Each Must be lower than the high scaling value.
Range and
Range Type
have a different
Low Scale Value set of defaults. Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type.
(A/D Units)

15.1.5.2.1 Input Scaling: ALG508

By default, the module converts a voltage or temperature input over the entire span of its configured Range
into a floating-point value for the CPU. By modifying one or more of the four channel scaling parameters
A/D input value.
Appendix A: Example
For a resistance input, 600 corresponds to a weight of 20 kg, and 100 corresponds to a weight of 0 kg.
The relationship in this range is linear. For this example, the input values should represent weight rather than
resistance measured in ohms. The following channel configuration sets up this scaling:

Weight (kg)
High Scale Value (A/D Units) = 600.0 (Engineering
Units)
0.000
Figure 358: Input Scaling Example ALG508
For this example, 100 to 600 is the normal resistance range, but the module will attempt to scale the
inputs for a resistance that lies outside the range. If a resistance of 1000 were input to the channel, the
module would return a scaled channel value of 36.000. The application should use alarms or take other
precautions for scaled inputs that are outside the acceptable range or invalid.

Positive Rate of Change 0.000 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
Limit (Eng Units) trigger a Positive Rate of Change alarm. Default is disabled.
Negative Rate of 0.000 Rate of change in Engineering Units per Second that will
Change Limit (Eng trigger a Negative Rate of Change alarm. Default is
Units) disabled. Used with “Rate of Change Sampling Rate”
parameter.
Rate of Change 0.000 Time from 0 to 300 seconds to wait between comparisons.
Sampling Rate Default of 0.0 is to check after every input sample.
15.1.5.2.2 Rate of Change Alarms: ALG508

An RTD Input module can detect both Negative Rate of Change and Positive Rate of Change in Engineering
Units per Second. When either of the Rate of Change parameters is configured to be non-zero, the module
takes the difference in Engineering Units between the previous rate of change sample and the current
sample, then divides by the elapsed time between samples.
parameters.


High, Low, and All of the alarm parameters are specified in Engineering
Low-Low Units. To use alarming, the A/D Alarm Mode must also be
High Alarm
parameters configured as enabled.
(Eng Units)
depend on the
Low Alarm configured Range
value is reached or passed, a Low-Low Alarm or High-High
(Eng Units) Type and Range.
Alarm is triggered. The configured values must be lower
Each Range and
Low-Low Alarm than/higher than the corresponding low/high alarm limits.
Range Type has a
(Eng Units) different set of High Alarm and Low Alarm: When the configured value is
default values. reached or below (above), a Low (High) Alarm is triggered.
High-High Alarm
Deadband High and Low Alarm Deadbands: A range in Engineering
(Eng Units) Units above the alarm condition (low deadband) or below
the alarm condition (high deadband) where the alarm status
High Alarm
bit can remain set even after the alarm condition goes away.
Deadband
For the alarm status to clear, the channel input must fall
(Eng Units)
outside the deadband range.
Low Alarm Deadband
Alarm Deadbands should not cause the alarm clear to be
(Eng Units)
outside the Engineering Unit User Limits range. For example,
if the engineering unit range for a channel is -1000.0 to
+1000.0 and a High Alarm is set at +100.0, the High Alarm
Deadband value range is 0.0 to less than 1100.0. A deadband
below –1000.0 units making the alarm impossible to clear
within the limits.
User Offset 0.000 Engineering Units offset to change the base of the input
channel. This value is added to the scaled value on the
channel prior to alarm checking.
Software Filter 0.000 Specifies the amount of time in milliseconds for the software
Integration Time in filter to reach 63.2% of the input value.
milliseconds.
A value of 0 indicates software filter is disabled. A value of
100 indicates data will achieve 63.2% of its value in 100ms.
Default is disabled
A/D Filter Frequency 2, 3, 4, 4.7, 24, 28Hz

If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the enable reference memory reporting of alarms
additional parameters listed below can into the Diagnostic Reference area.
alarms. Fault Reporting Enable options enable fault
If Fault Reporting is enabled, the Interrupts Enable options enable I/O Interrupt
additional parameters listed below can trigger when alarm conditions occur.
be used to enable specific types of Faults.
These parameters enable or disable the
Interrupts Enable Disabled individual diagnostics features of a channel.
If Interrupts are enabled, the additional When any of these parameters is enabled, the
parameters listed below can be used to
module uses associated parameters to perform
enable specific types of Interrupts.
the enabled feature.
High Alarm Enable Disabled For example, if Over Range is enabled in the
“Diagnostic Reporting Enable” menu, the
module will set the Over Range bit in the
Over Range Enable Disabled Diagnostic Reference for the channel.
Calibration Fault Enable Disabled If any of these parameters is disabled, the

module does not react to the associated alarm
Low-Low Alarm Enable Disabled conditions.
High-High Alarm Enable Disabled
Negative Rate of Change Detection Disabled For example, if Low Alarm Enable is set to
Enable Disabled in the “Fault Reporting Enable” menu,
the Low Alarm fault is not logged in the I/O Fault
Positive Rate of Change Detection Enable Disabled Table when Low Alarm is detected on the
channel.

15.1.5.2.3 Using Alarming: ALG508

channel alarm.
as explained below.
15.1.5.2.4 Using Interrupts: ALG508

must be mapped to the reference address configured for that channel.
Example:

Appendix A: Note on Using Interrupts

15.1.6 Module Input Data: ALG508

The module reports its input channel data in its assigned input words, beginning at the configured Channel
Channel Value Contains this

Reference Address Input

+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
value. The high word (upper 16 bits) of the 32-bit value are set with the sign extension of the 16-bit integer.


Diagnostic Reference Contains this

Address Input
+0, 1 Channel 1
+2, 3 Channel 2
+4, 5 Channel 3
+6, 7 Channel 4
+8, 9 Channel 5
+10, 11 Channel 6
+12, 13 Channel 7
+14, 15 Channel 8
channel.



15.1.6.3 Terminal Block Detection ALG508


Section 16: Special Purpose Modules

This chapter describes special-purpose modules for PACSystems RX3i controllers:
Module Description Catalog Number Section
RX3i I/O Link Interface Module IC694BEM320 16.1
RX3i I/O Link Master Module IC694BEM321 16.2
RX3i Genius Bus Controller Module IC694BEM331 16.3
RX3i Serial Communications Module, 2 Ports IC695CMM002 16.4
RX3i Serial Communications Module, 4 Ports IC695CMM004 16.4
RX3i Control Memory Xchange Module IC695CMX128 16.5
RX3i Redundancy Memory Xchange Module, Multi-mode fiber IC695RMX128 16.6
RX3i Redundancy Memory Xchange Module, Single-mode fiber IC695RMX228 16.6
RX3i DeviceNet Master Module IC694DNM200 16.7
RX3i Motion Mate Module IC694DSM314 16.8
RX3i Motion Controller Module IC694DSM324 16.9
RX3i PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion Controller IC695PMM335 16.10
RX3i IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module IC695ECM850 16.11
RX3i Ethernet Transmitter Module IC695ETM001 0
RX3i DNP3 Outstation Module IC695EDS001 16.13
RX3i Ethernet 104 Server Module IC695EIS001 16.14
RX3i Ethernet Network Interface Unit IC695NIU001 16.15
RX3i Ethernet Network Interface Unit IC695NIU001 PLUS 16.16
RX3i PROFIBUS Master Module IC695PBM300 16.17
RX3i PROFIBUS Slave Module IC695PBS301 16.18
RX3i PROFINET Controller Module IC695PNC001 16.19
Special Purpose Modules 707

Module Description Catalog Number Section
IC695PNS001
RX3i PROFINET Scanner Module 16.20
IC695PNS101
RX3i CEP Carrier IC695CEP001 0
RX3i CEP Expansion Carrier IC694CEE001 0
RX3i Genius Communications Gateway IC695GCG001 16.22
RX3i Pressure Transducer Module IC695PRS015 16.23
16.1 RX3i I/O Link Interface Module: IC694BEM320

The RX3i I/O Link Interface Module, IC694BEM320, operates as a slave
on an I/O Link network. It can exchange either 32 or 64 inputs and
outputs with the master. Typical masters on the I/O Link include all
modern CNCs and Power Mates, PACSystems controllers and Series 90
PLCs equipped with an I/O Link Master Module.
An I/O Link Interface Module occupies one module slot in an RX3i

backplane. It can be installed in any available backplane slot.

Universal Backplane which is under power (see Hot Insertion and
Removal Not Supported, Section 2.6.4.2).
The maximum number of I/O Link Interface Modules that can be

installed in the backplane depends on the power that is available from
the power supply. To determine the exact number of modules allowed
in your system, refer to the information on power supplies in Chapter 3.
Usually, when there are multiple I/O Link Interface Modules in the same
RX3i system, they are on separate I/O Links. However, it is possible to
have more than one I/O Link Interface Module in the system connected
to the same link, if that suits the needs of the application.
16.1.1 Specifications
RX3i I/O Link Interface Module, providing I/O Link
Module type
communications with I/O Link Master.
LEDs OK, RDY

I/O Points 32 or 64, jumper selectable
without Optical Adapter connected: 205mA

+5V current
with Optical Adapter: 405 mA
RX3i I/O Link Interface Modules User’s Manual, GFK-

User Manual
2358
Figure 359: IC694BEM320
16.1.2 I/O Size Selection: BEM320

The front cover of the module is removable (Figure 360).

OK
(LED)
RDY
(LED)
JUMPER
PLUG
JD1B
(CONNECTOR)
JD1A
(CONNECTOR)
LATCH FRONT COVER
Figure 360: Removable Cover BEM320
JP1 A jumper plug (Figure 361) inside the front cover is used to set the module up as a
1 32 32-point or 64-point I/O module. The factory-shipped default is 32.
2 I/O
 To select 32 inputs and 32 outputs, apply the jumper to pins 1 &2.
3 64
 To select 64 inputs and 64 outputs, apply the jumper to pins 2 & 3.
Figure 361: Module
Size Selection (JP1)
BEM320
16.1.3 LEDs: BEM320

The module has two LEDS that show its operating, and communications status.
OK: Indicates the operating status of the module.
RDY: Indicates the communications status of the module.
After power–up, the OK LED should remain ON. The RDY LED turns ON after the I/O Link master has
established communications with the module.
16.1.4 Serial Ports: BEM320

The front of the module has two 20–pin connectors that are used to attach the I/O Link cable. One connector
is for the cable to the previous device on the link––either the master or another slave. The other connector is
for the cable to the next slave on the link, if there is one. Refer to the RX3i I/O Link Modules User’s Manual,
GFK-2358 for more information. Signal levels are RS422/485 compatible.

16.2 RX3i I/O Link Master Module: IC694BEM321

The RX3i I/O Link Master module, IC694BEM321, allows a PACSystems RX3i
controller to act as a master on a proprietary I/O Link. The master can
receive 1024 discrete inputs from slaves, and send up to 1024 discrete
outputs. Typical items running under the control of an I/O Link Master can
include clusters of I/O (such as I/O Model A and Connector Panel I/O),
PACSystems and Series 90 PLCs with I/O Link Interface (slave) modules, and
Operator Panels that are I/O Link-compatible.
An I/O Link Master Module can be installed in any available slot in any RX3i
backplane. For best performance, it should be installed in the Main
Backplane or in an Expansion Backplane. The maximum number of I/O Link
Master Modules that can be installed in the backplane depends on the
power that is available from the power supply. To determine the exact
number of modules allowed in your system, refer to the information on
power supplies in Chapter 3.
If there are multiple I/O Link Master Modules in the same RX3i system, they
must be on separate I/O Links.
16.2.1 Specifications: BEM321

PACSystems RX3i controller module, providing I/O Link
Module type
communications with up to 16 I/O Link slaves.
I/O Points Up to 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs
+5Vdc
without Optical Adapter connected: 415mA
current
Figure 362: IC694BEM321 with Optical Adapter: 615mA
required
▪ PACSystems RX3i CPUs

▪ Series 90-30 CPUs (models 311, 313, 321, 323, 331,
Host CPUs and 341): release 4.4 or later, and all versions of the
CPU models 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364
▪ Series 90-30 Hand-held Programmer (HHP)
User Manual RX3i I/O Link Interface Modules User’s Manual, GFK-2358
16.2.2 LEDs: BEM321

The module has three LEDS that show its operating and communications status.
OK CFG ACTV Meaning
off off off No power to module, or power-up in progress
on off off Module powered up but not configured
Module powered up and configured with minimum configuration (input status

on on off reference assigned and output status reference assigned), but link is not yet active, or
has been activated but has gone down
on on on Normal operation with active link
After power–up, the OK LED should stay ON. The CFG LED goes on after the CPU supplies the module
configuration. The ACTV LED goes on when link communications have been established.
16.2.3 Restart Pushbutton: BEM321

The LINK RESTART pushbutton can be used to restart the operation of the link if a failure occurs.
Note
Pushing the LINK RESTART button while the link is operating has no effect. If the link stops
operating, all slaves must be power–cycled before using the LINK RESTART pushbutton to
restart operation of the link.
16.2.3.1 Fuse
The front cover of the module is removable.
A fuse located directly below the Restart
Link
Restart pushbutton protects the +5Vdc signal pins used
Pushbutton
by Optical Adapter cable. It is a replaceable 0.5A
Fuse fast–blow fuse (5mm diameter x 20mm length).
Figure 363: Fuse location BEM321
16.2.4 Serial Port: BEM321

The front of the module has one 20–pin, Honda–type connector, used for connection to the first slave on the
I/O Link. Signal levels are RS422/485 compatible.

16.3 RX3i Genius Bus Controller: IC694BEM331

The RX3i Genius Bus Controller, IC694BEM331, interfaces a PACSystems RX3i
and a Genius I/O serial bus. In addition to the Bus Controller, the bus can 0K
serve: Genius blocks, other PLCs with Genius Bus Controllers, Remote Drops, COM
VersaMax and Field Control I/O Stations, Genius Hand-Held Monitor (HHM),
Multiple hosts.
IC694BEM331
16.3.1 Features
▪ The Bus Controller can exchange up to 128 bytes with each device on the
Genius I/O bus.
▪ Genius blocks and other devices on the bus automatically report faults,
alarms and certain other predefined conditions to the Bus Controller. The
Bus Controller stores any diagnostic messages it receives. They are read
automatically by the CPU. Faults can then be displayed in the fault table
using the programming software.
▪ The Bus Controller supports all Genius datagrams. Refer to Chapter 3 of
the Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual, GEK-90486-
1, for details on using datagrams.
▪ The Bus Controller can send up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus
scan. Global Data is data that is automatically and repeatedly broadcast
by a Genius Bus Controller.
▪ The Bus Controller can receive up to 128 bytes of Global Data each bus
scan from every other Bus Controller on its bus.
▪ Up to eight Genius Bus Controllers can be included in an RX3i system.
Figure 364: IC694BEM331
16.3.2 LEDs: BEM331

The LEDs on the front of the Genius Bus Controller indicate its operating status. Both LEDs should be On
during normal operation.
OK Shows the status of the Bus Controller. This LED turns on after power up diagnostics are completed.
COM Shows the status of the Genius communications bus. This LED is on steadily when the bus is
operating properly. It blinks for intermittent bus errors and is off for a failed bus. It is also off when
no configuration has been received from the CPU.
16.3.3 Specifications: BEM331

Current Consumption 300mA at 5Vdc, maximum
Diagnostics Advanced diagnostics capabilities
Communications Global Data and Datagrams
Data Length 128 bytes per message
Data Rates Configurable: 153.5kbaud standard/extended, 76.8kbaud, or 38.4kbaud
Genius Bus Specifications
Bus Type Daisy-chained bus cable; single twisted-pair plus shield or Twinax. Fiber
optical cable and modems can also be used.
Bus Termination 75, 100, 120, or 150 resistor at both ends of electrical bus cable.
Maximum Bus Length 7800 feet at 38.4kbaud, 4500 feet at 76.8kbaud, 3500 feet at 153.6kbaud
extended, 2000 feet at 153.6Kbaud standard. Maximum length at each baud
rate also depends on cable type, as listed in the Genius System and
Communications Manual GEK-90486-1
Maximum Number of 32 devices at all baud rates except 38.4kbaud. 16 devices at 38.4kbaud.
Devices
Isolation 2000 volts Hi-Pot, 1500 volts transient common mode rejection.
16.3.3.1 Compatibility
Specific equipment or software versions required for compatibility with the Bus Controller are listed below.
Series 90-30 PLC If the RX3i Genius Bus Controller is installed in a Series 90-30 PLC, the CPU model
can be: IC693CPU311K, 321K, 331L or later, or any version of the IC693CPU313,
323, 340, 341, 350, 351, 352, 360, 363, and 364. The CPU firmware must be release
5.0 or later.
Series Six PLC To exchange global data with an RX3i Genius Bus Controller, a Series Six Bus
Controller must be catalog number IC660CBB902F/903F (firmware version 1.5), or
later.
Genius Hand-Held There is no Hand-Held Monitor connector on the module, but a Hand-Held Monitor
Monitor can communicate with the Bus Controller while connected to any other device on
the bus. HHM version IC660HHM501H (revision 4.5) or later is required.

Genius Bus The Genius bus is a shielded twisted-pair wire, daisy-chained between devices, and
terminated at both ends. Proper cable selection is critical to successful operation of
the system. Suitable cable types are listed in GEK-90486-1, the Genius I/O System and
Communications User’s Manual GEK-90486-1.
16.3.3.2 Genius System Documentation

Refer to the following manuals for detailed information on the Genius I/O system:
▪ GEK-90486-1, Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual

▪ GEK-90486-2, Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual
16.3.4 Field Wiring: BEM331

Terminals Field Wiring Using the cable type selected for the application, connect the devices as
displayed in Figure 366. Each terminal accepts up to one AWG #14
1
2 (2.10mm2 wire or two AWG #16 (1.32mm2 wires using ring or lug-type
3 Serial 1 connectors.
4
5
6
7
8 Serial 2
9
10
11
12
13 Shield
IN
14
15
16
17
18 Shield Figure 366: Interconnection of Devices on Genius Bus
19 OUT
20 The bus shield wires are not insulated; do not permit them to touch other
wires or terminals. Spaghetti tubing should be used to cover these wires.
Figure 365: Terminal
Assignments BEM331
1. Connect the Serial 1 terminals of adjacent devices and the Serial 2 terminals of adjacent devices.
2. Connect Shield In to the Shield Out terminal of the previous device. (For the first device on the bus,
Shield In is not connected.)
3. Connect Shield Out to the Shield In terminal of the next device. (For the last device on the bus, Shield
Out is not connected.)
The Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals are interconnected on the circuit board, not on the terminal strip. Incoming
and outgoing signal wire pairs can be connected to either one or two Serial 1 or Serial 2 terminals:

Figure 367: Wiring Genius Bus Signals for Continuous Signal Path
When connecting two signal wires to the same terminal, use spade or lug-type connectors, or twist the
exposed ends of the wires together before inserting them. This will allow future removal of the Terminal
Assembly without disrupting other devices on the bus.
When connecting two signal wires to separate terminals, install a jumper between the two terminals as
shown on the right in Figure 367 above. Failure to install the jumper will cause the entire bus to be disrupted
whenever the faceplate is removed.

16.3.4.1 Terminating the Bus

The bus must be terminated at both ends by its characteristic impedance. The list of suitable cable types in
the Genius I/O System and Communications User’s Manual GEK-90486-1 includes the termination requirements
for each cable type. If the Bus Controller is at the end of the bus, install a resistor of the appropriate
impedance across its Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals as displayed in the Figure 368.
If you need to install the terminating resistor across terminals different than those used for the signal wires,
attach jumper wires between the signal wire terminals and the resistor terminals to prevent the bus from
becoming unterminated if the Terminal Assembly is removed. Failure to do so will cause the entire bus to be
disrupted whenever the faceplate is removed.
Figure 368: Installing Genius Bus Terminating Resistor
16.3.4.2 Hot-Swapping IC693BEM331/IC694BEM331 Modules

Genius Bus Controller modules IC693BEM331/IC694BEM331 that are included in a Max-ON redundancy
system should not be installed or removed from the PLC that is operating as a Master. If a module is removed
from the Master and then re-installed, the outputs for that module will not be enabled until the next Backup-
to-Master transition.
Any time a Genius Bus Controller is removed from an active system, there is a possibility that the bus may be
disrupted with a subsequent impact on the corresponding I/O devices. For systems that require online
maintainability, it is recommended that dual (redundant) Genius busses be used.

16.4 RX3i Serial Communications Modules:

IC695CMM002, IC695CMM004

PACSystems RX3i Serial Communications modules expand the serial

communications capabilities of the RX3i system.
Serial Communications module, IC695CMM002, provides two

independent, isolated serial ports.
Serial Communications module, IC695CMM004 (Figure 369), provides

four independent, isolated serial ports.
Up to six Serial Communications modules can be located in the main

PACSystems RX3i backplane.
Each port can be configured for MODBUS Master, MODBUS Slave, or

Serial I/O protocol. If any port is configured for DNP3 Master or Slave, the
other ports on the module can only be configured for DNP3 Master or
Slave.
For modules with firmware version 1.32 or later, half-duplex flow control
can be configured using Machine Edition Release 5.90, SP1, SIM 6 or later.
Otherwise, flow control defaults to full-duplex.
16.4.1 Features:
▪ Port-to-port isolation and port-to-backplane isolation
▪ RS-232, RS-485/422 communication, software-selected
▪ Hardware handshake: RTS/CTS for RS-232
▪ Selectable Baud Rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k,
57.6k, 115.2k
▪ Module identity and status reporting, including LED status indicators
▪ Meets CE, UL/CUL 508 and 1604, and ATEX requirements
▪ Flash memory for future upgrades Figure 369: IC695CMM004
These modules support insertion into and removal from an RX3i

Universal Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and
Note: If retentive memory is used for Port Control Data, when a power
cycle with battery or hot swap of the CMM module occurs, all exchanges
whose control bit is in the ON state will be re-executed on the next PLC
output scan or output DO I/O. To prevent this, all exchange control bits
must be cleared by the application logic on the initial PLC logic scan or
upon detection of CMM module removal.

Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software

utility (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the
host CPU has no serial port). Instructions are included with the firmware
upgrade kit.23
Operating information for these modules is provided in the RX3i Serial

Communications Modules Manual, GFK-2460.
16.4.2 LEDs: CMM002 & CMM004

The Module OK LED indicates the status of the module. Solid green
indicates that the module has been configured. The Module OK LED is off,
if the module is not receiving power from the R3i backplane, or if a serious
module fault exists.
At power-up, the Module OK LED flashes green/off while the module is

executing power-up diagnostics. It then flashes more slowly as the module
receives its configuration from the CPU.
If a problem occurs, the Module OK LED flashes amber. The blink code
(below) indicates the cause of the error.
1 = watchdog expired
2 = RAM error
6 = Invalid CPU Master Interface version
7 = CPU heartbeat failure
8 = Failed to get semaphore
The Port Fault LED indicates the status of all ports. The Port Fault LED is
green when there are no faults present on any enabled port. If this LED
turns amber, there is a fault on at least one port.
The Port Status LED flashes green when there is activity on the
corresponding port.
The area below the module LEDs can be used to record identifying
information about each port.
Figure 370: Module LEDs &

Ethernet Port LEDs: CMM004
16.4.3 Specifications: CMM002 and CMM004

Number of Serial Ports IC695CMM002: two independent serial ports
IC695CMM004: four independent serial ports
Connectors RJ-45
Number of Serial Six in the main CPU backplane

Communications
Modules per CPU
Backplane power IC695CMM002-DF or 0.7 Amps maximum at 3.3Vdc

requirements earlier
0.115 Amps maximum at 5.0 Vdc
IC695CMM004-DF or 0.7 Amps maximum at 3.3Vdc

earlier
IC695CMM002-EG or later 0.270 Amps maximum at 3.3Vdc
IC695CMM004-EG or later 0.270 Amps maximum at 3.3Vdc
LEDs Module OK, Port Fault, Port Status (2 or 4)
Port Type RS-232 or RS-485/22. 4-wire (full duplex) or 2-wire (half-duplex) operation
for RS-485/422
Flow Control for R-232 Selectable: Hardware (CTS/RTS) or none
Baud rates 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
Parity Even, odd, none
Data bits 7, 8
Stop bits 1, 2
Operating Temperature 0C to + 60C
Input Impedance Zin > 96 k for RS-485/422
3 k < Zin < 7 k for RS-232
Max Over-voltage ±25V

Channel-Channel –55dB minimum

Crosstalk
Isolation Port to Backplane and to frame ground: 250 Vac continuous; 1500 Vac for 1
minute, 2550 Vdc for one second.
Port to port: 500 Vdc continuous, 710 Vdc for one minute.
To meet emission and immunity requirements for the EMC directive (CE mark), shielded cable must be used
with this module.
16.4.4 Serial Ports: CMM002 & CMM004

Each port is a standard RJ-45 female connector with the following pin assignments. For MODBUS
applications, note that these pin assignments are different than the standard MODBUS pin assignments. If
the port is configured for MODBUS master or slave operation, custom cables are needed.
RS-485/422 RS-485/422
RJ-45 Pin RS-232
Half Duplex Full Duplex
8 COM GND GND
7 Termination 2
8
6 CTS R- (RxD0)
5 COM GND GND

1
Termination
4
1
Figure 371: RJ-45 Jack & Pinouts
3 RxD R+ (RxD1)
2 TxD T- / R- (D0) T- (TxD0
1 RTS T+ / R+ (D1) T+ (TxD1)
Note: There is no shield or frame ground pin on the port connector.
If the Serial Communications module is communicating with a Series 90-30 CPU363 or external PACSystems
RX3i CPU serial port, the connections are:
RX3i Serial Module CPU363/RX3i CPU with Serial

Port
T+ To RD('B')
T- To RD('A')

R+ To SD('B')
R- To SD('A')

16.4.4.1 Termination
By default, each port is set for no termination. Termination is needed if the module is the first or last device
on an RS-485 network, even if there is only one other device on the network. Termination can be provided
using either an external resistor as displayed in the following figure or the 120 termination resistor built
into the port. If line termination other than 120  is required, an appropriate external resistor must be
supplied.
16.4.4.1.1 User-Supplied Termination for RS-485
Full Duplex 4-Wire 6 Half Duplex 2-Wire

RS-485 RS-485
2
3
1
Terminating Terminating
Resistor Resistor
Figure 372: Termination RS-485 4-Wire Full Duplex Figure 373: Termination RS-485 2-Wire Half Duplex
16.4.4.1.2 Built-in 120 Termination for RS-485

By default, each port is set for no termination. There are two ways to use the built-in 120 termination:
A. Using the internal jumpers. To use this method, remove the faceplate of the module by pressing in on
the side tabs and pulling the faceplate away from the module. With the module oriented as shown,
move either the upper or lower jumper:
Internal 120-Ohm Termination, Full Duplex Half Duplex

Default Jumper Positions Four-Wire RS-485 Two-Wire RS-485
Move top Leave top
jumper down Jumper in
Jumper for Full Duplex, Default Position
Front of Module with
Faceplate Removed
4-Wire in
Side of
Default (Upper) Position
Port
Connector Jumper for Half Duplex, Leave bottom
2-Wire in jumper in
Default (Upper) Position Default Move bottom
Position jumper down
Figure 374: Using the Module Internal Jumpers & Built-in 120 Resistor for Termination
B. Using an external jumper wire. To use this method, do NOT change the positions of the internal jumpers
as shown in Figure 374 above. Instead, connect an external jumper wire across connector pins 3 and 7
for RS-485 4-wire, or across connector pins 1 and 4 for RS-485 2-wire.

7
Full Duplex 4-Wire Half Duplex 2-Wire
RS-485 4
RS-485
3
1
Termination Termination
Jumper Jumper
Figure 375: Using External Jumper & Built-in 120 Resistor Figure 376: Using External Jumper & Built-in 120
for RS-485 4-Wire Full Duplex Resistor for RS-485 2-Wire Half Duplex
16.5 RX3i Control Memory Xchange Module:

IC695CMX128

The RX3i Control Memory Xchange, IC695CMX128, module provides

deterministic sharing of data among PLCs and other computing devices
on a high-speed fiber optic network, using reflective memory
technology. A reflective memory network can contain up to 256 nodes.
Each node in the network can be any reflective memory device that is
compatible with the 5565 family86. When data is written to one node, all
nodes on the network are automatically updated with the new data.
Each node in the reflective memory network is connected in a daisy-

chained loop using fiber optic cables. The transmitter of the first node is
tied to the receiver of the second. The transmitter of the second node is
tied to the receiver of the third node, and so on, until the loop is
completed back at the receiver of the first node.
A PACSystems RX3i main rack supports a maximum of six CMX modules.
16.5.1 Features
▪ 128 Mbytes reflective memory with parity.
▪ No RX3i CPU processing required to operate the network.
▪ Network error detection.
▪ Connection with multimode fiber up to 300m/984.25ft
▪ Software configuration of all node parameters (no jumper or switch
settings required).
▪ Dynamic packet sizes of 4 to 64 bytes, controlled by the CMX module
▪ Network transfer rate of 43 Mbyte/s (4 byte packets) to 174 Mbyte/s
(64 byte packets)
▪ Network link speed of 2.1 Gigabits/sec.
▪ Programmable module interrupt output.
▪ Four general-purpose network interrupts with 32 bits of data each.
▪ Redundant transfer mode operation. Figure 377: IC695CMX128
▪ Configurable network memory offset.
The CMX128 module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
upgrade kit.23
86
These products are now marketed by Abaco Systems.

CMX128 modules require a metal enclosure to meet radiated emissions requirements. For details, refer to
the module datasheet, GFK-2506.
16.5.2 LEDs: CMX128

All front panel LED indicators are green.
OK ON indicates the CMX module and the CPU are functioning properly.
CONFIG87 ON indicates the module is configured.
SIG DETECT ON indicates the receiver is detecting a fiber optic signal.
OWN DATA ON indicates the module has received its own data packet from the network at least once.
16.5.3 Specifications: CMX128

Packet size Dynamic packet sizes of 4 to 64 bytes, automatically controlled by the
CMX128 module
Transfer rate Network link speed of 2.1 Gbps
User memory 128MB SDRAM
Input power 660 mA at +3.3Vdc

(from RX3i power supply)
253 mA at +5Vdc
Connectors ▪ Fiber optic LC type, conforms to IEC 61754-20

▪ Zirconium ceramic ferrule
▪ Insertion loss: 0.35 dB (maximum)
▪ Return loss: -30dB
16.5.4 Optical Transceiver: CMX128

The optical transceiver, located on the bottom of the module, has two LC-type fiber optic ports. The port
labeled “TX” is the transmitter and the port labeled “RX” is the receiver.
CMX modules are networked together using either simplex (single fiber) or duplex (dual fiber) multimode
fiber optic cables. For details on cables, refer to the PACSystems Memory Xchange Modules User’s Manual, GFK-
2300.
87
A reflective memory hub can be used to bypass a node that is not configured.

16.6 RX3i Redundancy Memory Xchange Modules:

IC695RMX128, IC695RMX228
Both Redundancy Memory Xchange (RMX) modules
operate as a node on a reflective memory network or as a
dedicated link between CPUs in an RX3i Hot Standby CPU
Redundancy system88. When the RMX is not being used as
a link in a redundancy system, it is functionally identical to
the IC695CMX128 module. Each node in the network can
be any reflective memory device that is compatible with
the 5565 family86. Whenever data is written to one node,
all nodes on the network are automatically updated with
the new data.
Note: A hub is required to connect a single mode fiber

device into a ring with multi-mode fiber devices. Hubs are
not permitted when connecting redundant pairs.
When used as a node on a reflective memory network, the

RMX module provides deterministic sharing of data among
PLCs and other computing devices on a high-speed fiber
optic network. A reflective memory network can contain
up to 256 nodes.
Each node in the reflective memory network is connected

in a daisy-chained loop using fiber optic cables. The
transmitter of the first node is tied to the receiver of the
second. The transmitter of the second node is tied to the Figure 378: Figure 379:
IC695RMX128 IC695RMX228
receiver of the third node, and so on, until the loop is
completed at the receiver of the first node.
When used in a CPU redundancy system, the RMX modules provide a path for transferring data between
the two redundancy CPUs in the redundant system. A complete communications path consists of one
RMX in the primary unit, one RMX in the secondary unit, and two high-speed fiber optic cables connecting
them to each other. This must be a two-node ring: no other reflective memory nodes are allowed to be
part of this fiber optic network.
GE strongly recommends two redundancy links (a total of four RMX modules) be configured and installed.
Optionally, systems can be configured for a single redundancy link (a total of two RMX modules).
88
RMX modules are not compatible with rack-less RX3i CPU systems, such as CPE400 & CPL410. Instead, these CPUs use LAN3 to
provide a high-speed link in support of Redundancy applications.

When the RMX is being used as link in a redundancy system, it cannot be used as a general-purpose Memory
Xchange module. For details on the operation of a PACSystems CPU redundancy system, refer to the
PACSystems Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Manual, GFK-2308.
A PACSystems RX3i main rack supports a maximum of six Memory Xchange modules in any combination of
RMX128, RMX228 and CMX128 modules. A maximum of two RMX modules can be configured as
redundancy communication links.
16.6.1 Features: RMX128 & RMX228
▪ PACSystems RX3i single slot form factor.

▪ 128 Mbytes reflective memory.89
▪ Software configuration of all node parameters (no jumper or switch settings required).89
▪ High-speed easy-to-use 2.12 GBaud fiber-optic network.
▪ No RX3i CPU processing required to operate the network.
▪ Network-compatible with VMIC 5565 family86 of reflective memory devices
Note: A hub is required to connect a single-mode fiber device into a ring with multi-mode fiber devices. Hubs
are not permitted when connecting redundant pairs.
▪ IC695RMX128: Connection with multi-mode fiber up to 300m (984.25ft).

▪ IC695RMX228: Connection with single-mode fiber up to 10 km (32,808 ft 4 in).
▪ Dynamic packet sizes of 4 to 64 bytes, controlled by the RMX module.
▪ Programmable module interrupt output.
▪ Four general-purpose network interrupts with 32 bits of data each.89
▪ Network error detection.
▪ Up to 256 nodes per network.89
▪ Redundant transfer mode operation. This optional mode reduces the chance of a data packet being
dropped from the network.89
▪ Configurable network memory offset allows you to assign nodes on a network to groups according to
the 16MB segment in the network address space that they use.89
The RMX128/RMX228 module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane. These modules support
insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and
RMX128/RMX228 modules require a metal enclosure to meet radiated emissions requirements. For details,
refer to the module datasheet, GFK-2511.
16.6.2 Specifications: RMX128 & RMX228
89
Not available when operating as a redundancy link in a CPU redundancy system.

Packet size Dynamic, automatically controlled by RMX128/RMX228 module
User memory 128MB SDRAM
Input power 580 mA at +3.3Vdc

(from RX3i power supply)
220 mA at +5Vdc
Connectors ▪ Fiber optic LC type, conforms to IEC 61754-20

▪ Zirconium ceramic ferrule
▪ Insertion loss: 0.35 dB (maximum)
▪ Return loss: Refer to cable/connector specifications.

16.7 RX3i DeviceNet Master Module: IC694DNM200

The DeviceNet Master Module (DNM200) allows the CPU to send and receive
data over a DeviceNet network. It can act as master for up to 63 slaves on the
DeviceNet network. It can also be configured to simultaneously function as a
slave to another master on the bus.
DeviceNet is a communications network that transmits data between control

systems (for example: PLCs, PCs, VMEbus computers, and robot controllers)
and distributed industrial devices such as switches, sensors, valve manifolds,
motor starters, bar code readers, drives, displays, and operator interfaces.
This module can be installed in any available RX3i universal backplane I/O slot;
it cannot be located in remote or expansion racks. Module does not support
insertion into or removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under
power (see Hot Insertion and Removal Not Supported, Section 2.6.4.2).
16.7.1 Features
▪ Bus communications at all standard DeviceNet data rates (125k, 250k,

500k baud)
▪ Up to 255 bytes input data transfer and 255 bytes output data transfer
per slave.
▪ Up to 3972 bytes of input data transfer and 3972 bytes of output data
transfer per master.
▪ UCMM-capable Group 2 Server
▪ One or two I/O connections per Slave - Typically one connection is used
for Polled and the other is used for Strobe, Cyclic, or COS
▪ Supports Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) with one proxy
connection per slave device
▪ Configurable global scan rate
▪ Supports Poll, Strobe, Cyclic and COS I/O connections, Fragmented I/O Figure 380: IC694DNM200
and Explicit Messaging

▪ Configurable update rates for Poll and COS/Cyclic on a connection basis.
▪ Configurable response to loss of communication
▪ Firmware upgrade via service port on module
16.7.2 LEDs and Connectors: DNM200

The three DeviceNet-compliant LEDs of the module show its operating and communications status. The
RS-232 serial port is used for a computer connection during firmware upgrades. The DeviceNet connector is

a removable spring-clamp terminal. It provides bus continuity and can be removed from the module without
disrupting bus operation.
16.7.3 Specifications: DNM200

Backplane Current 450mA at 5Vdc (typical)
Consumption
Thick Cable General Two shielded pairs - Common axis with drain wire in center
Specifications
Overall braid shield - 65% coverage; 36 AWG or 0.12mm tinned Cu braid
minimum (individually tinned)
Drain wire- #18 Copper min.; 19 strands minimum (individually tinned)
Outside diameter - 0.410 inches (min) to 0.490 inches (max.) roundness

radius delta to be within 15% of 0.5 O.D.
Thin Cable General Two shielded pairs - Common axis with drain wire in center
Specifications
Overall braid shield - 65% coverage; 36 AWG or 0.12mm tinned Cu braid
minimum (individually tinned)
Drain wire - #22 Copper; 19 strands minimum (individually tinned)
Outside diameter - 0.240 inches (min.) to 0.280 inches (max.) roundness

radius delta to be within 20% of 0.5 O.D.
Network Topology Bus with limited branching (trunkline/dropline)
Redundancy Not Supported
Network Power for Node Nominal 24Vdc ±4%

devices
Allowed Nodes (Bridging 64 nodes

excluded)
Data Packet Size 0-8 bytes with allowance for message fragmentation
Duplicate Address Addresses verified at power-up

Detection
Error Detection / CRC - retransmission of message if validity not acknowledged by recipient

Correction

16.7.4 The DeviceNet Bus

Devices can be connected directly to the trunk cable, or to drop lines that are joined to the trunk cable with
taps. Taps can be mounted in junction boxes or panels. Drop lines and daisy-chains are often used inside
control panels where multiple devices are grouped together. When using drops with daisy-chains and
branches, the maximum length from a tap to its farthest drop is 20 feet.
Trunk Line
Tap Tap
Node Node Node
Node
Node
Node
Drop Lines
Node
Node
Node
Figure 381: DeviceNet Bus Topology
16.7.4.1 Bus Length

The maximum length of the trunk cable and drops both depend on the cable type and data rate. Individual
drops may not exceed 6 meters and are limited to one network node per drop. However, the node may have
multiple ports.
Data Rates 125kbps 250kbps 500kbps
thick cable, trunk 500m (1640ft) 250m (820ft) 100m (328ft)

length
thin cable, trunk length 100m (328ft) 100m (328ft) 100m (328ft)
maximum drop length 6m (20ft) 6m (20ft) 6m (20ft)
total length of all drops 156m (512ft) 78m (256ft) 39m (128ft)
For each baud rate, the total drop length is the sum of all the drop lines of both cable types in the network.
In addition, if the distance from a tap to the most distant device on its drop is longer than the distance from
the tap to the nearest terminating resistor, the drop line length also counts as part of the trunk cable length
(as well as the overall drop length).
16.7.4.2 DeviceNet Cable

Either DeviceNet thick cable or thin cable can be used. Thick cable permits greater cable lengths and higher
current levels. Generally, thick cable is used for the trunk cable. Thin cable is normally used for shorter
distances and is suitable for drop cables and for installations where more cable flexibility is needed. Both
thick cable and thin cable are 5-wire, multi-conductor copper cable. Two wires form a transmission line for
network communications. A second pair transmits network power. The fifth conductor forms an
electromagnetic shield. Most cables have color coded leads which correspond to the color coding on the
terminals on the DeviceNet Master Module.

16.7.4.3 Bus Connector Pin Assignments

The DeviceNet connector on the RX3i DeviceNet Master module has five color-coded screw-clamp terminals.
Signal Pin Wire Color
V+
V+ 5 Red
CAN_H
SHIELD
CAN_L
CAN_H 4 White
V-
Shield 3 Bare
CAN_L 2 Blue
Figure 382: DeviceNet
Connector Pinout V- 1 Black
Wiring to the DeviceNet Master module depends on its location on the network:
121 1% ¼ watt terminating resistors If the module is installed at the If the module is installed
MUST be installed at both ends of the end of a drop or drop segment, directly on the trunk cable or as
DeviceNet network. The terminating it is wired with one cable part of a daisy-chained drop
resistor is placed across the data connection only. cable, it has both an incoming
communication signals at pin 2 (CAN_L) and outgoing cable connected:
and pin 4 (CAN_H).
If the DeviceNet module is located at

either end of the bus trunk, it is wired
with one cable connection and a
terminating resistor:
Figure 384: DeviceNet Wiring for

End of Segment
Figure 385: DeviceNet Wiring for
Daisy Chain
Figure 383: DeviceNet Terminating Resistor

Installation
16.7.4.4 Grounding
All DeviceNet cable shields must be tied to ground at each device connection. This is done by tying the bare
wire of the cable to pin 3 (Shield) of the connector.

16.7.4.5 Power Requirements

The DeviceNet Master module consumes 450mA at 5Vdc (typical) from the PLC backplane. This power is
used for module operation, The DeviceNet Master powers its network transceiver from the 24Vdc DeviceNet
network power source. Linear power supplies are recommended for the DeviceNet power source. The
DeviceNet power source should not also be used for device power. Transients caused by I/O devices can
cause communications errors and even create bus-off conditions.
The DeviceNet specification recommends using a power tap to connect a power supply to the network. The
power tap should be appropriately fused for the current capacity of the bus cables. The maximum current on
the network depends on the cable type.
The DeviceNet network power supply must be grounded, but only at one point. The V- signal must be
connected to protective earth ground at the power supply only. If multiple power supplies are used, only one
power supply must have V- connected to earth ground.
16.7.4.5.1 Current Limit for Thick Cable

For thick cable, the maximum current on the network is 16 Amps. However, only 8 Amps is permitted on a
single network segment. 16 Amps can be drawn from a single power supply by locating the power supply at
the center point of two network segments, supplying 8 Amps to each segment.
16.7.4.5.2 Current Limit for Thin Cable

For thin cable, the maximum current permitted is 3 Amps.

16.8 Motion Mate Module: IC694DSM314

The Motion Mate Module (DSM314) is a multi-axis motion control module.
It supports two control loop configurations:
▪ Standard Mode (Follower Control Loop Disabled)

▪ Follower Mode (Follower Control Loop Enabled)
The DSM314 Module can be used with GE  Series and  Series digital servo
amplifiers and motors. It can also be used with analog GE SL Series analog
servos and third-party analog velocity command interface and analog
torque command interface servos. Module features include:
▪ Velocity Feed forward and Position Error Integrator

▪ High resolution of programming units
▪ Simple and powerful motion program instruction set
▪ Simple 1 to 4-axis motion programs
▪ Non-volatile storage for 10 programs and 40 subroutines
▪ Single-point-of-connect for programming and configuration.
▪ Firmware is stored in flash memory and is updated via COMM port.
▪ Recipe programming using command parameters.
▪ Electronic CAM capability
▪ Home and over-travel switch inputs for each Servo Axis
▪ Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each axis
▪ 5Vdc, 24Vdc and analog I/O for use by PLC
▪ Incremental Quadrature Encoder input on each axis for
Encoder/Analog mode
▪ 13-bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Digital Servo
Tuning monitor
▪ High-Speed digital output (four each 24V and four each 5V) via on- Figure 386: IC694DSM314
board Local Logic control
This module can be installed in any available I/O slot in any RX3i or
Series 90-30 backplane. Module does not support insertion into or
removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under power (see Hot
Insertion and Removal Not Supported, Section 2.6.4.2).
16.8.1 Overview: DSM314

The DSM314 integrates high-performance motion control with the logic-solving functions of the RX3i
Controller.

Operator
Interfaces
Machine 1
D Amp. 1
S
M
3
1 Encoder 1
4
Machine 2
Amp. 2
Configuration and
Encoder 2
Programming Software:
-Configuration
-Motion Programming
-Local Logic Programming Encoder 3
-CAM Profiles (Follower Master)
Figure 387: System Overview: DSM314
For more information about configuring and installing the DSM314 module, refer to the Motion Mate User’s
Manual, GFK-1742. For details about interfacing the DSM314 to the GE SL Servo products, refer to the
manual, SL Series Servo User’s Manual, GFK-1581.
16.8.2 Specifications: DSM314

Power Supply Current Draw by DSM 800 mA plus encoder supply current (refer to next item).
Available +5Vdc Current/Module to 500 mA (if used, must be added to module +5Vdc current draw)
supply external encoder, if used
Number of DSM314 Modules in Up to 5 DSM314 modules in RX3i Main Backplane with Power
PACSystems RX3i Main Backplane Supply PWR040
Number of DSM314 Modules in ▪ 3 DSM314 modules in expansion/remote backplane with

PACSystems RX3i Expansion/Remote PWR321
Backplane ▪ 6 DSM314modules in remote backplane with PWR330/331
▪ 7 DSM314modules in expansion backplane with PWR330/331
16.8.3 Features: DSM314

16.8.3.1 LEDs
There are seven LED status indicators on the DSM314 module:
The STAT LED is normally On. When the LED is OFF, the DSM314 is not
functioning. Slow blinking indicates status errors. Rapid blinking indicates
errors that cause the servo to stop.
The OK LED indicates the current status of the DSM314 module. When the
LED is steady On, the module is functioning properly. When the LED is Off,
the module is not functioning.
The CFG LED is On when a module configuration has been received.
The EN1 through EN4 LEDs are On if the Axis 1 through Axis 4 Drive Enable
relays are on.
16.8.3.2 COMM Connector

The COMM port is an RJ-11 connector, used to download firmware updates
to the module.
16.8.3.3 I/O Connectors

The DSM314 is a two-axis digital servo/one axis analog velocity interface or
four-axis analog servo (Torque Mode and/or Velocity Mode) controller with
four 36-pin I/O connectors labeled A, B, C, and D. All four connectors
provide similar analog and digital I/O circuits.
16.8.3.4 Shield Ground Connection

The DSM314 must be connected to frame ground via the ground terminal
on the bottom of the module Figure 388: DSM314 Features

16.9 Motion Controller Module: IC694DSM324

The Motion Controller Module, IC694DSM324, is a multi-axis motion control
module. It supports two control loop configurations:
▪ Standard Mode (Follower Control Loop Disabled)

▪ Follower Mode (Follower Control Loop Enabled)
The DSM324 Module can be used with GE i Series digital servo amplifiers and
motors. Module features include:
▪ Block Processing time under 5ms

▪ Velocity Feed forward and Position Error Integrator
▪ High resolution of programming units
▪ Simple and powerful motion program instruction set
▪ Simple 1 to 4-axis motion programs
▪ Non-volatile storage for 10 programs and 40 subroutines
▪ Single-point-of-connect for programming and configuration.
▪ Firmware is stored in flash memory and is updated via COMM port.
▪ Recipe programming using command parameters.
▪ Electronic CAM capability
▪ Home and over-travel switch inputs for each Servo Axis
▪ Two Position Capture Strobe Inputs for each axis
▪ 5Vdc, 24Vdc and analog I/O for use by PLC
▪ Incremental Quadrature Encoder input on each axis for Encoder/Analog
mode
▪ 13-bit Analog Output can be controlled by PLC or used as Digital Servo
Tuning monitor
▪ High-Speed digital output (four each 24Vdc and four each 5Vdc) via on-
board Local Logic control Figure 389: IC694DSM324
This module can be installed in any available I/O slot in any RX3i or Series 90-
30 backplane. Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i
Universal Backplane which is under power. Refer to Hot Insertion and Removal,
Section 2.6.4.1.
Refer to the DSM324i Motion Controller for PACSystems RX3i and Series 90-30, GFK-2347, for more information
about the DSM324 module.
16.9.1 Overview: DSM324

The DSM324 integrates high-performance motion control with the logic-solving functions of the RX3i
controller.
Operator
Interfaces
Machine 1
D Amp. 1
S
M
3
2 Encoder 1
4
Machine 2
Amp. 2
Configuration and
Encoder 2
Programming Software:
-Configuration
-Motion Programming
-Local Logic Programming Encoder 3
-CAM Profiles (Follower Master)
Figure 390: System Overview: DSM324
For more information about configuring and installing the DSM324 module, refer to the DSM324i Motion
Controller for PACSystems RX3i and Series 90-30, GFK-2347. For details about interfacing the DSM324 to the
GE SL Servo products, refer to the manual, AC Servo Motor is Descriptions Manual, GFZ-65302EN.
16.9.2 Features: DSM324

16.9.2.1 LEDs
There are eight LED status indicators on the DSM324 module:
The STATUS LED is normally On. When the LED is OFF, the DSM324 is not
functioning as the result of a status error. Flashing signals an error
condition.
The OK LED indicates the current status of the DSM314 module. When the
LED is steady On, the module is functioning properly. When the LED is Off,
the module is not functioning.
The CONFIG LED is On when a module configuration has been received.
The FSSB LED is On when FSSB communications are active. It blinks during
FSSB setup. This LED is Off if FSSB communications are inactive or if FSSB
setup has failed.
The Axis Enable LEDS, 1 through 4, are On if the Axis 1 through Axis 4 Drives
are enabled.
16.9.2.2 FSSB Connector

The FSSB connector provides optical fiber connection to Servo Amplifiers
for the exchange of command, feedback, and diagnostics data. This
connector has a removable protective cap.
16.9.2.3 COMM Connector

The COMM port is an RJ-11 connector, used to download firmware updates
to the module.
16.9.2.4 I/O Connectors Figure 391: DSM324 Features
The DSM324 provides two connectors for 5Vdc and 24Vdc I/O. Pre-
manufactured cables are available in 1-meter and 3-meter lengths for both
I/O connectors.
16.9.2.5 Shield Ground Connection

The DSM324 must be connected to frame ground via the ground terminal
on the bottom of the module. The grounding resistance of the system
ground should be 100 or less (class 3 grounding).
16.9.3 Specifications: DSM324


Power Supply Current Draw by DSM 860 mA plus encoder supply current (refer to next item).
Available +5V Current/Module to 500 mA (if used, must be added to module +5v current draw)
supply external encoder, if used
Number of DSM324i Modules in Up to 5 DSM324i modules in RX3i Main Backplane with Power Supply
PACSystems RX3i Main Backplane PWR040
Number of DSM324i Modules in ▪ 2 DSM324i modules in expansion/remote backplane with

PACSystems RX3i PWR321
Expansion/Remote Backplane ▪ 6 DSM324i modules in remote backplane with PWR330/331
▪ 6 DSM324i modules in expansion backplane with PWR330/331
16.10 PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion Controller:

IC695PMM335
The PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion Controller, IC695PMM335, is designed with
the performance to deliver improved machine productivity required for today’s
high-speed machines and lean manufacturing environments.
Each module can control up to four servo axes. Up to 40 axes can be controlled
from a single RX3i backplane.

The PMM335 supports discrete and synchronous motion control yielding a

flexible motion controller that scales to fit your requirements.
16.10.1 Servo Types Supported

 Digital: Supports FANUC βi, βHVi and αHVi Series digital servo
amplifiers and motors. For a list of supported FANUC motors, refer to
Motor Type Codes in PACMotion Multi-Axis Motion Controller User’s
Manual, GFK-2448.
 Analog: Provides analog velocity and analog torque command
interfaces to third-party analog servos.
16.10.2 Features: PMM335

 Fast motion path (1ms) planning and position update rates (500μs)
deliver improved accuracy and faster response to changing control
requirements.
 Consistent motion update rate regardless of the number of axes.
 High reliability FANUC servos improve machine uptime.
 High-Speed synchronization of up to 40 axes over the PACSystems RX3i

backplane.
 Advanced CAM and gearing features for electronic line shaft applications.
 Single software development environment for complete automation

control solution simplifies programming.
 Distributed architecture for greater machine flexibility – up to 100 meters

between axes using noise immune fiber cables
Figure 392: IC695PMM335
 Optional Fiber Terminal Block allows distributed motion-centric I/O to reduce

wiring complexity and cost.
 Two high-speed position capture inputs per axis for registration and
sequence control.
This module is compatible with all rack-mounted RX3i CPUs except CRU320.
It can be installed in any available RX3i I/O slot. Module supports insertion into
and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under power. Refer to

16.10.3 Fiber I/O Terminal Block

The DIN-rail mounted FTB, IC695FTB001,
allows the user to connect 5-volt, 24-volt,
and analog I/O to motion specific devices, + + - -
such as limit switches and encoders, over a TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 2

19.2 – 28.8 VDC POWER INPUT
full-duplex fiber optic link up to 100m

IC695FTB001 IC695FTB001
from the PMM335. FTB I/O can be TERMINAL 1 TERMINAL 2
configured as over-travel switch, home Q1 Q5

PACMotion™
Q2 Q6
Fiber I/O Terminal Block
switch, quadrature encoder and high- Q3 Q7 IC695FTB001
Q8
speed touch probe position capture Q4
I1 I9
inputs, digital cam switch outputs or I2 I10
I3 I11
general purpose I/O. The FTB’s analog I4 I12 24V I/O
I13
outputs can be used as general-purpose I5
I6 I14
IN OUT
1 9 1
analog outputs, or configured for closed I7 I15
2 10 2
I8 I16
position loop (velocity interface) or I17 I23
3
4
11
12
3
4
I24
velocity loop (torque interface) control of I18
/Q9
I25
5 13 5 STATUS
I19 6 14 6 FIBER
up to two analog servos I20
/Q10
I26 7 15 7 T1 PWR
I21 I27 8 16 8 T2 PWR
/Q11
I22 I28
A robust serial protocol encodes and AI1
/Q12
AI2 FIBER I/O COMM
AQ1
decodes the data as it sent between the AQ2
PMM and the FTB. In the event of a system

malfunction, such as loss of
communication with the PMM, the FTB Figure 393: PMM335 with DIN-Rail Mounted FTB001 Terminal
sets its I/O to the user-configured state. Blocks
16.10.4 Features
 Fiber optic connection allows choice of cable lengths from 1m to 100m
 Fiber optic connection provides optical isolation between the main rack and the FTB.
 Current capability to 0.5A on all 24V outputs.
 Loss of encoder and open wire fault detection on 5V differential inputs (quadrature encoder lines).
 Visual diagnostics provided via individual LEDs that indicate I/O point state.
 DIN-rail mounting allows convenient location of I/O.

 Fiber optic interface reduces remote I/O wiring cost and improves noise immunity.
 Removable RX3i terminal block headers provide ease of use
 A 5Vdc power source for external quadrature encoders
16.11 IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module:

IC695ECM850
The PACSystems RX3i IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module,
IC695ECM850 (ECM850), connects an RX3i controller to an IEC 61850 network,
enabling the controller to act as an IEC 61850 Client and communicate with
Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs, IEC 61850 servers) on the network using the
IEC 61850 protocol. (IEC 61850 is a standard for the design of electrical
substation automation.) The ECM850 provides the functions and services
required for an IEC 61850 Client, as described in the PICS and MICS in the
appendices.
The ECM850 supports 10/100/1000 Mbps copper, 100/1000 Mbps multi-mode

fiber, and 100/1000 Mbps single-mode fiber Ethernet connections. The
network can include media interfaces of more than one type.
Features of the ECM850 include:
 Supports the following IEC 61850 client features
o Multiple connections to IEDs
o Read and write of data values
o Control model – all models
o Report by exception – reporting buffered and un-buffered
o Browse data model – logical devices, nodes, data objects &

attributes
o Self-description – reads data model from IED over IEC 61850

network
 Full programming and configuration services for the IEC 61850 Client,
including reading of device Substation Configuration Language (SCL) files
Figure 394: IC695ECM850
and reading configuration data online directly from IEDs using the Machine
Edition programming and configuration application.

 Supports operation in hot standby redundant systems.
 Built-in command-line interface function that supports direct monitoring

and partial configuration by means of the module’s Micro USB port or
Telnet over Ethernet.
 Support for both star (switched) and linear (daisy-chained) network
topologies.
 Four switched Ethernet ports (located on the underside) —
o Two 8-conductor RJ-45 shielded twisted pair 10/100/1000 Mbps
copper interfaces;
o Two Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) cages for user-supplied SFP
devices.
 Internal clock synchronized with the RX3i CPU for time-stamped
diagnostics.
2.6.4.1
kit.23
Note: The USB port is intended for system setup and diagnostics only. It must not remain permanently
connected.
16.11.1 Specifications: ECM850

Protocol Support IEC 61850 Client as per PICs and MICs specifications
Power Requirements 3.3Vdc: 1.2 A with no SFP devices installed

1.9 A maximum (2 SFP devices installed, 0.35 A per SFP
device)
5Vdc: 1.1 A maximum
Operating Temperature Range 0 to 60°C
De-rated to 57°C:
• if 100 MB Fiber SFPs installed, or

• if Copper SFPs operating at 1 GB.
Number of Port Connectors Two RJ-45 and Two SFP Cages

(SFP devices not included, available separately.)

Micro USB Connector One, for communication with a computer using Command Line
Interface.
Local Area Network (LAN) IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control Class I
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD Medium Access Control 10/100/1000 Mbps
CPU Status Bits 32
Polling Rate90 Configurable for every IED connection from 0 to 31267 ms

(default is 1000 ms).
Number of IP Addresses One
Number of MAC Addresses Five. One per external port and one internal.
Network Topologies Supported Star (switched), linear (daisy-chain)
Time Synchronization SNTP Client – Multicast and Broadcast
System Maximum Limits
ECM850s per RX3i CPU Four (4). All must be located in main rack.
(Use in remote or expansion racks not supported).
No of IED connections 32
supported per ECM850
No of IED connections 128

supported per RX3i CPU
Maximum I/O Memory per 32 Kbytes of combined Input/Output memory

ECM850
Maximum I/O Memory per RX3i 128 Kbytes of combined Input/Output memory
CPU
No of PLC Protocol Variables91 5000

(PPVs) per ECM850
No of PPVs per RX3i CPU 20000
16.11.1.1 Indicator LEDs
90
The polling rate for each IED connection can be configured by the IEC 61850 Configurator. ECM850 also supports unsolicited
communication using report control blocks (RCB). The RCB can be used for faster updates irrespective of polling rate, based on RCB
trigger options. Refer to PACSystems RX3i IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module User Manual, GFK-2849 for more details.
91
PLC Protocol Variables is defined as the set of RX3i controller variables which represents the IEC 61850 protocol data attributes in a
structured format in a variable list. This typically includes the additional variables which are required to perform WRITE operations to
an IED. Refer to PACSystems RX3i IEC 61850 Ethernet Communication Module User Manual, GFK-2849 for more details.

The following table summarizes the light-emitting diode (LED) indicator functions. More detailed
information about error indications and blink patterns is given in PACSystems RX3i IEC 61850 Ethernet
Communication Module User Manual, GFK-2849.
OK Indicates whether the module is able to perform normal operation.
LAN Indicates access to and activity on the Ethernet local area network (LAN). The LAN LED
indicates network packets are being processed by the network interface (not just passing
through the embedded switch)
STATUS Indicates the condition of the ECM850 during normal operation. It indicates whether an entry
other than the startup event is present in the module’s local log. STATUS can also indicate
whether any of the MAC addresses are invalid.
CONN Indicates whether the module has received its configuration from the RX3i CPU.
ACTIVE Indicates the status of IED connections.
USB Indicates activity on the USB port.
1, 2, 3, 4 Indicates link speed, link connection and link activity corresponding to each of the four
external Ethernet ports.
16.11.1.2 Connectors
16.11.1.2.1 Secure Digital (SD) Card Slot
The SD card slot is designed to support non-volatile memory cards in both standard capacity (SD) and high-
capacity (SDHC) formats. It is provided for future use.
16.11.1.2.2 Switched Ethernet Ports

The ECM850 connects to an IEC 61850 network by means of one or more of its four switched external
Ethernet ports. These are located on the underside of the module. Two 8-conductor RJ-45 shielded twisted
pair 10/100/1000 Mbps copper interfaces and two Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) cages provide
flexibility in media selection.
Figure 395: ECM850 Ethernet Connections (Located Underneath Module)
The module is assigned five Ethernet MAC addresses: one for each of the four external Ethernet ports and
one for the internal switch.

16.11.1.2.3 Micro USB Port

The ECM850 has a USB Micro-B socket for connection to a computer running Windows Vista or Windows 7.
The USB port can be used to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) function for the ECM850, using a
terminal emulation application such as HyperTerminal. The Command Line Interface function can be used to
monitor an ECM850 and check its operation. If a problem occurs, the Command Line Interface can be used
to help determine the cause. A driver installation application is provided to configure a Windows computer
to communicate with the ECM850 through its USB port. Refer to PACSystems RX3i IEC 61850 Ethernet
Communication Module User Manual, GFK-2849 for more details.
16.11.1.3 Restart Pushbutton

The Restart pushbutton on an ECM850 can be used to manually restart the module without cycling power.
The restart operation begins when the pushbutton is released.

16.12 Ethernet Interface Module: IC695ETM001

The Ethernet Interface Module, IC695ETM001-Jx and IC695ETM001-Kxxx, is used to
connect a PACSystems RX3i controller to an Ethernet network. It enables the RX3i
controller to communicate with other PACSystems equipment and with Series 90
and VersaMax controllers. The Ethernet interface provides TCP/IP communications
with other PLCs, host computers running the Host Communications Toolkit or
programmer software, and computers running the TCP/IP version of the
programming software. These communications use the SRTP and Ethernet Global
Data (EGD) protocols over a four-layer TCP/IP (Internet) stack.
Features of the RX3i Ethernet Interface Module include:
▪ Full PLC programming and configuration services

▪ Periodic data exchange using Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
▪ EGD Commands to read and write PLC and EGD exchange memory over the
network.
▪ TCP/IP communication services using SRTP
Figure 396: ▪ Comprehensive station management and diagnostic tools

IC695ETM001 ▪ Extended PLC connectivity via IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD 10Mbps and 100Mbps
Ethernet LAN port connectors.
▪ Network switch that has Auto-negotiate, Sense, Speed, and crossover
detection.
▪ Direct connection to BaseT (twisted pair) network switch, hub, or repeater
without an external transceiver.
This module can be installed in any available RX3i I/O slot. Module supports insertion
into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under power. Refer to
Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade kit.
For more information about this module, please refer to the following publications:
▪ PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP TCP/IP Ethernet Communications User Manual,

GFK-2224
Figure 397: ▪ PACSystems TCP/IP Ethernet Communications Station Manager User Manual,
IC695ETM001- GFK-2225
Kxxx

16.12.1 Ethernet Interface Specifications:

ETM001-Jx ETM001-Kxxx
Ethernet processor speed 200 MHz
Connectors Station Manager (RS-232) Port: Ports: Three autosensing RJ-45 ports.
9-pin female D-connector
Two 10BaseT / 100BaseTX
Ports: Two 8-pin female

shielded RJ-45
LAN IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control Class I
Class I IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD Medium Access
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD Medium Control 10/100/1000 Mbps
Access Control 10/100 Mbps
Number of IP addresses One One
Number of Ethernet Port Two, both are 10BaseT / Three, all are
Connectors 100BaseTX with auto-sensing 10BaseT/100BaseTX/1000BaseT with
RJ-45 connection. auto-sensing RJ-45 connection.
Embedded Ethernet Switch Yes – Allows daisy chaining of Yes – Allows daisy chaining of Ethernet
Ethernet nodes. nodes.
Serial Port Station Manager Port: RS- Not Applicable.

232 DCE, 1200 - 115200 bps.
16.12.2 Ethernet Interface Ports

The latest version of the Ethernet Interface Module (-Kxxx) has three auto-sensing
10BaseT/100BaseTX/1000BaseT RJ-45 shielded twisted pair Ethernet ports for connection to a 10BaseT,
100BaseTX, or 1000BaseT IEEE 802.3 network.
The early version of the Ethernet Interface Module (-Jx) has two auto-sensing 10BaseT/100Base TX RJ-45
shielded twisted pair Ethernet ports for connection to either a 10BaseT or 100BaseTX IEEE 802.3 network.
The port automatically senses the speed (10Mbps or 100Mbps), duplex mode (half duplex or full duplex) and
cable (straight-through or crossover) attached to it with no intervention required. There is only one interface
to the network (only one Ethernet MAC address and only one IP address).

16.12.3 Station Manager92

The built-in Station Manager function of the Ethernet Interface Module provides on-line supervisory access
to the Ethernet Interface, through the Station Manager port or over the Ethernet cable. Station Manager
services include:
▪ An interactive set of commands for interrogating and controlling the station.

▪ Unrestricted access to observe internal statistics, an exception log, and configuration parameters.
▪ Password security for commands that change station parameters or operation.
Refer to the PACSystems TCP/IP Ethernet Communications Station Manager User Manual, GFK-2225, for
complete information on the Station Manager.
16.12.4 Ethernet Global Data (EGD)

Each PACSystems CPU supports up to 255 simultaneous Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchanges. EGD
exchanges are configured using the programmer and stored into the PLC. Both Produced and Consumed
exchanges can be configured. PACSystems Ethernet Interfaces support both selective consumption of EGD
exchanges and EGD exchange production and consumption to the broadcast IP address of the local subnet.
The Ethernet Interface can be configured to use SNTP to synchronize the timestamps of produced EGD
exchanges.
The Ethernet Interface Module implements the capabilities of a Class 1 and Class 2 device. COMMREQ-driven
EGD Commands can be used in the application program to read and write data into the CPU or other EGD
Class 2 devices.
92
This feature only applies to ETM001-Jx. The Station Manager serial port has been replaced on the ETM001-Kxxx by an autosensing
RJ45 port on the face of the module.

16.12.5 ETM001-Jx Interface Controls and Indicators
16.12.5.1 LEDs
▪ The Ethernet OK LED indicates whether the module is able to perform

normal operation. This LED is On for normal operation and flashing for
all other operations. If a hardware or runtime failure occurs, the EOK
LED blinks a two-digit error.
▪ The LAN OK LED indicates access to the Ethernet network. The LAN LED
blinks when data is being sent or received over the network directed to
or from the Ethernet interface. It remains On when the Ethernet
interface is not actively accessing the network but the Ethernet
physical interface is available and one or both of the Ethernet ports is
operational. It is Off otherwise unless software load is occurring.
▪ The Log Empty LED is On during normal operation. It is Off if an event
has been logged.
▪ Two Ethernet network LEDs (LINK) indicate the network link status.
▪ Two Ethernet network speed LEDs (100 Mbps) indicate the network
data speed (10 (off) or 100 Mb/sec (on)).
16.12.5.2 Ethernet Restart Pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to manually restart the Ethernet firmware without
power cycling the entire system. It is recessed to prevent accidental
operation.
The module has two 10BaseT/100BaseTX Ethernet Network Port
Connectors. There is only one interface to the network (only one Ethernet
MAC address and only one IP address).
Figure 398: Ethernet Features
The Station Manager (RS-232) Serial Port is serviced via the D-connector on
ETM001-Jx
the front panel.

16.12.6 ETM001-Kxxx Interface Controls and Indicators
16.12.6.1 LEDs
▪ The OK LED indicates whether the module is able to perform normal

operation. This LED is ON for normal operation and flashing for all
other operations. If a hardware or runtime failure occurs, the OK LED
blinks a two-digit error.
▪ The LAN OK LED indicates access to the Ethernet network. The LAN OK
LED blinks when data is being sent or received over the network
directed to or from the Ethernet interface. It remains ON when the
Ethernet interface is not actively accessing the network but the
Ethernet physical interface is available and one or both of the Ethernet
ports is operational. It is OFF otherwise unless software load is
occurring.
▪ The LOG EMPTY LED is ON during normal operation. It is OFF if an
event has been logged.
▪ The Ethernet network LED (LINK) indicate the network link status.
▪ Six Ethernet network speed LEDs (10/100/1000 Mbps) indicate the
network data speed.
16.12.6.2 Ethernet Restart Pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to manually restart the Ethernet firmware without
power cycling the entire system. It is recessed to prevent accidental
operation.
The module has three 10BaseT/100BaseTX/1000BaseT Ethernet Network
Port Connectors. There is only one interface to the network (only one
Ethernet MAC address and only one IP address).
The front panel has an autosensing RJ-45 connector that has replaced the
serial connector on the earlier design of the interface module.
The bottom panel has two autosensing RJ-45 connectors designated as Lan
1 and Lan 2.
Figure 399: Ethernet Features

ETM001-Kxxx

16.13 RX3i DNP3 Outstation Module: IC695EDS001

The PACSystems RX3i DNP3 Outstation Module IC695EDS001 is

an Ethernet-connected module which fits in the RX3i backplane
and permits the RX3i to behave as an Outstation on the DNP3
network, where it may interact with up to eight DNP3 masters.
16.13.1 Module features:
 Two auto-sensing RJ-45 Ethernet ports with LED indicators
o Connects via Ethernet at 10BaseT or 100BaseTX

o Internal network switch with Auto-negotiate, Sense,
Speed, and crossover detection
o Supports Linear (daisy-chained) and Star network
configurations
o TCP/IP and LLA protocols supported
o One Ethernet MAC Address and one IP Address per
module
o Time synchronization to SNTP Time Server
o Recessed Ethernet Restarts pushbutton to manually
restart the Ethernet firmware without power-cycling the
module.
 Dedicated RS-232 Station Manager Port for network
supervision
 LED behavior same as ETM001
 DNP3 configuration via a single COMMREQ command

Figure 400: EDS001 Features at a Glance
o Data exchanges up to 12,072 points and 20,000 events
supported
o Eight DNP3 Objects supported: DI, DI w/time, DO, DO
w/time, CROB, analog output values, time setting, and
class polls
o Multiple RX3i memory types may be utilized for DNP3
data exchange
o Binary DI/DO
o Analog (32-bit signed, 16-bit signed, or single-precision
floating-point)
o Supports unsolicited data communications with DNP3
Master
 Compatible with any rack-mounted RX3i CPU, including
redundant controllers
o Up to 4 EDS001 per RX3i, as allowed by available power

and slots

o Module can be installed in any available RX3i main rack

I/O slot
o Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i
backplane which is under power.
o Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader
software utility (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using
a Web-based tool (if the host CPU has no serial port).
For more information about this module, please refer to PACSystems RX3i DNP3 Outstation Module
IC695EDS001 User’s Manual, GFK-2911.

16.14 RX3i IEC 104 Server Module: IC695EIS001

The PACSystems RX3i Ethernet IEC 104 Server Module, catalog

number IC695EIS001, implements the IEC 60870-5-104
communications protocol. It permits a PACSystems RX3i controller to
be connected to an Ethernet network using a standard TCP/IP
connection scheme, allowing an IEC 104 Client to poll data from the
Server, as well generate unsolicited communications from the Server
back to the Client.
Two auto-sensing 10BaseT/100BaseTX RJ-45 shielded twisted-pair

Ethernet ports permit direct connection to either a 10BaseT or
100BaseTX IEEE 802.3 network without an external transceiver. Line,
Star and Daisy Chain topologies are supported.
The RX3i Ethernet IEC 104 Server Module hosts the IEC104 Server side
protocol on a common RX3i ETM001 module hardware platform.
Thus, many of the specifications and behaviors are shared with the
ETM001 module including protocol support. IC695EIS001 is an
Ethernet-connected module that fits in the RX3i backplane and
permits the RX3i to behave as a Server on the IEC104 network. The
data exchanges between the EIS001 module and IEC104 Client(s) are
configurable, using a single COMMREQ instruction in the ladder logic
or Structured Text program.
16.14.1 Module Features
▪ Supports one connection to the RX3i Controller data set specified

in the configuration.
▪ Supports Interrogation and RBE for Single Point and Double Point
data.
▪ Supports Interrogation and RBE for Regulated Step.
▪ Supports Interrogation and Measured data sets for Scaled,
normalized, and single precision Float. Figure 401: EIS001 Front View
▪ Supports 56-bit IEC 60870-5-104 time format, with the default
being 56-bit time format.
▪ Supports Time Set, and query of the RX3i Controller CPU Clock in
UTC time.
▪ Cause of Transmission size is two octets.
RX3i Interface specifications:
▪ Up to four EIS001 per RX3i, as allowed by available power and

slots.
▪ Module can be installed in any available RX3i main rack I/O slot.

▪ Module supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i

backplane which is under power.
▪ Module supports firmware upgrades using the WinLoader
software utility (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-
based tool (if the host CPU has no serial port). Instructions are
included with the firmware upgrade kit.23
For more information about this module, please refer to PACSystems RX3i IEC 104 Server Module
IC695EIS001User’s Manual, GFK-2949.
16.15 Ethernet Network Interface Unit: IC695NIU001

The PACSystems RX3i Ethernet NIU, IC695NIU001, makes it possible to use PACSystems RX3i and Series 90-
30 I/O remotely on an Ethernet network. System control can be provided by any GE master device that is
capable of exchanging Ethernet Global Data.

The Ethernet NIU resides in an I/O station that

consists of:
▪ an RX3i Universal Backplane (IC695CHS0xx)

▪ an RX3i power supply (IC695PSxxxx)
▪ the RX3i Ethernet NIU (IC695NIU001)
▪ one or more RX3i Ethernet modules
(IC695ETM001), as required for Ethernet
communications
▪ proprietary application software
▪ Optional Series 90-30 expansion backplanes.
▪ PACSystems RX3i and/or Series 90-30
modules, as appropriate for the application.
16.15.1 Ethernet NIU

Features
▪ 20Kbytes of optional local logic. Supports all

languages except C programming.
▪ 10 Mbytes of built-in flash memory for local
user data storage.
▪ Battery-backed calendar clock.
▪ In-system upgradeable firmware.
▪ Two serial ports: an RS-485 serial port and an
RS-232 serial port.
▪ Supports Ethernet communications via the
backplane-based Ethernet Transmitter
Module (IC695ETM001) Figure 402: IC695NIU001
▪ Data exchange using Ethernet Global Data
(EGD)
▪ Comprehensive station management and
diagnostic tools
▪ Supports operation with redundant
controllers
Module does not support insertion into or removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under power
(see Hot Insertion and Removal Not Supported, Section 2.6.4.2).

This section gives a brief overview of the Ethernet NIU module. For details of installing, configuring, and
operating an Ethernet NIU, please refer to the PACSystems RX3i Ethernet Network Interface Unit User’s Manual,
GFK-2439.
16.15.2 Compatibility
The Ethernet NIU PLUS is compatible with the same types of modules, backplanes, and other equipment as a
PACSystems rack-mounted RX3i CPU. For a list of compatible products, refer Section 1.3.
16.15.3 Specifications: NIU001

Battery For estimated battery life under various conditions, refer to the PACSystems
Battery and Energy Pack Manual, GFK-2741.
Power requirements +3.3Vdc: 1.25 Amps nominal, +5Vdc: 1.0 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)
Floating-point Yes
Embedded RS-232, RS-485

communications
Serial Protocols Modbus RTU Slave, SNP, Serial I/O, Modbus RTU Master by application “C” block
supported
Backplane Dual backplane bus support: RX3i PCI and 90-30-style serial
PCI compatibility System designed to be electrically compliant with PCI 2.2 standard
16.15.4 Ethernet Global Data Features

The Ethernet NIU communicates with its controller via Ethernet Global Data exchanges. One exchange is
used to send outputs to the Ethernet NIU and another exchange is used to send inputs back to the controller.
The Ethernet NIU can also use Ethernet Global Data exchanges to receive the following COMMREQ
commands from a PACSystems RX3i controller:
▪ Modbus Master – function codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 15, 16, 17

▪ Genius – enable/disable outputs, switch BSM, clear fault, clear all faults, assign monitor, read diagnostic

▪ PROFIBUS Master – COMMREQs 1, 2, 4, 5, 6

▪ Motion (DSM314/DSM324) – load parameters
▪ High-Speed Counter – Data command
▪ DeviceNet Master – COMMREQs 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9
▪ Analog Module – HART Protocol COMMREQs
The Ethernet NIU executes the COMMREQ and sends the results back to RX3i using another Ethernet Global
Data exchange.
16.15.5 Ports
The NIU has two independent, on-board serial ports, accessed by connectors on the front of the module.
These ports provide serial interfaces to external devices.
Port 1 (COM1) is a DCE port that allows a simple straight-through cable to connect with a standard AT-style
RS-232 port. It has a 9-pin, female, D-sub connector with a standard pin out.
Port 2 (COM2) is a DCE port that is RS-485 compatible. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female D-sub connector.
The Ethernet NIU does not have an Ethernet port. Ethernet communications are provided by one or more
Ethernet Transmitter Modules (described previously in this chapter) located in the I/O Station.
16.15.5.1 Protocols Supported

Protocol Port 1 Port 2
RTU (slave) Yes Yes
SNP Slave Yes Yes
Serial I/O93 Yes Yes
Firmware Upgrade ENIU in STOP/No I/O mode
Message Mode
Yes Yes
(C Runtime Library Functions: serial read, serial write, sscanf, sprintf)
16.15.5.2 Serial Port Baud Rates

Port 1 Port 2
Protocol
(RS-232) (RS-485)
Modbus RTU Slave protocol 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
Message 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
Firmware Upgrade via WinLoader 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
SNP Slave 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
Serial I/O 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
93
Modbus Master is supported in application code in Serial I/O mode.

16.16 Ethernet Network Interface Unit: IC695NIU001

PLUS
The PACSystems RX3i Ethernet NIU PLUS, IC695NIU001, NIU OK I/O FORCE
makes it possible to use PACSystems RX3i and Series 90- NIU SCANNING I/O STATUS
30 I/O remotely on an Ethernet network. Once set up by OUTPUTS ENABLED SYS FAULT
configuration, data exchange is completely automatic. COM1 COM2
System control can be provided by any master device RESET

capable of exchanging Ethernet Global Data (EGD). The NIU001+
Ethernet NIU automatically provides the controller with
status information in each exchange. The application
program logic in the controller can monitor this status
data, and issue appropriate commands to the Ethernet
COM 1
NIU.
An RX3i Ethernet NIU station consists of:
▪ an RX3i Universal Backplane (IC695CHS0xx)

▪ an RX3i power supply (IC695PSxxxx)
▪ the RX3i Ethernet NIU (IC695NIU001)
▪ one or more RX3i Ethernet modules (IC695ETM001)
▪ proprietary application software
COM 2
▪ optional Series 90-30 expansion backplanes.
▪ PACSystems RX3i and/or Series 90-30 modules, as
appropriate for the application.
Module does not support insertion into or removal from

an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under power (see Hot
Insertion and Removal Not Supported, Section 2.6.4.2). Figure 403: IC695NIU001 PLUS
This module requires Machine Edition Logic Developer

software, version 5.51 or later.
16.16.1 Compatibility
The Ethernet NIU PLUS is compatible with the same types of modules, backplanes, and other equipment as a
PACSystems rack-mounted RX3i CPU. For a list of compatible products, refer Section 1.3.
This module requires Logic Developer software, version 6.50 or later. Additional product enhancements
require the use of later programmer software versions, as detailed in the Ethernet NIU PLUS datasheet, GFK-
2598.

The NIU001 Classic and NIU001 Plus are interchangeable. An application created for an NIU001 PLUS can be
used with an NIU001 Classic and vice versa.
16.16.2 Features: Ethernet NIU001 PLUS
▪ 20 Kbytes of optional local logic. Supports all languages except C programming.

▪ 10 Mbytes of built-in flash memory for local user data storage.
▪ Battery-backed Real Time Clock.
▪ In-system upgradeable firmware.
▪ Two serial ports: an RS-485 serial port and an RS-232 serial port.
▪ Supports Ethernet communications via the backplane-based Ethernet Interface module (IC695ETM001)
▪ Data exchange using EGD
▪ Comprehensive station management/diagnostic tools
▪ Supports operation with redundant controllers
▪ PACSystems RX3i controllers can send selected COMMREQs to the RX3i ENIU via EGD. The ENIU
executes the COMMREQs and returns the results to the controller.
▪ During EGD configuration, RX3i Ethernet interfaces are identified by their Backplane/Slot locations.
▪ Supports display of module hardware revision, serial number and date code in Machine Edition Logic
Developer software.
▪ Units manufactured with date codes greater than 1129 are compliant with EU RoHS Directive
2002/95/EC using the following exemptions identified in the Annex: 7a, 7c-I, & 7c-III.
16.16.3 Ethernet Global Data Features

The Ethernet NIU communicates with its controller via EGD exchanges. One exchange is used to send
outputs to the ENIU and another exchange is used to send inputs back to the controller. The ENIU supports
receiving outputs from redundant controllers. By sending the EGD exchange to a group address both
controllers can receive the inputs. Up to 1300 bytes of outputs can be sent to a set of ENIUs from a
controller. Each ENIU can send up to 1300 bytes of inputs to the controller.
A typical system might consist of a controller with five ENIUs. The controller sends 1300 bytes of outputs and
each ENIU sends 100 bytes of inputs to the controller. This typical system would have its I/O updates occur in
less than 25ms. Whenever the controller scan time is greater than 25ms, the update occurs at the scan rate
of the controller. This performance timing is a guideline, not a guarantee, and assumes that there is no other
traffic on the Ethernet link to the I/O. Performance data for other system configurations can be found in the
PACSystems RX3i Ethernet Network Interface Unit User’s Manual, GFK-2439.
16.16.4 Ethernet NIU COMMREQ Support

The Ethernet NIU supports COMMREQs that are sent to it by a C block application in a PACSystems RX3i
controller. This feature is not available with other types of controllers. Ladder code in the RX3i CPU interfaces
to the C block. The C block sends COMMREQ commands to the Ethernet NIU in an Ethernet Global Data
Exchange. The Ethernet NIU executes the COMMREQ and sends the results back to the RX3i using another
EGD exchange. The following COMMREQs can be sent in this way:
▪ Modbus Master – function codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 15, 16, 17

▪ Genius – enable/disable outputs, switch BSM, clear fault, clear all faults, assign monitor, read diagnostic
▪ PROFIBUS Master – COMMREQs 1, 2, 4, 5, 6
▪ Motion (DSM314/DSM324) – load parameters
▪ High-Speed Counter – Data command
▪ DeviceNet Master – COMMREQs 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9
▪ Analog Module – HART Protocol COMMREQs.
In addition, any COMMREQ supported by a module in the Ethernet NIU can be sent as a Generic COMMREQ,
with the exception of DeviceNet Master Send Extended Explicit Message. For more information, refer to the
PACSystems RX3i Ethernet Network Interface Unit User’s Manual, GFK-2439.
16.16.5 Specifications: NIU001 PLUS

Real Time Clock battery life Estimated 5 years. Battery must be replaced every 5 years on a regular
maintenance schedule.
Note: The module is shipped with a pull-tab on the battery. The pull-
tab should be removed before installing the module.
Power requirements +3.3Vdc: 0.52 Amps nominal
+5.0 Vdc: 0.95 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)
Floating-point Yes
Boolean execution speed, 0.072 ms per 1000 Boolean instructions

typical
Embedded communications RS-232, RS-485
Serial Protocols supported Modbus RTU Slave, SNP, Serial I/O, Modbus RTU Master by application “C”
block
Backplane Dual backplane bus support: RX3i PCI and 90-30-style serial
PCI compatibility System designed to be electrically compliant with PCI 2.2 standard

Ports RS-232 Serial Port
RS-485 Serial Port

External isolation recommended.
(For details, refer to RS-485 Port Isolator, IC690ACC903, GFK-1663.)
16.16.6 NIU001 PLUS vs. NIU001 Classic Comparison

Feature NIU001 Classic NIU001 PLUS
Processor Celeron 300 MHz Atom 510, 1.1 GHz
Real Time Clock Battery Not supported IC690ACC001
Memory Backup and Real Time IC698ACC701 Not supported

Clock Battery
Embedded communications RS-232, RS-485 RS-232, RS-485
Power requirements +3.3Vdc: 1.25 Amps nominal +3.3Vdc: 0.52 Amps nominal
+5.0 Vdc: 1.0 Amps nominal +5.0 Vdc: 0.95 Amps nominal
Performance Same as CPU310. For performance Note: The processor has been
data, refer to the PACSystems RX3i upgraded from a 300MHz Celeron
and RSTi-EP CPU Reference Manual, to a 1.1 GHz Atom processor.
GFK-2222. There have been many associated
changes to the performance
compared to the NIU001 Classic.
For performance data, refer to the

PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU
Reference Manual, GFK-2222R or
later.
Boolean execution speed, typical 0.181 ms per 1000 Boolean 0.072 ms per 1000 Boolean
instructions instructions
Battery and switch locations For details, refer to the PACSystems For details, refer to the
RX3i Ethernet Network Interface Unit PACSystems RX3i Ethernet Network
User’s Manual, GFK-2439. Interface Unit User’s Manual,
GFK-2439
16.16.7 Ports

The NIU PLUS has two independent, on-board serial ports, accessed by connectors on the front of the
module. These ports provide serial interfaces to external devices.
Port 1 (COM1) is a DCE port that allows a simple straight-through cable to connect with a standard AT-style
RS-232 port. It has a 9-pin, female, D-sub connector with a standard pin out.
Port 2 (COM2) is a DCE port that is RS-485 compatible. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female D-sub connector.
The Ethernet NIU does not have an Ethernet port. Ethernet communications are provided by one or more
Ethernet Transmitter Modules (described previously in this chapter) located in the I/O Station.
16.16.7.1 Protocols Supported

Protocol Port 1 Port 2
RTU (slave) Yes Yes
SNP Slave Yes Yes
Serial I/O94 Yes Yes
Firmware Upgrade ENIU in STOP/No I/O mode
Message Mode
Yes Yes
(C Runtime Library Functions: serial read, serial write, sscanf, sprintf)
16.16.7.2 Serial Port Baud Rates

Port 1 Port 2
Protocol
(RS-232) (RS-485)
Modbus RTU Slave protocol 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
Message 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
Firmware Upgrade via WinLoader 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
SNP Slave 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
Serial I/O 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2k, 38.4k, 57.6k, 115.2k
16.17 PROFIBUS Master Module: IC695PBM300

The RX3i PROFIBUS Master Module, IC695PBM300, allows the RX3i CPU to send and receive data on a
PROFIBUS-DP network.
94
Modbus Master is supported in application code in Serial I/O mode.

16.17.1 Features
The IC695PBM300 module provides the following features:
▪ supports up to 125 PROFIBUS-DP slaves

▪ supports up to 244 bytes of input data and 244 bytes of output data per
slave
▪ Supports up to 3,584 bytes of input data and 3,584 bytes of output data
total
▪ Supports all standard data rates
▪ Supports Sync and Freeze modes
▪ Supports DP-V1 Read, Write and Alarm messages
▪ PROFIBUS-compliant Module and Network Status LEDs
This module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane. Module supports

insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane which is under
For more information about this module, please refer to the PACSystems RX3i
PROFIBUS Module User’s Manual, GFK-2301.
Figure 404: IC695PBM300
16.17.2 PROFIBUS Master Module Controls and Indicators
16.17.2.1 Network Connector

The PROFIBUS Master module has a 9-pin sub-D connector for attaching the bus cable. For pin assignments,
segment length, cable type and termination requirements, refer to the RX3i PACSystems PROFIBUS Modules
User’s Manual, GFK-2301.
16.17.2.2 LEDs
The PROFIBUS Master module provides three PROFIBUS-compliant LEDs that indicate module and network
status.

▪ The green OK LED indicates the presence of power, and completion of backplane reset.
▪ The bicolor Network LED is steadily yellow when the module is holding the PROFIBUS token and able to
transmit PROFIBUS telegrams. It flashes yellow if the module is sharing the network with another
PROFIBUS master. The Network LED is red if a communications problem such as a connection timeout
exists with at least one slave on the network.
▪ The bi-color Mod Status LED indicates module status. When this LED is steadily green, the module is
configured and has established a connection with a least one device on the network. If it is flashing
green, the module may be waiting for a configuration or may have a firmware problem. If it is flashing
yellow, the module is in boot loader mode, downloading firmware, or has a non-recoverable error. The
rate of LED flashing provides additional status information as described in the RX3i PROFIBUS Modules
User’s Manual.
16.17.3 Specifications: PBM300

Backplane Current Consumption 440 mA at 3.3Vdc
Data rates Supports all standard data rates (9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 93.75 kbps,
187.5 kbps, 500 kbps, 1.5 Mbps, 3 Mbps, 6 Mbps and 12 Mbps)
Status Information Available Slave Status Bit Array Table

Network Diagnostic Counters
DP Master Diagnostic Counters
Firmware Module Revision
Slave Diagnostic Address

16.18 PROFIBUS Slave Module: IC695PBS301

The IC695PBS301 provides slave communications on a PROFIBUS DP
network. The slave module automatically exchanges data with a master
device. The slave module has no bus access rights. It can only acknowledge
received messages or transmit messages to a master upon request.
The PROFIBUS Slave module provides the following PROFIBUS

communications features:
▪ Ability to read up to 244 bytes of input data from the network, and
send up to 244 bytes of output data
▪ Support for all standard PROFIBUS data rates
▪ Support for DP-V1 Read, Write and Alarm messages
▪ PROFIBUS-compliant module and network status LEDs
This module must be located in an RX3i Universal Backplane. Module

supports insertion into and removal from an RX3i Universal Backplane
The PROFIBUS module receives its firmware upgrades indirectly from the
host controller CPU using the WinLoader software utility (if the host CPU
has a serial port) or using a Web-based tool (if the host CPU has no serial
port). Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade kit.23
Figure 405: IC695PBS301
16.18.1 PROFIBUS Slave Module Controls and Indicators
16.18.1.1 Network Connector

The PROFIBUS Slave module has a 9-pin sub-D connector for attaching the bus cable. For pin assignments,
segment length, cable type and termination requirements, refer to the RX3i PACSystems PROFIBUS Modules
User’s Manual, GFK-2301.
16.18.1.2 LEDs

The PROFIBUS Slave module provides three PROFIBUS-compliant LEDs that indicate module and network
status.
▪ The green PROFIBUS OK LED indicates the presence of power, and completion of backplane reset.
▪ The bicolor Network LED is yellow when the module is able to transmit PROFIBUS telegrams. It is red if a
critical communications problem has occurred.
▪ The bi-color Mod Status LED indicates module status. When this LED is steadily green, the module is
configured and has established a connection with the network master. If it is flashing green, the module
may be waiting for a configuration or may have a firmware problem. If it is flashing yellow, the module is
in boot loader mode, downloading firmware, or has a non-recoverable error. The rate of LED flashing
provides additional status information as described in the RX3i PROFIBUS Modules User’s Manual.
16.18.2 Specifications: PBS301

Backplane current 440mA at 3.3Vdc
consumption
Data rates Supports all standard data rates (9.6 kbps, 19.2 kbps, 93.75 kbps, 187.5 kbps,
500 kbps, 1.5 Mbps, 3 Mbps, 6 Mbps and 12 Mbps)
Status information Slave Status Word

available

16.19 PROFINET Controller Module: IC695PNC001

The PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Controller (PNC) module,

IC695PNC00195, connects a PACSystems RX3i controller to
a high-speed PROFINET local area network. It enables the
RX3i controller to communicate with IO-Devices on the
LAN. The PNC module provides all the functions, services,
and protocols required for certification as a PROFINET IO
Version 2.2 IO Controller, running at both 100 Mbps and
1 Gbps.
The PNC supports 10/100/1000 Mbps Copper,

100/1000 Mbps Multi-mode Fiber, and 100/1000 Mbps
Single-mode Fiber. The LAN can include media interfaces
of more than one type. PROFINET communications on the
LAN require 100 and 1000 Mbps link speed. 10 Mbps
cannot be used for PROFINET communications. However,
10 Mbps can be used for other types of Ethernet traffic
such as ping and telnet.
16.19.1 Features:
▪ Full programming and configuration services for the

PROFINET Controller, VersaMax PROFINET Scanner and
third-party IO-Devices using Proficy Machine Edition.
▪ Firmware upgrades using the WinLoader software
utility (if the host CPU has a serial port) or using a Web-
based tool (if the host CPU has no serial port).
Instructions are included with the firmware upgrade
kit.
▪ Support for star, ring, and daisy-chain/line network
topologies.
▪ Four switched Ethernet ports - two 8-conductor RJ-45
shielded twisted pair 10/100/1000 Mbps copper
interfaces and two Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP)
Figure 406: IC695PNC001 (-Bxxx version)
cages for user-supplied SFP devices.
▪ Internal clock synchronized with the RX3i CPU for
time-stamped diagnostics entries.
▪ Reset pushbutton to manually restart the module
without power cycling the system.
▪ LEDs: OK, LAN, STATUS, CONFIG, ACTIVE, and four
banks of Port LEDs.
▪ Compliant with EU RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC using
the following exemptions identified in the Annex: 7c-I
and & 7c-III.
For installation instructions and operating details, refer to the following manuals:

PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Controller Manual, GFK-2571
PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Controller Command Line Interface Manual, GFK-2572
PACSystems HSB Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Manual, GFK-2308.
16.19.2 Specifications: PNC001
PROFINET Support PROFINET Version 2.2 General Class A IO-Controller

Redundantly controlled operation conforms to PROFINET V2.3 Type S-2
System Redundancy.
Note that the CPE100 / CPE115 is a simplex PROFINET IO-Controller.
CPU Compatibility Requires CPU315, CPU320, CPE302/CPE305, CPE310 or CPE330 with
firmware version 7.0 or higher.
Simplex or redundantly-controlled PROFINET I/O requires CRU320 release
8.00 or higher.
For the current status of CPE330 features, refer to PACSystems RX3i and
RSTi-EP CPU Reference Manual, (GFK-2222Z or later).
Note that CPE400, CPL410 and CPE100/CPE115 feature an embedded
PROFINET IO-Controller; these are standalone CPUs that do not support
IC695PNC001.
Power Requirements96 , Rev. –Ax: Rev. –Bxxx:
with no SFP devices installed 3.3Vdc: 0.5A 3.3Vdc: 0.5A
with two SFP devices installed, 0.35A per SFP 3.3Vdc: 1.2A maximum 3.3Vdc: 1.2A maximum
5 Vdc: 1.5A maximum 5 Vdc: 0.75A maximum
Operating Temperature Range96 Rev. -Axxx: Rev. -Bxxx:

0°C to 60°C -25°C to 60°C
Note: See GFK-2571K, Section 1.4 for de-rating conditions
Number of PROFINET Port Connectors96 PNC001 –2 RJ45 and 2 SFP Cages located on the underside of module
(SFP devices not included, available separately).
Embedded PROFINET IO-Controller – 2 RJ45.
Front Panel Connectors96 PNC001-Ax: One micro USB for communication with a computer using
Command Line Interface.
PNC001-Bxxx: One RJ45. Disabled.
Command Line Interface Supported PNC001-Ax – Yes. PNC001-Bxxx: No.
Embedded PROFINET IO-Controller – No.
LAN96 IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control Class I
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD Medium Access Control 10/100/1000 Mbps
96
For CPE400, CPL410, CPE330 and CPE100/CPE115, refer to the equivalent product specifications in the PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP
CPU Reference Manual, (GFK-2222AE or later).

Maximum I/O Memory 128 Kbytes of combined input/output memory per PROFINET Controller
Note: RSTi-EP CPE100CPE115 support a maximum of 8 IO Devices. The
combined input and output memory is equivalent to the input
/output memory requirements of those 8 devices.
Hot-swappable PNC001 – Yes;
Embedded PROFINET IO-Controller – No.
CPU Status Bits 32
PROFINET IO-Device Data Update Rates on Configurable: 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms, 64ms, 128ms, 256ms
the PROFINET Network and 512ms
Note: For CPE100/CPE115, Update Rates below 16ms are not
recommended.
Number of IP Addresses One
Number of MAC Addresses PNC001 – 5. One per external PROFINET port and one internal.
Embedded PROFINET IO-Controller – 1.

System Maximum Limits

PROFINET Controllers per RX3i CPU Four PNC001 maximum. Must be located in main CPU rack. Cannot be
located in a remote node.
CPE330 supports one embedded PROFINET Controller plus up to four
PNC001.
CPE400, CPL410 & CPE100/CPE115 support one embedded PROFINET
Controller. Since these are standalone CPUs they do not support any
PNC001 in their hardware configuration.
IO-Devices per IO-Controller 128 max per PNC001 at maximum update interval.
32 max (simplex) or 20 max (Hot Standby Redundancy) per embedded
PROFINET Controller at maximum update interval.
8 max per RSTi-EP CPE100/CPE115 embedded PROFINET Controller.
For limits at shorter update intervals, refer to PROFINET Controller Loading
Limits in GFK-2571K, Chapter 3.
Max MRP Clients when configured as MRP PNC001 – 63
Manager Embedded PROFINET Controller - 31
Embedded PROFINET Controller CPE100/CPE11597 - 8
IO-Devices per Network Maximum of 255 simplex or 255 redundant I/O Devices per network,
spread across a maximum of 8 I/O Controllers.
The actual total number of devices supported per network depends on
the topology. For details, refer to GFK-2571K
IO-Devices per RX3i CPU Maximum of 255 simplex or 255 redundant I/O Devices per RX3i CPU,
spread across up to four PROFINET Controllers.98
IO-Devices per RSTi-EP CPU Maximum of 8 simplex I/O Devices for CPE100/CPE115.
IO-Controllers per Network Eight maximum
Input and output memory per IO-Controller Maximum of 128 Kbytes combined input and output memory
Note: RSTi-EP CPE100/CPE115 support maximum 8 IO Devices so the
combined input and output memory is equivalent to maximum input
/output memory supported by 8 devices.
Number of PROFINET Slots per device 256
Number of PROFINET Subslots per slot 256
Number of PROFINET Submodules per RX3i 2048
CPU
Programmer Limits
Number of IO-Controllers 128 (32 RX3i CPU targets × 4 IO-Controllers per RX3i CPU)
Number of IO-Devices 2048 (128 per network × 16 PROFINET networks)
Total number of devices 2176 (does not include backplanes, power supplies, or I/O modules)
97
Effective with firmware v9.30, CPE100/CPE115 support MRP.
98
In the case of CPE330, with embedded PROFINET activated, it is possible to have five PROFINET Controllers.

16.20 PROFINET Scanner Module:

IC695PNS001/IC695PNS101
The PACSystems* RX3i PROFINET Scanner (PNS) module, IC695PNS00199,
connects a remote universal RX3i I/O rack of Series 90-30 or RX3i modules to a
PROFINET I/O Controller. The PROFINET Scanner scans the modules in its rack,
retrieving input data and providing output data, and exchanges that data on
the PROFINET I/O LAN at the configured production rate.
The PNS manages PROFINET communication and module configuration

between an I/O Controller and modules in the remote rack. If network
communications are lost, the PNS manages I/O states according to the
individual module configurations.
The PNS supports 10/100/1000 Mbps Copper, 100/1000 Mbps Multi-mode

Fiber, and 100/1000 Mbps Single-mode Fiber. PROFINET communications on
the network require 100 or 1000 Mbps link speed. Although 10 Mbps cannot
be used for PROFINET communications, 10 Mbps can be used for other types
of Ethernet traffic such as PING.
IC695PNS101 provides all the features of IC695PNS001-Bxxx, but has been

optimized for the Sequence of Events application. Refer to the PACSystems
RX3i Sequence of Events User Manual, GFK-3050.
16.20.1 Features
▪ Programming and configuration services for all supported Series 90-30

and RX3i I/O Modules using Proficy Machine Edition. Refer to table below
for compatibility details.
▪ Support for daisy-chain/line, star, or ring (PROFINET Media Redundancy
Protocol (MRP)) topologies.
▪ Four switched Ethernet ports - two 8-conductor RJ-45 shielded twisted
pair 10/100/1000 Mbps copper interfaces and two Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) cages for user-supplied SFP devices.
Figure 407: IC695PNS001-
Bxxx
▪ The network can include media interfaces of more than one type.
▪ Support for transfer of I/O Device Name to another PNS module using an
SD card. This eliminates the need to connect a configuration tool, such as
Proficy Machine Edition when replacing a module.
16.20.2 Front Panel Port

The front-panel port is used for installing new firmware for the PNS001 module itself, and also for
downstream modules which support indirect firmware upgrades. PNS001 revision –Bxxx is equipped with an
RJ45 Ethernet port and supports secure firmware upgrade via a web browser. PNS001 revision -Axxx is
equipped with a USB port and supports firmware upgrade using the WinLoader tool.23
For additional information, please refer to PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner Manual, GFK-2737.
16.20.3 LED Indications: PNS001
16.20.3.1 OK LED
The OK LED indicates whether the module is able to perform normal operation.
Green, on OK
Off Not OK
16.20.3.2 LAN LED

The LAN LED indicates access to and activity on the Ethernet network. The LAN LED indicates network
packets are being processed by the network interface (not just passing through the embedded switch).
Blinking on The network interface in the module is active

Off No activity
16.20.3.3 STATUS LED

The STATUS stays Green during normal operation.
Green, on Normal Operation

A MAC address read from nonvolatile memory is invalid. Ports with invalid
Red, blinking
MAC addresses remain disconnected from the Ethernet network.
16.20.3.4 CONN LED

The CONN LED indicates the status of PROFINET connections.
Green, on At least one PROFINET connection (AR) exists with an I/O Controller.
Amber, blinking No device name configured.
Off No PROFINET connection (AR) exists.
16.20.3.5 ACTIVE LED

The active LED indicates the Scanner is connected to a PROFINET I/O Controller that is controlling the I/O
data for the PNS’s I/O modules.
99
Refer to GFK-2737G or later to understand the differences between the -Axxx and -Bxxx versions of PNS001.

PNS is connected to a PROFINET I/O Controller that is controlling I/O

Green, on
Module IO data.
Off PNS is not connected to a PROFINET I/O Controller.
Refer to the PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner Manual, GFK-2737 for LED indications at power-up.

16.20.3.6 Port LEDs

The PROFINET Scanner Port LEDs differ between -Bxxx and -Axxx versions. Refer to the PACSystems RX3i
PROFINET Scanner Manual, GFK-2737G or later, to understand the differences.
Revision Axxx:
Blue, on Link connected, 1000 Mbps

Blue, blinking Port active, 1000 Mbps
Green, on Link connected, 100 Mbps
Green, blinking Port active, 100 Mbps
Purple, on Link connected, 10 Mbps
Purple, blinking Port active, 10 Mbps
Off The associated Ethernet port is not connected to an active link
Red, on Port 3 and port 4 only. Incompatible SFP plugged into port.
Revision Bxxx:
Port Number LED (Digit representing Port Number is backlit by an LED)
Red, on Port 3 and 4 only: Error such as incompatible SFP.
Off No Port error.
1000 Speed LED
Green on Link connected, 1000 Mbps
Green blinking Port active, 1000 Mbps
Off The associated Ethernet port is not connected to an active link at 1000Mbps
100 Speed LED
Green, on Link connected, 100 Mbps.
10 Speed LED

Green, on Link connected, 10 Mbps.
16.20.3.7 USB LED

The USB LED indicates activity on the USB port (-Axxx only).
Green, on A USB cable is connected.

Green, blinking USB port activity
Off No USB port activity
16.20.4 Specifications: PNS001

PROFINET Support PROFINET Version 2.3 Class A IO-Device
Redundantly controlled operation conforms to PROFINET V2.3 Type S-2 System Redundancy.
Controller CPU RX3i CPU315/CPU320 with firmware version 7.10 or later RX3i CPE302/CPE305/CPE310 with
Version Required firmware version 7.10 or later RXi Controller with firmware version 7.80 or later
Proficy Machine Version 8.5 SIM2 or later

Edition Version
Required
Power Requirements Rev. –Bxxx or later: Rev. –Axxx:
3.3Vdc: 0.6A with no SFP devices installed, 3.3 Vdc: 1.2A with no SFP devices installed,
1.3A maximum 1.9A maximum
(two SFP devices installed, 0.35 A per SFP) (two SFP devices installed, 0.35A per SFP)
Rev. –Bxxx or later: Rev. –Axxx:
5 Vdc: 0.7 A maximum 5 Vdc: 1.1A maximum
Operating Rev. -Bxxx or later: Rev. -Axxx:

Temperature Range
-25°C to 60°C de-rated to 57°C: 0°C to 60°C de-rated to 57°C:
• If 100 Mbps Fiber SFPs installed, or • If 100 Mbps Fiber SFPs installed, or
• If Copper SFPs operating at 1 Gbps • If Copper SFPs operating at 1 Gbps
Number of PROFINET Two RJ45 and Two SFP Cages

Ports (SFP devices not included, available separately.)

Front Ethernet Port Rev. –Bxxx or later: Rev. – Axxx:
(for firmware One RJ45 supporting 10/100/1000Mbps One Micro-USB connector. USB 2.0 compliant
upgrades) Ethernet for firmware upgrades. running at full-speed (12 MHz)
SD Card Supports SD and SDHC cards.
PNS Status and 32 input status bits and 32 output control bits
Control Bits
PROFINET I/O Configurable selections: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 or 512 ms
production rate (ms)
(I/O Update Rate)
Number of MAC Rev. -Bxxx or later: 6 Rev. -Axxx: 5

Addresses
One per external port (including additional One per external port and one internal.
front panel port) and one internal for switched
ports.
I/O Station Maximum Number of Number of backplane slots in the host RX3i rack
Limits I/O Modules less one for PNS001 module itself
per station less the number of slots occupied by the RX3i
power supply
I/O data 2880 bytes total

per station 1440 bytes of input data
1440 bytes of output data
Configuration V2.3 GSDML file.

The file is included with Proficy Machine Edition; available for import into 3rd-Party tools.
Note: Configuration software that supports GSDML V2.3 MenuList elements

(such as Proficy Machine Edition 8.0 or later) is required to display the configuration
parameters of most IC695xxx I/O modules.
At the time of publication, the following CPU firmware, programming software and backplane hardware
versions are required. Refer to the PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner Manual, GFK-2737, for updated
information.
16.20.5 Compatibility: PNS001

Controller CPU firmware CPE400, CPL410 with LAN2 configured as embedded PROFINET Controller.
CPU330 firmware version 8.45 or later
CPU315/CPU320 firmware version 7.10 or later

CPE302/CPE305/CPE310 firmware version 7.10 or later
RXi Controller firmware version 7.80 or later
CRU320 Primary Firmware version 8.00
Programmer software Proficy Machine Edition version 8.50 SIM 2 or later
RX3i PROFINET Controller IC695PNC001 with firmware version 1.20 or later (Simplex I/O)
IC695PNC001 with firmware version 2.00 or later (Redundant I/O)
RX3i backplane hardware The following minimum backplane hardware revision must be used:
IC695CHS012-BAMP
IC695CHS016-BAMP
IC695CHS012CA-BAMP
IC695CHS016CA-BAMP
or
IC695CHS012-CA (or later)

IC695CHS012CA-CA (or later)
or
IC695CHS007-AA (or later)
When installing, operating, or maintaining the IC695PNS001, personnel

must insure any electrostatic charge is discharged through the use of a
grounded ESD strap or other means. This requirement does not apply if the
IC695PNS001 is used with the following backplane revisions:
IC695CHS012-EA (or later)

IC695CHS012EA-CA (or later)
or
IC695CHS007-BA (or later)
IC695SPC100A or later RX3i 10/100/1000Base-T copper SFP

Small form-factor RX3i 100Base-FX (fiber 2 km) SFP

IC695SPF002A or later
pluggable modules (Multi-mode fiber - MMF)
IC695SPF550A or later RX3i 1000Base-SX (fiber 550 m) SFP (MMF)
RX3i 1000Base-LX (fiber 10 km) SFP

(Single-mode fiber - SMF)
RX3i modules For a complete list, refer to PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner Manual, GFK-
2737.
16.20.6 Compatibility: PNS101

Controller CPU firmware CPE400, CPL410 with LAN2 configured as embedded PROFINET Controller.
CPU330 firmware version 9.55 or later
CPU315/CPU320 firmware version 7.10 or later

CPE302/CPE305/CPE310 firmware version 7.10 or later
RXi Controller firmware version 7.80 or later
CRU320 Primary Firmware version 8.00
Programmer software Proficy Machine Edition version 9.50 SIM 8 or later
RX3i PROFINET Controller IC695PNC001 with firmware version 1.20 or later (Simplex I/O)
IC695PNC001 with firmware version 2.00 or later (Redundant I/O)

RX3i backplane hardware The following minimum backplane hardware revision must be used:
IC695CHS012-BAMP
IC695CHS016-BAMP
IC695CHS012CA-BAMP
IC695CHS016CA-BAMP
or

or
IC695CHS007-AA (or later)
When installing, operating, or maintaining the IC695PNS101, personnel

must insure any electrostatic charge is discharged through the use of a
grounded ESD strap or other means. This requirement does not apply if the
IC695PNS101 is used with the following backplane revisions:

or
IC695CHS007-BA (or later)
Small form-factor IC695SPC100A or later RX3i 10/100/1000Base-T copper SFP

pluggable modules
RX3i 100Base-FX (fiber 2 km) SFP
(Multi-mode fiber - MMF)
IC695SPF550A or later RX3i 1000Base-SX (fiber 550 m) SFP (MMF)
RX3i 1000Base-LX (fiber 10 km) SFP

(Single-mode fiber - SMF)
RX3i modules For a complete list, refer to PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner Manual, GFK-
2737.

16.21 RX3i CEP Carrier: IC695CEP001

RX3i CEP Expansion Carrier: IC694CEE001
The PACSystems RX3i Carrier IC695CEP001
interfaces a remote node, consisting of one RX3i
I/O module, to a PROFINET I/O Local Area
Network (LAN).
The optional RX3i Expansion Carrier

IC694CEE001 attaches to the RX3i CEP001
Carrier and provides the ability to add one
additional RX3i IC694 I/O module to the remote
node.
The RX3i CEP001 Carrier functions as a

PROFINET IO-Device. The RX3i CEP001
Carrier’s main Remote I/O functions include:
 Scanning all the modules within the remote

node (input and output scan)
 Publishing data on the PROFINET network to a
PROFINET IO-Controller at a user-specified
production period
 Receiving data from a PROFINET IO-Controller
Figure 408: IC695CEP001 with IC694CEE001 on the PROFINET network at a customer-
Attached specified production period
 Managing PROFINET communication and
module configuration between a PROFINET
IO-Controller and modules within the remote
node
 Managing the state of the I/O when
communications is lost
 Publishing fault information (alarms,
diagnostics, and such) to the PROFINET IO-
Controller
 Provides power to the CEE001 Expansion Carrier
The insertion and removal of I/O modules is the same as in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
Refer to Section 2.6.4.

The RX3i CEP001 Carrier provides two RJ-45 Ethernet receptacles. It supports
10/100BASE-TX Ethernet standard interface.
16.21.1 Features

Full programming and configuration services for all supported RX3i I/O Modules using
Proficy Machine Edition. Refer to the section, Supported I/O Modules.
 Support daisy-chain/line, star, or ring (redundant media) network topologies.
 Two switched Ethernet ports: two eight-conductor RJ-45 shielded-twisted pair 10/100 Mbps
copper interfaces.
 USB port for field updates of firmware using WinLoader.
 Supports Hot-standby CPU Redundancy using PROFINET I/O: requires RX3i CEP001
2.01 GSDML version 2.3 or later.
 Supports HART® Pass Through using PROFINET.
Note: The USB port is for firmware upgrades only. It is not intended for permanent
connection.
Note: The CEP001 Carrier requires a user-supplied +24 Vdc power source.
16.21.2 Normal Operation of Individual LEDs: CEP001 & CEE001
16.21.2.1 Power LEDs

The RX3i CEP001 Carrier has two Power LEDs, PWR1 and PWR2 that indicate whether the
power is applied and is within range corresponding to the two power sources.
Green, ON Power is applied at the minimum specified level

OFF The power supply does not have power or has failed.
16.21.2.2 OK LED
The OK LED indicates whether the CEP001 Carrier is able to perform normal operation.
Green, ON RX3i CEP001 is OK

Amber, ON Either the RX3i CEP001 Carrier or IO module has a fault
Amber, blink pattern Fatal error. Flashes once between error codes.
Fast blinking CEP001 has no valid MAC addresses
OFF CEP001 has an unrecoverable fault
16.21.2.3 Connect LED

The CONN LED indicates the status of PROFINET connections.
Green, ON At least one PROFINET connection (AR) exists with an IO-Controller

Amber, blink pattern Fatal error. Flashes once between error codes blinked on the OK LED
®
HART® is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation of Austin, Texas USA. Any use of the term HART hereafter in
this document, or any document referenced by this document, implies the registered trademark.

Amber, blink in 1Hz No device name configured

OFF No PROFINET connection (AR) exists
16.21.2.4 Port LEDs

The RX3i CEP001 has two Port LEDs, PRT1 and PRT2 that indicate link speed, link
connection and link activity corresponding to the two external Ethernet ports.
Green, ON Link connected, 100 Mbps

Amber, ON Link connected, 10 Mbps
Amber, blinking Port active, 10 Mbps
Amber, blink pattern Fatal error. Flashes once between error codes blinked on the OK LED
OFF The associated Ethernet port is not connected to an active link (can be
disabled by configuration)
Note: Multiple LEDs can blink in patterns that indicate special conditions, such as a request
for module identification. Refer to PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner
IC695CEP001 User Manual, GFK-2883.
16.21.2.5 Power LED (IC694CEE001)

The RX3i Expansion Carrier CEE001 has one PWR LED to indicate whether the power
provided by the RX3i CEP001 Carrier is within range.
Green, ON OK
Amber, ON Power 24Vdc and/or 5Vdc is not in specified range
OFF No power
16.21.3 Ordering Information
IC695CEP001 RX3i CEP001 Carrier with RJ-45 Copper Ethernet Interface

IC694CEE001 RX3i CEE001 Expansion Carrier
16.21.4 Specifications
PROFINET support PROFINET Version 2.3 Class A IO-Device
IC695CPU315/CPU320/CPE302/CPE305/CPE310/CPE330/CRU320, firmware
RX3i Controller version
v8.50 or later
required
IC69PNC001 PROFINET IO-controller with firmware version 2.20 or later
RXi Controller version RXi Controller, ICRXICTL000, with firmware version 7.80 or later is compatible
required with CEP001 up to version 2.01, but is not compatible with CEP001 version 2.30.
Proficy Machine Edition
Version 8.6 with SIM 3 or later
version required

IC695CEP001: 5.25W (0.22 A) at 24 Vdc

Power requirements100 with or without Expansion Carrier (IC694CEE001)
DC power supply input range: 19.2 to 30 Vdc
Module dimensions 177.2 x 51 x 35 mm (6.98” x 2.01” x 1.38”). Same for CEP001 and CEE001.
Operating temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F) maximum surrounding air temperature
Number of Ethernet IC695CEP001: Two RJ-45 10/100Base-TX receptacles
port connectors IC694CEE001: None
IC695CEP001: One Micro-B connector. USB 2.0 compliant running at full-speed
USB connector (for
(12 MHz) in device mode
firmware upgrades)
IC694CEE001: None
PNS status and control
32 input status bits and 32 output control bits
bits
I/O data update on the Configurable: 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms, 64ms, 128ms, 256ms and
PROFINET LAN 512ms
Number of IP addresses One; supports Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR)
Number of MAC Three; one per external port and one internal. External MAC addresses are only
addresses used for specialized Ethernet protocols such as MRP or LLDP.
IC695CEP001: One
Number of I/O modules per station
IC695CEP001 with IC694CEE001: Two
I/O station maximum
1024 bytes total
limits
I/O data per station 512 bytes of input data
512 bytes of output data
Configured using Proficy Machine Edition when used with a
PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Controller module as part of an RX3i
Configuration
High-speed I/O LAN system.
V2.3 GSDML file available for import into 3rd-Party tools.
16.21.5 Quick Start: CEP001 & CEE001
16.21.5.1 Carrier Installation Requirements
100
Value does not include the power consumption of the installed I/O modules. When calculating the total power requirements, add the
power consumption of the I/O modules according to the I/O module datasheet.

The CEP001 Carrier and optional

Expansion Carrier CEE001 can be mounted
on a DIN-rail or on a panel.
Adequate installation space is required for:
1. Clearance for communications port

cables.
2. Power wiring.
3. Operating the DIN latch.
The RX3i CEP001 Carrier with an I/O

module attached requires an enclosure with
minimum depth of 165 mm.
Rated thermal specifications are based on a

clearance of 5.1 cm (2”) above and below Figure 409: Mounting Diagram CEP001 & CEE001
the equipment and 2.54 cm (1”) to the left of
the RX3i CEP001 Carrier.
16.21.5.2 Connecting the CEE001 Expansion Carrier to the CEP001

Carrier
Figure 410: Attaching CEE001 to CEP001
1. Open the connector cap on the RX3i CEP001 Carrier.

2. Slide and install the RX3i CEE001 Expansion Carrier along the guide slots on the RX3i
CEP001 Carrier.
3. When the Expansion Carrier is aligned with the CEP001 Carrier, engage the expansion
connectors.
4. Close the connector cap.

5. Secure the Expansion Carrier to the DIN rail or panel. Refer to Installing an RX3i CEP001
Carrier on a DIN-rail or Panel Mounting.
6. Connect the grounding hole on the CEE001 to the panel or enclosure as described in Grounding below.

16.21.5.3 Installing an RX3i CEP001 Carrier on a DIN-rail

The carrier mounts on a standard EN 50022,
35 x 7.5 mm DIN-rail. Conductive (unpainted) finish
is required for proper grounding.
For best resistance to vibration, the DIN-rail should

be installed horizontally on a panel using screws
spaced approximately 15 cm (6”) apart.
Figure 411: DIN Rail Mounting Sequence
1. With a small flathead screwdriver, pull out the two DIN-rail latches and stand the carrier on
the DIN-rail.
2. Push in the two DIN-rail latches so that the latches hold the DIN-rail.
16.21.5.4 Panel Mounting

For applications requiring maximum or long-term resistance to mechanical vibration and shock,
the panel-mounting method is strongly recommended. A minimum panel thickness of 2.4 mm
(.093”) is required. The mounting diagram (Figure 412 below) applies to both the CEP001
Carrier and CEE001 Expansion Carrier.
Note 1: Tolerances on all dimensions are ±0.2 mm (0.078”) non-cumulative.
Note 2: Apply 1.1 to1.4 Nm (10 to12 in/lbs) of torque to M3.5 (#6-32) steel screws
threaded into tapped holes in the panel.

Figure 412: Panel Mounting Diagram: CEP001 or CEE001
16.21.5.5 Grounding
WARNING
All CEP001 Carriers in a system must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard.
Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury.
The RX3i CEP001 Carrier and CEE001 Expansion Carrier each provide two grounding connection contacts:
 Grounding clips at the back of the carrier, which require DIN-rail installation
 Grounding screw hole at bottom-left of the carrier
Note: When the Carrier is mounted on a DIN-rail, the grounding clips on the back of the Carrier do not
provide an adequate ground connection. The Carrier’s metal back must also be grounded using a separate
conductor.
Ground each Carrier to the panel or enclosure using a minimum AWG #12 (3.3 mm2) wire with ring
terminals. Use an M3 screw, star lock washer and a flat washer to connect the wire at the Carrier’s grounding
hole. Connect the other end of the ground wire to a tapped hole in the grounded mounting panel or
enclosure, using a machine screw, star lock washer and flat washer. Alternately, if the panel has a ground
stud, use a nut and star lock washer for each wire on the ground stud to ensure adequate grounding. Where
connections are made to a painted panel, the paint should be removed so clean, bare metal is exposed at the
connection point. Terminals and hardware used should be rated to work with the aluminum carrier material.

Note: The star lock washer method is suitable for a shield ground, but not suitable for a safety ground.
AWG #12 (3.3mm2)or

larger wire
Screw, star lock washer,

flat washer, ring terminal,
installed in tapped hole.
Paint removed
from panel here
Figure 413: Ground Connection Diagram

16.21.5.6 Installing Modules on the Carrier

The insertion and removal of I/O modules is the same as in an RX3i Universal Backplane.
Refer to Section 2.6.4.
CAUTION
Do not install a Power Supply module on the CEP001 or CEE001 Carrier. Attempting to do
so could damage the module and/or the Carrier.
16.21.5.7 Unsupported Modules

When an unsupported I/O module is inserted into either the RX3i CEP001 Carrier or RX3i
CEE001 Expansion Carrier, no alarm is reported to indicate this.
For the latest updated list of supported I/O modules, refer to the section, Supported I/O
Modules.
Some unsupported I/O modules have the same Distinguishing Class (for example,
IC694MDL740 has the same Distinguishing Class as IC694MDL742).
CAUTION
If an unsupported module is inserted in the CEP001 or CEE001 Carrier, the module will not
be recognized correctly and could cause damage to the Carrier or the module.
16.21.5.8 Connecting Power Supplies

You will need:
Note: Two power supplies are required if using redundant power supplies.
 One 24 Vdc power supply which provides a low voltage/limited current (LVLC) power
source. (For example, the combination of an isolated DC supply and a fuse, listed 30 Vdc
minimum and 3 A maximum, connected in series with the input.)
 Power cord with 28 to16 AWG / 0.08 to1.32 mm2 wires
 Ferrules for 28 to16 AWG wires (optional)
 Frame ground wire, 28 to16 AWG
 Input power terminal block; provided (WAGO Part Number 713-1103)
 Small flathead screwdriver (jeweler’s size 14)

Note: For CE Mark purposes, input power lines to the CEP001 Carrier should be limited 30 m
(98 ft) or less.
Note: Before inserting the wires into the power connector terminal block, use a small
flathead screwdriver to release the spring clamp on the terminal block.
1. Using the power cord, attach the power supply to the power terminal
block as diagrammed in Figure 414.
Recommended wire stripping length is 6 to7 mm (0.25”).
2. If using redundant power supplies, connect the second power

supply to the input power terminal block.
3. Insert the input power terminal block into the Input Power connector.
Note: There are no user-serviceable fuses in the CEP001 Carrier. Figure 414: Power
Terminal Block CEP001
Connecting Power to RX3i CEP001 Carrier
Figure 415: CEP001 Power Terminal Wiring
16.21.5.9 Adding a Redundant Power Supply

 To add a redundant power supply to a system that is already in operation
1. Remove power from the primary power supply to the RX3i CEP001 carrier
2. Remove the power terminal block from the carrier.

3. Without disturbing the primary power supply input lines, connect the redundant power
supply input lines to the power terminal block.
4. Insert the power terminal block into the Input Power connector.
5. Apply power to the redundant power supply. The PWR2 LED on the RX3i CEP001
carrier should turn on.
6. Apply power to the primary power supply. The PWR1 LED on the CEP001 Carrier
should turn on.
Note: For the procedure to swap a redundant power supply, refer to PACSystems RX3i
PROFINET Scanner IC695CEP001 User Manual, GFK-2883.

16.21.5.10 Connecting the CEP001 to the PROFINET Network

The two external RJ-45 Ethernet ports, which provide 10/100 Mbps copper interfaces, are on
the bottom of the CEP001 Carrier.
Figure 416: Locations of Ethernet Ports CEP001
Devices connected to the RX3i CEP001 ports should have Ethernet Auto-negotiation enabled.
The RX3i CEP001 Carriers and other participating devices can be connected in a
daisy-chain/line, or star topology.
CAUTION
Do not connect both ports on the Ethernet interface, directly or indirectly, to the same
device so as to form a circular network unless Media Redundancy is enabled with one
node actively set up as the Media Redundancy Manager.
Supported Network Media Types and Distances

PROFINET I/O over-wired infrastructure must be 100Mbps full-duplex or faster. The hardware
is capable of operating at 10Mbps but should not be used for PROFINET.
Core Modal
Connector Wavelength Maximum
Media Type Media Type Size Bandwidth
Type (nm) Distance
(μm) (MHz – km)
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45 - CAT5/CAT5e/CAT6 - - 100 m (328 ft)
16.21.5.11 Assigning an I/O Device Name to the CEP001

Before attempting to connect to or configure the CEP001, the I/O Device Name must be set with a Discovery
and Configuration Protocol (DCP) tool.
16.21.5.12 Configuring the CEP001/CEE001 Node and Resident I/O

Modules on a PROFINET Network
Proficy Machine Edition is the primary tool used to configure an RX3i PROFINET network. The GSDML file for
the RX3i CEP001 is included with Proficy Machine Edition, or may be downloaded from the support website
at www.geautomation.com/support. To obtain the GSDML for import into a 3rd-Party tool, contact GE.
16.21.6 Supported I/O Modules

The following table indicates the minimum CEP001 firmware version required for compatibility with the
listed I/O modules and whether the module can be installed in the RX3i Expansion Carrier CEE001.
Earliest
Distin-
CEP001 CEE001102
Catalog Number Module Description guishing
Compatible Compatible
Classes101
Version
Discrete Input Modules
IC693MDL230 8 Circuit Input 120 Vac Isolated 8 in 2.30 Y
IC693MDL240 16 Circuit Input 120 Vac 16 in 2.30 Y
IC693MDL241 16 Circuit Input 24 Vac / Vdc 16 in 2.50 Y
IC693MDL260 32 Circuit Input 120 Vac, Input Filtering Off 32 in 2.50 Y
32 in
IC693MDL260 32 Circuit Input 120 Vac, Input Filtering On 2.50 Y
/32 out
IC693MDL632 8 Circuit Input 125 Vdc Positive / Negative Logic 8 in 2.30 Y
IC693MDL648 16 Circuit Input 48 Vdc Positive / Negative Logic Fast 16 in 2.30 Y
IC693MDL654 32 Circuit Input 5/12 Vdc Positive / Negative Logic 32 in 2.50 Y
32 Circuit Input 24 Vdc Positive / Negative Logic,
IC693MDL660 32 in 2.30 Y
Input Filtering Off
32 Circuit Input 24 Vdc Positive / Negative Logic,
IC693MDL660 32 in 2.30 Y
Input Filtering On
IC694MDL240 16 Circuit Input 120 Vac 16 in 2.30 Y
IC694MDL241 16 Circuit Input 24 Vac / Vdc 16 in 2.50 Y
101
The RX3i CEP Carrier and the RX3i CEP Expansion Carrier currently does not support fault reporting or “Interrupts” from this module.
102
The RX3i CEP Carrier and the RX3i CEP Expansion Carrier cannot distinguish between modules within the same Distinguishing Class
type. This means that any module physically present that is within the same class as the one configured will not alert the user with a
System Configuration Mismatch fault on the Controller Fault Table. Refer to GFK-2222 Chapter 3 for CPU operation during System
Configuration Mismatch faults.

Earliest
Distin-
CEP001 CEE001102
Classes101
Version
IC694MDL250 16 Circuit Input 120 Vac Isolated None 1.00 Y
IC694MDL260 32 Circuit Input 120 Vac None 2.50 Y
IC694MDL648 48 Vdc Input Pos/Neg Fast (16 Points) 16 in 2.30 Y
IC694MDL654 32 Circuit Input 5/12 Vdc Positive / Negative Logic 32 in 2.50 Y
IC695MDL664 16 Circuit Input with diagnostic None 1.00 N
Discrete Output Modules
IC693MDL310 12 Circuit Output 120 Vac 0.5A 16 out 2.50 Y
IC693MDL330 8 Circuit Output 120/240 Vac 2A 8 out 2.40 Y
IC693MDL350 16 Circuit Output 120/240 Vac Isolated 16 out 2.50 Y
IC693MDL390 5 Circuit Output 120/240 Vac 2A Isolated None 2.30 Y
IC693MDL732 8 Circuit Output 12/24 Vdc 0.5A Positive 8 out 2.50 Y
IC693MDL734 6 Circuit Output 125 Vdc 1A Positive/Negative 8 out 2.50 Y
IC693MDL741 16 Circuit Output 12/24 Vdc 0.5A Negative 16 out 2.50 Y
IC693MDL754 32 Circuit Output 24 Vdc 0.75A Positive, Diagnostics Off 32 out 2.30 Y
32 in
IC693MDL754 32 Circuit Output 24 Vdc 0.75A Positive, Diagnostics On 2.30 Y
/32 out
IC693MDL930 8 Circuit Output 4A Relay Isolated 8 out 2.30 Y
IC693MDL931 8 Circuit Output Relay Form BC Isolated 8 out 2.50 Y
IC693MDL940 16 Circuit Output 2A Relay 16 out 2.30 Y
IC694MDL330 120/240 Vac Output 2A (8 Points) 8 out 2.40 Y
IC694MDL350 16 Circuit Output 120/240 Vac Isolated None 2.50 Y
IC694MDL390 5 Circuit Output 120/240 Vac 2A Isolated None 2.30 Y
IC693MDL732 8 Circuit Output 12/24 Vdc 2A Positive 8 out 2.50 Y
IC693MDL734 6 Circuit Output 125 Vdc 1A Positive/Negative 8 out 2.50 Y
IC694MDL741 16 Circuit Output 12/24 Vdc 1A Negative 16 out 2.50 Y
IC694MDL742 16 Circuit Output 12/24 Vdc 1A Positive 16 out 1.00 Y
IC694MDL754 32 Circuit Output with ESCP None 2.30 Y

Earliest
Distin-
CEP001 CEE001102
Classes101
Version
IC694MDL916 16 Circuit Output 4A Relay None 1.00 Y
IC694MDL930 8 Circuit Output 4A Relay Isolated 8 out 2.30 Y
IC694MDL931 8 Circuit Output Relay Form BC Isolated 8 out 2.50 Y
IC694MDL940 16 Circuit Output 2A Relay 16 out 2.30 Y
IC695MDL765 16 Circuit Smart Output 24/125 Vdc 2A Positive Logic None 1.00 N
Mixed Discrete Input/Output Modules
IC693MDR390 8 Circuit Mixed 24 Vdc Input / Relay Output 8 in/8 out 2.40 Y
IC693MAR590 8 Circuit Mixed 120 Vac Input / Relay Output 8 in/8 out 2.30 Y
IC694MDR390 8 Circuit Mixed 24Vdc Input/Relay Output 8 in/8 out 2.40 Y
Analog Input Modules
IC693ALG222 16 Point Analog Voltage Input ALG IN 16 2.50 Y
IC693ALG223 16 Point Analog Current Input ALG IN 16 2.50 Y
IC694ALG222 16 Point Analog Voltage Input ALG IN 16 2.50 Y
IC694ALG223 16 Point Analog Current Input ALG IN 16 2.50 Y
IC695ALG112 12 Point Isolated Analog Current/Voltage Input101 None 2.01 N
IC695ALG600 8 point Universal Analog Input Module None 2.01 N
101
IC695ALG616 16 Point Analog Current / Voltage Input None 1.00 N
IC695ALG626 16 Point Analog Current / Voltage Input (HART Support)101 None 1.00101 N
Analog Output Modules
IC693ALG392 8 Point Analog Current / Voltage Output ALG OUT 8 2.50 Y
IC694ALG392 8 Point Analog Current / Voltage Output ALG OUT 8 2.50 Y
IC695ALG704 4 Point Analog Current / Voltage Output101 None 2.50 N
IC695ALG708 8 Point Analog Current / Voltage Output101 None 2.50 N
101,
8 Point Analog Current / Voltage Output (HART Support)
IC695ALG728 103 None 1.00 N
IC695ALG808 8 Point Isolated Analog Current / Voltage Output 101 None 1.00 N
Analog Mixed Modules
ALG IN 4,
IC693ALG442 4 Input / 2 Output, Current / Voltage 2.30 Y
ALG OUT 2
ALG IN 4,
IC694ALG442 4 Input / 2 Output, Current / Voltage 2.30 Y
ALG OUT 2
Thermocouple Input Modules
IC695ALG312 12 Point Isolated Thermocouple Input101 None 2.50 Y
High-Speed Counter Modules
IC695HSC304 High-Speed Counter Module, 1.5MHz, 8 Inputs, 7 Outputs None - N
IC695HSC308 High-Speed Counter Module, 1.5MHz, 16 Inputs, 14 Outputs None 2.40 Y
Specialty Modules
IC694PSM001 Power Sync and Measurement System None 2.01 Y
103
The RX3i CEP Carrier and the RX3i CEP Expansion Carrier currently does not support all HART features in this module

16.22 Genius Communications Gateway Module

IC695GCG001
The RX3i Genius Communications Gateway, IC695GCG001 (GCG001),
interfaces Genius I/O devices on a Genius Serial Bus to a GE PROFINET IO
Controller (IC695PNC001).
The GCG001 operates as a Genius Bus Controller on a Genius network. It scans

the Genius I/O devices configured to it, retrieving input data and providing
output data. It then exchanges that data with its configured PROFINET IO
Controller over its Ethernet interfaces at the configured production rate. The
GCG001 can manage communications for up to 31 Genius I/O devices on a
single Genius Serial Bus.
The GCG001 also operates as an I/O Device, controlled by the RX3i PROFINET IO
Controller (PNC001) to which is attached. Thus, when correctly configured, the
entire Genius Bus, including the GCG001 itself, becomes visible to the
controlling PLC (in this case an RX3i). Note that the GCG001 operates only with
GE PLC PROFINET IO Controllers.
PROFINET operates on an Ethernet network. If the Ethernet network or Genius

serial bus communications are lost, the GCG001 manages IO states according
to the individual module configurations.
Both PROFINET and Genius may be set up in Redundant configurations.
Genius Communications Gateway features include:
 Attachment of two RJ-45 Ethernet connections (Ports 1 & 2)
 Support for both star (switched) and linear (daisy-chained) network

topologies
 Supports Ethernet Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP)
 LEDs to indicate Ethernet status (ACT & LINK)
 Attachment Genius bus connections (marked Genius A).
 Supports Genius Redundancy consisting of a single Genius bus with two

GCG001 Gateways, one at SBA #30 and the other at SBA #31.
 LED to indicate Genius Communications Status (COM)
 LEDs to indicate module status (refer to module header) Figure 417: IC695GCG001
 Panel-mount (typical). Optional mounting in RX3i expansion slot.

 Cable tie-down loop on underside of module (at front)
 24Vdc power connector on underside of module
 Secure Digital (SD) Card Slot, accessible at rear of module
 Firmware load pushbutton, accessible at rear of module
Refer to PACSystems RX3i Genius Communications Gateway User Manual, GFK-2892.
16.22.1 LED Indications: GCG001

The four LEDs in the module header provide a visual indication of the GCG001 module status.
POWER — indicates the presence of power to the module.
Green, ON steady Power supply is good.
OFF Power supply is off or not good.
OK — indicates GCG001 readiness to perform normal module operations.
Green, ON steady Module able to perform normal operations.
Green/Amber,
Module loading main operating system
blinking
Amber, ON steady Module loading boot-loader operating system
OFF Module has an unrecoverable fault or power is not applied.
FAULT — indicates the detection of faults by the module.
OFF No faults present.
Red, blinking 2Hz DCP Device Identification Signal received.
Red, ON A fault or other Ethernet-type diagnostic data exists on the Gateway
CONNECT — indicates status of the connection to a PROFINET controller.

One or more connections with GE PROFINET Controllers have been

OFF
established to this device.
Device trying to connect to a controller.

Red, blinking
Continuous if device has not been assigned a valid station name.
Red, ON No PROFINET Controller connection
The two LEDs associated with each Ethernet port (used here as PROFINET ports) are labelled ACT and LINK.
These LEDs provide information about activity on that particular port.
PORT 1, PORT 2 LINK — indicates connection status on Ethernet ports.
Green, ON steady Ethernet connection established
OFF No Ethernet connection
PORT 1, PORT 2 ACT — indicates activity on Ethernet ports.
Amber, blinking Communications occurring on port
OFF No communication
COM — indicates the status of Genius Bus communications.
Green, ON steady The Genius Bus is configured and operating properly.
Green, blinking A Genius Bus error has been detected.
The Genius Bus has failed or no Genius Bus configuration has been
OFF
received.
16.22.2 Specifications: GCG001

Communications Support Operates only under the control of a GE PROFINET Controller
Power Requirements External 24Vdc: (±10%) 0.2 A
Operating Temperature
0 to 60°C (32 to 140 °F)
Range
Number of Port Connectors Two RJ-45

IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control Class I

Local Area Network (LAN)
IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD Medium Access Control 10/100 Mbps
The SD card slot is designed to support a Secure Digital (SD) non-volatile

memory card in standard capacity format. Size: 2Gbyte max.
SD Card This optional card has two distinct uses:
(1) Backup storage of some key Ethernet configuration data
(2) Loading new GCG001 module firmware.
Status Data 64 (two banks of 32 bits)
Supports One Genius Bus.
Serial 1, Serial 2, Shield In and Shield Out, as marked.
Genius Bus Support Up to 31 additional devices supported per Genius Bus.
Selectable Baud Rate, per Genius specifications.
Genius Hot Standby and Duplex Redundancy supported.
HHM Compatibility IC66*HHM501
Refer to PACSystems RX3i Genius Communications Gateway User Manual,

Other Genius Compatibility
GFK-2892, Genius Communications Gateway User Manual
GSDML file is available on the Support website for download and import
Configuration into Proficy Machine Edition. The GSDML supporting a firmware release is
part of the firmware upgrade kit available on the Support website.
Yes (does not draw power from RX3i Backplane). However, cannot be done
without disconnecting external 24Vdc power. If configured to support
Hot Swappable
Genius Hot Standby, the loss of a single GCG001 will be tolerated;
otherwise not.

16.23 IC695PRS015 Pressure Transducer Module

The PACSystems RX3i Pressure Transducer module expands the serial
communications capabilities of the RX3i system to communicate with
MODULE OK
PORT FAULT up to 15 Honeywell LG1237 Smart Pressure Transducer sensors.
P1: The IC695PRS015 module provides an independent, isolated serial

port. Up to four Pressure Transducer modules can be located in the
main PACSystems RX3i backplane.
Additional module features include:

Status
PORT 1
▪ Port-to-backplane isolation
▪ RS-485 communication
▪ Module identity and status reporting, including LED status
indicators

Section 2.6.4.1.
IC695PRS015
Figure 418: IC695PRS015
16.23.1 LEDs: PRS015

Module OK The Module OK LED indicates the status of the module.
Off: The module is not receiving power from the RX3i backplane or the
module has failed self-test.
Solid green: The module has been configured.
Blinking green, rapidly: The module is executing power-up diagnostics.
Blinking green, slowly: The module has not received configuration from the
CPU. If configuration is not successful, the module will continue to blink in this mode.
Blinking amber: If a problem occurs, the Module OK LED blinks amber. The
blink code (refer to below) indicates the cause of the error.
1 = watchdog expired
2 = RAM error
6 = Invalid CPU Master Interface version
7 = CPU heartbeat failure
8 = Failed to get semaphore
PORT FAULT The Port Fault LED indicates the status of the port.
Green: There are no faults present on any enabled port.
Amber: There is a fault on the port.
Note: The area below the module LED can be used to record identifying information about the port.
Port STATUS The Port Status LED blinks green when there is activity on the corresponding port.
16.23.2 Specifications: PRS015

Number of Serial Ports One
Connectors RJ-45
Number of modules per CPU Four in the main CPU backplane
0.7 A maximum at 3.3 Vdc

Backplane power requirements
0.115 A maximum at 5.0 Vdc
LEDs Module OK, Port Fault, Port Status
Port Type RS-485 four-wire (full duplex)
Baud rate 375 kBaud
Input Impedance Zin > 96 k for RS-485/422

Max Over-voltage ± 25V
Channel-Channel Crosstalk –55dB minimum
Port to Backplane and to frame ground: 250 Vac continuous;

Isolation
1500 Vac for 1 minute, 2550 Vdc for one second
To meet emission and immunity requirements for the EMC directive (CE mark), shielded cable must be used
with this module.
16.23.3 PRS015 Configuration

Channel Value
Starting address for the input data of the module.
Reference %AIxxxxx
This defaults to the next available %AI block.
Address
30 (word
oriented The number of words or bits used for the input data of the
Channel Value memory) module.
Reference Length 480 (bit Each channel is mapped to 2 words or 32 bits, whether the
oriented channel is used or not.
memory)
In the event of module failure or removal, this parameter specifies
Inputs Default Hold Last State
Force Off: Sets input channel values to 0 and clears all alarm flags.
Hold Last State: Channel Values hold their last state.
Diagnostic
Starting address for the channel diagnostics status data. This
Reference %Ixxxxx
defaults to the next available %I block.
Address
The number of bits or words required for the Channel Diagnostics
data. Default is 0, which means mapping of Channel Diagnostics is
Diagnostic disabled. Change this to a non-zero value to enable Channel
0
Reference Length Diagnostics mapping.
0 or 30 (Word oriented memory)
0 or 480 (bit oriented memory)
Command Input
Starting address for the command input data of the module. This
Data Reference %AIxxxxx
defaults to the next available %AI block.
Address


6 (word
Command Input oriented
The number of bits or words required for the command input data
Data Reference memory)
of the module.
Length 96 (bit oriented
memory)
Command
Output Data Starting address for the command output data of the module.
%AQxxxxx
Reference This defaults to the next available %AQ block.
Address
6 (word
Command oriented
The number of bits or words required for the command output
Output Data memory)
data of the module.
Reference Length 96 (bit oriented
memory)
Module Status
Starting address for the status data of the module. This defaults to
Reference %Ixxxxx
the next available block in the selected memory area.
Address
The number of bits required for the Module Status data. Default is
0, which means mapping of Module Status data is disabled.
Module Status Change this to a non-zero value to enable Module Status data
0
Reference Length mapping.
2 (word oriented memory)
32 (bit oriented memory)
The scan set, as defined in the CPU Scan Sets tab, to be assigned
to this module. The scan set determines how often the CPU polls
I/O Scan Set 1
the data.
Valid range: 1 through 32.
16.23.3.2 Channel Parameters (Channels 1 through 15)

Disabled, Enabled, Simulation Mode

When Enabled, the Channel Value will be updated with the
Channel Enable Disabled value of the associated LG1237.
When Simulation Mode is selected the associated LG1237 will
simulate a specified pressure reading.
Pressure value to be reported, in A/D units when Channel

Simulated Value 10.0 Enable is set to Simulation Mode.
Valid range: -3.40282E+38 through 3.40282E+38.

32-bit
Channel Value Format Floating- Read only: 32-bit floating-point
point
The upper value, in engineering units, used for scaling.

Valid range: -3.40282E+38 through 3.40282E+38 engineering
High Scale Value units.
1024.0
(Eng Units) Note: Scaling is disabled if High Scale Eng. Units equals High
Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units equals Low Scale A/D
Units.
The lower value, in engineering units, used for scaling.
Valid range: -3.40282E+38 through 3.40282E+38 engineering

units. The Low Scale Value (Eng Units) parameter cannot be
Low Scale Value equal to the High Scale Value (Eng Units) parameter. It can be
0.0
(Eng Units) higher than the High Scale Value (Eng Units) parameter for
reversed or inverse scaling.
Default is Low A/D Limit of selected range type. Must be lower

than the High Scale Value.
The upper value, in A/D Units, used for scaling.

High Scale Value
1024.0
(A/D Units) Note: Scaling is disabled if High Scale Eng. Units equals High
Scale A/D Units and Low Scale Eng. Units equals Low Scale A/D
Units.
The upper value, in A/D Units, used for scaling.

Low Scale Value
0.0
(A/D Units)
When the channel input value reaches or exceeds this value, a

High Alarm is triggered.
Valid range: Within High Scale Value–Low Scale Value (Eng
High Alarm
1024.0 Units) range. Must be greater than Low Alarm.
(Eng Units)
Note: A channel uses this value only when High Alarm Enable is
set to Enabled under Diagnostic Reporting Enable and/or Fault
Reporting Enable.

When the channel input value reaches or goes lower than this
value, a Low Alarm is triggered.
Valid range: Within High Scale Value to Low Scale Value (Eng
Low Alarm
1.0 Units) range. Must be less than High Alarm.
(Eng Units)
Note: A channel uses this value only when Low Alarm Enable is
set to Enabled under Diagnostic Reporting Enable and/or Fault
Reporting Enable.
A range in Engineering Units below the alarm condition where

the alarm status bit remains set even after the alarm condition
High Alarm Deadband no longer exists. For the alarm status to clear, the channel
1.0
(Eng Units) input must fall outside the deadband range.
Valid range: 0 through the difference between High Scale
Value and Low Scale Value (Eng Units).
A range in Engineering Units above the alarm condition where

the alarm status bit remains set even after the alarm condition
Low Alarm Deadband goes away. For the alarm status to clear, the channel input
1.0
(Eng Units) must fall outside the deadband range.
Valid range: 0 through the difference between High Scale
Value and Low Scale Value (Eng Units).
Engineering Units offset to change the base of the input

User Offset channel. This value is added to the scaled value on the channel
0.0
(Eng Units) prior to alarm checking.
Valid range: -3.40282E+38 through 3.40282E+38 (Eng Units).
Diagnostic Reporting The Diagnostic Reporting Enable, and Fault Reporting Enable
Enable configuration parameters can be used to enable different types
If Diagnostic Reporting is of responses for individual channel alarms. By default, all
enabled, the additional Disabled responses are disabled on every channel. Any combination of
parameters listed below alarm enables can be configured for each channel. Alarm
can be used to enable values are applied to the scaled Engineering Units value.
specific types of alarms.
If Diagnostic Reporting is enabled, the module reports channel
faults and enabled alarms in reference memory at the
Fault Reporting Enable
Diagnostic Reference Address configured for that channel.
If Fault Reporting is
(Diagnostic Reference Length must be greater than 0.)
enabled, the additional
Disabled
parameters listed below If Fault Reporting is enabled, the module logs a fault in the I/O
can be used to enable Fault table for each occurrence of a channel fault or an enabled
specific types of Faults. channel alarm.

Low Alarm Enable Disabled These additional parameters enable or disable individual
When any of these parameters is enabled, the module uses the
Open Wire Enable Disabled associated parameters to perform the enabled feature.
New Data Alarm Enable Disabled For example, if the module detects a loss of circuit
communication fault, and Open Wire is enabled for Diagnostic
Error Response Fault Disabled
Reporting, the module will set the corresponding bit in the
Latched BIT Failure Fault Disabled Diagnostic Reference memory for the channel.
If any of these parameters is disabled, the module does not

Latched IIC Failure Fault Disabled
react to the associated alarm conditions.
Latched ICS Failure Fault Disabled For details, refer to the section, Channel Diagnostic Bit
Definitions.
Associates the input channel with other channels that have

been assigned the same value. Determines groups of channels
to be scanned each internal sweep. To scan all sensors every
Sensor Scan Group 1
sweep, they must be in the same scan group.
16.23.4 Module Status Data: PRS015

Bit offsets are from the Module Status Reference Address.
Bit Offset Bit Flag Name Description
Set to 1 when the module is powered up and there are no errors on

0 Module OK module
Cleared when module has failed or is not present
1–14 Reserved Reserved
15 Watchdog failure Set to 1 when watchdog timeout error has occurred
16 RAM failure Set to 1 when RAM failure has occurred
17 Interface failure Set to 1 when interface failure has occurred

16.23.5 Input Channel Scaling: PRS015

Scaling parameters specify the relationship between the LG1237 reported value (input signal) and the
engineering units value.
AL = Low Scale A/D Units AH = High Scale A/D Units

EL = Low Scale Engineering Units EH = High Scale Engineering Units
IS = Input Signal (in signal units)
EH  EL EH  EL
User Scaled value = IS   EL  AL 
AH  AL AH  AL
16.23.6 Channel Diagnostic Reporting: PRS015

The module reports channel diagnostics in the Diagnostic Reference memory area, which is configured on
the module Settings tab. Two words (32 bits) are allocated to each channel.
16.23.6.1 Channel Segments

Channel Starting Reference Address Channel Starting Reference Address
0 Diagnostic Reference Address +0 8 Diagnostic Reference Address +16
7 Diagnostic Reference Address +14
16.23.6.2 Channel Diagnostic Bit Definitions

Bit offsets are from the start of each channel segment in Diagnostic Reference memory.

Set to 1 when Low Alarm is detected.
0 Low Alarm fault
Cleared when Low Alarm off or detection is disabled.
Set to 1 when High Alarm is detected.
1 High Alarm fault
Cleared when High Alarm off or detection is disabled.
2–3 Reserved Used by other analog modules


Set to 1 if the LG1237 fails to respond to the most recent attempt
Loss of circuit to read pressure.
4 communication If any of the transducer fault bit (28, 29 or 30) is set for this channel,
(Open Wire) this bit will also be set.
Cleared when the CPU completes an I/O scan.
Set on every successful reading of pressure from the LG1237.
23 New Data
This flag allows the application program to detect when new values
are available to process.
Set when the most recent Response Status flags (bits 25–27) sent
24 Error response fault
from the LG1237 indicate an error.
25–27 Response Status bit 0 Reserved
Set when LG1237 BIT failure is detected. The PRS015 reads this bit
from the enabled channel on configured download and after a reset
28 Latched Bit Failure fault
command is issued.
Set when LG1237 IIC (invalid input conditions) failure is detected.
The PRS015 reads this bit from the enabled channel on configured
29 Latched IIC Failure fault
download and after a reset command is issued.
Set when LG1237 ICS failure is detected.
Latched ICS Failure The PRS015 reads this bit from the enabled channel on configured
30
fault download and after a reset command is issued.
31 Reserved Reserved for future fault
16.23.7 Command Data: PRS015

The application logic uses the Command Data memory areas defined in the PRS015 configuration profile of
the module to send commands to LG1237 transducers and receive the responses from the transducers
through the serial port.
The application logic issues a command to the LG1237 by setting the value of the Command field in the
Command Output data.
When the module is processing a command, the Command Response field contains the Processing
Command value.
To issue another command, the application must set the Command field to No Command and wait for the
No Command Processing response.
16.23.7.1 Command Output Data

The Command Output data consists of six words, starting at the Command Output Data Reference Address.

Byte Offsets Field Name Command Values
0x0000 0x0000 No Command

0–3 Command 0x0000 0x0001 RESET
All other values are reserved.
Specifies the LG1237 channel to be accessed by the RESET command. Can
4–7 Address be changed by the application logic in RUN mode
Bits 0–3 Address (0–15 valid; no error checking)
16.23.7.2 Reset Command

The Reset command addresses the LG1237 channel defined in the Address field. No errors are generated for
this command.
To reset all LG1237 transducers, issue the Reset command to the global address, 15.
16.23.7.3 Command Input Data

When the LG1237 receives a command from the Pressure Transducer module, it returns a command
response, which is written to the Command Input Data Reference memory, starting at the Command Input
Data Reference Address.
Byte Offsets Field Name Response Values
0x0000 0x0000 (0 dec) No Command Processing†

0x0000 0x0001 Processing Command†
0x0000 0x0002 Command Complete†
Command 0x1111 0x1111 (-1 dec) Response not received prior to time out
0–3
Response 0x1111 0x1110 Response error: Parity, Address or Response code
0x1111 0x1101 Detected BIT (Built In Test) Failure
0x1111 0x1100 Detected IIC (Invalid Input Conditions)
0x1111 0x0111 Command Order Error†
16.23.8 Wiring: PRS015
16.23.8.1 Serial Ports

This port is a standard RJ-45 female connector with the following pin assignments.
RJ-45 Pin RS-485/422 Four-Wire Pinouts
8 GND

7 Termination 2
8
6 Rx- (Input)
5 GND
1
4
Figure 419: RJ-45 Pinout PRS015 3 Rx+ (Input)
2 Tx- (Output)
1 Tx+ (Output)
Note: There is no shield or frame ground pin on the port connector. To reduce susceptibility to noise, the
RX+ and RX- signals should be wired to the same twisted pair. Likewise, the TX+ and TX- signals
should be wired to a single twisted pair.
16.23.8.2 Termination
By default, each port is set for no termination. Termination is needed if the module is the first or last device
on an RS-485 network, even if there is only one other device on the network. Termination can be provided
using either an external resistor as displayed in the following figure or the 120 termination resistor built
into the port. If line termination other than 120 is required, an appropriate external resistor must be
supplied.
16.23.8.2.1 User-Supplied Termination for RS-485
Full Duplex 4-Wire 6

RS-485
3
Terminating
Resistor
Figure 420: Externally-Mounted Terminating Resistor
16.23.8.2.2 Built-in Termination for RS-485

Termination using the built-in 120 resistor can be provided by setting the appropriate RS-485 termination
jumper OR by installing shorting jumpers on the RS-485 cable connector that attaches to the serial port.

 To set 120  termination internally

1) Remove the faceplate of the Internal 120-Ohm Termination, Full Duplex
module by pressing in on the Default Jumper Positions Four-Wire RS-485
Move top
side tabs and pulling the jumper down
Jumper for Full Duplex, or connect
faceplate away from the
Front of Module with

Faceplate Removed
4 Wire in Port pins 7
Default (Upper) Position
module. Side of
Port
and 3
2) With the module oriented as Connector Jumper for Half Duplex,

2-Wire in Bottom jumper
shown, move either the upper Default (Upper) Position not used
or lower jumper
Figure 421: Using the Internal Terminating Resistor PRS015

PACSystems* RX3i System Manual Appendix
Section 17: Terminal Blocks and

Interconnect Cables
This chapter describes the following:
 High-Density Module-Mounted Terminal Blocks (Section 17.1)

 Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) system (Section 17.2)
o for RX3i and Series 90-30 20-terminal discrete modules
o for RX3i and Series 90-30 32-point discrete modules with dual D-Connectors
o for RX3i and Series 90-30 Modules with 36 terminals
 Pre-fabricated interconnect cable suitable for connecting the I/O Modules to the Remote TBQC
terminal blocks
 How to build a custom interconnect cable.
 Terminal Block Selection Options
Unless otherwise stated, RX3i I/O modules are provided with a suitable terminal block. Refer to the section in
this manual which discusses the specific I/O module of interest.
In the case of high-density discrete I/O modules, the user has some terminal block selection options, so
terminal blocks are purchased separately. The user may select:
 A module-mounted terminal block, in which case all field wiring will be directly attached to the I/O
module
 An interposing terminal strip with an interconnect cable, allowing all field wiring to be landed on the
interposing terminal strip, which is then attached to the I/O module via a pre-fabricated or custom
cable. This allows for quick connection of the I/O module to previously wired terminal strips. It also
provides a solution where wiring directly to the I/O module is not possible due to space limitations
or due to the rigidity or thickness of the wire bundle.
17.1 High-Density Module-Mounted Terminal

Blocks
Terminal Block Type Catalog Number
Box-style Terminal Block, 36 Terminals IC694TBB032
Spring-style Terminal Block, 36 Terminals IC694TBS032
Extended Box-style Terminal Block, 36 Terminals IC694TBB132
Extended Spring-style Terminal Block, 36 Terminals IC694TBS132

17.1.1 Terminal Blocks for High-Density RX3i Modules
17.1.1.1 Extended High-Density vs. High-Density Terminal Blocks

Extended High-Density Terminal Blocks IC694TBB132 and IC694TBS132 are functionally identical to High-
Density Terminal Blocks IC694TBB032 and IC694TBS032. Both attach directly to the I/O module. The
Extended High-Density Terminal Blocks have an outer cover that is approximately 13 mm (½ in) deeper. This
is to accommodate wires with thicker insulation, such as wires typically used with AC I/O modules.
Figure 423 compares the space for

wiring on a High-Density Terminal
Block (left) and an Extended High-
Density Terminal Block (right), seen
from the bottom of the module.
Added Depth
of Extended
High-Density 23mm
Terminal ( 0.9 inch)
Block 10mm
( 0.4 inch)
Figure 423: Depth Comparison: High-

13mm
(0.5 inch)
Density vs Extended High-Density
Terminal Block
Figure 422: Additional Depth due to Extended High-Density Terminal
Blocks

17.1.1.2 IC694TBB032 and TBB132 Box-Style Terminal Blocks, 36

Terminals
Box-Style Terminal Blocks, IC694TBB032 and IC694TBB132,
are used with high-density PACSystems RX3i modules and
equivalent Series 90-30 PLC modules. These terminal blocks
provide 36 screw terminals for field wiring to the module.
Terminal Blocks IC694TBB032 and TBB132 are functionally

identical. Terminal Block IC694TBB032 comes with a
standard-depth outer cover. When installed, it is the same
depth as most other PACSystems and Series 90-30 PLC
modules.
Extended Terminal Block IC694TBB132 comes with an outer

cover that is approximately 13 mm (½ in) deeper than
Terminal Block IC694TBB032, to accommodate wires with
thicker insulation, such as that typically used with AC I/O
modules.
17.1.1.2.1 Specifications: TBB032 and

TBB132
Torque 0.79 Nm (7 in-lb)
Wire strip length 7.87 mm (0.310 in)
Wire gauges supported #14-26 AWG (solid or stranded)

Figure 424: 36-Terminal Box-Style Terminal
Block
17.1.1.2.2 Connecting Field Wiring to a Box-Style High-Density Terminal Block

The bottom of the terminal block can be used as a gauge for the wire strip length, as displayed in Figure 425.
The stripped wire must be fully inserted into the terminal block so that the insulation meets the stop position
inside the terminal, and the end of the wire is bent. Tightening the terminal screw raises the wire and clamps
it in place.

Insert wire to Tighten

stop position screw
Wire strip
length
Figure 425: Wire Preparation and Insertion into Box-Style Terminal Block
17.1.1.3 IC694TBS032 and TBS132 Spring-Style Terminal Blocks, 36

Terminals
Spring-Style Terminal Blocks, IC694TBS032 and IC694TBS132,
are used with High-Density PACSystems RX3i modules and
equivalent Series 90-30 PLC modules. These terminal blocks
provide 36 spring style terminals for field wiring to the
module.
Terminal Blocks IC694TBS032 and TBS132 are functionally

identical. Terminal Block IC694TBS032 comes with a
standard-depth outer cover. When installed, it is the same
depth as most other PACSystems and Series 90-30 PLC
modules.
Extended Terminal Block IC694TBS132 comes with an outer

cover that is approximately ½ inch (13mm) deeper than
Terminal Block IC694TBS032, to accommodate wires with
thicker insulation, such as that typically used with AC I/O
modules.
17.1.1.3.1 Specifications: TBS032 and

TBS132
Wire strip length 7.87 mm (0.310 in)
Wire gauges supported #14-28 AWG (solid or stranded)
Figure 426: 36-Terminal Spring-Style Terminal

Block

17.1.2 Installing and Removing High-Density Terminal Blocks

This section has special installation instructions for High-Density Terminal Blocks. Refer to Chapter 2 for
general installation information.
WARNING
Field power must be turned off when installing or removing a Terminal Block assembly.
17.1.2.1 Installing or Removing the Terminal Block Assembly of a

Module
To install or remove the terminal block module assembly
1. Install the small catalog number label (for example: “MDL240”) supplied with the module in the slot on
the top of the Terminal Block.
2. Complete the module wiring and secure the wire bundles to the tie downs on the bottom of the
Terminal Block.

17.1.2.2 Inserting a Terminal Block in its Cover

 To insert a terminal block in the cover
1) Align the top of the Terminal Block with the bottom
of the cover, making sure that the notches in the
Terminal Block match up with the grooves in the
cover.
2) Slide the Terminal Block upward until it clicks into
place.
Figure 427: Inserting Terminal Block into its Cover
17.1.2.3 Installing a High-Density Terminal Block Assembly

 To install a high-density terminal block
assembly
1) Press the terminal block assembly straight
toward the module until it is partially
seated.
2) Open the door on the front of the terminal
block and push the latch (refer to below)
up very firmly until it reaches the top of
the slot and clicks into place.
3) Check to be sure the terminal block is fully
seated.
Figure 428: Installing a High-Density Terminal Block
17.1.2.4 Removing a High-Density Terminal Block from the Module

 To install a high-density terminal block assembly

1) Open the terminal block door.
2) Push the white plastic latch (Figure 429,
center) down very firmly until the terminal
block is released.
3) Pull the terminal block straight out and away
from the module until the contacts have
separated.
Figure 429: Removing a High-Density Terminal Block
17.1.2.5 Removing a Terminal Block from its Cover

 To remove a Terminal Block from its cover
1) Grasp the sides of the Terminal Block cover.
2) Pull down on the bottom of the Terminal Block.
17.2 Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) System

The optional Terminal Block Quick Connect (TBQC) system allows the listed discrete and analog I/O modules
to be quickly connected to external TBQC terminal blocks via an interconnecting cable. The TBQC system
significantly reduces wiring costs by reducing wiring time and eliminating wiring errors. The TBQC terminal
blocks also have integrated test points to simplify wiring troubleshooting.
There are three distinct TBQC product offerings (not interchangeable):
1) The Low-Density TBQC products (IC693ACC329 -333) provide 20-terminal remote connector blocks.
They are compatible primarily with Low-Density Discrete I/O Modules that come equipped with a 20-
terminal connector header. They connect to the I/O module via an unshielded cable. The original 20-
terminal connector may be retained on the I/O module, or may be replaced with a faceplate containing a
compatible D-connector (catalog number IC693ACC334). Using the D-connector faceplate greatly
simplifies the wiring effort.
2) IC693ACC337 is a variant of (1) above. It provides a 24-terminal remote connector and a pair of
interconnecting cables that are compatible with those 32-point discrete I/O modules that come
equipped with a pair of D-connectors. They connect to the I/O module via a pair of unshielded cables.
3) The high-density remote terminal block (IC694RTB032) is compatible with IC694TBC032, which is a
36-terminal module-mounted terminal block. They are interconnected via a shielded cable. This allows it
to support analog modules as well as discrete.

17.2.1 Low-Density TBQC System Overview
Figure 430: Low-Density Terminal Block Quick Connect System
The TBQC terminal block is snapped onto a standard DIN-rail. Then a pre-fabricated cable is connected
between the D-connector of the terminal block and the connector of the I/O module. An I/O module
normally equipped with terminals needs to be converted to a D-connector type using an adapter faceplate
(IC693ACC334) shown above. Alternatively, the interconnecting cable may have wires at the I/O module end
and a D-connector at the TBQC end.
Using the pre-fabricated cables (refer to Section, 17.2.1.1 for Low-Density, Unshielded 20-/24-point TBQC), the
24-conductor cables are wired straight through from the I/O Faceplate to the TBQC terminal block, ensuring
that Terminal 1 of the I/O Module maps to Terminal 1 of the TBQC Terminal Block, and Terminal 20 maps to
Terminal 20, etc.
The IC693ACC series of terminal blocks have three rows of terminals, arranged in three levels, as displayed in
the following figures. These terminal blocks feature an easy to use captive-screw, rising cage type
connection system.
The IC693ACC TBQC system is not recommended for use with Analog modules because it does not meet the
shielding recommendations for Analog module connections.

17.2.1.1 Components for Low-Density, Unshielded 20-/24-point

TBQC
Part Number Description Compatibility
Low-Density, 20-point terminal block with IC693MDLxxx / IC694MDLxxx compatible

IC693ACC334
24-pin D-connector. with 20-point terminal block.
IC69xMDL645, IC69xMDL646,
104
Low-Density, 20-point terminal block with
IC693ACC329 IC69xMDL240, IC69xMDL740,
24-pin D-connector.
IC69xMDL741, IC69xMDL742

IC693ACC332 IC69xMDL940 only
24-pin D-connector.

IC693ACC333 IC69xMDL340 only
24-pin D-connector.
Medium density, 24-point terminal block IC69xMDL654, IC69xMDL655,

IC693ACC337
with 24-pin D-connector. IC69xMDL752, IC69xMDL753
Unshielded 1.0-meter cable with 24-pin

IC693CBL329 IC693ACC337 (left side)
D-connector termination on both ends.
Unshielded 1.0-meter cable with 24-pin IC693ACC334 and IC693ACC329 &

IC693CBL330
D-connector termination on both ends. IC693ACC337 (right side)


IC693CBL332


IC693CBL334

IC693CBL327 IC694MDL752, IC694MDL753
D-connector termination on one end.
IC693CBL328 Unshielded 3.0-meter cable with 24-pin IC694MDL752, IC694MDL753

D-connector termination on one end. IC693ACC334
104
This Terminal Block may be used with most I/O modules that have up to 16 I/O points. It cannot be used with 32-point modules.
Jumpers may have to be added at the terminal block; for details of required wiring connections, refer to individual module
specifications.

17.2.1.2 Typical IC693ACC Terminal Block
Figure 431: IC693ACC Terminal Block

17.2.1.3 IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block
Figure 432: IC693ACC329 TBQC Terminal Block
Note: The common row terminals (labeled with the letter C) are provided for wiring convenience. Their
use is optional. They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals. You may use them as is,
or jumper them to a numbered terminal.
17.2.1.3.1 Connecting
Refer to cable selection in Section, 17.2.1.1 for Low-Density, Unshielded 20-/24-point TBQC.
17.2.1.3.2 Mounting
These terminal blocks are mounted on a standard, user-supplied 35 mm DIN-rail.

use is optional. They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals. You may use them as is,
or jumper them to a numbered terminal.
17.2.1.4.2 Mounting

Note: The neutral row terminals (labeled with the letter N) are provided for wiring convenience. Their use
is optional. They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals. You may use them as is, or jumper
them to a numbered terminal.
17.2.1.5.2 Mounting

17.2.1.6 I/O Faceplate with D-Connector for 20-Terminal I/O Modules

The I/O Faceplate (catalog number IC693ACC334) may be inserted into the I/O Module header in place of
the 20-screw type terminal block. IC693ACC334 provides a 24-pin D-connector, which may be connected to
the remote TBQC terminal block via a pre-fabricated cable. This Faceplate replaces the standard 20-screw
type terminal board on the listed modules.
17.2.1.6.1 Faceplate Connector Pin Orientation and Connection to Module Terminal

Module Connector
Terminal # Pin #
1 B1
2 A1
3 B2
4 A2
5 B3
6 A3
7 B4
8 A4
9 B5
10 A5
B6 (NC)105
A6 (NC)105
B7 (NC)105
A7 (NC)105
11 B8
Figure 435: Connector Pin
Assignments for D-Connector 12 A8
with 20 Terminals
13 B9
14 A9
15 B10
105
Note that there are four “No Connect” pins in the D-Connector.

16 A10
17 B11
18 A11
19 B12
20 A12

17.2.1.6.2 Installation of I/O Faceplate IC693ACC334

 To install the IC693ACC334 I/O faceplate
1) Remove 20-pin terminal assembly from module
Pull
Jacking Tab
Lever
1. Open the plastic terminal board cover. 2. Grasp pull-tab towards you until cont acts have
Push up on the jacking lever to release separated from m odule housing and hook has
the terminal block. disengaged for full removal.
Figure 436: IC693ACC334 I/O Faceplate Installation
2) Snap the I/O faceplate assembly on module.
Figure 437: IC693ACC334 I/O Faceplate Snaps into Place
Install the TBQC terminal block of your choice and run the interconnecting cable between the I/O Faceplate
and the D-connector on the TBQC terminal block.
17.2.1.7 Cable Current Rating for Available Interconnect Cables

Each conductor in the IC693CBL* 24-conductor cables has a current rating of 1.2 A.

If using cables with a 16-point output module with a higher output current rating, your loads must not draw
more than 1.2 A. If you have field devices that require more than 1.2 A, do not use a TBQC assembly; use the
standard Terminal Board that comes with the module instead.
A current rating of 1.2 A is more than adequate to handle the current requirement of any of the 32-point I/O
modules listed earlier.
17.2.1.8 Interconnect Cable Connector & Construction Information

Cables IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 each have a right–angle 24–pin connector (Fujitsu FCN-365S024–
AU) on one end and a set of stripped wire ends on the other.
10 Feet (3 Meters)
Figure 438: IC693CBL327 and IC693CBL328 Cable Construction
All of the other IC693CBL* cables types have connectors (Fujitsu FCN–365S024–AU) on both ends. These
cables are wired pin–to–pin (pin A1 to pin A1, pin A2 to pin A2, and so forth).
Figure 439: Cable Construction for all other IC693CBL* Cables
Each pin on these connectors has a current rating of 1.2 A.
17.2.1.9 Connector Depth

The prefabricated IC693CBL* cables extend 51 mm (2in) out from the face of the modules to which they are
connected. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow for the 51 mm (2in) depth
added by the connector.

I/O Module
51mm
(2 inches)
Figure 440: Connector Depth for IC693CBL* Cables

17.2.1.10 Building Custom Length 24–Conductor D-Connector Cables

Cables similar to IC693ACC* connecting the I/O module to TBQC terminals can be built to length.
Purchase the mating female (socket type) 24–pin connectors. The 24–pin connector kit can be ordered as an
accessory kit from GE. Catalog numbers for these connectors and their associated parts are listed in the
following table.
The list includes catalog numbers for three types of connectors: solder pin, crimp pin, and ribbon cable. Each
accessory kit contains enough components (such as D–connectors, backshells, and contact pins) to
assemble ten single–ended cables of the type specified for each kit.
GE Catalog Number Vendor Catalog Number Description

IC693ACC316 FCN–361J024–AU Solder eyelet receptacle
(Solder Eyelet Type) FCN–360C024–B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC317 FCN–363J024 Crimp wire receptacle
(Crimp Type) FCN–363J–AU Crimp pin (for above, 24 needed)
FCN–360C024–B Backshell (for above)
IC693ACC318 FCN–367J024–AUF IDC (ribbon) receptacle, closed cover
(Ribbon or IDC Type) FCN–367J024–AUH IDC (ribbon) receptacle, open cover
Additional tools from Fujitsu are required to properly assemble the crimped contact and ribbon cable type
connectors. The solder eyelet connectors (as provided in IC693ACC316) do not require any special tooling.
Crimped Contact Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC317) require:
Hand Crimping Tool FCN–363T–T005/H

Contact Extraction Tool FCN–360T–T001/H
Ribbon Cable Connectors (as provided in IC693ACC318) require:
Cable Cutter FCN–707T–T001/H

Hand Press FCN–707T–T101/H
Locator Plate FCN–367T–T012/H
These tools must be ordered from an authorized Fujitsu distributor.
Pin connections with color codes are displayed in the following figure. Cables are made of 12 twisted pairs;
wire size is #24 AWG (0.22mm2). Each pair has a solid color wire and the same color wire with a black tracer.
Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code Pin Number Pair # Wire Color Code
A1 1 BROWN B1 7 VIOLET
A2 1 BROWN/BLACK B2 7 VIOLET/BLACK
A3 2 RED B3 8 WHITE
A4 2 RED/BLACK B4 8 WHITE/BLACK
A5 3 ORANGE B5 9 GRAY
A6 3 ORANGE/BLACK B6 9 GRAY/BLACK
A7 4 YELLOW B7 10 PINK

A8 4 YELLOW/BLACK B8 10 PINK/BLACK
A9 5 DARK GREEN B9 11 LIGHT BLUE
A10 5 DARK GREEN/BLACK B10 11 LIGHT BLUE/BLACK
A11 6 DARK BLUE B11 12 LIGHT GREEN
A12 6 DARK BLUE/BLACK B12 12 LIGHT GREEN/BLACK
B Row 12 321
A Row 12 321
Figure 441: D-Connector Pinout
17.2.1.11 Connector Depth for Custom Built Cables

If custom-built cables use a straight connector, as indicated above, they will require more space in front of
the PLC than the prefabricated cables (refer to Section, 17.2.1.1 for Low-Density, Unshielded 20-/24-point
TBQC), which use right–angle connectors. The depth of the cabinet that the PLC is mounted in should allow
for the depth added by the selected connector.
PLC (Side View)
1.5-2.5”
Typical 2.187”
Figure 442: Allowance for Extra Depth using Straight-On Connectors
17.2.2 Low-Density TBQC System Variant for 32-Point I/O

Modules with Dual D-Connectors
IC693ACC337 provides 24 terminals (versus 20). It is designed for use with those 32-point discrete modules
that come equipped with dual D-connectors. This TBQC configuration uses a mated pair of cables (one right-
egress and one left-egress) in order to connect the dual D-connectors on the I/O Module to a pair of
IC693ACC337 terminal blocks.
The compatible cables connect Pin 1 of the TBQC D-connector to Pin 1 of the corresponding D-connector on
the I/O module, and Pin 24 to Pin 24, and such.

Figure 443: IC693ACC337 Terminal Block Top and Front Views

use is optional. They are electrically isolated from the numbered terminals. You may use them as is, or
jumper them to a numbered terminal.
Refer to Section, 17.2.1.1 for Low-Density, Unshielded 20-/24-point TBQC for cable selection. Remember
that for interfacing with a 32-point module with dual D-connectors, it will be necessary to pick a left-side
cable and a right-side cable.
17.2.2.1.2 Mounting

17.2.2.2 Connecting TBQC Components to 32-Point Modules

Those 32-point modules equipped with a pair of 24-pin D-connectors on their faceplate may be used with
TBQC terminal block IC693ACC337. They do not require a substitute faceplate as was described for the 20-
terminal modules.
Since each 32-point I/O module provides two 24-pin D-connectors, they will each require two cables and two
IC693ACC337 TBQC terminal blocks. Additionally, since the two connectors on the I/O module are oriented
differently (refer to figure below), the egress for each of the cables is different. GE supplies “right side” and
“left side” cables to simplify installation. Refer to Section, 17.2.1.1 for Low-Density, Unshielded 20-/24-point
TBQC for cable selection.
After installation, cables can be secured to the two tie-downs on the bottom of the module.
Note: These terminal blocks do not work with 32-point I/O modules that have 50-pin connectors.

Figure 445: Pinout Assignments on Dual D-Connector Modules
17.2.3 High-Density TBQC System Overview

The High-Density Compact Remote Terminal Base IC694RTB032 connects to the I/O module faceplate
IC694TBC032 via a shielded cable IC694CBL* (refer to the section, Components for High-Density, Shielded 36-
TBQC) and supports both analog and discrete I/O modules, as displayed in the following table.

Figure 446: High-Density TBQC System Overview
Figure 447: High-Density Compact Remote Terminal Base IC694RTB032 Usage

17.2.3.1 Components for High-Density, Shielded 36-TBQC

Part Number Description Compatibility
Box-Style 36-point Terminal Block (refer to Section

IC694TBB032 As listed throughout the manual.
17.1.1.2).
IC695ALGxxx, IC69xMDL660 and

IC694MDL664 modules only.
High-Density terminal block with single 36-pin
IC694TBC032 Discrete output modules and
D-connector.
Thermocouple modules are not
supported.
IC695ALGxxx, IC69xMDL660 and

High-Density remote base, with 36-pin IC694MDL664 modules only.
IC694RTB032 D-connector, shield ground lug and with a 36-point Discrete output modules and
removable terminal block. Thermocouple modules are not
supported.
Shielded 0.5-meter cable with 36-pin D-connector IC694TBC032 and IC694TBB032

IC694CBL005
termination on both ends. only

IC694CBL010

IC694CBL030
Shielded 3.0-meter cable with 36-pin D-connector

termination on the end that connects to the
IC694CBL130 IC694TBC032 only
IC694TBC032 terminal block. The other end is
unterminated.
17.2.3.1.1 IC694RTB032 High-Density Remote Base, 36-Terminal

Figure 448: IC694RTB032 High-Density Remote Base, 36-Terminal

17.2.3.1.2 IC694TBC032 High-Density Terminal Block with Single 36-Pin

D-Connector
To connect the remote terminal block IC694RTB032 to an I/O module, the I/O module must be fitted with an
IC694TBC032 terminal block.
Since both the I/O module and the remote terminal block are fitted with 36-point D-connectors, only one
cable is required to interconnect the two. Additionally, both ends are equipped to handle shielded cables.
These features provide a significant advantage over the IC693ACC377 TBQC.

Figure 449: IC694TBC032 High-Density Terminal Block with Single 36-Pin D Connector
17.2.3.1.3 IC694CBL* Cable Wiring Details

Figure 450: IC694CBL* Cable Wiring Details

Product Certifications and

Installation Guidelines for
Conformance
This appendix describes the compliance markings that appear on PACSystems RX3i products and the
corresponding standards to which the products have been certified. This appendix also provides installation
requirements for conformance to standards and additional safety guidelines for installing in the European
Union.
RX3i Agency Approvals

Agency
Description Standard or Comments
Marking
Certification by Underwriter's Laboratories to

N.A. Safety for Industrial Control
UL508 standard and equivalent CSA C22.2 No
Equipment
142 - M1987standard
N.A. Safety for Hazardous Areas Certification by Underwriter's Laboratories to

ISA 12.12.01 standard and equivalent CSA
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D C22.2 No 213-M1987 standard
Low Voltage Directive Self-Declaration in accordance with European

Directives; Refer to Declaration of Conformity
European Safety for Industrial found at www.geautomation.com for a
Control Equipment complete list of approved products
Electromagnetic Compatibility Certification by Competent Body in accordance

Directive with European Directives; Refer to Declaration
of Conformity found at
European EMC for Industrial Control www.geautomation.com for a complete list of
Equipment approved products
Explosive Atmospheres Directive Certification in accordance with European

Directives and Independent 3rd Party
European Safety for Hazardous Areas
Assessment Certificate; Refer to Declaration of
Product Certifications and Installation Guidelines for Conformance 851

Equipment Group II, Category 3, Gas Conformity found at www.geautomation.com

Groups A, B, C for complete list of approved products
Note: The agency approvals listed above and on the Declaration of Conformities are believed to be
accurate; however, agency approvals for a product should be verified by the marking on the unit
itself.
UL Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous Areas Requirements

The following statements are required to display for Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations:
1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2 HAZARDOUS

LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON–HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS ONLY.
2. WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD – SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR
CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
3. WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD – DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN
SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON–HAZARDOUS.
4. EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED INTO AN ENCLOSURE THAT IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WITH THE USE OF A
TOOL
ATEX Zone 2 Hazardous Areas Requirements

To maintain compliance with the ATEX Directive, an RX3i system located in a Zone 2 area (Category 3) must
be installed within a protective enclosure meeting the following criteria:
▪ IP54 or greater
▪ Mechanical strength to withstand an impact energy of 3.5 Joules
▪ Only accessible with the use of a tool
Standards
PACSystems RX3i Environmental Specifications

10 - 57 Hz, 0.0524 mm (0.006 in) displacement

IEC60068-2-6,
Vibration peak-peak
JISC0911
57 - 500 Hz, 1.0 g acceleration
IEC60068-2-27,
Shock 15G, 11ms
JISC0912
Operating Temperature 0 to 60°C: [inlet] (32 to 140 °F)
Storage Temperature -40 to +85°C (-40 to 185 °F)
Humidity 5 to 95%, non-condensing

Additional RX3i Specifications
Standards for EMC Emissions, and Immunity, for RX3i products are provided on the following pages. Refer to
the listing of module catalog numbers below to determine which set of standards applies to a specific
module: Specifications Group 1 or Group 2.
17.2.3.1.4 Group 1 Table

IC694ACC300 IC694DNM200 IC694MDL390 IC694MDL740
IC694ALG220 IC694DNS201 IC694MDL632 IC694MDL741
IC694ALG221 IC694DSM314 IC694MDL634 IC694MDL742
IC694ALG390 IC694DSM324 IC694MDL635 IC694MDL752
IC694ALG391 IC694MDL230 IC694MDL645 IC694MDL753
IC694ALG392 IC694MDL231 IC694MDL646 IC694MDL758
IC694APU300 IC694MDL240 IC694MDL648 IC694MDL930
IC694APU305 IC694MDL241 IC694MDL654 IC694MDL931
IC694BEM320 IC694MDL250 IC694MDL655 IC694MDL940
IC694BEM321 IC694MDL310 IC694MDL658 IC694MDR390
IC694BEM340 IC694MDL330 IC694MDL730 IC694PWR321
IC694BEM341 IC694MDL340 IC694MDL732 IC694PWR330
IC694CHS392 IC694MDL350 IC694MDL734 IC694PWR331
IC694CHS398
17.2.3.1.5 Group 2 Table

IC694ALG222 IC695ALG106 IC695CMM002 IC695HSC304
IC694ALG223 IC695ALG112 IC695CMM004 IC695HSC308
IC694ALG232 IC695ALG306 IC695CMU310 IC695LRE001
IC694ALG233 IC695ALG312 IC695CMX128 IC695MDL664
IC694ALG442 IC695ALG412 IC695CNM001 IC695MDL765

IC694ALG542 IC695ALG508 IC695CPE302 IC695NIU001
IC694BEM331 IC695ALG600 IC695CPE305 IC695NIU001 PLUS
IC694CEE001 IC695ALG608 IC695CPE310 IC695PBM300
IC694MDL260 IC695ALG616 IC695CPE330 IC695PBS301
IC694MDL660 IC695ALG626 IC695CPU310 IC695PMM335
IC694MDL754 IC695ALG628 IC695CPU315 IC695PNC001
IC694MDL916 IC695ALG704 IC695CPU320 IC695PNS001
IC695ACC302 IC695ALG708 IC695CRE311 IC695PNS101
IC695ACC400 IC695ALG808 IC695CRH--- IC695PRS015
IC695ACC401 IC695CEP001 IC695CRU320 IC695PSA040
IC695ACC650 IC695CHS007 IC695ECM850 IC695PSA140
IC695ACC651 IC695CHS012 IC695EDS001 IC695PSD040
IC695FTB001 IC695CHS016 IC695EIS001 IC695PSD140
IC695ETM001 IC695RMX128
IC695GCG001 IC695RMX228
17.2.3.1.6 Specifications Group 1

EMC EMISSIONS
30 – 230 MHz 50.4 dBµV/m

Radiated CISPR 11/EN 55011/
230 – 1000 MHz 57.4 dBµV/m
EN55016-2-3
(Group 1, Class A)
30 – 88 MHz 49.5 dBµV/m
88 – 216 MHz 53.9 dBµV/m

47 CFR 15
216 -960 MHz 56.8 dBµV/m
> 960 MHz 59.9 dBµV/m

EMC IMMUNITY106
Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2107 8 kV Air, 4 kV Contact
RF Susceptibility EN 61000-4-3107 10 Vrms /m, 80 to 1000 MHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz sine-wave
AC/DC Input Power: 2 kV direct
Fast Transient Burst EN 61000-4-4107 Discrete I/O, Communication: 1kV (clamp) 107
Analog I/O: 0.25 kV (clamp)
ANSI/IEEE C37.90a, AC/DC Input Power: +2.5 kV

Damped Oscillatory Wave EN 61000-4-12107
EN 61000-4-18 I/O, Communication: +2.5 kV108
AC/DC Input Power: 2 kV (12 ) CM

Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-5107
I/O, Communication: 1 kV (42 ) CM108
Conducted RF EN 61000-4-6107 Communication: 10Vrms, 0.15 to 80 MHz, 80% AM109
Voltage Dips and

EN 61000-4-11107 AC/DC Input Power: 30% and 100% Nominal (10ms)
Interrupts
AC Input Power:  10% (10s)

Voltage Variation EN 61000-4-11107
DC Input Power:  20% (10s)
106
Although a few modules were tested according to the Voltage Surge test, modules were primarily tested to the Damped Oscillatory
Wave test.
107
EN 61000-4-x series of tests are technically equivalent to the IEC 61000-4-x series.
108
Not applicable to communication or I/O lines with maximum installed length less than 30 m (98 ft).
109
Not applicable to communication lines with maximum installed length less than 30 m (98 ft).

17.2.3.1.7 Specifications Group 2

EMC EMISSIONS
Radiated CISPR 11/EN 5501 30 – 230 MHz 50.4 dBµV/m
(Group 1, Class A) 1/ EN55016-2-3 230 – 1000 MHz 57.4 dBµV/m
30 – 88 MHz 49.5 dBµV/m

47 CFR 15 88 – 216 MHz 53.9 dBµV/m
216 -960 MHz 56.8 dBµV/m
> 960 MHz 59.9 dBµV/m
CISPR 11/EN 5501
Conducted 0.15 – 0.5 MHz: 79/66 dBµV (qp/avg)
1/ EN55016-2-1
(Group 1, Class A) 0.5 – 30 MHz: 73/60 dBµV (qp/avg)
47 CFR 15
Harmonic EN61000-3-2 Class A
EMC IMMUNITY
Electrostatic
EN 61000-4-2110 8 kV Air, 4 kV Contact
Discharge
10 Vrms /m, 80 to 1000 MHz, 80% AM, 1kHz sine-wave
EN 61000-4-3110
3 Vrms /m, 1.0 to 2.7 GHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz sine-wave
RF Susceptibility
ENV 50140/
10 Vrms /m, 900  5 MHz, 100% PM, 200 Hz square-wave
ENV 50204
AC/DC Power: 2 kV direct
Fast Transient Burst111 EN 61000-4-4110
Signal: 1 kV cap coupled
Equipment Power
AC: 2 kV CM, 1 kV DM
DC112: 0.5 kV CM, 0.5 kV DM
I/O Power and Auxiliary Output Power
AC: 2 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-5110
DC112: 0.5 kV CM, 0.5 kV DM
Shielded Signal113: 1 kV CM
Unshielded Communication Signal113: 1 kV CM

Unshielded I/O Signal113: 1kV CM, 0.5 kV DM
ANSI/IEEE 1 MHz, 400 Hz rep rate
Damped Oscillatory C37.90a, EN AC Power: 2.5 kV CM and DM (200 )
Wave 61000-4-12110 DC Power111: 2.5 kV CM and DM (200 )
EN 61000-4-18 Signal: 2.5 kV CM (200 )
Conducted RF EN 61000-4-6110 AC/DC Power, Signal: 10 Vrms, 0.15 to 80 MHz, 80% AM 114
110
EN 61000-4-x series of tests are technically equivalent to the IEC 61000-4-x series.
111
Not applicable for communication, I/O, I/O power, Auxiliary power output or DC Input power lines where the maximum installed
length is less than 3 m (9.1ft).
112
Not applicable to ports limited to 30 m (98 ft) or less.
113
Not applicable to RS232 ports and those ports limited to 30 m (98 ft) or less
114
Not applicable to communication or I/O lines with maximum installed length 3 m (09.1 ft) or less

AC Input Power:
Voltage Dips & 30% Nominal (0.5 period);
EN 61000-4-11110
Interrupts 60% Nominal (5.50 periods);
>95% Nominal (250 periods)
Voltage Variation EN 61000-4-11110 AC Input Power: 10% (50,000 periods)
Voltage Flicker EN 61000-3-3 AC Input Power: dmax  4%
Government Regulations
U.S., Canadian, Australian, and European regulations are intended to prevent equipment from interfering
with approved transmissions or with the operation of other equipment through the AC power source.
The PACSystems RX3i family of products has been tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of
U.S. (47 CFR 15), Canadian (ICES-003), Australian (AS/NZS 3548), and European (EN55011) regulations for
Class A digital devices when installed in accordance with the guidelines noted in this manual. These various
regulations share commonality in content and test levels with that of CISPR 11 and based on this
commonality testing to each individual standard was deemed inappropriate.
The FCC requires the following note to be published according to FCC guidelines:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at their own expense.
Industry Canada requires the following note to be published:
Note: This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Modules released after August 2012 require the following information be marked on the unit or
appear in user documentation:
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3 (A)
Installation Guidelines for Conformance to Standards

To meet U.S., Canadian, Australian, and European regulations for Class A digital devices and maintain CE
Mark compliance, RX3i installations that include the products listed in the following table must be installed
in a metal enclosure with external wiring routed in metal conduit as described in this appendix. Modules not
listed must still be installed in a protective enclosure as described in Chapter 2, Installation.
17.2.3.1.8 Modules Requiring Installation in a Metal Enclosure

Description Catalog Number
Series 90-30 Input Analog 4-point Voltage IC693ALG220

Series 90-30 Input Analog 16sgl/8diff Current IC693ALG223
RX3i Input Analog 16sgl Current IC694ALG223
Series 90-30 Output Analog 2-point Voltage IC693ALG390
RX3i Output Analog 2-point Voltage IC694ALG390
Series 90-30 Output Analog 2-point Current IC693ALG391
RX3i Output Analog 2-point Current IC694ALG391
RX3i Analog Output 8-Channel Current/Voltage IC694ALG392
Series 90-30 Analog Combination Current/Voltage 4in/2out IC693ALG442
RX3i Analog Combination Current/Voltage 4in/2out IC694ALG442
RX3i Analog Module 4-Input 2-Output Current/Voltage with Advanced Diagnostics IC694ALG542
Series 90-30 I/O Link Module (Slave) IC693BEM320
RX3i I/O Link Interface Module IC694BEM320
Series 90-30 I/O Link Module (Master) IC693BEM321
RX3i I/O Link Master Module IC694BEM321
Series 90-30 Remote Baseplate, 10 Slots IC693CHS393
Series 90-30 Remote Baseplate, 5 Slots IC693CHS399
RX3i Control Memory Xchange Module IC695CMX128
Series 90-30 DSM314 Motion Controller IC693DSM314
RX3i DSM314 Motion Controller IC694DSM314
RX3i DSM324 Motion Controller IC694DSM324
Series 90-30 Mixed I/O 8-point 120 Vac In / 8-point Relay Out IC693MAR590
Series 90-30 Input 120 Vac 8-point Isolated IC693MDL230
RX3i Input 120 Vac 8-point Isolated IC694MDL230

Series 90-30 Input 240 Vac 8-point Isolated IC693MDL231
RX3i Input 240 Vac 8-point Isolated IC694MDL231
Series 90-30 Input 120 Vac 16-point IC693MDL240
RX3i Input 120 Vac 16-point IC694MDL240
Series 90-30 Input 24Vac 16-point IC693MDL241
RX3i Input 24Vac 16-point IC694MDL241
Series 90-30 Output 120 Vac 0.5 12-point IC693MDL310
RX3i Output 120 Vac 0.5 A 12 Point IC694MDL310
Series 90-30 Output 120/240 Vac 2A 8-point IC693MDL330
RX3i Output 120/240 Vac 2 A 8-point IC694MDL330
Series 90-30 Output 120 Vac 0.5A 16-point IC693MDL340
RX3i Output 120 Vac 0.5 A 16-point IC694MDL340
Series 90-30 Output 120/240 Vac 2A 5-point Isolated IC693MDL390
RX3i Output 120/240 Vac 2 A 5-point Isolated IC694MDL390
Series 90-30 Input 125Vdc 8-point Pos/Neg Logic IC693MDL632
RX3i Input 125Vdc 8-point Pos/Neg Logic IC694MDL632
Series 90-30 Input 5/12Vdc (TTL) 32-point Pos/Neg IC693MDL654
RX3i Input 5/12Vdc (TTL) 32-point Pos/Neg IC694MDL654
Series 90-30 Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 8-point Positive Logic IC693MDL732
RX3i Output 12/24Vdc 0.5 A 8-point Positive Logic IC694MDL732
Series 90-30 Output 12/24Vdc 0.5A 8-point Negative Logic IC693MDL733
Series 90-30 Output 125Vdc 1A 6-point Isolated Pos/Neg IC693MDL734
RX3i Output 125Vdc 1 A 6 Point Isolated Pos/Neg IC694MDL734
Series 90-30 Output 5/24Vdc (TTL) 0.5A 32-point Negative Logic IC693MDL752
RX3i Output 5/24Vdc (TTL) 0.5 A 32-point Negative Logic IC694MDL752

Series 90-30 Solenoid Out 11-point/24Vdc Out 5-point Positive Logic IC693MDL760
Series 90-30 Output Relay 4A 8-point Isolated IC693MDL930
RX3i Output Relay N.O. 4 A 8-point Isolated IC694MDL930
Series 90-30 Mixed I/O 8-point 24Vdc In / 8-point Relay Out IC693MDR390
RX3i Mixed I/O 24Vdc Input (8-point) N.O. Relay Output (8-point) IC694MDR390
RX3i Redundancy Memory Xchange Module, Multi-mode fiber IC695RMX128
RX3i Redundancy Memory Xchange Module, Single-mode fiber IC695RMX228
17.2.3.1.9 Requirements for Installation in a Metal Enclosure

▪ Backplanes must be mounted in a metal enclosure with a metal-on-metal connection around the
door or the equivalent. All surfaces of the enclosure must be adequately grounded to adjacent
surfaces to provide electrical conductivity.
▪ Wiring external to the enclosure must be routed in metal conduit or the equivalent. Using shielded
cables and power line filtering, as detailed in the section, Shielded Cable Alternative to Conduit, is
equivalent to using metal conduit.
▪ The conduit must be mounted to the enclosure using standard procedures and hardware to ensure
electrical conductivity between the enclosure and conduit. The termination for the shielded cable
alternative to conduit is detailed in the section, Shielded Cable Alternative to Conduit.
Shielded Cable Alternative to Conduit

This section describes the installation requirements for using shielded cable as an alternative to metal
conduit for meeting radiated emissions requirements (EN 55011, 47CFR15, and such). The following
practices could be used in place of conduit for systems or cables that require conduit or the equivalent.
17.2.3.1.10 Communication Cables

All communication lines should be double-shielded. The outside braided shield (85% coverage) must be
terminated at the entrance to the enclosure and not continue within the enclosure. The inside shield should
be left intact since it shields the communication line from noise within the enclosure and is terminated to the
connector shell. The RX3i communication port connector shells are directly tied to frame ground. To prevent
ground loop currents, one cable end of the inside shield should be capacitively-coupled to its shell. The
outside shield is classified as an RF shield and should be insulated from the inside shield.

An alternative to double-shielded cable for Genius bus communications is Eupen* CMS cable, equivalent
Genius cables with an RF-absorptive material outer coating. The shield should be terminated per standard
Genius wiring guidelines.
*Telephone: 32 87 55 47 71 (Europe), 908-919-1100 (U.S.A.)
17.2.3.1.11 I/O Cables

All I/O lines leaving the enclosure must have at least 85% braided shield coverage terminated at the entrance
to the enclosure. This 85% RF shield should not continue into the enclosure. Eighty-five percent braided
shield is a standard cable available with various wire sizes and quantities from many cable manufacturers.
17.2.3.1.12 Analog/High-Speed Cables

Analog or high-speed lines, which require shielded cable for immunity, should be double-shielded. The
outside braided shield should be terminated at the entrance to the enclosure and not continue within the
enclosure. The inside shield should be terminated per standard installation instructions. The outside shield is
classified as an RF shield and should be insulated from the inside shield.
17.2.3.1.13 Power Input to Enclosure (for IC694 Power Supplies)

An alternative to shielded input cables is to use RF filters to minimize the noise coupled back onto the power
supply inputs. If RF filters are used at the point of enclosure entry, unshielded wires may be used inside and
outside the enclosure.
AC Power Input RF Filter Requirements

 Type: Common mode/Differential mode line filter
 Effective range: between 30–300 MHz
 Leakage current: <0.8 mA
 Insertion loss >30 decibels at 30 MHz, >20 decibels at 100 MHz,
>15 decibels at 300 MHz
DC Power Input RF Filter Requirements

 Type: Feed-through, π type EMI ceramic filter
 Capacitance: 1500 pF (minimum)
 WVDC: 100 V
 Current rating: As needed for application
 Insertion Loss: >50 decibels at 100 MHz
17.2.3.1.14 Shield Termination

Termination of RF shields is extremely important in the reduction of RF emissions. The RF shields should be
terminated at the entrance to the enclosure with a 360 degree contact between the shield and the enclosure
wall.

Compression Connectors
Compression connectors are standard hardware available for the termination of conduit. The diameter of the
connectors is not of significant importance other than to make sure the wires can actually fit through them.
The compression connector provides a metal ring for shield termination and compression.
Nut Unshielded I/O Enclosure
Connector
PVC Jacket Shield Metal

Ring
Figure 451: Unshielded I/O Cable, Single Shield (Side View)
Nut Metal Ring

Enclosure
Connector
RF Shield Shielded
Cables
Figure 452: Multiple Communication/High-Speed Cables, Single RF Shield (Side View)
17.2.3.1.15 Specialty Shielded Cable Vendors

Eupen specializes in RF-absorptive material outer coating cables (CMS cables). Ask for equivalent Genius
cables.
Glenair, Inc. specializes in convoluted tubing (Series 72 and 74) and in flexible metal-core conduit (Series 75).
They also carry various kinds of shield termination connectors.
Zippertubing Co. specializes in after installation zip-on shielding where different types of shielding can be
selected. Recommended types of shielding are SHN-3, SH1, and SH3 to provide 85% coverage.

Safety-Related Guidelines for Installation in the

European Union
This section provides safety-related guidelines specifically for control system products to be installed in the
European Union. It is assumed that personnel who install, operate, and maintain automation systems that
include GE products are trained and qualified to perform those functions
1. General:
GE product manuals provide information required for the intended use of these products. The
product manuals are written for technically qualified personnel such as engineers, programmers, or
maintenance specialists who have been specifically trained and are experienced in the field of
automation control. Such personnel must possess the knowledge to correctly interpret and apply
the safety guidelines provided in the product manuals. If you require further information or face
special problems that are not covered in sufficient detail in the product manuals, please contact
your local sales or service office, or authorized distributor.
2. Qualified Personnel:
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to specify, apply, install, operate, maintain, or perform
any other function related to the products described in the product manuals. Examples of such
qualified persons are defined as follows:
o System application and design engineers who are familiar with the safety concepts of
automation equipment.
o Installation, startup, and service personnel who are trained to install and maintain such
automation equipment.
o Operating personnel trained to operate automation equipment and trained on the specific
safety issues and requirements of the particular equipment.
3. Proper Usage:
The equipment/system or the system components may be used only as described in the product
manuals. Our control system products have been developed, manufactured, tested, and the
documentation compiled in keeping with the relevant safety standards. Handling instructions and
safety guidelines described for planning, installation, proper operation and maintenance must be
followed to ensure safe application and use of the products.
4. Guidelines for the Application Planning and Installation of the Product:
RX3i control system products generally form part of larger systems or installations. These guidelines
are intended to help integrate RX3i control system products into systems and installations without
constituting a source of danger. The following precautions must be followed:
o Compliance with EN292-1 and EN292-2 (Safety of Machinery) as well as EN60204/IEC204

(Electrical Equipment of Industrial Machines) must be observed during the design phase.

o Opening the housing or the protective cover exposes certain parts of this
equipment/system, which could have a dangerously high voltage level.
o Only qualified personnel should be allowed access to this equipment/system. These persons
must be knowledgeable of potential sources of danger and maintenance measures as
described in the product manuals.
o Personnel must strictly adhere to applicable safety and accident prevention rules and
regulations.
o A suitable isolating switch or fuses must be provided in the building wiring system. The
equipment must be connected to a protective ground (PE) conductor.
o For equipment or systems with a fixed connecting cable but no isolating switch that
disconnects all poles, a power socket with the grounding pin must be installed.
o Before switching on the equipment, make sure that the voltage range setting on the
equipment corresponds to the local power system voltage.
o In the case of equipment operating on 24Vdc, make sure that proper electrical isolation is
provided between the main supply and the 24Vdc supply. Use only power supplies that
meet EN60204 (IEC204) requirements.
o The RX3i control system AC power supply must be supplied through an IEC-rated isolation
transformer.
o Power supply to the RX3i control system must be controlled not to exceed over-voltage
category II per EN60204-1 (IEC204).
o Do not exceed the input specifications of the power supply. Otherwise, functional failures or
dangerous conditions can occur in the electronic modules/equipment.
o Emergency shutoff devices in accordance with EN60204/IEC204 must be effective in all
operating modes of the automation equipment. Resetting the emergency off device must
not result in any uncontrolled or undefined restart of the equipment.
o Automation equipment and its operating elements must be installed in such a manner as to
prevent unintentional operation.
o Suitable measurements must be taken to ensure that operating sequences interrupted by a
voltage dip or power supply failure resume proper operation when the power supply is
restored. Care must be taken to ensure that dangerous operating conditions do not occur
even momentarily. If necessary, the equipment must be forced into the emergency off state.
o Negative Logic Input and Output Modules cannot be used.
o Cable shielding and grounding are the responsibility of the machine builder. Applicable
installation instructions and guidelines must be followed.
o Install the power supply and signal cables in such a manner as to prevent inductive and
capacitive interference voltages from affecting automation functions.
o When interfacing the inputs and outputs of the automation equipment, measures must be
taken to prevent an undefined state from being assumed in the case of a wire break in the
signal lines.

Calculating Heat Dissipation
This section explains how to find the total heat dissipation of PACSystems RX3i equipment.
PACSystems RX3i equipment must be mounted in a protective enclosure. The enclosure must be able to
properly dissipate the heat produced by all the devices mounted inside. This includes the modules, discrete
output devices, and discrete input devices. Each device manufacturer publishes these values. If an exact
value is not available for a device, you can make a close estimate by obtaining the value for a similar device.
B-1 Module Heat Dissipation

For each backplane and module except power supplies (discussed separately), look up the power in Watts
from the table of Module Load Requirements, Section 4.2. If the module uses more than one voltage type (for
example, 3.3V and 24V relay), find its total power requirement. Then, add together the heat dissipation
values for all the modules in the enclosure.
Example:
The Load Requirements table shows that the 12-Slot Universal Backplane IC695CHS012 draws:
1.98 Watts from the 3.3Vdc supply
+1.20 Watts from the 5Vdc supply
=3.18 Watts total heat dissipation of backplane IC695CHS012
B-2 Power Supply Heat Dissipation

In general, power supplies are 66% efficient. The power supply dissipates approximately 1 Watt of power in
the form of heat for every 2 Watts of power it delivers to the PLC.
After finding the total power requirement for all of the modules in the backplane served by a power supply
above, divide the total by 2 to find the power supply dissipation value. Do not use the rating of the power
supply (such as 30 W) for this calculation because the application may not use the full capacity of the power
supply.
If the +24Vdc output on an Expansion Power Supply is being used, calculate the power drawn, divide the
value by 2, and add it to the total for the power supply.
Calculating Heat Dissipation 867

17.2.3.1.16 Heat Dissipation for Discrete Output Modules

In addition to the module power calculations done above, discrete solid-state output modules require a
calculation for their output circuits, which are powered from another supply. (This calculation is not required
for Relay Output modules.) To calculate output circuit power dissipation:
▪ In the specification table of the module, find the value for Output Voltage Drop.
▪ Using the manufacturer’s documentation or other reference information, find the required
current value for each device (such as a relay, pilot light, solenoid, etc.) connected to an
output point on the module. Estimate the percent of “on-time” of each device based on its
intended use in the application.
▪ Multiply the Output Voltage Drop times the current value times the estimated percent of on-
time to arrive at average power dissipation for that output.
Repeat these steps for all outputs on the module, and then for all discrete output modules in the backplane.
Example:
The specifications table for the IC694MDL340 16-Point Discrete 120 Vac Output Module lists its Output
Voltage Drop as: 1.5 V maximum
Use that value for all of the calculations for the module.
In this example, two output points drive solenoids that control the advance and retract travel of a hydraulic
cylinder. The solenoid manufacturer’s datasheet shows that each solenoid draws 1.0 Amp. The cylinder
advances and retracts once every 60 seconds that the machine is cycling. It takes 6 seconds to advance and 6
seconds to retract. Because the cylinder takes equal time to advance and retract, both solenoids are on for
equal lengths of time: 6 seconds out of every 60 seconds, which is 10% of the time. Therefore, since both
solenoids have equal current draws and on-times, one calculation can be applied to both outputs.
Use the formula Average Power Dissipation = Voltage Drop x Current Draw (in Amps) x Percent (expressed as
a decimal) of on-time:
1.5 x 1.0 x 0.10 = 0.15 W per solenoid
Then multiply this result by 2 for two identical solenoids:
0.15 W x 2 Solenoids = 0.30 W total for the two solenoids
Also in this example, the other 14 output points on the 16-point module operate pilot lights on an operator’s
panel. Each pilot light requires .05 Amps of current. Seven of the pilot lights are on 100% of the time and
seven are on an estimated 40%.
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly 868

For the seven lights that are on 100% of the time:
1.5 x .05 x 1.00 = 0.075 W per light
Then multiply this value by 7:
0.075 W x 7 lights = 0.525 W total dissipation for the first 7 lights
For the 7 lights that are on 40% of the time:
1.5 x .05 x 0.40 = .03 W per light
Then multiply this value by 7:
0.03 W x 7 lights = 0.21 W total dissipation for the other 7 lights
Adding up the individual calculations, we get:
0.30 + 0.525 + 0.21 = 1.035 W for the total output calculation for the module.

17.2.3.1.17 Heat Dissipation for Discrete Input Modules

In addition to the module power calculations described above, a discrete input module requires another
calculation for its input circuits, because the power dissipated by the input circuits comes from a separate
power source. This calculation assumes that all input circuit power delivered to these modules is eventually
dissipated as heat. The procedure is:
▪ In the specification table of the module, find the value for Input Current.
▪ For DC input modules, multiply the input voltage times the current value times the
estimated percent of on-time to arrive at average power dissipation for that DC input.
▪ For AC input modules only, multiply the input voltage times the current value times the
estimated percent of on-time times 0.10 to arrive at average power dissipation for that AC
input.
Repeat these steps for all inputs on the module, and then for all discrete input modules in the backplane.
Example:
The Specifications table for the IC693MDL240 16-Point Discrete 120 Vac Input Module gives the following
information:
Input Current: 12 mA (typical) at rated voltage
Use this value for all of the input calculations for this module.
In this example, eight of the input points are used for switches that, for normal operation, stay on (closed)
100% of the time. These include the Emergency Stop, Over Temperature, Lube Pressure OK, and similar
switches.
Use the formula Average Power Dissipation = Input Voltage x Input Current (in Amps) x Percent (expressed as
a decimal) of on-time:
120 x .012 x 1.0 = 1.44 W per input
Then multiply this result by 8:
1.44 W x 8 inputs = 11.52 W total for the 8 inputs
Also in this example, two input points on this 16-point module are for the Control On and Pump Start
pushbuttons. Under normal conditions, these pushbuttons are only pressed once per day for about one
second – just long enough to start up the control and pump. Therefore, their effect on our power calculation
is negligible:
0.0 Watts total for two inputs
For the remaining six inputs of the 16-point module, it is estimated that they will be on for an average of 20%
of the time. So, the following calculation is made for these 6 inputs:

Using the formula of Average Power Dissipation = Input Voltage x Input Current (in Amps) x Percent
(expressed as a decimal) of on-time:
120 x .012 x 0.20 = 0.288 W per input
Then multiply this result by 6:
0.288 W x 6 inputs = 1.728 W total for the 6 inputs
Finally, add up the individual calculations:
11.52 + 0.0 + 1.728 = 13.248 W for the total input calculation for the module.
17.2.3.1.18 Total Heat Dissipation

After the individual power dissipations have been calculated, add them together to obtain total PLC heat
dissipation. It is usually not necessary to include analog modules because their power dissipation values are
negligible when compared with the total.

Cable Shield Clamping

Assembly
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly, IC697ACC736, contains the parts necessary for providing higher EMC
immunity for shielded cables in severe industrial environments. Shield grounding is provided by the ground
plate and cable clamps in the kit.
The Cable Shield Clamping Assembly package includes:
One ground plate

Six cable clamps
Four #6 self-tapping screws
483 mm
(19.00 inches)
465 mm
(18.31 inches)
6.35 mm (0.25 inch) dia. (Qty.2)
Front View with Mounting Dimensions
75 mm
(2.95 inches)
Cable
108mm
(4.25 inches) Clamp
Mounting
Surface
(Six cable clamps included with assembly.)
Side View with * Additional cable clamps available (12 per
Spacing Requirements package), catalog number IC697ACC737.
Figure 453: Cable Clamp IC697ACC736 Diagrams

C-1 Installing the Cable Clamp Assembly

The ground plate should be mounted near the baseplate. The cable clamp provides mechanical relief as well
as electrical grounding. The cable clamp attaches to the ground plate by sliding it into two adjacent slots at
the selected cable location. The cable is inserted between the ground plate and the cable clamp after
removing the required section of the outer cover of the cable. Tighten the cable clamp by turning the
thumbscrew clockwise. Do not over-tighten the thumbscrew: hand-tighten or tighten lightly with a tool.
If you are installing the ground plate on a painted surface, the paint must be removed where the ground
plate is to be mounted to ensure a good ground connection between the plate and mounting surface.
17.2.3.1.19 Cable Diameter

The largest diameter cable that can be used with the cable clamp is 0.51 inches (13mm). The smallest cable
diameter that can be used with the clamp is 0.24 inches (6mm). Multiple cables can be placed in the clamp if
the cable diameter is smaller than the minimum.
.51"
Ground 13mm
Plate
.67"
17mm
Cable
Maximum
Diameter
.51" (13mm)
Minimum
Diameter Cable
.24" (6mm) Clamp
Figure 454: Cable Diameter Maximum with Cable Clamp
17.2.3.1.20 Removing the Insulating Cover

The insulating cover on the shielded cable must be removed to allow maximum contact between the cable
shield and the cable clamp as displayed in Figure 455.
Cable
Clamp
Foot
1.58"
40mm
Shield
Figure 455: Insulation Cover Removal
+
24VDC
OUTPUT
Figure 456: Typical Cable Clamp Assembly installation with Expansion Backplane

Contact Information:
North & South America 30/36 Allee du Plateau Zelezniciarska 13 471 Mountain Highway
18703 GH Circle 93250 Villemomble 811 04 Bratislava Bayswater, Victoria 3153
PO Box 508 France Slovakia Australia
Waller, Texas 77484 T +331 48 122610 T +42 1252442071 T +61 3 9721 0200
USA
T +1 281 727 5300 6 Bracken Hill Blegistrasse 21, 9/F Gateway Building
South West Industrial Estate P.O. Box 1046 No.10 Ya Bao Road
2500 Park Avenue West Peterlee, Co Durham CH 6341 Baar Chaoyang District
Mansfield, Ohio 44906 SR82LS, United Kingdom Switzerland Beijing, P.R. China
USA T +44 191 518 0020 T +41 (41) 7686215 T +86 10 5821 1188
T +1 419 529 4311
3 Furze Court 2-4, Gara Herastrau St. No 15 Xing Wang Road
9009 King Palm Drive 114 Wickham Road District 2, Nova Building, Wuqing Development Area
Tampa , Florida 33619 Fareham, Hampshire 5th floor 020334 Bucharest Tianjin 301700
USA PO167SH ,United Kingdom Romania P.R. China
T +1 813 630 2255 T +44 132 984 8900 T +40 212062506 T +86 22 8212 3300
4112-91A Street Via Montello 71/73 Icerenkoy MAh. Topcu Ibrahim Lot 13112, Mukim Labu,
Edmonton, Alberta T6E5V2 20038 Seregno Sk. Kawasan Perindustrian Nilai
Canada Italy No:13 K:4 Icerenkoy 71807 Nilai, Negeri Sembilan
T +1 780 450 3600 T +39 0362 2285207 Istanbul, Turkey Malaysia
T +90 2165739848408 T +60 6 799 2323
Av. Hollingsworth,325 Selska cesta 93
Iporanga 10000 Zagreb Middle East & Africa Delphi B Wing, 601 & 602
Sorocaba, SP 18087-105 Croatia 2 Monteer Road, Isando 6th Floor, Central Avenue
Brazil T +385 913654292 Kempton Park, 1600 Powai, Mumbai 400076
T +55 15 3238 3788 South Africa India
ul. Konstruktorska str 11A T +27 11 974 3336 T +91 22 6662 0566
Europe 02-673 Warsaw
Asveldweg 11 Poland PO Box 17033 NOF Shinagawa Konan Building
7556 BT Hengelo(O) T +48 22 4589237 Jebel Ali Free Zone 1-2-5, Higashi-shinagawa
The Netherlands Dubai, Shinagawa-Ku, Tokyo
T +31 74 256 1010 Hungári körút 166-168 United Arab Emirates 140-0002 Japan
H-1146 Budapest T +971 4883 5235 T +81 3 5769 6873
Siemensring 112 Hungary
D-47877 Willich T +36 14624034 Asia Pacific
Germany 19, Kian Teck Crescent,
T +49 2154 499 660 Hajkova 2747/22 Singapore 628885
130 00 Praha 3 T +65 6501 4600
Czech Republic
T +42 2 81002666
Please visit our website for up to date product data.

www.Emerson.com
All Rights Reserved.

We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of the products mentioned in this manual at any time without
notice. Emerson does not assume responsibility for the selection, use or maintenance of any product. Responsibility for proper selection,
use and maintenance of any Emerson product remains solely with the purchaser.
©2019 Emerson Electric Co.

GFK-2314T RX3i SystemManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GFK-2314T RX3i SystemManual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GFK-2314T RX3i SystemManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

PACSystems* RX3i System Manual

* Indicates a trademark of Emerson Automation Solutions and/or its subsidiaries.

©Copyright 2019 Emerson Automation Solutions Company

EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST & AFRICA

Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................................... i

Section 1: Introduction .................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 Revisions of this Manual .................................................................................................. 1

1.2 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4

1.3 Modules for RX3i Systems ............................................................................................... 6

1.4 Backplanes and Power Supplies ..................................................................................... 12

1.5 Expansion Systems ....................................................................................................... 16

Section 2: Installation .................................................................................................................. 19

2.1 Pre-Installation Check ................................................................................................... 19

2.2 System Layout Guidelines ............................................................................................. 20

2.3 Enclosures ................................................................................................................... 21

2.4 System Wiring.............................................................................................................. 24

2.5 System Grounding........................................................................................................ 26

2.6 System Installation ....................................................................................................... 29

Section 3: Backplanes .................................................................................................................. 71

3.1 RX3i Universal Backplanes: IC695CHS007, IC695CHS012, IC695CHS016 ......................... 71

3.2 Serial Expansion Backplanes: IC694CHS392, IC694CHS398 ............................................. 80

Section 4: Power Supplies ............................................................................................................ 83

4.1 Power Supply Overview ................................................................................................ 83

4.2 Module Load Requirements .......................................................................................... 86

4.4 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSA040 ........................................... 99

4.4.3 Field Wiring: PSA040 ............................................................................................................. 103

4.6 Power Supply, 24Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSD040 .................................................................. 111

4.7 Multi-Purpose Power Supply, 24Vdc, 40 W: IC695PSD140 ............................................ 117

4.8 Power Supply, 120/240 Vac or 125Vdc: IC694PWR321 ................................................. 123

4.10 Power Supply, 24Vdc High-Capacity: IC694PWR331 ..................................................... 130

Section 5: Serial Bus Transmitter & Expansion Cables ................................................................... 135

5.1 Serial Bus Transmitter Module: IC695LRE001 ............................................................... 136

5.3 Specifications: IC693CBL300, 301, 302, 312, 313 ......................................................... 140

Section 6: Discrete Input Modules............................................................................................... 145

6.3 Input Module, 120 Vac, 16-Point: IC694MDL240 .......................................................... 151

6.6 Input Module, 120 Vac, 32-Point: IC694MDL260 .......................................................... 162

6.7 Input Module, 125Vdc Pos/Neg, 8-Point IC694MDL632 ................................................ 167

6.8 Input Module, 24Vdc Pos/Neg, 8-Point IC694MDL634 .................................................. 171

6.9 Input Module, 125Vdc Pos/Neg, 16-Point IC694MDL635 .............................................. 174

6.10 Input Module, 24Vdc Pos/Neg, 16-Point IC694MDL645 ................................................ 178

6.14 Input Module, 24Vdc 32-Point Grouped IC694MDL660 ................................................ 192

6.15 Input Module, 24 Vdc 16-Point Grouped IC695MDL664 ................................................ 196

6.16 Input Simulator, 8-/16-Point IC694ACC300 .................................................................. 208

Section 7: Discrete Output Modules............................................................................................ 209

7.2 Output Module, 120/240 Vac, 2 Amp, 8-Point: IC694MDL330....................................... 214

7.4 Output Module, 120/240 Vac 16-Point Isolated: IC694MDL350..................................... 222

7.14.9 ESCP Status Data: MDL754 .................................................................................................... 260

Section 8: Discrete Mixed I/O Modules ........................................................................................ 301

8.1 High-Speed Counter Module: IC694APU300 ................................................................ 302

8.1.4 Field Wiring: APU300............................................................................................................. 307

8.2 Serial I/O Processor Module: IC694APU305 .................................................................. 312

8.3 High-Speed Counter Modules: IC695HSC304, IC695HSC308 ........................................ 327

8.4 Mixed I/O Module: IC694MDR390 ............................................................................... 335

Section 9: Analog Input Modules ................................................................................................ 339

9.2 Note on Using Interrupts............................................................................................. 353

9.5 Analog Input Module 16-/8-Channel Voltage: IC694ALG222 ......................................... 367

9.6 Analog Input Module 16-Channel Current: IC694ALG223.............................................. 375

9.8 Example: .................................................................................................................... 391

9.11 Example 2 .................................................................................................................. 416